Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
5335 8th St (8)
CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Volume I of I PROJECT CONSULTANTS: CIVIL ENGINEERS STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS KIMLEY HORN WEBER & TINNEN TAMPA, FLORIDA ST. PETERSBURG, FLORIDA MECHANICAL/PLUMBING/FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERS CONSULTING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. TAMPA, FLORIDA HARVARD *JOLLY RHIF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS MPS ENGINEERING, INC. OLDSMAR, FLORIDA DESIGN OFFICE: 2714 Dr. Martin Luther King Jr. Street North, St. Petersburg, Florida 33704 AAC00019 Date of Issue: July 24, 2017 HJ Comm. Number: 16054.00 1 94 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 00 00 07 — PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE SEALS AND SIGNATURES To the best of my knowledge, these plans and specifications are complete and comply with the applicable minimum Building Codes and the applicable Fire -Safety Standards. 1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD ARCHITECT Philip L. Trezza, Jr., AIA License No. AR00017760 (FL) Harvard Jolly Architecture 2714 Dr. Martin Luther King Jr. Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33704 Company License No. 603450 Divisions 01 — 14 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT Charles J. Clees, RLA, ASLA License No. LA0000599 (FL) Harvard Jolly Architecture 2714 Dr. Martin Luther King Jr. Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33704 Company License No. 603450 Division 32 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER William F. Weber III, P.E. License No. 32713 (FL) Weber & Tinnen 5329 Central Avenue St. Petersburg, Florida 33710 Company License No. 3627 Divisions 3, 4 and 5 0F FL AR 7760 41j FRED P� k 00, u.'�C&A 7•Z(' 17 \VP �CENSF,•: 1 ' AL oN rriui 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE 1411I111Isyml■ CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL MECHANICAL ENGINEER John W. Wells III, P.E. License No. 49347 (FL) Consulting Engineering Associates, Inc. 8365 Gunn Highway Tampa, Florida 33626 Company License No. EB3962 Division 23 PLUMBING / FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER John W. Wells III, P.E. License No. 49347 (FL) Consulting Engineering Associates, Inc. 8365 Gunn Highway Tampa, Florida 33626 Company License No. EB3962 Divisions 21 — 22 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Scott J. Roper, P. E. License No. 74787 (FL) MPS Engineering, Inc. 240 Pine Avenue North Oldsmar, Florida 34677 Company License No. 3967 Divisions 26, 27 and 28 Civil ENGINEER Dawn M. Dodge, P.E. License No. 76221 (FL) Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. 655 North Franklin Street Suite 150 Tampa, Florida 33602 Company License No. 00000696 Division 32 END OF SECTION 00 00 07 C 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE 000007-2 HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Hydraulic Design Information, Remote Area 1, Pages 1 through 14 Hydraulic Design Information, Remote Area 2, Pages 15 through 26 Hydraulic Design Information, Remote Area 3, Pages 27 through 38 Hydraulic Design Information, Remote Area 2, Pages 39 through 48 John W. Wells, III, PE FL49347 Oonsulting Engineering Associates, Inc. CA3962 8365 Gunn Highway Tampa, FL 33626 Project Name: Zephyrhills City Hall Project Address: 5335 8th Street, Zephyrhills, FL 33542 CODE APPLICABLE TO THESE CALCULATIONS: Florida Fire Prevention Code, Fifth Edition Calculations produced using SprinkCAD CEA HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 HYDRAULIC DESIGN INFORMATION SHEET Job Name: City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Location: 5335 8th Street Zephyrhills, FL. 33542 Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Remote Area Number: 1 - City Council Chambers Engineers: Consulting Engineers Associates, Inc. EB 3962 8362 Gunn Highway Tampa, FL. 33626 Telephone: (813)448-0225 Engineer of Record: John W. Wells III, P.E. FL. 49347 Calculated By: SprinkCAD www.sprinkcad.com 451 N. Cannon Ave. Lansdale, PA 19446 Construction: Type II Occupancy: Office Reviewing Authorities: City of Zephyrhills SYSTEM DESIGN Code:NFPA 13 Hazard:Light System Type:WET Area of Sprinkler Oper. 1505 sq ft1 Sprinkler or Nozzle Density (gpm/sq ft) 0.100 1 Make: Tyco Area per Sprinkler 168.0 sq ftl Model: TY-FRB Hose Allowance Inside 0 gpm I K-Factor: 5.60 Hose Allowance Outside 100 gpm I Temperature Rating: 155 CALCULATION SUMMARY (17) Flowing Outlets gpm Required: 417.9 psi Required: 41.4 @ Source WATER SUPPLY Water Flow Test 1 Pump Data I Date of Test 3-28-17 1 Rated Capacity 0 gpm I Static Pressure 62.0 psi I Rated Pressure 0.0 psi Residual Pres 40.0 psi I Elevation 0 I At a Flow of 1510 gpm I Make: I Elevation 0" I Model: I Location: #8051 - 38410 6th Avenue Source of Information: City of Zephyrhills Utilities Department SYSTEM VOLUME 465 Gallons Notes: City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION DETAILS HYDRAULIC FLOW LOSS QTY DESCRIPTION LENGTH C ID gpm psi TOTALS Hydr Ref W Required at Hyd Area 1 318 26.1 psi 1 Pipe 4" 10x21 Allied Domestic 12' 120 4.260 318 0.3 1 4" Grvd Check Valve Tyco CV-1FR CHART LOSS 318 0.7 1 4" Grvd Butterfly Valve Tyco BFV- 5' 120 4.026 318 0.1 Elevation Change 12'0" 5.2 Hydr Ref R1 Required at Base of RZR 318 32.5 psi 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 40' 140 6.338 318 0.1 2 6" MJ 90 Ell DI 28' 120 6.065 318 0.1 Fixed Flow Outside Hose 100 gpm 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 15' 140 6.338 418 0.1 1 6" Fingd Back Flow Valve Misc w/O CHART LOSS 418 8.0 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 25' 140 6.338 418 0.1 1 6" MJ 90 Ell DI 14' 120 6.065 418 0.1 2 6" MJ Tee DI 60' 120 6.065 418 0.4 Hydr Ref R2 Required at Source 418 41.4 psi Water Source 62.0 psi static, 40.0 psi residual @ 1510 gpm 418 gpm 60.0 psi SAFETY PRESSURE 18.5 psi Available Pressure of 60.0 psi Exceeds Required Pressure of 41.4 psi This is a safety margin of 18.5 psi or 31 % of Supply Maximum Water Velocity is 14.6 fps a City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Page 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FITTING NAME TABLE ABBREV. -------------------------------------- NAME -------------------------------------- C Coupling E 90' Standard Elbow F 45' Elbow S Straight Flow Thru Tee T 90' Flow Thru Tee V Valve LEGEND HYD REF Hydraulic reference. Refer to accompanying flow diagram. _ K FACTOR Flow factor for open head or path where Flow (gpm) = K x -\/P Qa Flow added or subtracted Qt Total flow DIA Actual internal diameter of pipe C Hazen Williams pipe roughness factor Pf/ft Friction loss per foot of pipe PIPE Length of pipe FTNG'S Number of fittings. See table above. TOTAL Total length (PIPE + FTNG'S) Pt Total pressure (psi) at fitting Pe Pressure due to change in elevation where Pe = 0.433 x change in elevation Pf Friction loss (psi) to fitting where Pf = 1 x 4.52 x (Q/C)^1.85 / ID^4.87 Pv Velocity pressure (psi) where Pv = 0.001123 x Q^2/ID^4 Pn Normal pressure (psi), where Pn = Pt - Pv NOTES: - Pressures are balanced to 0.01 psi. Pressures are listed to 0.1 psi. Addition may vary by 0.1 psi due to accumulation of round off. - Calculations conform to NFPA 13. - Velocity Pressures are not considered in these Calculations City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Page 4 NODE ELEVATION SPRINKLER PRESSURE ACTUAL MINIMUM ACTUAL NUMBER K-FACTOR FLOW FLOW DENSITY (FT) (GPM/(PSI^14)) (PSI) (GPM) (GPM) (GPM/SQ.FT) 1 14.00 8.3 1S 10.00 5.60 9.4 17.2 14.8 0.20 2 14.00 9.1 2S 10.00 5.60 10.2 17.9 14.8 0.21 3 14.00 10.6 3S 10.00 5.60 11.6 19.1 14.8 0.22 4 14.00 7.8 4S 10.00 5.60 9.0 16.8 16.8 0.10 5 14.00 8.8 5S 10.00 5.60 9.6 17.4 16.8 0.10 6 14.00 11.2 6S 10.00 5.60 12.2 19.6 16.8 0.12 7 14.00 7.9 7S 10.00 5.60 9.1 16.9 16.8 0.10 8 14.00 8.9 8S 10.00 5.60 9.7 17.4 16.8 0.10 9 14.00 11.4 9S 10.00 5.60 12.3 19.7 16.8 0.12 10 14.00 8.1 i0s 10.00 5.60 9.3 17.1 16.8 0.10 11 14.00 9.1 11S 10.00 5.60 9.9 17.6 16.8 0.10 12 14.00 11.6 12S 10.00 5.60 12.6 19.9 16.8 0.12 13 14.00 12.9 13S 10.00 5.60 13.8 20.8 14.8 0.24 14 14.00 12.9 14S 10.00 5.60 13.8 20.8 14.8 0.24 15 14.00 13.1 15S 10.00 5.60 14.0 20.9 16.8 0.12 16 14.00 10.6 16S 10.00 5.60 11.7 19.1 14.8 0.15 17 14.00 11.8 17S 10.00 5.60 12.4 19.7 14.8 0.16 120 14.00 9.7 Al 14.00 12.8 A2 14.00 12.8 A3 14.00 12.9 A4 14.00 13.2 A5 14.00 13.8 A6 14.00 13.9 A7 14.00 14.6 A8 27.00 13.7 A9 27.00 13.9 A10 27.00 14.2 All 12.00 26.1 B1 14.00 13.8 B2 14.00 13.8 Dl 14.00 13.4 W 12.00 26.1 9' City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall --------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------- NODE ELEVATION SPRINKLER PRESSURE NUMBER K-FACTOR (FT) (GPM/(PSI^;,12)) (PSI) Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Page 5 ACTUAL MINIMUM ACTUAL FLOW FLOW DENSITY (GPM) ------------------------------- ------------------------------- (GPM) (GPM/SQ.FT) Max velocity of 14.55 occurs in the pipe from A7 TO 17 Nodes with "S" indicate a node at the top of a sprig or bottom of drop pendent. The node without an "S" is on the branch. 6 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 1 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 4 TO W (PRIMARY PATH) 16.80 1.049 lE 4.00 9.0 9.0 K = 5.60 4S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 16.80 0.094 6.00 0.6 9.0 Vel = 6.30 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 10.00 7.8 7.8 EqK = 6.00 4 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 16.80 0.094 10.00 0.9 7.8 Vel = 6.30 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.36 1.049 1T 6.48 8.8 8.8 EqK = 5.86 5 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 34.16 0.350 11.48 4.0 8.8 Vel = 12.80 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73.78 3.260 12.00 12.8 12.8 A2 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 4 AND 8 107.94 0.012 12.00 0.1 12.8 Vel = 4.19 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53.99 3.260 12.00 12.9 12.9 A3 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 2 AND 9 161.94 0.025 12.00 0.3 12.9 Vel = 6.29 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54.55 3.260 5.08 13.2 13.2 A4 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 3 AND 10 216.49 0.043 5.08 0.2 13.2 Vel = 8.40 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 1T 0.33 13.4 13.4 D1 C=120 26.33 0.0 0.0 216.49 0.012 26.67 0.3 13.4 Vel = 4.92 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41.67 4.260 10.23 13.8 13.8 A5 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 11 258.16 0.016 10.23 0.2 13.8 Vel = 5.87 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.95 4.260 lE 21.46 13.9 13.9 A6 C=120 13.17 0.0 0.0 See PATH 13 279.11 0.019 34.62 0.6 13.9 Vel = 6.34 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38.81 4.260 8E 97.84 14.6 14.6 A7 C=120 105.34 -5.6 0.0 See PATH 7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 317.92 0.024 203.17 4.8 14.6 Vel = 7.23 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 1 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 4 TO W (PRIMARY PATH) 4.260 8.09 13.7 13.7 A8 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 317.92 0.024 8.09 0.2 13.7 Vel = 7.23 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 11.10 13.9 13.9 A9 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 317.92 0.024 11.10 0.3 13.9 Vel = 7.23 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 4E 98.23 14.2 14.2 A10 C=120 3T 131.67 6.5 0.0 317.92 0.024 229.90 5.4 14.2 Vel = 7.23 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 1.01 26.1 26.1 All C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 317.92 0.024 1.01 0.0 26.1 Vel = 7.23 W 317.92 26.1 K = 62.20 -------------=------------------------------------------------------------------ -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.36 1.049 1T 4.00 9.6 9.6 K = 5.60 5S C=120 5.00 -1.7 0.0 17.36 0.100 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9.00 0.9 9.6 Vel = 6.51 5 17.36 PATH 2 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 7 TO A3 mm K = 5.86 16.88 1.049 lE 4.00 9.1 9.1 K = 5.60 7S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 16.88 0.095 6.00 0.6 9.1 Vel = 6.33 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 10.00 7.9 7.9 EqK = 6.00 7 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 16.88 0.095 10.00 1.0 7.9 Vel = 6.33 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.44 1.049 1T 6.48 8.9 8.9 EqK = 5.85 8 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 34.33 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.354 11.48 4.1 8.9 Vel = 12.87 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn A3 34.33 12.9 K = 9.55 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.44 1.049 1T 4.00 9.7 9.7 K = 5.60 8S C=120 5.00 -1.7 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.44 0.101 9.00 0.9 9.7 Vel = 6.54 8 17.44 8.9 K = 5.85 ---------------------------------------- PATH 3 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 10 TO A4 17.06 1.049 1E 4.00 9.3 9.3 K = 5.60 lOS C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 17.06 0.097 6.00 0.6 9.3 Vel = 6.40 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 10.00 8.1 8.1 EqK = 5.98 10 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 17.06 0.097 10.00 1.0 8.1 Vel = 6.40 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.62 1.049 1T 6.48 9.1 9.1 EqK = 5.84 11 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34.69 0.360 11.48 4.1 9.1 Vel = 13.00 A4 34.69 13.2 K = 9.53 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.62 1.049 1T 4.00 9.9 9.9 K = 5.60 11S C=120 5.00 -1.7 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.62 0.103 9.00 0.9 9.9 Vel = 6.61 11 17.62 9.1 K = 5.84 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 4 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 1 TO A2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.19 1.049 lE 4.00 9.4 9.4 K = 5.60 is C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.19 0.098 6.00 0.6 9.4 Vel = 6.45 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) I City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 9 HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 4 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 1 TO A2 CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 lE 12.67 8.3 8.3 EqK = 5.97 1 C=120 2.00 0.0 0.0 17.19 0.098 14.67 1.4 8.3 Vel = 6.45 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.91 1.049 1T 3.27 9.7 9.7 120 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 5 35.10 0.368 8.27 3.0 9.7 Vel = 13.16 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19.11 3.260 6.15 12.8 12.8 Al C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54.21 0.003 6.15 0.0 12.8 Vel = 2.10 A2 54.21 12.8 K = 15.16 PATH 5 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 2 TO 120 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.91 1.049 lE 4.00 10.2 10.2 K = 5.60 2S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 17.91 0.106 6.00 0.6 10.2 Vel = 6.71 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.67 9.1 9.1 EqK = 5.93 2 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.91 0.106 5.67 0.6 9.1 Vel = 6.71 120 17.91 9.7 K = 5.74 PATH 6 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 3 TO Al -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19.11 1.049 lE 4.00 11.6 11.6 K = 5.60 3S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 19.11 0.120 6.00 0.7 11.6 Vel = 7.16 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 lE 10.89 10.6 10.6 EqK = 5.86 3 C=120 1T 7.00 0.0 0.0 19.11 0.120 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.89 2.1 10.6 Vel = 7.16 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn Al 19.11 12.8 K = 5.35 ---------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------- PATH 7 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 16 TO A7 19.13 1.049 lE 4.00 11.7 11.7 K = 5.60 16S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 19.13 0.120 6.00 0.7 11.7 Vel = 7.17 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 9.29 10.6 10.6 EqK = 5.86 16 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 19.13 0.120 9.29 1.1 10.6 Vel = 7.17 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19.69 1.049 1T 1.32 11.8 11.8 EqK = 5.74 17 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38.81 0.444 6.32 2.8 11.8 Vel = 14.55 A7 38.81 14.6 K = 10.17 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19.69 1.049 1T 4.00 12.4 12.4 K = 5.60 17S C=120 5.00 -1.7 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19.69 0.126 9.00 1.1 12.4 Vel = 7.38 17 19.69 11.8 K = 5.74 --------------------------------------- PATH 8 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 6 TO A2 19.57 1.049 lE 4.00 12.2 12.2 K = 5.60 6S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 19.57 0.125 6.00 0.7 12.2 Vel = 7.34 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 7.52 11.2 11.2 EqK = 5.84 6 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 19.57 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.125 12.52 1.6 11.2 Vel = 7.34 A2 19.57 12.8 K = 5.47 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 11 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF licit TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 9 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 9 TO A3 19.67 1.049 lE 4.00 12.3 12.3 K = 5.60 9S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 19.67 0.126 6.00 0.8 12.3 Vel = 7.37 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 7.52 11.4 11.4 EqK = 5.84 9 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 19.67 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.126 12.52 1.6 11.4 Vel = 7.37 A3 19.67 12.9 K = 5.47 PATH 10 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 12 TO A4 19.87 1.049 lE 4.00 12.6 12.6 K = 5.60 12S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 19.87 0.129 6.00 0.8 12.6 Vel = 7.45 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 7.52 11.6 11.6 EqK = 5.83 12 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 19.87 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.129 12.52 1.6 11.6 Vel = 7.45 A4 19.87 13.2 K = 5.46 PATH 11 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 13 TO A5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.83 1.049 lE 4.00 13.8 13.8 K = 5.60 13S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 20.83 0.140 6.00 0.8 13.8 Vel = 7.81 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.75 12.9 12.9 EqK = 5.79 13 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 20.83 0.140 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5.75 0.8 12.9 Vel = 7.81 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 12 HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 11 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 13 TO A5 CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 12.00 13.8 13.8 B1 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 20.83 0.000 12.00 0.0 13.8 Vel = 0.47 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.84 4.260 3.27 13.8 13.8 B2 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 12 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41.67 0.001 3.27 0.0 13.8 Vel = 0.95 A5 41.67 13.8 K = 11.23 PATH 12 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 14 TO B2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.84 1.049 lE 4.00 13.8 13.8 K = 5.60 14S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 20.84 0.140 6.00 0.8 13.8 Vel = 7.81 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.75 12.9 12.9 EqK = 5.79 14 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.84 0.140 5.75 0.8 12.9 Vel = 7.81 B2 20.84 13.8 K = 5.62 ----------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------- PATH 13 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 15 TO A6 20.95 1.049 lE 4.00 14.0 14.0 K = 5.60 15S C=120 2.00 -1.7 0.0 20.95 0.142 6.00 0.8 14.0 Vel = 7.85 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.75 13.1 13.1 EqK = 5.79 15 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 20.95 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.142 5.75 0.8 13.1 Vel = 7.85 A6 20.95 13.9 K = 5.61 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) 22 6C 5C 4C P S I 3( 2( Job Water Required Hose Allowance Pump Info City of Zephyrhills - New City H Static Pres: 62.0 psi Pressure: 41.4 psi In: 0 gpm Rtd Pres: 0 psi 5335 8th Street Resid. Pres: 40.0 psi Sys Flow: 318 gpm Out: 100 gpm Rtd Flow: 0 gpm Zephyrhills, FL. 33542 Flow: 1510 gpm Sys+Hose: 418 gpm Remote Area: 1 Date: 3-28-17 Safety Pres: 18.5 psi Loc: #8051 - 38410 6th Avenue Hd Elv Pres: -0.9 psi 100 gpm hose Flow(gpm) Pres(psi 0 0. 0 0. 0 0. 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 Flow (gpm) 500 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Dater 7-12-17 HYDRAULIC DESIGN INFORMATION SHEET Job Name: City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Location: 5335 8th Street Zephyrhills, FL. 33542 Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Remote Area Number: 2 - Second Floor Waiting Room Engineers: Consulting Engineers Associates, Inc. EB 3962 8362 Gunn Highway Tampa, FL. 33626 Telephone: (813)448-0225 Engineer of Record: John W. Wells III, P.E. FL. 49347 Calculated By: SprinkCAD www.sprinkcad.com 451 N. Cannon Ave. Lansdale, PA 19446 Construction: Type II Occupancy: Office Reviewing Authorities: City of Zephyrhills SYSTEM DESIGN Code:NFPA 13 Hazard:Light System Type:WET Area of Sprinkler Oper. 1042 sq ft1 Sprinkler or Nozzle Density (gpm/sq ft) 0.100 1 Make: Tyco Area per Sprinkler 162.0 sq ftj Model: TY-FRB Hose Allowance Inside 0 gpm I K-Factor: 5.60 Hose Allowance Outside 100 gpm I Temperature Rating: 155 CALCULATION SUMMARY (12) Flowing Outlets gpm Required: 307.6 psi Required: 39.4 @ Source WATER SUPPLY Water Flow Test 1 Pump Data I Date of Test 3-28-17 1 Rated Capacity 0 gpm I Static Pressure 62.0 psi I Rated Pressure 0.0 psi I Residual Pres 40.0 psi I Elevation 0 1 At a Flow of 1510 gpm I Make: I Elevation 0" I Model: I Location: #8051 - 38410 6th Avenue Source of Information: City of Zephyrhills Utilities Department SYSTEM VOLUME 465 Gallons Notes: 16 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall HYDRAULIC CALCULATION DETAILS QTY DESCRIPTION HYDRAULIC LENGTH C ID Hydr Ref W Required at Hyd Area 2 1 Pipe 4" 10x21 Allied Domestic 12' 120 4.260 1 4" Grvd Check Valve Tyco CV-1FR CHART LOSS 1 4" Grvd Butterfly Valve Tyco BFV- 5' 120 4.026 Elevation Change 12'0" Drawing Date: 7-12-17 FLOW LOSS gpm psi TOTALS 208 25.0 psi 208 0.1 208 0.5 208 0.1 5.2 Hydr Ref R1 Required at Base of RZR 208 30.9 psi 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 40' 140 6.338 208 0.0 2 6" MJ 90 Ell DI 28' 120 6.065 208 0.1 Fixed Flow Outside Hose 100 gpm 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 15' 140 6.338 308 0.0 1 6" Fingd Back Flow Valve Misc w/O CHART LOSS 308 8.0 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 25' 140 6.338 308 0.1 1 6" MJ 90 Ell DI 14' 120 6.065 308 0.1 2 6" MJ Tee DI 60' 120 6.065 308 0.3 Hydr Ref R2 Required at Source 308 39.4 psi Water Source 62.0 psi static, 40.0 psi residual @ 1510 gpm 308 gpm 60.8 psi SAFETY PRESSURE 21.5 psi Available Pressure of 60.8 psi Exceeds Required Pressure of 39.4 psi This is a safety margin of 21.5 psi or 35 % of Supply Maximum Water Velocity is 12.2 fps City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Page 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FITTING NAME TABLE ABBREV. ----------------------------------------- NAME ----------------------------------------- C Coupling E 90' Standard Elbow F 45' Elbow S Straight Flow Thru Tee T 90' Flow Thru Tee V Valve LEGEND HYD REF Hydraulic reference. Refer to accompanying flow diagram. K FACTOR Flow factor for open head or path where Flow (gpm) = K x -\/P Qa Flow added or subtracted Qt Total flow DIA Actual internal diameter of pipe C Hazen Williams pipe roughness factor Pf/ft Friction loss per foot of pipe PIPE Length of pipe FTNG'S Number of fittings. See table above. TOTAL Total length (PIPE + FTNG'S) Pt Total pressure (psi) at fitting Pe Pressure due to change in elevation where Pe = 0.433 x change in elevation Pf Friction loss (psi) to fitting where Pf = 1 x 4.52 x (Q/C)^1.85 / ID^4.87 Pv Velocity pressure (psi) where Pv = 0.001123 x Q^2/ID^4 Pn Normal pressure (psi), where Pn = Pt - Pv NOTES: - Pressures are balanced to 0.01 psi. Pressures are listed to 0.1 psi. Addition may vary by 0.1 psi due to accumulation of round off. - Calculations conform to NFPA 13. - Velocity Pressures are not considered in these Calculations 1i� City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Page 4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- NODE ELEVATION SPRINKLER PRESSURE ACTUAL MINIMUM ACTUAL NUMBER K-FACTOR FLOW FLOW DENSITY -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (FT) (GPM/(PSI^;,12)) (PSI) (GPM) (GPM) (GPM/SQ.FT) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51 27.00 13.2 51S 26.00 5.60 13.2 20.3 14.8 0.15 52 27.00 13.5 52S 26.00 5.60 13.5 20.6 14.8 0.15 53 27.00 8.2 53S 26.00 5.60 8.4 16.2 15.4 0.11 54 27.00 8.3 54S 26.00 5.60 8.5 16.3 14.8 0.15 55 27.00 8.5 55S 26.00 5.60 8.7 16.5 14.8 0.21 56 27.00 8.8 56S 26.00 5.60 8.9 16.7 14.8 0.25 57 27.00 9.9 57S 26.00 5.60 10.0 17.7 14.8 0.19 58 27.00 8.2 58S 26.00 5.60 8.4 16.2 16.2 0.10 59 27.00 8.2 59S 26.00 5.60 8.4 16.2 14.8 0.14 60 27.00 8.1 60S 26.00 5.60 8.3 16.1 14.8 0.12 61 27.00 8.9 61S 26.00 5.60 9.0 16.8 14.8 0.24 62 27.00 10.1 62S 26.00 5.60 10.3 17.9 14.8 0.13 121 27.00 14.2 122 27.00 14.1 123 27.00 10.5 124 27.00 9.6 125 27.00 9.0 126 27.00 8.7 127 27.00 8.6 128 27.00 10.7 129 27.00 9.4 130 27.00 9.0 131 27.00 8.7 132 27.00 8.7 A8 27.00 16.0 A9 27.00 16.0 A10 27.00 16.0 All 12.00 25.0 W 12.00 25.0 Max velocity of 12.17 occurs in the pipe from A9 TO 123 Nodes with "S" indicate a node at the top of a sprig or bottom of drop pendent. The node without an "S" is on the branch. City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 1 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 60 TO W (PRIMARY PATH) 16.10 1.049 lE 1.00 8.3 8.3 K = 5.60 60S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 16.10 0.087 3.00 0.3 8.3 Vel = 6.04 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 5.24 8.1 8.1 EqK = 5.66 60 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 16.10 0.087 10.24 0.9 8.1 Vel = 6.04 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32.44 1.682 6.45 9.0 9.0 130 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 3 48.54 0.067 6.45 0.4 9.0 Vel = 7.08 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.83 1.682 11.04 9.4 9.4 129 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 8 65.37 0.117 11.04 1.3 9.4 Vel = 9.53 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.93 1.682 1T 19.20 10.7 10.7 128 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 See PATH 10 83.30 0.183 29.10 5.3 10.7 Vel = 12.15 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 124.35 4.260 4E 98.23 16.0 16.0 A10 C=120 3T 131.67 6.5 0.0 See PATH 2 207.64 0.011 229.90 2.5 16.0 Vel = 4.72 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 1.01 25.0 25.0 All C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 207.64 0.011 1.01 0.0 25.0 Vel = 4.72 W 207.64 25.0 K = 41.51 PATH 2 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 53 TO A10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.19 1.049 lE 1.00 8.4 8.4 K = 5.60 53S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 16.19 0.088 3.00 0.3 8.4 Vel = 6.07 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) a City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 2 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 53 TO A10 CONTINUED 1.049 1T 0.14 8.2 8.2 EqK = 5.66 53 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 16.19 0.088 5.14 0.5 8.2 Vel = 6.07 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 12.00 8.6 8.6 127 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 16.19 0.009 12.00 0.1 8.6 Vel = 2.36 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.28 1.682 8.00 8.7 8.7 126 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 5 32.47 0.032 8.00 0.3 8.7 Vel = 4.73 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.51 1.682 8.17 9.0 9.0 125 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 6 48.98 0.068 8.17 0.6 9.0 Vel = 7.14 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.75 1.682 8.00 9.6 9.6 124 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 7 65.73 0.118 8.00 0.9 9.6 Vel = 9.58 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.72 1.682 1T 19.99 10.5 10.5 123 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 See PATH 9 83.45 0.183 29.89 5.5 10.5 Vel = 12.17 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40.90 4.260 11.10 16.0 16.0 A9 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 11 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 124.35 0.004 11.10 0.0 16.0 Vel = 2.83 A10 124.35 16.0 K = 31.06 PATH 3 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 58 TO 130 16.20 1.049 lE 1.00 8.4 8.4 K = 5.60 58S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 16.20 0.088 3.00 0.3 8.4 Vel = 6.07 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.41 8.2 8.2 EqK = 5.66 58 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 16.20 0.088 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5.41 0.5 8.2 Vel = 6.07 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF licit TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 3 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 58 TO 130 CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 8.02 8.7 8.7 132 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 16.20 0.009 8.02 0.1 8.7 Vel = 2.36 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.24 1.682 7.55 8.7 8.7 131 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32.44 0.032 7.55 0.2 8.7 Vel = 4.73 130 32.44 9.0 K = 10.82 ----------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------- PATH 4 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 59 TO 131 16.24 1.049 lE 1.00 8.4 8.4 K = 5.60 59S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 16.24 0.088 3.00 0.3 8.4 Vel = 6.09 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.75 8.2 8.2 EqK = 5.66 59 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.24 0.088 5.75 0.5 8.2 Vel = 6.09 131 16.24 8.7 K = 5.49 PATH 5 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 54 TO 126 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.28 1.049 lE 1.00 8.5 8.5 K = 5.60 54S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 16.28 0.089 3.00 0.3 8.5 Vel = 6.10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.14 8.3 8.3 EqK = 5.66 54 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.28 0.089 5.14 0.5 8.3 Vel = 6.10 126 16.28 8.7 K = 5.51 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) =aA City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 6 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 55 TO 125 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.51 1.049 lE 1.00 8.7 8.7 K = 5.60 55S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 16.51 0.091 3.00 0.3 8.7 Vel = 6.19 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.14 8.5 8.5 EqK = 5.65 55 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.51 0.091 5.14 0.5 8.5 Vel = 6.19 125 16.51 9.0 K = 5.50 PATH 7 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 56 TO 124 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.75 1.049 lE 1.00 8.9 8.9 K = 5.60 56S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 16.75 0.094 3.00 0.3 8.9 Vel = 6.28 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 3.17 8.8 8.8 EqK = 5.65 56 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.75 0.094 8.17 0.8 8.8 Vel = 6.28 124 16.75 9.6 K = 5.42 ----------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------- PATH 8 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 61 TO 129 16.83 1.049 lE 1.00 9.0 9.0 K = 5.60 61S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 16.83 0.095 3.00 0.3 9.0 Vel = 6.31 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.75 8.9 8.9 EqK = 5.65 61 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 16.83 0.095 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5.75 0.5 8.9 Vel = 6.31 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 9 HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129 16.83 9.4 K = 5.48 PATH 9 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 57 TO 123 17.72 1.049 lE 1.00 10.0 10.0 K = 5.60 57S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 17.72 0.104 3.00 0.3 10.0 Vel = 6.64 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.83 9.9 9.9 EqK = 5.63 57 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 17.72 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.104 5.83 0.6 9.9 Vel = 6.64 123 17.72 10.5 K = 5.47 PATH 10 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 62 TO 128 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.93 1.049 lE 1.00 10.3 10.3 K = 5.60 62S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 17.93 0.106 3.00 0.3 10.3 Vel = 6.72 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.38 10.1 10.1 EqK = 5.63 62 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.93 0.106 5.38 0.6 10.1 Vel = 6.72 128 17.93 10.7 K = 5.48 PATH 11 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 51 TO A9 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.34 1.049 lE 1.00 13.2 13.2 K = 5.60 51S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 20.34 0.134 3.00 0.4 13.2 Vel = 7.62 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 1.95 13.2 13.2 EqK = 5.61 51 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 20.34 0.134 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6.95 0.9 13.2 Vel = 7.62 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) a3 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 11 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 51 TO A9 CONTINUED 1.682 10.49 14.1 14.1 122 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 20.34 0.013 10.49 0.1 14.1 Vel = 2.97 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.56 1.682 1T 25.66 14.2 14.2 121 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 See PATH 12 40.90 0.049 35.56 1.7 14.2 Vel = 5.96 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 8.09 16.0 16.0 A8 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40.90 0.001 8.09 0.0 16.0 Vel = 0.93 A9 40.90 16.0 K = 10.23 PATH 12 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 52 TO 121 20.56 1.049 lE 1.00 13.5 13.5 K = 5.60 52S C=120 2.00 -0.4 0.0 20.56 0.137 3.00 0.4 13.5 Vel = 7.71 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.72 13.5 13.5 EqK = 5.60 52 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 20.56 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.137 5.72 0.8 13.5 Vel = 7.71 121 20.56 14.2 K = 5.45 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) -k 60 5C 4C P S 1 3( 2( Job Water Required City of Zephyrhills - New City H Static Pres: 62.0 psi Pressure: 39.4 psi 5335 8th Street Resid. Pres: 40.0 psi Sys Flow: 208 gpm Zephyrhills, FL. 33542 Flow: 1510 gpm Sys+Hose: 308 gpm Remote Area: 2 Date: 3-28-17 Safety Pres: 21.5 psi Loc: #8051 - 38410 6th Avenue Hd Elv Pres: 6.1 psi 100 qpm hose 6.1 psi Hose Allowance Pump Info In: 0 gpm Rtd Pres: 0 psi Out: 100 gpm Rtd Flow: 0 gpm Flow(gpm) Pres(psi 0 0. 0 0. 0 0. 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 Flow (gpm) -V City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 HYDRAULIC DESIGN INFORMATION SHEET Job Name: City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Location: 5335 8th Street Zephyrhills, FL. 33542 Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Remote Area Number: 3 - First Floor Reception Engineers: Consulting Engineers Associates, Inc. EB 3962 8362 Gunn Highway Tampa, FL. 33626 Telephone: (813)448-0225 Engineer of Record: John W. Wells III, PE FL. 49347 Calculated By: SprinkCAD www.sprinkcad.com 451 N. Cannon Ave. Lansdale, PA 19446 Construction: Type II Occupancy: Office Reviewing Authorities: City of Zephyrhills SYSTEM DESIGN Code:NFPA 13 Hazard:Light System Type:WET Area of Sprinkler Oper. 958 sq ftl Sprinkler or Nozzle Density (gpm/sq ft) 0.100 1 Make: Tyco Area per Sprinkler 144.0 sq ftl Model: TY-FRB Hose Allowance Inside 0 gpm I K-Factor: 5.60 Hose Allowance Outside 100 gpm l Temperature Rating: 155 CALCULATION SUMMARY (10) Flowing Outlets gpm Required: 261.7 psi Required: 33.7 @ Source WATER SUPPLY Water Flow Test l Pump Data I Date of Test 3-28-17 l Rated Capacity 0 gpm i Static Pressure 62.0 psi l Rated Pressure 0.0 psi l Residual Pres 40.0 psi l Elevation 0 l At a Flow of 1510 gpm I Make: I Elevation 0" I Model: I Location: #8051 - 38410 6th Avenue Source of Information: City of Zephyrhills Utilities Department SYSTEM VOLUME 465 Gallons Notes: 3-7 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION DETAILS HYDRAULIC FLOW LOSS QTY DESCRIPTION LENGTH C ID gpm psi TOTALS Hydr Ref W Required at Hyd Area 3 162 19.7 psi 1 Pipe 4" 10x21 Allied Domestic 12' 120 4.260 162 0.1 1 4" Grvd Check Valve Tyco CV-lFR CHART LOSS 162 0.3 1 4" Grvd Butterfly Valve Tyco BFV- 5' 120 4.026 162 0.0 Elevation Change 1210" 5.2 Hydr Ref R1 Required at Base of RZR 162 25.3 psi 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 40' 140 6.338 162 0.0 2 6" MJ 90 Ell DI 28' 120 6.065 162 0.0 Fixed Flow Outside Hose 100 gpm 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 15' 140 6.338 262 0.0 1 6" Fingd Back Flow Valve Misc w/O CHART LOSS 262 8.0 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 25' 140 6.338 262 0.0 1 6" MJ 90 Ell DI 14' 120 6.065 262 0.0 2 6" MJ Tee DI 60' 120 6.065 262 0.2 Hydr Ref R2 Required at Source 262 33.7 psi Water Source 62.0 psi static, 40.0 psi residual @ 1510 gpm 262 gpm 61.1 psi SAFETY PRESSURE 27.5 psi Available Pressure of 61.1 psi Exceeds Required Pressure of 33.7 psi This is a safety margin of 27.5 psi or 45 % of Supply Maximum Water Velocity is 11.0 fps City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Page 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FITTING NAME TABLE ABBREV. -------------------------------------- NAME -------------------------------------- C Coupling E 90' Standard Elbow F 45' Elbow S Straight Flow Thru Tee T 90' Flow Thru Tee V Valve LEGEND HYD REF Hydraulic reference. Refer to accompanying flow diagram. K FACTOR Flow factor for open head or path where Flow (gpm) = K x -\/P Qa Flow added or subtracted Qt Total flow DIA Actual internal diameter of pipe C Hazen Williams pipe roughness factor Pf/ft Friction loss per foot of pipe PIPE Length of pipe FTNG'S Number of fittings. See table above. TOTAL Total length (PIPE + FTNG'S) Pt Total pressure (psi) at fitting Pe Pressure due to change in elevation where Pe = 0.433 x change in elevation Pf Friction loss (psi) to fitting where Pf = 1 x 4.52 x (Q/C)^1.85 / ID^4.87 Pv Velocity pressure (psi) where Pv = 0.001123 x Q^2/ID^4 Pn Normal pressure (psi), where Pn = Pt - Pv NOTES: - Pressures are balanced to 0.01 psi. Pressures are listed to 0.1 psi. Addition may vary by 0.1 psi due to accumulation of round off. - Calculations conform to NFPA 13. - Velocity Pressures are not considered in these Calculations City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Page 4 NODE ELEVATION SPRINKLER PRESSURE ACTUAL MINIMUM ACTUAL NUMBER K-FACTOR FLOW FLOW DENSITY (FT) (GPM/(PSI^;,12)) (PSI) (GPM) (GPM) (GPM/SQ.FT) 101 12.00 8.4 101S 10.00 5.60 8.9 16.7 14.8 0.14 102 12.00 8.1 1025 10.00 5.60 8.6 16.5 14.8 0.14 103 12.00 8.5 103S 10.00 5.60 9.0 16.8 14.8 0.14 104 12.00 6.4 1045 10.00 5.60 7.0 14.8 14.8 0.11 105 12.00 6.5 105S 10.00 5.60 7.1 14.9 14.8 0.11 106 12.00 6.5 1065 10.00 5.60 7.1 14.9 14.8 0.12 107 12.00 6.9 1075 10.00 5.60 7.5 15.3 14.8 0.11 108 12.00 7.3 1085 10.00 5.60 7.8 15.7 14.8 0.14 109 12.00 9.9 109S 10.00 5.60 10.3 18.0 14.8 0.13 110 12.00 10.0 1105 10.00 5.60 10.4 18.1 14.8 0.13 133 12.00 9.6 134 12.00 9.5 135 12.00 8.9 136 12.00 9.0 137 12.00 8.0 138 12.00 7.2 139 12.00 7.1 140 12.00 7.0 142 12.00 10.7 143 12.00 10.6 144 12.00 7.0 145 12.00 6.9 220 12.00 10.2 223 12.00 9.9 226 12.00 7.1 227 12.00 7.1 228 12.00 10.9 229 12.00 10.8 All 12.00 19.7 Cl 12.00 12.2 C2 12.00 12.2 C3 12.00 12.7 E1 12.00 19.5 W 12.00 19.7 Max velocity of 11.03 occurs in the pipe from C2 TO 136 Nodes with "S" indicate a node at the top of a sprig or bottom of drop pendent. The node without an "S" is on the branch. 9M City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 1 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 104 TO W (PRIMARY PATH) 14.82 1.049 1E 2.00 7.0 7.0 K = 5.60 1045 C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 14.82 0.075 4.00 0.3 7.0 Vel = 5.55 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.75 6.4 6.4 EqK = 5.84 104 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 14.82 0.075 5.75 0.4 6.4 Vel = 5.55 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 12.00 6.9 6.9 145 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 14.82 0.007 12.00 0.1 6.9 Vel = 2.16 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14.90 1.682 3.73 7.0 7.0 144 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 3 29.72 0.027 3.73 0.1 7.0 Vel = 4.33 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 0.94 7.1 7.1 227 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 29.72 0.027 0.94 0.0 7.1 Vel = 4.33 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 1.23 7.1 7.1 226 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 29.72 0.027 1.23 0.0 7.1 Vel = 4.33 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14.90 1.682 15.15 7.1 7.1 139 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 2 44.62 0.058 15.15 0.9 7.1 Vel = 6.51 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15.33 1.682 10.00 8.0 8.0 137 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 4 59.95 0.099 10.00 1.0 8.0 Vel = 8.74 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15.68 1.682 1T 11.40 9.0 9.0 136 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 See PATH 5 75.63 0.153 21.29 3.3 9.0 Vel = 11.03 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49.98 2.635 10.87 12.2 12.2 C2 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 125.61 0.044 10.87 0.5 12.2 Vel = 7.46 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) 31 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 1 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 104 TO W (PRIMARY PATH) 36.04 2.635 lE 71.83 12.7 12.7 C3 C=120 1T 24.71 0.0 0.0 See PATH 9 161.65 0.070 96.54 6.8 12.7 Vel = 9.60 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 1T 0.33 19.5 19.5 E1 C=120 26.33 0.0 0.0 161.65 0.007 26.67 0.2 19.5 Vel = 3.67 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 1.01 19.7 19.7 All C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 161.65 0.007 1.01 0.0 19.7 Vel = 3.67 W 161.65 19.7 K = 36.46 PATH 2 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 106 TO 139 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14.90 1.049 lE 2.00 7.1 7.1 K = 5.60 1065 C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 14.90 0.075 4.00 0.3 7.1 Vel = 5.59 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 1.47 6.5 6.5 EqK = 5.84 106 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 14.90 0.075 6.47 0.5 6.5 Vel = 5.59 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 1T 4.38 7.0 7.0 140 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14.90 0.008 14.28 0.1 7.0 Vel = 2.17 139 14.90 7.1 K = 5.59 PATH 3 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 105 TO 144 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14.90 1.049 lE 2.00 7.1 7.1 K = 5.60 105S C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 14.90 0.076 4.00 0.3 7.1 Vel = 5.59 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 7 HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 3 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 105 TO 144 CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 0.75 6.5 6.5 EqK = 5.84 105 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14.90 0.076 5.75 0.4 6.5 Vel = 5.59 144 14.90 7.0 K = 5.65 PATH 4 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 107 TO 137 15.33 1.049 lE 2.00 7.5 7.5 K = 5.60 1075 C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 15.33 0.080 4.00 0.3 7.5 Vel = 5.75 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 lE 1.67 6.9 6.9 EqK = 5.82 107 C=120 2.00 0.0 0.0 15.33 0.080 3.67 0.3 6.9 Vel = 5.75 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 4.38 7.2 7.2 138 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15.33 0.080 9.38 0.7 7.2 Vel = 5.75 137 15.33 8.0 K = 5.43 PATH 5 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 108 TO 136 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15.68 1.049 lE 2.00 7.8 7.8 K = 5.60 1085 C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 15.68 0.083 4.00 0.3 7.8 Vel = 5.88 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 2T 10.16 7.3 7.3 EqK = 5.80 108 C=120 10.00 0.0 0.0 15.68 0.083 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.16 1.7 7.3 Vel = 5.88 Escr- �.W-i mull UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) K = 5.23 PRESSURE (PSI) 33 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 6 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 102 TO C2 16.46 1.049 lE 2.00 8.6 8.6 K = 5.60 1025 C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 16.46 0.091 4.00 0.4 8.6 Vel = 6.17 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 lE 8.76 8.1 8.1 EqK = 5.77 102 C=120 1T 7.00 0.0 0.0 16.46 0.091 15.76 1.4 8.1 Vel = 6.17 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33.52 1.682 5.15 9.6 9.6 133 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 7 AND 8 49.98 0.071 5.15 0.4 9.6 Vel = 7.29 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 4.33 9.9 9.9 223 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 49.98 0.071 4.33 0.3 9.9 Vel = 7.29 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 1T 17.06 10.2 10.2 220 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 49.98 0.071 26.96 1.9 10.2 Vel = 7.29 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.635 10.34 12.2 12.2 Cl C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49.98 0.008 10.34 0.1 12.2 Vel = 2.97 C2 49.98 12.2 K = 14.29 PATH 7 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 101 TO 133 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.72 1.049 lE 2.00 8.9 8.9 K = 5.60 101S C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 16.72 0.093 4.00 0.4 8.9 Vel = 6.27 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 lE 2.90 8.4 8.4 EqK = 5.76 101 C=120 2.00 0.0 0.0 16.72 0.093 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.90 0.5 8.4 Vel = 6.27 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) 311 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 9 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 7 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 101 TO 133 CONTINUED 1.049 1T 1.29 8.9 8.9 135 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 16.72 0.093 6.29 0.6 8.9 Vel = 6.27 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 10.00 9.5 9.5 134 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 16.72 0.009 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10.00 0.1 9.5 Vel = 2.44 133 16.72 9.6 K = 5.41 PATH 8 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 103 TO 133 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.80 1.049 lE 2.00 9.0 9.0 K = 5.60 1035 C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 16.80 0.094 4.00 0.4 9.0 Vel = 6.30 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 lE 4.19 8.5 8.5 EqK = 5.76 103 C=120 1T 7.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16.80 0.094 11.19 1.1 8.5 Vel = 6.30 133 16.80 9.6 K = 5.43 PATH 9 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 109 TO C3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.98 1.049 lE 2.00 10.3 10.3 K = 5.60 109S C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 17.98 0.107 4.00 0.4 10.3 Vel = 6.74 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 1.39 9.9 9.9 EqK = 5.72 109 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 17.98 0.107 6.39 0.7 9.9 Vel = 6.74 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 12.00 10.6 10.6 143 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17.98 0.011 12.00 0.1 10.6 Vel = 2.62 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) 36 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-12-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 9 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 109 TO C3 CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18.06 1.682 3.73 10.7 10.7 142 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 10 36.04 0.039 3.73 0.1 10.7 Vel = 5.26 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 0.94 10.8 10.8 229 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 36.04 0.039 0.94 0.0 10.8 Vel = 5.26 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 1T 37.77 10.9 10.9 228 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36.04 0.039 47.67 1.9 10.9 Vel = 5.26 C3 36.04 12.7 K = 10.11 ------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------- PATH 10 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 110 TO 142 18.06 1.049 1E 2.00 10.4 10.4 K = 5.60 1105 C=120 2.00 -0.9 0.0 18.06 0.108 4.00 0.4 10.4 Vel = 6.77 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 1.62 10.0 10.0 EqK = 5.72 110 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 18.06 0.108 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6.62 0.7 10.0 Vel = 6.77 142 18.06 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) 10.7 FLOW (GPM) K = 5.53 PRESSURE (PSI) E 50 4C P �S I 3C 2C Job City of Zephyrhills - New City H 5335 8th Street Zephyrhills, FL. 33542 Remote Area: 3 Water Static Pres: 62.0 psi Resid. Pres: 40.0 psi Flow: 1510 gpm Date: 3-28-17 Loc: #8051 - 38410 6th Avenue 100 gpm hose Required Pressure: 33.7 psi Sys Flow: 162 gpm Sys+Hose: 262 gpm Safety Pres: 27.5 psi Hd Elv Pres: -0.9 psi Hose Allowance Pump Info In: 0 gpm Rtd Pres: 0 psi Out: 100 gpm Rtd Flow: 0 gpm Flow(gpm) Pres(psl 0 0., 0 0. 0 0. 100 150 200 250 300 350 Flow (gpm) 400 450 500 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-24-17 HYDRAULIC DESIGN INFORMATION SHEET Job Name: City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Location: 5335 8th Street Zephyrhills, FL. 33542 Drawing Date: R1 7-24-17 Remote Area Number: 9 - Window Sprinkler Protection Proof Engineers: Consulting Engineers Associates, Inc. EB 3962 8362 Gunn Highway Tampa, FL. 33626 Telephone: (813)448-0225 Engineer of Record: John W. Wells III, PE FL. 49347 Calculated By: SprinkCAD www.sprinkcad.com 451 N. Cannon Ave. Lansdale, PA 19446 Construction: Type II Occupancy: Office Reviewing Authorities: City of Zephyrhills SYSTEM DESIGN Code:NFPA 13 Hazard:PROOF System Type:WET Area of Sprinkler Oper. PROOF Sprinkler or Nozzle Density (gpm/sq ft) 0.100 Make: Tyco Area per Sprinkler 200.0 sq ftj Model: WS Hose Allowance Inside 0 gpm K-Factor: 5.60 Hose Allowance Outside 100 gpm Temperature Rating: 155 CALCULATION SUMMARY (8) Flowing Outlets gpm Required: 278.3 psi Required: 45.5 @ Source WATER SUPPLY Water Flow Test Pump Data I Date of Test 3-28-17 Rated Capacity 0 gpm Static Pressure 62.0 psi Rated Pressure 0.0 psi Residual Pres 40.0 psi Elevation 0 At a Flow of 1510 gpm Make: Elevation 0" Model: Location: #8051 - 38410 6th Avenue Source of Information: City of Zephyrhills Utilities Department SYSTEM VOLUME 462 Gallons Notes: WS Calc dated 7-12-17 revised per deletion at Reception 103 TY3488 Pendent Vertical Specific Application Window Sprinkler to flow 20 GPM minimum flow per sprinkler spacing of 6 to 8 feet. City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-24-17 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION DETAILS HYDRAULIC FLOW LOSS QTY DESCRIPTION LENGTH C ID gpm psi TOTALS Hydr Ref W Required at Hyd Area 9 178 31.4 psi 1 Pipe 4" 10x21 Allied Domestic 12' 120 4.260 178 0.1 1 4" Grvd Check Valve Tyco CV-1FR CHART LOSS 178 0.4 1 4" Grvd Butterfly Valve Tyco BFV- 5' 120 4.026 178 0.0 Elevation Change 12'0" 5.2 Hydr Ref R1 Required at Base of RZR 178 37.1 psi 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 40' 140 6.338 178 0.0 2 6" MJ 90 Ell DI 28' 120 6.065 178 0.0 Fixed Flow Outside Hose 100 gpm 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 15' 140 6.338 278 0.0 1 6" Fingd Back Flow Valve Misc w/O CHART LOSS 278 8.0 1 Pipe 6" DIx18 America DI 350 25' 140 6.338 278 0.1 1 6" MJ 90 Ell DI 14' 120 6.065 278 0.0 2 6" MJ Tee DI 60' 120 6.065 278 0.2 Hydr Ref R2 Required at Source 278 45.5 psi Water Source 62.0 psi static, 40.0 psi residual @ 1510 gpm 278 gpm 61.0 psi SAFETY PRESSURE 15.5 psi Available Pressure of 61.0 psi Exceeds Required Pressure of 45.5 psi This is a safety margin of 15.5 psi or 25 % of Supply Maximum Water Velocity is 11.8 fps Ll U City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-24-17 Page 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FITTING NAME TABLE ABBREV. NAME C Coupling E 90' Standard Elbow F 45' Elbow S Straight Flow Thru Tee T 90' Flow Thru Tee V Valve LEGEND HYD REF Hydraulic reference. Refer to accompanying flow diagram. K FACTOR Flow factor for open head or path where Flow (gpm) = K x -\/P Qa Flow added or subtracted Qt Total flow DIA Actual internal diameter of pipe C Hazen Williams pipe roughness factor Pf/ft Friction loss per foot of pipe PIPE Length of pipe FTNG'S Number of fittings. See table above. TOTAL Total length (PIPE + FTNG'S) Pt Total pressure (psi) at fitting Pe Pressure due to change in elevation where Pe = 0.433 x change in elevation Pf Friction loss (psi) to fitting where Pf = 1 x 4.52 x (Q/C)^1.85 / ID^4.87 Pv Velocity pressure (psi) where Pv = 0.001123 x Q^2/ID^4 Pn Normal pressure (psi), where Pn = Pt - Pv NOTES: - Pressures are balanced to 0.01 psi. Pressures are listed to 0.1 psi. Addition may vary by 0.1 psi due to accumulation of round off. - Calculations conform to NFPA 13. - Velocity Pressures are not considered in these Calculations L11 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-24-17 Page 4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- NODE ELEVATION SPRINKLER PRESSURE ACTUAL MINIMUM ACTUAL NUMBER K-FACTOR FLOW FLOW DENSITY -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (FT) (GPM/(PSI^'fz)) (PSI) (GPM) (GPM) (GPM/SQ.FT) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 136 12.00 18.8 137 12.00 17.1 139 12.00 14.4 140 12.00 13.8 203 12.00 5.60 18.7 24.2 20.0 0.12 204 12.00 5.60 18.8 24.3 20.0 0.12 205 12.00 5.60 13.5 20.5 20.0 0.10 206 12.00 5.60 13.5 20.6 20.0 0.10 207 12.00 5.60 12.8 20.0 20.0 0.10 208 12.00 5.60 12.9 20.1 20.0 0.10 209 12.00 5.60 18.8 24.3 20.0 0.12 210 12.00 5.60 18.8 24.3 20.0 0.12 220 12.00 20.7 221 12.00 19.5 223 12.00 20.6 224 12.00 19.0 226 12.00 14.4 227 12.00 14.4 228 12.00 19.8 229 12.00 19.8 All 12.00 31.4 Cl 12.00 22.5 C2 12.00 22.5 C3 12.00 23.1 E1 12.00 31.2 W 12.00 31.4 Max velocity of 11.84 occurs in the pipe from C2 TO 136 City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-24-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 1 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 207 TO W (PRIMARY PATH) 20.00 1.049 0.94 12.8 12.8 K = 5.60 207 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 20.00 0.130 0.94 0.1 12.8 Vel = 7.50 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.10 1.380 1T 1.23 12.9 12.9 K = 5.60 208 C=120 6.00 0.0 0.0 40.10 0.124 7.23 0.9 12.9 Vel = 8.68 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 1T 4.38 13.8 13.8 140 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 40.10 0.047 14.28 0.7 13.8 Vel = 5.85 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41.10 1.682 15.15 14.4 14.4 139 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 2 81.19 0.174 15.15 2.6 14.4 Vel = 11.84 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 10.00 17.1 17.1 137 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 81.19 0.174 10.00 1.7 17.1 Vel = 11.84 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 1T 11.40 18.8 18.8 136 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 81.19 0.174 21.29 3.7 18.8 Vel = 11.84 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48.50 2.635 10.87 22.5 22.5 C2 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 4 129.70 0.047 10.87 0.5 22.5 Vel = 7.71 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48.57 2.635 lE 71.83 23.1 23.1 C3 C=120 1T 24.71 0.0 0.0 See PATH 5 178.27 0.084 96.54 8.1 23.1 Vel = 10.59 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 1T 0.33 31.2 31.2 E1 C=120 26.33 0.0 0.0 178.27 0.008 26.67 0.2 31.2 Vel = 4.05 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4.260 1.01 31.4 31.4 All C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 178.27 0.008 1.01 0.0 31.4 Vel = 4.05 W 178.27 31.4 K = 31.82 PATH 2 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 205 TO 139 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-24-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 2 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 205 TO 139 CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.54 1.049 1T 1.70 13.5 13.5 K = 5.60 205 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 20.54 0.137 6.70 0.9 13.5 Vel = 7.70 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 0.94 14.4 14.4 227 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 20.54 0.014 0.94 0.0 14.4 Vel = 3.00 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.55 1.682 1.23 14.4 14.4 226 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 See PATH 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41.10 0.049 1.23 0.1 14.4 Vel = 5.99 139 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41.10 14.4 K = 10.81 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 3 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 206 TO 226 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.55 1.049 1T 1.70 13.5 13.5 K = 5.60 206 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20.55 0.137 6.70 0.9 13.5 Vel = 7.70 226 20.55 14.4 K = 5.42 PATH 4 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 203 TO C2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24.20 1.049 1.91 18.7 18.7 K = 5.60 203 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 24.20 0.185 1.91 0.4 18.7 Vel = 9.07 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 lE 1.39 19.0 19.0 224 C=120 1T 7.00 0.0 0.0 24.20 0.185 8.39 1.6 19.0 Vel = 9.07 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 4.33 20.6 20.6 223 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24.20 0.019 4.33 0.1 20.6 Vel = 3.53 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) H q City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-24-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 4 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 203 TO C2 CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24.31 1.682 1T 17.06 20.7 20.7 220 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 See PATH 7 48.50 0.067 26.96 1.8 20.7 Vel = 7.07 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.635 10.34 22.5 22.5 C1 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48.50 0.008 10.34 0.1 22.5 Vel = 2.88 C2 48.50 22.5 K = 10.21 ----------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------- PATH 5 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 209 TO C3 24.28 1.049 1T 0.49 18.8 18.8 K = 5.60 209 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 24.28 0.186 5.49 1.0 18.8 Vel = 9.10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.682 0.94 19.8 19.8 229 C=120 0.00 0.0 0.0 24.28 0.019 0.94 0.0 19.8 Vel = 3.54 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24.29 1.682 1T 37.77 19.8 19.8 228 C=120 9.90 0.0 0.0 See PATH 6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48.57 0.067 47.67 3.2 19.8 Vel = 7.08 C3 48.57 23.1 K = 10.12 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 6 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 210 TO 228 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24.29 1.049 1T 0.49 18.8 18.8 K = 5.60 210 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 24.29 0.186 5.49 1.0 18.8 Vel = 9.11 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 228 24.29 19.8 K = 5.45 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PATH 7 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 204 TO 220 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) q V City of Zephyrhills - New City Hall Drawing Date: 7-24-17 Tyco Fire Products Page 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HYD. Qa DIA. FITTING PIPE Pt Pt REF "C" TYPES FTNG'S Pe Pv ******* NOTES ******* POINT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Qt Pf/ft TOTAL Pf Pn PATH 7 FROM HYDRAULIC REFERENCE 204 TO 220 CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24.31 1.049 lE 1.34 18.8 18.8 K = 5.60 204 C=120 2.00 0.0 0.0 24.31 0.187 3.34 0.6 18.8 Vel = 9.11 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.049 1T 1.39 19.5 19.5 221 C=120 5.00 0.0 0.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24.31 0.187 6.39 1.2 19.5 Vel = 9.11 220 24.31 20.7 K = 5.35 UNITS - DIAMETER (INCH) LENGTH (FOOT) FLOW (GPM) PRESSURE (PSI) L46 I 6C 5C 4C P �S I 3( 2( V Job City of Zephyrhills - New City H 5335 8th Street Zephyrhills, FL. 33542 Remote Area: 9 Water Static Pres: 62.0 psi Resid. Pres: 40.0 psi Flow: 1510 gpm Date: 3-28-17 Loc: #8051 - 38410 6th Avenue I Required Pressure: 45.5 psi Sys Flow: 178 gpm Sys+Hose: 278 gpm Safety Pres: 15.5 psi Hd Elv Pres: 0.0 psi Hose Allowance Pump Info In: 0 gpm Rtd Pres: 0 psi Out: 100 gpm Rtd Flow: 0 gpm Flow(gpm) Pres(psi 0 0: 0 0. 0 0. 100 150 200 250 300 350 Flow (gpm) 400 450 500 0* 6;' CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION TITLE DIVISION 0 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 07 PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE........................................................................................ 00 00 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS..................................................................................................... 00 31 32 GEOTECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................... 00 31 32.1 REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION — ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL PREPARED BY AREHNA ENGINEERING, INC. (dated April 3, 2017)............................. DIVISION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGES 01 1000 SUMMARY.................................................................................................................................... 2 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES.................................................................................................. 3 01 25 00.1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM............................................................................................... 1 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES.............................................................................. 3 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES........................................................................................................... 5 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION...................................................................... 6 01 31 00.1 CADD RELEASE —AIA DOCUMENT C106 — 2013 DIGITAL DATA LICENSING AGREEMENT. 3 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.................................................................... 5 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION......................................................................................... 3 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES........................................................................................................ 9 01 37 00 SCHEDULE OF VALUES.............................................................................................................. 2 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................... 8 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................ 2 01 41 30 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES........................................................................................... 3 01 42 00 REFERENCES.............................................................................................................................. 7 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS............................................................................... 9 01 50 10 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION SIGN............................................................................................... 2 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION........................................................................ 7 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................................... 5 017300 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................................. 10 01 74 00 WARRANTIES............................................................................................................................... 2 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL...................................................... 3 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES......................................................................................................... 5 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.................................................................................... 4 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.............................................................................................. 4 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING............................................................................................. 4 DIVISION 2 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 0241 16 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION......................................................................................................... 8 DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 03 11 00 SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK................................................................................................... 6 03 15 00 SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES............................................................. 7 03 21 00 SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT.......................................................................................... 8 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE...................................................................................................... 9 03 30 01 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE.............................................................................................. 21 03 35 00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES........................................................................................................ 8 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE.................................................................................. 11 03 60 00 SITE GROUT................................................................................................................................. 10 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION TITLE PAGES DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY........................................................................................................................... 16 0421 13 BRICK MASONRY VENEER......................................................................................................... 12 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY............................................................................................................. 9 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING................................................................................................. 5 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING............................................................................................................... 3 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING.......................................................................................................................... 4 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING.............................................................................................. 9 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS............................................................................................................... 12 05 51 13 METAL PAN STAIRS..................................................................................................................... 9 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS.......................................................................................................... 8 05 73 00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS................................................................................................. 6 DIVISION 6 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY.................................................................................................................. 6 06 16 00 SHEATHING.................................................................................................................................. 4 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY.................................................................................................................... 5 0641 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS........................................................ 9 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING........................................................................................................... 4 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 17 00 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING................................................................................................. 5 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION............................................................................................................... 4 07 26 00 VAPOR RETARDERS................................................................................................................... 4 07 27 26 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS............................................................................ 8 0741 13 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS.................................................................................. 13 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING............................................................................. 9 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM......................................................................................... 11 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING.................................................................................................. 5 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS......................................................................................................................... 9 DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.................................................................................... 9 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS................................................................................................................ 7 0831 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES.................................................................................................. 4 0841 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS........................................................ 13 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE...................................................................................................................... 14 0871 13 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR................................................................................................. 10 08 80 00 GLAZING....................................................................................................................................... 14 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING....................................................................................... 8 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING................................................................................................................ 8 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD.......................................................................................................................... 11 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 _Ae CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION TITLE PAGES 09 30 00 TILING........................................................................................................................................... 9 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS...................................................................................................... 8 09 54 35 DECORATIVE CEILING PANELS................................................................................................. 3 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES...................................................................................... 6 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING........................................................................................................ 7 096813 TILE CARPETING......................................................................................................................... 7 09 75 21 SOLID SURFACE WINDOW STOOLS.......................................................................................... 4 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING................................................................................................................... 12 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING.................................................................................................................... 13 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101416 PLAQUES..................................................................................................................................... 4 10 14 23 PANEL SIGNAGE.......................................................................................................................... 6 10 14 30 CAST STONE SIGNAGE............................................................................................................... 3 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS........................................................................................................... 5 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES........................................................................ 6 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES.............................................................................................. 7 10 71 00 SUN CONTROL DEVICES............................................................................................................ 4 10 75 00 FLAGPOLES................................................................................................................................. 5 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES........................................................................................................ 2 11 31 00S RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE..................................................................................... 1 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES........................................................................................................ 5 12 36 63 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS............................................................................................................ 5 12 93 11 BICYCLE STORAGE RACKS........................................................................................................ 3 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOTAPPLICABLE................................................................................................................................................ 0 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS............................................................................................................ 11 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS.................................................................................................. 13 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 00 00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING............................................................................. 12 22 05 23 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING................................................................... 4 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ................................ 4 22 05 30 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS - PLUMBING.................................................................... 7 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .................................................. 2 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS IPAGE 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION TITLE PAGES 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION.............................................................................................................. 3 22 10 00 INSTALLATION OF PIPING PLUMBING....................................................................................... 3 22 11 00 PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS - PLUMBING................................................................................... 4 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING......................................................................................................... 4 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING....................................................................................... 4 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING........................................................................................ 4 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT.............................................................................................................. 2 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES................................................................................................................. 3 DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC).................................................... 14 23 05 13 ELECTRICAL WORK ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT .................................... 5 23 05 30 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS.......................................................................................... 6 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT........................................................... 2 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING................................................................................... 7 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION...................................................................................................................... 6 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC...................................................................... 13 2321 15 CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEMS............................................................................................... 3 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS.............................................................................................. 5 23 30 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM....................................................................................................... 11 23 34 00 HVAC FANS.................................................................................................................................. 4 23 36 00 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES................................................................................................. 3 23 37 00 LOUVERS...................................................................................................................................... 5 23 54 13 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS........................................................................................................ 2 23 73 00 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS............................................................................... 5 23 74 00 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS.......................................................................................................... 4 23 81 27 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS............................................................................................ 4 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................................... 13 26 05 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ..................................... 4 26 05 20 MC CABLE.................................................................................................................................... 3 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ..................................................... 3 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS........................................................... 6 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES................................................................................................... 5 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS............................................................................................................................ 3 26 24 19 MOTOR POWER CONTROL WIRING.......................................................................................... 2 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES......................................................................................................................... 3 26 28 13 FUSES........................................................................................................................................... 2 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS................................................................... 1 26 28 19 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS...................................................................................... 2 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS... .................... 5 26 51 00 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS.............................................................................................. 3 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 33 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS............................................................................................ 2 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEMS.................................................................... 5 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION TITLE DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK PAGES 31 31 00 SOIL TREATMENT........................................................................................................................ 4 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 14 00 UNIT PAVING................................................................................................................................ 6 3231 19 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES............................................................................. 6 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION............................................................................................................... 10 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES.................................................................................................................. 9 32 93 00 PLANTS......................................................................................................................................... 13 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOTAPPLICABLE................................................................................................................................................ 0 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 00 31 32 — GEOTECHNICAL DATA 1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. B. Subsurface soil investigation to determine the nature of the soil below the natural grade has been made at various locations on the site. Test borings indicate only the soil conditions at the points where samples were taken and are not intended to indicate the soil conditions for the entire site. C. Data on indicated subsurface conditions is not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of such soil conditions between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by Bidders. D. Additional test boring and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. E. The complete soil investigation data report is made available for the convenience of the Contractor only and is included herewith as follows: F. Report of Geotechnical Exploration — Zephyrhills City Hall, prepared by AREHNA Engineering, Inc. and dated April 3, 2017. END OF DOCUMENT 00 31 32 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 31 32 -1 AREHNA i Engineering, Inc. REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA AREHNA PROJECT NO. B-17-025 April 3, 2017 Prepared For: City of Zephyrhills 5335 8" Street Zephyrhills, FL 33542 Prepared By: AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street Tampa, Florida 33609 AREHNA I Engineering, Inc. April 3, 2017 Mr. Shane LeBlanc Public Works Director City of Zephyrhills 5335 80' Street Zephyrhills, FL 33542 Subject: Report of Geotechnical Exploration Zephyrhills City Hall 5335 8`h Street Zephyrhills, Florida AREHNA Project B-17-025 Dear Mr. LeBlanc, r AREHNA Engineering, Inc. (AREHNA) is pleased to submit this report of our geotechnical exploration for the proposed project. Services were conducted in general accordance with AREHNA Proposal B.Prop-17- 024 dated March 7, 2017. The purpose of our geotechnical study was to obtain information on the general subsurface conditions for the proposed construction of a City Hall building in Zephyrhills, Florida. This report presents our understanding of the project, outlines our exploratory procedures, documents the field data obtained and includes our recommendations for site preparation and foundation and pavement design. AREHNA appreciates the opportunity to have assisted the City of Zephyrhills on this project. Should you have any questions with regards to this report, or if we can be of any further assistance, please contact this office. Best Regards, AREHNA ENGINEERING, INC. FLORIDA BOARD OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION No. 28410 Digitally signed by Krlstim 5 LaCava Date: m 2017.04.03 14:39:36 -04'00' Kristina LaCava, P.E. Geotechnical Engineer Florida Registration 77594 Distribution: 1— Addressee • Electronic 1— File �Iph E. PrendcrgaW'P.E. Principal Gcotechnical Engineer Florida Registration 50744 WN%',`.CAVEC I1(10 CC0fY Report of Geolechnical Exploration Zeplyrhills Ciiv Hall Zephyrltills, Florida TABLE OF CONTENTS April3, 2017 AREHNA Project B-17-025 Page 1.0 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................... ......... ...........................................................1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION AND SCOPE OF WORK..............................................................2 2.1 Site Description and Project Characteristics....................................................................2 2.2 Scope of Work................................................................................ ........>..........2 3.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING........................................................4 3.1 Field Exploration.............................................................................................................4 3.2 Laboratory Testing .........................._...................._ .................... ...........................4 .............. 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS.................................................................................... ....5 4.1 USGS Topographic Data................................................................................................. 5 4.2 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service Data .................................................... 5 4.3 Subsurface Conditions.....................................................................................................5 4.4 Groundwater Conditions........................................................................................6 4.5 Double Ring Infiltration (DRI) Test Results ................... .....6 4.6 Estimated Seasonal High Ground Water Level............................................................... 6 5.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS................................................................................................7 5.1 General.............................................................................................................................7 5.2 Shallow Foundation Design.............................................................................................7 5.3 Elevator Pit Retaining Wall Design.................................................................................7 5.4 Settlement........................................................................................................................ 8 5.5 Pavements ............................................ ............................................. ............................... 8 6.0 GENERAL SITE PREPARATION....................„........................................................................10 6.1 General..........................................................................................................................10 6.2 Ground Water Control...................................................................................................11 6.3 On -Site Soil Suitability..................................................................................................11 7.0 BASIS FOR RECOMMENDATIONS..........................................................................................12 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A Project Site Location Map — Figure 1 Field Exploration Location Map — Figure 2 USGS Topographic Survey — Figure 3 USDA Soil Survey — Figure 4 APPENDIX B Generalized Subsurface Profile — Figure 5 Soil Boring Records Key to Soil Classifications Symbols Summary of Laboratory Test Results Double Ring Infiltration Test Results Field and Laboratory Procedures Report of Geotechnical Exploration Zephyrhills 00, Hall Zephyrhills, Florida 1.0 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY April3, 2017 AREHNA Project B-17-025 The purpose of this geotechnical exploration was to obtain information conceming the site and subsurface soil conditions for a proposed new city hall building. Paved parking and driveway areas are also planned. The project is located on the northwest comer 6" Avenue and 8' Street in Zephyrhills, Florida. Based on e-mail communications with WEBER and TINNEN, P.A., the maximum dead and live columns loads will be approximately 62 kips and 63 kips, respectively. Further the maximum bearing wall load is roughly 7 kips per linear foot (klf) for dead load and 1.5 klf for live load. We assume that final grades will be similar to existing grade. AREHNA recommends that after proper stripping, proofrolling and filling of the site, the building be supported on conventional shallow foundations. Shallow foundations which bear on suitable existing soils or structural fill may be designed for a net maximum allowable bearing pressure of 2,500 pounds per square foot (psf). General recommendations for site development as well as foundation and pavement design are presented in this report. 1 P a g e Report of Geotechnical Exploration Zephvrhills Cin� Hall Zephyrhills, Florida April3, 2017 AREHNA Project B-17-025 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION AND SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Site Description and Project Characteristics The project site is currently under consideration for construction of a new city hall building. The proposed construction will also include paved parking and driveway areas. At the time of our investigation, the existing City Hall building still existed at the site. Therefore, we moved the borings just outside the footprint of the existing building. 2.2 Scope of Work The purpose of our geotechnical study was to obtain information on the general subsurface conditions at the proposed project site. The subsurface materials encountered were evaluated with respect to the available project characteristics. In this regard, engineering assessments for the following items were formulated: Identification of the existing ground water levels and estimated normal seasonal high ground water fluctuations. • General location and description of potentially deleterious materials encountered in the borings which may have an impact on the proposed construction. • Allowable capacities and foundation settlement for foundations supporting the structure. • Foundation installation and testing recommendations. • General pavement and site preparation recommendations including the suitability of soils for structural fill. • Field permeability results using Double Ring Infiltration (DRI) testing. The following services were performed to achieve the above -outlined obiectives: it Requested utility location services from Sunshine811. • Performed Standard Penetration Test (SPT) borings. Samples were collected and Standard Penetration Test resistances were measured at approximate intervals of two feet for the top ten feet and at an approximate interval of five feet thereafter. • Two-Stor} City Ball Building — Performed 4 SPT borings to depths of 25 feet near each comer of the proposed building. Due to the existing building still remaining, the borings were moved just outside the footprint of the existing building. • Single Story City Council Room — Performed two SPT borings to depths of 25 feet at the two exterior corners of the proposed building. • Elevator Pit — Performed one SPT boring extending to a depth of 50 feet below the existing ground surface in the vicinity of the proposed elevator 21Page Report of Geotechnical Exploration April 3, 2017 Zephyrhills City Hall AREHNA Project B-17-025 Zephyrhills, Florida pit. Due to the existing City Hall building still remaining, the boring was moved just outside the footprint of the existing building. ■ Parking and Drive Aisle Areas — Performed 4 SPT borings to depths of 10 feet below the existing ground surface. Performed one double ring infiltration (DRI) test at a depth of approximately 1 foot within the existing landscape area. a Visual classification and stratification of soil samples in the laboratory using the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). A laboratory testing program consisting of natural moisture content, Atterberg Limit, and single sieve (#200) gradation was performed on representative samples. a Reported the results of the field exploration and engineering analysis. The results of the subsurface exploration are presented in this report, signed and sealed by professional engineers specializing in geotechnical engineering. 3 1 P a g e Report of Geolechnical Exploration Zepi yrhills 0tv Nall Zephyrhills, Florida April3, 2017 AREHNA Project B-17-025 3.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING 3.1 Field Exploration Our scope included six Standard Penetration Test (SPT) borings performed within the proposed building areas to a depth of 25 feet, one SPT boring performed in the vicinity of the elevator pit to a depth of 50 feet, four SPT borings in the parking and drive aisle areas to depths of 10 feet, and one Double Ring Infiltration (DRI) test within the existing landscape area. The SPT borings were performed with the use of a Power Drill Rig using Bentonite "Mud" drilling procedures. Samples were collected and Standard Penetration Test resistances were measured at approximate intervals of two feet for the top ten feet and at approximate intervals of five feet thereafter. The borings were manually augered to depths of approximately 2 to 4 feet to avoid possible underground utilities. The soil sampling was performed in general accordance with ASTM Test Designation D-1586, entitled "Penetration Test and Split -Barrel Sampling of Soils." The DRI test was performed by installing a 12-inch diameter steel ring and a 24-inch diameter steel ring concentrically into the ground to the desired test depth. Water was then added to a desired level in both rings and held constant. The amount of water added to the inner ring versus time was then recorded. This procedure was repeated every 15 minutes for the first hour and every 30 minutes for ensuing hours for a total of 4 hours or until a stabilized infiltration rate was achieved. The DRI test was performed in general accordance with ASTM D-3385, entitled "Standard Test Method for Infiltration Rate of Soils in Field Using Double Ring Infiltrometer." Representative portions of the samples collected were sealed in glass jars, labeled and transferred for appropriate classification. In Appendix A, this report provides a field exploration location map showing the relationship of the existing building to the borings and DRI test. The borings and DRI tests were located in the field by measuring from existing features. 3.2 Laboratory Testing The soil samples were transported to AREHNA's soil laboratory and were classified by the Geotechnical Engineer using the USCS in general accordance with the ASTM Test Designation D-2488. Laboratory tests included grain size analysis, natural moisture content, and Atterberg limits. The test results are presented in Appendix B. 4 1 P age Report of Geolechnical Exploralion Zephyrhills Cilt) Hall Zephyrhills, Florida 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4.1 USGS Topographic Data April 3, 2017 AREHNA Projecl B-17-025 The topographic survey map published by the United States Geological Survey was reviewed for ground surface features at the proposed project location (Figure 3, Appendix A). Based on this review, the natural ground surface elevation at the project site is approximately +90 to +95. 4.2 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service Data The United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) survey for Pasco County indicates that the soils at the project site consist of the following soil unit: Soft Unit Number Soil Name Depth to High Water Table (feet) 15 Tavares -Urban land complex, 0 to 5 3.5 — 6.0 percent slopes The soil survey also indicates that the average annual precipitation is 50 to 58 inches. On average, more than two inches of rain falls every month, with more than 6 inches of rain falling each month during June, July, August and September. Based on the borings performed, the soils that underlie the site generally consist of clean sandy fill or natural soils, similar to the soil unit listed above. The USDA Soil Survey map for the project site is attached as Figure 4. 4.3 Subsurface Conditions A pictorial representation of the subsurface conditions encountered by the borings is shown on the General Subsurface Profile, Figure 5 in Appendix B. These profiles and the following soil conditions highlight the general subsurface stratification. The Soil Test Boring Records in Appendix B should be consulted for a detailed description of the subsurface conditions encountered at each boring location. When reviewing the boring records and the subsurface profiles, it should be understood that soil conditions may vary between and away from boring locations. Underneath the existing pavement sections, the SPT borings generally encountered very loose to medium dense fine sand (SP), fine sand with silt (SP-SM), fine sand with clay (SP-SC), and clayey fine sand (SC) to depths between 10 and 25 feet. Standard penetration test resistances (N-values) ranged from I to 22 blows per foot. The sandy soils were underlain by firm to very stiff clay (CL and CH) from 25 to 33 feet. N-values ranged between 7 and 22 blows per foot. Boring B-07 then encountered soft to hard limestone (WLS and LS) to the termination depth of 50 feet, with N-values between 14 blows per foot and 50 blows for 5-inches of penetration. 61Pa(Ie Report of Geolechnical Exploralion April 3, 2017 Zephyrhills City Hall AREHNA Project B-17-025 Zephyrhills, Florida A page defining the terms and classification symbols used in the boring profiles is included in Appendix B of this report. 4.4 Groundwater Conditions The ground water level was not encountered within the upper 10 feet of the SPT borings performed at the site. Below a depth of 10 feet, the borings are drilled using mud -rotary methods, which precludes determination of the depth of the groundwater level once drilling mud is introduced into the borehole. Fluctuation in ground water levels should be expected due to seasonal climatic changes, construction activity, rainfall variations, surface water runoff, and other site -specific factors. Since ground water level variations are anticipated, design drawings and specifications should accommodate such possibilities and construction planning should be based on the assumption that variations will occur. 4.5 Double Ring Infiltration (DRI) Test Results The following table summarizes the DRI test results: Depth Below Final Unsaturated Estimated Horizontal Depth to Test Ground Vertical Vertical Hydraulic Confining Location Surface Infiltration Infiltration, Conductivity, ICK Layer (feet) Rate, (iulbr) Kv (in/hr) (in/hr) (feet) DRI-01 1 8.5 8.5 13 > 10 The infiltration rate above is the actual value. No factor of safety has been applied. A summary of the DRI test performed is attached in Appendix B. 4.6 Estimated Seasonal High Ground Water Level Based on the NRCS data, soils information obtained from the site, and our experience in the area, we estimate that the seasonal high ground water level will be encountered at a depth of approximately 4 to 6 feet below the prevailing grades. 6 1 P a g e Report of Geotechnical Exploration April 3, 2017 Zep/twhills City Hall AREHNA Project B-17-025 Zephyrhills, Florida 5.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 5.1 General Our geotechnical evaluation is based upon the previously presented project information as well as the field data obtained during this geotechnical exploration. If final structure location or foundation loads are significantly different from those described or if the subsurface conditions during construction are different from those revealed by our borings, we should be notified immediately so that we might review our recommendations presented in this report. After demolishing the existing building, clearing and stripping to remove vegetation, root systems, and other deleterious materials, the site should be proofrolled and compacted. Any areas that appear unstable under proofrolling should be replaced with compacted fill. Our recommended site preparation is presented in Section 7.0, General Site Preparation. 5.2 Shallow Foundation Design Following our recommended General Site Preparations, the proposed buildings can be constructed on a system of conventional shallow spread or strip footings and interior slab supported on grade. The foundation system should bear on acceptable existing soils or structural fill soils compacted to a density of at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-1557). Shallow foundations may be designed using an allowable net soil bearing pressure of 2,500 psf. Our bearing capacity evaluation was based on correlations between N-values and the successful performance of similar structures on similar soil conditions. All footings should be embedded so that the bottom of the foundation is a minimum of 12 inches below the adjacent compacted grades on all sides. Strip or wall footings should be a minimum of 24 inches wide and pad or column footings should be a minimum of 30 inches wide. However, the pad or column footings should be sized to maintain similar bearing pressures as the wall footings. These minimum footing sizes should be used regardless of whether the maximum allowable bearing pressures are fully developed in all loading conditions. These minimum footing sizes tend to provide adequate load bearing area to develop overall bearing capacity and account for minor variations in the bearing materials. 5.3 Elevator Pit Retaining Wall Design The table below presents recommended lateral earth pressure parameters for use in design. The earth pressure coefficient values represent ultimate conditions. Since the deflection necessary to mobilize the ultimate passive resistance may be more than can be tolerated, an appropriate factor of safety should be applied for design. The values assume smooth, formed concrete against granular soil, without appreciable cohesion, compacted to the specification outlined in this report. The tabulated parameters assume adequate drainage is provided to minimize the build-up of excess hydrostatic pressures. 7 1 P a g e I ik Reporl of Geolechnical Exploration Zephvrhills On, Hall Zepiyrhills, Florida Recommended Earth Pressure Parameters April 3, 2017 AREHNA Projecl B-17-02 s ` Material Description Unit Weight (pef) Cohesion (psf) Angle of Internal Friction Friction 'Ratio Earth Pressure Coefficients Active At- Passive (degrees) 4 (Ka) Rest (Kp) Rest Fine sand (SP) Damp:100 Fine sand with silt (SP-SM) Saturated: 110 0 28 0.5 0.36 0.5 2.8 Buoyant: 38 5.4 Settlement The settlement of shallow foundations supported on sandy soils should occur rapidly during construction as dead loads are imposed at the footing locations. Provided that the recommended subsurface preparation operations are properly performed, the total settlements of isolated columns and wall footings should be on the order of 1 inch, with differential settlements on the order of 50 percent of the total settlements. 5.5 Pavements Sandy existing soils and sandy engineered fill soils should be acceptable for construction and support of flexible and rigid pavement sections after proper proofrolling and subsurface preparation. Borings B-01, B-02, B-05, B-08, B-09, B-10, and B-11 were performed in the existing pavement areas. The table below shows the existing pavement sections at each boring location: Boring Base Type Base Thickness (inches) Asphalt Thickness (inches) B-01 Limerock 8 2 B-02 Limerock 11 2 B-05 Limerock 6 5.5 B-08 Limerock 5 _ 2.5 B-09 Limerock 10.5 2 B-10 Cemented clayey sand 8 5.75 B-11 Cemented clayey sand 10 6.5 Flexible: We recommend that either limerock or crushed concrete be used for the base. Limerock base material should meet FDOT requirements, including compaction to 98 percent of its maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D-1557) and a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 100. A minimum separation of 18 inches is recommended between the bottom of the limerock base and the seasonal high ground water level. Crushed concrete should have an LBR value of 1r a Report of Geolechnical Exploration April 3, 2017 Zephurhills Cifi Hall AREHNA Project B-17-025 Zephvrhills, Florida 120 and be graded in accordance with Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specification Section 204. A minimum separation of 12 inches is recommended between the bottom of the crushed concrete base and the seasonal high ground water level. The asphaltic concrete structural course should consist of Type SP — 12.5 asphaltic concrete material. The asphaltic concrete should meet standard FDOT material requirements and placement procedures as outlined in the 2016 Edition of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. A stabilized subgrade with a minimum LBR of 40 and compacted to at least 98 percent of ASTM D-1557 is recommended. The following minimum flexible pavement layer thicknesses are recommended for light and heavy duty pavements: Pavement Layer Pavement Thickness (inches) " Light Duty Heavy Duty Surface Course 2 3 Base Course 6 8 Stabilized Subgrade 6 12 Rigid: We suggest that concrete with an unconfined compressive strength of at least 4,000 lb/in2 be placed over properly compacted subgrade soils. We recommend that a minimum thickness of 5 inches be utilized in areas of light duty applications acid a minimum thickness of 6 inches be utilized in areas with moderate to heavy duty applications. The maximum spacing between control joints should be limited to 10 feet for light duty pavements and 12 feet for heavy duty pavements. Rigid pavement is recommended in the vicinity of dumpster pads. The pad should be large enough to support the dumpster and the front wheels of the vehicle servicing the dumpster. Subgrade soils supporting rigid pavements should be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-1557) to a minimum depth of 12 inches. 91P,ige Reporl of Geolechnical Exploration April 3, 2017 Zephprhills 00Y Hall AREHNA Project B-17-025 Zephyrhills, Florida 6.0 GENERAL SITE PREPARATION 6.1 General The initial step in site preparation should be the complete removal the existing building, pavement areas, existing vegetation, topsoil, root systems, debris, and other deleterious materials from beneath and to a minimum of five feet beyond the development perimeter. Also, prior to construction, the location of any existing foundations, underground irrigation, septic tanks, drainage, or other utility lines within the construction area should be established. In this regard it should be noted that if underground pipes are not properly removed or plugged, they may serve as conduits for subsurface erosion which subsequently may result in excessive settlements. The structure and pavement areas should then be inspected and thoroughly proofrolled as directed by a Geotechnical Engineer. Our recommendations listed in this section should be used as a guideline for the project general specifications prepared by the Design Engineer: ➢ The entire site should be proofrolled with a large vibratory roller with a 4 foot diameter drum and a static weight of at least 8 tons. At least 8 complete coverages (4 in each perpendicular direction) should be performed over the entire building and parking area prior to raising site grades. Careful observations should be made during proofrolling to help identify any areas of soft -yielding soils that may require over excavation and replacement. Careful observations should be made to any adjacent buildings during proofrolling operations. ➢ Following satisfactory completion proofrolling, additional fill should be placed and compacted as needed to achieve the desired grades. Fill should generally consist of dry fine sand with less than 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and be free of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Fill should be tested and approved prior to acquisition. ➢ Approved sand fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 inches in thickness and should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-1557). The upper foot of pavement subgrade should be compacted to at least 98 percent of Modified Proctor. Density tests to confirm compaction should be performed in each fill lift before the next lift is placed. ➢ Prior to beginning compaction, soil moisture contents should be adjusted in order to facilitate proper compaction. A moisture content within 2 percentage points of the optimum indicated by the Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D-1557) is recommended prior to compaction of the natural ground and fill. ➢ Immediately prior to reinforcing steel placement, it is suggested that the bearing surfaces of all footing and floor slab areas be compacted using hand-operatcd 101Page Report of Geotechnical Exploration April 3, 2017 ZePivrhills C'iti, Hall AREHNA Project B-17-025 Zep1tvitills, Florida mechanical tampers. In this manner, any localized areas which have been loosened by excavation operations should be adequately recompacted. y A materials testing laboratory should be retained to provide on -site observation of earthwork and ground modification activities. Density tests should be performed in the top one foot of compacted existing ground, in each fill lift, and at the bottom of foundation excavations and utility trenches. 6.2 Ground Water Control Depending upon the seasonal conditions, runoff from adjoined sites and pavements may cause significant surface water until drainage structures are emplaced. Soils exposed in the bases of all satisfactory foundation excavations should be protected against any detrimental change in conditions, such as physical disturbance or rain. Surface run-off water should be drained away from the excavations and not be allowed to pond. If possible, all footing concrete should be placed the same day that the footing excavation is made. If this is not possible, the footing excavations should be adequately protected. 6.3 On -Site Soil Suitability The borings indicate that the soils present in the upper 6 feet at the site should be generally suitable for fill. Classification indicates the upper 6 feet of site soils at this site consist of coarse grained soils classified as SP and SP-SM based on the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). Suitable structural fill materials should consist of fine to medium sand with less than 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, and be free of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Any off -site materials used as fill should be approved by AREHNA prior to acquisition. 111Pag 0 Report of Geotechnical Exploration April 3, 2017 Zephvrhills Cup Hall AREHNA Project B-17-025 Zephyrhills, Florida 7.0 BASIS FOR RECOMMENDATIONS The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from the soil borings performed at the locations indicated. Regardless of the thoroughness of a geotechnical exploration, there is always a possibility that conditions between borings will be different from those at specific boring locations and that conditions will not be as anticipated by the designers or contractors. In addition, the construction process itself may alter soil conditions. AREHNA is not responsible for the conclusions, opinions or recommendations made by others based on the data presented in this report. Parse APPENDIX A Project Site Location Map —Figure Field Exploration Plan — Figure 2 USGS Topographic Survey — Figure USDA Soil Survey — Figure 4 West Zephyehill�, Elementary S&'Ckol 1A. rtc n�w Urve Coesazi� KC pL- (D As Faw Bart-, a wn'lmi* px� 0 VAntem Mobile Han* Park Zo Hvw0 pbelh'i' SITE Zephyrhills City Hall PROJECT SITE Zephyrhills, Florida LOCATION MAP Client: City of Zephyrhills AREHNAI Engineering, Inc. Designed By: KSL FIGURE Project: B-17-025 Checked By: JEP Date: April 3, 2017 Drawn By: KSL LEGEND B-# - Standard Penetration Test Borings DRI-# - Double Ring Infiltration Test with Hand Auger Boring Zephyrhills City Hall FIELD EXPLORATION Zephyrhills, Florida LOCATION PLAN Client: City of Zephyrhills AREHNA Engineering, Inc, Designed By: KSL FIGURE Project: 13-17-025 Checked By: JEP Date: April 3, 2017 Drawn By: KSL 2 Q C! wz Lim..� m. ,r f� d. c ir s :k + C„'f^ CZ ,. L:, A'9LS 47N AVL Project Site Zephyrhills City Hall Zephyrhills, Florida Client: City of Zephyrhills Projcct: 13-17-025 Date: April 3, 2017 USGS TOPOGRAPHIC j SURVEY j Designed By: KSL FIGURE Checked By: JEP 3 Drawn By: KSL APPENDIX B Generalized Subsurface Profile — Figure Soil Boring Records Key to Classification Symbols Summary of Laboratory Test Results Double Ring Infiltration Test Results Field and Laboratory Procedures 1 ChW*ed By. KSL Project No.: B-17-025 .�. ( I B-02 B-03 B-04 B-05 B-06 B-07 B-08 B-09 B40 B-1 3123=7 31232017 3i23=7 312212017 323/2017 3222017 3=2017 312212017 W2212017 3W, ....... I . ...... .."___.... , - _,_..,.... .._...... _ - .... _,_._....... . . .-•---- , - .,........,_ __ -- -. ....-...... _....-,..., ® KN` SP-SM PAVEMENT . SPSM PAVEMENT PAVEMM PAVEMENT PAVEMENT SP .'- ►N= 5 SPSM SP•5M _' _. SP-SM SP-SM SP SM r �; Sl�SM '• SP "SP- SM "" SP-SM •' SP SM N- 3 N- 4 N- 2 N- 2 ' N- 3 : , N- 1 •; N. 2 N-SW? 4 N- 3 SP SM •r SP•SM ,. , ". SP - ' SP-SM ,o, SP :. SP !{= 4 N- 8 N- 3 -:, N- S N- 6 ; N- 3 SP N- 7 N- 5 N- 5 SP N- 7 N- 9 N- S N- 8 N- 5 N- 6 N- 13 SC N. 11 SP N- 8 SP SP .. .... ............... asp. .,:. _....,,..., ......., gp. ....... SP ....... .... SP St: BORING BORING BORING BORI TERMINATED TERMINATED TERMINATED TERMIN SP loft 10,ft loft 10, N- 16 N- 21 N-10 N- 22 N- 10 N- 10 SC . SC SPSM , SC , .......... ..,__. __ .......... ...... ,. 18 N. 22 N-10 N. 12 N- 1 S tt N= 13 CH J.N- CH CH 1- , CH s . .1...... .. .. ... VA .N-`14 .,.-,:.:..... VA N 10... .. .........Lt�,N-21 ......... .....IGLL.N-10_....,_. .,_. rZAN`S _1 , BORING smoc 8[IRiNG SMING BORING TERMINATED TERMINATED TERM10iATED TERMINATED TERMINATEDra 23ft 2Yft 24ft 2411 24ft r., N- 14 M45 N- 20 N- 28 LS BORING TERMINATED So ft o_ p v 0 SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS -J w U °.� p J w n. oag a m O k) w a z • SPT N VALUE • 20 40 60 80 F—�- I 20 4 60 80 A FINES CONTENT (%) 20 40 60 80 10 PAVEMENT: 2-inches asphalt, 8-inches limerock base AU 2 6 9 16 11 14 , .... Brown fine SAND with silt SP-SM Light brown fine SAND with trace roots and rocks (SP) AU Very loose to loose light brown fine SAND (SP) SPT 1.1-1.2 SPT 3-2-4.5 SPT 3.4-5-6 0 Medium dense gray clayey fine SAND with trace roots (SC) SPT 6-e-e SPT 6-4-7 Stiff light pray -brown high plasticity sandy CLAY with trace limerock and roots (CH) SPT 3-e-6 Dab Drilled: 3/23/17 Ground Water Level: Drilled By: AREHNA Groundwater not encountered In top 10 feet Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL SOIL BORING LOG ZEPHYRHILLS, FL Drawn By: LEF AREHNA Project No.: B-17.025 AREHNA !Engineering, Inc. Checked By: KSL Boring City of Zephyrhills I Data: 3/2712017 PAGE 1 OF . , o o .r SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS -J -w.i � v_ = c9 p p -' w o_ a cco♦ m m a U w � a Z • SPT N VALUE • 20 40 60 PL MC LL }— t 20 40 60 80 FINES CONTENT (%) A 0 40 60 80 PAVEMENT: 2-inches asphalt, 11-inches limerock base AU Light brown fine SAND with trace roots and glass (SP) Light brown fine SAND with trace roots (SP) AU 3 Very loose light brown to light gray fine SAND (SP) SPT 2-1-2-2 4 SPT 3-2-2-3 10 - 7 16 " Loose to medium dense light brown fine SAND with trace day pockets (SP) SPT 3-4-3-3 SPT 5-e-8 20 18 Stiff to very stiff light gray to light orange -gray to orange -gray high plasticity sandy CLAY (CH) SPT 5-7-11 SPT 5-7-8 Bottom of borehole at 25.0 feet. Date Drilled: 3123/17 Drilled By: AREHNA Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered In top 10 feet Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL ZEPHYRHILLS, FL AREHNA Project No.: B-17-025 AREHNA j Engineering, Inc, SOIL BORING LOG Drawn By: LEF Checked By: KSL Boring B-02 City of Zephyrhlils Date: 3127/2017 PAGE 1 OF 1 -� 0 4= o v SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS .J W W v = O O w CL o. co• 3 y 0 g m :) L O (00 W M a z • SPT N VALUE • 20 40 60 80 PL MC LL { � 2040 60 80 FINES CONTENT (°�) 0 20 4 Brown fine SAND with silt and little roots and trace cemented sand (SP-SM AU Very loose to loose light brown fine SAND (SP) SPT 2.3-2.3 5 4 SPT 2.2-2-3 8 SPT 4-4-4-6 10 9 21 .... ............. .... Loose brown clayey fine SAND (SC) SPT 5-54-6 Medium dense light gray clayey fine SAND with trace cemented sand (SC) SPT 7-9-12 20 22 14 " Stiff to very stiff light grey high plasticity sandy CLAY (CH) SPT 8-9-13 SPT 5.6-e Bottom of borehole at 25.0 feet. Date Drilled: 3/23117 Drilled By: AREHNA Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered in top 10 feet Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL SOIL BORING LOG ZEPHYRHILLS, FL AREHNA Project No.: 8-17-025 City of Zephyrhills AREHNA Engineering, Inc. Drawn By: LEF Checked By: KSL Date: 3/27/2017 Boring PAGE 1 OF 1 0 SPT N VALUE J wj U W (L ti W 20 40 60 80 PL MG �—�—� LL r .. w SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS J = c7 p o m J ) o W o. O U 20 40 60 80 • FINES CONTENT ( ) a rn 20 40 6 Dark brown to brown fine SAND with silt and trace roots (SP-SM) AU AU 2 Very loose brown fine SAND with silt (SP-SM) SPT t-t-t-2 3 Very loose to loose light gray fine SAND (SP) SPT 2-1-2-2 10 5 i F... SPT 3-2-3-5 Loose dark gray clayey fine SAND (SC) SPT 3-4-6 10 " Stiff gray to orange -gray high plasticity sandy CLAY (CH) 20 SPT 44-6 10 10 11`• SPT 3-4-6 Bottom of borehole at 25.0 feet. Date Drilled: 3123/17 Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered In top 10 feet Drilled By: AREHNA Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Teat Boring Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL SOIL BORING LOG ZEPHYRHILLS, FL Drawn By: LEF Boring AREHNA Project No.: B-17.025 AREHNA I Engineering, Inc. Checked By: KSL B•04 City of Zephyrhilis Date: 3/27/2017 PAGE 1 OF t _ c SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS -J V U _ p (g w o' u� 3 y Ot m = U w 3 Q A. • SPT N VALUE • 20 4 60 80 PL1MC _ �L 20 40 60 80 ♦ FINES CONTENT (%) 0 20 40 60 8 PAVEMENT: 5.54nches asphalt, 6-inches limerock base AU Dark brown fine SAND with silt and trace Iimerock (SP-SM) Dark brown fine SAND with silt (SP-SM) AU 2 Very loose to loose light brown fine SAND (SP) SPT 1-1-1-1 5 SPT 1-2-34 10 8 SPT 2.44-6 22 ...... ;, _, ., Medium dense light brown fine SAND with silt (SP-SM) 77-7 •' . ° SPT s-10.12 20 12 21 _... :.....:..............:........ Medium dense gray -brown fine SAND with clay (SP-SC) SPT 3-6-6 SPT 6-9-12 Bottom of borehole at 25.0 feet. Date Drilled 3/22/17 Drilled By: AREHNA Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered in top 10 feet Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL ZEPHYRHILLS, FL AREHNA Project No.: B-17-025 City of Zephyrhllis AREHNA Engineering, Inc. SOIL BORING LOG Drawn By: LEF Checked By: KSL Date: 3/2712017 Bs 05g PAGE 1 OF 1 w I SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS 0 Brown fine SAND with silt and trace roots (S Light brown fine SAND with trace roots (SP) Loose light gray -brown fine SAND (SP) gray to light gray clayey gray to light gray high plasticity sandy CLAY (CH) J v� W o� WWu a J o Hp Q (� N c V AU AU SPT 2-1-2-3 SPT 3-244 SPT 4.3-2-2 AXI SPTI 6-5-5 1 & XI SPT 1 7-6-8 1 SPT 1 3-5-5 • SPT N VALUE 0 W 0 40 60 80 PLLMMC�LL a Z 20 40 60 80 • FINES CONTENT (%) A 0 40 60 3 6 5 10 .............. .... .... 15 10 Date Drilled: 3/23/17 Ground Water Level: Drilled By: AREHNA Groundwater not encountered in top 10 feet Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL SOIL BORING LOG ZEPHYRHILLS, FL Drawn By: LEF Boring AREHNA Project No.: B-17-025 AREHNA I Engineering, Inc. Checked By: KSL B-06 City of Zephyrhills Date: 3/27/2017 PAGE 1 OF 1 a o "' p SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS J o: ul v O O w o. a rn m z a v w 3 ¢ Z • SPT N VALUE • 20 40 60 80 PL MC LL 1--�—I 20 40 60 80 • FINES CONTENT M A 0 40 60 80 10 Brown fine SAND with silt and trace roots (SP-SM) AU 3 6 10 13 8 7 100+ 14 20 28 ' „. x ...... :.. m AU Very loose to loose light brown to light gray -brown fine SAND (SF)— SPT SPT 1-1-2-3 SPT 2-3-3-5 p Stiff light gray sandy CLAY (CL) SPT 4.5-5 SPT 4-5-8 30 Firm orange -gray high plasticity sandy CLAY (CH) 50% loss of drilling fluid circulation at 31 feet SPT 3-3-5 SPT 3-3-4 40 Hard LIMESTONE (LS) SPT 3-7-5015• Solt weathered LIMESTONE (WLS) SPT 9-7-7 50 SPT 15.9-11 Medium hard LIMESTONE (LS) SPT 3.16-12 Bottom of borehole at 60.0 feet. Date Drilled: 3122117 Drilled By: AREHNA Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered In top 10 feet Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL ZEPHYRHILLS, FL AREHNA Project No.: 8-17-025 City of Zephyrhills AREHNA Engineering, Inc. SOIL BORING LOG Drawn By: LEF Checked By: KSL Date: 3/2712017 Boring B-07 PAGE 1 OF t J w • SPT N VALUE • v Q. 30 y 20 40 60 80 PLC C0 jL 20 40 60 80 w SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS Lu x Q. m ? ; p Lu U N Z to ♦ FINES CONTENT (%) A 0 20 40 6o aq PAVEMENT: 2.5-inches asphalt, 5-inches l merock base AU Dark gray -brown fine SAND with silt (SP-SM) Light brown fine SAND with silt and trace roots (SP-SM) AU 2 Very loose to loose light brown to light gray fine SAND (SP) SPT 7 SPT 3-2-5 7 13 Medium dense light gray fine SAND (SP) SPT 5-6-7-9 1 Bottom of borehole at 10.0 feet. , Date Drilled: 3/22/17 Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered in top 10 feet Drilled By: AREHNA Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL SOIL BORING LOG ZEPHYRHILLS, FL Drawn By: LEF Boring AREHNA Project No.: B-17-025 AREHNA Engineering, Inc, Checked By: KSL B-08 City of Zephyrhllls Date: 3127/2017 PAGE t OF 1 J W • SPT N VALUE • U_ a 3 w 20 40 60 80 PL MC LL .. a v SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS � _ J m z -1 p ¢ a N v Z 20 40 60 80 y A FINES CONTENT (%) 80 PAVEMENT: 2-inches asphalt,10.5-inches limerock base AU ' Light brown tine SAND with silt (SP-SM) ' Light brown fine SAND (SP) AU 4 Very loose light brown fine SAND (SP) SPT 2-2-2-2 5 Loose to medium dense gray clayey fine SAND (SC) SPT 2-2-3-5 SPT 1-4-7-10 1 11 Bottom of borehole at 10.0 feet. Date Drilled: 3/22/17 Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered in top 10 feet Drilled By: AREHNA Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL SOIL BORING LOG ZEPHYRHILLS, FL Drawn By: LEF BB09° AREHNA Project No.: 8-17-025 AREHNA I Engineering, Inc. Checked By: KSL City of Zephyrhills Date: 3/27/2017 PAGE 1 OF 1 w `✓ SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS 0 base Loose light gray -brown fine cemented clayey sand at 10.0 feet. J W W = MO OH z m ul a H O 3 rn AU AU SPT 1-2-1-2 SPT 2-2-3-3 SPT 344.5 • SPT N VALUE • W 20 40 60 80 PLC MC jL ? 20 40 60 80 z • FINES CONTENT (%) 20 40 60 80 3 5 8 Data Drilled: 3122117 Ground Water Level: Drilled By: AREHNA Groundwater not encountered in top 10 feet Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL SOIL BORING LOG ZEPHYRHILLS, FL Drawn By. LEF Boring AREHNA Project No.: B•17-025 AREHNA I Engineering, Inc. Checked By: KSL B-1 0 City of Zephyrhllls I I Date: 3127/2017 PAGE 1 OF 1 J W • SPT N VALUE • U o- 3: to W 20 40 6D 80 PL MC LL I--�----t .. o .r SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS � = k� O m p � ¢ p L U Z 20 40 60 80 ♦ FINES CONTENT y (%) 20 40 60 80 PAVEMENT: 6.5-inches asphalt, 10-inches cemented clayey sand AU base Dark brown to brown fine SAND with silt (SP-SM) AU 2 Very loose light brown fine SAND (SP) SPT 1-1-1-2 4 Very loose light brown fine SAND with trace roots (SP) SPT 2-2-2-3 10 4 Very loose light gray -brown fine SAND (SP) SPT 2-2-24 Bottom of borehole at 10.0 feet. Date Drilled: 3/22/17 Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered in top 10 feet Drilled By: AREHNA Method: ASTM D-1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Remarks: ZEPHYRHILLS CITY HALL SOIL BORING LOG ZEPHYRHILLS, FL Drawn By: LEF Boring AREHNA Project No.: B-17-025 AREHNA Engineering, Inc, Checked By: KSL I Clry of Zephyrhllls Date: 3/27/2017 PAGE 1 OF 1 lk KEY TO SYMBOLS AREHNA 1 Engineering, Inc. CLIENT City of Zephvrhills PROJECT NAME Zeahyrhilis City Hall PROJECT NUMBER B-17-025 PROJECT LOCATION ZeDhvrhills. FL j LITHOLOGIC SYMBOLS (Unified Soil Classification System) ® PAVEMENT: Pavement umSP-SM: Poorly -graded Sand with Silt 177-1 SP: Poorly -graded Sand LLJ SC: Clayey Sand CH: High Plasticity Clay SP-SC: Poorly -graded Sand with Clay CL: Low Plasticity Clay ® LS: Limestone WLS: Weathered Limestone SAMPLER SYMBOLS Hand Auger Standard Penetration Test Standard Penetration Resistances SAND & GRAVEL SILT & CLAY LIMESTONE -RelrDenns.e 0- 5 - 10 11 - 30 M31-50 Greater then 50 Very Dense No. of Blows Co 61stency 0-2 VerV Soft 3.4 Son 5.8 Finn 9 - 15 Star 18 - 30 Very Stilt' — Hard 10.20 soft Medium 2 =r. Hard e atrtl WOR a Weight of Rod WOH - Weight of Hammer Ground Water Level Measurements Water Level at Time Drilling, or as Shown x Water Level After 24 Hours, or as Shown ABBREVIATIONS SOIL BOUNDARY CLASSIFICATIONS FINE LL - LIQUID LIMIT (%) GRAINED COARSE GRAINED SOILS PI PLASTICITY INDEX (%) SOILS W - MOISTURE CONTENT (%) SAND GRAVEL DD - DRY DENSITY (PCF) NP - NON PLASTIC SILT or CLAY Cobbles Boulder -200- PERCENT PASSING NO.200 SIEVE Fine Medium Coaroe Fine Coarse PP - POCKET PENETROMETER (TSF) # 00 040 010 04 314-inch 3-inch 12-inch Sieve Sieve Sieve Sieve SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Zephyrhills City Hall Zephyrhills, FL AREHNA Project No.: B-17-025 Baring No. Sample Depth (feet) Percent Moisture Content Percent Finer -200 sleve Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity index; B-03 8-10 9 20 -- -- -- B-07 13 —15 20 50 35 15 20 B-07 23 — 25 38 50 84 31 53 B-09 6-8 15 27 -- -- -- - - Parameter not tested SUMMARY OF DOUBLE RING INFILTRATION TEST RESULTS Zephyrhills City Hall Zephyrhills, Florida AREHNA Project No.: B-17-025 Test: DRI-01 Test Depth: 1 foot below ground surface Outer Ring Diameter: 24 inches Inner Ring Diameter: 12 inches Head: 4.0 inches Test Duration: 4 hours Date of Test: March 20, 2017 Test Procedure: ASTM D-3385 Time Increments 'mutes Infiltration per Time Period(Inches) 15 0 15 0 15 4 15 4.5 30 6.5 30 4 30 4.5 30 4 30 4.5 30 4 Infiltration Rate: 9.5 inches per hour FIELD PROCEDURES Standard Penetration Test (SPT) Borings The SPT borings are performed in general accordance with ASTM D-1586, "Penetration Test and Split -Barrel Sampling of Soils." A rotary drilling process is used and bentonite drilling fluid is circulated in the boreholes to stabilize the sides and flush the cuttings. At regular intervals, the drilling tools are removed and soil samples are obtained with a standard 2-feet long, 2-inch diameter split -tube sampler. The sampler is first seated 6 inches and then driven an additional foot with blows of a 140-pound hammer falling under its own weight a distance of 30 inches. The number of hammer blows required to drive the sampler the final foot is designated the "Penetration Resistance." The penetration resistance, when properly interpreted, is an index to the soil strength and density. Double Ring Infiltration (DRI) Testing The DRI tests are performed in general accordance with ASTM D3385 "Standard Test Method for Infiltration Rate of Soils in Field Using Double -Ring Infiltrometer". The 24-inch diameter outer ring is set on the prepared and roughened surface and is driven into the soil to a depth of 6-inches. Care is taken not to disturb the soil adjacent to ring walls. The ring is then checked visually for levelness. The 12-inch diameter inner ring is then set concentrically within the outer ring and pushed and/or driven into the soil using methods described in the above paragraph to set the inner ring into the soil. The inner ring is then checked visually for level and location within the outer ring. Water is poured into both rings using a splash guard to reduce scouring of the soil surface during the testing. The inner ring and annular space is then simultaneously filled with water to a depth of 12 inches. Water is added during the testing to maintain the 12-inch depth and volume that is added during specific intervals is recorded. This water volume represents the volume infiltrated into the soils, and is converted to an infiltration velocity. LABORATORY PROCEDURES Water Content The water content is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the weight of water in a given mass of soil to the weight of the solid particles. This test is conducted in general accordance with FM I-T265. Atterberg Limits (Plasticity) A soil's Plasticity Index (PI) is the numerical difference between the Liquid Limit (LL) and the Plastic limit (PL). The LL is the moisture content at which the soil will flow as a heavy viscous fluid and is determined in general accordance with ASTM D-4318. The PL is the moisture content at which the soil begins to crumble when rolled into a small thread and is also determined in general accordance with FM I-T 90. Fines Content In this test, the sample is dried and then washed over a No. 200 mesh sieve. The percentage of soil by weight passing the sieve is the percentage of fines or portion of the sample in the silt and clay size range. This test is conducted in general accordance with ASTM D-1140. CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 10 00 — SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Work phases. 3. Use of premises. 4. Owner's occupancy requirements. 5. Work times. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Owner: City of Zephyrhills B. Owner Representative: Shane LeBlanc C. Architect: Harvard Jolly Architecture D. Architect's Consultants: Kimley Horn — Civil Engineers; Weber & Tinnen — Structural Engineers; Consulting Engineering Associates, Inc. — Mechanical/Plumbing/Fire Protection Engineers; MPS Engineering, Inc. — Electrical Engineers 1.4 REQUIREMENTS A. The Owner/Construction Manager Contract shall take precedence over requirements. 1.5 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: City of Zephyrhills, New City Hall 1. Project Location: 5335 8th Street, Zephyrhills, Florida 2. Project Size: 19,615 SF B. The work consists of the following: 1. The scope of work includes replacement of the existing City Hall building with a larger 2- story building. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings. B. Use of Premises: Limit use of site to areas indicated by Owner. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Coordinate with Owner for areas to be designated for contractor's use during construction, and at specific phases, for staging, storage, parking, etc. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. C. Do not make use of site or building areas outside of designated limits without Owner's specific approval. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Nonsmoking Campus: Smoking is not permitted on the property. 1.8 WORK TIMES A. On -Site Work Hours: Work shall be carried out as described below: 1. On -Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated. 2. Weekend Hours: Same as weekdays. There will be no additional costs to the Owner for necessary, scheduled sequence -required Contractor work performed after hours or weekend hours 3. Early Morning Hours and Late Night Hours: Same as daytime hours. There will be no additional costs to the Owner for necessary, scheduled sequence -required Contractorwork performed after hours. 4. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner. END OF SECTION 01 10 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 25 00 — SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of reduction in the Contract Sum. I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. M. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 working days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 working days of receipt of request, or 7 working days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 working days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. C. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 25 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 3 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ARCHITECTURE Specification Section Contractor Name Date Project Name Project Number Originally Specified Item, Manufacturer, and Model Number Proposed Substitution Item, Manufacturer, and Model Number The Contractor certifies the following: 1. The attached data consist of a description of the product including material, specifications, fabrication shop drawings, performance characteristics, and applicable test report. 2. The function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution will be equal or better than the originally specified item. 3. A written comparison of the proposed substitution requested item and the specified item will be provided. 4. The substitution will not require changes to the building design documents and will not adversely affect other trades, the project schedule, and specified warranties. 5. Servicing and maintenance of the substitution will not differ from the originally specified item. 6. No cost to the Owner will be associated with the substitution. Substitution approval is an acceptance of only the manufacturer and product for general conformance with the design concept reflected in the Contract Documents. The A/E has made no attempt to verify specific performance data, or to check the details of the proposed substitution as to special features, capacities, physical dimensions or code and/or regulatory compliance, all of which remain the responsibility of the person/entity submitting the proposed substitution. Review: ❑ Approved ❑ Approved as Noted ❑ Rejected ❑ Request Received Late and Rejected Reviewer Date: ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 01 25 00.1 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 26 00 — CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit -Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit -price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Change Directive: may issue a Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2 CITY OF'ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 26 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 29 00 — PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Sub -schedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide sub -schedules showing values coordinated with each element. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of [five] <Insert number> percent of the Contract Sum. a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling [five] <Insert number> percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line -item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders ,or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the <Insert day> of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the [last day of the month] <Insert specific day of the month>. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven working days prior to due date for review by Architect. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner -requested project acceleration. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. C. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 13. Performance and payment bonds. 14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0129 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 31 00 — PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 calendar days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre -installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. The following Contractor -generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 calendar days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log biweekly. Use software log that is part of Project Web site. 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 PROJECT WEB SITE A. Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions: 1. Project directory. 2. Project correspondence. 3. Meeting minutes. 4. Contract modifications forms and logs. 5. RFI forms and logs. 6. Task and issue management. 7. Photo documentation. 8. Schedule and calendar management. 9. Submittals forms and logs. 10. Payment application forms. 11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating. 12. Online document collaboration. 13. Reminder and tracking functions. 14. Archiving functions. B. Provide up to seven Project Web site user licenses for use of the Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants. Provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for Project Web site users. C. On completion of Project, provide one complete archive copy(ies) of Project Web site files to Owner and to Architect in a digital storage format acceptable to Architect. D. Provide one of the following Project Web site software packages under their current published licensing agreements: 1. Autodesk, Buzzsaw. 2. Autodesk, Constructware. 3. Meridian Systems, Prolog. E. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties granted access by Contractor to Project Web site shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect, within three days of the meeting. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Preconstruction Conference: a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than [15] <Insert number> days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. I. M. Preparation of record documents. n. Use of the premises. o. Work restrictions. p. Working hours. q. Owner's occupancy requirements. r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. S. Procedures for moisture and mold control. t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. U. Construction waste management and recycling. V. Parking availability. W. Office, work, and storage areas. X. Equipment deliveries and priorities. y. First aid. Z. Security. aa. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Progress Meetings: Progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off -site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 31 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 6 #-.4AIA Document C106*m — 2013 Digital Data Licensing Agreement AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year (In 1rords, indicate day, month and year:) BETWEEN the Party transmitting Digital Data ("Transmitting Party"): ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: (Name, address and contact information including electronic addresses) The author of this document has added information needed for its HARVARD JOLLY, INC. completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be and the Party receiving the Digital Data ("Receiving Party"): reviewed. A vertical line in the left (Name, address and contact information including electronic addresses) margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an for the following Project: attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. (Name and location oi- address) HJ Templates The Transmitting Party and Receiving Party agree as follows. TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL DATA 3 LICENSE CONDITIONS 4 LICENSING FEE OR OTHER COMPENSATION DIGITAL DATA ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 The purpose of this Agreement is to grant a license from the Transmitting Party to the Receiving Party for the Receiving Party's use of Digital Data on the Project, and to set forth the license terms. § 1.2 This Agreement is the entire and integrated agreement between the parties.Except as specifically set forth herein, this Agreement does not create any other contractual relationship between the parties. snit AIA Document Ci011 ' — 2013. Copyright 02007 and 2013 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING; This AW Document la protected by ii.ft. Copyright Law earl InternationM Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Me Docurnimt, or any po tion of tt, may resuft In severe civil and criminal panattios, and wilt be prosecuted to the maximum extant possibie under the law. This document was produced by t AIA software at 16:07:30 on 04/11/2016 under Order No.1610138667 1 which expires on 03126/2017, and is not for resale. User Notes: (947145300) § 1.3 for purposes of this Agreement, the term Digital Data is defined to include only those items identified in Article 5 below. § 1.3.1 Confidential Digital Data is defined as Digital Data containing confidential or business proprietary information that the Transmitting Party designates and clearly marks as "confidential." ARTICLE 2 TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL DATA § 2.1 The Transmitting Party grants to the Receiving Party a nonexclusive limited license to use the Digital Data identified in Article 5 solely and exclusively to perform services far, or construction of, the Project in accordance With the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement. § 2.2 The transmission of Digital Data constitutes a warranty by the Transmitting Party to the Receiving Party that the Transmitting Party is the copyright owner of the Digital Data, or otherwise has permission to transmit the Digital Data to the Receiving Party for its use on the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. § 2.3 The Transmitting Party retains its rights in the Digital Data. By transmitting the Digital Data, the Transmitting Party does not grant to the Receiving Party an assignment of those rights; nor does the Transmitting Party convey to the Receiving Party any right in the software used to generate the Digital Data. (Paragraph deleted) § 2.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Receiving Party shall indemnify and defend the Transmitting Party from and against all claims arising from or related to the Receiving Party's licensed use, modification to, or unlicensed use of, the Digital Data. § 2.5 The Receiving Party agrees to keep Confidential Information strictly con fidentiat and not to disclose it to any other person except to (1) its employees, (2) those who need to know the content of the Confidential Information in order to perform services or construction solely and exclusively for the Project, or (3) its consultants and contractors whose contracts include similar restrictions on the use of Confidential Information. ARTICLE 3 LICENSE CONDITIONS The parties agree to the following conditions on the limited license granted in Section 2.1: (State below rights or restrictions applicable to the Receiving Party's use of the Digital Data, reguirernentsfor data format, transmission method or other conditions on data to be transmitted) The Receiving Party (and its subcontractors) understands and agrees the Digital Data for this Project is periodically undergoing changes and revisions for various reasons throughout the duration of the Project, and is being provided merely for the Receiving Party's convenience. Therefore the Digital Data transmitted represents a "snapshot" of the Project at an arbitrary point in time that does not necessarily correspond with what has already been formally issued by the Transmitting Party in hard copy format. Furthermore, the Receiving Party recognizes and agrees that it cannot solely rely on the Digital Data to be the most up-to-date or the official copy and must refer to formally issued documentation when utilizing the Digital Data to better ensure accurate use. The Receiving Party (and its subcontractors) understands and agrees the Transmitting Party (and its consultants) will not accept shop drawings that are simply reproductions of the Digital Data, as it is the responsibility of the Receiving Party (and its subcontractors) to generate their own shop drawings to ensure their understanding of their scope of work to the level of detail required of their trade. The Receiving Party (and its subcontractors) understands and agrees to reproduce and distribute the digital data for project specific use only. The Receiving Party (and its subcontractors) hereby agrees to hold the Transmitting Party (and its consultants) harmless in its use of the Digital Data. Construction Manager is responsible for communicating these terms to all contractors and subcontractors receiving Digital Data for the entire project scope and time. ARTICLE 4 LICENSING FEE OR OTHER COMPENSATION The Receiving Party agrees to pay the Transmitting Party the following fee or other compensation for the Receiving Party's use of the Digital Data: Init.AIA Document C106"' — 2013. Copyright 0 2007 and 2013 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This A10 Docume t is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treatise. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AtA� Document, or any portion of it, 2 way result In Pere civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum ext et possible under the taw. This document was produced by t AIA software at 16:07:30 on 04/11/2016 under Order No.1610138667 1 which expires on 03126l2017, and is not for resale, User Notes: (947146300) (State the, fee, in dollars, or other method by which the Receiving Party will compensate the Transmitting Party for the Receiving Party's use of the Digital Data.) $0.00 for the initial transmission of PDF, CAD or REVIT files; $500.00 for each subsequently requested transmission of PDF, CAD or REVIT files (payable in advance). This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and will terminate upon Substantial Completion of the Project, as that term is defined in AIA Document A201T"t-2007, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, unless otherwise agreed by the parties and set forth below. (Indicate when this Agreement will terminate, if other than the date of Substantial Completion.) I TRANSMITTING PARTY (Signatmm) (Printed name and title) I (Table deleted)(Paragraphs deleted) RECEIVING PARTY (Signature) (Printed name and title) AIA Document C1061" — 2013. Copyright 0 2007 and 2013 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This Ate i +cumont is Init protected by U.S. Copyright Lawn and International Treatise. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ate Dmumont, or any portion of it,. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecut d to the maxinium extent possibio under the taw. This document was produced by t AIA software at 16:07:30 on 04/11/2016 under Order No.1610138667_1 which expires on 03126/2017, and is not for resale. User Notes: (947145300) CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 32 00 — CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Site condition reports. 6. Special reports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. C. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 calendar days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. D. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. Use Scheduling component of Project Web site software specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination," for Windows XP operating system. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt -chart -type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. Equipment at Project site. 4. Material deliveries. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 6. Accidents. 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (see special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. [Construction] [Work] Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. 16. Equipment or system tests and startups. 17. Partial completions and occupancies. 18. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01 32 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 32 33 — PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years. @2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs. B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out -of -focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image -editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Contractor. 1. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 2. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 3. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Directed Construction Photographs: The architect or the contractor may instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. G. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Will inform photographer of desired vantage points. END OF SECTION 01 32 33 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 33 00 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device -independent and display resolution -independent fixed -layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in ACAD. C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow fifteen (15) working days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 working days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently, record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. I. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. M. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Contractor's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. C. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. 4. BIM File Incorporation: Shop Drawing files into Building Information Model established for Project. a. Prepare Shop Drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Drawings. b. Refer to Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for coordination drawings. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: PDF electronic file. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED -DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated -Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three (3) paper copies signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. C. BIM File Incorporation: delegated -design drawing and data files into Building Information Model established for Project. Prepare delegated -design drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Drawings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party- C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 01 33 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 37 00 — SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Submit to the Architect a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the work, within ten (10) days after award of Contract. B. Upon request of the Architect, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. C. The Schedule of Values, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.2 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Type schedule on 8-1/2" x 11" white paper; Contractor's standard forms and/or automated printout will be considered for approval by Architect upon Contractor's request. Identify Schedule with: 1. Title of project and location. 2. Architect and project number. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Contract designation. 5. Date of submission. B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. C. Follow the table of contents of this Project Manual as the format for listing component items: Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the Specifications. D. For each major line item, list sub -values of major products or operations under the item. E. For the Various Portions of the Work: 1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit. 2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into: a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. b. The total installed value. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum. G. The Schedule of Values shall be coordinated with the Construction Schedule to show the value of work completed for each trade at significant points. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 37 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.3 SUBSCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL A. Submit a Sub -schedule of unit cost and quantities for: 1. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products. B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values. C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste. D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into: 1. Cost of the material delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid. 2. Installation costs, including Contractor's overhead and profit. E. The installed unit value, multiplied by the quantity listed, shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values. END OF SECTION 01 37 00 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 37 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 40 00 — QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality -assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality -assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. E. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Use of trade -specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality -Control Plan: For quality -assurance and quality -control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality -control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic -force -resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality -assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind -force -resisting system or a wind -resisting component listed in the wind -force -resisting system quality -assurance plan prepared by Architect. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY -CONTROL PLAN A. Quality -Control Plan, General: Submit quality -control plan within 10 working days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five working days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality -assurance and quality -control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality -Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality -assurance and quality -control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. Project quality -control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality -control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: Contractor -performed tests and inspections including subcontractor -performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor -elected tests and inspections. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." Owner -performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory -Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven (7) calendar days for initial review and each re -review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality -control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality -control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." C. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in pre -installation conferences, examination of substrates and 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality -control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 01 40 00 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 41 00 — REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 CODE REQUIREMENTS A. Perform all work on this Project in strict accordance with, but not limited to, applicable requirements and portions of the latest adopted editions of the currently adopted codes, revisions, amendments, supplements, and their references. 1. Florida Building Code: a. Florida Building Code b. Florida Building Code — Fuel Gas c. Florida Building Code — Mechanical d. Florida Building Code — Plumbing e. National Electrical Code — FBC Chapter 27 f. FBC Referenced Codes and Standards — Chapter 35 2. Florida Fire Prevention Code, Ch. 69A-60, Florida Administrative Code, which includes: a. NFPA 1 b. Referenced Mandatory Codes and Standards listed in 69A-60.005, FAC c. Referenced Mandatory Codes and Standards listed in NFPA 101 3. U.S. Access Board, Americans with Disabilities Act Architectural Guidelines, July 23, 2004, accessibility requirements for children 4. American Society of Civil Engineers — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures - ASCE 7 5. State Fire Marshal's rule 69A-58 FAC 1.3 CODE STANDARDS A. All work shall conform to applicable portions of the adopted, or the latest edition of the standards listed, which shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Aluminum Association (AA) 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 6. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 8. American Welding Society (AWS) 9. Architectural Woodworking Institute (AWI) 10. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AAMA) 11. Commercial Standards (CS) 12. Federal Specifications and Standards (FSS) 13. National Occupations Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 14. National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 15. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (SMACNA) 16. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 17. U.S. of America Standards Institute (ASI) 18. U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standards (USDCPS) 1.4 CODE DISCREPANCIES A. In case of discrepancy between the codes, standards, and specifications listed, the most strict or most stringent requirement shall govern. 1.5 COMPLIANCE WITH CODES A. A permit issued will be construed as permission to proceed with construction, and not as authority to violate, cancel, alter, or set aside any of the provisions of any Codes. B. Nor shall issuance of a permit prevent the Owner from thereafter requiring a correction of errors in plans, construction, or violations of any Codes. PART -PRODUCTS 2.1 Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Not Used END OF SECTION 01 41 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 41 30 — TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified testing. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the Laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 2. Employment of the Laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the work of the Contract. 3. Contractor shall pay for additional testing required for inadequate or noncomplying work and for his convenience. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract: Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders or approvals of public authorities. B. Respective Sections of Specifications: Certification of products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory: Conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications", published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Personnel: Minimum of two (2) years experience performing testing that meets requirements of these Specifications. Agent of laboratory performing field sampling and field testing of concrete shall be certified by the American Concrete Institute (ACI) as a Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1, by an equivalent recognized national authority for an equivalent level of competence, or shall be a licensed Professional Engineer. C. Approved Companies: 1. MACTEC 2. Nodarse & Associates, Inc. 3. PSI - Professional Service Industries, Inc. 4. Universal Engineering Services, Inc. 5. Driggers Engineering Services, Inc. 6. Ardaman & Associates, Inc. 1.4 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Architect, Engineer and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 30 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. 3. Utilize properly calibrated equipment, calibrated within past twelve (12) months by devices of accuracy conforming to National Bureau of Standards or within accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection: Two (2) copies to Architect; one (1) copy each to Owner, Contractor, and Record Documents file. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing Laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of Laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and Specification Section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect. E. Perform additional test(s) as required by Architect or Owner. F. Submittals: Submit qualifications of technicians, inspectors, engineers and the organization to perform services for this Project. Include copies of certificates and license numbers to confirm compliance. G. Keep time and cost separate for additional testing and inspection as outlined herein. Notify the Architect of additional testing and inspection required. 1.5 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Employ, coordinate and pay for the services. B. Cooperate with Laboratory personnel, provide access to work, to manufacturer's operations. Provide copy of Project Documents to the Testing Agency. C. Secure and deliver to the Laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 30 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Provide to the Laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by the Testing Laboratory. E. Furnish copies of products test reports as required. Furnish Incidental Labor and Facilities: 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspection and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. G. Notify Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for Laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. Minimum notice: 24 hours prior to scheduled test. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for Laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence. H. Employ and pay for the services of Testing Laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required: 1. For the Contractor's convenience. 2. When initial tests indicate work does not comply with Contract Documents. 3. Make arrangements with Laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. Do not place or install any material which does not meet specified requirements. Do not place or install any material over or on a substrate that has not met test requirements. END OF SECTION 01 41 30 02017, HJ/PROJ. 16054.00 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 30 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 0142 00 — REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Abbreviations and acronyms used in Contract Documents to identify reference standards. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes establish stricter standards. B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified or a different date is designated by an applicable code. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS A. Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source when needed for proper performance of work, or when required for submittal by Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006 AAC Architectural Anodizer Council 1000 N. Rand Road, Suite 214 Wauconda, IL 60084 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1540 E. Dundee Road, Suite 310 Palatine, IL 60067 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W., Suite 225 Washington, D.C. 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute 22400 West Seven Mile Road Detroit, MI 48219 ADA Americans with Disabilities Act Regulations Title III (28 CFR Part 36) AFI Air Filter Institute Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, 8th Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20036 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association 1119 A Street Tacoma, WA 98401 ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, VA 22209 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASPA American Sod Producers Association Association Building Ninth and Minnesota Hastings, NE 68901 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206 AWPA American Wood Preservers Association P. O. Box 849 Stevensville, MD 21666 AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau P. O. Box 6085 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Arlington, VA 22206 AWS American Welding Society, Inc. 550 N.W. LeJeune Road Miami, FL 33126 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive, Suite 300 Reston, VA 22091 CDA Copper Development Association Greenwich Office Park 2 Box1840 Greenwich, CT 06836-1840 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1776 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W., Suite 500 Washington, D.C. 20036 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission Washington, D.C. 20207 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195 CSI Construction Specifications Institute 601 Madison Street Alexandria, VA 22314 DOE Department of Education State of Florida Tallahassee, FL 32301 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains, NY 10604 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 "M" Street, S.W. Washington, DC 20460 FBC Florida Building Code Florida Dept. of Community Affairs 2555 Shumard Oak Blvd. Tallahassee, FL 32399-2100 FDOT Florida Department of Transportation 605 Suwannee Tallahassee, FL 32301 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association 3310 Harrison Topeka, KS 66611 002017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL FHA Federal Housing Administration 451 7th Street, S.W., Room 3158 Washington, DC 20410-5500 FIA Factory Insurance Association FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston -Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062 FS Federal Specifications General Services Administration Superintendent of Documents Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20234 GA Gypsum Association 810 First Street N.E., #510 Washington, D.C. 20002 GSA General Services Administration 18th and "F" Street, NW Washington, DC 20405 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 245 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 MIL Military Specifications Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 MSA Manufacturers Standardization Association NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 South Federal, Room 400 Chicago, IL 60605 NAFM National Association of Fan Manufacturing NAPF National Association of Plastic Fabricators NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P. O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 NEC National Electric Code (See National Fire Protection Association) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 "L" Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, D.C. 20037 NFC National Fire Codes (See National Fire Protection Association) 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269 NPC National Plumbing Code NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 8600 Bryn Mawr Avenue Chicago, IL 60631 NSI National Sanitation Institute OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration Technical Data Center: Frances Perkins Dept. of Labor Building, Room N2439 200 Constitution Avenue, NW Washington, D.C. 20210 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077-1083 PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute 5342 Boulevard Place Indianapolis, IN 46208 PS Product Standards, National Bureau of Standards U.S. Department of Commerce Office of Engineering Standard Services Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 SDI Steel Deck Institute P. O. Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SDI Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107 SJI Steel Joist Institute 3127 10th Avenue North Myrtle Beach, SC 29577-6760 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. P. O. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08542 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062 1.4 APPLICABLE CODES A. Construction shall conform to the requirements of the following applicable codes and standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act Regulations (A.D.A.) Title III (28 CFR Part 36), 1991 edition. ❑ Florida Accessibility Code (Chapter 11) — ADA with Florida Amendments 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ❑ Specifications for Buildings and Facilities providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People, ANSI A117.1-latest edition. ❑ National Elevator Code, ANSI A17.1-1984 with Supplements A1985, B1985 & C 1986. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): ❑ ASHRAE Handbook, latest edition. 4. Florida Building Code 2007: ❑ Florida Dept. of Community Affairs 5. Florida Statute on Accessibility by Handicapped Persons: ❑ Chapter 553, Part V; Florida Americans with Disabilities Implementation Act, October 1, 1993; Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction, October 1997 Edition. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): ❑ NFPA-10 (1998) Portable Fire Extinguishers. ❑ NFPA-12 (1999) Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems. ❑ NFPA-54 (1999) National Fuel Code. ❑ NFPA-58 (1999) LP Gas Code. ❑ NFPA-70 (2005) National Electrical Code. ❑ NFPA-72 (1999) National Fire Alarm Code. ❑ NFPA-75 (1999) Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment. ❑ NFPA-78 (1999) Lightning Protection Code. ❑ NFPA-80 (1999) Fire Doors and Fire Windows. ❑ NFPA-90A (1999) Installation of Air Conditioning & Ventilating Systems. ❑ NFPA-90B (1999) Installation of Warm Air Heating & Air Conditioning. ❑ NFPA-91 (1999) Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials. ❑ NFPA-92A (1996) Smoke Control Systems. ❑ NFPA-101 (2000) Life Safety Code. ❑ NFPA-105 (1999) Smoke Control Door Assemblies. ❑ NFPA-110 (1999) Emergency & Standby Power Systems. ❑ NFPA-220 (1999) Types of Building Construction. ❑ NFPA-231 (1999) General Storage. ❑ NFPA-232 (1999) Protection of Records. ❑ NFPA-241 (1999) Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations. ❑ NFPA-251 (1999) Fire Tests of Building Construction & Materials. ❑ NFPA-252 (1999) Fire Tests of Door Assemblies ❑ NFPA-253 (2000) Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. ❑ NFPA-255 (2000) Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ❑ NFPA-256 (1998) Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. ❑ NFPA-257 (1998) Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL ❑ NFPA-703 (1995) Fire Retardant Impregnated Wood & Fire Retardant Coatings for Building Materials. 7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): ❑ Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Guide, 1995 Edition. 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): ❑ Fire Resistance Directory, 2002 Edition, Vol. 1 & 2. ❑ Building Materials Directory, 2000 Edition. END OF SECTION 0142 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 50 00 — TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer -service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Owner will pay water -service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric -power -service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation -Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire -Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire -prevention program. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Moisture -Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. Indicate procedures for discarding water -damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water -damaged Work. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire -resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust -control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air -filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust -control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized -steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized -steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire -resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame -spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Dust -Control Adhesive -Surface Walk -off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common -Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project -site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return -air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures". C. Air -Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four -stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities. in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air -filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust -producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust -containment devices. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment. G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. H. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. Install and ,operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 3.3 A. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire -fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. H. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation -control Drawings. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation -control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Pest Control: Engage pest -control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. J. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor -to -ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire -retardant -treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire -retardant -treated plywood. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water -dampened foot mats in vestibule. 3. Where fire -resistance -rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 6. Protect air -handling equipment. 7. Provide walk -off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire -prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire -protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture -Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water -damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum -based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 50 00 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 50 10 — PROJECT CONSTRUCTION SIGN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Requirements for Project Construction Sign. B. General Requirements: Complywith the following: 1. Schedule for Sign: Erect Project sign at the beginning of construction and it shall remain in -place until Certificate of Occupancy has been issued. a. New Construction: Erect Project sign as soon as site work has established minimum grade elevations and rough grading for roadways have been completed. 2. Location of Project Sign: Project sign shall be erected at a location indicated by the Architect. a. Bottom face of the Project sign shall be a minimum of 4 ft. above grade. 3. Other Site Signs: Unless required by local, state, or Federal Code or safety standards, no other signs will be permitted at the Project site. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Signage Information: Architect will provide information for the Project sign electronically. 1. Architect will review with the designated Owner that the indicated information is correct. 2. Sign fabricator shall be responsible for ensuring that the correct information is indicated on the Project sign. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Requirement: Project sign shall comply with all applicable requirements of the Florida Building Code with the applicable Supplements, including wind load recommendations and requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Construct Project sign of the following: 1. Plywood Sign Faces: 2, 4 ft. x 8 ft. x 3/4 inch thick, exterior grade plywood. a. Plywood faces shall be constructed into a "V' format on a 90-degree angle. 2. Posts: Not less than 2 posts per 4 ft. x 8 ft. sign face. a. Size of Posts: As required per Florida Building Code wind load requirements. b. Material: Posts may be fabricated of exterior grade, treated lumber or galvanized steel. 3. Fasteners: Use fasteners that are zinc -coated to inhibit rust. a. Number of Fasteners: As required by structural requirements. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION SIGN 01 50 10 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 FABRICATION A. Project sign shall be fabricated off -site and brought to the Project site ready for erection in location as directed by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 0150 10 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION SIGN 01 50 10 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 56 39 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary site fencing. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for removing existing trees and shrubs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape or the average of the smallest and largest diameters at 6 inches (150 mm) above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4-inch (100-mm) size; and 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch (100-mm) size. B. Plant -Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings. C. Tree -Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius equal to the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated. D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. 1. Species and size of tree. 2. Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each. 3. Reason for pruning. 4. Description of pruning to be performed. 5. Description of maintenance following pruning. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm. D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. E. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. F. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA or Registered Consulting Arborist as designated by ASCA. B. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but not limited to, the following: a. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Enforcing requirements for protection zones. C. Arborist's responsibilities. d. Field quality control. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054,00 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 2 39 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Stockpiled topsoil from location identified by General Contractor. B. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1. Type: Ground or shredded bark. 2. Size Range: 3 inches (76 mm) maximum, 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum. 3. Color: Natural. C. Protection -Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect. Chain -Link Protection -Zone Fencing: Galvanized -steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch (50-mm) opening, 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) diameter wire chain -link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts[; with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails] [;with 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter top tension wire] and 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. a. Height: 4 feet (1.2 m). 2. Wood Protection -Zone Fencing: Constructed of two 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) horizontal rails, with 2-by-4-inch (100-by-100-mm) preservative -treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart, and lower rail set halfway between top rail and ground. a. Height: 4 feet (1.2 m). Plastic Protection -Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high -density extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch (50-mm) maximum opening in pattern and weighing a minimum of 0.4 Ib/ft. (0.6 kg/m); remaining flexible from minus 60 to plus 200 deg F (minus 16 to plus 93 deg C); inert to most chemicals and acids; minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) and ultimate tensile strength of 2680 psi (18.5 MPa); secured with plastic bands or galvanized -steel or stainless -steel wire ties; and supported by tubular or T-shape galvanized -steel posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart. a. Height: 4 feet (1.2 m). b. Color: High -visibility orange, nonfading. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation -control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree and plant protection. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Tie a 1-inch (25-mm) blue -vinyl tape around each tree trunk at 54 inches (1372 mm) above the ground. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C. Tree -Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree -protection zones and other areas indicated. 1. Apply 4-inch (100-mm) average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 mm) of tree trunks. 3.3 TREE- AND PLANT -PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection -Zone Fencing: Install protection -zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation. 1. Chain -Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. B. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash. C. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. D. Maintain protection -zone fencing in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 1. Do not remove protection -zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain root buffer so long as access is permitted. 3.4 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction and as required for root pruning. D. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. 3.5 ROOT PRUNING A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as follows: 1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Cut Ends: Do not paint cut root ends. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 4. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots 12 inches (300 mm) outside of the protection zone, by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow -tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 3.6 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as follows: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. 2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the following: Types of Pruning: Thinning and Raising. Specialty Pruning: Vista. 3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. B. Chip removed branches and use for tree protection mulch or dispose of off -site. 3.7 REGRADING A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. B. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. C. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches (50 mm) or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant -protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. 3.9 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs. 2. Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs. 3. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. 4. Perform repairs within 24 hours. 5. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by Architect. B. Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures 4 inches (100 mm) or smaller in caliper size. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL p 2. Provide two new trees of 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size for each tree being replaced that measures more than 4 inches (100 mm) in caliper size. a. Species: Species selected by Architect. 3. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Division 32 Section "Plants." C. Soil Aeration: Where directed by Architect, aerate surface soil compacted during construction. Aerate 10 feet (3 m) beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches (900 mm) to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) deep at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand. 3.10 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 01 56 39 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 0160 00 — PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of -design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 work days of receipt of request, or seven calendar days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Non -restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non -restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 60 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 73 00 — EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. B. 1.4 A. B. C. Cutting: Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For land surveyor. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 work days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. D. Certified Surveys: Submit two (2) copies signed by land surveyor. E. Final Property Survey: Submit ten (10) copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land -surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. C. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire -suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire -detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. C. Exterior curtain -wall construction. d. Sprayed fire -resistive material. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration -control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on -site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in -place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field -engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Pre -installation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at pre -installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend pre -installation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on -site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 01 73 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 74 00 —WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co -execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors in accordance with Division 0 Section "General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions". B. Number of original signed copies required: Three (3) each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item: 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. In no case shall the date begin prior to acceptance by Architect of that portion of the work. 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. C. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2" x 11" punch sheets for standard 3-ring binder: a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS". List: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 WARRANTIES 01 74 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Title of Project. b. Location of Project. C. Name of Contractor. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 3-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers, all of same color. 1.4 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction: 1. Submit documents within ten (10) days after inspection and acceptance. B. Otherwise make submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. C. For items of work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.5 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contracts as specified in respective Sections of Specifications. B. Submit additional manufacturer's standard warranties where available at no additional cost, but not specifically indicated in respective Specification Sections. END OF SECTION 01 74 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 WARRANTIES 01 74 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 74 19 — CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off -site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Award. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. B. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA -approved certification program. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste Form CWM-4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 2. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste. including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on -site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Burning: Burning of waste materials i s D. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01 74 19 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 77 00 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final Completion procedures. 3. Final cleaning. 4. Repair of the Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 work days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain signature for receipt of submittals. Submit test/adjust/balance records. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 work days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. I. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. M. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned -out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 78 23 — OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Product maintenance manuals. 3. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1A CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 working days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 working days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. B. Descriptions: Include the following: C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.2 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.3 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. C. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents." D. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01 78 23 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 78 39 — PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file plots. B. Record Specifications: Submit of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked -up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record -keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit of each submittal. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked -up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 78 39 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 01 79 00 — DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer -produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory -authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. C. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. C. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. C. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. C. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. M. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. C. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. C. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. B. 3.2 A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. INSTRUCTION Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven calendar days' advance notice. C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on -site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in -place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION 01 79 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 02 41 16 — STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements. b. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in -place and/or removing site utilities. C. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with NFPA 1 — Chapter 29 and NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction Alteration and Demolition Operation Latest Adopted Edition B. Florida Building Code — FBC 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off -site unless indicated to be salvaged. 1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building. C. Submit plans and proposed protection measures to address the following: 1. Protecting adjacent property. 2. Environmental protection 3. Dust control 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 16 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Noise control 5. Construction barrier locations D. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services. E. Pre -demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Specification Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before the Work begins. F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structures. 3. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review and finalize protection requirements. 5. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. 6. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA -approved certification program. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted. 1. Provide not less than 72hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied buildings. 2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 0241 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Notification of Owners of Utility Lines and Equipment 1. Notify the Owner or local authority owning any conduits, wires, pipes, or equipment affected by demolition work. 2. Arrange for removal or relocation of affected items and pay fees or costs in conjunction with removal or relocation, except as otherwise noted. D. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1.10 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. On -site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. B. Coordination 1. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on -site operations or operations of adjacent occupied buildings. 1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions, and structures. 1.12 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff, and erosion control, and disposal of demolished materials. D. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction. E. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. F. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, and hydrants, without permits. G. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials and contact the Architect and Owner immediately if discovered. H. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination. I. No demolition will occur during occupied hours without the permission of the Owner. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 0241 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Specification Section "Earth Moving." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations. D. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. 3.2 CLARIFICATION A. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. B. Before commencing the work of this section, verify with the architect all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. 3.3 SCHEDULING A. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for the public and the owner. B. Avoid interference with the use of, and passage to and from, adjacent facilities. 3.4 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC A. Do not interfere with use of adjacent buildings and facilities. Maintain free and safe passage to and from adjacent buildings and facilities. Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed travel ways if required by governing authorities. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 0241 16 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.5 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations as directed by the Architect and Owner or governing authorities. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 3.6 PREPARATION A. Verify that structures to be demolished are discontinued in use and ready for removal. B. Do not commence work until all conditions and requirements of all applicable public agencies are complied with. C. Arrange for, and verify termination of utility services to include removing meters and capping lines. D. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site; at the pre -demolition meeting before commencement of the work, verify with the Architect and Owner all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. E. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.7 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Utilities to be Disconnected: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished as indicated. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures. 4. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade or as indicated. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. B. Existing Utilities to Remain: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations as indicated. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 0241 16 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Existing Utility Structures: Demolish existing below -grade utility structures as indicated. Fill abandoned utility structures with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in specification section "Earth Moving." Hydraulic Elevator Systems: Demolish and remove elevator system, including cylinder, plunger, well assembly, steel well casing and liner, oil supply lines, and tanks. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings. B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in specification section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. 4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 6. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that are exposed to building demolition operations. 7. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings. D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 3.9 DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. 2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 24 hours after flame -cutting operations. 3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 0241 16 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental -protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 3.10 DEMOLITION A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground impact and dust generation. C. Below -Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below -grade construction. 3.11 SITE RESTORATION A. Below -Grade Areas: Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in specification section "Earth Moving." B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 3.12 REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations. 3.13 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA -approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and recycle as indicated. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 0241 16 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Do not burn demolished materials. 3.14 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 16 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 0241 16 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 03 11 00 — SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to design, install, and remove formwork for cast -in -place concrete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. Secure to forms as required or set for embedment as required, all miscellaneous metal items, sleeves, reglets, anchor bolts, inserts, and other items furnished under other Sections and required to be cast into concrete or approved in advance by the Engineer. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03 21 00, Site Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03 30 01, Site Cast -in -Place Concrete. C. Section 03 60 00, Grout. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Form release agent 2. Form ties B. Samples 1. Demonstrate to the Engineer on a designated area of the concrete substructure exterior surface that the form release agent will not adversely affect concrete surfaces to be painted, coated, or otherwise finished and will not affect the forming materials. 2. Certify form release agent is suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non -toxic and free of taste and odor). 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301 Standard Specification for Structural Concrete 2. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 3. ACI 347 Formwork for Concrete B. American Plywood Association (APA) 1. Material grades and designations as specified C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Architectural Concrete is wall, slab, beam, or column concrete which will have surfaces exposed to view in the finished work. It includes similar exposed surfaces in water -containment structures from the top of walls to 2 ft below the normal water surface in open tanks and basins. B. Formwork shall be designed and erected in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318 and as recommended in ACI 347 and shall comply with all applicable regulations and codes. The design shall consider any special requirements due to the use of plasticized and/or retarded set concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is to establish the standard of quality and general configurations desired. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Forms for cast -in -place concrete shall be made of wood, metal, or other approved material. Construct wood forms of sound lumber or plywood of suitable dimensions and free from knotholes and loose knots. Where used for exposed surfaces, dress and match boards. Sand plywood smooth and fit adjacent panels with tight joints. Metal forms may be used when approved by the Engineer and shall be of an appropriate type for the class of work involved. All forms shall be designed and constructed to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring minimal finishing or repairs. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Wall Forms 1. Forms for all exposed exterior and interior concrete walls shall be "Plyform" exterior -grade plywood panels manufactured in compliance with the APA and bearing the trademark of that group or an equal acceptable to the Engineer. Provide B grade or better veneer on all faces to be placed against concrete during forming. The class of material and grades of interior plies shall be of sufficient strength and stiffness to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring minimal finishing and grinding. 2. All joints or gaps in forms shall be taped, gasketed, plugged, and/or caulked with an approved material so that the joint will remain watertight and will withstand placing pressures without bulging or creating surface patterns. C. Rustication strips shall be at the location and shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings. Moldings for chamfers and rustications shall be milled and planed smooth. Rustications and corner strips shall be of a nonabsorbent material, compatible with the form surface, and fully sealed on all sides to prohibit the loss of paste or water between the two surfaces. D. Column Forms 1. Rectangular columns shall be formed as specified for wall forms. All corners shall have a 3/-inch chamfer unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. E. Form Release Agent Coat all forming surfaces in contact with concrete using an effective, non- staining, non -residual, water -based, bond -breaking form coating unless otherwise noted. Form release agents used in potable water containment structures shall be suitable for use in contact with potable water and shall be non toxic and free of taste or odor. F. Form Ties 1. Form ties encased in concrete other than those specified in the following paragraphs shall be designed so that after removal of the projecting part no metal shall remain within V/2-inch of the face of the concrete. The part of the tie to be removed shall be at least %2-inch diameter or be provided with a wood or metal cone at least '/2-inch diameter and 1'/Z-inch long. Form ties in concrete exposed to view shall be the cone washer type. 2. Form ties for exposed exterior and interior walls shall be as specified in the preceding paragraph except that the cones shall be of approved wood or plastic. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Flat bar ties for panel forms, if used, shall have plastic or rubber inserts having a minimum depth of 1'/Z-in and sufficient dimensions to permit proper patching of the tie hole. 4. Ties for liquid containment structures shall have an integral waterstop that is tightly welded to the tie. 5. Common wire shall not be used for form ties. 6. Alternate form ties consisting of tapered through bolts at least 1-in diameter at smallest end or through bolts that use a removable tapered sleeve of the same minimum size may be used at the Contractor's option. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of the system and spacing of ties before ordering or purchase forming. Clean, fill, and seal the form tie hole with non -shrink cement grout. The Contractor shall be responsible for watertightness of the form ties and any repairs needed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Forms shall be used for all cast -in -place concrete, including sides of footings. Forms shall be constructed and placed so that the resulting concrete will be of the shape, lines, dimensions, and appearance indicated on the Drawings. B. Forms for walls shall have removable panels at the bottom for cleaning, inspection, and joint surface preparation. Forms for walls of considerable height shall have closable intermediate inspection ports. Tremies and hoppers for placing concrete shall be used to allow concrete inspection, prevent segregation, and prevent the accumulation of hardened concrete on the forms above the fresh concrete. C. Molding, bevels, or other types of chamfer strips shall be placed to produce blockouts, rustications, or chamfers as shown on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. Chamfer strips shall be provided at horizontal and vertical projecting corners to produce a %-inch chamfer. Rectangular or trapezoidal moldings shall be placed in locations requiring sealants where specified or shown on the Drawings. Sizes of moldings shall conform to the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. D. Forms shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand construction loads and vibration and to prevent displacement or sagging between supports. Construct forms so that the concrete will not be damaged by their removal. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the adequacy of the forming system. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Before form material is reused, all surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, all damaged places repaired, all projecting nails withdrawn, and all protrusions smoothed. Reuse of wooden forms for other than rough finish will be permitted only if a 'like new" condition of the form is maintained. 3.2 FORM TOLERANCES A. Forms shall be surfaced, designed, and constructed in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 347 and shall meet the following additional requirements for the specified finishes: 1. Formed Surface Exposed to View: Edges of all form panels in contact with concrete shall be flush within 1/16-inch and forms for plane surfaces shall be such that the concrete will be planed within 3/16-inch in 4 feet. Forms shall be tight to prevent the passage of mortar, water, and grout. The maximum deviation of the finish wall surface at any point shall not exceed Y-inch from the intended surface as shown on the Drawings. Form panels shall be arranged symmetrically and in an orderly manner to minimize the number of seams. 2. Formed surfaces not exposed to view or buried shall meet requirements of Class "C" Surface in ACI 347. 3. Formed rough surfaces including mass concrete, pipe encasement, electrical duct encasement, and other similar installations shall have no minimum requirements for surface smoothness and surface deflections. The overall dimensions of the concrete shall be plus or minus 1 inch. 3.3 FORM PREPARATION A. Wood forms in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an effective release agent before the forms are installed. B. Steel forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and mill scale and other ferrous deposits shall be sandblasted or otherwise removed from the contact surface for all forms, except those used for surfaces receiving a rough finish. All forms shall have the contact surfaces coated with a release agent. 3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from removal of forms. Forms and shoring for structural slabs or beams shall remain in place in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347. Form removal shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 and a curing compound applied. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.5 INSPECTION A. The Engineer on site shall be notified when the forms are complete and ready for inspection at least 6 hours before the proposed concrete placement. B. Failure of the forms to comply with the requirements specified in this Section or to produce concrete complying with requirements of this Section shall be grounds for rejection of that portion of the concrete work. Rejected work shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Such repair or replacement shall be subject to the requirements of this Section and approval of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03 11 00 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 03 15 00 — SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install accessories for concrete joints as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03 11 00, Site Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03 21 00, Site Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03 30 01, Site Cast -In -Place Concrete. D. Section 03 35 00, Site Concrete Finishes. E. Section 03 60 00, Site Grout. F. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Standard Waterstops: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, splicing methods, and conformity to ASTM standards. 2. Special Waterstops: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, location of use, storage requirements, splicing methods, installation instructions, and conformity to ASTM standards. 3. Premolded joint fillers: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Bond breaker: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 5. Expansion joint dowels: Product data on the complete assembly, including dowels, coatings, lubricants, spacers, sleeves, expansion caps, installation requirements, and conformity to ASTM standards. 6. Compressible joint filler: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03 15 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 7. Bonding agents: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, application requirements, and conformity to ASTM standards. B. Certifications 1. Certification that all materials used within the joint system are compatible with each other. 2. Certification that materials used in the construction of joints are suitable for use in contact with potable water 30 days after installation. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A675—Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot -Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties. 2. ASTM C881—Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 3. ASTM C1059—Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete. 4. ASTM, D1751—Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 5. ASTM D1752—Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (CRD). 1. CRD C572—Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop. C. Federal Specifications 1. FS SS-S-210A—Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for Expansion Joints and Pipe Joints. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03 15 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The use of the manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. All materials used together in a given joint (bond breakers, backer rods, joint fillers, sealants, etc) shall be compatible with one another. Coordinate selection of suppliers and products to ensure compatibility. Under no circumstances shall asphaltic bond breakers or joint fillers be used in joints receiving sealant. C. All chemical sealant type waterstops shall be products specifically manufactured for the purpose for which they will be used and the products shall have been successfully used on similar structures for more than 5 years. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Standard Waterstops Steel Plate Waterstops Non -expansion joint. 6-in-by-Y4-inch steel plate waterstops shall be fabricated from weldable carbon steel plate with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. The Contractor shall use 4-inch by 1/4-inch steel plate waterstops for wall horizontal construction joints. B. Special Waterstops 1. Base Seal PVC Waterstop - The waterstop shall be made by extruding elastomeric plastic compound with virgin polyvinylchloride as the basic resins. The compound shall contain no reprocessed materials. Minimum tensile strength of the waterstop shall be 1750 psi. The waterstop shall conform to CRD C572. Waterstops shall be Style 925 for expansion joints, Style 928 for contraction joints, and Style 927 for construction joints by Greenstreak Plastic Products, St. Louis, MO or equal. 2. Preformed adhesive waterstops - The waterstop shall be a rope -type preformed plastic waterstop meeting the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-210A. The rope shall have a cross-section of approximately 1 square inch unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. The waterstop shall be Synko- Flex waterstop as manufactured by Synko-Flex Products of Houston, TX or equal. Primer for the material shall be as recommended by the waterstop manufacturer. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03 15 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Premolded Joint Filler 1. Premolded joint filler structures. Self -expanding cork, premolded joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1752, Type III. The thickness shall be %-inch unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Premolded joint filler sidewalk and roadway concrete pavements or where fiber joint filler is specifically noted on the Drawings. The joint filler shall be asphalt impregnated fiber board conforming to ASTM D1751. Thickness shall be 3/4 in unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. D. Bond Breaker 1. Bond breaker tape shall be an adhesive -backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape which will satisfactorily adhere to the premolded joint filler or concrete surface as required. The tape shall be the same width as the joint. 2. Except where tape is specifically called for on the Drawings, bond breaker for concrete shall be either bond breaker tape or a nonstaining type bond prevention coating such as Williams Tilt -up Compound by Williams Distributors Inc.; Silcoseal 77, by SCA Construction Supply Division, Superior Concrete Accessories or equal. E. Expansion Joint Dowels Dowels shall be smooth steel conforming to ASTM A675, Grade 70. Dowels must be straight and clean, free of loose flaky rust and loose scale. Dowels may be sheared to length provided deformation from true shape caused by shearing does not exceed 0.04-in on the diameter of the dowel and extends no more than 0.04-in from the end. Bars shall be coated with a bond breaker on the expansion end of the dowel. Expansion caps shall be provided on the expansion end. Caps shall allow for at least 1-1/2-in of expansion. F. Bonding Agent 1. Epoxy bonding agent shall be a two -component, solvent -free, moisture - insensitive, epoxy -resin material conforming to ASTM C881, Type II. The bonding agent shall be Sikadur 32 Hi Mod by Sika Corporation of Lyndhurst, N.J.; Concressive Liquid (LPL) by Master Builders of Cleveland, OH, or equal. Acrylic may be used if approved by the Engineer. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03 15 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Compressible Joint Filler 1. The joint filler shall be a non -extruded watertight strip material use to fill expansion joints between structures. The material shall be capable of being compressed at least 40% for 70 hours at 68°F and subsequently recovering at least 20% of its original thickness in the first 1/2 hour after unloading. Compressible joint filler shall be Evasote 380 E.S.P, by E Poxy Industries, Inc., Ravena, NY, Sikaflex 1a by Sika, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Standard Waterstops 1. Install waterstops for all joints where indicated on the Drawings. Waterstops shall be continuous around all corners and intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. Splices shall be made by welding. 2. Steel plate waterstops shall be spliced by either butt welding the ends of the plates together or lapping the plates and fillet welding along the full width of the plate at both ends of the lap. 3. Steel plate waterstops shall be firmly secured in position during concrete placement. 4. Horizontal waterstops in slabs shall be clamped in position by the bulkhead (unless previously set in concrete). 5. Waterstops shall be installed so that half of the width will be embedded on each side of the joint. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the waterstop is completely embedded in void free concrete. 6. Waterstops shall be terminated 3 inches below the exposed top of walls. Expansion joint waterstop center bulbs shall be plugged with foam rubber, 1 inch deep, at the point of termination. B. Special Waterstops 1. Install special waterstops at joints where specifically noted on the Drawings. Waterstops shall be continuous around all corners and intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. 2. Each piece of the waterstop shall be of maximum practicable length to provide a minimum number of connections or splices. Connections and splices shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in this Section. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03 15 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NaTMOUVAa11111 3. Waterstops shall be terminated 3 inches below the exposed top of walls. C. Construction Joints 1. Make construction joints only at locations shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Any additional or relocation of construction joints proposed by the Contractor must be submitted to the Engineer for written approval. 2. Additional or relocated joints should be located where they least impair the strength of the member. In general, locate joints within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams, and girders. However, if a beam intersects a girder at the joint, offset the joint a distance equal to twice the width of the member being connected. Locate joints in walls and columns at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders and at tops of footings or floor slabs. Do not locate joints between beams, girders, column capitals, or drop panels and the slabs above them. Do not locate joints between brackets or haunches and walls or columns supporting them. 3. All joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcing steel through the joint as indicated on the Drawings. When joints in beams are allowed, provide a shear key and inclined dowels as approved by the Engineer. 4. Provide sealant grooves for joint sealant where indicated on the Drawings. 5. At all construction joints and at concrete joints designated on the Drawings to be "roughened," uniformly roughen the surface of the concrete to a full amplitude (distance between high and low points or side to side) of approximately %-inch to expose a fresh face. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces of loose or weakened materials by waterblasting or sandblasting and prepare for bonding. 6. Provide waterstops in all wall and slab construction joints in liquid containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 7. Keyways shall not be used in construction joints unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. D. Expansion Joints 1. Do not extend through expansion joints, reinforcement, or other embedded metal items that are continuously bonded to concrete on each side of joint. 2. Position premolded joint filler material accurately. Secure the joint filler against displacement during concrete placement and compaction. Place joint filler over the face of the joint, allowing for sealant grooves as detailed on the Drawings. Tape all joint filler splices to prevent intrusion of mortar. Seal expansion joints as shown on the Drawings. 3. Expansion joints shall be %-inch wide unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03 15 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Where indicated on the Drawings, install smooth dowels at right angles to expansion joints. Align dowels accurately with finished surface. Rigidly hold in place and support during concrete placement. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, apply oil or grease to one end of all dowels through expansion joints. Provide plastic expansion caps on the lubricated ends of expansion dowels. 5. Provide center -bulb -type waterstops in all wall and slab expansion joints in liquid containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. E. Contraction Joints 1. Provide sealant grooves, sealants, and waterstops at contraction joints in slabs on grade or walls as detailed. Provide waterstops at all wall and slab contraction joints in water containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Contraction joints may be sawed if specifically approved by the Engineer. If contraction joint grooves are sawed, properly time the saw cutting with the time of the concrete set. Start cutting as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates from being dislodged by the saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to induce cracking. No reinforcing shall be cut during sawcutting. 3. Extend every other bar of reinforcing steel through contraction joints or as indicated on the Drawings. Where specifically noted on the Drawings, coat the concrete surface with a bond breaker before placing new concrete against it. Avoid coating reinforcement or waterstops with bond breaker at these locations. END OF SECTION 03 15 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03 15 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 03 21 00 — SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install all concrete reinforcement complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. Furnish only all deformed steel reinforcement required to be entirely built into concrete masonry unit construction. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03 11 00, Site Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03 15 00, Site Concrete Joint and Joint Accessories. C. Section 03 30 01, Site Cast -in -Place Concrete. D. Section 03 60 00, Site Grout. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Reinforcing steel. Placement drawings shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 315. All reinforcement in a concrete placement shall be included on a single placement drawing or cross referenced to the pertinent main placement drawing. The main drawing shall include the additional reinforcement (around openings, at corners, etc) shown on the standard detail sheets. Bars to have special coatings and/or to be of special steel or special yield strength are to be clearly identified. 2. Bar bending details. The bars shall be referenced to the same identification marks shown on the placement drawings. 3. Schedule of all placements to contain synthetic reinforcing fibers. The amount of fibers per cubic yard to be used for each of the placements shall be noted on the schedule. The name of the manufacturer of the fibers and the product data shall be included with the submittal. B. Submit Test Reports, in accordance with Section 01 33 00, of each of the following items: 1. Certified copy of mill test on each steel proposed for use showing the physical properties of the steel and the chemical analysis. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Welder's certification. The certification shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4 when welding of reinforcement is required. Welding of reinforcement shall only be permitted when specifically approved (in writing) or specified within the contract documents by the structural engineer. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A82—Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A184—Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A185— Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. 4. ASTM A496—Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A497—Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A615— Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A704— Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. ASTM A706—Standard Specification for Low Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM A767—Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 10. ASTM A775—Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars 11. ASTM A884— Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement. 12. ASTM A934—Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 13. ASTM A996—Standard Specification for Rail -Steel and Axle -Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301—Standard Specification for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 315—Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ACI 318—Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 4. ACI SP 66—ACI Detailing Manual. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 1. Manual of Standard Practice. D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.4—Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide services of a manufacturer's representative, with at least 2 years experience in the use of the reinforcing fibers for a preconstruction meeting and assistance during the first placement of the material. 1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. The Contractor shall adhere to the project requirements for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Reinforcing steel shall be substantially free from mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, or other foreign matter. C. Reinforcing steel shall be shipped and stored with bars of the same size and shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with waterproof markings showing the same "mark" designations as those shown on the submitted Placing Drawings. D. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground and kept free from dirt, oil, or other injurious contaminants. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 0321 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be new, of domestic manufacture and shall comply with the following material specifications. B. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars. C. Concrete Reinforcing Bars required on the Drawings to be Welded: ASTM A706. D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in flat sheets. E. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497. F. Welded Plain Bar Mats: ASTM A704 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 plain bars. G. Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 deformed bars. H. The following alternate materials are allowed: 1. ASTM A615 Grade 60 may be used for ASTM A706 provided the following requirements are satisfied: a. The actual yield strength of the reinforcing steel based on mill tests shall not exceed the specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi. Retests shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 3000 psi. b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile yield strength of the reinforcement shall not be less than 1.25. C. The carbon equivalency (CE) of bars shall be 0.55 or less. I. Reinforcing Steel Accessories 1. Plastic Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 1 Maximum Protection. 2. Stainless Steel Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 2 Moderate Protection. 3. Precast Concrete Block Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Precast Blocks. Blocks shall have equal or greater strength than the surrounding concrete. For use in foundation and slab on grade applications only. 4. Steel Protected Bar Supports: #4 Steel Chairs with plastic or rubber tips. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL J. Tie Wire 1. Tie Wires for Reinforcement shall be 16-gauge or heavier, black annealed wire, or stranded wire. K. Mechanical reinforcing steel butt splices shall be positive connecting taper threaded -type employing a hexagonal coupler such as Lenton rebar splices as manufactured by Erico Products Inc., Solon, OH or equal. They shall meet all ACI 318 Building Code requirements. Bar ends must be taper threaded with coupler manufacturer's bar threader to ensure proper taper and thread engagement. Bar couplers shall be torqued to manufacturer's recommended value. 1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mechanical tension splices shall be designed to produce a splice strength in tension or compression of not less than 125% of the ASTM-specified minimum yield strength of the rebar. 2. Compression -type mechanical splices shall provide concentric bearing from one bar to the other bar and shall be capable of developing the ultimate strength of the rebar in compression. L. Fiber Reinforcement 1. Fiber Reinforcement not to be used on sidewalks. 2. Synthetic reinforcing fiber for concrete shall be 100% polypropylene collated, fibrillated fibers as manufactured by Fibermesh Company of Synthetic Industries Inc., Chattanooga, TN Fibermesh or equal. Fiber length and quantity for the concrete mix shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of reinforcement shall be in compliance with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Bars shall be cold bent. Bars shall not be straightened or rebent. C. Bars shall be bent around a revolving collar having a diameter of not less than that recommended by the ACI 318. D. Bar ends that are to be butt spliced, placed through limited diameter holes in metal, or threaded, shall have the applicable end(s) saw cut. Such ends shall terminate in flat surfaces within 1'/2-degrees of a right angle to the axis of the bar. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Surface condition, bending, spacing, and tolerances of placement of reinforcement shall comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing an adequate number of bars and maintaining the spacing and clearances shown on the Drawings. B. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the minimum concrete cover of reinforcement shall be as follows: 1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 in 2. Concrete exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and/or weather: 2 in (including bottom cover of slabs over water or sewage) 3. Concrete not exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge, and/or weather: a. Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls, joists, shells, and folded plate members 1 inch. b. Beams and columns (principal reinforcement, ties, spirals, and stirrups) 1'/z-inches. C. Reinforcement which will be exposed for a considerable length of time after being placed shall be coated with a heavy coat of neat cement slurry. D. No reinforcing steel bars shall be welded either during fabrication or erection unless specifically shown on the Drawings or specified in this Section or unless prior written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. All bars that have been welded, including tack welds, without such approval shall be immediately removed from the work. When welding of reinforcement is approved or called for, it shall comply with AWS D1.4. E. Reinforcing steel interfering with the location of other reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded items, may be moved within the specified tolerances or one bar diameter, whichever is greater. Greater displacement of bars to avoid interference shall only be made with the approval of the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduits, mechanical openings, or other items without the prior approval of the Engineer. F. Securely support and tie reinforcing steel to prevent movement during concrete placement. Secure dowels in place before placing concrete. G. Reinforcing steel bars shall not be field bent except where shown on the Drawings or specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. If authorized, bars shall be cold bent 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE, REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL around the standard diameter spool specified in the CRSI. Do not heat bars. Closely inspect the reinforcing steel for breaks. If the reinforcing steel is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. 3.2 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS A. Unless specific additional reinforcement around openings is shown on the Drawings, provide additional reinforcing steel on each side of the opening equivalent to one half of the cross sectional area of the reinforcing steel interrupted by an opening. The bars shall have sufficient length to develop bond at each end beyond the opening or penetration. 3.3 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT A. Splices designated as compression splices on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted, shall be 30 bar diameters but not less than 12 in. The lap splice length for column vertical bars shall be based on the bar size in the column above. B. Tension lap splices shall be provided at all laps in compliance with ACI 318. Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered. Class A splices may be used when 50% or less of the bars are spliced within the required lap length. Class B splices shall be used at all other locations. C. Splicing of reinforcing steel in concrete elements noted to be "tension members" on the Drawings shall be avoided whenever possible. However, if required for constructability, splices in the reinforcement subject to direct tension shall be welded to develop, in tension, at least 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. Refer to restrictions in this section on welding of reinforcing steel. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset the distance of a Class B splice. D. Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Wire fabric from rolls shall be rolled flat and firmly held in place. Splices in welded -wire fabric shall be lapped in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 but not less than 12 in. The spliced fabrics shall be tied together with wire ties spaced not more than 24 in on center and laced with wire of the same diameter as the welded wire fabric. Do not position laps midway between supporting beams or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset splices in adjacent widths to prevent continuous splices. E. Mechanical reinforcing steel splicers shall be used only where shown on the Drawings. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset by at least 30 bar diameters. Mechanical 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL reinforcing splices are only to be used for special splice and dowel conditions approved by the Engineer. 3.4 ACCESSORIES A. Determine, provide, and install accessories such as chairs, chair bars, and the like in sufficient quantities and strength to adequately support the reinforcement and prevent its displacement during the erection of the reinforcement and the placement of concrete. B. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over soil. C. Stainless steel bar supports or steel chairs with stainless steel tips shall be used where the chairs are set on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to weather, high humidity, or liquid (including bottom of slabs over liquid containing areas). Use of galvanized or plastic -tipped metal chairs is permissible in all other locations unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified in this Section. D. Alternate methods of supporting top steel in slabs, such as steel channels supported on the bottom steel or vertical reinforcing steel fastened to the bottom and top mats, may be used if approved by the Engineer. 3.5 INSPECTION A. In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered with concrete until the installation of the reinforcement, including the size, spacing, and position of the reinforcement has been observed by the Special Inspector and the Special Inspector's release to proceed with the concreting has been obtained. The Special Inspector and the Engineer shall be given ample prior notice of the readiness of placed reinforcement for observation. The forms shall be kept open until the Special Inspector has finished his/her observations of the reinforcing steel. END OF SECTION 03 21 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 03 30 00 — CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. E. Welding certificates. F. Material certificates. G. Material test reports. H. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D II AM, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. C. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. D. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. b. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. Refer to notes on Structural Drawings which limit the quantities of fly ash and slag as a percentage of the total cementitious materials B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: % inches nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. C. Concrete Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA): Concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture for all interior slab (on ground and elevated) and structural roof deck construction shall be a non -toxic, liquid admixture that is specifically designed to have a natural chemical reaction with pre-existing elements inside the concrete to eliminate the route of moisture vapor emission through the slab by restricting the integral capillary system. The chemical reaction forms a permanent barrier (capillary break) that is integral to the concrete, insoluble and irremovable. Basis -of -Design Product: "Barrier One High Performance Concrete Admixture" manufactured by Barrier One, Inc..; 522 S. Hunt Club Blvd., #303, Apopka, Florida 32703; Contact Manufacturer's representative: P: 877.224.5850, F: 866.594.3490 or Email at: infoObarrierone.com . 2. Provide the above named product or, upon approval of the Arch itect/Structu ra I Engineer, provide a product that meets or exceeds the below project specific performance requirements at the expense of the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) manufacturer: a. Project specific quality control process to include but not limited to: 1) Independent procurement of one cylinder per day of placement of concrete containing MVRA; do not proceed without MVRA representative being present 2) Independent testing of all cylinders for hydraulic conductivity per ASTM D5084 3) Assessing each cylinder for maximum flow of 6.0 E-08 cm/sec 4) Should any cylinder exceed the maximum flow, procure a core from that day's placement 5) Independently test core for hydraulic conductivity per ASTM D5084 6) Should any core exceed the maximum flow, provide a topical moisture mitigation system for all areas not meeting the stated limit; moisture mitigation system to include all labor, material and warranty that meets or exceeds the terms of the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer's warranty b. Warranty requirements: Said product must be installed according to and in compliance with the manufacturer's published data sheet to include but not limited to dosing instructions, onsite representation requirements, and the use of an ASTM E 1745 vapor retarder, installed following ASTM E 1643 and ASTM F 710 guidelines; suspended concrete slabs do not require a vapor retarder. 1) MVRA Manufacturer's warranty shall include: a) Term: Life of the concrete 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b) Repair and/or removal of failed flooring c) Placement of a topical moisture remediation system d) Replacement of flooring materials like original installed to include material and labor 2) MVRA Manufacturer shall provide an adhesion warranty to match the term of the adhesive manufacturer's warranty in accordance with the MVRA manufacturer's requirements for conveyance of such 2.5 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. B. Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber waterstops, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints; resistant to oils, solvents, and chemicals. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. C. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. D. Self -Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. G. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not more that 20 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing high -range water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. D. Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As shown in General Notes at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As shown in General Notes. 3. Slump Limit: As Shown in General Notes, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. C. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, and as indicated. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed finished as -cast concrete where indicated: Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate -surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated. 2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel -finished floor surfaces where indicated. D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. D. Protect concrete from damages and defacing. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 03 30 01 — SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials required and install cast -in -place concrete complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03 11 00, Site Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03 21 00, Site Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03 35 00, Site Concrete Finishes. D. Section 03 60 00, Site Grout. E. Division 7, Moisture Protection. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Sources of cement, pozzolan, and aggregates. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and admixtures. 3. Air entraining admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Water -reducing admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards. 5. High -range water -reducing admixture (plasticizer). Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, retarding effect, slump range, and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. 6. Concrete mix for each formulation of concrete proposed for use, including constituent quantities per cubic yard, water-cementitious materials ratio, concrete slump, type, and manufacturer of cement. Provide either a. or b. below for each mix proposed. a. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based on statistical records. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. The curve of water-cementitious materials ratio versus concrete cylinder strength for each formulation of concrete proposed based on laboratory tests. The cylinder strength shall be the average of the 28 day cylinder strength test results for each mix. Provide results of 7- and 14-day tests if available. 7. Sheet curing material. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, and conformity to ASTM standard. 8. Liquid curing compound. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, application rate, and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. B. Samples 1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested by the Engineer. C. Test Reports 1. Fine aggregates —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substance. 2. Coarse aggregates —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 3. Cements —chemical analysis and physical properties for each type. 4. Pozzolans—chemical analysis and physical properties. 5. Proposed concrete mixes —compressive strength, slump, and air content. D. Certifications 1. Certify that admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each other and with the aggregates. 2. Certify that admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 3. Certify that the curing compound is suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non toxic and free of taste or odor). 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. ASTM C31—Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C33—Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39—Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C42—Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 5. ASTM C94—Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C143—Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic -Cement Concrete 7. ASTM C150—Standard Specification for Portland Cement 8. ASTM C171—Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 9. ASTM C173—Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 10. ASTM C231—Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 11. ASTM C260—Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 12. ASTM C309—Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 13. ASTM C494—Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 14. ASTM C618—Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 15. ASTM C1017—Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 1. ACI 304R—Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 2. ACI 305R—Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306. 1 —Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 318—Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 5. ACI 350R—Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reinforced concrete shall comply with ACI 318; the recommendations of ACI 350R; and other stated requirements, codes, and standards. The most stringent requirement of the codes, standards, and this Section shall apply when conflicts exist. B. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on any one structure. Concrete shall be uniform in color and appearance. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Well in advance of placing concrete, the Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer the sources of individual materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Discuss placement methods, waterstops, and curing. Propose methods of hot and cold weather concreting as required. Before placing any concrete containing a high -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer), the Contractor, accompanied by the plasticizer manufacturer, shall discuss the properties and techniques of batching and placing plasticized concrete. D. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to secure concrete of the required workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the Engineer may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to secure the desired properties. All changes so ordered shall be made at the Contractor's expense. E. If, during the progress of the work, the materials from the sources originally accepted change in characteristics, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense, make new acceptance tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes. F. The Contractor shall furnish testing of the following materials to verify conformity with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM Standards. 1. Fine aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33—sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 2. Coarse aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33—sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 3. Cements for conformity with ASTM C150—chemical analysis and physical properties. 4. Pozzolans for conformity with ASTM C618—chemical analysis and physical properties. 5. Proposed concrete mix designs —compressive strength, slump, and air content. 6. Use small aggregate W maximum pea gravel for sidewalks. G. A firm providing field testing and inspection services will be approved by the Owner. The cost of such work, except as specifically stated otherwise, shall be paid by the Contractor and reimbursed by the Owner under the Concrete Testing Allowance. The following items shall be tested by the Owner to verify conformity with this Specification Section: 1. Concrete placements —compressive strength (cylinders), compressive strength (cores), slump, and air content. 2. Other materials or products that may come under question. H. All materials incorporated in the work shall conform to accepted samples. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section: A. Cement: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate. C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid contamination. Allow sand to drain to a uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage. Provide suitable agitating equipment to ensure uniform dispersion of ingredients in admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which could adversely affect their characteristics. E. Pozzolan: Store in weathertight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness, and contamination. F. Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weathertight buildings or off the ground and under cover. G. Liquid Curing Compounds: Store in closed containers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The use of the manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, maintenance, and manufacturer's service. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local requirements. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Cement: Domestic Portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining cements shall not be used. The brand of cement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. The following cement type(s) shall be used: 1. Class A,B,C,D Concrete Type II with the addition of fly ash resulting in C3A being below 5% of total cementitious content, Type III limited to 5% C3A or Type V. C. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33. D. Coarse Aggregate: Well -graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number. Limits of Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for the concrete mixes shall be as shown in Table 1 in this Section. E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. F. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one admixture in a concrete mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer. Admixtures shall be compatible with the concrete mix, including other admixtures, and shall be suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C260. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Water -Reducing Agent: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. High -Range Water -Reducer (Plasticizer): The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F and shall result in non segregating plasticized concrete with little bleeding and with the physical properties of low water/cement ratio concrete. The treated concrete shall be capable of maintaining its plastic state in excess of 2 hours. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW C f'Y` HALL 4. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not be used without written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the admixtures shall be retarding or accelerating water -reducing or high -range water -reducing admixtures. G. Pozzolan (Fly Ash) shall be Class F fly ash complying with ASTM C618 except that the Loss on Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3% maximum. H. Sheet Curing Materials. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or white burlap polyethylene sheeting all complying with ASTM C171. Liquid Curing Compound. Liquid membrane forming curing compound shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1 D (clear or translucent with fugitive dye) and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil. The curing compound shall be approved for use in contact with potable water after 30 days according to NSF 61 (non toxic and free of taste or odor). 2.3 MIXES A. An independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor shall provide adequate testing (pursuant to ACI concrete mix design performance documentation requirements) that the concrete mix designs, provided by the concrete supplier will perform (strength, serviceability, etc.) as required. B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits specified in Table 1 and to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance, and other required properties. Proportion ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture, which will readily work into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or allowing excessive free water to collect on the surface. C. The design mix shall be based on standard deviation data of prior mixes with essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if such data are not available, be developed by a testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. Mixes based on standard deviation shall be accepted based on the modification factors for standard deviation tests contained in ACI 318. The water content of the concrete mix, determined by laboratory testing, shall be based on a curve showing the relation between water cementitious ratio and 7- and 28-day compressive strengths of concrete made using the proposed materials. The curves shall be determined by four or more points, each representing an average value of at least three test specimens at each age. The curves shall have a range of values sufficient to yield the desired data, including the specified design strengths as modified below, without ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL extrapolation. The water content of the concrete mixes to be used, as determined from the curve, shall correspond to strengths 16% greater than the specified design strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the limiting values for maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum cementitious content as specified in Table 1. D. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to demonstrate compliance with the specified design strength requirements in conformity with the paragraph above. E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1 If the air -entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing methods other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content, make special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal. F. Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143 shall be as shown in Table 1. If a high -range water -reducer (plasticizer) is used, the slump indicated shall be that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a slump ranging from 7 to 10 inches. G. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or more admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of each other. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL TABLE 1 CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS Design Fine Coarse Cementitious Class Strength Cement Aggregate Aggregate Content (1) (2) (2) (3) (4) A 2500 C150 Type II C33 57 440 min. B 3000 C150 Type II C33 57 480 min. C 4000 C150 Type II C33 57 560 min. D 5000 C150 Type II C33 57 600 min. W/C AE Slump Class Ratio Fly Ash Range WR HRWR Range (5) (6) (7) (8) Inches A 0.62 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes 1-4 B 0.54 max. — 3.5 to 5 Yes 1-3 C 0.44 max. 20 - 25% 3.5 to 5 Yes 3-5 D 0.40 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes 3-5 NOTES: (1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days (2) ASTM designation (3) Size Number in ASTM C33 (4) Cementitious content in Ibs/cu yd (5) W/C is Water-Cementitious ratio by weight (6) AE is percent air -entrainment (7) WR is water -reducer admixture (8) HRWR is high -range water -reducer admixture * HRWR used at the Contractor's option PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MEASURING MATERIALS A. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a plant acceptable to the Engineer. All constituents, including admixtures, shall be batched at the plant except a high -range water -reducer may also be added in the field. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and within the tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Scales shall have been certified by the local Sealer of Weights and Measures within 1 year of use. C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3% with a moisture meter. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates. Record the number of gallons of water as batched on printed batching tickets. D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or measuring tanks or by an automatic dispenser approved by the manufacturer of the specific admixture. 1. Charge air entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. 2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence. 3.2 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING A. Concrete shall be ready mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to the Engineer. No hand mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching plant. Equip each transit mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds. B. Ready mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name plate. C. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. Any addition of water must be directed by the Engineer. Added water shall be incorporated by additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions. All added water shall be metered and the amount of water added shall be shown on each delivery ticket. D. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with ACI 318 and ASTM C94. E. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Metal or metal lined non -aluminum discharge chutes shall be used and shall have slopes not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes more than 20 feet long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before distribution. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Retempering (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) of concrete or mortar which has reached initial set will not be permitted. G. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks from the batching plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms. H. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready -mixed concrete to the Engineer as each truck arrives. Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement and each aggregate as batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement and water in each batch, the quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the numerical sequence of the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck. Indicate the number of revolutions of the truck mixer. The delivery ticket shall also specify the maximum amount of water (gallons per yard of concrete) that can be added to the truck load. Temperature and Mixing Time Control 1. In cold weather, do not allow the as -mixed temperature of the concrete and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms to drop below 40' F. 2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 90° F. 3. In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of the concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 900 F. If necessary, substitute well -crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water. 4. The maximum time interval between adding mixing water and/or cement to the batch and placing concrete in the forms shall not exceed the values shown in Table 2. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL TABLE 2 MAXIMUM TIME TO DISCHARGE OF CONCRETE Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher) 80 to 900 F (27 to 32° C) 70 to 79° F (21 to 260 C) 40 to 690 F (5 to 200 C) Maximum Time 45 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes J. If an approved high -range water -reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes. 3.3 CONCRETE APPEARANCE A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition, the concrete shall be rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit but excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed, changes in the concrete mix shall be obtained only by adjusting one or more of the following: 1. Gradation of aggregate. 2. Proportion of fine and coarse aggregate. 3. Percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits. B. Concrete for the work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when hardened, will have the required strength, durability, and appearance. Mixtures and workmanship shall be such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no finishing. When concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete, when viewed in good lighting from 10 feet away, shall be pleasing in appearance and at 20 feet shall show no visible defects. 3.4 PLACING AND COMPACTING A. Placing The Contractor shall verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and is securely braced before placing concrete. Remove ice, excess water, dirt, and other foreign materials from forms. Confirm that reinforcement and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a competent workman at the location of the placement who can ensure that reinforcing steel and embedded items remain in designated locations while concrete is being placed. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Sprinkle semi -porous subgrades or forms to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Seal extremely porous subgrades in an approved manner. 2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Place concrete continuously at a rate which ensures the concrete is being integrated with fresh plastic concrete. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved. 3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and aggregate sizes suitable for pumping and submit for approval. 4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer useful. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only when made of galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained. 5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously placed in the supporting element (columns, slabs, and/or walls) has reached adequate strength. 6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces designated to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a suitable tool to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form. Prevent the formation of excessive surface voids. 7. Slabs a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds, and jointing materials have been positioned, the concrete shall be placed continuously between construction joints beginning at a bulkhead, edge form, or corner. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation. b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level and struck off with a straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. C. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them, place the walls and compact as specified. Allow 1 hour to pass between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to permit consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface of the wall moist so as to prevent cold joints. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS 1MIFIF[0111clam, 1II 8. Formed Concrete a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to prevent segregation. Bottoms of tremie tubes shall preferably be in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not permit concrete to drop freely more than 4 feet. Place concrete for walls in 12 to 24 inches lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. If plasticized concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may be increased to 7 feet and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed 15 feet. 9. Underwater concreting shall be performed in conformity with the recommendations of ACI 304R. The tremie system shall be used to place underwater concrete. Tremie pipes shall be in the range of 8 to 12 inches in diameter and be spaced at not more than 16 feet on centers nor more than 8 feet from an end form. Where concrete is being placed around a pipe, there shall be at least one tremie pipe on each side of each pipe. Where the tremie system is not practical, direct pumped concrete for underwater placement may be used subject to approval of the system, including details, by the Engineer. B. Compacting 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding, or forking so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items, and openings and into corners of forms. Puddling, spading, etc, shall be continuously performed along with vibration of the placement to eliminate air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness. 2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators. The number, type, and size of the units shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of placing operations. No concrete shall be ordered until sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in working order) are on the job. 3. A minimum frequency of 7000 rpm is required for mechanical vibrators. Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30 inches apart. At each insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations. 4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs less than 8 inches thick shall be consolidated with vibrating screeds; slabs 8 to 12 inches thick shall be compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds. Vibrators shall always be placed into concrete vertically and shall not be laid horizontally or laid over. 5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for each vibrator needed to melt down the batch at the point of discharge, one or more additional vibrators 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 14 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS �NZAT FIyIC,:IA1 must be used to densify, homogenize, and perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically at regular intervals through the fresh concrete and slightly into the previous lift, if any. 6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly placed concrete but shall not be used to move or transport concrete in the forms. Vibration shall continue until: a. Frequency returns to normal. b. Surface appears liquefied, flattened, and glistening. C. Trapped air ceases to rise. d. Coarse aggregate has blended into surface but has not disappeared. 3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of any nature during construction operations. B. Curing Methods 1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture and maintain specified temperature at the surface for a minimum of 7 days after placement. Curing methods to be used are as follows: a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding, continuous sprinkling, or by covering with saturated burlap. Begin wet cure as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain wet cure 24 hours a day. b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material. Securely anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs. C. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface except for surfaces to receive additional concrete. Curing compound shall NOT be placed on any concrete surface where additional concrete is to be placed, where concrete sealers or surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish requires an integral floor product. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not after the concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be absorbed into the concrete. Application shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 15 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Specified applications of curing methods. a. Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only. b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water curing, sheet material curing, or liquid membrane curing. C. Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water curing or liquid membrane curing. d. Horizontal Surfaces which will Receive Additional Concrete, Coatings, Grout, or Other Material that Requires Bond to the Substrate: Water curing. e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place 7 days. Water cure if absorbent forms are used. Sheet cured or liquid membrane cured if forms are removed before 7 days. Exposed horizontal surfaces of formed walls or columns shall be water cured for 7 days or until next placement of concrete. f. Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material cured. C. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun to prevent checking and crazing. D. Cold Weather Concreting: 1. Cold weather is defined as a period when the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 400 F for more than 3 successive days. The average daily temperature shall be calculated as the average of the highest and the lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. 2. Cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306.1 and the additional requirements specified in this Section. Temperatures at the concrete placement shall be recorded at 12-hour intervals (minimum). 3. The Contractor shall discuss a cold weather work plan with the Engineer. The discussion shall encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during cold weather, including the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of the concrete. The procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures shall also be discussed. Cold weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer. 4. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required) for a total of at least 350 degree-days of curing. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 16 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Degree-days are defined as the total number of 24-hour periods multiplied by the weighted average daily air temperature at the surface of the concrete (e.g., 5 days at an average 70' F = 350 degree-days). b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum hourly measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the surface of the concrete taking any measurement less than 50' F as 0° F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day. 5. Salt, manure, or other chemicals shall not be used for protection. 6. The protection period for concrete being water cured shall not be terminated during cold weather until at least 24 hours after water curing has been terminated. E. Hot Weather Concreting 1. Hot weather is defined as any combination of high air temperatures, low relative humidity, and wind velocity which produces a rate of evaporation estimated in accordance with ACI 305R, approaching or exceeding 0.2 Ib/sq ft/hr). 2. Concrete placed during hot weather shall be batched, delivered, placed, cured, and protected in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 305R and the additional requirements specified in this Section. a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90' F and every effort shall be made to maintain a uniform concrete mix temperature below this level. The temperature of the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints. b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to deliver the concrete promptly, to place the concrete promptly upon its arrival at the job, and to provide vibration immediately after placement. C. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover plastic concrete with sheet material. 3. The Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and procedures proposed to use for concrete placement and curing during hot weather. Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 17 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be removed before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30% of its specified design strength, nor before reaching the following number of day degrees of curing (whichever is longer): TABLE 3 MINIMUM TIME TO FORM REMOVAL Forms for: Degree Days: Beams and slabs 500 Walls and vertical surfaces 100 (See definition of degree days in Paragraph 3.05D above). B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 70% of its specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its own weight and construction live loads. 3.7 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing, and curing of concrete shall be subject to the inspection of the Special Inspector at all times (and the Engineer on occasion). The Contractor shall advise the Special Inspector and the Engineer of his/her readiness to proceed at least 24 hours before each concrete placement. The Special Inspector will (and the Engineer may) inspect the preparations for concreting, including the preparation of previously placed concrete, the reinforcing steel and the alignment, and the cleanliness and tightness of formwork. No placement shall be made without the inspection and acceptance by the Special Inspector. B. In compliance with ASTM C31, the Engineer (or inspector) will take sets of field -control cylinder specimens during the work. The number of sets of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day shall not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 150 cu yds of concrete, nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for slabs or walls. 1. A "set" of test cylinders consists of four cylinders: one to be tested at 7 days and two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The fourth may be 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 18 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after 28 days if the 28-day test results are low. 2. When the average 28-day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set falls below the specified design strength or below proportional minimum 7-day strengths (where proper relation between 7- and 28-day strengths have been established by tests), proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to achieve the required strengths. C. The Contractor shall cooperate in testing by allowing free access to the work for the selection of samples, providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens, affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through the operations, and furnishing material and labor required for taking concrete cylinder samples. The cost of taking and shipping specimens will be paid for by the Contractor and reimbursed by the Owner under the Concrete Testing Allowance. Curing boxes shall be acceptable to the Engineer. D. In accordance with ASTM C143, slump tests will be made in the field immediately before placing the concrete. If the slump is greater than the specified range, the concrete shall be rejected. E. Air Content: Air content shall be tested for on fresh concrete samples. Air content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall be tested for in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM C231 or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173. If lightweight aggregates or aggregates with high absorptions are used, the latter test method shall be used. F. The Engineer may have cores taken from any questionable area in the concrete work such as construction joints and other locations as required for determining concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be the basis for accepting, rejecting, or determining the continuation of concrete work. G. Cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the work and permitting the use of ladders, scaffolding, and such incidental equipment as may be required. Repair all core holes. The work of cutting and testing the cores will be at the expense of the Contractor. Work found to be acceptable will be reimbursed under the Concrete Testing Allowance. 3.8 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1, the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions outlined to apply to the remainder of the work. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 19 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Furthermore, the Engineer shall have the right to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which failed. The cost of such additional curing shall be at the Contractor's expense. If such additional curing does not give the strength required as evidenced by core and/or load tests, the Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or replacing those portions of the structure which fail to develop the required strength. The cost of all such core borings and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required because strengths of test specimens are below those specified shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor. In such cases of failure to meet strength requirements, the Contractor and Engineer shall confer to determine what adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with Sections titled "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of ASTM C94. The "purchaser" referred to in ASTM C94 is the Contractor in this Section. B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified strength, the Engineer will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and C39. In the case of cores not indicating adequate strength, the Engineer, in addition to other recourses, may require, at the Contractor's expense, load tests on any one of the slabs, beams, piles, caps, and columns in which such concrete was used. Tests need not be made until concrete has aged 60 days. C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60% of the required minimum 28-day strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed and replaced. 3.9 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. It is the intent of this Section to require quality work, including adequate forming and proper mixing, placing, and curing of concrete so completed concrete surfaces will require no patching. B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer shall be repaired as specified by the Engineer. C. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed, fins and other projections shall be removed; recesses left by the removal of form ties shall be filled; and surface defects which do not impair structural strength shall be repaired. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete to the approval of the Engineer. D. Immediately after removal of forms remove plugs and break off metal ties as required by Section 03 10 00. Promptly fill holes upon stripping as follows: moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/1 6-inch brush coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 20 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5-mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the touch (just short of "balling"). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense and an excess of paste appears on the surface in the form of a spiderweb. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing. E. When patching exposed surfaces, employ the same source of cement and sand as used in the parent concrete. Adjust color if necessary by adding proper amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine Carborundum stone at an age of 1 to 5 days if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent concrete. Exercise care to avoid damaging or staining the virgin skin of the surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter. 3.10 SCHEDULE A. The following (Table 4) are the general applications for the various concrete classes and design strengths: TABLE 4 CONCRETE SCHEDULE Class Design Description Strength (psi) A 2,500 Concrete fill and duct encasement B 3,000 Concrete overlay slabs and pavements C 4,000 Walls, slabs on grade, suspended slab and beam systems, columns, grade beams, and all other structural concrete D 5,000 Prestressed concrete END OF SECTION 03 30 01 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 01 - 21 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 03 35 00 — SITE CONCRETE FINISHES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and finish cast -in -place concrete surfaces as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03 11 00, Site Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03 30 01, Site Cast -In -Place Concrete. C. Section 03 60 00, Site Grout. 1.3 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Concrete sealer. Confirmation that the sealer is compatible with additionally applied coatings shall also be submitted. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C33—Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Finishes 1. For concrete which will receive additional applied finishes or materials, the surface finish specified is required for the proper application of the specified manufacturer's products. Where alternate products are approved for use, determine if changes in finishes are required and provide the proper finishes to receive these products. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES 03 35 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Changes in finishes made to accommodate products different from those specified shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Submit the proposed new finishes and their construction methods to the Engineer for approval. B. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 1. Upon 72 hours notification, make available at no extra cost to the Owner the services of a qualified field representative of the manufacturer of curing compound, sealer, or hardener to instruct the user on the proper application of the product under prevailing job conditions. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chemical hardener shall be Lapidolith by Sonneborn; Hornolith by A.C. Horn; Penalith by W.R. Meadows, or equal fluosilicate base material. B. Concrete sealer shall be "Kure N Seal," by Sonneborn, Minneapolis, MN or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMED SURFACES A. Forms shall not be removed before the requirements of Section 03 30 00 have been satisfied. B. Exercise care to prevent damaging edges or obliterating the lines of chamfers, rustications, or corners when removing the forms or performing any other work adjacent to such chamfers, rustications, or corners. C. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete. D. Rough Form Finish 1. Immediately after stripping forms and before concrete has changed color, carefully remove all fins and projections. 2. Promptly fill holes left by tie cones and defects as specified in Section 03 30 00. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES 03 35 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Rubbed Finish 1. Immediately upon stripping forms and before the concrete has changed color, carefully remove all fins. While the wall is still damp, apply a thin coat of medium - consistency neat cement slurry by bristle brushes to provide a bonding coat within all pits, air holes, or blemishes in the parent concrete. Avoid coating large areas with the slurry at one time. 2. Before the slurry has dried or changed color, apply a dry (almost crumbly) grout proportioned by volume and consisting of 1 part cement to 1 1/2 parts of clean masonry sand having a fineness modulus of approximately 2.3 and complying with the gradation requirements of ASTM C33 for such a material. Grout shall be uniformly applied by damp pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 in square used as a float. Scrub grout into the pits and air holes to provide a dense mortar in all imperfections. 3. Allow the mortar to partially harden for 1 or 2 hours depending upon the weather. If the air is hot and dry, keep the wall damp during this period using a fine, fog spray. When the grout has hardened sufficiently so it can be scraped from the surface with the edge of a steel trowel without damaging the grout in the small pits or holes, cut off all that can be removed with a trowel. (Note: Grout allowed to remain on the wall too long will harden and will be difficult to remove.) 4. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly and rub it vigorously with clean dry burlap to completely remove any dried grout. No visible film of grout shall remain after this rubbing. The entire cleaning operation for any area must be completed the day it is started. Do not leave grout on surfaces overnight. Allow sufficient time for grout to dry after it has been cut off with the trowel so it can be wiped off clean with the burlap. 5. On the day after the repair of pits, air holes, and blemishes, the walls shall again be wiped off clean with dry, used pieces of burlap containing old hardened mortar which will act as a mild abrasive. After this treatment, there shall be no built-up film remaining on the parent surface. If, however, such a film is present, a fine abrasive stone shall be used to remove all such material without breaking through the surface film of the original concrete. Such scrubbing shall be light and sufficient only to remove excess material without changing the texture of the concrete. 6. A thorough wash down with stiff bristle brushes shall follow the final bagging or stoning operation. No extraneous materials shall remain on the surface of the wall. The wall shall be sprayed with a fine fog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition for at least 3 days after the application of the repair grout. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES 03 35 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Abrasive Blast Finish 1. Coordinate with Rubbed Finish application. Do not begin until Rubbed Finish operation is complete or before concrete has reached minimum 7-day strength. The Rubbed Finish application may be deleted by the Engineer if the unfinished concrete surface is of superior quality. Apply the abrasive blast finish only where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Prepare a sample area a minimum of 4 feet high by 16 feet wide. Blast Finish as directed by the Engineer on a portion of new wall construction which will not be exposed in the final work. The sample area shall contain a variety of finishes obtained with different nozzles, nozzle pressures, grit materials, and blasting techniques for selection by the Engineer. Final accepted sample shall remain exposed until all Blast Finish operations are complete. 3. The Blast Finish operation shall meet all regulatory agency requirements. The Blast Finish contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all required permits and/or licenses. 4. Perform abrasive blast finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, using the same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each surface or area of work. Maintain patterns or variances in depths of blast as present on the accepted sample. 5. Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation as well as equipment and technique to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces as follows: a. Medium: Generally expose coarse aggregate 1/4 in to 3/8 in reveal. 6. Abrade blast corners and edge of patterns carefully, using back up boards, to maintain uniform corner or edge line. Determine type of nozzle, nozzle pressure, and blasting techniques required to match the Architect's samples. 7. Upon completing the Blast Finish operation, thoroughly flush finished surfaces with clean clear water to remove residual dust and grit. Allow to air dry until curing of concrete is complete. 8. After the concrete has cured for a minimum of 28 days, apply a clear acrylic sealer as directed by the manufacturer. 3.2 FLOORS AND SLABS A. Floated Finish 1. Machine Floating a. Screed floors and slabs with straightedges to the established grades shown on the Drawings. Immediately after final screeding sprinkle a dry cement/sand shake in the proportion of two sacks of Portland cement to 350 lb of coarse natural concrete sand evenly over the surface at the rate of approximately 500 lb/1,000 sq ft of floor. Do not sprinkle neat, dry cement on the surface. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES 03 35 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. The application of the cement/sand shake may be eliminated at the discretion of the Engineer if the base slab concrete exhibits adequate fattiness and homogeneity and the need is not indicated. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently to support the weight of a power float without the float's digging into or disrupting the level surface, thoroughly float the shake into the surface with a heavy revolving disc -type power compacting machine capable of providing a 200-lb compaction force distributed over a 24-inch-diameter disc. C. Start floating along walls and around columns and then move systematically across the surface leaving a matte finish. d. The compacting machine shall be the "Kelly Power Float with Compaction Control" as manufactured by Kelley Industries of SSP Construction Equipment Inc., Pomona, CA or equal. Troweling machines equipped with float (shoe) blades that are slipped over the trowel blades may be used for floating. Floating with a troweling machine equipped with normal trowel blades will not be permitted. The use of any floating or troweling machine which has a water attachment for wetting the concrete surface during finishing will not be permitted. 2. Hand Floating a. In lieu of power floating, small areas may be compacted by hand floating. The dry cement/sand shake previously specified shall be used unless specifically eliminated by the Engineer. Screed the floors and slabs with straightedges to the established grades shown on the Drawings. While the concrete is still green but sufficiently hardened to support a finisher and kneeboards with no more than %-inch indentation, wood float to a true, even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. Use sufficient pressure on the wood floats to bring moisture to the surface. 3. Finishing Tolerances a. Level floors and slabs to a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 in when checked with a 10-ft straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. Where drains occur, pitch floors to drains such that no low spots are left undrained. Failure to meet either of the above requirements shall be cause for removal, grinding, or other correction as directed by the Engineer. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES 03 35 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Broom Finish 1. Screed slabs with straightedges to the established grades indicated on the Drawings. When the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to maintain small surface indentations, draw a stiff bristle broom lightly across the surface in the direction of drainage or, in the case of walks and stairs, perpendicular to the direction of traffic to provide a non -slip surface. C. Steel Trowel Finish 1. Finish concrete as specified in Article 3.04. Then, hand steel trowel to a perfectly smooth hard even finish free from high or low spots or other defects. D. Concrete Sealer Prepare and seal surfaces indicated on the room finish schedule to receive a sealer as follows: a. Finish concrete as specified in the preceding paragraphs and in accordance with the Schedule in Article 3.05 below. b. Newly Placed Concrete: Surface must be sound and properly finished. Surface is application ready when it is damp but not wet and can no longer be marred by walking workmen. C. Newly Cured Bare Concrete: Level any spots gouged out by trades. Remove all dirt, dust, droppage, oil, grease, asphalt, and foreign matter. Cleanse with caustics and detergents as required. Rinse thoroughly and allow to dry so that surface is no more than damp and not wet. d. Aged Concrete: Restore surface soundness by patching, grouting, filling cracks and holes, etc. Surface must also be free of any dust, dirt, and other foreign matter. Use power tools and/or strippers to remove any incompatible sealers or coatings. Cleanse as required following the procedure indicated under cured concrete. e. Methods: Apply sealer to form a continuous, uniform film by spray, soft bristle pushbroom, long nap roller, or lambswool applicator. Ordinary garden type sprayers, using neoprene hose, are recommended for best results. f. Applications: For curing only, apply the first coat evenly and uniformly as soon as possible after final finishing at the rate of 200 to 400 sq ft per gallon. Apply the second coat when all trades are completed and the structure is ready for occupancy at the rate of 400 to 600 sq ft per gallon. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES 03 35 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL g. To meet guarantee and to seal and dustproof, two coats are required. For sealing new concrete, both coats shall be applied full strength. On aged concrete, when renovating, dustproofing, and sealing, the first coat should be thinned 10 to 15% with reducer in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 3.3 CONCRETE RECEIVING CHEMICAL HARDENER A. After 28 days minimum concrete cure, apply chemical hardener in three applications to a minimum total coverage of the undiluted chemical of 100 sq ft per gallon and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as reviewed. 3.4 APPROVAL OF FINISHES A. All concrete surfaces, when finished, will be inspected by the Engineer. B. Surfaces which in the opinion of the Engineer are unsatisfactory shall be refinished or reworked. C. After finishing horizontal surfaces, regardless of the finishing procedure specified, the concrete shall be cured in compliance with Section 03 30 00 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 3.5 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES A. Concrete shall be finished as specified either to remain as natural concrete or to receive an additional applied finish or material under another section. B. Concrete for the following conditions shall be finished as noted on the Drawings and as further specified in this Section: 1. Concrete to Receive Dampproofing: Rough form finish. See Paragraph 3.01 D above. 2. Concrete Not Exposed to View and Not Scheduled to Receive an Additional Applied Finish or Material: Rough form finish. See Paragraph 3.01 D above. 3. Exterior Vertical Concrete Above Grade Exposed to View: Rubbed finish. See Paragraph 3.01 E above. 4. Interior Vertical Concrete Exposed to View Except in Water Containment Areas: Rubbed finish. See Paragraph 3.01 E above. 5. Vertical Concrete in Water Containment Areas. Rubbed finish on exposed surfaces and extending to 2 feet below normal operating water level: Rough form finish on the remainder of submerged areas. See Paragraphs 3.01 E and 3.01 D above. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES 03 35 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 6. Interior and Exterior Underside of Concrete Exposed to View: Rubbed finish. See Paragraph 3.01 E above. 7. Exterior surfaces exposed to view and indicated to have an abrasive blast finish. See Paragraph 3.01 F above. 8. Interior or Exterior Horizontal Concrete not Requiring Floor Hardener or Sealer: Floated finish. See Paragraph 3.02A above. 9. Concrete for Exterior Walks and Interior and Exterior Stairs: Broomed finish perpendicular to direction of traffic. See Paragraph 3.02E above. 10. Concrete Slabs On Which Process Liquids Flow or In Contact with Sludge: Steel trowel finish. See Paragraph 3.02C above. 11. Concrete to Receive Hardener: See Paragraph 3.02D above. 12. Concrete to Receive Floor Sealer: See Paragraph 3.02E above. 13. Concrete tank bottoms to be covered with grout: See Section 03 60 00. END OF SECTION 03 35 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE CONCRETE FINISHES 03 35 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 03 45 00 — PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural precast concrete cladding units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and texture, preapproved by Architect. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional. B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water -absorption tests. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. 2. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. 3. Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface finish. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Indicate details at building corners. 5. Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses. 6. Indicate type, size, and length of welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast -in hardware and connections. 7. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or attached to structure or other construction. 8. Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two -stage casting is proposed. 9. Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special conditions. 10. Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on panel. 11. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials. 12. If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept. D. Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of three, representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected. When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For architectural precast concrete comply with performance requirements and structural design criteria shown on the Structural Drawings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the Delegated Specialty Structural Professional Engineer holding current registration as a P.E. in the State of Florida. Such design shall be pursuant to the Structural Drawings and the Architectural wherein the fine detailing of the panels is more fully addressed. The Delegated Specialty Structural. Engineer shall provide signed and sealed shop drawings and calculations for review by the Architect and Engineer of Record. Show governing panel types, connections, types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement, and concrete cover on reinforcement. Indicate location, type, magnitude, and direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame from architectural precast concrete. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate of Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non -load -bearing members. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category Al - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units at time of bidding. 2. Fabricator is located within 500 miles of Project site. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Quality -Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality -control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." D. Range Samples: After sample panel approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of three sets of samples, approximately representing anticipated range of each color and texture on Project's units. Maintain one set of range samples at Project site and remaining range sample sets at manufacturer's plant as color and texture approval reference. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit unloading units temporarily on the ground or other rehandling. B. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock -absorbing material. C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage. D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected. E. Handle and transport units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses that cause cracking or damage. F. Lift and support units only at designated points indicated on Shop Drawings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available fabricators offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, fabricators' names>. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," and Section 1.5, E., above, to design architectural precast concrete units. B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated. C. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Loads: Out of Plane wind loading is provided in the structural drawings. 2. Design precast concrete units and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for fabrication and construction tolerances, to accommodate live -load deflection, shrinkage and creep of primary building structure, and other building movements as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch. 3. Thermal Movements: Provide for in -plane thermal movements resulting from annual ambient temperature changes of 80 deg F. 2.3 MOLD MATERIALS A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non -absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that provides continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes. 1. Mold -Release Agent: Commercially produced form -release agent that does not bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete. 2.4 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. C. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Regional Materials: Precast architectural concrete shall be manufactured from aggregates and cement that have been extracted or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use gray or white cement, of same type, brand, and mill source. C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33/C 33M, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project. Face -Mixture -Fine Aggregates matching architect's sample: Selected, natural or manufactured sand compatible with coarse aggregate; to match approved finish sample. D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic or natural mineral -oxide pigments or colored water -reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading. E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117. 2.6 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Carbon -Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Carbon -Steel -Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3. C. Zinc -Coated Finish: For exterior steel items and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon and 2.5 times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-210356 or SSPC-Paint 20. D. Shop -Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop -apply lead- and chromate -free, rust -inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79 according to SSPC-PA 1. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.7 BEARING PADS A. Provide one of the following bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as recommended by precast fabricator for application: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer hardness of 50 to 70, ASTM D 2240, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi, ASTM D 412. 2.8 GROUT MATERIALS A. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage -compensating agents, plasticizing and water -reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required. 1. Use a single design mixture for units with more than one major face or edge exposed. 2. Where only one face of unit is exposed use either a single design mixture or separate mixtures for face and backup. B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option. C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. D. Normal -Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion full -depth mixture by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal -weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to ASTM C 642, except for boiling requirement. F. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.10 MOLD FABRICATION A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete -placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified. 1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work. 2. Edge and Corner Treatment: As indicated on drawings. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Cast -in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement. Weld -headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding." B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction. C. Cast -in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings or Architect's sample. D. Cast -in openings larger than 10 inches in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand without Architect's approval. E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy -coated reinforcing exceeds limits specified in ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting. 2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete -placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces. 3. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strands to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2 inches when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces. F. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses and specified in -place loads. G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. H. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117. Place self -consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self -Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." Ensure adequate bond between face and backup concrete, if used. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold -weather concrete placement. K. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that does not show in finished structure. L. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product. M. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval. 2.12 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast -in items. B. Position Tolerances: For cast -in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches. 4. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plus or minus 1/4 inch where position has structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, plus or minus 1/2 inch. 5. Reinforcing Steel Extending out of Member: Plus or minus 1/2 inch of plan dimensions. 6. Location of Rustication Joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 7. Location of Opening within Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 8. Location of Flashing Reglets: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 9. Location of Flashing Reglets at Edge of Panel: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 10. Reglets for Glazing Gaskets: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 11. Electrical Outlets, Hose Bibs: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 12. Location of Bearing Surface from End of Member: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 13. Allowable Rotation of Plate, Channel Inserts, and Electrical Boxes: 2-degree rotation or 1/4 inch maximum over the full dimension of unit. 14. Position of Sleeve: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 15. Location of Window Washer Track or Buttons: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.13 FINISHES A. Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed -face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match approved design reference sample and as follows: Design Reference Sample: <Insert description and identify fabricator and code number of sample>. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, bearing surface tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast -in -place concrete has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength and supporting steel or other structure is structurally ready to receive loads from precast concrete units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials. B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are completed. 1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims as precast concrete units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating. 2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. 3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch. C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing. D. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required. 2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet as specified by AWS. 3. Clean weld -affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply a minimum 4.0-mil- thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. 4. Clean weld -affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and reprime damaged painted surfaces. 5. Visually inspect welds and remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds. E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment. 1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. 2. For slip -critical connections, use one of the following methods to assure proper bolt pretension: a. Turn -of -Nut: According to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." b. Calibrated Wrench: According to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Twist -off Tension Control Bolt: ASTM F 1852. d. Direct -Tension Control Bolt: ASTM F 1852. 3. For slip -critical connections, use method and inspection procedure approved by Architect and coordinated with inspection agency. F. Grouting or Dry -Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff dry -pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout and finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. Architect reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements. B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime -painted components with same type of shop primer. E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view. B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately. C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials. END OF SECTION 03 45 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 03 60 00 SITE GROUT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03 11 00, Site Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03 21 00, Site Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03 30 01, Site Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Commercially manufactured nonshrink cementitious grout. The submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards, and Material Safety Data Sheet. 2. Commercially manufactured nonshrink epoxy grout. The submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards, and Material Safety Data Sheet. 3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any proposed admixtures, and the proposed mix of the grout. 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include data as required for concrete as delineated in Section 03 30 00 and for fiber reinforcement as delineated in Section 03 24 00. This includes the mix design, constituent quantities per cubic yard, and the water/cement ratio. B. Laboratory Test Reports 1. Submit laboratory test data as required under Section 03 30 00 for concrete to be used as concrete grout. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Certifications 1. Certify that commercially manufactured grout products and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days curing. D. Qualifications 1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least 10 years experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts which they will supply. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C33—Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C 1 50—Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3. ASTM C531—Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. 4. ASTM C579—Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. 5. ASTM C827—Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures. 6. ASTM C1107—Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 7. ASTM D695 B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD) 1. CRD C-621—Corps of Engineers Specification for Nonshrink Grout. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre -installation Conference 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Well in advance of grouting, the Contractor shall hold a pre -installation meeting to review the requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each product proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of the meeting at least 10 days before its scheduled date. B. Services of Manufacturer's Representative A qualified field technician of the nonshrink grout manufacturer, specifically trained in installing the products shall attend the pre -installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation of each type of nonshrink grout. Additional services shall also be provided, as required, to correct installation problems. C. Field Testing 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and shall provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The methods of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM Standards. 2. The field testing of Concrete Grout shall be as specified for concrete in Section 03 30 00. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01 66 00 for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers, and printed instructions. C. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Total storage time from the date of manufacture to the date of installation shall be limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, whichever is less. D. Material which becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Nonshrink-cement-based grouts shall be delivered as preblended, prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Nonshrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as premeasured, prepackaged, three - component systems requiring only blending as directed by the manufacturer. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. The grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work. 1.8 DEFINITIONS A. Nonshrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened state, and bonds to a clean base plate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired. B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to provide standardization of appearance. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Nonshrink Cementitious Grout 1. Nonshrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C-621. Grouts shall be Portland -cement based, contain a pre -proportioned blend of selected aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents, and shall require only the addition of water. Nonshrink cementitious grouts shall not contain expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827. a. General purpose nonshrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. Flowable (Precision) nonshrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master Builders, Inc.; Hi Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. B. Nonshrink Epoxy Grout 1. Nonshrink epoxy based grout shall be a pre -proportioned, three -component, 100% solids system consisting of epoxy resin, hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10 6 when tested in conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; Sikadur 42 Grout Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co. or equal. C. Cement Grout Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand conforming to ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The water content shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not to the degree that it will allow the grout to flow. D. Concrete Grout 1. Concrete grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 00 00 except as specified in this Section. It shall be proportioned with cement, coarse and fine aggregates, water, water reducer, and an air -entraining agent to produce a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 2500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be 3/8-in maximum. Slump should not exceed 5 inches and should be as low as practical yet still retain sufficient workability. 2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers as specified in Section 03 24 00 shall be added to the concrete grout mix at the rate of 1.5 lb of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be added from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the manufacturer's recommendations in a manner which will ensure complete dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the concrete grout. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Water 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints, and free of all loose material or foreign matter which may affect the bond or performance of the grout. C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into the parent concrete. 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the oilless type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil from being blown onto the surface. D. Remove all loose rust, oil, or other deleterious substances from metal embedments or bottom of baseplates before installing the grout. E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24 hours before the placing of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Upon completion of the 24-hour period, visible water shall be removed from the surface before grouting. An adhesive bonding agent should only be used in lieu of surface saturation when approved by the Engineer for each specific location of grout installation. F. Epoxy -based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Construct grout forms or other leak -proof containment as required. Forms shall be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer. Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place, and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement. 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by shims, wedges, blocks, or other approved means. The shims, wedges, and blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate bond breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION —GENERAL A. The Contractor shall mix, apply, and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and this Section. B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at hand. C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout between 40 and 90OF during grouting and for at least 24 hours after or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of baseplates and grout during the curing period. D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 90OF range. E. Install grout in a manner which will preserve the isolation between the elements on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or contraction joint. F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, contraction, and construction joints through the grout. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.3 INSTALLATION —CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS A. Mix in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, sand, pea gravel, or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer. B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is recommended. Pre -wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. C. Placements greater than 3 in deep shall include the addition of clean, washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of aggregate to be added. D. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid segregation or entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the material. Placement should proceed in a manner which will ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary. E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial stiffening. F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at a 450 angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish. G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. Saturate the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding, or other approved means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished. 3.4 INSTALLATION—NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper proportions of resin, hardener, and aggregate. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 90°F. C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping air. Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary. D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout thickness. E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish. Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water. Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. 3.5 INSTALLATION —CONCRETE GROUT A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface clean until placement of concrete grout. B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water. Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted. C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours before placing the concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or soaker hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water just before placing the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately 1/16- to 1/8-inch-thick cement paste. D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for surface elevation and to ensure that high and low spots are eliminated. Unless specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed. E. Provide grout contraction joints as indicated on the Drawings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast -in -place concrete. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used: 1. General purpose nonshrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations where nonshrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates greater than 3 feet wide by 3 feet long and, except for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete. 2. Foowable nonshrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates greater in area than 3 feet by 3 feet. Use at all locations indicated to receive flowable nonshrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her option and convenience, may also substitute flowable nonshrink grout for general purpose nonshrink cementitious grout. 3. Nonshrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts, and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically indicated to receive epoxy grout. 4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base plates for platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns and girders. 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface grade. END OF SECTION 03 60 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SITE GROUT 03 60 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 04 20 00 — UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net -area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net -area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Cold -Weather and Hot -Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. E. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather -resistant membrane. 4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Deliver pre -blended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store pre -blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. B. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire - resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. Provide square -edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Density Classification: Normal weight. 2. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured -face units made with gap -graded aggregates. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS A. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed -in -place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars indicated. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B.. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Cherokee Brick and Tile Co.; M/S Velour Burgundy (field brick as indicated on drawings). b. Cherokee Brick and Tile Co.; M/S Velour Maroon (accent brick as indicated on drawings). C. Cherokee Brick and Tile Co.; M/S Velour Buff (accent brick as indicated on drawings). 2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX 4. Size: 4 inch Jumbo. 5. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 6. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Essroc, Italcementi Group. b. Lafarge North America Inc. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lafarge North America Inc. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. G. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mill -Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating. B. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication . C. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units. 2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. 3. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. Mill -galvanized wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. a. 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. 3. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from 0.060- inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch of masonry face. 0.079-inch- thick, galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated. G. Adjustable Masonry -Veneer Anchors: General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. Slip -in, Masonry -Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and an anchor section designed to interlock with metal studs and be slipped into place as sheathing is installed. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; AA308. b. Wire -Type Anchor: Bent wire anchor section with an eye to receive the wire tie. Wire tie has a vertical leg that slips into the eye of anchor section and allows vertical adjustment. Both sections are made from 3/16-inch, hot -dip galvanized wire. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.034-inch, galvanized steel sheet. 2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyester -reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) DuPont; Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Flex -Flash. 3) Hyload, Inc.; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System. 4) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Total Flash. b. Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch thick. C. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer. B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is fully concealed, use flexible flashing. C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. WeepNent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: Rectangular Plastic WeepNent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches long. E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free -draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. 2. Provide the following configuration: a. Strips, full -depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings. 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. C. ProSoCo, Inc. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement -lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. For exterior, above -grade, load -bearing and non -load -bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load -bearing walls; for interior non -load -bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 4. For interior non -load -bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. - 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed -joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. H. Build non -load -bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge non -load -bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead -load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire -rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems." 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct -applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 4.5 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically. a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties. b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder -type reinforcement extending across both wythes. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties. 3. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into each wythe. Space headers not over 8 inches clear horizontally and 16 inches clear vertically. 4. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings. C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. D. Apply air barrier to face of backup wythe to comply with Section 072726 "Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers." 3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in - plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond -breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond -breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam -plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 2. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." D. Provide horizontal, pressure -relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure -relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick -size units and 24 inches for block -size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 4. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes formed from 16 inches o.c. D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.13 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 14 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches . 3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil - contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 15 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04 20 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 16 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 04 2113 — BRICK MASONRY VENEER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Face brick at cavity walls. b. Mortar and grout. C. Joint reinforcing, ties and anchors. d. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. e. Installation of steel lintels and shelf angles. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A82 — Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM A153 — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. C. ASTM A167 — Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. D. ASTM A366 — Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Cold Rolled. E. ASTM A510 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel. F. ASTM A951 — Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement G. ASTM A580 — Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire. H. ASTM C67 — Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile I. ASTM C144 — Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar J. ASTM C150 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement K. ASTM C207 — Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes L. ASTM C270 — Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry M. ASTM C 920 — Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants N. ASTM C954 — Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal O. ASTM D412 — Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers— Tension. P. ASTM D638 — Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. Q. ASTM D790 — Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials R. ASTM D1056 — Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials —Sponge or Expanded Rubber S. ASTM D4637 — Standard Test Method for Benzene in Hydrocarbon Solvents by Gas Chromatography T. ASTM E119 — Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 04 21 13 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL U. ASTM E2178 — Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end -dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Face brick. 2. Masonry accessories. 3. Cavity Drainage material. 4. Colored mortar. 5. Weeps/vents. D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 4' high with a right angle comer with a 6' and a 4' leg by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include a sealant -filled joint at least 16 inches long in exterior wall mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening in exterior wall mockup. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.7 1.8 C. Include through -wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). d. Include water -resistive barrier, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, and weep holes in exterior masonry -veneer wall mockup. 2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather -resistant membrane. 4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. B. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength. 3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. C. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. D. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. Meridian Brick 2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. B. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire - resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 FACE BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated on Drawings and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units. 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Basis of Design: a. Red Wirecut b. New Ashbury Wirecut 2. Grade: SW 3. Type: FBS 4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 6. Size (Actual Dimensions): Utility - 3-1/2 inches wide by 3-5/8 inches high by 11-5/8 inches long. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Color: To match architects sample.. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White -Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. E. Water: Potable 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 04 21 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.5 REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Coating: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. B. Brick Veneer Anchors: General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment to backup wall and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. b. Tie and Anchors: Provide anchoring systems ties that comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. C. Material: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M sheet metal galvanized to comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0. 1 87-inch-diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed -end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Substrate Anchors Manufacturers: The basis of design products indicated are from Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Provide product indicated or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Brick Veneer Adjustable Anchors with Masonry or Concrete Backup Wall: a. Basis of Design Product: "HB-213 Adjustable Veneer Anchor" units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. 3. Brick Veneer Anchor with Masonry Backup Wall: a. Basis of Design: "Hook and Eye Tie System #270 — 2X" in size as required to comply with required joint embed criteria. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Pre -molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane, or PVC. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep/Vents: One-piece, free -draining mesh; made from polymer strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. 1. Products: provide one of the following: a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents. b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents C. Advanced Building Products: Mortar Maze Weep Vents 2.8 DRAINAGE MAT A. Cavity Drainage Mat Material: Free -draining mesh, fabricated from polymer fused entangled filaments bonded to a moisture resistant fiber fabric on the outer surfaces and that will not .degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Basis of Design: The basis of design products "WaterWay Rainscreen Drainage Mats" are manufactured by Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. 2. Mats: Mats shall be 4/5" (19mm) thick. 3. Fasteners: Fasteners suitable for substrate, stainless steel and as approved by the mat manufacturer. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. B. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2 cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2 cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gallon of water. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.10 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Add cold -weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Pre -blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre -blended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless another type is indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SHEET AIR BARRIER A. General: Install modified bituminous sheets and accessory materials according to air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg, install self - adhering, modified bituminous air -barrier sheet produced for low -temperature application. Do not install low -temperature sheet if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. 3.3 DRIANGE MAT INSTALLATION A. Install drainage mat per manufacturers recommendations. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FACE BRICK, GENERAL A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. D. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch; do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.6 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond, unless a special bond pattern is indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 3.7 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick with entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings. B. Tool exposed joints. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to backup wall with veneer anchors to provide not less than 1 inch of air space and comply with the following requirements: 1. Masonry Wall Backup: Fasten screw -attached anchors to masonry or concrete with metal fasteners of type indicated where embed tie installation is not possible. 2. Masonry Wall Backup: Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. 3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in -plane wall or partition movement. B. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build flanges of factory -fabricated, expansion joint units into masonry. 2. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." C. Provide horizontal, pressure -relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. Locate horizontal, pressure -relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.10 LINTELS A. install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. At Masonry Backup Wall: Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1- 1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 4. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 04 21 13 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 24 inches o.c. 4. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material. F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through -wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. 3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in "BIA Technical Notes 20." 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 04 21 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BRICK MASONRY VENEER 0421 13 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 04 72 00 — CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Exterior copings, lintels and as indicated b. Drainage mat 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cast -stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast -stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. 1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. C. Samples: 1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size. 2. For each trim shape required, 10 inches in length. 3. For colored mortar, make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364. B. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according to ASTM C 1364. Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast -stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute the Architectural Precast Association or the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Build mockups of typical exterior wall area not less than 72 inches long by 48 inches high. a. Include typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation. b. Include window opening with stone returns and trim. C. Include typical carved surface. d. Include sealant -filled joint. e. Include an area that has been damaged and repaired. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship cast -stone units in suitable packs or pallets. Lift with wide -belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast -stone units if required, using dollies with wood supports. Store cast -stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Northfield Block Co. an Oldcastle Company 2.2 CAST -STONE UNITS A. Basis of Design: "Cordova Stone Masonry Units" B. Type: Arriscraft Renaissance Masonry Units C. Face: Ground face and chisel face textures as indicated on Drawings. D. Size: As indicated on Drawings. E. Color: Alabaster. F. Cast -Stone Units: Comply with ASTM C 1364. G. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated. H. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater. 4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces. 2.3 CAST -STONE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast -stone color indicated. B. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33/C 33M; gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast -stone textures and colors. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33/C 33M, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast -stone textures and colors. D. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water - reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or 11. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91 M. E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 3. White -Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. G. Water: Potable. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment to backup wall and as follows: 1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2. Tie and Anchors: Provide anchoring systems ties that comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 3. Material: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M sheet metal galvanized to comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating. B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Substrate Anchors Manufacturers: The basis of design products indicated are from Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Provide product indicated or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-WaI Division; b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. 2. Stone Veneer Adjustable Anchors with Masonry or Concrete Backup Wall: a. Basis of Design Product: "HB-213 Adjustable Veneer Anchor" units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. Stone Veneer Anchor with Masonry Backup Wall: b. Basis of Design: "Hook and Eye Tie System #270 — 2X" in size as required to comply with required joint embed criteria. D. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's recommended cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cast -stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Pre -molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane, or PVC. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep/Vents: One-piece, free -draining mesh; made from polymer strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. Products: provide one of the following: a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents. b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-WaI Division; Cell Vents C. Advanced Building Products: Mortar Maze Weep Vents 2.7 DRAINAGE MAT A. Cavity Drainage Mat Material: Free -draining mesh, fabricated from polymer fused entangled filaments bonded to a moisture resistant fiber fabric on the outer surfaces and that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Basis of Design: The basis of design products "WaterWay Rainscreen Drainage Mats" are manufactured by Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. 2. Mats: Mats shall be 4/5" (19mm) thick. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Fasteners: Fasteners suitable for substrate, stainless steel and as approved by the mat manufacturer 2.8 MORTAR MIXES A. Do not use admixtures including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. 3. Mix to match Architect's sample. 4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints. D. Colored -Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. Mix to match Architect's sample. 2. Application: Use colored -aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample and test cast -stone units according to ASTM C 1364. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ANCHORING STONE VENEERS A. Anchor stone veneers to backup wall with veneer anchors to provide not less than 1 inch of air space and comply with the following requirements: 1. Masonry Wall Backup: Fasten screw -attached anchors to masonry or concrete with metal fasteners of type indicated where embed tie installation is not possible. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Masonry Wall Backup: Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. 3.3 DRAINAGE MAT INSTALLATION A. Install drainage mat per manufacturers recommendations. 3.4 EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in -plane wall or partition movement. B. Form expansion joints in stone as follows: 1. Build flanges of factory -fabricated, expansion joint units into masonry. 2. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form open joint full depth of stone wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." C. Provide horizontal, pressure -relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure -relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.5 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES AND VENTS A. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 24 inches o.c. 4. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. B. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material. C. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through -wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.6 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other Sections. B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set units with joints 3/8 inch wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in copings and between other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. E. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard. Use a smooth plastic jointer larger than joint thickness. G. Rake out joints for pointing with sealant to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. H. Point joints with sealant to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." Prime cast -stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. Provide sealant joints at head joints of copings and other horizontal surfaces; at expansion, control, and pressure -relieving joints; and at locations indicated. 1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Build in compressible foam -plastic joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch. 4. Prime cast -stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. 5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." J. Cover wall each day after installation to keep open walls protected and dry. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one- fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm), except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean cast stone by bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 04 72 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 05 12 00 — STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes structural steel and grout. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer fabricator and testing agency. D. Welding certificates. E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. F. Source quality -control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Channels, Angles -Shapes: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50. D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. E. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements for E70XX. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible -washer type with plain finish. B. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy - hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy -hex carbon - steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Finish: Plain. D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. 1. Finish: Plain. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Finish: Plain. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high -strength bolted with slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop -welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high -strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and the following inspection procedures, attesting agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 05 12 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 05 21 00 — STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. K-series steel joists. 2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 3. K-series steel joist substitutes. 4. Joist accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. C. Welding certificates. D. Manufacturer certificates. E. Field quality -control test and inspection reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, SJI's "Specifications") that are applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel -angle chord members. Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 50 percent. B. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon -steel, hex -head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. Finish: Plain, uncoated. C. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. Finish: Plain. D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. Note: Bar joists, subjected to net uplift forces from wind loading are to be designed by a Specialty Structural Engineer who shall be a Professional Engineer holding current registration in Florida. The design of the Bar Joists and the uplift bridging shall be signed and sealed by this Specialty Engineer. Either the layout plan for the bar joists (showing the required bridging) shall be signed and sealed or a letter (signed and sealed) shall be provided that confirms that this Engineer has reviewed the bridging and that the illustrated bridging complies with his design requirements. Joist Type: K-series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle or -channel members. 2.3 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. 2.4 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories. Apply 1 coat of shop primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor to engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 05 21 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 0521 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 05 31 00 — STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck. 3. Composite cellular floor deck. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete fill. 2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field -welded shear connectors. 3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 4. Division 26 Section "Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems" for preset inserts, activation kits, afterset inserts, service fittings, header ducts, and trench header ducts used with cellular floor -deck systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. D. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. E. Welding certificates. F. Field quality -control test and inspection reports. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STEEL DECKING 0531 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1. Power -actuated mechanical fasteners. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. D. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." E. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory -installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G90 zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Design Uncoated -Steel Thicknesses; Deck Unit/Bottom Plate: As indicated. 6. Span Condition: As indicated. 7. Side Laps: Overlapped. 2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50, G60 zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: As indicated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low -velocity, power -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated. G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STEEL DECKING 0531 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. 3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 31 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 05 40 00 — COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior non -load -bearing wall framing. 2. Roof trusses.(Roof trusses not used on this project) B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for interior non -load -bearing, metal - stud framing and ceiling -suspension assemblies. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior non -load -bearing, metal -stud -framed, shaft -wall assemblies. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold -formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. (Material weights and applicable wind pressures). 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non -Load -Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. b. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. (N/A this project). C. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 1 inch. B. Cold -Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Design exterior non -load -bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. 3. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." (N/A this project.) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold -formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. LEED Submittal: Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. For cold -formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Welding certificates. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products: 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power -actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold -formed metal framing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data (for all light gauge steel framing, both load bearing and non -load bearing, including partitioning) by a qualified Specialty Structural Professional Engineer holding current registration in the state of Florida. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold -formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base -metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic -coating thickness. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.101.1M, "Structural Welding Code --Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." F. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold -formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." (N/A this project.) 2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold -formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold -formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60. C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: 50, Class 1 or 2. 2. Coating: G90. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0346 inch. (20 Gauge Structural Minimum) 2. Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0451 inch. (18 Gauge Minimum) 2. Flange Width: 1-1A inches C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep -leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0451 inch. (18 Gauge Minimum.) 2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for 1-story structures 2.3 ROOF TRUSSES A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard steel sections, unpunched, with stiffened flanges. (N/A for this project.) 2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion -resistant -coated, self -drilling, self -tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low -profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage -compensating agents, and plasticizing and water -reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold -formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold -formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out -of - square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. B. After applying sprayed fire -resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold -formed framing without reducing thickness of fire - resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire -resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire -resistive materials from damage. C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold -formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold -formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field -fabricated, cold -formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true -to -line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. D. Install cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold -formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 1. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. 1. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Stud Spacing: As indicated. B. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. C. Isolate non -load -bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Install single -leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure. D. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.5 TRUSS INSTALLATION A. Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to Shop Drawings and requirements in this Section. B. Truss Spacing: As indicated. C. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses. D. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacings indicated. E. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections. F. Align webs of bottom chords and load -bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. G. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and designed according to LGSEA's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide for Permanent Bracing of Cold -Formed Steel Trusses.". 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold -formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold -formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 40 00 02017. HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 05 50 00 — METAL FABRICATIONS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to the following metal fabrications: a. Miscellaneous metal fabrications. b. Rough hardware. C. Loose bearing and leveling plates. d. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 1) Elevator hoist beam. e. Ladders. 1) Inclined access. 2) Elevator pit. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AAMA 2603 — Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels B. AAMA 204 — Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels C. AAMA 606.1 — Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum D. AAMA 607.1 — Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum E. AAMA 608.1 — Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum F. ANSI A14.3 —American National Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements G. ASTM A36/A36M — Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel H. ASTM A53 — Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless I. ASTM A123/A123M — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products J. ASTM A153/A153M — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware K. ASTM A240 — Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications L. ASTM A283 — Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars M. ASTM A307 — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL N. ASTM A500 — Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. O. ASTM A501 — Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. P. ASTM B26 — Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings Q. ASTM B85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings R. ASTM B177 — Standard Guide for Engineering Chromium Electroplating S. ASTM B209 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate T. ASTM B210 — Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes U. ASTM B211 — Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire V. ASTM B221 — Standard Specification for Aluminum -and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes W. AWS A2.4 — Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, Nondestructive Examination X. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M — Structural Welding Code Bundled Set B Y. SSPC — Steel Structure Painting Council - Steel Structures Painting Council Z. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product data for products. B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations for load bearing elements, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALLS A. Welder current certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.6 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS "Structural Welding Code" 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re -certification. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1. See Concrete and Masonry Sections of these Specifications for installation of inserts and anchorage devices. D. Shop Assembly: Pre -assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re -assembly and coordinated installation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions -and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1.8 PERFORMANCE A. Delegated -Design: For items subject to loads required by applicable codes and indicated to comply with performance requirements, design criteria, design shall be performed and include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36. B. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A786. C. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows: A. Cold -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. B. Hot -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A501. C. Hot dipped galvanize finish for exterior installations and where indicated shall comply with ASTM A 53. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight required by structural loads. A. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hot dipped galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated shall comply with ASTM A 53. 2.3 STAtNLESS STEEL A. Plate, Sheet and Strip: ASTM A240 2.4 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. B. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52 or ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6. C. Extruded Structural Pipe Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/13 429M, Alloy 6063-T6. A. Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe, unless otherwise indicated. D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063-T832. E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6. G. Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. B. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A47, or cast steel, ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A153. 2.6 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: A. Exterior exposed steel scheduled to be painted if not galvanized: Tnemec Tneme-Zinc 90-97 or equal by Carboline or Ameron. B. Refer to Section 09 91 00, Painting, for primer for interior exposed steel scheduled to be painted. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for re -galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. D. Coordinate standard shop primers normally provided with the finish paint specifications for these items in Painting specifications. Metal fabricator will be required to provide the primers as specified in Painting specifications. All items scheduled to receive finish coats as specified in Painting specifications shall be prepared for primer in accordance with SSPC - SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning, or SSPC - SP3, Power Tool Cleaning, as recommended by the manufacturer for the types of primers installed. 2.7 FASTENERS/ANCHORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. A. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Stainless -Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head annealed stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 2. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. A. Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. H. Post -Installed Anchors. 2.8 GROUT A. Non -shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, non -staining, non -corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. B-6 Construction Grout; W. R. Bonsai Co. B. Sure -grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp. C. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. D. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products. E. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. F. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. G. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows, Inc. 2.9 CONCRETE FILL A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Specification Section "Cast -in - Place Concrete," for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28- day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless higher strengths are indicated. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. A. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (55.5 deg C). D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: A. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. B. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. C. Remove welding flux immediately. D. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Shop Assembly: Pre -assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for re -assembly and coordinated installation. K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. M. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. N. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. O. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. P. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Q. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS A. Rough Hardware A. Furnish bent, or otherwise custom -fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 06 Sections. B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable -iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel washers elsewhere. B. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication. C. Inclined Steel Ladders A. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3 and OSHA. B. Siderails: Continuous, steel, 10" x 2" channel or bent plate spaced 24 inches apart. C. Treads: 6" wide x 1-1/2" deep channel or bent plate, space 12" apart maximum. D. Fit treads in centerline of side rails, weld fully and grind smooth. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5 feet o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads per designated design. F. Provide non -slip surfaces on top of each tread, either by coating the tread with aluminum -oxide granules set in epoxy -resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured tread that is filled with aluminum -oxide grout. G. Handrail: 1-1/2" diameter pipe minimum Schedule 40 with 1-1/2" diameter pipe sections welded to stringer at 30" o.c. maximum. Handrail shall project 6" above the stringer. Locate bottom of handrail 36" above finished floor. Extend rail above upper second floor landing 40". H. Incline: 68 degrees. D. Elevator Pit Ladders: 1. Fabricate ladders for the location shown with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorage as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A17.1. 2. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 3. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 4. Rungs: 3/4-inch diameter. Space at 12" o.c. 5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum -oxide granules set in epoxy -resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum -oxide grout. 7. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. 8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches with welded or bolted steel brackets. 2.12 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS A. Fabricate from 3/16-inch rolled-steel floor plate with four 1-inch diameter holes for water drainage and for lifting. B. Fabricate from welded or pressure -locked steel bar grating Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension. C. Provide steel angle supports as indicated. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long. C. Provide framing as follows: 1. Elevator hoist beams. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices wherever possible and grind welds smooth and finish flush where exposed to view. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations: 1. Exterior locations. 2.15 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from extruded aluminum shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices wherever possible and grind welds smooth and finish flush when exposed to view. B. Provide anchorages as required to coordinate assembly and installation with other work and if exposed approved by the Architect. 2.16 STEEL PIPE BOLLARDS A. Bollards shall comply with ASTM F3016. B. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Fill bollards with concrete. Provide a rounded top. C. Provide 1/8" thick HDPE bollard covers based on "Fixed Post Bollard Covers" by Cal Pipe Manufacturing, Downey, CA; or equal. Color as selected by the Architect. D. Removable Bollards 1. Provide HDPE bollard cap based on Model No. 1769 by Eagle Manufacturing Company or equal, color of cap shall be black. Paint bollard to match fix bollards cover color. 2.17 FINISHES - GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual' for recommendations relative to applying and designing finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. FINISHES — STEEL 1. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2. 2. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 3. Do not prime surfaces in where field welding is required. 4. Interior Steel Members: Prime paint items with one coat. 5. Exterior Steel Members: a. Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM Al23/A123M. b. Provide minimum G90 galvanized coating. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. FINISHES —ALUMINUM A. Aluminum Surfaces: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. B. Finish: To be selected by the Architect. 1. Clear Anodic Finish: Class 1, AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Mechanical finish, nonspecular as fabricated, chemical finish, 0.7 mils or thicker. 2. Colored Anodic Finish: Class 2, AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Mechanical finish, nonspecular as fabricated, integral colored, chemical finish, 0.4 mils or thicker. Verify availability with manufacturers selected. 3. Color: As selected by Architect. D. FINISHES — STAINLESS STEEL A. Finish: #4 Satin PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which miscellaneous and ornamental items are to be installed. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop -welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.4 SETTING LOOSE PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use non -shrink, metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non -shrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.5 INSTALLING LADDERS A. CMU/Concrete Walls: Ladder to be attached directly to floor and wall. B. Metal Stud Partitions: Ladder to be attached directly to floor and wall. 3.6 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. 3.7 INSTALLING METAL PIPE BOLLARDS A. Fill metal -capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. B. Anchor bollards in concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. D. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner furnishes padlocks. E. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 3.8 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS A. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. 3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a 2.0-mil minimum dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 09 Section "Painting." C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. 3.10 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Collect cutoffs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling. B. Coordinate with manufacturer and local recycler for take -back program or recycling. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 05 5113 — METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to 1. Pre -assembled steel stair with concrete filled treads. 2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36/A36M — Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel B. ASTM A48 — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings C. ASTM A53 — Standard Specification for Pipe, Black, and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless D. ASTM A283/A283M — Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates E. ASTM A307 — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength F. ASTM A325 — Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength G. ASTM A500 — Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes H. ASTM A501 — Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing I. ASTM A563 — Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts J. ASTM A652 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy - Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process K. ASTM Al011/A1011M — Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability L. ASTM D1187 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal M. ASTM B663 — Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel N. ASTM E935 — Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings O. ASTM E985 — Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings P. AWS A2.4 — Standard Symbols Welding, Brazing, Nondestructive Examination Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M — Structural Welding Code Steel Bundled Set B R. NAAMM AMP 510 — Metal Stairs Manual S. NAAMM MBG 531 — Metal Bar Grating Manual T. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) — Steel Structures Painting Manual U. FBC — Florida Building Code 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 05 51 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs components. B. Submit shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Welder current certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.6 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS - "Structural Welding Code." C. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re -certification. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. B. Coordination 1. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. 2. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 3. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire -resistance -rated stair enclosure. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 0551 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.8 PERFORMANCE A. Fabricate stair assembly to NAAMM - Metal Stairs Manual, Class Architectural. B. Design shall include all member, supports and connections for fully functional stairs as indicated in the delegated design. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. E. Welding: Welders employed on the work shall perform all work in accordance with AWS standards. F. Dedicated -Design Submittal: For stairs and railings indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following in each category however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. Stair and Handrails a. American Stair Corp. b. Sharon Stairs C. Alfab Inc. 2.2 STEEL -FRAMED STAIRS A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with 'Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels and provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements. 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 0551 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire -resistance -rated stair enclosure. 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold -rolled steel sheet. 2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they are concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 3. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 4. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. D. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Top Rail: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" square. 2. Handrail: 1-1/2" o.c. 3. Post: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" square at 4" o.c. 4. Pickets: 3/4" x 3/4" square. 5. Bottom Rails: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" square. E. Railing Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. For railings, provide ferrous -metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except provide galvanized anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. 2. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. 3. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Provide concealed spigots and fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 1. Framer construction: Prepare backing plate for mounting in wall. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts consistent with design of railing. B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 0551 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Provide concealed cast spigots and fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or A307 D. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS-FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. E. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Pipe: To ASTM A53 Type E or S, Grade B. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). E. Uncoated, Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. F. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated. D. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 05 51 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for welded materials. 2.6 FABRICATION GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, tap and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. I Weld Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit or use fittings design for this purpose. Weld all around at connections including fitting. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate connection anchorage points for decorative metal railing. 2.7 RAILING FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but, not less than that required to support structural loads. Railings shall be fabricated by one manufacture. B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 0551 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. For railings, provide ferrous -metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. 2. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush -resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. K. Shop Assembly: Pre -assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for re -assembly and coordinated installation. L. Fabricate system to accommodate railing anchor plates. M. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members. 2.8 FINISH A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes B. Preparation for Shop Priming Stairs: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products. C. Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. D. Finish: Paint per Painting specification. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 0551 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which metal stair items are to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in -place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through -bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Specification Section "Cast - in -Place Concrete." 3.5 INSTALLING RAILINGS A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and.masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with post -installed anchors and bolts. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 0551 13 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel -framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 5. For steel -framed partitions, use self -tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. 6. For steel -framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. B. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Painting Specification Section. D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 05 51 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 METAL PAN STAIRS 0551 13 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 05 52 13 — PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDE A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Interior steel pipe tube railings and accessories 2. Exterior aluminum pipe tube railings and accessories 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A307 — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength B. ASTM A325 — Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength C. ASTM A500 — Standard Specification for Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes D. ASTM A501 — Standard Specification for Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing E. ASTM B210 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes F. ASTM B221 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes G. ASTM B241/A241M — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube H. ASTM B483 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Tubes for General Purpose Applications I. ASTM E935 — Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Building J. ASTM E985 — Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings K. AAMA 607.1 — Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum L. AAMA 611 — Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum M. AWS — Structural Welding Code N. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) — Steel Structures Painting Manual O. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. C. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 1. Fittings and brackets. 2. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. 3. Show method of connecting members at intersections. D. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including handrail. Sample need not be full height. Show method of connecting members at intersections. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Welder current certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS - "Structural Welding Code" C. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re -certification. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. B. Coordination 1. Coordination installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 2. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses indicated in the designated design. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. D. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Delegated -Design: Provide design services and calculations for railings to comply with performance requirements, design criteria and applicable codes, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following in each category however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings a. American Stair Corporation b. Sharon Stairs C. Alfab, Inc. 2. Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. b. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. C. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 STEEL RAILING A. Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand design loads. 1. Handrails, Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch diameter. 2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch round pickets spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Lower Rails: 1-1/2-inch B. Railing Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. For railings, provide ferrous -metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except provide galvanized anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Provide concealed spigots and fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 1. Framer construction: Prepare backing plate for mounting in wall. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts consistent with design of railing. B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Provide concealed cast spigots and fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or A307, for exterior components galvanize to G90 per ASTM Al53/A153M. D. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS-FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. For exterior provide mechanically deposited or hot -dip, zinc -coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs and stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc -rich primer. F. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Interior: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. Exterior: Alloy stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.4 FERROUS MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Pipe: To ASTM A53 Type E or S, Grade B. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 ALUMINUM A. Extruded Bars Tubing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52. B. Extruded Structural Pipe Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6. C. Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe, unless otherwise indicated. D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M), Alloy 6063-T832. E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6. F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc -coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. E. Welding Materials: AWS; type required for welded materials. F. Non -shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, non -staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush -resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: E. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. F. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. K. For railings, provide ferrous -metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction and stainless steel for aluminum. L. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. M. Fillers: Provide fillers made from plate material, or other suitably crush -resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. N. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. O. Shop Assembly: Pre -assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for re -assembly and coordinated installation. P. Fabricate system to accommodate railing anchor plates. Q. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members. R. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open -sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL S. Aluminum Surfaces: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. 2.8 FINISH A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. B. Exterior Stairs 1. High -Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by the Architect. C. Interior Stairs: 1. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products. 2. Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting 3. Finish: Paint per Painting Specification PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in -place construction. Do not store handrails at jobsite. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non -shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. C. Use cast pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing exterior railing. 3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. B. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Collect cutoffs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling. B. Coordinate with manufacturer and local recycler for take -back program or recycling. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. END OF SECTION 05 52 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 05 73 00 — DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDE A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Decorative metal railings. 2. Wood railing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A47/A47M — Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings B. ASTM A48/A48M — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings C. ASTM A307 — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength D. ASTM E935 — Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Building E. ASTM E985 — Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings F. AWS A2.4 — Standard Symbols Welding, Brazing, Nondestructive Examination G. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M — Structural Welding Code Steel Bundled Set B H. J. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) — Steel Structures Painting Manual I. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for metal. C. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 1. Fittings and brackets. 2. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including post and handrail. Sample need not be full height. 3. Show method of connecting members at intersections. D. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including handrail. Sample need not be full height. Show method of connecting members at intersections. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification. F. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS "Structural Welding Code". B. Certify that welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and is currently certificated. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the loads and stresses indicated in the delegated design. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. King Architectural Metals ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 STAIRS A. Steel Railing 1. Manufacturers: Basis of design products indicated are manufactured by King's Architectural Metals. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the architect. 2. Provide the following steel rail components in a configuration as indicated on the drawings and as follows: a. Item # 13-45026-043 Forged Steel Baluster Double Twist. b. Item # 13-45026-044 Forged Steel Baluster, Single Twist, 2 Baskets. c. Item # 13-45026-000 Forged Steel Baluster, Plain. d. Item # 13-47026-620 Forged Steel Baluster, 2 Center S Scrolls. e. Item # 13-47029-000 Forged Steel Newel Post Plain. f. 1-3/16" x 9/16" solid steel bottom rail. B. Wood Top Rail: Somerset 2-3/8" high x 2-5/8" wide, #6009 wood handrail as manufactured by Cooper Stairworks. Wood type to be oak, (stained), with sweeps, turnouts, etc. for complete installation. C. Newel Post: Square 5"x5", #4623 newel post as manufactured by Stair Supplies. Wood type to be red oak, (cap and surface trim to be stained, body to be painted). D. Handrail: Brass 1-1/2" diameter x 0.05 wall thickness handrail as manufactured by Julius Blum & Co., Inc. Finish to be selected by the Architect. Finish to be oil rubbed. E. Handrail Bracket: Brass bracket as manufactured by Julius Blum & Co., Inc. and as selected by the Architect and finish to match handrail. Finish to be oil rubbed. F. Verify all paint and stain finish locations with Architect. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings and stairs to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings and stairs to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads and match existing. 1. Framer construction: Prepare backing plate for mounting in wall. 2. Fasteners: Provide concealed screws or bolts fasteners for handrail system. B. Newell Post Anchor: Provide threader rod, steel plate base anchor. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. For railings, provide metal type as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.5 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. C. Gray Iron: ASTM A48/A48M D. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A47M E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of stair structure. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for welded materials. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. Railings shall be fabricated by one manufacture. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. F. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. G. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 1. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 1. Remove flux immediately. 2. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, base plates, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to match existing components. I. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush -resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to metal stairs, concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 2.7 FINISH A. Steel 1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish metal rails after assembly. 3. Baked -Enamel Finish: Chemical thermosetting finish, polyester baked enamel primer/topcoat system complying with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.8 - 3.0 mils. Complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, preparing, pretreating and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in -place construction. E. Do not store handrails at jobsite. 3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 73 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 06 10 00 — ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Miscellaneous blocking, grounds and nailers. b. Plywood Panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) — Softwood Lumber Standards B. EWA (The Engineered Wood Association) C. AWPA U1 — Use Category System- User Specification for Treated Wood D. AWPA P5 — Standard for Waterborne Preservatives E. AFPA (American Forest and Paper Association) F. ANSI/APA (American National Standards Institute/American Plywood Association) G. ASTM C645 — Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members H. ASTM C653/C653M — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process I. ASTM D226 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing J. MFMA (Metal Framing Manufacturer's Association) — Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing K. Voluntary Product Standards PS 20-70 L. Grading rules of Southern Pine M. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.6 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood -preservative -treated wood. 2. Fire -retardant -treated wood. C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Examine substrates and supporting structure and the conditions under which work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. 2. Keep treated wood waste separated from other wood to be recycled or reused as mulch. Discard in a legal manor. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2-PRODUCTS 2,1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. B. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. C. Inspection Agencies: SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. D. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory -marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. E. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS AND BLOCKING A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including blocking, nailers, cants and similar items. B. Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, grounds, and similar members. C. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. D. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber, southern pine per SPIB. E. For concealed boards, provide lumber, southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. F. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. G. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. H. Wood grounds, nailers, and sleepers shall be pressure treated as specified herein. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 METAL BLOCKING A. Provide metal blocking studs and backing plates for support or attachment of other construction and miscellaneous items. B. Metal blocking is to be used in areas only which will not accommodate adequate wood blocking of sufficient size to provide proper support on attachment. C. Metal shall be as follows: 1. Metal blocked to be the same depth, finish as partition studs and minimum 14 gauge, conforming to ASTM C 645. 2. Backing plates shall be minimum 4" high and length as required and minimum 14 gauge, conforming ASTM A653/658 or G40 hot dip galvanized unless indicated otherwise. 2.4 PLYWOOD PANELS A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP-108. Furnish construction panels that are each factory -marked with APA trademark. 2.5 EQUIPMENT PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP-108. Furnish construction panels that are each factory -marked with APA trademark. 1. Panels: Paint plywood with fire retardant paint "Firefree Class A" as manufactured by Firefree Coatings, Inc. 2.6 FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. G. Pressure Treated Wood: Provide stainless steel fasteners of a type and size required for attachment. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.7 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative -treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. C. Pressure -treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water -borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf. D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.8 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire - retardant -treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing and where high temperature fire -retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone. C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln -dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Use screws, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre -drill as required. 3.2 BLOCKING GROUNDS AND NAILERS A. Install blocking, grounds and nailers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other Work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. D. Wood blocking shall be provided for all wall bumpers and wall mounted doorstops. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of construction panels and applications indicated. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 061600 — SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Parapet Plywood Sheathing 1.3 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) — Softwood Lumber Standards B. EWA (The Engineered Wood Association) C. AFPA (American Forest and Paper Association) D. ANSI/APA (American National Standards Institute/American Plywood Association) E. Voluntary Product Standards PS 1 F. Grading rules of Southern Pine G. ASTM D226 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing H. ASTM E72 — Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. I. ASTM E96 — Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. J. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that products comply with specified requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect material during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. 02016, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturers standard warranty. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturers are as indicated however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 2.2 GENERAL A. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.3 PARAPET PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Georgia Pacific Wood Products, LLC 2. Louisiana Pacific Plywood Corp. 3. Weyerhaeuser NR Company B. Parapet Plywood Sheathing: Comply with PS 1, exterior structural 1 sheathing with grade stamps. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: 8 feet. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Span Rating; not less than 24/0 2.4 BUILDING PAPER A. Building Paper: Comply with ASTM D226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt -saturated organic felt) unperforated. 02016, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture and compliance with product approval where applicable. 1. Provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with applicable building codes. D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and parapet sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of fasteners for structural -use panels and applications indicated. 02016, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.3 BUILDING PAPER INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather -resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. 3.4 SHEATHING JOINT -AND -PENETRATION TREATMENT A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient quantity of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 ©2016, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 06 20 00 — FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2, SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Miscellaneous interior woodwork 2. Miscellaneous plastic laminate 3. Miscellaneous clad items 1.3 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) — Softwood Lumber Standards B. EWA (The Engineered Wood Association) C. AWPA U1 — Use Category System- User Specification for Treated Wood D. AWPA P5 — Standard for Waterborne Preservatives E. AFPA (American Forest and Paper Association) F. ANSI/APA (American National Standards Institute/American Plywood Association) G. ASTM D226 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing H. Voluntary Product Standards PS 20-70 I. Grading rules of Southern Pine 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's product data for purchased items installed in millwork prior to delivery and for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. B. Submit complete shop drawings by approved fabricator for proposed millwork items requiring shop fabrication processes. C. Samples of: 1. Proposed solid woods for transparent finish (three 3/4 inch by 3 inch by 8 inch pieces of each species and cut). 2. Proposed veneered woods for transparent finish (three 3/4 inch by 8 inch by 8 inch pieces of each species and cut). 3. Available color and pattern choices for plastic laminate surfacing (one complete chain). ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with specified provisions of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards." B. Optimum Moisture Content: Kiln -dry woodwork to an average moisture content within the following ranges or as otherwise recommended by applicable Quality Standards for the regional climatic conditions involved. Interior woodwork - 5 to 10 percent. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations which could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Examination of Substrate and Conditions: The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the Work under this Section is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with Work under this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Do not install woodwork until the required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in installation areas. C. Maintain temperature and relative humidity as required for a tolerance of plus or minus one percent of the specified optimum moisture content until woodwork receives specified finishes. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions until acceptance of the Work by the Owner. D. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. E. Protect installed woodwork from damage by other trades until Owner's acceptance of the Work. Advise Contractor of required protection procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI Woodworking Standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 2. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. 3. Lumber: PS 20. 4. General Trim: a. Species: Red oak and as verified by the Architect. b. Grade: Select C. Finish: Stain or painted as indicated. 5. Hollow Metal Frame Glazing stops: a. Species: Red oak and as verified by the Architect. b. Grade: Select C. Finish: Stain or painted as indicated. d. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Mouldings: a. Species: Red oak as verified by the Architect. b. Grade: Select c. Finish: Stain or painted as indicated. d. Manufacturer: S&S Craftsman Mouldings e. Type: See Drawings. 7. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary standard referenced below: a. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LAMINATE CLAD ITEMS A. Laminate clad casework shall comply with custom grade quality standards as set forth in AWI, Section 400, Division 400B, "Laminate clad cabinets". B. High Pressure Plastic Laminate (for miscellaneous millwork and paneling items). 1. Plastic laminate except backing or balancing sheets shall be high pressure laminate conforming to NEMA LD-1985. Color shall be selected by the Architect from the full line of standard colors. 2. Exposed Horizontal Surfaces: Shall be nominal .048 inch thick minimum with textured finish and conforming to NEMA standards for HGS horizontal grade. 3. Exposed and Semi -Exposed, Interior and Exterior Vertical Surfaces: Shall be .028 inch thick minimum with low lustre textured finish and conforming to NEMA standards for VGS vertical grade. 4. Backing Sheet for Concealed Surfaces: Shall be .028 or .020 inches thick, conforming to NEMA standards for VGS vertical grade or CL20 cabinet liner. 5. Backing Sheet for Semi -Exposed Surfaces: Shall be .028 inches thick, conforming to NEMA standards for VGS vertical grade. Use to balance face laminate. 6. Paneling (Plastic Laminate on Plywood): Shall be .048 conforming to HGS for face and all exposed edges. C. Plastic laminate color shall be as selected by the Architect. D. Products of the following manufacturers will be considered, providing their products equal or exceed the quality specified; and they can provide products of type, color, and function as required: 1. Formica Corporation, Cincinnati, Ohio 2. Laminart, Elk Grove Village, Illinois 3. Nevamar Corp., Odenton, Maryland 4. Pioneer Plastics Corp., Auburn, Maine 5. Arborite, Forbo, Quebec, Canada 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire - test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. [For enclosed framing and where high temperature fire -retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone. C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln -dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: Plywood backing panels where indicated on drawings. 2.4 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Low -Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition .finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Before installing finished carpentry, examine shop fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 FINISH CARPENTRY INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install, plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. C. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop fabricated or shop cut to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use screws or fine finishing nails for exposed fasteners, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best overall advantage when installing job assembled woodwork items. END OF SECTION 06 20 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A199.1) or, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with applicable APA Performance Standard PRP-108 for type of panel indicated. B. ANSI/APA (American National Standards Institute/American Plywood Association) C. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials D. AWI — Quality Standards E. BHMA All 56.9 — Cabinet Hardware F. FED MMM-A-130 —Adhesive, Contact G. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturer's Association) LD3 — High Pressure Decorative Laminates H. PS 1 — Construction and Industrial Hardwood I. PS 20 —American Softwood Lumber Standard J. Voluntary Product Standards PS 20-70 K. Grading rules of Southern Pine L. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic -laminate cabinets. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates and materials 2. Accessories C. Mock -Up: 1. Each contractor shall submit a sample of the Cabinet. If the sample deviates from the specification and Design Criteria in any way, the Contractor must submit a substitution request. If the product is comparable to the specification, the Contractor must submit a comparable product request. a. Sample does not have to be full scale but large enough to display all the materials listed in this standard to include: fronts, tops, backs, sides laminate, shelf, pulls, slides, backing, rails, hinges, base, doors and drawers. b. The sample may be an on -site mockup and may be used as part of work upon Architect approval. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Employ only manufacturers with at least five (5) years experience making the specified materials as a current catalog and regular production item. B. Contractor Qualifications: Employ only experienced Contractors (Installers) skilled in the successful installation of the specified materials and assemblies on similar projects for a minimum of five (5) years. C. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same manufacturer for all cabinets. 1.7 QUALITY STANDARD A. All cabinets shall comply with AWI's Woodwork Quality Standards for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes and other requirements. 1. Provide AWS Certificate with shop drawings indicating that the woodwork complies with the requirements of the grades specified. B. Provide written documentation that the project has been registered as an AWI/QCP Guarantee and Inspection Service program (GIS) and the project is given an inspection number supplied by AWI. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. All cabinets shall be manufactured in a climate -controlled environment, stored after fabrication in a climate controlled (temperature and humidity) storage area and shipped to the jobsite in an enclosed container (semi -tractor trailer). C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. E. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Cabinet Manufacturer shall warrant all casework products against manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) years. B. Manufacturer shall warrant against structural failure of the cabinet body for a period of ten (10) years. C. Installers Warranty: The installer shall warrant the entire installation against defects in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years. D. Duration of all warranties shall begin on the date of Substantial Completion. E. Products will be repaired or replaced by Manufacturer, without cost to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Fabricators shall provide products subject to compliance with requirements and criteria as indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 0641 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic -laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. E. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: a. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS 2. Materials for Semi -Exposed Surfaces: a. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS. b. For semi -exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic -laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS. 3. Drawer Side and Backs: Solid -hardwood lumber. 4. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 5. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic -Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. 6. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 7. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories. a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Wood grains, matte finish. C. Patterns, matte finish. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. B. Core Material: 1. Panel Association (CPA A208.2), formaldehyde -free (Cabinets and countertops). 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 0641 16 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Marine Grade Plywood: 3/4" specially designed panel made entirely of Douglas -fir or Western Larch. The grade of all plies of veneer is B or better. Exposure rating is EXTERIOR and the glue used is a fully waterproof structural adhesive (Countertops and backsplashes within 6'-0" of sink areas). 3. Veneer Core Plywood: 3/4" or as noted hardwood, Grade AA, formaldehyde -free. Exposure rating is EXTERIOR and the glue used is water resistant (Framing). 4. Lumber: Solid wood hardwood, 3/4" or as indicated kiln -dried, select Poplar, Fir or Grade III mill option (Framing). C. Adhesive: Water based low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Non -toxic, PVA adhesive D. Laminates: 1. VGS (.028) NEMA LD 3 — Vertical Grade, High Pressure Decorative Laminate 2. HGS (.048) NEMA LD 3 — Horizontal Grade, High Pressure Decorative Laminate 3. CLS (.020) NEMA LD 3 — High Pressure Cabinet Liner 4. BKH (.028) NEMA LD 3 — High Pressure Backer 5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified products and are approved by the Architect. a. Wilsonart International b. Nevamar C. Formica Corporation E. Edges: PVC edge binding, 3mm thick matching laminate in color or as selected by the Architect. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. C. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.5 HARDWARE A. Hinges: Concealed fasteners adjustable 135 degree opening European type. B. Door Catches: Provide magnetic, self- aligning or heavy duty, spring loaded, large 11/16" diameter roller mounted catch at bottom edge of door to protect adjacent surfaces that are within the door swing. All doors over 48" in height shall have top and bottom catches. C. Pulls: Solid 5" bronze wire pulls, 2-1/2" deep and 5/16" in diameter, fastened from back with two screws. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide. Pull design shall comply with Americans with Disability Act (ADA). 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 0641 16 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Recessed shelf standards with adjustable metal clips, K&V 255 standards and 256 supports. E. Drawer Slides: Standard clear zinc finish, ball bearing rollers, and 75 pounds dynamic load, Model#GS4200 by K&V or approved equal and for file drawers 150 pounds dynamic load, Model #8600 by K&V or approved equal. F. Locks: Cylinder type with 5-disc tumbler mechanism and keyed to room entry door. Locks shall be provided where shown on the drawings. Provide on doors and drawers. G. Door and Drawer Silencers: Clear Soft -Stem Bumpers #32479 as manufactured by Rockler Woodworking & Hardware or approved equal. Provide at all doors and drawers. H. Finish: Oil rubbed bronze. 2.6 CABINET CONSTRUCTION A. Countertops and Backsplashes: 1. See drawings and specifications for additional types of countertops. 2. Countertops: 3/4" plywood 1 1/2" thick edge and with high pressure plastic laminate 3. Backsplashes: 3/4" plywood with high pressure plastic laminate 4. Provide 3/4" thick marine grade plywood in wet areas containing sinks. 5. Provide 1" radius at exposed corners. B. Base: 4- inch high, 3/4" plywood or lumber. C. Body: 3/4" plywood. 1. Tops, bottoms and sides to be glued and paneled 2. High Pressure Plastic Laminate. D. Cabinet backs: Shall be fully bound (dadoed) into sides, top and bottom, recessed 7/8" from the cabinet rear. Rear, unexposed side of back shall be toe -nailed to cabinet body with mechanical fasteners and solidified with a continuous bead of industrial grade hot melt adhesive to withstand a bond test as described in ANSI/WDMA I.W.1A. All cabinet backs shall have a minimum of two — 3/4-inch x 4" plywood laminate clad flush mounting blocks (hang rails). 1. Hang rails shall be located at rear of cabinet back and fastened to cabinet sides. Provide 2 hang rails at wall cabinet, 1 hang rail at base cabinet and three hang rails at tall cabinets. E. Doors: 3/4" plywood. Front and Back: High Pressure Laminate. F. Shelving: 3/4" plywood, maximum 36" unsupported width. 1. Top and Bottom: High pressure laminate. 2. Provide 1" radius at exposed corners in open shelving. 3. Shelving shall be full depth. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Drawer 1. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 2. Front: 3/4" plywood with high pressure laminate face with cabinet liner on the back. 3. Bottom: 1/2", plywood fully bound (dadoed) into front, sides and back laminated with cabinet liner. a. Body to include sides, back and sub -front 1/2" plywood laminated with cabinet liner. H. Body, Door, Drawer and Shelves Edges Edges: PVC edge band. Construction Tolerances Gap between doors, drawers, panels and frames shall be 1/8". 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot -melt adhesive. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 0641 16 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not start installation until the building is enclosed and the HVAC system controls the temperature and humidity (75 degrees, 55 RH) in the room space. B. Erect the cabinets plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Countertops shall be installed to with -in 1/8-inch of level in a 10-foot length. C. All cabinet faces shall be plumb and true from door face to door face. There shall be no side hanging or non -plumb doors. Seams shall be flush. D. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. E. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. F. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. H. SPECIAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURE / ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES 1. Provide all items and accessories as required for a total and complete installation in every respect. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation of any items indicates all conditions are satisfactory and acceptance of previous Work by other Contractors. 3. Adjust cabinets and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly. 3.3 CLEANING A. All modular cabinet surfaces shall be cleaned of construction spoils, dirt, spills, dust and stains. The modular cabinet manufacturer shall recommend cleaning solvent. Clean all surfaces, edges and cabinet interiors. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 0641 16 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Remove and dispose of all packing materials and related construction debris. C. Protection: Protect casework from damage during construction until date of Substantial Completion, replace damaged work. 3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Collect cutoffs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling. B. Coordinate with manufacturer and local recycler for take -back program or recycling. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. END OF SECTION 06 41 16 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 0641 16 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 06 42 16 — FLUSH WOOD PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Flush wood paneling b. Trim 1.3 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) — Softwood Lumber Standards B. ANSI/APA (American National Standards Institute/American Plywood Association) C. Voluntary Product Standards PS 20-70 D. Grading rules of Southern Pine E. AWI — Architectural Woodwork Standards F. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, and textures, and include construction and application details. B. Samples: For type lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied finish, with half of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 06 42 16 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.2 INTERIOR TRIM A. Moldings for Transparent Finish Stain or Clear Finish: Made to patterns included in MMPA's "WM/Series Wood Moulding Patterns." Species: Red Oak. 2.3 PANELING A. Board Paneling: Interior veneer core wood -board paneling complying with AWL 1. Species: Red Oak. 2. Grade: AA. 3. Cut: Quarter Slice. 4. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 5. Pattern: As selected by the Architect. 6. Net Coverage Width: As selected by the Architect. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 06 42 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Low -Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except those with ends exposed in finished work: As indicated by the Architect. 1. Interior paneling trim. 2. Wood -board paneling. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. 2.6 FINISH A. Stain and finish material per Specification Section Interior Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound; warped; improperly treated or finished; inadequately seasoned; too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements; or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 06 42 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 PANELING INSTALLATION A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inch (6-mm) gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Install with uniform tight joints between panels. 1. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space fasteners and adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent. 3. Arrange panels with grooves and joints over supports. Fasten to supports with nails of type and at spacing recommended by panel manufacturer. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching groove color. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace material that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory -applied finishes if any. 3.7 . PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 06 42 16 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 06 42 16 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 0717 00 — BENTONITE WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Bentonite waterproofing at elevator and sump pits. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D903 — Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds B. ASTM D1970 — Standard Specification for Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection C. ASTM D4632 — Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles D. ASTM D4833 — Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products E. ASTM D5084 — Standard Test Method for Measuring the Comparative Burning Characteristics and Resistance to Burn -Through of Solid Plastics Using a 125-mm Flame F. ASTM D5385 — Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include product specifications and manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for interface with other work. C. Samples: For each of the following products, in sizes indicated: 1. Waterproofing: 6 inches square. 2. Drainage Panels: 6 inches square. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type of bentonite waterproofing, from manufacturer. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for bentonite waterproofing. C. Field quality -control reports. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 17 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain bentonite waterproofing system from single source from single manufacturer. Obtain accessory products used with bentonite waterproofing from sources acceptable to bentonite waterproofing manufacturer. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged containers. B. Store materials in a dry, well -ventilated space. C. Remove and replace bentonite materials that have been prematurely exposed to moisture. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit bentonite waterproofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Do not apply bentonite waterproofing materials in areas with standing water. 2. Placing bentonite clay products in panel or composite form on damp surfaces is allowed if approved in writing by manufacturer. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of bentonite waterproofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. CETCO ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 17 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Carlisle Coatings & Water Proofing. 2. Tremco, Inc. 2.2 COMPOSITE GEOTEXTILE-HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE A. Basis of Design Product: Volclay Ultraseal BT. B. Geotextile/Bentonite-Polymer Waterproofing: Minimum 250-mil thick membrane of bentonite- polymer clay granules between two layers of geotextile polypropylene fabric, one woven and one nonwoven, needle punched and heat fused together. 1. Puncture Resistance: 75 Ibf according to ASTM D 4833. 2. Vapor Permeance: 0.005 perms according to ASTM E 96. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Granular Bentonite: Sodium bentonite clay containing a minimum of 90 percent montmorillonite (hydrated aluminum silicate), with a minimum of 90 percent passing a No. 20 sieve. B. Bentonite Mastic: Trowelable consistency, bentonite compound, specifically formulated for application at joints and penetrations. C. Granular Bentonite Tubes: Manufacturer's standard 2-inch diameter, water-soluble tube containing approximately 1.5 lb/ft. of bentonite; hermetically sealed; designed specifically for placing on wall footings at line of joint with exterior base of wall. D. Termination Bar: Extruded -aluminum or formed -stainless -steel bars with upper flange to receive sealant. E. Plastic Protection Sheet: Polyethylene sheeting complying with ASTM D 4397; thickness recommended by waterproofing manufacturer to suit application but at least 6 mils thick. F. Cement Grout Patching Material: Manufacturer's recommended grout mix compatible with substrate being patched. G. Masonry Fasteners: Case-hardened nails or hardened -steel, powder -actuated fasteners. Depending on manufacturer's written requirements, provide 1/2- or 1-inch diameter washers under fastener heads. H. Sealants: As recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Tapes: Waterproofing manufacturer's recommended tape for joints between sheets, membranes, or panels. J. Adhesive: Water -based adhesive used to secure waterproofing to both vertical and horizontal surfaces. K. Geotextile Protection Course: As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 17 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL L. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve laminated to one side with or without a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded -plastic -sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per foot. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate preparations affecting performance of bentonite waterproofing. B. Verify that substrate is complete and that work that will penetrate waterproofing is complete and rigidly installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work in the vicinity of waterproofing to ensure proper conditions for installing the waterproofing system and to prevent damage to waterproofing after installation. B. Formed Concrete Surfaces: Remove fins and projections. Fill voids, rock pockets, form -tie holes, and other defects with bentonite mastic or cement grout patching material according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Excavation Support and Protection System: If water is seeping, use plastic protection sheets or other suitable means to prevent wetting the bentonite waterproofing. Fill minor gaps and spaces 1/8 inch wide or wider with wood, metal, concrete, or other appropriate filling material. Cover or fill large voids and crevices with cement mortar according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install waterproofing and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply granular bentonite around penetrations in horizontal surfaces and changes in plane according to manufacturer's details in preparation for granular bentonite tubes and mastic. 2. Apply granular bentonite tubes, bentonite mastic, or both at changes of plane, construction joints in substrate, projections, and penetrations. B. Apply granular bentonite tubes continuously on footing against base of wall to be waterproofed according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Protect waterproofing from damage and wetting before and during subsequent construction operations. Repair punctures, tears, and cuts according to manufacturer's written instructions. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 17 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Install protection course before backfilling or placing overburden when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.4 COMPOSITE GEOTEXTILE-HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: Install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane with ends and edges lapped a minimum of 3 inches. Stagger end joints between membranes. Seal joints with permanent seam tape. B. Below Structural Slabs -on -Grade: Apply waterproofing membrane with HDPE side down and staple ends and edges. 1. Install under footings, grade beams, and pile caps; or continue waterproofing through key joints between footings and foundation walls, and extend a minimum of 8 inches up or beyond perimeter slab forms. 2. Protect waterproofing from damage caused by reinforcing bar supports with sharp edges. C. Concrete Walls: Starting at bottom of wall, apply waterproofing membrane with HDPE side facing Installer; overlap sheets 3 inches. Secure with powder -actuated fasteners or case- hardened nails. Extend to bottom of footing, grade beam, or wall, and secure. 1. Termination at Grade: Extend waterproofing membrane to within 2 inches of finish grade unless otherwise indicated. Secure top edge with termination bar. Apply sealant to top edge of termination bar. 3.5 MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded -sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate. Use adhesives or mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded -sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Arrange for manufacturer's representative to inspect completed waterproofing installation before covering with other construction and provide written report that installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions. Remove and replace applications of bentonite waterproofing where inspection indicates that it does not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07 17 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 17 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 07 21 00 — THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Extruded Polystyrene Foam -Plastic Board (XPS). 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C236 — Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box B. ASTM C518 — Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus C. ASTM C1289 — Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanorate Insulation Board D. ASTM D1621 — Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics E. ASTM E96 — Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Material F. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials G. UL 723 — Test for Surface Burning H. NFPA 255 — Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials I. FBC — Florida Building Code J. ASHRAE Handbook 2001 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including performance. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention; cautionary procedures required during application. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Insulation Protection: Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times and do not deliver materials to project site before installation time. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty from the manufacturer that the actual thermal resistance of the extruded polystyrene insulation will not vary by more than 10% from its published thermal resistance. B. Warranty period is 15-years from the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following in each category however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Dow Chemical Co. 6. Atlas Roofing Corp. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM -PLASTIC BOARD (XPS) A. Basis of Design: "Styrofoam Square Edge" as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board: Unfaced, ASTM C578, Type IV with maximum flame -spread of 15 and smoke -developed indexes of 165, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Minimum R-Value: 5 per inch of thickness. 2. Thickness: Total thickness shall be 2.5" or as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. 1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper -coated, low -carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 3. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 4. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates as recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates C. Steel Wire: Electroplated wire to be utilized where other anchorage methods are not compatible with conditions, type and size to suit application. D. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: Glass -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to rain at any time. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Extend insulation to envelop entire building to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION ON INTERIOR FACE OF EXTERIOR WALL A. Board Insulation: Install spindle -type anchors spaced as recommended by manufacturer. Fit insulation tight to obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07 21 00 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 07 26 00 — VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements, are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: Vapor retarder for building concrete slabs on grade. 1.3 REFERENCES A. 2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook: CHAPTER 25 B. ASTM C920 — Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealant C. ASTM D882 — Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting D. ASTM D1709 — Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free -Falling Dart Method E. ASTM E96 — Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials F. ASTM E154 — Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover G. ASTM E1643 — Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs H. ASTM E1745 — Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs I. ASTM F1249 — Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor J. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) — Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification K. FBC — Florida Building Code L. ACI 302.IR — Guide for Concrete Floor & Slab M. ACI 302.21R — Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture Sensitive Flooring Materials N. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. B. Provide the manufacturer's installation instructions indicating preparation and installation requirements techniques per ASTM E 1643. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SWRI - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials and installation. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 VAPOR RETARDERS 07 26 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: Maximum as indicated per ASTM E96 B. Minimum ASTM E1745 Class A rating for slabs on grade PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Stego Industries B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. W.R. Meadows 2. Alumiseal 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Below Grade Sheet Retarder (Building slabs on grade) shall have the following properties 1. Basis of Design: "Stego Vapor Barrier" 2. Permeance Rating: Per ASTM E 96 or ASTM F 1249. Material shall meet permeance requirement for both new material and after ASTM E 1745 mandatory condition test (ASTM E 96 Sections 8, 11, 12, and 13) 3. Water Vapor Retarder: Meet or exceed Class A per ASTM El795 4. Polyethylene film, 15-mil thick, and perm rating of .01 perms (gr/ft2/hr/in-HG) B. Contractor to provide alternate vapor retarder material exceeding specified requirements, as required by interior floor finish material manufacturer. 2.3 SEALANTS A. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C920, butyl rubber base, single component, solvent release, non -skinning, black color 1. Elongation Capability: 5% 2. Service Temperature Range: - 400 to 180' F 3. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30 B. Polysulfide Sealant: ASTM C920, single component, chemical curing, capable of continuous water immersion, non -sagging type; black color. 1. Elongation Capability: 25% 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 VAPOR RETARDERS 07 26 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Service Temperature Range: - 400 to 1800 F 3. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35 C. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, single component, chemical curing, non -sagging, and black color 1. Elongation Capability: 25% 2. Service Temperature Range: - 40" to 180' F 3. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35 D. Primer: Recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. E. Cleaner: Non -corrosive type; recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with adjacent materials. 2.4 ADHESIVES A. Adhesive: Compatible with sheet barrier and substrate, permanently non -curing 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Thinner and Cleaner for Sheet: As recommended by sheet material manufacturer. B. Tape shall be as required by the manufacturer of the vapor retarder with a maximum water vapor transmission rate of .03 perms (ASTM E 96). C. Optional construction pipe booth from vapor barrier material applied per manufacturer's requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify condition of substrate and adjacent materials under provisions as specified. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose or foreign matter that might impair adhesion. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Vapor barrier shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, free of air pockets and wrinkles. B. All laps shall be continuously sealed according to manufacturer's recommendations with a full adhesive bed at the seam or lap joints 6" and fully seal with tape. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 VAPOR RETARDERS 07 26 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Install joint filler of thickness shown on Plans, along all concrete slab on fill intersections with walls, columns, or other structural elements unless otherwise shown. Use 1/2" thickness unless otherwise noted. Hold material down approximately 1/4" below floor slab surface. D. Seal all joints after concrete has properly cured, flush with surface of concrete. Verify compatibility of sealant with any planned flooring adhesive, sealer, or other materials in contact with the sealant. E. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's requirements with tape to restore barrier integrity. F. Repair any damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder material, overlapping damaged area at least 6" into undamaged material and taping all sides. 3.4 CLEANING A. After installation, clean all surfaces and adjacent work area of excess material, waste, debris, etc. END OF SECTION 07 26 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 VAPOR RETARDERS 07 26 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 07 27 26 — FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: Fluid -applied vapor permeable membrane air barriers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C1193 — Guide for Use of Joint Sealants B. ASTM D412 — Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension C. ASTM D570 — Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics D. ASTM D903 — Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds E. ASTM D1004 — Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting F. ASTM D1876 — Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives G. ASTM D1938 — Test Method for Tear Propagation Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting H. ASTM D1970 — Standard Specification for Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection I. ASTM D4258 — Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating J. ASTM D4263 — Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method K. ASTM E96 — Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials L. ASTM E154 — Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover M. ASTM E1186 — Practice for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Retarder Systems N. ASTM E2178 — Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials O. ASTM E2357 — Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies P. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 DEFINITIONS 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by the Installer, who work on Project. B. Product Certificates: From air -barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier. C. Product Test Reports: For each air -barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide products from a firm that makes the indicated products as a regular production item and has the capability of providing quantity of units so as not to delay the progress of work at Project site. with not less than ten (10) years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation of specified materials and assemblies with not less than five (5) years experience. 1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air -barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air -barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's warranty that air barrier and accessories are free of defects at time of delivery and are manufactured to meet manufacturer's published physical properties and material specifications. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of completion of the air barrier membrane installation. 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor -permeable air barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air -barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. Physical and Performance Properties: 1. Air Permeance: 1.57 psf; ASTM E 2178. 2. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 15 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. W.R. Grace & Co. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. 2. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company 2.2 MATERIAL A. Basis of Design: "Perm -A -Barrier VP" B. Fluid -Applied Air Barrier Membrane: A fluid -applied, vapor permeable, acrylic membrane that cures to form a resilient, monolithic, fully bonded elastomeric membrane when applied to construction surfaces. The membrane provides superior protection against the damaging effects of air and liquid water ingress on the building structures. Product shall have the following minimum physical properties: 1. Membrane Air Permeance: ASTM E2178: Not to exceed 0.0004 cfm/sq. ft. under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57 psf). 2. Assembly Performance: Provide a continuous air barrier assembly that has an air leakage not to exceed 0.0008 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57 psf) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357. 3. Membrane Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, Method B: 11.2 perms. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Peel Adhesion: ASTM D903: min. 5 pli or substrate failure to glass faced wall board, min. 20 pli to concrete/CMU. 5. UV Exposure Limit: Not more than 180 calendar days. C. Transition Membrane: Self-adhesive 0.9 mm (36 mils) rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.1 mm (4 mil) of cross -laminated, high -density polyethylene film to provide a min. 1.0 mm (40 mil) thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone -coated release paper until installed, conforming with the following: 1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, Method B: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa s. sq. m.) max. 2. Air Permeance at 75 Pa (0.3 in. water) pressure difference: 0.0006 L/s. sq. m (0.00012 cfm/ sq. ft.) max. 3. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E154: 178 N (40 lbs.) min. 4. Lap Adhesion at -40C (250F): ASTM D1876: 880 N/m (5.0 lbs./in.) of width 5. Low Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970: Unaffected to -43°C (-45°F) 6. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412, Die C Modified: min. 2.7 MPa (400 psi) 7. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt: ASTM D412, Die C: min. 200% D. Transition Aluminum Membrane: Perm -A -Barrier Aluminum flashing manufactured by Grace Construction Products; a 0.9 mm (35 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.1 mm (5 mil) of aluminum film to provide a min. 1.0 mm (40 mil) thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone -coated release paper until installed, conforming with the following: 1. Water Absorption: ASTM D570: max 0.1 % by weight 2. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E154: 355N (80 Ibs) min. 3. Lap Adhesion at -4°C (2511F): ASTM D1876 Modified: 880 N/m (5.0 Ibs./in.) of width 4. Low Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970 Modified: Unaffected to -26°C (-151F) 5. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412, Die C Modified: min. 4.1 MPa (600 Psi) 6. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt: ASTM D412, Die C Modified: min. 200% E. Flexible Membrane Wall Flashing: Self-adhesive 0.8 mm (32 mils) rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.2 mm (8 mil) of cross -laminated, high -density polyethylene film to provide a min. 1.0 mm (40 mil) thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone -coated release paper until installed, conforming with the following: 1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, Method B: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/ Pa s. sq. m.) max. 2. Water Absorption: ASTM D570: max. 0.1 % by weight 3. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E154: 356 N (80 Ibs.) min. 4. Tear Resistance a. Initiation ASTM D1004: min. 58 N (13.0 Ibs.) M.D. b. Propagation ASTM D1938: min. 40 N (9.0 lbs.) M.D. 5. Lap Adhesion at -40C (250F): ASTM D1876: 880 N/m (5.0 Ibs./in.) of width 6. Low Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970: Unaffected to -430C (-45°F) 7. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412, Die C Modified: min. 5.5 MPa (800 psi) 8. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt: ASTM D412, Die C: min. 200% 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air -barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air -barrier assembly and compatible with primary air -barrier material. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air -barrier material manufacturer. C. Liquid Membrane for Details and Terminations: Bituthene Liquid Membrane, two-part, elastomeric, trowel grade material designed for use with fluid -applied membranes, self -adhered membranes and tapes. 10 g/L max. VOC content. D. Substrate Patching Membrane: Bituthene Liquid Membrane, two- part, elastomeric, trowel grade material designed for use with fluid -applied membranes, self -adhered membranes and tapes. 10 g/L max. VOC content. E. Joint Sealant; Refer to sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4 ENVIRONMENTAL A. Adhesives: For adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), provide printed statement of VOC content B. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air -barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Refer to manufacturer's literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods that are acceptable to manufacturer of the fluid -applied air barrier assembly. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Exterior sheathing panels: Ensure that the boards are sufficiently stabilized with corners and edges fastened with appropriate screws. Pre -treat all board joints with 2-3 in. wide, manufacturer's recommended mesh -style wallboard tape. Gaps greater than 1/4 in. should be filled with mastic or caulk, allowing sufficient time to fully cure before application of the mesh -style wallboard tape and fluid applied air barrier system. C. Masonry Substrates: Apply air and vapor barrier over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel -cut mortar joints, struck full and flush. Fill all voids and holes, particularly in the mortar joints, with a lean mortar mix, non -shrinking grout or parge coat. D. Related Materials: Treat construction joints and install flashing as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrate for air barrier application. F. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. G. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete. H. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane. I. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. J. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or Bituthene Liquid Membrane at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. K. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless -steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C1193 and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate as required. B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C1193 and with air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply mesh -style wallboard tape to joint prior to installing fluid air barrier membrane. 3.4 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Apply air barrier membrane to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. Membrane Air Barrier: 90-mil wet film thickness, 42-45-mil dry film thickness. D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency. E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components. 3.5 TRANSITION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install strips, transition membrane, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. B. Apply primer to substrates to receive transition membrane at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by transition tape in same day. Re -prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. Prime glass -fiber -surfaced gypsum sheathing not covered with air membrane material with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition membrane to substrate with termination sealant. E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within sealant manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult sealant manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition membrane so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. 1. Transition Membrane: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant. H. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition membrane. Slit and flatten fish -mouths and blisters. Patch with transition membrane extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes 2. Continuous structural support of air barrier system has been provided 3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained 5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable 7. Laps in strips and transition membrane have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fish -mouths 8. Termination sealant has been applied on cut edges 9. Strips and transition membrane have been firmly adhered to substrate 10. Compatible materials have been used 11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 12. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal 13. All penetrations have been sealed C. Tests: Testing to be performed will be determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests: Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E1186. D. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air -barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full -thickness, air -barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions. C. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air -barrier manufacturer. D. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. E. Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION 07 27 26 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 07 41 13 — STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Standing -seam metal roof panels. b. Insulation. C. Gutters and downspouts. d. Accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASCE 7 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures B. ASTM B32 — Standard Specification for Solder Metal C. ASTM D226 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing D. ASTM D2178 — Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing E. ASTM D4586 — Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free F. FED A-A-51145 — Flux, Soldering, Non -Electronic, Paste and Liquid G. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) — Roofing Manual H. SMACNA —Architectural Sheet Metal Manual I. NAAMMM — Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products J. AISC — "Steel Construction Manual' American Institute of Steel Construction. K. AISI — "Cold Form Steel Design Manual' American Iron and Steel Institute. L. ASTM A527-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot - Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality M. ASTM A526-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc, Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot - Dip Process, Commercial Quality. N. ASTM A446-91 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot - Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. O. ASTM B 117 — Salt spray testing of coating 1000 Hrs. P. ASTM G 23 — Accelerated testing of coating 2000 hrs. Q. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 3" = 1'-0". C. Calculations: 1. Include calculations with registered engineer seal, verifying roof panel and attachment method resist wind pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory -applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories. F. Approvals: Manufacturer shall submit documentation that product complies with and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Manufacturer. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality -control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural -support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members. 5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after installation. 9. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer, with a minimum five (5) years experience with roof as defined in these specifications. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in manufacturing panels of this nature, in a permanent stationary, indoor production facility. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave, including fascia, and soffit as shown on Drawings; approximately 48 inches square by full thickness, including attachments, underlayment, and accessories. 2. Build mockups for typical roof area only, including accessories. a. Size: 4 ft long by 4 ft high. b. Each type of exposed seam and seam termination. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Remove strippable protective covering on metal panels as panels are being installed. Do not leave the film on installed panels. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Coordination 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. 2. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing or perforating. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years and 6 months from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory - applied finishes within specified warranty period. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, chipping, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Watertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's no dollar limit form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing -seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain watertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Installer Warranty: Furnish a written warranty signed by the Panel Applicator for a two (2) year period from the date of substantial completion of the building guaranteeing materials and workmanship for watertightness of the roofing system, flashings, penetrations, and against all leaks. 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Panel shall be designed in accordance with sound engineering methods and practices and in accordance with SMACNA, AAMA, and NRCA standards. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Roof structure shall be designed with proper recognition for the "floating system" which must exist to have a roof panel that meets expansion and contraction requirements. C. Damaged panel replacement shall not require the use of through the roof fasteners. D. Roof system shall have Underwriters Laboratories UL-90 wind uplift classification and comply with ANSI 58.1, and all applicable codes or applicable standard based on rating required. See structural drawings. 1. The installation shall be designed to safely resist the positive and negative loads, as specified in the structural drawings. E. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels that are listed on the EPA/DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Product List" for low -slope roof products. F. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. G. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than indicated in manufacturer's test when tested according to ASTM E 1680 and ASTM E 283 at the following test -pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.. H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 and ASTM E 331 at the following test -pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.. Hydrostatic -Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140. J. Wind -Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind - uplift -resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 90. K. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings. L. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F. M. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels that are listed on the EPA/DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Product List" for low -slope roof products. N. Approvals: Manufacturer shall certify that product complies with and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. Metal Roofing & Siding Systems B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Imetco 2. MBCI 3. Berridge 2.2 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. Basis of Design: "Ultra Seam US-175 LS Lok-Seam System" B. General: Provide factory -formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514. C. Vertical -Rib, Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and striations on pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and seaming panels together. 1. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. Nominal Thickness: 24-gauge. 2. Clips: Zinc coated (galvanized). 3. Joint Type: Double folded. 4. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 5. Panel Height: 1.75 inches. D. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels according to one of the following when tested according to CRRC-1: 1. Three-year, aged solar reflectance of not less than 0.53 and emissivity of not less than 0.87. 2. Three-year, aged Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 62 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Underlayment: Provide self -adhering, cold -applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 40 mils thick, consisting of slip -resistant, polyethylene -film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design "Ice and Water Shield". 2. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 3. Low -Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 4. Basis of Design "Ice and Water Shield". 5. Manufacturers: The basis of design products indicated are from W.R. Grace. Products of the following manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and are approved by the architect. a. Carlisle Construction Materials b. W.R. Meadows 2.4 COVER BOARD A. Fiberglass -Mat Faced Cover Board: Provide "Dens Deck Roof Board" as manufactured by Georgia Pacific Comply with ASTM C1117/117M, Type X. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: 8 feet. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat on face, back and long edges. 2.5 INSULATION A. Basis of Design: "AC Foam Nail Base" B. Closed -cell polyisocyanu rate insulation board bonded to 7/16" APA/TECO rated OSB or minimum 19/32" CDX plywood on the top face, ASTM C1289, Type V. C. R-Value: R-value shall be a minimum R-24 and 4.5" thick. D. Provide tapers and crickets of the same material as indicated on the drawings and as required to provide proper slope. E. Manufacturers: Basis of design products indicated are manufactured by Atlas Roofing Corporation. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. 2.6 ROOF SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal and Flashings 1. Eaves, rake trim, ridge caps, hip cap, water diverters, curbs and other sheet metal work shall be furnished in same materials, gauge and finish as roof panel, matching the roof panel finish. Unexposed sides and edges shall be standard baked -on finish. Form to configuration indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Fascia shall be fabricated from same material as roof material and finished to matching the roof panel finish with the same type of paint. Unexposed sides and edges that can be seen shall be of the same finish. Fascia shall be formed to configuration indicated. 3. Shop fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. a. Minimum length of fascia and other preformed sheet metal shall be 10 foot lengths with concealed splice plate for joints. b. Unless otherwise indicated, provide expansion joint with cover plate where indicated but no more than 50' between expansion joints. c. All strap edges shall be rolled or smooth. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. - Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. - 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. C. Gutters: Formed complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters, strap and brackets to match metal roof panels. 1. Formed from same material as roof panels. 2. Gutters shall be minimum 6" wide x 6" deep and as indicated on drawings. 3. Gutter straps shall be 1" wide by 18-gauge material and located at 24" o.c. 4. Gutter support brackets shall be 1.25" wide by 12-gauge material and located at 32" o.c. 5. Gutters shall be in minimum 10'-0" long sections formed to provide flush exterior seams between gutter sections. Joints between gutter sections shall be 1/2" wide with 6" wide cover plates and support brackets to allow for expansion and contraction. Joints shall be fully bedded in sealant on inside joints 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Downspouts: Fabricate complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish downspouts and straps to match gutters. Downspouts: a. Form from 18 gauge material b. Downspouts shall be as indicated on drawings and fabricated in one continuous piece down to kick -out diverter section at bottom of downspout. Downspout bracket/straps: a. Straps shall be 1" wide by 12 gauge material located not more than 36" o.c.with top and bottom brackets located not more than 12" from ends of downspouts. If required, insert special requirements for ridge closures, corner units, copings, fasciae, and fillers. E. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, 0.048-inch nominal thickness; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles and with welded top box and integral full- length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of 0.060-inch nominal thickness, angle-, C-, or Z- shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels. Insulate roof curb with 1-inch thick, rigid insulation. F. Panel Fasteners: Zinc -coated steel, corrosion resisting steel, zinc cast head, or nylon capped steel, type and size as approved for the applicable loading requirements. Exposed fasteners, where approved by Architect, shall be gasketed or have gasketed washers on the exterior side of the covering to waterproof the penetration. G. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl -Rubber -Based, Solvent -Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. H. Pipe Flashings Provide EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) rubber flashings for vent pipe penetrations in metal roof. Provide clamping rings, sealant, and fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. On -Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on -site using factory set, non-adjustable portable roll -forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory -formed panels. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 2. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Sealed Joints: Form non -expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.9 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned B. High -Performance Organic Finish Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: Chemical Finish Organic Coating, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. Complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, preparing, pretreating and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. C. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. C. Verify that deck is structurally sound to support installers, materials and equipment without damaging or deforming work. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water -resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. C. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation. D. Verify that roof drains, scuppers, roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof accessories are secured properly and installed in conformance with Contract Drawings and submittals. E. Examine roof deck for suitability to receive insulation. Verify that substrate is dry, clean and free of foreign material that will damage insulation or impede installation. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install specified insulation using approved method in accordance with manufacturer's latest written instructions and as required by governing codes. B. Install with end joints staggered to avoid having insulation joints coinciding with joints in deck. In multi -layer installations, stagger joints in top and bottom layers. 3.4 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below on Drawings, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 36 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. Apply over the entire roof surface. B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Specification Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.5 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water -resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit -penetrating panels. B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Panels: Use stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. 2. Aluminum Panels: Use stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. E. Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing -seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self -tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates (if required) at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory -applied vinyl weatherseal. 4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer -approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory -applied vinyl weatherseal are completely engaged. 5. Batten Seam Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by installing batten seam cap and completely engage factory -applied vinyl weatherseal. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal roof panel manufacturers; or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather -resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). H. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls. J. Roof Curbs: Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels. K. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align substrate or framing within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 41 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 07 52 00 — MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Multi -ply modified bitumen roofing system over rigid insulation. 2. System to be torch applied. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D41 — Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer for Used in Roofing, Damp -proofing, and Waterproofing B. ASTM D312 — Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing C. ASTM D2178 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Impregnated Glass Felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing D. ASTM E96 — Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials E. ASTM E108 Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings F. ASCE 7 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures G. NRCA — Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Current Edition H. UL — Fire Hazard Classifications I. UL — Roofing System & Material Guide J. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations from manufacturers of roofing system materials, for type of roofing required. 1. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements, including list of materials proposed for use and manufacturer's product data sheets for other products. 2. Provide sample copies of specified warranties, including evidence of application for warranty from manufacturer. 3. Include complete Manufacturers instructions for periodic inspection and maintenance of roofing system in closeout documentation. B. Shop Drawings: Submit complete installation details showing roof configuration, sheet layout, seam locations, flashing, roof slopes, details at each different perimeter condition and special conditions. 1. Provide fastening pattern layout in compliance with ASCE 7. 2. Provide a copy of product approval for the system, per FBC requirements. C. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" square of membrane system. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Certificates included with closeout documents: 1. Submit Manufacturers certification that materials and components furnished conform to specified requirements and that materials furnished are compatible for decks indicated. 2. At completion of work, submit Manufacturers certification that roofing system installation is in accordance with Manufacturers warranty requirements. E. Safety Provisions: 1. Submit a complete detailed schedule of special safety provisions implemented to insure the health and safety of the people. 2. Work shall not start without the Owner's agreement of the following provisions: a. A plan for a dust free operation; b. A plan for the sequencing of work and the removal of debris from the site during and after construction. c. A fall protection plan indicating the contractor plans for complying with OSHA's requirements. F. Approvals: Manufacturer shall submit documentation that product complies with and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements G. Certification 1. Submit manufacturer's documentation substantiating the requirements for each type of materials as indicated per specification section as certifications and other indicated documentation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary roofing materials from a single manufacturer, with at least 10-years of documented experience in the roofing material business. B. Installer: Shall be a Company specializing in installation of bituminous roofing, minimum five -years of continuous documented experience operating under the same name, with extensive experience in the application of roofs of similar size and type, and approved in writing by manufacturer of accepted roofing system. 1. The job supervisor shall have minimum 5-years of documented experience in supervising projects of this size and scope. C. All work shall conform to NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, and to manufacturers' instructions. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.: Class A fire hazard classification. 2. Roofing system shall meet current ASCE 7 wind requirements for the roofing system. 3. Roofing system shall be designed to meet requirements in accordance with Figure 1609B, Florida Building Code. E. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Prior to installation of roofing system, conduct a pre -installation site conference after submittal approval. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Attendance: Owners Representative, Architect, Contractor, Job Superintendent, Subcontractors, and Manufacturer's Representative related to roofing work. 3. Agenda: Review project conditions, application, coordination with otherwork, and protection of completed roofing. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact and legible, including required fire resistance classification labels. B. Store and handle material per manufacturer's requirements. C. Store rolled goods on end on clean raised platforms with a breathable weather protective covering, such as canvas, when stored outdoors (Polyethylene or other non -breathable plastic coverings are not acceptable). D. Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and absorption; remove wet materials from project site. E. Rooftop Storage: Disperse material evenly across the roof to avoid concentrated loading. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Proceed with roofing work only if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp deck surface. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Installer's Warranty: Provide a written two-year warranty (starting from date of the total project's substantial completion) signed by the roofing Installer and the Contractor agreeing to replace or repair defective components and workmanship of the total roofing system. Including roofing membrane, flashing, insulation and roofing accessories as required to maintain the total roofing system in a watertight condition at no expense to the Owner. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: 1. Provide written warranty signed by the Manufacturer of the primary roofing materials agreeing to replace or repair defective roof membrane and flashing materials and workmanship as required maintaining the roofing system in a watertight condition at no expense to the Owner for a period of 20-years after date of Final Completion of the entire Project. 2. In addition, provide written warranty signed by the manufacturer of primary roofing materials agreeing to allow Owner to make emergency repairs to roof without voiding manufacturer's warranty. a. In conjunction with issuance of the above warranty, include. i) Instructions detailing preventative maintenance required to maintain the warranty. ii) Provide a list of substances, which may damage the membrane. iii) Specifications on repair of the membrane Owner may do without voiding warranty. b. Warranty shall include coverage for damage to building resulting from failure of roof system to resist penetration of water with no dollar limit to the value of repairs or replacements covered. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL c. The built-up roofing membranes and insulation as well as all accessories and appurtenances shall comprise the "Roofing System" and shall be part of a single source warranty. C. Provide at a minimum one in progress inspection with the Manufacturer's Representative and the Owner's Representative. D. Manufacturer's Certification: 1. Submit written certification signed by the manufacturer stating that the roofing system manufacturer will provide warranties, inspection and Report Services specified herein. 2. NOTE: Submit warranty terms with the post -bid package. E. Provide acceptance letter from the roofing manufacturer that this specification meets the requirements of the 20-year warranty and that no criteria specified herein will impact such warranty. 1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Provide an installed roofing membrane and base flashing system that does not permit the passage of water, and will withstand the design pressures calculated in accordance with the most current revision of ASCE 7. D. Manufacturer shall provide all primary roofing materials that are physically and chemically compatible when installed in accordance with manufacturers current application requirements. E. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift pressures: Uplift Pressures: As indicated on structural plans Pa/sq. m. F. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low -slope roof products. G. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. H. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Approvals; Manufacturer shall certify that product complies with and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Johns Manville 2.2 ROOFING SYSTEM A. System Description: A three-ply system consisting of a base membrane direct -applied to the insulating, and a cap membrane sheet. Includes flashing and all accessories required for roof installation. B. Base Sheet: "Dynagrip SD/SA" ASTM D4601, SBS-Modified Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet with glass -fiber reinforcing mat. C. interply Sheet: "Dynaweld 180" ASTM D6164, Type 1, Grade S. D. Cap Sheet: "Dynaweld Cap FR" ASTM D6163 Type 1, Grade G, SBS-Modified Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet with glass -fiber -reinforced mat and surfaced with granules. E. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than an initial index of not less than 88 and an aged index of not less than 81 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. F. Emissivity: Provide minimum initial 0.89 initial emissivity and 0.89 aged emissivity as tested in accordance with ASTM E408. 2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41 M. C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing manufacturer for application. D. Flashing Adhesive: ASTM D4586 Type II asphalt -based, asbestos -free, cold -applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with flashings. E. Asphalt Roofing Adhesive: ASTM D4479, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. F. Mastic: ASTM D4586 Type II modified bitumen; nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying. G. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners complying with corrosion -resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer and as required per the product approval. H. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic -fiber insulation board or pressured treated wood at contractor's option. I. Base Flashing: Flashing system consisting of a prefabricated, granule surfaced, reinforced, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) block copolymer modified asphalt flashing membrane. The reinforcement mat shall be impregnated and coated each side with SBS modified bitumen blend. J. Roofing Granules: Ceramic -coated roofing granules shall match roofing. K. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer. L. Low Profile Roof Expansion Joint System 1. Manufactures: The basis of design products "Expand-O-Flash" are manufactured by Johns Manville. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the architect 2. Sheet EPDM reinforced with closed cell urethane backing. 3. Roof expansion joint: Style CF with FS-5000-F fire barrier or as required by expansion joint manufacturer. 4. Roof to wall joint: Style CF/EJ with FS-5000-F fire barrier or as required by expansion joint manufacturer. 5. Exterior vertical and horizontal wall surface joints above roof deck: WS with FS-5000-W fire barrier or as required by expansion joint manufacturer. 6. Intersections and Transitions: Provide expansion joint manufacturers standard and custom intersections, transitions and miscellaneous items to provide a complete expansion joint system. All items provided shall be a standard of the expansion joint manufacturer. M. Splash Pads: Provide and install precast concrete type, of sizes and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5% air entrainment. 2.4 COVER BOARD A. Manufactures: The basis of design products "Secure Rock" are manufactured by USG. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. B. Fiberglass -Mat Faced Cover Board: Comply with ASTM C1278, Type X, Class A. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: 8 feet. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat on face, back and long edges 2.5 RIGID INSULATION A. Manufactures: The basis of design products "Energy 3" are manufactured by Johns Manville. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. General: Preformed flat and tapered roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type 11, Class 1, Grade 2, glass -fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. E. Substrate Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch wide, coated, glass -fiber joint tape. F. R-Value: 5.7 per inch. G. Roof R-Value: R-Value shall be a minimum R-19.5 and as indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE -INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Do not start the installation of accessories or membrane without the presence of the Manufacturer's Technical Representative. This requirement shall not be waived. 1. Due to the incompatibility of various materials with the roofing membrane, the Representative shall inspect the substrate and shall have a barrier applied for complete separation and protection of the roofing membrane and accessories. B. Install all vents, drains, curbs, nailers, blocking, insulation, and projections through the roof before starting membrane installation. 1. These items may be installed after the membrane installation only with Architect's written approval, proper provision for re -inspection, and continued warranty protection. C. All conduits to curb mounted equipment shall be installed inside the curbs. D. Curbs shall be a minimum 12" high above the finished roof. 3.2 RIGID INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installation of roof system components so rigid insulation and cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installation of roof insulation and cover board. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Adhere first layer according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. E. Install subsequent layers in an adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's instruction. F. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Install insulation boards with long joints in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with like material. H. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall thickness is 2.0 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. I. Trim surface of insulation boards where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. J. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. K. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips atjunctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees per manufacturer's instruction. 3.3 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE A. Insulation and underlayment board: 1. The applicator shall carefully inspect all surfaces of insulation and cover board, and assure all surfaces are satisfactory prior to beginning installation. 2. Beginning insulation installation constitutes acceptance of substrate without recourse. B. Roofing Membrane: The manufacturer's Technical Service Representative shall carefully inspect the substrate receiving the roofing and provide a written report. C. Install all nails, blocking, vertical surfaces, etc. prior to proceeding with membrane installation. D. Verify that all units are properly secured in place prior to proceeding with membrane installation. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM A. Install membrane over insulation and underlayment board in accordance with accepted roofing manufacturer's specification and recommendations, and as specified below. Phased construction of roofing membrane is strictly prohibited. B. Complete installation of modified roofing system up to line of termination of day's work. 1. Install temporary water cut-offs of plastic cement and base sheet strips at end of each day's work. 2. Remove upon resumption of work. C. Base Flashing: 1. Install in accordance with requirements of roofing system manufacturer. 2. Install where roofing system abuts vertical surfaces and at other locations detailed. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Roof Edging: 1. Prior to application of metal edging treatment, extend roofing felts up over tapered edging and secure to wood nailer with base felt extended and folded back over ply felts. 2. After metal edging is in place, flash as recommended by roofing manufacturer. E. Flashings: Install metal flashings in such a manner as to prevent leaks. F. Splash Pads Installation: Provide splash pads at locations where downspouts discharge onto the roofing membrane. Provide a 2'-0" wide by 10'-0" long splash apron under the splash pad. Splash apron shall be an addition piece of cap sheet adhered to the roofing surface. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide periodic inspections of roof application by qualified technical representative of roofing manufacturer. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean up debris, excess materials, and equipment and remove from site. B. Remove bitumen from surfaces other than those requiring bituminous roof coatings. C. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide special protection or avoid heavy traffic on completed work when ambient temperature is above 80°F. B. Restore to original condition or replace work or materials damaged during handling of bitumen and roofing materials. C. Do not throw or drop debris from roof, use chutes, or high lift trucks. END OF SECTION 07 52 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 07 62 00 — SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: Manufactured Products: a. Manufactured through -wall flashing and counterflashing. b. Manufactured reglets andcounterflashing. 2. Formed Products: a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed low -slope roof sheet metal fabrications. C. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. d. Formed equipment support flashing. e. Formed overhead -piping safetypans. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AISC — Stainless Steel, Uses in Architecture B. ASTM A167 — Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip C. ASTM A653/A653M — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process D. ASTM B32 — Standard Specification for Solder Metal E. ASTM D226 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing F. ASTM A307 — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength G. ASTM A500 — Standard Specification for Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes H. ASTM D4586 — Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free I. FED A-A-51145 — Flux, Soldering, Non -Electronic Paste and Liquid J. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) — Roofing Manual K. SMACNA —Architectural Sheet Metal Manual L. FBC — Florida Building Code ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion -joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field -assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for roof -penetration flashing, edge conditions, flashings and counter flashings. 4. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 5. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 6. Details of expansion joints and expansion joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches (1:5). C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. D. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit calculations. for delegated design certifying compliance with wind loads indicated on the structural drawings and signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Florida. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof -penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide installer's five (5) year written warranty for flashings indicated. B. Flashings shall resist design wind speeds required by Florida Building Code in which installer agrees to repair or replace flashing components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. C. Flashing failures shall include water leaks, fasteners, accessories, flashing and sheet metal, grounds/nailers, scuttles and vents, curbs, and other flashing components of roofing system. D. Warranty shall be a term type, with no conditions, exclusions, including exclusions of remedies by Owner, deductibles or limitations on coverage amount. Conditions, exclusions, or dollar limits. E. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.12 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure: 1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For sheet metal coping indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following in each category however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. Manufactured Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: a. W.D. Hickman Corp. b. Metal -ERA, Inc. C. Architectural Products Company. d. Fry Reglet. e. Products to be shop fabricated where indicated. B. Underlayment: 1. "WinterGuard HT," CertainTeed Corp., Valley Forge, PA. 2. "Grace Ultra," Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, MA;www.grace.com ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. "TW Metal and Tile Underlayment," Tamko Roofing Products, Joplin, MO. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc -coated galvanized steel sheet to ASTM A653/A653M G90 coating designation. Thickness: 24 gauge unless indicated otherwise. C. Flashing for Pipes, Conduits, and Round Equipment Supports: Type 304 stainless steel, 26 gage, 26, complying with ASTM A240. D. Solder: Per ASTM B32. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip -resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene -film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher. 2. Low -Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. General: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory -applied coating. Provide metal -backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. Fasteners: Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, non -staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, seam -cementing compound, recommended by manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Reglets and Counterflashings: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials. 2. Flexible -Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. 3. Counterflashing Wind -Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. B. Coping: Interlocking multi -part coping system consisting of coping formed to profile and size indicated. Provide minimum 20 gauge, zinc -coated steel anchor plate at coping joint and anchorage cleats. Provide formed gutter chair with prefabricated inside and outside corners, miters welded before finishing; without exposed fasteners. All fasteners shall be stainless steel. 1. Material: 22 gauge 2. Basis of Design: The basis of design products Perma-Tite are manufactured by Metal Era Inc. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Sealed Joints: Form non -expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"[ and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49] for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.7 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: 1. Shop fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. 2. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. 3. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg unless indicated otherwise. Shop fabricate soldered interior and exterior mitered corners, splices extending 6" each way as applicable. B. Stucco Stop with Counter -flashing (2-piece) 1. Provide receiver with 1.5" wall flange, 0.75" sloping stucco stop, and 0.75" flange bend downward with 0.50" hem or as indicated on drawings. 2. Shop punch wall flange for fastening. 3. Provide counterflashing with 1.5" 450 top flange with 0.35" kick back at top and 4" bottom flange formed inward 3/4" towards wall with hemmed 0.25" kick at bottom or as indicated on drawings. 4. Provide 1.5" x 4" storm cleats. C. Stucco Stop with Counter -flashing (1-piece for re -roofing): 1. Provide counterflashing with 0.50" 450 leg for sealant with 1.5" wall flange with a 4" bottom flange formed inward 0.75" towards wall with hemmed 0.50" kick at bottom or as indicated on drawings. 2. Shop punch wall flange for fastening. D. Surface Mounted Flashing (1-piece): 1. Provide flashing with 1.50" wall flange with 0.25" kick at top to receive sealant, 0.50" 135° sloping top flange and 4" bottom flange formed inward 0.75" towards wall with hemmed 0.50" kick at bottom or as indicated on drawings. 2. Shop punch wall flange for fastening to meet wind loads per FBC. E. Roof Drain Flashing: 1. Minimum 4 Ib per ft2 lead sheet flashing, 36" x 36" installed in accord with NRCA specifications. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Scuppers: 1. Fabricate from 24 gauge material to sizes, profiles and details shown on the drawings. 2. Lock seam corners, solder water -tight and hem outer exposed edges. 3. Provide 4" wide minimum flanges formed to fit cants, decks and vertical wall surface. 4. Shop punch flanges for fastenings at 6" on center. 5. Scuppers shall be so designed that they prohibit capillary action of water and extend/project far enough away from the parapet wall surface that staining will not occur on the adjacent wall surface. G. Scupper Downspouts: 1. Fabricate from same material as scuppers to sizes and configurations as indicated on the drawings. 2. Downspouts shall be as indicated on drawings and fabricated in one continuous piece down to kick -out diverter section at bottom of downspout. 3. Downspouts shall be as indicated on drawings and fabricated in one continuous piece down to tie into locations for underground drainage system. 4. Downspout bracket/straps: Straps shall be 1" wide by 12 gauge material located not more than 36" o.c.with top and bottom brackets located not more than 12" from ends of downspouts. If required, insert special requirements for ridge closures, corner units, copings, fasciae, and fillers. H. Curb to Duct Flashing and Counter Flashing: 1. Fabricate to fit duct curbs and ducts projecting from curbs. 2. Provide 4 vertical flange to cover top edge of bituminous base flashings. Form flange bottom towards curb, with 1/4" bottom edge bent 1/4" out and hemmed. 3. At top of curbs bend metal 90° and extend horizontally over to duct, then bend upward and extend vertically not less than 3" from top edge of flashing out 3/8" to receive sealant. 4. Provide for field soldered lap joints at corners and 1" lap joints at horizontal miter splices Edge Drips: 1. Provide continuous cleat with punched holes spaced as necessary. If cleat extends 6" or more below top fastener, provide second row of punched holes spaced as necessary. 2. Provide 4" roof flange, and extend bottom drip not less than 1" below bottom of roof sheathing, with bottom 3/4" kick -out to drip water away from finish wall. J. Pipes, Conduits, Wires, and Round Equipment Supports Penetrating Roofing or Resting on Roofing: 1. Pre -manufactured roof penetration seals, Type 304 stainless steel, 26-gage, complying with ASTM A240. 2. Form tubular stainless steel sleeves sized to shape of penetration, not less than 8" above finished roofing with 4" wide base flange welded to water -tight to sleeve. 3. Shop punch flanges. 4. Seal flashing and cover with protective umbrella. K. Sanitary Vent Stack Flashings: 1. 4 lb per ft2 lead flashing. 2. Form tubular lead flashing sleeve not less than 9" high with diameter 1 /2" larger than vent stack. 3. Provide 4" wide flange soldered water -tight. 4. Provide vandal -proof vent covers 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL L. Finish: 1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned 2. High -Performance Organic Finish Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: Chemical Finish Organic Coating, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. Complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, preparing, pretreating and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self -adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure - treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated -aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant -filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant -type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in specification section "Joint Sealants." G. Rivets: Rivet joints necessary for strength. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations inwind load design. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close -fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless -steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap -in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated. F. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean off excess sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 07 84 13 — PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Penetrations in fire -resistance -rated walls. b. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. C. Penetrations in smoke barriers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ASTM E119 — Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials C. ASTM E814 — Standard Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestop D. FM (Factory Mutual) — Fire Hazard Classifications E. UL — Fire Hazard Classifications F. UL 1479 — Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestop G. WH (Warnock Hersey) — Certification Listings H. UL 263 — Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials I. UL 723 — Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials J. UL 1479 — Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops K. NFPA - National Fire Protection 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire - protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire -resistance -rated assembly. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core -drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Grace Construction Products. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. 3M Fire Protection Products. 4. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 5. USG Corporation. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire - resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire -Resistance -Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Fire -resistance -rated walls include fire walls fire -barrier walls smoke -barrier walls and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag -wool -fiber or rock -wool -fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. C. Fire -rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. 2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL A. Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for sealants. Indicate VOC limits of the product. Submit MSDS highlighting VOC limits in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM E2129 for products provided under work of this Section. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that products comply with Bay Area Resources Board, reg. 8, rule 51. C. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire -resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self -adhering -type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07 84 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 07 92 00 — JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Exterior and interior sealants 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 504 R — Guide to Joint Sealants for Concrete Structures B. ASTM C834 — Standard Specification for Latex Sealants C. ASTM C919 — Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications D. ASTM C920 — Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants E. ASTM C 1193 — Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants F. ASTM D1056 — Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber G. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. H. California South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) #1168 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product. B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion -Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Field -Adhesion -Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Shall be a sealant and caulking subcontractor with a minimum of 5 years of successful experience in the application of the types of materials required, and who agrees to employ only skilled tradesmen for the Work. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint -sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with stone or masonry substrates. 3. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint -sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. 6. Testing will not be required if joint -sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. B. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated,, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint -sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field -Adhesion -Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.10 PERFORMANCE A. Surface Hardness: Provide types of sealant to withstand anticipated abrasive or possible indentation as recommended by manufacturer. B. Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with the joint surfaces, joint fillers, and other materials in the joint system. C. Provide joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates will not sag, and will resist thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. D. Provide acoustical joint sealants at all walls that are STC rated or where sound attenuation blankets are used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Caulking Compounds (Acrylic Latex Sealant) 1. Latex rubber modified, acrylic emulsion polymer sealant compound; manufacturer's standard, one part, non -sag, mildew resistant, acrylic emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated for accepting paint. (Product recommended for exposed interior locations involving joint movement of less than 5%). 2. Acceptable Standard a. "Sonolac"; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. b. "Acrylic Latex Caulk 832"; Tremco, Inc. c. "Acrylic Latex Caulk with Silicone"; DAP d. "Powerhouse Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant"; Sherwin-Williams C. One -Part Elastomeric Sealant (Silicone) One component elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Class 25, Type NS (non - sag), unless manufacturer recommends Type S (self -leveling) for the application shown. (general caulking, glazing applications). a. Acceptable Standard i) "Dow Corning 791; Dow Corning Corp. ii) "Omniseal"; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. iii) "Spectrem 2; Tremco, Inc. iv) "MAXFLEX Acrylic Urethane Elastomeric Sealant'; Sherwin-Williams 2. One component mildew resistant silicone sealant used around countertops, backsplashes, and other wet interior locations. e. Acceptable Standard i) "Dow Corning 786", Dow Corning Corp. ii) "Sanitary 1700"; General Electric iii) "White Lightning Silicone K&B Sealant"; Sherwin-Williams 3. One -component high movement joints (+100/-50) use sealants in locations indicating high movement. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. "Dow Corning 790"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "Spectrem 1"; Tremco, Inc. c. "LOXON H1 Hybryd"; Sherwin-Williams D. Elastomeric Sealants (Polyurethane) — Precast concrete 1. One component polyurethane sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS (non -sag), Class 25 (expansion and control joints, precast concrete panel joints, perimeter caulking, flashing and sheet metal conditions). a. Acceptable Standard i) "Sonolastic NP 1"; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. ii) "Dymonic": Tremco, Inc. iii) "Dynatrol I"; Pecora Corp. iv) "LOXON SV; Sherwin-Williams 2. Multi- component polyurethane sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade N(non-sag) Class 25 (same uses as in previous item) a. Acceptable Standard i) "Sonolastic NP 2" Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. ii) "Dymeric 511"; Tremco, Inc. iii) "Dynatrol II"; Pecora Corp. iv) "LOXON NS2"; Sherwin-Williams 3. Multi -component epoxidized polyurethane sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class A (same uses as described in item 1, also used on fire resistance rated joint design details.) a. Acceptable Standard i) "Dymeric"; Tremco, Inc. ii) "DynaTrol II"; Pecora Corp. E. One -part self -leveling polyurethane sealant (for traffic areas) 1. One component polyurethane self -leveling sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25. a. Acceptable Standard i) "Sonolastic SL 1"; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. ii) "NR-201 Urexpan"; Pecora Corp. iii) "LOXON SLV; Sherwin-Williams 2. Two component polyurethane self -leveling sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. a. Acceptable Standard i) "Sonolastic SL 2"; Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. ii) "NR-200 Urexpan": Pecora Corp. iii) "THC900/THC901": Tremco, Inc. iv) "LOXON SL2"; Sherwin-Williams 2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non -sag, paintable, non -staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following requirements: B. Basis of Design: "USG Sheetrock Brand Acoustical Sealant' C. Approved product: "Powerhouse Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant'; Sherwin-Williams 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E90. E. Product has flame spread and smoke developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E84. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, non -hardening, non -skinning, non -staining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 2.3 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with with requirements for joint configuration, installation affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed wit 3.2 PREPARATION h A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joinl sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joins substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing outjoints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 SELECTION OF MATERIAL A. Caulking compounds shall be used for interior nonmoving joints and at locations specifically indicated on Drawings. B. One component elastomeric silicone sealants shall be used at all exterior joints and interior joints where thermal or dynamic movement is anticipated. C. One component elastomeric polyurethane sealants shall be used at interior joints where weatherproofing is required. D. One part self -leveling polyurethane sealants shall be used for exterior and interior horizontal joints subject primarily to pedestrian traffic and light and moderated vehicular traffic, and in all control joints in slab -on -grade; interior. E. Acoustical joint sealants shall be used at all walls that are STC rated or where sound attenuation blankets are used. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Interior joints which require caulking are to be caulked with the specified caulking compound, unless noted otherwise. 2. Exterior joints which require sealant are to be filled with one of the specified sealants even though the note may read "Caulked". 3. Joints to be filled shall be thoroughly dry and free from dust, dirt, oil, and grease at the time of application or caulks or sealants. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Expansion and control joints in exterior walls shall have the joint filler material built into the wall, or between wall and slab, at the time of construction. 5. Masking: Metal shall be masked with masking tape, as well as other surfaces where its required to prevent the sealant smearing the adjacent surface. Upon completion of the caulking, remove the tape. 6. Sealants shall be integral color. Painting of sealants is not allowed. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. F. Tooling of Non -sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. B. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.6 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. E. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. F. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 08 1113 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Steel Doors and Frames b. Accessories 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 — Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People B. ASCE 7 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures C. ASTM A591/A591 M-98 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated, for Light Coating Weight [Mass] Applications D. ASTM A653/A653M — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process E. ASTM C1363 — Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus F. ASTM E413 — Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class G. ASTM E2074 — Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side -Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies H. DHI (Door Hardware Institute) — The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware I. NFPA 80 — Fire Doors and Windows J. NFPA 252 — Fire Tests for Door Assemblies K. SDI-100 — Standard Steel Doors and Frames L. UL 10B — Fire Tests for Door Assemblies M. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 2. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 3. Shop drawings for exterior door assemblies shall be signed and sealed by a licensed engineer registered in the State of Florida. 4. Calculations for wind load design for exterior door assemblies shall be stamped, sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer in the State of Florida verifying compliance with ASCE/SEI 7-02. C. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire -rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. D. Obtain approval of shop drawings prior to proceeding with manufacturing. E. Submit warranty as specified herein. F. Approval for Exterior Doors 1. Approvals: Manufacturer shall certify that product complies with large and small missile impact criteria and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. 1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per ASTM E2074 and which are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors which have Temperature Rise Rating of 450 degree F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. C. Hollow metal supplier shall be a qualified direct distributor of products to be furnished. In addition, the distributor shall have in their regular employment an A.H.C./C.D.C. who will be available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect regarding matters affecting the door and frame openings. D. Preparation/Field Verification: 1. Verify that Shop Drawings have been successfully submitted, reviewed and returned. 2. Verify door frames are in proper location and have been properly anchored in accordance with Specifications and SDI 105 Recommended Erection Instruction for Steel Frames. 3. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location and swing characteristics and that they have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 4. Verify that the correct door hardware has been delivered and doors have been prepped correctly. 5. Proceed with installation of doors only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation of doors and hardware indicates all conditions are satisfactory. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Exterior door and window assembly installations shall be weather tight and leak proof. Contractor Qualifications: Employ only experienced Contractors (Installers) skilled in the successful installation of specified materials and assemblies on similar projects for not less than five (5) years. G. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employ only manufacturers who make the specified products as a regular production item. 1.6 PERFORMANCE A. Structural Performance: Provide door and frame assemblies capable of withstanding wind pressures calculated according to the following: 1. Basic Wind Speed: a. Comply with the Florida Building Code with the applicable Supplement and as indicated on the structural drawings. 2. Importance Factor: a. Comply with the Florida Building Code with the applicable Supplement and as indicated on the structural drawings. 3. Approval for Exterior Doors a. Delegated -Design: Provide design services, calculations and shop drawings for delegated design requirements complying with code requirements, performance requirements and design criteria signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Florida. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new Work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames vertically at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. Steelcraft Door and Frame Products B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Amweld International, LLC 2. Architectural Openings, Inc. 3. Ceco Door Products 4. Curries Company 5. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 6. Quality Engineered Products Company, Inc. 7. Republic Doors and Frames 2.2 DOOR TYPES A. Basis of Design: "B Series" B. The following door types shall conform to the Steel Door Institute Standards as described in SDI 100. C. Exterior Doors 1. Door face sheets shall be formed from one sheet of metal with no face seams. The top of the door shall be closed with a flush steel end closure treatment. The bottom of the door shall be closed with a recessed channel end closure. 2. Core Material 1) Rigid Polystyrene — R-value 1.45 per ASTM C1363. 2) Mineral (Equipment and rooms with electrical panels.) 3. Provide 1-3/4 inch thick doors and in a size width of doors indicated, as required, where full mortise continuous gear hinges are scheduled. 4. Face sheets shall be hot -dipped galvannealed steel sheets conforming to ASTM A653, Commercial Steel (CS) Class B coating, mill phosphatized. 5. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical -endurance level and other indicated requirements. 1) Rating: Extra Heavy Duty. 2) Classification: Level 3. 3) Physical Performance: Level A 4) Edge: Model 2 — Seamless. 5) Steel: 16 gauge. 6) Finish: A60. D. Interior Doors 1. Door face sheets shall be formed from one sheet of metal with not face seams. Seams on vertical door edges shall be tight, smooth, and devoid of irregularities. A kraft resin impregnated honeycomb core shall be permanently bonded to both door skins with thermal adhesive. 2. Face sheets shall be hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653, Commercial Steel (CS) Class B coating, mill phosphatized. 3. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical- endurance level and other indicated requirements. 1) Rating: Standard Duty. 2) Classification: Level 1. 3) Physical Performance: Level C. 4) Edge: Model 1 — Full Flush. 5) Steel: 18 gauge. 6) Finish: A-40. E. Lock edge of interior and exterior doors shall be beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Hardware Preparation: 1. Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gauges as required in ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2. Doors and frames shall be reinforced, drilled _and tapped to receive mortised hinges, locks, latches, and flush bolts, as required in ANSI/DHI A115 and ANSI/SDI A250.6. 3. Doors shall be reinforced for specified surface -mounted hardware. Perform drilling and tapping as required. 4. Locate hardware in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 5. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as door face sheets to comply with the following minimum sizes: 1) Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 2) Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 3) Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch thick. 4) All Other Surface -Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch thick. 6. Hardware preparation shall comply with Miami -Dade NOA or Florida Product Approval. 2.3 FRAME TYPES A. Frames for exterior door openings. Frames for exterior use shall be fabricated from hot -dipped 16-gauge galvanized A 60 galvanized sheet steel. B. Frames for interior door openings and borrowed lights. 1. Frame for interior use shall be fabricated from 16 gauge A 40 galvanized sheet steel. C. Welded Frames: Frames shall be mitered only and set-up and full profile welded for exterior and interior frames with exposed surfaces, dressed smooth and flush. Provide a temporary spreader bar securely fastened to the bottom of each frame. 1. Frames for exterior use shall have mitered corners with frames welded continuously on the full frame profile and ground smooth to appear seamless. 2. Frames for interior use shall have mitered corners with frame faces welded and ground smooth to appear seamless. 3. Welded frames shall be smooth, even, and have no blemishes or irregularities in finish or surface on all exposed sides and planes. 4. Headers and jambs shall be secured at corners either by external welding with seamless face joints. 5. Frames shall be provided with temporary spreader bars for shipping and handling purposes. 6. Knockdown and drywall type frames shall not be used unless dictated by specific project conditions leaving no other reasonable alternative. 7. Mullions and transom bars shall be joined to adjacent members by welding. Face joints shall be welded and ground smooth (seamless). 8. Frames shall be provided with a minimum of three anchors per jamb suitable for the adjoining wall construction. Anchors shall be minimum 18-gauge steel or 7-gauge wire. Frames over 7'-6" shall be provided with additional wall anchors as required. 9. In addition, frames shall be provided with minimum 18-gauge base anchor. For existing masonry wall conditions that will not accept base anchor, an additional jamb anchor shall be provided. 10. Frames shall be furnished in manufacturer's standard factory -applied coat of rust - inhibiting primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Frames for paired doors shall be furnished with a stationary center mullion where indicated. 2.4 FRAME ACCESSORIES A. Frame Anchors 1. Wall anchors for attachment to drywall partitions. a. Use manufacturer's adjustable type compression anchors at drywall locations. b. Use steel anchors sized to accommodate frame jamb depth and face dimension on all welded frames. 2. All frame jamb anchors to be provided; on each jamb per 30 inches of frame height or Fraction thereof. 3. Floor anchors: Angle clip type a. 16-gauge minimum. b. To receive 2 fasteners per jamb. C. Welded to the bottom of each jamb. 4. Head struts: For frames not anchored to masonry or concrete construction provide ceiling struts spot welded to jambs each side extending to building structure where called for on schedule. 5. Sleeve anchors shall be fire rated for the types of openings required. 2.5 DOOR ACCESSORIES A. Lites Glazed Lites: Furnish 20-gauge metal glazing beads of the same type of finish for lites in interior and exterior doors, hollow metal frames and transoms, side lights, interior glazed panels, and other locations where beads are indicated in pressed steel frames. a. Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9" o.c. and not more than 2" from each corner. b. Exterior glazing beads shall be installed on the exterior side of the frame with tamper -resistant screws to comply with wind loading. B. Plaster Guards: Provide 26-gauge steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to the frame, at back of door hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. C. Door Silencers: Drill stops and install 3 silencers on strike jambs of single swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double swing frames. 2.6 FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES A. Provide approved and labeled hollow metal fire doors and frames at locations indicated in Door Schedule. Approved doors, frames, and hardware shall be constructed and installed in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 and tested by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.) or WH (Warnock Hersey) for the class of door opening indicated in schedules. B. Labeled metal frames are required for labeled wood doors. C. All labels shall be metal, attached to the frame where required by code. Stamped labels will not be acceptable. Labels shall not be painted. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054,00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.7 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A1008. B. . Galvanized Steel Sheets: Hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653, with indicated coating designation, mill phosphatized. C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gauge galvanized sheet steel. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied non-fibered asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1227, Type 2 formulated for 30 mill thickness per coat minimum. 2.8 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in the manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify Work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the project site. Lock edges of doors shall be beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. B. Panels and edge channels of exterior doors shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel. Panels and edge channels of interior doors shall be fabricated from cold rolled sheet steel. Sizes, types, and assemblies shall be as indicated on the Drawings, Door Hardware Schedule, and as specified. C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, and moldings from either cold rolled or hot rolled steel (at fabricator's option). D. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk, tamper -resistant, flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. E. Door Hardware Preparation 1. Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed door hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling, and tapping in accordance with final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation." 2. Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface applied door hardware may be done at project site. 3. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop Drawings, or if not shown, in accordance with recommended hardware locations specked in "S.D.I. 100-98, Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames," as published by the Steel Door Institute. 4. Reinforce all steel doors and frames to receive surface mounted closers, whether or not scheduled to receive them. F. Shop Painting Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames." 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Clean, treat, and shop paint all surfaces of fabricated hollow metal doors and frames, including galvanized surfaces plus back prime of all hollow metal door frames. 3. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before the application of the shop coat of paint. 4. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive field applied paint. G. Asphaltic Emulsion Coating: Apply on the frames in the fabricator's shop; field application is not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 3. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 4. Set frames in position; plumb, align, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with expansion bolts or with power fasteners. Where frames require ceiling struts or other structural overhead bracing, they shall be anchored securely to ceilings or structural framing above, as indicated or specified. 5. The finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects. Form molded members straight and true with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Welded joints on exposed surfaces shall be dressed smooth so they are invisible after finishing. 6. Grout exterior metal frames. Spot grout interior metal frames in gypsum wallboard partitions. 7. Provide filler plate at all hardware preps, such as hinge and strike preps, that are unused. 8. Exterior frames and interior masonry frames shall be back primed with a mastic coating and site filled with concrete after installation of frame. Interior frames will be back coated with mastic up to 1 foot above the floor. Filling of these frames may be specified by the Architect at special openings for sound control. 9. Grout frames fully at the music rooms, the mechanical rooms and other locations as indicated. 10. If frames are installed in tilt walls during initial pour, contractor takes all risk in that they will be plumb, square, and level after installation of door, if margin or squareness is not correct, frame will be removed and replaced. More than 1/161h of an inch out of square or being plumb or level is cause for rejection. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. 1. Install fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80-07. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Provide all items and accessories as required for a complete installation in every respect. E. Set exterior door lite frames in full bed of sealant and do not over tighten screws. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Damaged work will be rejected and shall be replaced with new work at no additional cost to the Owner or Architect. B. After installation, protect doors and frames from damage during subsequent construction activities. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 08 14 16 — FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Solid -core doors and transom panels with wood -veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 1037 — Standard Test Method for evaluating properties of Wood -Based Fiber and Particle Panel Materials. B. ASTM E152 — Methods of Fire Tests and Door Assemblies C. ASTM E413 — Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class D. ASTM E2074 — Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side -Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies E. ASTM F476 Standard Test Method for Security of Swinging Door Assemblies F. AWI — Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute G. HPMA HP — Hardwood and Decorative Plywood H. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD3 — High Pressure Decorative Laminates I. ANSI A115.1 W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards J. NFPA 80 — Fire Doors and Windows K. NFPA 252 — Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies L. UL 10B — Fire Tests of Door Assemblies M. UL 10C — Fire Tests for Door Assemblies — Positive Pressure N. Warnock Hersey — Certified Listings for Fire Doors O. WDMA Industry Standards 1.S.1-A-97 —Window and Doors Manufacturer Association P. Window and Door Manufacturers Association - WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors. Q. Window and Door Manufacturers Association - WDMA I.S. 10 Industry Standard for Testing Cellulosic Composite Materials for Use in Fenestration Products. R. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings. Include factory -finishing specifications. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking, cutouts, undercuts and mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Dimensions for Undercuts. Requirements for veneer matching. 3. Fire -protection ratings for fire -rated doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory -finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 1. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. 2. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required. 3. Finish veneer -faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory - finished doors. 2. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified. E. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 2. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. D. Contractor Qualifications: Employ only experienced Contractors (Installers) skilled in the successful installation of the specified materials and assemblies on similar projects for a minimum of five years. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. 2. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 3. Delamination of veneer from core. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 1.9 PERFORMANCE A. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear "S" label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. C. Security Comply with ASTM F476-84 Level 40. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Ipik Door Company. 5. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company. 6. Oshkosh Door Company. 7. Vancouver Door Company. 8. VT Industries, Inc. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Basis of Design: "Signature Series" B. Solid -Core Doors: 1. Core: Particle board. 2. Construction: Five (5) plies with stiles and rails bonded to core and then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated -edge construction with improved screw -holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 1. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 Ibf 2. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 Ibf C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252. 1. Temperature -Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire -test exposure. 2. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire -protection rating indicated. 3. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw -holding capability approved for use in doors of fire -protection ratings indicated as follows: 1. 5-inch top -rail blocking. 2. 5-inch bottom -rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. 3. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. 4. 5-inchmidrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. 4. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 5. Pairs: Provide formed -steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. 1. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel. D. Smoke- and Draft -Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784. E. STC Rating: Doors shall have an STC rating of 30. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 VENEER -FACED DOORS A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces, clear and without dark spots or streaks. 2. Species: Red Oak. 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center -balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated mullions. 7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more. 8. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A. 9. WDMA I.S.1-A Aesthetic Grade, Heavy Duty Performance Grade. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES only by Corridor - A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Vision panel sizes shall be as indicated on Drawings. 1. Wood Species: Same species as, or compatible with, door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 3. At 20-minute, fire -rated, wood -core doors, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. B. Wood -Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire rating indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. Fabricate door and transom panels with full -width, solid -lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide factory -installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Specification Section "Glazing." 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Mullion: Mullions shall be manufacturer's standard wood profile to coordinate with wood bead profile and match finish. Mullions shall be true full depth mullions not applied and at locations indicated on Drawings. 2.7 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory door finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Stain shall be as selected by the Architect. 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Specification Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft -control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows nc evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08 14 16 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 08 3113 — ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. b. Access doors at floors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel B. ASTM A653/A653M —Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process C. ASTM A879/879M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface D. ASTM A240 — Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications E. ASTM B209 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate F. ASTM B221 — Standard Specification for Aluminum -and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes G. AAMA 2604 — Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels H. UL-Fire Resistance Directory I. Warnock Hersey -Certification Listings J. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to otherwork. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. C. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified, complete assembly minimum 6 by 6 inches in size. D. Recycle: Submit manufacturer's documentation substantiating the following requirements for materials for each type provided under work of this section for recycled content: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 0831 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre -consumer and post -consumer recycled content per unit of product. 2. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project. 3. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product in the assembly by weight. 4. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly. E. Local/Regional Materials: Submit manufacturer's documentation substantiating the following requirements for materials extracted/harvested and manufactured within a 500 mile radius from the project site. Not less than 20 percent of building materials (by cost) shall be regional materials. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this section for locations: 1. Sourcing Location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. 2. Manufacturing Location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. 3. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials cost only. 4. Product Component(s): Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection and temperature -rise limit ratings indicated, according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Access Panel Solutions. 2. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. 3. Milcor, Inc. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 5. Nystrom, Inc. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 0831 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges (Primed Steel) 1. Basis -of -Design: "Model TM" 2. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard -width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Door Size: Size appropriate for concealed items to be accessed, minimum 12" x 12". 5. Finish: Primed Sheet for Door and frame. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Cam Lock. 8. Material: 14-gauge door and 16-gauge frame. 2.3 Hardware: A. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. Latch Type: Screw driver operated cam lock. 2. Cylinder Locks: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold -rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full -bed plaster applications, provide zinc - coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 0831 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing. 4. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Steel Finish: 1. Factory primed. 2. Paint as indicated in the specification section "Interior Painting". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Painted Steel Doors: All locations unless indicated otherwise as indicated below. B. Stainless Steel Doors: Locate at the exterior and at toilet, wet areas, custodial, mechanical and electrical spaces. END OF SECTION 08 31 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 0831 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 08 41 13 — ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Exterior storefront system doors. b. Exterior storefront window system. C. Interior storefront system. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AA (Aluminum Association) — Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. AAMA Series number 11 — Design Wind Loads for Buildings and Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Testing C. AAMA 101 — Standard Specification for Window, Doors, and Skylights D. AAMA 200 — Standard Practice for the Installation of Windows with Frontal Flanges for Surface Barrier Masonry Construction E. AAMA 502-08 — Voluntary Specification for field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products F. AAMA 511 — Voluntary Guideline for Forensic Water Penetration Testing of Fenestration Products G. AAMA 701/702 — Combined Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weather-stripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals H. AAMA 1503.1 —Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections I. AAMA 2604 — Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedure for Superior Performing Organic Coating on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels J. ASCE 7 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures K. ASTM A123/A123M — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products L. ASTM B209 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate M. ASTM B221 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes N. ASTM C509 — Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material O. ASTM D2000 — Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications P. ASTM D2287 — Standard Specification for Non -Rigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Q. ASTM E283 — Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen R. ASTM E330 — Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference S. ASTM E331 — Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference T. ASTM E1105 — Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference U. ASTM F588 — Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact V. FBC — Florida Building Code W. Current Florida Building Code Product Approval OF Miami Dade NOA 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes. D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical -to -horizontal intersection of aluminum -framed systems, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Approval: Manufacturer submit documentation that product complies and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum -framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating glazed aluminum storefront and entrance systems that meet or exceed energy performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by certification, labeling, and inclusion in lists. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. D. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum -framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. 1. Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label. G. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. H. Source Limitations for Aluminum -Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as indicated by the architect. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Field testing shall be performed on mockup according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockup unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Approved mockup may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum -framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer and installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components. Warranty Period for installer: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for manufacturer: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Entrance Door Hardware: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum -framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Systems shall comply with and be certified per Miami Dade NOA or Florida Product Approval requirements. 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing -to -glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units. B. Structural -Test Performance: Provide aluminum -framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. 4. Wind Loads: Basic wind speed, importance factor and exposure category shall be as indicated on drawings. 5. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches or 3/4". C. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum -framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static -air -pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.. D. Water Penetration: Provide aluminum -framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 503 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 12 Ibf/sq. ft.. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum -framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum -framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal -surface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: 0 deg F. 3. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F. F. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum -framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation -resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45. G. Approvals: Manufacturer shall certify that product complies with and has been tested for large missile impact and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. YKK AP American, Inc. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Kawneer 2. EFCO 2.2 EXTERIOR FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: "YES 45 FI" B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Nonthermal. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated on the Drawings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high -strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. D. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.3 EXTERIOR ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: "501)" B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Wide style. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door and frame. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this section per the Florida Product approval, the Florida Building Code and shall be the standard of the storefront manufacturer unless noted otherwise. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets per Door Hardware specification section. 2. Opening -Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 8.5 Ibf to open the door to its minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 Ibf to fully open door. B. Opening -Force Requirements: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 5 Ibf required to release latch. C. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon -fabric or aluminum -strip backing. F. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior -door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. G. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. H. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. 2.5 INTERIOR FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: "YES 45 FS". B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 2. Glazing Plane: Center. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high -strength aluminum with non -staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, non -staining, non -bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. E. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.6 INTERIOR ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: "50D" B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing operation. C. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Door Design: Wide stile. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 4. Glazing Plane: Center. E. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 1. Provide non -removable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.7 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Specification Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. E. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum -framed systems, as specified in Specification Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied, non-fibered asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1227, Type 2 requirements formulated for 30=mil thickness per coat. 2.9 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/13 308M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion -resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M. 2.10 SILL PAN AT EXTERIOR STOREFRONT A. Provide .125 inch aluminum sill pan with 1/4" upturn at inside edge. B. Finish shall match storefront system. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. D. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding -type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. E. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. G. Sill Pan Installation: Install sill pan in full bed of sealant on concrete slab prior to installing system. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 -10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.12 FINISHES A. Aluminum Surfaces: Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. B. High -Performance Organic Finish Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: Chemical Finish Organic Coating, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. Complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, preparing, pretreating and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. F. Sill Pan Installation: Install sill pan in full bed of sealant on concrete slab prior to installing system. G. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. Indicate entrance door hardware mounting heights on Drawings or insert in subparagraph below. 1. Field -Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface -mounted entrance door hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. J. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum -framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of glazed aluminum framed assemblies shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed assemblies with specified requirements. 1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage based on performance requirements of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static -air -pressure differential of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.. a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 20 feet, by one story of glazed aluminum framed assemblies. b. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect. 2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static -air -pressure differential of not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 20 feet, by one story of glazed aluminum framed assemblies. b. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect. 3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Test Area: A minimum area of 75 feet by one story of glazed aluminum framed assemblies. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Aluminum framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 08 41 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 -13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Aluminum Doors and Frames C. Wood Doors and Frames 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as may be required by actual conditions at building. B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct quantities. C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications. D. Fire -Rated Openings: 1. Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU) Pamphlet No. 80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 and UL10C. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. 2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire -rated doors, provide supplementary marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". E. Fasteners: 1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all exposed screws installation. 3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units which have exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat heads screws, finished to match adjacent hardware. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed on wood or composite fire doors shall be attached with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). F. Florida Building Code (Latest edition) 1. Provide Miami -Dade Notice of Authorization (NOA) if required by authority having jurisdiction require. 2. Engineering Reports that opening meet requirement for wind load, water infiltration and impact as required in FBC 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times during the course of work. B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility for furnishing correct quantities. C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the architect and written approval received. D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work. E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified. F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre -installation class as well as a post - installation walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments or replacements of hardware as required. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; store in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the individual manufacturer's warranty permits. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing, by the manufacturer, against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from one manufacturer only. B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the following manufacturers. PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER SUBSTITUTE 1) Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley 2) Locks & Latches Schlage Lock Falcon Lock 3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Schlage Lock Falcon Lock 4) Exit Devices Von Duprin Falcon 5) Door Closers LCN Falcon Closers 6) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson Rixson 7) Wall Stops/Floor Ives Rockwood, Hager Stops, Flushbolts 8) Kick Plates Ives Rockwood, Hager 9) Threshold/ Weather-strip Zero National Guard, Pemko 10) Silencers Ives Rockwood, Hager 11) Key Cabinet Lund Key Control C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be bid upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (7) days prior to bidding. If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum. 2.2 FINISH OF HARDWARE A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D) and Interior hinges to be Satin Chrome (26D) Door Closers to be Aluminum, Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D). Exit Devices to be Satin Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum. 2.3 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with non -removable pins (NRP). B. Interior butts shall be as listed. C. Doors 5' or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each 2'6" in height or fraction thereof. Dutch door shall have two (2) butts per leaf. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.4 KEYING A. All Cylinders to be purchased through the county Locksmith Stan's Lock & Key — 38323 9t' Ave, Zephyrhills (813) 782-2934 B. Provide Construction Cores and (6) each Construction Keys 2.5 LOCKSETS A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in "ND" series, lever design as manufactured by Schlage Lock. 1. Acceptable substitutions: A. None 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. All devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series in types and functions specified. All devices must be listed under "Panic Hardware" in accident equipment list of Underwriters Laboratories. All labeled doors with "Fire Exit Hardware" must have labels attached and be in strict accordance with Underwriters Laboratories. B. All exit devices shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. C. All surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate underneath to prevent movement. And shall be provided with a dead -latching feature to prevent latchbolt tampering. 1. Acceptable Substitutions: A. None 2.7 DOOR CLOSERS A. All closers shall be LCN 4000 series with slim cover having non-ferrous covers, steel arms separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non -hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast construction to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire -rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non -critical screw valves of V-slot design to reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Substitutions: A. None 2.8 TRIM AND PLATES A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 10" high, mop plates to be 4" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule. 2.9 DOOR STOPS A. Door stops shall be furnished for all door to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series. 2.10 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP A. Thresholds and weatherstrip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule 2.11 DOOR SILENCERS A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal frames, (2) per pair and (3) per single door frame. B. Paint Frames prior to installing Silencers (Do Not Paint over Silencers) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. B. Contractor to provide a secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a pre - installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to the finish hardware. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Contractor shall protect hardware as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. 3.4 KEY CABINET A. Set up and index one (1) Key Cabinet that allows room for expansion for 150% of the number of keys for the project. 3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the contractor; do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware group, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors; or for each single door. B. This hardware schedule prepared by. Allegion, PLC 3451 Technological Ave, Suite 7 Orlando FL 32817 Ph: 407-571-2000 Fax 407-571-2006 Hardware Groups Next Page. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Hardware Group No. 01 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 8 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE HH-9847-EO-SNB 643E VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE HH-9847-NL-OP-110MD-SNB 643E VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER20-057-ICX 613 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 606 SCH 2 EA PULL PLATE G625 X G327 613 RKY 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 695 LCN 2 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4040-30 695 LCN 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040-61 695 LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A-MSLA-10 A ZER Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier Hardware Group No. 01A Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 8 EA HINGE 51361 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 695 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE HH-9847-EO-SNB 643E VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE QEL-HH-9847-NL-OP-110MD-SNB-CON 643E VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER20-057-ICX 613 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 606 SCH 2 EA PULL PLATE G625 X G327 613 RKY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 695 LCN 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS ANDKB LCN 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4040-30 695 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040-61 695 LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR/BOLLARD PKG 8310-3836TW DKBRZ LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-856 630 LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A-MSLA-10 A ZER Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier ADA Operator on RHR Door 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Hardware Group No. 01B Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 695 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE HH-9847-EO-SNB 643E VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE QEL-HH-9847-NL-OP-110MD-SNB-CON 643E VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER20-057-ICX 613 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 606 SCH 2 EA PULL PLATE G625 X G327 613 RKY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 695 LCN 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS ANDKB LCN 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4040-30 695 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040-61 695 LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-856 630 LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A-MSLA-10 A ZER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-4RL LGR VON Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier ADA Operator on RHR Door controlled by push Button in and out Hardware Group No. 02 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 2 EA SURFACE BOLT SB360 12" T 604 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO 613 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 695 LCN 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-Bk ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A-MSLA-10 A ZER Hardware Group No. 03 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 8 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP640 IVE 2 EA SURFACE BOLT SB360 12" T 604 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO 613 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 695 LCN 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-Bk ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A-MSLA-10 A ZER 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Hardware Group No. 04 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 695 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE QEL-HH-9847-NL-OP-110MD-SNB-CON 643E VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER20-057-ICX 613 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 606 SCH 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 10" O 613 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 695 LCN 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4040-30 695 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040-61 695 LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A-MSLA-10 A ZER 1 EA MULTITECH READER MT15 BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS LGR VON Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier Card Reader to release exit device for access, Free egress from corridor Hardware Group No. 05 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 513131 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98-EO 643E VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 695 LCN 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-Bk ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A-MSLA-10 A ZER Hardware Group No. 06 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 6 EA HINGE 513131 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA MORTISE LOCK MS1850S 613 ADA 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-098-ICX 613 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 606 SCH 2 EA PULL PLATE G625 X G327 613 RKY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 695 LCN 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS ANDKB LCN 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4040-30 695 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040-61 695 LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-856 630 LCN ADA Operator on RHR Door controlled by push Button in and out 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Hardware Group No. 07 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 6 EA HINGE 5131314.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 613 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO 613 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 08 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA MORTISE LOCK MS1850S 613 ADA 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-098-ICX 613 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 606 SCH 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 10" O 613 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040-61 695 LCN Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier Hardware Group No. 09 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 695 VON 1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT HARDWARE RX-LC-QEL-98-NL-F-CON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER20-057-ICX 613 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 606 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-Bk ZER 1 EA MULTITECH READER MT15 BLK SCE Card Reader to release Exit Device for access, Free egress from Corridor 643E VON 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Hardware Group No. 10 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98-L-BE-F-06 643E VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-Bk ZER Hardware Group No. 11 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 51361 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5131314.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 640 IVE 1 EA EU STOREROOM LOCK ND80PDEU RHO RX CON 613 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 1 EA MULTITECH READER MT15 BLK SCE Card Reader to release Lock for access Power Supply by Security sub Hardware Group No. 12 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO 613 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 12A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5131314.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98-L-NL-F-06 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER20-057-ICX 613 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 606 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 613 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE SCH 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Hardware Group No. 13 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70PD RHO 613 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 14 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53PD RHO 613 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-Bk ZER Hardware Group No. 15 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 513131 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S RHO 613 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 613 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-Bk ZER Hardware Group No. 16 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 4 EA HINGE 51313114.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70PD RHO 613 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 613 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 613 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-Bk ZER Door Hardware Index next page. IVE IVE 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Door/Hardware Index Mark # HWSet # 101.01 01A 101.02 01 B 102.01 06 102.02 01 102.03 01 102A.04 01 10213.01 13 10213.02 13 102C.01 12 102D.01 07 102D.02 02 103.01 08 104.01 11 105.01 15 105A.01 16 10513.01 16 106.01 08 107.01 14 107A.01 11 1076.01 12 107C.01 14 108.01 11 108.02 11 108.03 04 108A.01 15 10813.01 15 108C.01 12 110.01 14 110A.01 14 111.01 13 112.01 14 114.01 14 116.01 09 116.02 04 117.01 14 118.01 14 119.01 14 120.01 12 122A.01 12 123.01 14 125.01 03 126.01 05 201.01 10 201.02 11 204.01 14 205.01 12 206.01 14 207.01 12 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Mark # HWSet # 208.01 14 209.01 13 210.01 14 211.01 14 212.01 14 213.01 16 214.01 14 215.01 12 216.01 14 21613.01 09 217.01 16 218.01 14 219.01 12A 220.01 14 222.01 14 223.01 13 224.01 14 225.01 14 226.01 14 227.01 11 228.01 14 229.01 12 230.01 14 231.01 12 232.01 14 234.01 14 236.01 14 END OF SECTION 08 71 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00 - 14 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 08 71 13 —AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Swinging door automatic operators. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 — Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI A156.19 — Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors. C. AAADM — American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. D. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code. E. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code. F. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 — Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. G. ANSI/BHMA A156.5 — Standard for Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. H. ANSI/BHMA A156.10 — Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. I. ANSI Z97.1 — Standards for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. J. UL 325 — Standard for Safety for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and window Operators and Systems. K. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). L. UL991 — Standard for Safety Tests for Safety -Related Controls Employing Solid -State Devices. M. ASTM B221 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. N. ASTM B209 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. O. ASTM B244 — Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy - Current Instruments. P. AAMA 607.1 — Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. Q. AAMA 611 — Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. R. AAMA 701 — Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals. S. NAAMM — Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural Metal Products. T. FBC — Florida Building Code 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08 71 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For automatic operators. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices. 5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Approvals: Manufacturer submit documentation that product complies with large and small missile impact criteria and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Retain "Product Certificates" Paragraph below to require submittal of product certificates from manufacturers..Retain option if applicable to Project. C. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance. Include emergency -exit features of automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress. D. Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. E. Field quality -control reports. F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who employs a Certified Inspector. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 0871 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Coordination 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed control mats that control automatic entrances. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified elsewhere. 2. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrances. 3. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of Project. 4. Electrical System Roughing -in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with connections to power supplies [and access -control system]. 5. Coordinate sizes and dimension 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Automatic entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE 7. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes with temperature changes 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. C. Opening Force: 1. Power -Operated Doors: In case of power loss, door needs to open per applicable codes. 2. Breakaway Device for Power -Operated Doors: Not more than 50 Ibf required for a breakaway door or panel to open. D. Entrapment -Prevention Force: 1. Power -Operated Swinging Doors: Not more than 30 Ibf required to prevent stopped door from closing. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 0871 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Power -Operated Door Standard: BHMA Al56.10. G. Delegated -Design: Provide design services, calculations and shop drawings for delegated design requirements complying with code requirements, performance requirements and design criteria signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Florida. H. Approvals: Manufacturer shall certify that product complies with large and small missile impact criteria and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. LCN 2.2 GENERAL A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, framing, headers, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Swinging, Power -Operated Automatic Entrance Configuration: Refer to Drawing for configuration location and dimensions. a. Traffic Pattern: One way. b. Mounting: Surface. 2.3 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES A. Basis of Design: "9540 Senior Swing Series" B. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design complying with ANSI A156.19 where automatic operators are specified. C. The operator shall be powered with a DC motor working through reduction gears. Closing shall be spring force. No manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closer will be acceptable. The motor is to be off when the door is in closing mode. The door can be manually operated with the power on or off without damage to the operator. D. The operator shall include variable adjustments, including opening and closing speed adjustment. Operator shall be mounted in an aluminum cover. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 0871 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold-open switch, push and go function to activate power operator electric lock delay, hold -open delay adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with accessories, mats, and sensors. F. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details. G. Provide hard -wired push plate actuator switches for operation as specified. Actuators shall be weather -resistant type at exterior applications. H. Provide key switches, with LED's, recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the automatic operator as required for the function as described in the operation description of the hardware sets. Cylinders: Refer to specification section Hardware. J. Where automatic operators are scheduled, provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and parts/material recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the automatic operator for each individual leaf. 2.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics and Components: Nominal current draw 75 watts. Low Power Consumption: Average electrical power required to open and close a 36", 200 lb. door is 25 W. Control unit has a high efficient power supply and optimized door control with a maximum power consumption of 75 W. B. Overload Protection: Electric motor is equipped standard with a built-in thermal overload protection and cannot exceed 10 amps current draw. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion -resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. C. Glazing: As specified in Specification Section "Glazing." D. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Specification Section "Joint Sealants. E. Nonmetallic, shrinkage -Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, non -staining, grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency suitable for application. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion -resistant, non -staining, non -bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 0871 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat -head machine screws fabricated from stainless steel. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site. 1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. 2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 6. Fabricate exterior components to drain condensation and water passing joints within system to the exterior. 7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from building structure. 8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units. C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. D. Metal Cladding: Factory -fabricated and installed metal cladding, completely covering all visible surfaces as part of prefabricated entrance assembly before shipment to Project site. 1. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 2. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 3. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 4. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 5. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior. 6. Allow for thermal expansion at exterior entrances. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08 71 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. 1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads. 2. Electromechanical Operators: overhead unit powered by fractional -horsepower, permanent -magnet do motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power off. F. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual." G. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed hardware before applying finishes. 1. Provide sliding -type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors and breakaway sidelites. 2. Provide compression -type weather stripping at fixed stops of exterior doors. At locations without fixed stops, provide sliding -type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 3. Provide weather sweeps mounted to underside of door bottoms of exterior doors. 4. Provide finger guards at each swinging -door leaf that has clearance at hinge side greater than 1/4 inch and less than 3/4 inch with door in any position. Anchor guards to hinge - jamb frame. H. Controls: 1. General: Factory install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel. 2. Install photoelectric beams in sides of guide rails, with dimension above finished floor not less than 24 inches. 3. Provide ADA push pad at the interior side of door and mount at location indicated on drawings. 4. Provide ADA push pad at the exterior side of doorway and mount in pedestal at location indicated on drawings. The pedestal shall be a stainless steel 48" high x 6" wide x 4" deep model "ADA-Stainless Steel Tower-48" as manufactured by Pedestal CEO or approved equal. 2.7 FINISHES A. Aluminum Surfaces: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. B. Aluminum Surfaces: Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. C. Operator Case: High -Performance Organic Finish Two -Coat Fluoropolymer (To Match Door): Chemical Finish Organic Coating, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. Complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, preparing, pretreating and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 0871 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Buttons, miscellaneous: Oil rubbed bronze finish PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic entrance installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, and connection to the building's power supply. 1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non -movement joints. Seal joints watertight. 2. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface -mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. 3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. 4. Provide thresholds at exterior doors and where indicated. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system. D. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect control wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Specification Section "Joint Sealants" to provide weathertight installation. 1. Set thresholds, framing members, and flashings in full sealant bed. 2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08 71 13 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and breakaway sidelite as required by cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. G. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Certified Inspector: Owner will engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards. C. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards. Adjust exterior doors for weathertight closure. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Engage a Certified Inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to Owner. 2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week, emergency callback service. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 0871 13 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances. END OF SECTION 08 42 29 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 0871 13 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 08 80 00 — GLAZING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Glazing for: 1. Window units. 2. Storefront systems. 3. Doors vision lites 4. Interior borrowed lites. 5. Fire -resistive lites. 6. Interior laminated safety lites. 7. One-way lites. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASCE-7 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures B. ANSI Z97.1 — Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test C. ASTM C864 — Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers D. ASTM C920 — Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants E. ASTM C1036 — Standard Specification for Flat Glass F. ASTM C1048 — Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass G. ASTM C1172 — Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Safety Glass H. ASTM C1349 — Standard Specification for Architectural Flat Glass Clad Polycarbonate I. ASTM C 1503 — Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror. J. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials K. ASTM E152 — Methods for Fire Test of Door Assemblies L. ASTM E163 — Methods for fire Test of Window Assemblies M. ASTM E283 — Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen N. ASTM E330 — Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference O. ASTM E1996 — Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes P. ASTM E2025 — Standard Test Method for Evaluating Fenestration Components and Assemblies for Resistance to Impact Energies Q. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials R. GANA — Glazing Manual S. FGMA — Sealant Manual 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL T. NFPA 80 — Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows U. NFPA 252 — Standard Methods of Fire Test of Doors Assemblies V. NFPA 257 — Standards on Fire Test of Window and Glass Block Assemblies W. LSGA — LSGA Design Guide" X. SIGMA — TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and TB-3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines" Y. SGCC — Safety Glazing Certification Council Z. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product in a 12 inches square sample. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch lengths. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Approvals: Manufacturer shall submit documentation that product complies with and has been tested and approved for compliance with Miami Dade NOA or Florida Product Approval and applicable requirements. 1.6 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installers, manufacturers of insulating -glass units, low-e coatings, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. C. Product Test Reports: For glass and each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. D. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Compatibility Test Report: From manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. G. Draft Warranties. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide products from only manufacturers with at least five (5) years experience making the specified materials as a current catalog and regular production item. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. Employ only experienced Contractors (installers) skilled in the successful installation of the specified materials and assemblies on similar projects for a minimum of five (5) years. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR- A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, quality and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. G. Fire -Protection -Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire -protection -rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose -stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire -resistance rating in minutes. All clear tempered safety glass and fire rated glazing must have permanently affixed labels for verification. H. Comply with applicable codes and regulations and with the Consumer Product Safety Commission CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and with applicable recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver glass to site in suitable containers that will protect glass from the weather and from breakage. Carefully store material, as directed, in a safe place where breakage can be reduced to a minimum. Deliver sufficient glass to allow for normal breakage. Glazing compounds shall arrive at the project site in labeled containers which have not been opened. B. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. D. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Damaged glass is defined as glass with edge damage or other imperfections that could weaken the glass and impair performance and/or appearance if installed. Remove damaged glass and legally dispose of offsite. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specked warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. C. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within specked warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. E. Manufacturer's Fire Glass Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty but not less than five (5) years from Date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed exterior glazing systems shall withstand thermal movement and wind and impact loads in compliance product approval without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. General: Installed interior glazing systems shall withstand manufacturers design parameters for thermal movement and impact loads without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. E. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat -treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria: Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6.0 mm (0.23 inch). Tinted and heat -absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the same throughout Project. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat -treated glass, are selected so the worst -case probability of failure does not exceed the following: a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass. b. 1 lite per 1000 for lites set over 15 degrees off vertical and under action of wind. F. Specific hazardous locations: The following shall be considered specific hazardous locations for purposes of glazing. 1. Glazing in ingress and means of egress doors. 2. Glazing adjacent to a door and within the same wall plane as the door whose nearest vertical edge is within 24 inches of the door in a closed position and whose bottom edge is less than 60 inches above the floor or walking surface, unless an intervening interior permanent wall is between the door and the glazing. 3. Glazing in fixed panels having a glazed area in excess of 9 square feet with the lowest edge less than 18 inches above the finish floor level or walking surface within 36 inches of such glazing, unless a horizontal member not less than 1-1/2 inches in width is located between 24 inches and 36 inches above the walking surface. G. Approvals: Manufacturer shall certify that product complies with and has been tested and approved for compliance with Miami Dade NOA or Florida Product Approval and applicable requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following in each category however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Primary Glass: Provide products from one of the following: 1. PPG. 2. Guardian. 3. OldCastle. 4. Pilkington. 5. AFGD (American Flat Glass Distributors). C. Architectural Glass Fabricators: Provide products from one of the following: 1. All of the above primary glass manufacturers. 2. Globe -Amerada Glass. 3. Interpane High -Performance Glass Products. 4. Tempglass. 5. Viracon. 6. Arch Amarlite. D. Fire Rated Glass: 1. SAFTI FIRST. 2. Oldcastle Glass. 3. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd., distributed by Technical Glass Products. E. One -Way Glass: 1. Viracon. 2. Pikington. 3. PPG. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-M. B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3. C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-M. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. D. Heat -Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type 1, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. E. Reflective -Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376. F. Pyrolytic-Coated, Low -Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 1. The unit overall thickness tolerance shall be 1 1/167 +1/32". Unit constructed with patterned glass shall be +/-1/16". 2. Shall comply with ASTM E 546 Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 3. Shall comply with ASTM E 576 Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in the Vertical Position. 4. Sealed Insulating Glass Units to be double sealed with a primary seal of polyisobutylene and a secondary seal of silicone. a. The minimum thickness of the secondary seal shall be 1/16". b. The target width of the primary seal shall be 5/32". C. There shall be no voids or skips in the primary seal. d. Gaps or skips between primary and secondary sealant are permitted to a maximum width of 1/16" by maximum length of 2" with gaps separated by at least 18". Continuous contact between the primary seal and the secondary seal is desired. e. Both primary and secondary sealant adhesion shall exhibit continuous, tenacious adhesion to both glass and spacer contact areas. 5. To provide a hermetically sealed and dehydrated space, lites shall be separated by an aluminum spacer with three bent corners and one keyed -soldered corner or four bent corners and one straight butyl injected zinc plated steel straight key joint. B. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction with black finish. 2.4 INTERIOR LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. All laminated architectural safety glass shall conform with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201. 3. Laminated Glass products to be fabricated free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets in autoclave with heat plus pressure. 4. 3/8" interior laminated safety glass a. First Glass Ply: 1/8" Clear, Heat treated b. Interlayer: 0.030" Clear PVB C. Second Glass Ply: 1/4" Clear, Heat treated 2.5 ONE-WAY GLASS A. Laminated One-way Glass: ASTM C1036. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with 0.060" clear polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Subject Side: Provide 1/4" thick clear HS glass. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear and located on the #2 side of the clear glass. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Viewer Side: Provide 1/4" thick gray tint glass. 5. Performance: a. Light Transmittance: 4% b. Reflection Out (Subject Side): 42% C. Reflectance In (Observer Side): 12% 6. All laminated architectural safety glass shall conform with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201. 7. Laminated Glass products to be fabricated free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets in autoclave with heat plus pressure. 2.6 EXTERIOR GLASS TYPES A. Glazing to be used for all exterior glazing unless noted otherwise. B. (GL-1) - Insulated Tinted Low E Coated Glass 1. 1" Insulating Coated Glass a. Exterior Glass Ply: 1/4" Gray tint heat treated (Final tint color as selected by the Architect) b. Coating: Neutral Low E on #2 surface C. Space:1/2" aluminum construction black finish, air filled d. Silicone: black e. Interior Glass Ply: 1/4" Clear heat treated 2. Performance Requirements a. Visible Light Transmittance: 35% b. Exterior Reflectance: 6% C. Winter U-Value: 0.29 d. Summer U-Value: 0.26 e. Shading Coefficient: 0.28 f. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.24 g. Light to Solar Gain Ratio: 1.45 2.7 INTERIOR GLASS TYPES A. (GL-2) - Glass for Interior Non -Rated Doors, Sidelights, Transoms and Windows: 1/4-inch thick clear tempered glass. B. (GL-3) - Glass for Interior Fire Rated Doors and Windows: 1/4-inch fire rated glazing, polished both sides. C. (GL-4) - Glass for interior laminated safety glass locations. D. (GL-5) - Glass for interior one-way glass locations. 2.8 FIRE -RESISTIVE GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fire -resistive glazing products with an exposed surface film are not acceptable. B. Fire -Protection Rating: As required for the assembly in which glazing material is installed. 1. Glazing for Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Glazing for Fire -Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. C. Impact Safety Rating: As required for the assembly in which glazing material is installed. Glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category I I materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Glazing products shall be permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction D. Temperature -Rise Rating: As required for the assembly in which glazing material is installed. 1. In exit enclosures, building codes usually require that fire -rated door assemblies have labels denoting the fire -protection rating, showing the time period and the maximum allowed temperature -rise limit of 450 deg F on the unexposed face of the door after 30 minutes of fire exposure. 2. When used in glazed walls, provide glazing that has a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient during standard fire -test exposure. E. Glazing Sealants for Fire -Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire -protection rating. F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire -resistance rating. G. Wire glazing is not permitted. 2.9 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the required application and condition of installation in each case. Provide only compounds which are proven to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted. B. General: Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 2.10 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Glazing Sealant for Fire -Resistant Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire -resistive rating. 2.11 GLAZING GASKETS A. Lock -Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C542, black. B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C1115. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side - walking). F. Compressible Filler Rod: Shall be closed -cell or waterproof jacketed rodstock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam with proven compatibility with sealants used. Rod shall be flexible and resilient with 5-10 PSI compression strength for 25 percent deflection. 2.13 ACCESSORIES A. Muntins 1. Single Glazing: 3/4" wide by 1/8" deep extruded aluminum muntins on both sizes of glazing. Secure with silicone adhesive. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Insulated Glazing: 3/4" wide by 1/2" deep extruded aluminum muntins factory installed between glass plys of insulated glazing. 3. Finish: To match storefront finish. 2.14 FABRICATION OF GLASS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE A. Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure, including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and air tight, deterioration of glazing materials, and other defects in the Work. B. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation, and operation of the building. C. Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses with reasonable tolerances. The glazier .is responsible for correct glass size for each opening within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. D. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing and their technical representatives except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. E. Comply with "Glazing Manual' by Flat Glass Marketing Association and the manufacturers of the glass and glazing materials except as shown and specified otherwise. F. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation and eliminate those which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. G. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw, and blow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.4 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of offsite. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant -substrate testing. D. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: 1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets producing a weather tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.7 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than four (4) days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 14 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 22 16 — NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Steel framing systems. b. Suspension systems for gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C645 — Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members B. ASTM C653/C653M — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process C. ASTM C754 — Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products D. MFMA (Metal Framing Manufacturer's Association) — Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing E. ASCE 7 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) — Fire Resistance Manual G. Gypsum Association (GA) — Fire Resistance Design Manual H. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Describe method for securing studs to tracks, splicing, and for blocking and reinforcement to framing connections and reinforcing for studs with piping and conduit penetrations. B. Provide data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts and limitations. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non - load -bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Delegated -Design: Provide design services and calculations for load bearing items to comply with performance requirements for load bearing items to comply with code requirements, performance requirements and design criteria signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Florida. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be the following in each category however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. B. Steel Studs and Slip -type Head Joints 1. Clark Dietrich Building Systems 2. Steel Network Inc. 3. MBA Building Supplies C. Firestop Tracks 1. Fire Trak Corp. 2. Metal-Lite, Inc. 3. Clarke Dietrich Building Systems 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M. B. Studs and Runners: Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 25-gauge or manufacturer's equivalent. b. Depth: 3-5/8", 6" and as indicated on Drawings. C. Partition Door, Window and Miscellaneous Openings: 20-gauge or manufacturers equivalent. C. Slip -Type Head Joints: Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1) "MaxTrak Slotted Deflection Track" as manufactured by Clarke Dietrich Building Systems 2) "Flat Steel Deflection Track" as manufactured by MBA Building Supplies 3) "VertiClip SLD Series" as manufactured by Steel Network Inc. D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. a. Firestop Tracks 1) "Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip" as manufactured by Fire Trak Corp. 2) "The System" as manufactured by Metal-Lite, Inc. 3) "BlazeFrame Firestop Track" as manufactured by Clarke Dietrich Building Systems E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch, minimum 2" wide unless indicated otherwise. F. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 16 gauge minimum base -metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2" x 1/2". 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings and if not indicated 25 gauge. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings and if not indicated 2-9/16" wide x 7/8" high. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Stud Furring: 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 25 gauge or manufacturers equivalent. 2. Depth: 1-5/8", 3-5/8", 6" and as indicated on Drawings. I. Z-Shaped Furring: Non -slotted web with 3/4" wall attachment flange. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 25 gauge or manufacturer's equivalent. 2. Depth: 2 1/2" and as indicated on Drawings. J. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical. K. Shaftwall Studs: Shaftwall CT studs 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 20 gauge or as required to comply with system rating 2. Depth: 2 1/2", 4" and as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. B. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 16 gauge uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 25 gauge. D. Grid systems of exterior soffits and ceilings: Provide up lift restraints at minimum 32" o.c. each way and closer to comply with code requirements. 1. Provide dedicated design as indicated for exterior soffit and ceiling systems. E. Suspension Systems for Interior Gypsum Board Ceilings: Direct -hung grid suspension system composed of the main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting system. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified products and are approved by the Architect. a. Armstrong World Industries: Drywall Grid System 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. Chicago Metallic Corporation: Drywall Grid System C. USG Corporation: Drywall Grid System 2.4 STUD SUPPORTED CEILING A. Studs and Runners: 1. Minimum base metal thickness: 25-gauge or manufacturer's equivalent. 2. Depth: 3-5/8", 6" and as indicated on Drawings or larger as required to support ceiling design load. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 15# asphaltic impregnated felt. 2.6 FINISHES A. Framing Materials: 1. Galvanizing shall conform to with ASTM A 653 2. Galvanized to G40 for interior materials. 3. Galvanized to G60 for exterior materials. 4. Galvanized to G90 for materials in contact with other materials on the interior. B. Hangers, Anchors and Fastening Devices: Galvanized 1. Galvanized to G40 for interior materials. 2. Galvanized to G60 for exterior materials. 3. Galvanized to G90 for materials in contact with other materials on the interior. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. @2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load -bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. E. Floor track shall be bedded in two (2) beads of continuous acoustical sealant at all sound rated partitions. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single -Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install horizontal bridging not more than 48 inches apart in walls. E. Install deep leg head track wherever wall extends to underside of roof or floor structure and provide space for structural deflection. Install one row of horizontal bridging parallel to and within 8 inches of head track. Do not attach studs to head track. F. Provide double 20-guage studs at door, window and miscellaneous partition openings. G. Direct Furring: Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 16 inches o.c. Furring: 16 inches o.c. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Z-Furring Members: 1. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 16 inches o.c. 2. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit Stud Supported Ceiling Studs: 16 inches o.c. J. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in -place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 24 00 — CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Exterior cement plasterwork. b. Drainage mat. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C91 — Standard Specification for Masonry Cement B. ASTM C150 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement C. ASTM C206 —Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime D. ASTM C207 — Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes E. ASTM C C836 — Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid -Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course F. ASTM D146 — Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Bitumen -Saturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing G. ASTM E96 — Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials H. ASTM E283 — Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen I. ASTM C897 — Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement -Based Plasters J. ASTM C926 — Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster K. ASTM E119 — Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials L. NTMA — National Tile and Marble Association M. PCA (Portland Cement Association) — Plaster (Stucco) Manual N. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory -prepared finish coat indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fabricate vertical elements to limit finish surface to 1/180 deflection under lateral point load of 100 lbs. B. Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 1/260 deflection under superimposed dead loads and wind uplift loads. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. B. Build mockups for each substrate and finish texture indicated for cement plastering, including accessories. C. Size: 100 sq. ft. in surface area. D. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. E. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following in each category however products of other 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Metal Lath a. Clark Dietrich Building Systems b. Steel Network, Inc. C. MBA Building Supplies 2. Lath Board a. Georgia Pacific 3. Moisture Barrier a. Protecto Wrap Company 4. Bonding Agent a. Thoro Construction Chemicals, LLC 2.2 METAL LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Diamond -Mesh Lath: Self -furring, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. 2.3 LATH BOARD A. Lath Board: Fiberglass -mat faced gypsum sheathing complying with ASTM C1177: 1. Basis of Design: "Densglass Sheathing," Type X. 2. Size: 5/8-inch thick by 48 inches wide. 3. Weight: 1.9 lb/sq. ft. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 2.4 MOISTURE BARRIER A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Self -adhering sheet consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene -film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side. 1. Basis of Design: "PW 100/40 Air Vapor Barrier' 2. Size: 40-mil nominal thickness 3. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi minimum 4. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum 5. Puncture Resistance: 40 Ibf (180 N) minimum 6. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.009 perms maximum 2.5 DRAINAGE MAT A. Cavity Drainage Mat Material: Free -draining mesh, fabricated from polymer fused entangled filaments bonded to a moisture resistant fiber fabric on the outer surfaces and that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Basis of Design: The basis of design products "WaterWay Rainscreen Drainage Mats" are manufactured by Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. 2. Mats: Mats shall be 4/5" (19mm) thick. 3. Fasteners: Fasteners suitable for substrate, stainless steel and as approved by the mat manufacturer. 2.6 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Perlite Aggregate: ASTM C 35. D. Ready -Mixed Finish -Coat Plaster: Mill -mixed portland cement, aggregates, and proprietary ingredients. 2.7 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Provide high impact polyvinylchloride (PVC) conforming to ASTM D1784, Type II, D4216. 1. Thickness: 0.050-inch minimum. 2. Color: off-white. 3. Size: 10 foot lengths. 4. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges. a. Smallnose cornerbead; use unless otherwise indicated. 5. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. a. Square -edge style; use unless otherwise indicated. 6. Control Joints: One -piece -type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 7. Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip joint and square -edged 1/2-inch wide reveal; with perforated concealed flanges. 8. Connectors a. Connector clips: Polyvinylchloride (PVC) plastic clips for aligning continuous lengths of molding. b. Notch-Lok Connections: Polyvinylchloride back plates for aligning intersecting lengths of moldings. C. "+" and "T" Intersections: Factory fabricated intersections used to connect horizontal and vertical joints of moldings. 9. Soffit Vent: 4" wide continuous by depth to match soffit material depth with double leg channels mounting channels where indicated. 10. Weep Screed: One piece weep screed with 3 1/2" mounting flange with 'V" shaped bottom element with drainage holes. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Manufacturers and products are as indicated however equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. 1. Plastic Components, Inc. 2. Vinyl Corp. 3. Amico, A Gibraltar Industries Co. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline -resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: Water based bonding agent "Thoroseal". D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal -to -metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads. E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch diameter unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base -coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. B. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coat for three -coat plasterwork as follows: Portland Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. C. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Masonry and Concrete: Scratch and brown coat for three -coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. D. Ready -Mixed Finish -Coat Plaster: Mill -mixed portland cement, aggregates, and proprietary 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL ingredients, with integral color pigment. 1. Color as selected by the Architect. E. Thickness: 1. Walls: 5/8" — 3 coat. 2. Ceiling/Soffits: 3/4" — 3 coat. F. Texture: Sand finish, to be verified by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.3 INSTALLING LATH BOARD A. Lath board installation per manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Provide moisture barrier per manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.4 MOISTURE BARRIER INSTALLATION (Exterior ceilings and soffits and behind drainage mat) A. Install moisture barrier according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. D. Apply continuous sheets over already -installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. E. Seal edges of sheet -waterproofing terminations with mastic. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Install sheet -waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. 3.5 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install self -furring -diamond -mesh lath. 2. Flat -Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install self -furring -diamond -mesh lath. 3.6 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. Install lath -type, external -corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at exterior locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. 1. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 2. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length -to -width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2: 1. 3. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 4. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular -shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.7 DRAINAGE MAT INSTALLATION A. Install drainage mat with weep screed at bottom of stucco location per manufacturers recommendations. 3.8 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926, 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-footstraightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field -applied finishes indicated. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on masonry and concrete for plaster bases. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Walls; Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Masonry and Concrete: Scratch and brown coat for three -coat plasterwork. D. Ceilings and Soffits; Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coat for three -coat plasterwork. E. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match Architect's sample. 3.9 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 09 24 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 29 00 — GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: Gypsum Board. Gypsum Board Accessories. Tile Backing Panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A653 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process B. ASTM C36/C36M — Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard C. ASTM C79/C79M — Standard Specification for Treated Core and Nontreated Core Gypsum Sheathing Board D. ASTM C442/C442M — Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board E. ASTM C475 — Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board F. ASTM C630/C630M — Standard Specification for Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board G. ASTM C645 — Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members H. ASTM C754 — Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Panel Products I. ASTM C931/C931 M — Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board J. ASTM E695 — Standard method for Measuring Relative Resistance of Wall, Floor, and Roof Construction to Impact loading K. ASTM D3273 — Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber L. ASTM D5420 — Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by Falling Weight (Gardner Impact) M. ASTM E119 — Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials N. ASTM C840 — Standard Specification for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board O. GA 201 — Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings P. GA-216 — Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board Q. GA-600 — Fire Resistance Design Manual R. FBC — Florida Building Code 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for items required. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. D. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Coordination 1. Prior to and during installation, coordinate with work of other trades to facilities required openings and finishes. 2. Conduct pre -construction meeting with drywall contractor, architect, owner, project coordinator, and others involved with process. 1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Mold Resistant Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM D 3273 and achieving a mold resistance score of 10. D. Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754, C840, and GA-216 except as otherwise specified in this Section. E. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire -rated Assemblies: Listed and rated by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or generic fire resistance ratings listed in GA-600. 2. Fire -Hazard Classification: Listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. USG Corporation B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Lafarge North America Inc. 2. National Gypsum Company. 3. Georgia Pacific 4. Certainteed Gypsum 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Basis of Design: "Firecode Core Type X" 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X 3. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Hi -Impact Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Hi -Impact with heavy abrasion and mold/mildew/moisture resistant paper face. 1. Core: 5/8" inch fiberglass reinforced, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 4. Location: Provide in Lobby and Council Chamber to 4'-0" above finished floor. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Moisture -Mold -Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold - resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Basis of Design: "Mold Tough Firecode Type X" 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Exterior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396 M 1. Basis of Design: "DensGlass Sheathing" 2. Core: 5/8", Type X 3. Edges: Eased and Tapered E. Shaftwall Liner Boards: ASTM C 1396/C 1396 M a. Core: 1", Type SLX b. Edges: Beveled 2. Face Boards: ASTM C 1396/ C 1396 M a. Core: 1/2", Type X, two layers b. Long Edges: Tapered 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Edges: Manufacturers standards. 3. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. 4. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Plastic Trim: Provide high impact polyvinylchloride (PVC) conforming to ASTM D1784, Type II, D4216. 1. Thickness: 0.050-inch minimum. 2. Color: off-white. 3. Size: 10 foot lengths. 4. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges. a. Smallnose cornerbead; use unless otherwise indicated. 5. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. a. Square -edge style; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Bullnose style, radius 3/4-inch minimum; use at locations indicated on Drawings. 6. Control Joints: One -piece -type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified products and are approved by the Architect. a. Plastic Components, Inc. b. Vinyl Corp. C. Amico, A Gibraltar Industries Co. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape Locations 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling, Embedding and First Coat: Use setting -type taping compound. 2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type taping compound. 3. Finish Coat: For third coat, ready mix drying -type, all-purpose compound. 4. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting -type, sandable topping compound. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 3. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting - type, sandable topping compound. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. B. Screws for Gypsum Board (ASTM C1002): Phillips head galvanized steel Type "S" or "S-12" self -drilling screws, length and type as required and recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. C. Screws for Gypsum Sheathing Board. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Type S-12, Bugle head, self -tapping, rust -resistant, fine tread for heavy gauge steel. Type S, bugle head, rust resistant, sharp point, and fine thread for light gauge steel or furring. D. Joint Paper Tape: 2 inch wide paper tape with center crease and buffed on both sides, comply with ASTM C475. E. Joint Mesh Tape: 2-1/2 inch wide, 10 by 10 self -adhering fiberglass reinforced joint tape comply with ASTM C475. F. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal doorframes. G. Asphalt Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), non -perforated. H. Foam Gaskets: Closed cell vinyl foam adhesive backed strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit metal stud size indicated. Gypsum board sheathing sealants, caulk, tape: 1. Don Corning 795 or equivalent; Pecora 895 or equivalent 2. Borden HPPG Elmer's siliconized acrylic latex caulk or equivalent. 3. 2" wide 10 x 10 glass mesh quick tape or equivalent. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, non -staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. C. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. K. Glass -Fiber Acoustical Blanket Insulation 1. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame - spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2. Minimum R-Value: 9 2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Non -Aggregate Finish: Premixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Texture: Knock -down. 2. Manufacturers and products are as indicated however equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. b. National Gypsum Company: Perfect Spray EM Texture. c. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load -bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Hold gypsum board 1/2" off of floor. Bottom of all gypsum board panels to slab shall receive a continuous bead of sealant with a smooth finish aligned with the finished face of the gypsum board. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound - flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Provide control joints in gypsum board partitions, bulkheads, ceilings, and soffits as follows: 1. Partition, furring, or column fireproofing abuts a structural element (except floor) or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 2. Ceiling or soffit abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition or other vertical penetration. 3. Construction changes within plane of partition or ceiling. 4. Partition or furring run exceeds 40 feet, unless noted otherwise. 5. Ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction. 6. Exterior soffits exceed 30 feet in either direction. 7. Wings of "L", "U", and "T"-shaped ceiling areas are joined. 8. Ceiling between two ends of walls. 9. Top corners of both sides of recessed door entries. 10. Expansion or control joints occur in the exterior wall. 11. Less than ceiling height frames should have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Treat window openings in same manner as doors. 12. USG Control Joint No. 093: Apply over face of gypsum board where specified. Cut to length with a fine-toothed hacksaw (32 teeth per inch). Cut end joints square, butt together, and align to provide neat fit. Attach control joint to gypsum board with fasteners spaced 6 inches o.c. maximum along each flange. Remove plastic tape after finishing with joint compound or veneer finish. a. Leave a 1/2 inch continuous opening between gypsum boards for insertion of surface -mounted joint. b. Interrupt wood floor and ceiling plates with a 1/2 inch gap, wherever there is a 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL control joint in the structure. C. Do not attach gypsum board to steel studs on one side of control joint. d. Provide separate supports for each control joint flange. e. Provide an adequate seal behind control joint where sound or fire ratings are prime considerations. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations with screws spaced 8" o.c. both sides: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use where indicated. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Tile backing panels. 3. Level 3: Mechanical, Electrical Rooms, and Storage Rooms. 4. Level 4: All other spaces unless otherwise indicated. 5. Level5: None. E. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Levels of Finish: The following levels of finish are established as a guide for specific final finishes in accordance with GA-214. 1. Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories required. This level of finish shall be used in temporary construction only. 2. Level 1: Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. This finish level shall be used in plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, in areas where the assembly is concealed. 3. Level 2: Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound, and one separate coat of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. This finish level shall be used where water resistant gypsum backing board (ASTM C630) is used as a substrate for tile only. 4. Level 3: Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound, and two separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application of final finishes. See painting/wall covering specification in this regard. This final level shall be used in areas that are to receive heavy textured, thick (1/8 inch or greater) wall coverings. 5. Level 4: Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound, and three separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: Prepare surface to be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application of final finishes. This finish level shall be used where textured finishes, wall coverings, and painted (flat or eggshell) finishes are to be applied. 6. Level 5: Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. A thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: Prepare surface to be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application of finish paint. This finish level shall be used with semi -gloss or gloss painted finishes. B. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: Embedding and First Coat: Setting type joint compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting type joint compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready mixed, drying type, all purpose or topping compound. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 30 00 — TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/CTI Al08/A118/A136.1 — Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile - A Collection of 20 ANSI/CTI A108 Series Standards on Ceramic Tile Installation: A108.1A-C, 108.4 -.13, A118.1- .10, ANSI A136.1 B. ANSI/CTI A108.6 — Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy C. ANSI/CTI A108.10 — Installation of Grout in Tile work D. ANSI/CTI A118.3 — Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive E. ANSI/CTI A137.1 — Ceramic Tile F. ASTM C144 — Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar G. ASTM C206 — Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime H. ASTM C207 — Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes I. TCA CTI — (Tile Council of North America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. This Contractor shall inspect the job condition before starting, and his starting work constitutes approval of conditions. B. All flooring variations less than 1/8" in 10 ft., chips, and cracks are the responsibility of the flooring subcontractor to feather/patch prior to the installation of tile. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, and junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, and setting details. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed ANSI A137.1. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Product Data: Provide instruction for using adhesives and grouts. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed ANSI A137.1. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. B. Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0% of amount installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work done under this Section of the Specifications shall be performed by mechanics skilled and experienced in the class of work involved. Workmanship shall be in accordance with best trade practices, and surface shall be true to line and free from waves and other imperfections. Joints between tiles shall be maintained uniform and even and properly grouted. B. Mockups: Before installing tile, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work. 1. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated, or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before proceeding with final unit of Work. 4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1.8 WARRANTY A. This Contractor shall fully guarantee all materials and labor under this section for a period of not less than 1-year from date of final acceptance of the building against all defects in both workmanship and materials, and he shall promptly correct and/or replace such faulty work if so notified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following in each category however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Ceramic Tile a. Daltile 2. Porcelain Tile a. Landmark Ceramic, USA 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. Gres Porcellanato Ceramica 2.2 GENERAL A. Provide tile conforming to ANSI A137.1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements. 2.3 CERAMIC TILE (CT1) A. Basis of Design: "Rittenhouse Square". B. Modular Size: 3 inches by 6 inches C. Thickness: 5/16 inches D. Joint Width: 118 inch E. Grout: Unsanded Laticrete F. Installation Pattern: As indicated by the Architect G. Color: See Drawings for selection 2.4 PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE (PT1) A. Basis of Design: "Magnifica". B. Modular Size: 12 inches by 24 inches C. Thickness: 3/8 inch D. Joint Width: 1/8 inch E. Grout: Spectralock F. Installation Pattern: As indicated by the Architect G. Color: Multicolor and see Drawings for selection. 2.5 PORCELAIN STAIR TREAD TILE (PT2) A. Basis of Design: "Sant' Agostino Aspen". B. Modular Size: 6 inches by 36 inches C. Thickness: 3/8 inch D. Joint Width: 1/8 inch E. Grout: Spectralock F. Installation Pattern: As indicated by the Architect G. Color: Aspen Burnt and see Drawings for selection. 2.6 PORCELAIN WALL TILE (PT3) A. Basis of Design: "Magnifica". B. Modular Size: 18 inches by 36 inches C. Thickness: 3/8 inch D. Joint Width: 1/8 inch E. Grout: Spectralock F. Installation Pattern: As indicated by the Architect G. Color: Multicolor and see Drawings for selection. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.7 PORCELAIN BASE TILE (PTB) A. Basis of Design: "Magnifica". B. Modular Size: 6 inches by 12 inches C. Thickness: 3/8 inch D. Joint Width: 1/8 inch E. Grout: Spectralock F. Installation Pattern: As indicated by the Architect G. Color: Multicolor and see Drawings for selection. 2.8 TILE TRIM A. Wall Tile Trim, provide the following: 1. Trim in a size, color, and shade to match field tile. 2. Bull nose wainscot cap where required. 3. In a standard; square top, cove base at tile floors. 4. In a square top, set -on type, cove base at other floors. 5. Square edges at inside corners. 6. Bull nose edges at outside corners and jambs. 2.9 PROJECT COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors, surface textures, and other appearance characteristics shall be as selected by the Architect. Selections shall be made from among manufacturer's standard products, regardless of differing price groupings. B. Architect reserves the right to use a maximum of three (3) colors in each room/space at no additional cost. C. Architect shall select colors of grout from all available price groups. 2.10 MATERIALS A. Anti -Fracture Membrane/Cleavage Membrane: As indicated on the drawings, and elsewhere as required for isolating the installation from cracking due to minor substrate movement and normal structural deflections. Membrane shall comply with ANSI A108.1, one layer of 15# felt with 3" overlaps at all seams. B. Self -Leveling Underlayment: As indicated on the drawings, and elsewhere as required to provide a flat, level surface for direct receipt of tile and other floor coverings on dry, interior installations. C. Latex Underlayment: Quick set type, as recommended by membrane manufacturer, as required providing positive drainage to floor drains. D. Mortar Bed Installations: As indicated on the drawings, and elsewhere as required for mortar bed or brown coat as the substrate for tile work; work to conform to ANSI A108.1. E. Modified Dry -Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. 1. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. F. Medium -Bed, Modified Dry -Set Mortar for Large Format Tile: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 5/8 inch. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. G. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type 1. H. Unsanded Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. Product shall be Laticrete 1600 as manufactured by Laticrete or approved equal. Epoxy Adhesives: Chemical Resistant Epoxy, Water -Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy as required for setting tike as specified by ANSI A118.3 and ANSI A108.6. Product shall be "Latapoxy 300" as manufactured by Laticrete or approved equal. Provide in restrooms and where indicated. Epoxy Grout: Chemical Resistant Epoxy, Water -Cleanable Tile Grouting Epoxy as required for grouting tile as specified by ANSI A118.3 and ANSI A108.6. Product shall be "SpectraLOCK Pro" as manufactured by Laticrete or approved equal. Provide in restrooms and where indicated. 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. The Contractor to supply all necessary base, cap edge corner, trim, or accessory tiles required for a complete installation. B. Edge Trim: Schluter "Schiene" satin nickel anodized aluminum finish, profile Q80AT mechanically fastened on set in grout, gluing is not permitted. Provide at all edges unless indicated otherwise. C. Marble Thresholds at restroom doorways and at Shower Floors: Complying with Marble Institute of America (MIA) with not less than a minimum abrasion -hardness value of 10 per ASTM C241. Marble Thresholds: Beveled edges at a 1:2 slope with a maximum 1/2" thickness to meet handicapped requirements, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. D. Stair Nosing: Composite stair nosing fabricated from PVC and vegetable fibers with striated and slip -resistant finish "Novopeld and Maxi" as manufactured by Emac. 1. Size: 1 3/4" wide x 3/8" high (tile size) 2. Color: As indicated on Drawings or as selected by the Architect. 2.12 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturer's written instructions. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to installing tile, inspect new surfaces that are to receive tile covering. Notify the Architect in writing of defects or conditions that will interfere with or prevent a satisfactory tile installation. Do not proceed with installation until such defects or conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect. B. The starting of installation work in a room or space shall imply acceptance of the surfaces to receive the tile in that space. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions, and rough areas, using leveling and patching compounds as recommended by tile manufacturer. B. Clear away debris, scrape up cementitious deposits from surface that would prevent bond, including curing compounds, paint, oils, waxes, and sealers. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered immediately before installation. C. Field Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under the type or needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of the against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces: Petroleum paraffin wax or grout release. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install tile, per TCA F113-90 sloping to floor drains, where applicable, in accordance with ANSI specification A-108.5. Install wall tile per TCAW202-90. B. Install the in grid pattern with continuous and properly aligned joints in all directions. C. Install edge trim where tile abuts other floor finishes. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Install marble threshold at showers. E. Provide a 1/8" joint between the tile, and the doorframe or other item of dissimilar material then use a sealant over the joint instead of grout. 1. Caulk the joints with caulking compound that matches grout. F. Use masonry saw to cut tile unless Architect and Owner approve another method. G. Floor tile in toilet rooms shall be epoxy grouted. H. Extend the work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions. 3.4 LAYOUT A. Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete surfaces. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Specification Section - Joint Sealants. B. Lay out tilework so as to minimize cuts less than one-half tile in size. C. Locate cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least conspicuous. D. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions shown. E. Align wall joints to give straight, uniform grout lines, plumb and level. F. Align floor joints to give straight uniform grout lines parallel with walls. G. Make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within sheets so extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. H. Porcelain tile can have large variances in sizing. Do not mix sizes and types of tiles in pattern areas. Joints that do not line up or joint widths that vary will be unacceptable. 3.5 WORKMANSHIP A. Supply first-class workmanship in tilework. B. Use products in strict accordance with recommendations and directions of manufacturer. C. Proportion mixes in accordance with latest ANSI standard specifications. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Smooth exposed cut edges. E. Be sure cut edges are clean before installing tiles. F. Fit the carefully against trim and accessories, also around pipes, electrical boxes, and other built-in fixtures so that escutcheons, plates, and collars will completely overlap cut edges. G. When using glazed tile sheets, minimize tearing sheets apart by drilling pipe holes as much as possible. H. Be sure tile work is free of grout film upon completion. 3.6 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.7 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch 3.8 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -bed standards. 3.9 WALL TILE TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install wall tile trim per manufacturer's directions and locate joints at lower portion of wall. 3.10 NOSING INSTALLATION A. Install nosings level and true with mortar installation. 3.11 GROUTING A. Grouting shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A108.10 and the manufacturer's recommended procedures and precautions during application and cleaning, unless noted otherwise 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Rinse tilework thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical cleaners. 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, to ensure the is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. E. All cleaning solutions and procedures to be in compliance with project IAQ Management Plan. 3.13 PROTECTION A. The Contractor installing tile shall make such provisions as necessary to protect the tile against damage of any kind after installation. Damaged tile that appears in the finish work prior to turning the building over to the Owner is to be repaired or replaced by this Contractor without further cost to the Owner. Protect adjoining areas and surfaces and clean up everything at completion. Remove scrap, debris, and surplus material as it accumulates. END OF SECTION 09 30 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILING 09 30 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 51 23 —ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. b. Suspension systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 — Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636 — Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels. C. ASTM D3273 — Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. D. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM E90 — Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. F. ASTM E 119 — Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. G. ASTM E1264 — Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. H. ASTM C423 — Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. I. ASTM E795 — Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests. J. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA) - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice K. UL — Fire Resistance Directory L. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: 1. Acoustical Tiles: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Concealed Suspension -System Members: 6-inch long Sample of each type. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch long Samples of each type and color. 4. Seismic Clips: Full size. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension -system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast -in -place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger -wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Ceiling -mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 6. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension -System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 3. This stock shall be designated for use by Owner only, after completion of the Project and shall not be used for repair or replacement during the one-year warranty period. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Employ only licensed Sub -Contractors skilled in successful installations of the specified products on comparable projects for a minimum of 5 years. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employ only manufacturers making the specified products as a regular and current production item. C. Single -Source Responsibility for Ceiling and suspension Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system components, and partition system. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension -system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty that the ceiling panels and suspension systems shall be free from sagging or warping for indicated warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Not less than fifteen (15) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 PERFORMANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E1264 for Class A products and shall have a U.L. label. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. USA Interiors, Inc. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. B. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram -positive and gram -negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES A. ACT-1: 1. Basis of Design: Fine Fissured 2. Edge: Angled Tegular 3. Size: 24" x 24" x 3/4" 4. NRC: 0.70 5. Color: White 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Basis -of -Design Product: "Suprafine XL 9/16" B. Metal Suspension -System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. High -Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. 2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations. Suspended grid formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension -system runners. B. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. C. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 4881E 488M or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated according to ASTM B 633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition. 2. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106 inch diameter wire. C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch thick, galvanized -steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch diameter bolts. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Exposed and concealed joints nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specked in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required and no more than 20 degrees to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension -system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, post -installed mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power -actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. B. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 12. Secure wire hanger at the four corners of all light fixture locations. B. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in -place or post -installed anchors. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 4. All seams to be tight and flush. D. Install suspension -system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: Install tiles in a basket -weave pattern. F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension -system flanges into kerfed edges so tile -to -tile joints are closed by double lap of material. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non -cumulative. B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non -cumulative. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no tiles have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements. 1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power -actuated fasteners and post -installed anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 Ibf of tension; it will also select one of every two post -installed anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 Ibf of tension. 2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency. B. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 09 51 23 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 54 35 — DECORATIVE CEILING PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements, are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Decorative ceiling panels 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 — Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636 — Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels. C. ASTM C665 — Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. D. C1304 — Odor Emission of Thermal Insulation Materials. E. ASTM C1338 - Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings. F. ASTM E84 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. ASTM G21 — Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. H. UL 94 — Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances Testing. I. ULE 2818 — Chemical Emissions for Building Materials, Finishes and Furnishings. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples: 6" square samples of decorative ceiling panel type, pattern, and color. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Handle components carefully to avoid damaging panels in any way. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE CEILING PANELS 09 54 35 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected"ceffing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: Ceiling -mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. 1.1 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Decorative Ceiling Panels: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. This stock shall be designated for use by Owner only, after completion of the Project and shall not be used for repair or replacement during the one-year warranty period. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Employ only licensed Sub -Contractors skilled in successful installations of the specified products on comparable projects for a minimum of 5 years. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employ only manufacturers making the specified products as a regular and current production item. C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of decorative ceiling panels with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system components, and partition system. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install decorative ceiling panels until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty that the ceiling panels and suspension systems shall be free from sagging or warping for indicated warranty. Warranty Period: Not less than five (5) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 PERFORMANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE CEILING PANELS 09 54 35 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Ceilume 2.2 CEILING PANELS (ACT-2) A. Basis of Design; "Madison Panel" B. Size:24"x24" C. Material: 0.030" thick thermoformed rigid vinyl D. NCR:0.30 E. Acoustic Insulation: 1. Product: Ceilume Soniguard. 2. Material: Thermal -bonded, polyester -fiber, non -woven batt. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, tested according to ASTM E84. 4. Does not promote corrosion, fungi growth, or odor emission when tested according to ASTM C665, ASTM C1304, ASTM C1338 and ASTM G21. F. Decorative Strips: 15/16" x 24" with embossed design, fabricated from 0.030 thick rigid vinyl with adhesive backing. Color as selected by Architect. G. Color: As selected by the Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive panels decorative ceiling. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Panel and Accessories: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and evaluation reports specified above. 3.4 CLEANING B. Clean ceilings immediately prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 54 35 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE CEILING PANELS 09 54 35 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 65 13 — RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Resilient base. b. Resilient stair accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM F 1861 — Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. B. ASTM F 710 — Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. C. ASTM E 662 — Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. D. ASTM E 84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM F2169 — Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads F. NFPA 253 — Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. G. NFPA 258 — Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. H. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Installer's Qualifications: Employ only authorized representative of resilient flooring manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. Employ only experienced Contractors (Installers) skilled in the successful installation of 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL the specified materials and accessories on similar projects for a minimum of five years. C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662. 3. Flame Spread: Less than 75 per ASTM E84. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg For more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty covering manufacturing defects and installation integrity shall be indicated warranty period. Installation integrity is defined as products installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manual. Warranty Period: Not less than five (5) years from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer's Warranty: Fully guarantee installation of materials against defects in installation, workmanship and loss of adhesion for indicated warranty period. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Warranty Period: Not less than 1 year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Johnsonite, Inc. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Burke Industries, Inc. 2. Flexco Co. 3. The R.C. Musson Rubber Co. 4. Roppe Corp. 2.2 RUBBER BASE (RB1) A. Basis of Design: "Millwork — Envoy" Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber), Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Type: Straight B. Thickness: 3/4 inch. C. Height: 5 1/2 inches. D. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. E. Outside Corners: Field formed. F. Inside Corners: Field formed. G. Colors: See Drawings for selection. 2.3 RUBBER BASE (RB2) A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber), Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Resilient Flooring Type: Cove. 2. Carpet Flooring Type: Straight. B. Thickness: 0.125 inch. C. Height: 4 inches. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. E. Outside Corners: Preformed. F. Inside Corners: Preformed. G. Colors: See Drawings for selection. 2.4 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Basis of Design: "Stairwell Management System" B. Stair Treads with Continuous Riser: 1. Comply with ASTM F2169 Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads, Type TS, Class 1 & 2, Group 1 & 2 2. Type TS, Class 2 — Rubber, Vulcanized Thermoset. 3. Tread depth — 12 inch minimum X full width of stair; overall tread/riser combination depth and width cut to fit actual stair on site. 4. Tread/Riser and Landing Finish: Bamboo 5. Landing Tile Size; 24" x 24" 6. Grip Tape: #VIBMTR 7. Sheet materials to match tread pattern shall be installed on intermediate landings. C. Stair Skirting: Maintain width sufficient to provide 2" above stair nose, measured perpendicular to stair slope: 1. Sheet Material: Same material as stair treads. 2. Thickness:1/8" 3. Pattern: Smooth D. Landing Nosing 1'/2" horizontal return, 1'/2" return down edge of landing, full width of landing in 1-piece: 1. Material: Same material as stair treads. 2. Thickness:1/8" 3. Pattern: Smooth 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient -product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient -product manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.6 ENVIRONMENTAL A. Adhesives: For adhesives, sealants and chemical -bonding compounds, including printed statement of VOC content. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Compliance: Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. 2. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. C. Chemical -Bonding Compound: Use chemical -bonding compound that has a VOC content of 350 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. C. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 3.4 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Apply one-piece resilient stair accessories to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after using stair tread filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to treads contours. 3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient -product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 65 19 — RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) 2. Floating Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVP) 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for the Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ASTM F 2034 — for Linoleum Sheet Flooring C. ASTM E 648 — Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. D. ASTM E 662 — Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. E. ASTM F 710 — Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. F. ASTM F 970 — Test Method for Static Load Limit. G. ASTM F1700 — Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile H. ASTM E 492 —for Impact Insulation I. NFPA 253 — Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. J. NFPA 258 — Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. K. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. C. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor tile indicated. D. LVT Plank direction diagram: Provide diagram indicating recommended plank direction. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products certifying that each product furnished complies with requirements. F. Test Results: Submit results from calcium chloride and bond and moisture tests as specified herein, before installation of resilient flooring. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance manuals for flooring materials provided to be included in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. H. Warranty: Submit sample of warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Employ only experienced Contractors (Installers) skilled in the successful installation of the specified materials and accessories on similar projects for a minimum of five (5) years. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662. 3. Flame Spread: Less than 75 per ASTM E84. D. Calcium Chloride Test: Contractor shall provide a calcium chloride test to measure moisture vapor emissions from the concrete slab on grade, before the installation of the resilient flooring. Maximum moisture emissions levels shall be as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. E. Bond and Moisture Tests: Contractor shall provide bond and moisture tests before the installation of the resilient flooring. Bond and moisture tests shall be in strict accordance with the resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations. Provide amount of tests as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. Test concrete slabs in accordance with ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride to ensure emission of no more than 3 Ibs of water/1000 sf of slab in 24-hour period. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver flooring and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. C. Store flooring on flat surfaces. Move flooring and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile for 48 hours before installation, during installation and 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation and for 48 hours after floor the installation. D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting have been completed. E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. Conduct a successful calcium chloride moisture test on concrete floors before installation; take remedial action as required to lower moisture vapor transmission level from non -complying slabs prior to installation. F. Specified items shall not be delivered or installed until building is enclosed, wet work completed and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy level during remainder of construction period. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish to Owner, not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty covering manufacturing defects and installation integrity shall be indicated warranty period. Installation integrity is defined as products installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manual. Warranty Period: Not less than five (5) years from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer's Warranty: Fully guarantee installation of tile and wall base against defects in installation, workmanship and loss of adhesion for indicated warranty period. Warranty Period: Not less than one (1) year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following in each category however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Vinyl Composite Tile (VCT) a. Armstrong 2. Floating Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVP) a. Mohawk Group 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 VINYL COMPOSITE TILE -(VCT) A. Vinyl Composition Tile: 12 inch by 12 inch by 1/8 inch complying with ASTM F1066, Class 2 pattern through. B. Style/Pattern: "Standard Excelon" C. Color: One (1) field color and three (3) accent colors will be utilized. As selected by the Architect or see drawings for selection. 2.3 FLOATING LUXURY VINYL TILE (LVP) A. Floating Resilient Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1700 and with requirements specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule. B. Basis of Design: "Hot and Heavy". C. Pattern: Secoya D. Color: See Drawings for selection. E. Class: Class III, Printed Film Vinyl Tile. F. Type: Type B — Embossed Surface. G. Thickness: 0.20 inch. H. Size: 9" x 59" plank and 36" x 36". I. Installation Orientation: Install in a direction as indicated by the Architect. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds. Latex -modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated, as required to level uneven subfloor conditions B. Adhesive: Water-resistant type as recommended by product manufacturer. Water based adhesives are not allowed. C. VCT Floor Stripper: Flooring manufacturer's standard floor stripper used to remove floor finishes, dirt, grime, oil, stains, tar, gum adhesives and scuffmarks. D. VCT Floor Finish: Low odor, ultra -high solids acrylic, white opaque liquid coating. Drying time shall be no more than 30 minutes in standard conditions. Non -Volatile Solids (%) 25.5 +/- 0.5. Coverage rate — approximately 2,500 sq. ft. per gallon Product shall: have a 3-year strip and re- coat cycle; be scuff, scratch and abrasion resistant; respond to ultra -high speed burnishing; and has a refractive index not less than 1.3861 and a maximum of 1.3898. UL classified for slip resistance. 1. National Chemical Laboratories (NCL), Inc.: "24/7 Extended Performance Floor Finish" 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.5 FLOOR TRANSITIONS A. Resilient Molding Accessory: Provide transition at joints where different floor finishes meet and at floor finish edges B. Transitions: 1. Slim Line Reducer/edge strips 2. Transition/adaptors Strips C. Material: Vinyl. D. Profile and Dimensions: As recommended by flooring installer. E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Metal Edge Accessories: 1. Provide reducer, edge strips, transition and adaptors strips as required to accommodate edge conditions and joints between different flooring materials. 2. Materials: Anodized Aluminum. 3. Finish: As selected by the Architect from full range of industry colors. 4. Anchoring: Mechanical fastening, glue down installation not permitted. 5. Profile and Dimensions: As recommended by flooring installer. 6. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor the manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. F. Install stair nosings at stairs to receive resilient tile. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated. C. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. D. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. 3.4 GLUE DOWN INSTALLATION A. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. C. Seamless Installation: 1. Heat -Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces. 2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical -bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on flooring surfaces. 3.5 FLOATING TILE INSTALLATION A. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. B. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor the installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. VCT: No more than four (4) days before scheduled Substantial Completion, remove all temporary and protective covering from floor surfaces. Sweep clean and prepare resilient flooring surfaces to receive final protective floor finish and floor sealer. 1. For spaces receiving flooring, apply 2 coats of wax. 2. Floor wax product must be at minimum 25% solid. 3. Plastic transitions trips (located at VCT joints) shall not be waxed. These strips must be covered during waxing activities. END OF SECTION 09 65 19 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 68 13 — TILE CARPETING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Carpet Tile b. Carpet Accessories 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D2859 — Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials. B. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM E648 — Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. D. AATCC — American Association of Textile Colorist and Chemists. E. Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services, Consumer Products Laboratory: Certified Carpet Products. F. NFPA 253 — Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems. G. FCIB — Flooring Covering Installation Board H. CRI — Carpet and Rug Institute I. FSPMA — Florida School Plant Management Association, Inc. J. Floor Covering Installation Contractor's Association K. FBC — Florida Building Code. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Existing flooring materials to be removed and remain. 3. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 4. Type of subfloor. 5. Type of installation and pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Type, color, and location of insets, borders edge, transition, and other accessory strips. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 8. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: F o u r f ull-size samples for each type specified. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch long Samples. D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. E. Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in and include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements and has successfully installed similar products to those required as work of this Project for not less than five (5) years. Additional Installer Qualifications: Carpet tile manufacturer shall provide written approval to Owner that installer is an approved installer for all carpet the materials specified on this project. B. Contractor Qualifications: Employ only experienced Contractors (Installers) skilled in the successful installation of specified materials and assemblies on similar projects for not less than five (5) years. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tile until building is enclosed, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, HVAC system is operating and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet the manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tile, install carpet tile before installing these items. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, non -prorated, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than ten percent (10%) loss of face fiber/yarn loss by weight normal use, edge raveling, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, delamination and stain resistance. 3. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from Date of Substantial Completion. 4. Static electricity will maintain static below 3.5 kv at 70° and 20% relative humidity. 5. Handle any adjustments during the warranty period within 15 days of written notice. 6. The backing structure will not delaminate from the face structure nor will there be any shrinkage affecting the performance of the face and backing structure for 15 years. C. Installer's Warranty: Contractor (Installer) shall fully guarantee installation against defects in materials, workmanship, seaming, and loss of adhesion for indicated warranty period. 1. During warranty period, Installer shall repair or replace all defective areas as directed and at no cost to the Owner. 2. Warranty Period: Not less than 1 year from Date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type indicated. 2. Attic stock shall be designated for use only after completion of Project and shall not be used for repair or replacement during warranty period. 3. Turn over all extra carpet tiles not needed to complete the installation. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers shall be the following, however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they are equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Mohawk Group. 2. Patcraft 2.2 CARPET —GENERAL A. Basis of Design: CP1 "Forward Vision Tile" B. Pattern: Mind Over Matter C. Size: 24" x 24" D. Product Construction: Textured Pattern Loop E. Fiber: Duracolor Premium Nylon F. Installation: Glue Down G. Backing: Ecoflex NXT H. Protective Treatment: Xtera I. Dye Method: Solution dyed/Yarn dyed J. Face Weight: 20 oz/yd2 K. Gauge: 1/12" L. Stitches per Inch: 10" M. Total Thickness: 0.124" N. Color: See Drawings for selection 2.3 CARPET —WALK -OFF A. Basis of Design: CP2 "Beyond the Door" B. Pattern: Paseo Modular C. Size: 24" x 24" D. Product Construction: Multi -Level Pattern Loop E. Fiber: Eco Solution Q Nylon F. Installation: Glue Down G. Backing: EcoWorx Tile H. Protective Treatment: SSP Shaw Soil Protection I. Dye Method: 100% Solution dyed J. Tufted Yarn Weight: 32 oz K. Gauge: 1/12" L. Stitches per Inch: 11" M. Total Thickness: 0.267" N. Color: See Drawings for selection 2.4 INSTALLATIONACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, antimicrobial agent, non -staining type to suit 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 1. VOC Limits: ASTM D5116 Standard Guide for Small -Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products for carpet tile and adhesives. 2. Adhesive: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, non -staining, pressure -sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated; that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and recommend by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installations. C. Resilient Molding and Metal Edge Accessories: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Johnsonite: Slim Line Transition Series b. Schluter: Schiene 2. Transition Leveling: "Leveler System" a. Provide at variations in elevation for a flush and level transition. 3. Transitions: a. Reducer/edge strips b. Transition/adaptors Strips 4. Materials: Vinyl and Anodized Aluminum. 5. Profile and Dimensions: As recommended by flooring installer. 6. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors 7. D. Metal Edge Accessories: 1. Provide reducer, edge strips, transition and adaptors strips as required to accommodate edge conditions and joints between different flooring materials. 2. Materials: Anodized Aluminum. 3. Finish: As selected by the Architect from full range of industry colors. 4. Anchoring: Mechanical fastening, glue down installation not permitted. 5. Profile and Dimensions: As recommended by flooring installer. 6. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet the performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet the installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in - Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet the manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)." B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer, with non -directional units and merge -able dyelots. C. Apply carpet tile adhesives by roller or spray method over entire surface to receive carpet tile, in accordance with carpet tile manufacturer's instructions. Allow adhesive to set and/or dry before initiation of carpet tile installation, per carpet tile manufacturer's instructions. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Where tile carpeting does not continue beyond a door to another room, extend carpet tile into door reveals so that carpet tile stops under door when door is in closed position. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non -staining marking device. G. Install pattern as indicated by Architect. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, and "Protection of Indoor Installations". C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer and as required by CRI, Protecting Indoor Installations. D. Tile carpeting manufacturer shall provide a representative to demonstrate cleaning and stain removal processes to personnel at: 1. 30 days prior to Substantial Completion; 2. At 6 months from date of Substantial Completion and; 3. 11 months from date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 75 21 — SOLID SURFACE WINDOW STOOLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Window sills 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ANSI —American National Standards Institute C. NEMA — American Society for Testing and Materials D. NSF International E. UL — Underwriters Laboratory F. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles of units, jointing, fastening, edge treatments and related items. B. Samples: Submit the following: 1. Submit full range of available colors and aggregates for selection purposes for Architect's selection. After initial selection, two sets, minimum 4" x 4" for each finished material for acceptance before proceeding with Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Manufacturer who fabricates countertops similar to work of this Project and have a minimum 5 years experience. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SOLID SURFACE WINDOW STOOLS 09 75 21 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. B. Store components indoors prior to installation. C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials. 1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. 2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be warranted. B. Manufacturer's warranty period: 1. Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion. 1.9 PERFORMANCE 1. Fire test response characteristics: a. Provide with the following Class A (Class 1) surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E84) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Corian by Dupont Company 2.2 MATERIAL A. Solid polymer components 1. Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum physical and performance properties specified. 2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch shall be repairable by sanding and/or polishing. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SOLID SURFACE WINDOW STOOLS 09 75 21 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Thickness: 3/4 inch C. Edge treatment: As elected by Architect. D. Corner Treatment: 1/2" radius 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint adhesive: Manufacturer's standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, nonporous joints B. Metal Stud Adhesive: Sill at metal studs shall be installed with "Latapoxy 310" as manufactured by Laticrete or equal as approved by sill manufacturer. 2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION A. Shop assembly 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions and technical bulletins. 2. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints. 3. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Smooth edges. c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. 2.5 FINISHES A. Select from the manufacturer's full range of color chart. 1. Color: a. To be selected by Architect from standard color chart. B. Finish: 1. Provide surfaces with a uniform finish. a. Semi -gloss; gloss range of 20-50. b. Verify with Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SOLID SURFACE WINDOW STOOLS 09 75 21 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. 1. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 2. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. a. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed. 3. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 4. Anchor securely to support studs with adhesive. 5. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. 3.3 REPAIR A. Repair or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep components clean during installation. B. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. END OF SECTION 09 75 21 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SOLID SURFACE WINDOW STOOLS 09 75 21 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 91 13 — EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specked herein, which includes, but is not limited to: Exterior paint and coating systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D16 — Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products B. ASTM D3359 — Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test C. ASTM D4442-92 — Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood Base Materials D. EPA — Method 24 E. GS-11, GC-03 F. NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) — Industrial Maintenance Painting G. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) — Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications H. Paint — Certified Product List - Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services I. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) — Architectural Painting Specifications Manual J. PDCA Standard P1-04 Touchup Painting and Damage Repair; Financial Responsibility K. PDCA Standard P5-04 Benchmark Sample Procedures for Paint and other Decorative Coating System L. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) — Steel Structures Painting Manual M. SSPC-SP 1 — Solvent Cleaning N. Modern Guide to Paint Specifications (current edition) — Standard Type 1 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: Product characteristics Surface preparation instructions and recommendations Primer requirements and finish specifications 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Storage and handling requirements 5. Application methods 6. Cautions and VOC levels, certification from manufacturer that products comply with local regulations controlling volatile organic compounds (VOC's). 7. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 8. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. B. Samples: 1. Submit a complete set of color chips representing the full range of manufacturer's color samples available. 2. Submit two 9" x 9" samples illustrating selected colors and textures for each type. 1.6 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Documents: Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as "Custodian Project Color and Product Information" by Sherwin-Williams or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule designating where each product/color/finish was used. It shall also include care and Cleaning instructions, touch up procedures, and a Product Data Sheet for each product used. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. and at exterior inside and outside corner. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5-years documented experience. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 0991 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years documented experience. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. B. Painting manufacturer and Contractor shall conform to Federal Rules and Regulations, Vol. 63, No. 176, September 11, 1998, State and local VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) Regulations in area where Project is located. Notify Architect in writing if variations to Specifications herein are required. VOC content shall be a maximum 350 gm/liter, unless noted otherwise C. VOC Content: Determine VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of solvent borne and waterborne paints and related coatings in accordance with EPA Method 24 or ASTM D3960. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. B. Storage: 1. Store paint materials in a properly ventilated area at the temperature range r required by the manufacturer. 2. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials and materials used with solvent -based materials in accordance with manufacturers and other regulating authorities having jurisdiction. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. The painting schedule is based on products manufactured by the Sherwin-Williams Company. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sherwin Williams 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. PPG Industries 2.2 COMPATIBILITY A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists. B. Paint materials and equipment shall be compatible in use; finish coats shall be compatible with prime coats; prime coats shall be compatible with the surface to be coated; tools and equipment shall be compatible with the coating to be applied. 1. Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristic of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Adhesion Test: Provide adhesion X-cut and tape test for primer adhesion per ASTM D3359 for every 200 s.f. of primed area. D. Thinners, when used, shall be only those thinners recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer of the material to be thinned. E. The term "paint," as used herein, includes enamels, paints, sealers, stains, fillers, emulsions, and other coatings, whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 2.3 ACCEPTANCE OF SPECIFICATION A. By submitting a proposal, the Contractor has reviewed the bidding documents with the painting subcontractor and accepts the Specifications as sufficient to produce approved painting results. If the painting subcontractor contends that the materials or number of coats specified will not produce satisfactory results, he shall so notify the Architect directly or indirectly through a Bidding Contractor 14 days prior to receipt of bids for proper action. B. The type of material to be used and the number of coats to be applied are listed in the 'Painting Schedule" of this section of these specifications. Also refer to Room Finish Schedule. 1. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 0991 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 2. The Architect shall not be limited in the number of colors selected for single space or for the complete Project. 2.4 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete (Cementitious Siding, Flexboard, Transite Board and Cast -In Place) 1. Latex Systems a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300 (3.2-dry) — MPI#3 2nd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8W150 Series— MPI#11 3rd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8W150Series (1.3-mil dry per coat) b. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300 (3.2-dry) — MPI#3 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 — MPI#153 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 (2.5-4.0-mil dry per coat) c. Satin Finish 1st Coat: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300 (3.2-dry) — MPI#3 2nd Coat: S-W SuperPaint Acrylic Satin, A89 Series — MPI#15 3rd Coat: S-W SuperPaint Acrylic Satin, A89 Series (1.4-mil dry per coat) 2. Clear Water Repellant a. Clear Finish 1st Coat: S-W Loxon7% Siloxane Water Repellant— MPI#117 2nd Coat: S-W Loxon7% Siloxane Water Repellant (50-200 sq ft/gal) B. Masonry (CMU, Split -Face, Scored, Smooth, High -Density, Low- Density, Fluted) 1. Latex Systems a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W150 (8-10.5mil dry) — MPI#4 X-Green 2nd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8W150 Series— MPI#11 3rd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8W150 Series (1.3-mil dry per coat) b. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W150 (8-10.5mil dry) - MPI#4 X-Green 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series — MPI#153 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series (2.54.0- mil dry per coat) c. Satin Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W150 (8-10.5mil dry) - MPI#4 X-Green 2nd Coat: S-W SuperPaint Acrylic Satin, A89 Series — MPI#15 3rd Coat: S-W SuperPaint Acrylic Satin, A89 Series (1.4-mil dry per coat) 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Clear Water Repellant a. Clear Finish 1st Coat: S-W Loxon7% Siloxane Water Repellant— MPI#117 2nd Coat: S-W Loxon7% Siloxane Water Repellant (50-200 sq ft/gal) C. Metal — (Aluminum, Galvanized) 1. Latex Systems a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5.0 - 10.0-mil dry) — MPI#107 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series — MPI#114 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series (2.5 - 4.0-mil dry per coat) b. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5.0 - 10.0-mil dry) — MPI#107 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series - MPI#114 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series (2.5 - 4.0- mil dry per coat) D. Metal — (Misc. Iron, Ornamental Iron, Structural Iron, Ferrous Metal) Latex Systems a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (2.0 - 4.0-mil dry) — MPI#107 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series — MPI#114 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series Series (2.5 - 4.0-mil dry per coat) b. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (2.0 - 4.0-mil dry) — MPI#107 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series — MPI#114 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series (2.5 - 4.0- mil dry per coat) E. Drywall (Gypsum Board, Exterior Drywall) Latex Systems a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Multipurpose Latex Primer/Sealer, B51-450 Series (1.4-mil dry) — MPI#17 2nd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8W150 Series— MPI#11 3rd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8W150 Series (1.3-mil dry per coat) b. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Multipurpose Latex Primer/Sealer, B51-450 Series (1.4-mil dry) — MPI#17 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series — MPI#153 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series (2.5-4.0- mil dry per coat) ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.5 MATERIALS — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Paints and Coatings - General 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory -mixed coatings. 2. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless approved in manufacturer's product instructions. 4. Confirm VOC's need by using the products MSDS sheets. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. 2.6 ACCESSORIES a. Coating application accessories: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required, per manufacturer's specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows (Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums): 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber -Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. E. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared; notify Owner's Representative of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. F. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner's Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. G. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. H. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 0991 13 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 12 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. C. The surface shall be dry and in sound condition. Remove all oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling paint, or other contamination to ensure good adhesion. D. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re -prime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish coat material with substrates primed by others. F. Impervious Surfaces: A. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. B. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Aluminum Surfaces: Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide, and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning. E. Block/Unit Masonry (Cinder and Concrete) A. Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. B. Surface must be free of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose cement, and hardeners. C. Let concrete and mortar cure at least 30 days at 75OF unless the manufactures products are designed for application prior to the 30-day period. D. The pH of the surface and moisture content must be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations prior to painting. F. Concrete: A. Remove contamination by washing with an appropriate cleaner, rinse thoroughly. B. The pH of the surface and moisture content shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations prior to painting. C. Allow the surface to thoroughly dry. D. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid and allow to dry before painting. E. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other voids under another section with a cement -patching compound of sufficient cohesive strength to support the specified coating system. G. Drywall: A. Shall be clean, dry and all dust removed prior to painting. B. All nail heads must be set and spackled. C. Tape all joints and cover with a joint compound. D. Spackled nail heads and tape joints shall be sanded smooth. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Galvanized Surfaces: A. Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to remove greases and oils. B. Apply a test area, priming as required. C. Allow the coating to cure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation before testing. D. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM 3359 Adhesion by Tape Test. E. If adhesion is poor, then notify Owner's representative that additional surface preparation under another section is necessary to remove pre -treatments or contaminants that interfere with adhesion of the coating. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. J. Plaster Cement Surfaces: A. Shall allow to thoroughly dry for at least 30 days before painting, unless the manufacturer's products are designed for application prior to the 30-day period. 1. Bare plaster must be cured and hard prior to painting. 2. Correct any soft, porous, or powdery plaster per requirements under another section of the specifications. K. Steel: Structural, Plate, etc.: A. Check other sections for additional surface preparation and shop priming of bare steel surfaces. B. Surface preparation shall include appropriate SSPC recommended methods. C. Shop primer shall be compatible with the field -applied coatings. D. Surfaces shall be dry and clean prior to the application of field -applied coatings. E. Remove all contaminants in accordance with SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning or SSPC Method recommended for condition of substrate. 3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. D. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat of lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same materials are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. F. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming surface treatment specified under other sections 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 0991 13 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Preparation and testing of existing painted surfaces, indicated to be repainted to accommodate new work, shall be performed as work of this section. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." B. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. C. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. D. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates E. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. F. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. G. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. H. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The right is reserved by Owner/Architect to invoke the following material testing procedure in addition to other tests indicated when and as often as he deems necessary during the period of field painting. B. Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used. Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. C. Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for one or each of the following characteristics: Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability, absorption, accelerated weathering, dry opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, color retention, alkali resistance, and quantitative materials analysis. D. A test patch for adhesion may also be required. The procedure for the test patch is as follows: 1. An area that represents the worst condition of the existing paint is selected. 2. The surface is prepared as appropriate for the repaint work. 3. The new coating or coating system is applied. 4. The coating is allowed to cure for at least 7 days at 75 degrees F. or according to the coating manufacturer's instructions. 5. After proper curing the adhesion is tested using an acceptable method such as the Adhesion by Tape Test (ASTM D 3359). 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 0991 13 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove noncomplying paint; pay for testing; repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint; remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are noncompatible. 3.6 EQUIPMENT A. Paint the following work where exposed. 1. Uninsulated metal and plastic piping. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. 3. Metal and plastic conduit. 3.7 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. C. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. D. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.8 TOUCH- UP AND DAMAGE REPAIR A. Contractor shall repair all deficiencies in coating application in accordance with PDCA Standard P1-04. B. Inform Owner's representative of all damage to properly painted surfaces and receive authorization prior to performing damage repair. 3.9 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES A. Indoor Air Quality: Provide temporary ventilation as specified in Section — Temporary Controls. B. Waste Management: As specified in Section - Temporary Construction Facilities and as follows: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 0991 13 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Coordinate with manufacturer for take -back program. Set. aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. Close and seal all partially used containers of pain to maintain quality as necessary for reuse. END OF SECTION 09 91 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 EXTERIOR PAINTING 0991 13 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 09 9123 — INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specked herein, which includes, but is not limited to: Interior paint and coating systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D16 — Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products B. ASTM D3359 — Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test C. ASTM D4442-92 — Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood Base Materials D. EPA — Method 24 E. GS-11, GC-03 F. NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) — Industrial Maintenance Painting G. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) — Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications H. Paint — Certified Product List - Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services I. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) — Architectural Painting Specifications Manual J. PDCA Standard P1-04 Touchup Painting and Damage Repair; Financial Responsibility K PDCA Standard 135-04 Benchmark Sample Procedures for Paint and other Decorative Coating System L. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) — Steel Structures Painting Manual M. SSPC-SP 1 — Solvent Cleaning N. Modern Guide to Paint Specifications (current edition) — Standard Type 1 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Product characteristics 2. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations 3. Primer requirements and finish specifications 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Storage and handling requirements 5. Application methods 6. Cautions and VOC levels, certification from manufacturer that products comply with local regulations controlling volatile organic compounds (VOC's). 7. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 8. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. B. Samples: 1. Submit a complete set of color chips representing the full range of manufacturer's color samples available. 2. Submit two 9" x 9" samples illustrating selected colors and textures for each type. 1.6 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Documents: Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as "Custodian Project Color and Product Information" by Sherwin-Williams or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule designating where each product/color/finish was used. It shall also include care and Cleaning instructions, touch up procedures, and a Product Data Sheet for each product used. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5-years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5-years documented experience. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. B. Painting manufacturer and Contractor shall conform to Federal Rules and, Regulations, Vol. 63, No. 176, September 11, 1998, State and local VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) Regulations in area where Project is located. Notify Architect in writing if variations to Specifications herein are required. 1. VOC content shall be a maximum 350 gm/liter, unless noted otherwise C. VOC Content: Determine VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of solvent borne and waterborne paints and related coatings in accordance with EPA Method 24 or ASTM D3960. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. B. Storage: 1. Store paint materials in a properly ventilated area at the temperature range r required by the manufacturer'. 2. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials and materials used with solvent -based materials in accordance with manufacturer's and other regulating authorities having jurisdiction. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Provide lighting level of 80 foot-candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. The painting schedule is based on products manufactured by the Sherwin-Williams Company. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Industries 2.2 COMPATIBILITY A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists. B. Paint materials and equipment shall be compatible in use; finish coats shall be compatible with prime coats; prime coats shall be compatible with the surface to be coated; tools and equipment shall be compatible with the coating to be applied. 1. Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristic of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Adhesion Test: Provide adhesion X-cut and tape test for primer adhesion per ASTM D3359 for every 200 s.f. of primed area. D. Thinners, when used, shall be only those thinners recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer of the material to be thinned. E. The term "paint," as used herein, includes enamels, paints, sealers, stains, fillers, emulsions, and other coatings, whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 2.3 ACCEPTANCE OF SPECIFICATION A. By submitting a proposal, the Contractor has reviewed the bidding documents with the painting subcontractor and accepts the Specifications as sufficient to produce approved painting results. If the painting subcontractor contends that the materials or number of coats specified will not produce satisfactory results, he shall so notify the Architect directly or indirectly through a Bidding Contractor 14 days prior to receipt of bids for proper action. B. The type of material to be used and the number of coats to be applied are listed in the "Painting Schedule" of this section of these specifications. Also refer to Room Finish Schedule. 1. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 2. The Architect shall not be limited in the number of colors selected for single space or for the complete Project. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.4 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete (Walls, Ceilings, Poured, Precast, Cement Board, and Cast -In Place) Latex Systems a. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300 (8-mil wet, 3.2-dry) — MPI #3 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series — MPI #153 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series (2.5 - 4- mil dry per coat) 2. Epoxy System (Water Base) a. Eg-Shel Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 / B73V300 — MPI #254X-Green 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 / B73V300 - (2.0 — 4.0-mil dry per coat) B. Masonry (CMU, Split -Face, Scored, Smooth, High -Density, Low- Density, Fluted) 1. Latex Systems a. Eggshell/Satin Finish 1st Coat: S-W Loxon® Block Surfacer, A24W200 (8-mil dry) — MPI#4 2nd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series — MPI #144 X- Green 3rd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series (1.6-mil dry per coat) 2. Water Epoxy System (Water Base) a. Eg-Shel Finish 1st Coat: S-W Loxon® Block Surfacer, A24W200 (8-mil dry) — MPI#4 2st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 / B73V300 — MPI #254X-Green 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 / B73V300 (2.0 — 4.0-mil dry per coat) C. Metal — (Aluminum, Galvanized) Latex Systems a. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (2.0 — 4.0-mil dry per coat) — MPI #107 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series — MPI #153 3rd Coat:S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series (2.5 - 4.0- mil dry per coat) D. Metal — (Galvanized; Ceiling, Ductwork) 1. Dryfall Waterborne Systems a. Eggshell Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dry -Fall Eg-Shel, B42W82 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dry -Fall Eg-Shel, B42W82 (1.9 — 2.9-mil dry per coat) 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Metal — (Structural Steel Columns, Joists, Trusses, Beams, Miscellaneous & Ornamental Iron, Structural Iron, Ferrous Metal) 1. Latex Systems a. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (2.0 — 4.0-mil dry) — MPI #107 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series — MPI #153 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series (2.5 - 4.0 mils dry per coat) b. Eg-Shel/Satin Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (2.0 — 4.0-mil dry) — MPI#107 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel Coating, B66W1250 Series — MPI #151X-Green 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel Coating, B66W1250 Serie (2.5 - 4.0-mil dry per coat) 2. Epoxy Systems (Water Base) a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5.0 — 10.0-mil dry) — MPI #107 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B73-300/ B73V300 — MPI #254X-Green 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B73-300/ B73V300 (2.0 - 4.0-mil dry per coat) F. Wood (Walls, Ceilings, Doors, Trim) Latex Systems a. Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28WB111 (4-mil wet, 1.8- mil dry) — MPI # N/A 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series — MPI #114 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series (2.5 — 4.0-mil dry per coat) b. Semi -Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28W8111 (4-mil wet, 1.8- mil dry) — MPI# N/A 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series — MPI #153 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series (2.5 — 4.0-mil dry per coat) c. Eg-Shel/Satin Finish 1st Coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, 1328W8111 (4-mil wet, 1.8- mil dry) — MPI# N/A 2nd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series — MPI #N/A 3rd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series (1.6- mil dry per coat) 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Stain Systems Satin Finish 1st Coat: S-W 61807000 Minwax Water Based Wood Stain 2nd Coat: S-W 61807000 Minwax Water Based Wood Stain 3rd Coat: S-W A-67F1 Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, Satin Clear H. Drywall (Walls, Ceiling, etc.) 1. Latex Systems a. Eg-Shel/Satin Finish 1st Coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28W8111 (4-mil wet, 1.8-mil dry) — MPI #N/A 2nd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series — MPI #144 X- Green 3rd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series (1.6-mil dry per coat) b. Flat Finish Ceiling Only 1st Coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28W8111 (1.8-mil dry) — MPI #N/A 2nd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series — MPI #53X-Green 3rd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series (1.6-mil dry per coat) 2. Epoxy System (Water Base) a. Eg-Shel Finish 1st Coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, 628W8111 (1.8-mil dry) — MPI #N/A 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 / B73V300 — MPI #254X-Green 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 / B73V300 (2.0- 4.0-mil dry per coat) 2.5 MATERIALS — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Paints and Coatings - General 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory -mixed coatings. 2. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless approved in manufacturer's product instructions. 4. Confirm VOC's need by using the products MSDS sheets. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. 2.6 ACCESSORIES 1. Coating application accessories: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required, per manufacturer's specifications. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows (Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums): 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber -Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. E. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared; notify Owner's Representative of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. F. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner's Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. G. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. H. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. The surface shall be dry and in sound condition. Remove all oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling paint, or other contamination to ensure good adhesion. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re -prime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish coat material with substrates primed by others. F. Impervious Surfaces: A. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. B. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Aluminum Surfaces: Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide, and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning. F. Block/Unit Masonry (Cinder and Concrete) A. Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. B. Surface must be free of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose cement, and hardeners. C. Let concrete and mortar cure at least 30 days at 75°F unless the manufactures products are designed for application prior to the 30-day period. D. The pH of the surface and moisture content must be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations prior to painting. G. Concrete: A. Remove contamination by washing with an appropriate cleaner, rinse thoroughly. B. The pH of the surface and moisture content shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations prior to painting. C. Allow the surface to thoroughly dry. D. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid and allow to dry before painting. E. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other voids under another section with a cement -patching compound of sufficient cohesive strength to support the specified coating system. H. Drywall: A. Shall be clean, dry and all dust removed prior to painting. B. All nail heads must be set and spackled. C. Tape all joints and cover with a joint compound. D. Spackled nail heads and tape joints shall be sanded smooth. Galvanized Surfaces: A. Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to remove greases and oils. B. Apply a test area, priming as required. C. Allow the coating to cure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation before testing. D. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM 3359 Adhesion by Tape Test. E. If adhesion is poor, then notify Owner's representative that additional surface preparation under another section is necessary to remove pre -treatments or contaminants that interfere with adhesion of the coating. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. K. Plaster Surfaces: A. Shall allow to thoroughly dry for at least 30 days before painting, unless the manufacturer's products are designed for application prior to the 30-day period. 1. Bare plaster must be cured and hard prior to painting. 2. Correct any soft, porous, or powdery plaster per requirements under another section of the specifications. L. Steel: Structural, Plate, etc.: A. Check other sections for additional surface preparation and shop priming of bare steel surfaces. B. Surface preparation shall include appropriate SSPC recommended methods. C. Shop primer shall be compatible with the field -applied coatings. D. Surfaces shall be dry and clean prior to the application of field -applied coatings. E. Remove all contaminants in accordance with SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning or SSPC Method recommended for condition of substrate. M. Wood: A. Shall be clean and dry, then prime and paint as soon as possible. B. Scrape, sand, and spot prime knots and pitch streaks before a full priming coat is applied. C. Patch all nail holes and imperfections with a wood filler or putty and sand smooth after application of primer. D. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as hinge side face, unless otherwise indicated. E. Seal with shellac any marks, which may bleed through surface finishes. 3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. D. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat of lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same materials are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. F. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming surface treatment specified under other sections G. Preparation and testing of existing painted surfaces, indicated to be repainted to accommodate new work, shall be performed as work of this section. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in " MPI Manual." B. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. C. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. D. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. E. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. G. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. H. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The right is reserved by Owner/Architect to invoke the following material testing procedure in addition to other tests indicated when and as often as he deems necessary during the period of field painting. B. Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used. Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. C. Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for one or each of the following characteristics: Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability, absorption, accelerated weathering, dry opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, color retention, alkali resistance, and quantitative materials analysis. D. A test patch for adhesion may also be required. The procedure for the test patch is as follows: 1. An area that represents the worst condition of the existing paint is selected. 2. The surface is prepared as appropriate for the repaint work. 3. The new coating or coating system is applied. 4. The coating is allowed to cure for at least 7 days at 75 degrees F. or according to the coating manufacturer's instructions. 5. After proper curing the adhesion is tested using an acceptable method such as the Adhesion by Tape Test (ASTM D 3359). 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove noncomplying paint; pay for testing; repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint; remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are noncompatible. 3.6 EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, & 28 for schedule of color -coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. B. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering. C. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including both sides of panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal and plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal and plastic conduit. e. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including both side of panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal and plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal and plastic conduit. e. Duct, insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. f. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. g. Interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint. h. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. i. Other items as directed by Architect. 3.7 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. B. Provide 'Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. D. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.8 TOUCH- UP AND DAMAGE REPAIR A. Contractor shall repair all deficiencies in coating application in accordance with PDCA Standard P1-04. B. Inform Owner's representative of all damage to properly painted surfaces and receive authorization prior to performing damage repair. 3.9 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES A. Indoor Air Quality: Provide temporary ventilation as specified in Section — Temporary Controls. B. Waste Management: As specified in Section - Temporary Construction Facilities and as follows: 1. Coordinate with manufacturer for take -back program. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. Close and seal all partially used containers of pain to maintain quality as necessary for reuse. END OF SECTION 09 9123 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 -13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 10 14 16 — PLAQUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Plaques. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show plaque mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters, and layout for plaque at least half size. 4. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide products from a firm that makes the indicated products as a regular production item and with not less than ten (10) years experience. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of plaques that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLAQUES 10 14 16 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. 2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Gemini Incorporated 2. Metal Arts: Division of L&H Manufacturing Company 3. Mills Manufacturing 4. A.R.K. Ramos 5. Nelson -Harkins Industries 2.2 PLAQUES A. Cast Plaque: Plaque with background texture, border, and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Plaque Material: Cast bronze. 2. Plaque Thickness: 5/16". 3. Finishes: Pebble with polished surface. 4. Integral Metal Finish: Mill finish raised surface with black painted background or as indicated by the Architect. 5. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked -on clear gloss coating. 6. Size: 20" wide x 30" high. 7. Background Texture: Pebble. 8. Border Style: Square, polished. 9. Mounting: Rosette -head through fasteners, matching plaque finish. 10. Text and Typeface: Typeface as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 11. Copy: Raised. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, alloy recommended by manufacturer and finisher for finish indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of plaques, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: Exposed Metal -Fastener Components, General: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLAQUES 10 14 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Fabricated from brass metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper -resistant one -way -head slots unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard plaques according to requirements indicated. 1. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing. 2. Surface Finish: Surface free from porosity, burrs and rough spots with returns finished with fine-grain air blasted. 3. Raised Characters and Borders: Raised areas to be hand -tooled and buffed to produce polished finishes. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 FINISH A. Background Finish: Dark oxidized. B. Clear Organic Coating: Clear, waterborne, air -drying, acrylic lacquer called "Incralac"; specially developed for coating copper -alloy products; consisting of a solution of methyl methacrylate copolymer with benzotriazole to prevent breakdown of the film in UV light; shop applied in two uniform coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying between coats and without runs or other surface imperfections, to a total dry film thickness of 1 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of plaque work. B. Verify that plaque -support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate plaques without gaps or irregularities between backs of plaques and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLAQUES 10 14 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install plaques using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install plaques level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with plaque surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install plaques so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that plaque surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in plaque as template. Countersink holes in plaque if required. Place plaque in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed plaques and plaques that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace plaques with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as plaques are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of plaques according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain plaques in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10 14 16 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLAQUES 10 14 16 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 10 14 23 — PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Identification signage. b. Building Signage 1.3 REFERENCES A. ADAAG — Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. B. ANSI A117.1 — Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People C. NFPA 101 — 7.10.1.3 D. FAC — Florida Accessibility Code E. FBC — Florida Building Code, Chapter 11 and Section 423.14.2 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings. 1.6 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. C. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Sign USA B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Andco Industries, Inc. 2. APCO Graphics, Inc. 3. ASI Sign Systems 4. Best Sign Systems 5. Environmental Graphics, Inc. 6. InPro Corporation 7. Multi -Graphics, Inc. 2.2 FLORIDA AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer shall conform to tactile, Braille, letter size, and other requirements as required by Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction and ANSI A117.1. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. ADA requirements supersede technical specifications in this Section 2.3 SIGNS A. General; applies to all signs except as noted: Material shall be minimum 1/8" non -glare laminated acrylic stock with 3/8" decorative corners. a. Exterior signs — Shall be UV stable material of non -petroleum base phenolic resin using reverse engraving process to create the raised lettering, which is an integral part of the sign. b. Interior signs — Shall be using reverse engraving process to create the raised lettering, which is an integral part of the sign. c. Interior signs exposed to direct sun, shall be of same material as exterior signs. d. Paint shall be manufacturer's standard. i) Shall be low VOC ii) Shall be UV Stable iii) Shall be lead and chromate free iv) Minimum life expectancy of 10-years 2. Applied lettering not allowed. 3. Letters and background colors selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors 4. Mounting: a. Shall be with adhesives and non -removable oval head screws on exterior. b. Shall be double sided tape and silastic adhesive on the interior. c. Mount at locations as directed by Architect. d. Mount at 60" above finished floor to the center of the sign. 5. Letters: a. Letters and numbers shall have width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and stroke width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. b. Letters and numbers to be raised 1/32" and shall be Arial Narrow font with Grade 2 Braille. c. Pictograms shall have the equivalent verbal description directly below the pictogram. 6. Size shall be indicated on Drawing. 7. All signs shall comply with applicable codes. B. Room Name and Number Signs 1. Provide signs for each room or space as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide additional sign for each door in a space with multiple doors. C. Capacity Signs (Maximum Capacity) 1. For all rooms with a capacity of 50 persons or more as shown on the drawings or other rooms as indicated on the plans. 2. Furnish and install signage, 3" high by length required, reading "MAXIMUM CAPACITY". 3. Allow for 3-digits maximum after "maximum capacity", copy as shown on the drawings. D. Toilet Room Handicapped Signs Furnish and install one sign depicting National Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) at each toilet room, equipped with facilities for the handicapped. a. Size shall be 6" W x 10" H minimum or as indicated on the Drawings. b. Pictogram shall be on a 6" x 6" field minimum and shall comply with applicable codes. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Fire Rated/Smoke Barrier Partition Labeling Field label all fire rated walls and smoke barriers above ceiling level, with verbiage as follows: a. Provide minimum 1" high block lettering stenciled on wall above finished ceiling, if in a storage, mechanical, electrical, or similar unfinished room, install at approximately 84 inches above floor. b. Verbiage shall be "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER — PROTECT ALL OPENINGS". C. Repeat verbiage at intervals not exceeding 30' - 0" o.c. measured horizontally along the wall or partition. F. Storage Signs 1. Provide and install at mechanical and electrical rooms a sign mounted on the door to read as follows: " STORAGE NOT ALLOWED" 2. Signs shall be matte acrylic plastic, red background with white letters 3 " high by width needed for copy and Braille, with 3/8" radius corners. G. Mechanical, Electrical, Data, and Similar Rooms 1. Provide a sign saying "NO STORAGE" meeting the General requirements. 2. If these rooms have pair of doors, provide sign saying "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN CLOSED AND LATCHED TOP AND BOTTOM, EXCEPT DURING THE TRANSFER OF EQUIPMENT". a. Sign shall have 1" high block letters and be permanently attached (Attached in way as to maintain the rating of the door) to the inactive door near the latch side 60 inches from finished floor to center of sign. b. Braille not required for this sign. H. Stair Signs 1. Provide tactile signs at each doorway leading to exit stairway. 2. Wording on sign: "EXIT" Directional Signage Provide directional signage to be provided as follows: a. To Main Office with an arrow (2 required) Evacuation Plan (Emergency Exit Route) Provide frame for a graphic floor plan in each occupied room. a. Provide a clear removable plastic cover over each sign. b. Sign cover will only be removable using a tool. 2.4 EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNAGE A. Provide letters meeting the following requirements: 1. Type: Upper case Arial Narrow (verify with Architect) with no abbreviations. Provide quantity of numbers indicated on the drawings. Style final selection by the Architect. 2. Text and Letters: Width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Material: 514 Alloy 4. Finish: Satin Polish Aluminum with a "Durepox" protective finish. Final selection by the Architect. 4. Text for facility name: i) 20" high (verify with Architect). ii) 1" depth iii) Provide letters for facility name and as indicated. 5. Sign Anchors: Stainless steel drilled in place concealed anchors minimum 2 anchors per letter. 8. Material: Cast high-grade aluminum, free of gas holes and other imperfections. 9. Caulk: Seal perimeter of each letter to wall or frame with thin neat bead of clear silicone sealant. 10. Install using manufacturers approved anchoring method to meet ASTM 7 wind load requirements. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Stainless -steel devices unless otherwise indicated. a. Fastener Heads: Use oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper - resistant Allen -head or spanner -head slots unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign -support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Room -Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as indicated and according to accessibility standard. C. Provide fire rated/smoke barrier partitioning labeling at rated partitions. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10 14 23 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 10 14 30 — CAST STONE SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Cast stone signage 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast -stone unit. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. C. Samples: 1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364. B. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according to ASTM C 1364. Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast -stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute the Architectural Precast Association or the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE SIGNAGE 10 14 30 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship cast -stone units in suitable packs or pallets. Lift with wide -belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast -stone units if required, using dollies with wood supports. Store cast -stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Northfield Block Co. an Oldcastle Company 2.2 CAST -STONE UNITS A. Basis of Design: "Cordova Stone" B. Size: 10'-10" wide by T-4" high. C. Border: Match border at adjacent library facility. D. Color: Alabaster. E. Cast -Stone Unit: Comply with ASTM C 1364. F. Characters 1. Style: Times New Roman 2. Text Size: 12" high 3. Height Ratio and Strike Width: To match text at adjacent library facility. G. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. H. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE SIGNAGE 10 14 30 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater. 2.3 CAST -STONE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast -stone color indicated. B. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33/C 33M; gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast -stone textures and colors. C. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33/C 33M, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast -stone textures and colors. D. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water - reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Stainless steel through fastener suitable for substrate connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ANCHORING SIGNAGE A. Anchor stone signage to backup wall with anchors designed for substrate conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum. END OF SECTION 10 14 30 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CAST STONE SIGNAGE 10 14 30 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 10 21 13 — TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Toilet enclosures b. Urinal screens 1.3 REFERENCES A. Florida Building Code, Chapter 11 — Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction B. ANSI A117.1 — Safety Standards for the Handicapped C. ASTM A167 — Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip D. ASTM B86 — Standard Specification for Zinc and Zinc -Aluminum (ZA) Alloy Foundry and Die Castings E. ASTM B221 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes F. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. NFPA —101 Life Safety Code H. NFPA 286 — Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth I. FBC — Florida Building Code J. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment -mounted grab bars. 2. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection. 1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 26 — 75 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 25 year limited warranty for panels, doors, and stiles against breakage, corrosion, delamination, and defects in factory workmanship. Manufacturer's standard 1 year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Scranton Products. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1021 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 2.2 GENERAL A. Basis of Design: "Hiny Hiders." - B. Door, Panel, Screen and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high -density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. C. High density polyethylene (HDPE), fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming single 1" thick pane with edges rounded to 1/4-inch radius. D. Waterproof and nonabsorbent, with self-lubricating surface, resistant to marks by pens, pencils, markers, and other writing instruments. E. Fire hazard classification: Class flame spread/smoke developed rating, tested to ASTM E84. 2.3 PARTITIONS A. Design Type: 1. Standard Height. a) Door/Panel Height: 55 inches. b) Floor Clearance: 14 inches. B. Mounting: 1. Floor -mounted, overhead -braced. a) Pilaster Height: 82 inches. 2.4 URINAL SCREENS A. Wall Mounted 1. Screen Height: 48 inches high by 12 inches deep. 2. Floor Clearance: 14 inches. 2.5 COMPONENTS A. Doors and Dividing Panels: Fasten aluminum heat -sink fastened to bottom edges. B. Wall Brackets: 54 inches long, stainless steel double bar continuous bracket, fastened to pilasters and panels with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. C. Urinal Wall Bracket: 48 inches long, stainless steel double bar continuous bracket, fastened to pilasters and panels with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Overhead Brace: Heavy-duty extruded aluminum, anti -grip design, clear anodized finish, fastened to headrail bracket with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt and at top of pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws. E. Headrail Brackets: 20 gage stainless steel, satin finish, secured to wall with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws. F. Heat -Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid -polymer components to prevent burning. 2.6 HARDWARE A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Hinges: Continuous hinge fabricated. from stainless steel, wrap -around flanges, through bolted to doors and pilasters with stainless steel, Torx head sex bolts. Hinges operate on field -adjustable nylon cams, field adjustable in 30 degree increments. 2. Latch and Keeper: Stainless steel surface -mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 3. Coat Hook: Stainless steel combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Stainless steel rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors and entrance -screen doors. 5. Door Pull: Stainless steel pull unit at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. 6. Equip outswing handicapped doors with second door pull and door stop. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221. C. Stainless -Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Floor Mount Overhead -Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors to suit conditions. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 32-inch- wide, out -swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. 2.9 FINISH A. Color and Pattern: Color and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Floor Mount Overhead -Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10 21 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 10 28 00 —TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Toilet accessories. b. Underlavatory guards. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Florida Building Code, Chapter 11 — Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction B. ANSI A117.1 — Safety Standards for the Handicapped C. ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities July 23, 2004 — Provisions for Children D. ASTM A123 /A123M-02 — Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products E. ASTM A167-99 — Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip F. ASTM A269-02 — Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service G. ASTM A794-97 — Standard Specifications for Commercial Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled H. ASTM B456-95 — Electro-deposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium I. OSHA Department of Labor CFR 29, section 1910.141: Sanitation. J. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions gauges, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Include electrical characteristics. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Include maintenance instructions and manufacturer's list of replaceable parts and service recommendations. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor's Qualifications: Work shall be performed by firm that is skilled in the successful installation of specified materials and assemblies with not less than five (5) years experience. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide products from a firm that makes the indicated products as a regular production item and has the capability of providing quantity of units so as not to delay the progress of work at Project site. C. Inserts and Anchorages: Provide accessory Manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay. D. Field Verification: Before start of installation of wall finishes, installer shall verify that required blocking has been installed in proper locations. Verify that installation of finishes and required anchoring devices are complete. E. Industry Standards: Work shall comply with applicable provisions of the following: F. OSHA Department of Labor CFR 29, section 1910.141: Sanitation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other Work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Toilet Accessory Warranty: Provide manufacturer's one (1) year warranty from the Date of Substantial Completion, against defects in material and workmanship, unless otherwise indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Mirror Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within 15 years from the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products are based on Bobrick, Inc. as the primary manufacturer and other manufacturers maybe be as indicated on the drawings however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. To be provided at all exposed piping. Provide Truebro Lav Guard 2 as manufacturer by IPS Corp. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/13 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot -dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized -Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper - and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 -3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.4 FABRICATION A. No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating Manufacturer's name and product model number. B. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all - welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length, stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. D. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to Manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 IV, complying with ASTM F446. D. Provide all items and accessories as required for a complete and total installation in every respect, whether or not specified or indicated on the Drawings. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. SCHEDULE NEXT PAGE 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is based on products manufactured by Bobrick except as otherwise indicated. B. Refer to svmbols on Drawinos. SYMBOL CATALOG DESCRIPTION 1A Bobrick B-290 1830 Stainless Steel Mirror, 18" x 30" 1 B Custom Mirror 2A B-306 Soap Dispenser — Recessed 2B B-2112 Soap Dispenser — Surface Mounted 3 B-369 Paper Towel Dispenser — Waste Receptacle — Recessed 4 B-270 Sanitary Napkin Disposal — Surface Mounted 5 B-301 Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser — Surface Mounted 6 B-4288 Toilet Tissue Dispenser — Surface Mounted 7A Bobrick B-6806.99x36" 1-1/2" diameter peened grip Horizontal Grab Bar with concealed mounting; stainless steel, straight. 713 Bobrick B-6806.99x42" 1-1/2" diameter peened grip Horizontal Grab Bar with concealed mounting: stainless steel, straight. 8 B-7671 Robe Hooks 9 B-239 Surface Mounted Stainless Steel Mop Holder (Provide at each Custodial Closet and as indicated, 36" long.) 10 Excel XL-SB Electric Hand Dryer — Xlerator 11 Koala Kare KB110-SSRE Baby Changing Station — Recessed C. General Notes 1. Soap Unit to be secured to wall above lavatory with two screws. Exact location shall be specified by Owner at the time of installation. Coordinate the location of this dispenser so that no conflict occurs at either the wall mounted mirror above the lavatory or the cold water faucet assembly mounted on the deck of the lavatory. 2. One (1) mop holder shall be provided at each custodial sink and mounted at 60" AFF. END OF SECTION 10 28 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 10 44 00 — FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Fire protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. b. Portable fire extinguishers C. Fire extinguisher brackets 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate B. ASTM B221 — Standard Specification for Aluminum -and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tub C. ASTM EE814 — Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Penetrations of Firestop Systems D. Carbon Dioxide Types UL 154 E. Dry Chemical Types UL 299 F. Water Types UL 626 G. Halon Types UL 1093 H. UL 92-Fire Extinguisher & Booster Hose I. UL 711 — Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers J. NFPA 2001, Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems K. Portable fire extinguishers used to comply with this standard shall be listed and labeled and meet or exceed all the requirements of Fire Test Standards UL 711 L. FFPC — Florida Fire Prevention Code M. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square. D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for all portable fire extinguishers and fire blankets. B. Use skilled workers thoroughly trained and experienced in the crafts and are familiar with the specifications and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section. C. Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets, fire blankets, and accessories by single manufacturer. D. The identification of the listing and labeling organization, the fire test, and the performance standard that the fire extinguisher meets or exceeds shall be clearly marked on each fire extinguisher. E. Installer Qualifications: Shall be State of Florida certified. Minimum of five (5) years experience. F. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years manufacturing specified components. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Coordination 1. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. 2. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguisher cabinets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Potter Roemer LLC. 4. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 2.2 LEGEND A. FEC — Fire Extinguisher Cabinet B. FE — Fire Extinguisher Bracket 2.3 EXTINGUISHERS A. Multi -purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, Enameled steel tank with pressure gauge size and classification as scheduled, or if not scheduled, provide 2A-10BC units. B. Wet Chemical Foam Type: UL 299, designed to meet K class listing, Stainless steel tank with pressure gage; size and classification as scheduled. C. Extinguisher Finish: 1. Multi -purpose units: Provide heavy-duty, DOT steel cylinders with corrosion and impact resistant polyester/epoxy paint finish. 2. Gaseous and wet chemical units: Provide stainless steel, satin chrome finish. 2.4 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Basis of Design: "Model AL2409-R4" B. Metal: Use a formed sheet steel, galvanized 18-gage thick base metal. C. Configuration: Semi -recessed type, per drawing details and locations, sized to accommodate required extinguishers, combination fire extinguisher and fire blanket cabinet and accessories. D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Exposed Trim: One piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). a. Rolled Edge Trim: 3-1/2 inch backbend depth (semi -recessed) surface. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows: 1. Aluminum sheet. F. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, as follows: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Vertical duo panel with frame. G. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Provide minimum 1/2 inch thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and hollow metal design. H. Door: Aluminum sheet. I. Door Glazing: Clear transparent acrylic sheet. J. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet and extinguisher size and weight. K. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. 1. Form perimeter -trim and door stiles. L. Pre -drill the unit for anchors and accessories. M. Hinge doors for 1800 opening with continuous piano hinge. 1. Provide nylon self-adjusting roller catch. 2. Provide recessed door pull. N. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing. O. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. 1. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER". a. Location: Applied to cabinet door. b. Application Process: Pressure -sensitive vinyl letters. C. Lettering Color: Red. d. Orientation: Vertical. P. Fire Rated Cabinets: Construct fire -rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428 inch thick, cold -rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8" thick fire -barrier material. Provide UL Certification 2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Wall and Cabinet Brackets: Shall be designed to fit extinguishers and shall hold extinguishers firmly and securely in place but shall provide for easy removal. Model #846. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221. C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive handle. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. D. Brackets and cabinets shall be designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher and shall be size required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated. 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. C. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. Color and Gloss: White. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1. 2.11 COLOR A. White cabinets and red extinguishers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Verify all rough openings, dimensions and clearances are the correct size and in the correct location prior to installation. B. Examine the areas and conditions of the work in this Section. 1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are correct. C. Verify servicing, charging and tagging of all fire extinguishers. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semi -recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 48 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Provide inside latch. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: In corridors only, shall be fire -rated with UL listing mark, with fire - resistance rating of wall where it is to be installed. Cabinet box (tub) shall be cold rolled steel, fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit exposed trim style. Cabinet door shall be stainless steel, vertical duo -door with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door, tempered safety glass, and pull handle. Lettering shall comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing and location. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Provide occupancy hazard protection with fire extinguishers suitable for such Class A, B, C, D, or K fire potentials as might be present. Class K shall be provided in all food preparation areas. E. Install fire extinguishers in accordance with NFPA 10. F. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. G. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings in strict accordance with NFPA 10, the original design, the approved Shop Drawings and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect and authorizing agencies, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. Secure rigidly in place. H. Do not install extinguishers until Substantial Completion inspection date. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets or on wall brackets. Inspection tags shall be current as of the date of Substantial Completion and good for 1-year. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory - finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10 44 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 10 71 00 — SUN CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide tabor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: Sun control devices 1.3 REFERENCES A. AA (Aluminum Association) - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. AAMA Series number 11 - Design Wind Loads for Buildings and Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Testing C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures D. NAAMMM - Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products E. ASTM B26 - Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings F. ASTM B85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings G. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate H. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes I. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire J. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum -and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes K. ASTM D1730 - Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Surfaces for Painting L. ASTM D3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test M. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, Nondestructive Examination N. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code Bundled Set B O. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedure for Superior Performing Organic Coating on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels P. FBC - Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUMITTALS A. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for items required. 1. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. 2. Indicate that installer has received copy of manufacturer's instructions. B. Submit shop drawings including cross sections indicating louver angles and spacing, elevations, details of construction, location and installation of hardware, details of reinforcement, joints, anchorage and connections. Provide product approval information. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Provide documentation from manufacturer and installer of having been in business continuously for the last five -years under the same company name. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Approvals: Manufacturer submit documentation that product complies with and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall be ten (10) years against defects in materials and workmanship. 1.6 PERFORMANCE A. Delegated -Design: Provide delegated design services including calculations and shop drawings for load bearing items to comply with performance requirements, applicable code requirements and design criteria signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Florida. B. Approvals: Manufacturer shall certify that product complies with and has been tested and approved in compliance with Florida Product Approval or Miami Dade NOA and applicable requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Awning Works, Inc. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Briscoe Shutters, Inc. 2.2 AWNING A. Basis of Design: "Standing Seam Aluminum Awning" B. Sun control devices shall be standing seam style fixed shade devices. C. Frame and vent members shall be extruded aluminum shapes of 6063-T5 alloy. 1. Perimeter trim members shall be minimum 2" x 2" extruded aluminum angle. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Roof Panel: 0.032" aluminum standing seam panel with striations. E. Awning Size: As indicated on Drawings. F. Awning Mounting Angle: As indicated on Drawings. G. Frame: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 0.125" extruded square aluminum tube. H. Fasteners: Nonmagnetic stainless steel warranted by manufacturer to be non -corrosive and compatible with the aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and others components of the sun control devices units. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable. a. Match finish of adjoining metal. 2. Anchor the frame to the structure using fasteners as specified in the manufacturer's instructions and the product approval details. a. If anchor head is exposed, provide in a color that matches the window frame. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION AND FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabrication of the frame to frame attachments shall be welded, screw attachments are not acceptable. B. Frame: 1. Fabricate perimeter frame with miter joints and fully weld all seams. 2. Center mullions shall be fully welded to the perimeter frame. 3. Flush grind and dress all welds. C. Panels shall be designed as interlocking aluminum members, except for sheet designs and louvers with mechanical fasteners shop applied whenever possible to provide structural integrity for the completed assembly. Completed sections will be field assembled. D. Drainage: Water shall drain from covered surfaces to the front edge of the canopy, into integral fascia gutter or directed to the rear for ground level discharge via one or more designated downspouts. E. Coordination of Fabrication: Verify actual window openings where sun control devices will be provided by accurate field measurement before fabrication and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 2.4 FINISH A. Aluminum Surfaces: Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. B. High -Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install sun control devices, mounting hardware in accordance with the details shown on the drawings, approved shop drawings, and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions and product approval requirements. 1. Set sun control devices plumb, level, and true line, without warp or rack of frames. 2. Provide proper and acceptable separation of aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action. 3. Set sun control devices true in exact alignment with the surrounding building materials and construction. 4. Anchor units securely in place in strict accordance with the design, structural requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 10 71 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 10 75 00 — FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Ground -mounted flagpoles made from aluminum. b. Accessories 1.3 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M246/M246M — Standard Specification for steel sheet, metallic -coated and polymer pre -coated for corrugated steel pipes B. ASTM A53/A53M Pipe — Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless C. ASTM Al23/A123M — Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products D. ASTM A790/A790M — Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferrite/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe E. ASTM B221 — Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube F. ASTM 13241/6241 M — Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube G. CDA (Copper Development Association) — Handbook H. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product data on pole, accessories, and configurations. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. 1. Include section, and details of foundation system for ground -mounted flagpoles 2. Provide engineered shop drawings indicate detailed dimensions, base details, anchor requirements, and imposed loads. C. Delegated -Design: Provide design services, calculations and shop drawings for delegated design requirements complying with code requirements, performance requirements and design criteria signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Florida. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLAGPOLES 10 75 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpole as complete unit, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. 1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to the following design criteria: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural drawings and in compliance with FBC and ASCE 7. 2. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent. B. Delegated -Design: Provide design services, calculations and shop drawings for delegated design requirements complying with code requirements, performance requirements and design criteria signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Florida. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. American Flagpole; a Kearney -National Inc. company. 2. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP. 2.2 FLAGPOLES A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2. Provide flush hairline joints using self -aligning, snug -fitting, internal sleeves. B. Exposed Height: 30 feet. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLAGPOLES 10 75 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide one-piece cone tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/13 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. D. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated -steel foundation tube, not less than 0.064-inch- nominal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize steel to G90 after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. 1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. 2. Interior Finish: Treat the interior to prevent corrosion. 3. Lightning Ground Rod: Copper 3/4" diameter rod of a designed length for grounding. E. Cast -Metal Shoe Base: Provide units made from aluminum with same finish and color as flagpoles. For anchor -bolt mounting; provide with anchor bolts. F. Flagpole Interior Finish: Treat the interior to prevent corrosion. G. Quantity: One (1) pole. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard 6" diameter spun spun aluminum flush -seam ball, match flagpole -butt diameter and with gold anodic finish. 0.063-inch spun aluminum with gold anodic finish. B. External Halyard, Cam Cleat System: Continuous 3/8 inch diameter, white braided polypropylene halyard; cam cleat; and non -foiling revolving truck assembly of cast aluminum material with stainless steel ball bearings and with plastic -coated counterweight and sling. C. Provide external 9" cast aluminum cleat with fasteners with aluminum cleat cover box with built- in hinge and secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole. Mount 28" above grade. 1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide four stainless steel swivel snap hooks per halyard to accommodate two flags, provide with neoprene or vinyl covers. 2. Halyard Covers: 2" channel, 60 inches long, finish to match flagpole. 3. Halyard Flag Clips: Injection -molded, UV -stabilized, acetyl resin (Delrin). Clips attach to flag and have two eyes for inserting both runs of halyards, furnish two per halyard. 2.4 FLAGS A. Three (3) flags shall be 8 x 5 feet size by the Owner. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide Type 316 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use B. Non -shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, non -staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLAGPOLES 10 75 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate. D. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate. E. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single -component neutral- and basic -curing silicone joint sealant complying with requirements in specification section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (non -traffic) and for Use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, for Use O. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.6 FINISH A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Aluminum 1. Flag Pole Finish: Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 2. Finial Ball Finish: Gold Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M32C22A43 Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker; gold color. D. Steel Finishes 1. Flagpole Interior Finish: Apply one coat of bituminous paint on interior of flagpole or otherwise treat to prevent corrosion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including foundation; accurate placement, pattern, orientation of anchor bolts, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below -grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLAGPOLES 10 75 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRH ILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting. D. Place concrete, as specified in Specification Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist -cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use non -staining curing compound. E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.3 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Ground Set: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure. Install flagpole, plumb, in foundation tube. C. Foundation Tube: Place tube seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. D. Baseplate: Cast anchor bolts in concrete foundation. Install baseplate on washers placed over leveling nuts on anchor bolts and adjust until flagpole is plumb. After flagpole is plumb, tighten retaining nuts and fill space under baseplate solidly with non -shrink, nonmetallic grout. Finish exposed grout surfaces smooth and slope 45 degrees away from edges of baseplate. END OF SECTION 10 75 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FLAGPOLES 10 75 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 11 31 00 — RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Appliances 2. Provide accessories and necessary mechanical and electrical connections as shown on the plans, specified, and as required for complete operating systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer literature including the model number, material, finishes, and details of construction and installation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certification Labels: Provide residential appliances which complies with standards and bears certification labels as follows: 1. Energy Ratings: Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission. 2. UL Standards: Provide residential appliances with UL labels. 3. Uniformity: Provide residential appliances by single manufacturer to the greatest extent possible for the entire project B. A Contractor who has a minimum of five -years experience in the field, and can demonstrate successful completion of similar projects must perform installation of specified work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding: ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. General Electric 2. Hotpoint 3. LG Electronics 4. Maytag 5. Sharp 6. Speed Queen 7. Whirlpool 8. Insinkerator B. All products shall be ADA compliant and installed to meet code requirement. 2.2 MATERIALS A. The use of Energy Star products is required over non -energy star product when available. B. Provide appliance in the number, location, and type shown on the plans and from the Residential Equipment Schedule acceptable standards. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all ductwork, termination caps, and accessories as required by each manufacturer to complete the install of each unit as shown on the drawings. B. Coordinate electrical accessories required for complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify all dimensions, clearances, and utility connections prior to starting installation. 1. Coordinate work with other trades. B. All appliances shall be set -in -place, all mechanical and electrical connections made, including venting and termination caps. C. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, drawings and specifications, and approved shop drawings. D. Provide additional supports or attachments required for installation. E. Test all appliances for proper operation and good working order prior to final inspection. F. Thoroughly clean all appliances prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION 11 31 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE DIVISION 23 - DIVISION 26 - NOTE ITEM NO. SOURCE CAT. NO. DESCRIPTION MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL REF. FIELD CONNECTION FIELD CONNECTION MIC FRIGIDIARE FGM0205KF MICROWAVE - 120V, 60HZ 14.3 AMPS REF FRIGIDIARE FGH12164QF TOP -FREEZER REFRIGERATOR C WATER 120V, 60 HZ; 15 AMPS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 11 31 0OS - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 12 24 13 — ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual operated roller shade with single rollers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade. 1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material if applicable. 2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches long for each type of roller shade indicated. 3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material. C. Product Test Reports: 1. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. 2. Anti -Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide products from a firm that makes the indicated products as a regular production item and with not less than ten (10) years experience. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation of specified materials and assemblies with not less than five (5) years experience. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Roller Shades: a. Fabric equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each color, and shadeband material indicated. b. Brackets equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each type on project 1.7 MOCKUPS A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 3. Mock ups to remain in place through completion of work or to be archived by General Contractor to serve as an objective standard of work. 4. Mock ups requested by architect shall be paid for by Owner. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware and Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard non -depreciating twenty-five year (25) limited warranty. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of substantial completion, not including scaffolding, lifts and other means of access. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide the following manufacturer. 1. MechoShade Systems, Inc. B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Insoltroll Window Shading Systems 2. Hunter Douglas 3. Draper, Inc. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE -ROLLERS A. Basis of Design: "Mecho 5 Extended Bracket" B. Chain -and -Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous -loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated 1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade except at clerestory windows where chain will stop 48" inches above finished floor, to be verified with the architect. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain -Retainer Type: Standard Clip 2. Spring Lift -Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller -shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 12 lb. or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent C. Rollers: Corrosion -resistant extruded -aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required for accommodating operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive -end assemblies and idle -end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller. 2. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting integral channel in tube D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. 1. Brackets: Constructed of minimum 1/8-inch thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade 2. Plastics: Provide self—lubricating plastic for all plastic components of shade hardware. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. 2. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material F. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open. c. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. d. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2. Side Channels: a. Extruded aluminum with polybond edge seals and SnapLoc-mounting brackets and with concealed fastening. Exposed fastening is not acceptable b. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS A. Shadeband Material Flame -Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Final weave fabric shall be as selected by the Architect. C. Light -Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Basis of Design: MechoShade 1500 series 2. Type: Extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced vinyl. 3. Weave: Basketweave. 4. Thickness: single thickness non -raveling 0.030-inch thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018- inch diameter extruded vinyl yarn 5. Roll Width: 96 inches 6. Orientation on Shadeband: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Openness Factor: 3 percent. 8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ROLLER -SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMAA 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain -loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 1. Between Jamb: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end - to -end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. 2. Provide multi -band shades to provide the maximum allowable width to accommodate operation by a single unit. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows: 1. One batten seam will be required for stability on shades taller than fifteen feet to be placed as indicated by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER -SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions on inside face of mullion unless indicated otherwise. 1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. B. Main Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer/dealer, before inaccessible areas are constructed. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller -shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12 24 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 12 36 63 — QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: 1. Solid Surfaces Counter Tops 2. Accessories 1.3 REFERENCES A. FBC — Florida Building Code B. ASTM International 1. ASTM C97 — Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone 2. ASTM C99 — Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone 3. ASTM C170 —Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone 4. ASTM C217 — Weather Resistance of Slate 5. ASTM C482 — Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement 6. ASTM C484 — Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile 7. ASTM C501 — Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser 8. ASTM C531 — Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical - Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacing, and Polymer Concretes 9. ASTM C880 — Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone 10. ASTM C1026 — Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Freeze -Thaw Cycling 11. ASTM C1028 — Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull -Meter Method 12. ASTM C1243 —Relative Resistance to Deep Abrasive Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by Rotating Disc 13. ASTM D256 — Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics 14. ASTM D2047 — Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish -Coated Floor Surfaces by the James Machine 15. ASTM E84 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI Z124.6 — Stain Resistance 2. ANSI/N 42.14 — Radiation 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles of units, jointing, fastening, edge treatments, and related items. B. Samples: Submit the following: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12 36 63 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Submit full range of available colors and aggregates for selection purposes for Architect's selection. After initial selection, two sets, minimum 4" x 4", for each color for acceptance before proceeding with Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Manufacturer who fabricates quartz surfacing fabrications similar to work of this Project and have a minimum five (5) years experience. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Manufacturer who fabricates quartz surfacing fabrications similar to work of this Project. C. Fire Test response characteristics 1. Provide with the following Class A (Class 1) surface burning characteristics as evidenced by testing identical products against ASTM E84 (UL 723) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less 3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less D. Allowable Tolerances 1. Variation in component size ± 1/8" over a ten (10) foot length 2. Location of openings: ± 1/8" from indicated location 3. Maximum 1/8" clearance between quartz surfaces and each wall E. Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be ISO 9002 and ISO 14001 certified. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 MOCK-UPS A. Construct one mock-up of typical countertop shown on Drawings. Approved mock-up can remain as completed work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle, transport, and store units to prevent damage to materials or structure. Handle with care to prevent damage to corners and scratches to faces. B. Field measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive terrazzo countertops by field measurements before fabrication. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12 36 63 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warrant product to be free from defects in materials for a period of 10 years from date of installation. B. Warranty does not include scratching, chipping or staining by others following installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. 1. Cosentine SA. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Basis of Design: "Silestone" B. Composition: Crushed quartz aggregate combined with resins and pigments and fabricated into homogeneous slabs using a vacuum vibro-compaction process. C. Dimensions 1. Thickness:1-1/4" 2. Size: Slabs shall be not less than 120 inches long to minimize the number of joints used in installation. D. Identification: Material shall be labeled with a batch number and imprinted with a manufacturer's identifying mark on the back. E. Color and Finish: See Drawings for selection. F. Exposed Edges and Corners Shapes: As selected by the Architect. G. Seam Width: <1/8" H. Sink Mounting: Under mount or as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Stone Adhesive 1. Provide epoxy or polyester adhesive of type recommend by manufacturer for application and conditions of use. 2. Sink/bowl mounting hardware: a. Manufacturer's approved bowl clips, brass inserts and fasteners for attachment of undermount sinks/bowls. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12 36 63 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Color: Adhesive that will be visible in finished work should be tinted to match quartz surfacing. B. Joint Sealants 1. Clear silicone sealant as recommended by manufacturer for application and per conditions of use. C. Solvent: Product recommended by adhesive manufacturer to clean surface of quartz surfacing to assure adhesion of adhesives and sealants. D. Cleaning Agents: Non-abrasive, low pH cleansers. E. Shop Assembly: Observe proper safety procedures and comply with manufacturer's instructions. F. Layout: Layout joints to minimize joints. G. Inspect Material 1. Inspect material for defects prior to fabrication. 2. Color Match a. Materials used throughout the project shall be from the same batch and bear labels with the same batch numbers. b. Visually inspect materials to be used for adjacent pieces to ensure acceptable color match. C. Inspect in lighting conditions similar to those existing at the jobsite. 3. Variation in distribution of aggregates in quartz surfacing that is within manufacturer's tolerances is not a defect. H. Provide 1-1/2" thick solid support brackets as indicated on the plan. Fabricate from two 3/4" thick pieces of material adhered back to back to provide finish surface on both exterior sides. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions and technical bulletins. B. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive joints. 1. Reinforce as required. C. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings. D. Rout and finish component edges and sink cutouts with clean, sharp returns. 1. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. 2. Smooth and polish edges. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12 36 63 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with Specifications. B. Confirm that supporting construction is complete, and is level, square, true, rigid, and secure. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product installation details. 1. Tops: a. Flat and true to within 1/8" of a flat surface over a 10' length. b. Allow a minimum of 1/16" to a maximum of 1/8" clearance between surface and each wall. B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joint widths no greater than 1/8" in finished work. 1. Keep components and hands clean when making joints. C. Sinks: 1. Adhere undermount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturer's recommended adhesive and mounting hardware 3.3 CLEANING A. General: Comply with Specifications. 1. Keep installed work clean as work progresses. 2. Leave clean and free from blemishes. 3. Clean by moderate use of a ph balanced neutral cleaner acceptable by manufacturer. 4. Clean and repair surfaces soiled or otherwise damaged in connection with work of this Section. 5. Sealer Application: Apply sealer to countertop to comply with sealer manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 12 36 63 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12 36 63 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 12 93 11 — BICYCLE STORAGE RACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Bicycle storage racks. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A53 — Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless B. ASTM A123/A123M — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products C. ASTM A153/A153M — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware D. ASTM A501 — Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. E. ASTM D3451 - Standard Guide for Testing Coating Powders and Powder Coatings F. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Catalog brochures of equipment specified. Indicate model number and technical requirements as specified. 2. Manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Provide a complete set of shop drawings showing all required components, anchoring and attachment, and all details to fully indicate construction to be provided. 1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide products from a firm with not less than five years of successful experience manufacturing products similar to those required as work of this Section, and with sufficient production capacity to provide required units as shown and/or indicated on Drawings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BICYCLE STORAGE RACKS 12 93 11 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for delivery, handling, and storage of units to ensure that work is undamaged at time of installation. B. Deliver in manufacturer's standard, unopened, protective containers and clearly indicate type and model numbers on packaging. C. Store up off floor on wood skids unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Work shall include required anchoring of units directly to concrete substrate in strict accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide not less than manufacturer's standard, one year warranty from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer and basis of design shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Belson Outdoors B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the basis of design product. 1. Dero Bike Rack 2. Madrax 2.2 BICYCLE RACKS A. Bicycle Racks: Provide manufacturer's standard, "U-shaped" bicycle storage racks that comply with the following: 1. Basis of Design: "Wave Model CBBR-9UR-SS". 2. Capacity: 9 bicycles. 3. Mounting: Surface. 4. Pipe: Provide hot -dipped, galvanized, heavy-duty loop -type 40 steel pipe. 5. Size: Not less than 34 inches high. 6. Fabricate units of 2-3/8 inch outside diameter, galvanized steel tubing ready for surface mounted anchoring as shown and/or indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BICYCLE STORAGE RACKS 12 93 11 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 MATERIAL A. General: Provide hot -dipped, galvanized, heavy-duty loop -type 40 steel pipe conforming to the following standard requirements: 1. ASTM A 312, "Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Steel Pipes" for zinc, hot -dipped galvanized coating on iron and steel pipe 2. ASTM A53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless." 2.4 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. B. Baked -Enamel Finish: Chemical thermosetting finish, polyester baked enamel primer/topcoat system complying with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.8 - 3.0 mils. Complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, preparing, pretreating and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces that are indicated to receive work of this Section to ensure that substrate and conditions are within manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Do not install units until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Securely install units level, plumb, true -to -line and in locations as shown and/or indicated on Drawings in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Use only approved mounting and anchoring methods as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: After completing installation, clean all surfaces so that units are free of dirt, dust, surface film, and other contaminants. 1. Remove debris and trash resulting from work of this Section and properly dispose of off - site. B. Protection: Provide protection, as required, to ensure that units are without damage and/or deterioration at Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12 93 11 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BICYCLE STORAGE RACKS 12 93 11 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 14 24 00 — HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Hydraulic Elevators. b. Aftermarket Hall Position Indicator. C. Aftermarket Hall Station. 1.3 REFERENCES A. - ADDAG — Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities B. ASME/ANSI A17.1 — Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators C. AWI —American Welding Society D1.1 D. FBC — Florida Building Code E. FFPC — Florida Fire Protection Code F. NEC — National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) G. NFPA 80 — Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows H. UL Underwriters Laboratories 106 Fire Test of Door Assemblies I. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for car enclosures; hoistway entrances; and operation, control, and signal systems. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing; machine room layout; coordination with building structure; relationships with other construction; and locations of equipment. 2. Include large-scale layout of car -control station. 3. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support as well as maximum and average power demands. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Samples for Verification: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment finishes, 3-inch square Samples of sheet materials and 4-inch lengths of running trim members. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer, certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service including standby -power generator, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Submit manufacturer's/installer's standard operation and maintenance manual, in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 including diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard [one-year] [two-year] [five-year] <Insert agreement period> maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. D. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same form as, "Draft of Elevator Maintenance Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Furnish well casing and coordinate delivery with related excavation work. C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work specified in other Sections that relates to hydraulic elevators, including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 2. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the United States Access Board's ADA- ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. Thyssenkrupp 2.2 ELEVATORS A. Basis of Design: "Endura MRL" 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard machine room -less elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturers' standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as required for complete system. C. Elevator Description: 1. Rated Load: 3500 lb. 2. Rated Speed: 110 fpm. Auxiliary Operations: a. Battery -powered lowering. b. Automatic operation of lights and ventilation fans. 4. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 80" b. Inside Depth: 65-1/2" from back wall to front wall (return panels). C. Inside Height: 95" to underside of ceiling. d. Openings: Front and back. e. Front Walls (Return Panels): Stainless steel, with integral car door frames. f. Car Fixtures: Stainless steel. g. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. h. Reveals: Stainless steel. i. Door Faces (interior): Stainless steel. j. Door Sills: Aluminum. k. Ceiling: Suspended ceiling with LED lighting. I. Handrails:2" flat stainless steel handrails on sides. M. Floor: As selected by the Architect. Hoistway Entrances: a. Width:42". b. Height:84". C. Type: Center opening front and back. d. Frames Stainless steel. e. Doors: Stainless steel. f. Sills: Aluminum. 6. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from stainless steel. b. Provide hooks for protective pads in one complete set of full -height protective pads. 2.3 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT A. Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood subfloor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed. The car platform shall be designed and fabricated to support one-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity. B. Sling: Steel stiles affixed to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to remove strain from the car enclosure. C. Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets. D. Guide Shoes: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on a steel template that is fastened to the pit floor or continuous channels fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project conditions. Jack: Jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test jack to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohibited in the jack construction. Provide the following jack type: Twin post holeless telescopic 2-stage. Two jacks piped together, mounted one on each side of the car with each having three telescopic sections designed to extend in a synchronized manner when oil is pumped into the Assembly. Each jack section will be guided from within the casing or the plunger assembly used to house the section. Each plunger shall have a high pressure sealing system which will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. A follower guide shall be furnished for the top of the lower two plungers and be guided by rollers running inside a steel guide channel which is firmly attached to the guide rail system. This plunger guide system shall maintain a stabilized support for the plunger sections. Each Jack Assembly shall have check valves built into the assembly to allow for automatically re -syncing the three plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. G. Automatic Self -Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self -leveling feature to automatically. bring the car to the landings and correct for overtravel or undertravel. Self -leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load. H. Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the power unit to the jack unit. Provide proper grade readily biodegradable oil as specified by the manufacturer of the power unit (see Power Unit section 2.04.G for further details) 2.4 POWER UNIT A. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): A self-contained unit consisting of the following items: 1. Oil reservoir with tank cover. 2. An oil hydraulic pump. 3. An electric motor. 4. Oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and electro-magnetic controlling solenoids. B. Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil -hydraulic elevator service. Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and quiet operation. Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator car. C. Motor. Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil -hydraulic elevator service. Duty rating shall be selected for specified speed and load. D. Control System: Shall be microprocessor based and protected from environmental extremes and excessive vibrations in a NEMA 1 enclosure. E. Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be made without removing the assembly from the oil line. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Relief valve shall be externally adjustable and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve. 2. Up start and stop valve shall be adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops. 3. Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow. 4. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be adjustable for down start speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" starts and stops. The leveling valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling after slowdown is initiated. F. Solid State Starting: Provide an electronic starter featuring adjustable starting currents. G. Oil Type: USDA certified biobased product, ultra low toxicity, readily biodegradable, energy efficient, high performing fluid made from canola oil with antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. Especially formulated for operating in environmentally sensitive areas. USDA certified biobased product, >90% bio-based content, per ASTM D6866 2.5 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway opening bolted\knock down construction. 1. Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates, sight guards, and necessary hardware. 2. Main landing door and frame finish: Stainless steel panels, No. 4 brushed finish. 3. Typical door and frame finish: Stainless steel panels with No. 4 brushed finish. B. Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code. C. Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two -point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway horizontal sliding door. 1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. 2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up -thrust of the doors during operation. 3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves. D. Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on aluminum. 2.6 CAR ENCLOSURE A. Car Enclosure: 1. Walls: Cab type TKLP, durable wood core finished on both sides with high pressure plastic laminate. 2. Canopy: Cold -rolled steel with hinged exit. 3. Ceiling: Downlight type, metal pans with suspended LED downlights. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Cab Fronts, Return, Transom, Soffit and Strike: Provide panels faced with stainless steel. 5. Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang doors on sheave type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel track and are guided at the bottom by non-metallic sliding guides. 6. Ventilation: Manufacturer's standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top. B. Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an "Auto -Inspection" switch, an "emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station will give the inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly. 2.7 DOOR OPERATION A. Door Operation: Provide a direct current motor driven heavy duty operator designed to operate the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movements shall be electrically cushioned at both limits of travel and the door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. Closed -loop, microprocessor controlled motor -driven linear door operator, with adjustable torque limits, also acceptable. AC controlled units with oil checks or other deviations are not acceptable. 1. No Un-Necessary Door Operation: The car door shall open only if the car is stopping for a car or hall call, answering a car or hall call at the present position or selected as a dispatch car. 2. Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no coincident hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated. 3. Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel will reverse and the door will reopen to answer the other call. 4. Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door closing is prevented for a field programmable time, a buzzer will sound. When the obstruction is removed, the door will begin to close at reduced speed. If the infra -red door protection system detects a person or object while closing on nudging, the doors will stop and resume closing only after the obstruction has been removed. 5. Limited Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and the infra -red beam(s) is interrupted, the doors will reverse and reopen partially. After the obstruction is cleared, the doors will begin to close. 6. Door Open Watchdog: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field adjustable time, the doors will recycle closed then attempt to open six times to try and correct the fault. 7. Door Close Watchdog: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field adjustable time, the doors will recycle open then attempt to close six times to try and correct the fault. 8. Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode, the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to close. @2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Door Protection Devices: Provide a door protection system using 150 or more microprocessor controlled infra -red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a passenger or object. If door movement is obstructed, the doors shall immediately reopen. 2.8 CAR OPERATING STATION A. Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices required for specific operation mounted in an integral swing return panel requiring no applied faceplate. Swing return shall have a brushed stainless steel finish. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements. Pushbuttons that illuminate using long lasting LED's shall be included for each floor served, and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. Switches for car light and accessories shall be provided. B. Emergency Communications System: Integral phone system provided. C. Auxiliary Operating Panel: Not Required D. Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator cab and located in the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel. The lantern will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop. The lantern shall remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to close. E. Special Equipment: Not Applicable 2.9 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Controller: The elevator control system shall be microprocessor based and software oriented. Control of the elevator shall be automatic in operation by means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for registering car stops, and by "up -down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and "call" push buttons at terminal landings. B. Automatic Light and Fan shut down: The control system shall evaluate the system activity and automatically turn off the cab lighting and ventilation fan during periods of inactivity. The settings shall be field programmable. 2.10 HALL STATIONS A. Hall Stations, General: Provide illuminated buttons to indicate that a call has been registered at that floor for the indicated direction. 1. Manufacturers: The basis of design products "Classic Style #3 Access Hall Stations" are manufactured by C.J. Anderson & Company. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the architect. 2. Description: Solid cast metal hall station 3.75" wide and 13.25" high by 0.375" thick with call buttons and ADA compliant signage and braille. 3. Finish: Medium Brass Antique, to be verified by Architect. 4. Textures and colors: As selected by the Architect 5. Phase 1 firefiighter's service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into the hall station at the designated level. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. C. Hall Position Indicator: A wall mounted position indicator. As the car travels, its position in the hoistway shall be indicated on the dial face corresponding to the landing which the elevator is stopped or passing. 1. Manufacturers: The basis of design products "Dial Indicator — 180 Degree Position Indicator" are manufactured by C.J. Anderson & Company. Equal or better performing products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance by the Architect. 2. Description: Solid cast metal dial indicator plate with cast arrows and applied floor markings with electronics and motor. 3. Finish: Medium Brass Antique, to be verified by Architect. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ELEVATOR COMPONENTS A. Oil Hydraulic Silencer: Install an oil hydraulic silencer (muffler device) at the power unit location. The silencer shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof housing arranged for inspecting interior parts without removing unit from oil line. 2.12 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. D. Stainless -Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Stainless -Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063. G. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/13 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or No. C77600. H. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications. 2.13 FINISH A. Stainless Steel: Satin No. 4 finish B. Aluminum: Mill finish C. Steel 1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishers and chemically clean. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer/topcoat manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, preparing, to exposed metal surfaces. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full color densities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION system complying with paint pretreating and apply coating range of industry colors and A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. B. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. C. Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction. 1. Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1, manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. 2. Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation. D. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor, to ensure dimensional coordination of the work. E. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and travel direction. F. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. G. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers. 2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and accurately. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided. Stainless stall shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive surface; shall not be cleaned with bleached -based cleansers. B. At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site. Clean equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris. Use environmentally preferable and low VOC emitting cleaners for each application type. Cleaners that contain solvents, pine and/or citrus oils are not permitted. 3.5 PROTECTION A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present, immediately before date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION 14 24 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 21 00 00 — FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. Bidders of work in Sections under Division 21 are expected to have read these requirements and, upon subcontracting work called for in such Sections, shall be responsible for compliance with such Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Technical Definitions: 1. "Piping" shall mean pipe, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, hangers, drains, and items customarily required in connection with the transfer of fluids. 2. "Concealed" shall mean embedded in masonry or other construction, installed within or behind wall furring, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in attics, in crawl spaces, in chases, in shafts, buried in trenches, etc. 3. "Exposed" shall mean not concealed. 4. "Furnish" means to purchase and deliver products and equipment to the project site and prepare for installation. 5. "Install" means to assemble, erect, place, anchor and connect furnished products into satisfactory operation. 7. "Provide" means to furnish and install. 8. "Contract Documents" shall include the written Project Manual and the Drawings. 9. Division 21 is the new CSI division replacing the old Division 15 nomenclature, and is hereby defined as interchangeable. 10. Division 26 is the new CSI division replacing the old Division 16 nomenclature. They shall be hereby defined as interchangeable. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Whenever a reference is made to a standard, installation, or materials, the intention is that the Contractor shall comply with the latest published edition at the time project is bid, unless the edition is otherwise specified herein. B. Materials and equipment specified herein shall be new and standard catalogued items manufactured by reputable concerns regularly supplying such materials. Material shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. label or other appropriate label where such is required or allowed by code, by Contract Documents or by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Product deliveries shall be arranged in accordance with construction schedules and to avoid conflict with work and site conditions. Deliver and store products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Immediately, on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.4 AMPLIFICATION A. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the indication and/or description of an item, in the Contract Documents, carries with it the intent to provide the item, regardless of whether or not this is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description. B. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words and abbreviations which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. C. In case of discrepancy concerning quality and/or quantity within the Contract Documents, the better quality and/or the greater quantity shall be provided, at no increase to the Contract sum. D. No exclusions from, or limitations in, the language used in the Contract Documents shall be interpreted as meaning that the appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required system or item of equipment are to be omitted. E. The Drawings, of necessity, utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work. The work shall be installed, in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final architectural and structural drawings. F. Where Contract Documents conflict, such conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification. In general, the Architectural Drawings shall take precedence over the Fire Protection Drawings with regard to building construction. Any change from the Drawings necessary to make the work conform to the building as it is constructed, to fit the work of other trades, or to the rules of authorities having jurisdiction, shall be made at no expense to the Owner. G. No interpretation shall be made from the limitations of symbols and diagrams that any elements necessary for complete Work are excluded. H. Certain details appear on the Drawings, which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and positioning of the Work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate responsibility for field coordination for the indicated Work. The Architect reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of fire protection work or equipment prior to "roughing -in" without additional cost to the contract. Architect approval for deviations from drawing locations and layout shall be obtained prior to installation. J. The use of a word in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other indications denote that more than one item is required. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. All entities and personnel performing work for this project shall be regularly engaged and experienced in the type of work to be furnished and shall be licensed for such specialty trades, employ only properly qualified foremen, journeymen and apprentices as appropriate and in keeping with best trade practices. B. Each firm shall provide, upon request, a list of similar jobs it has completed. A minimum of 5 years' experience installing fire protection systems is required. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Locations of all pipes, sprinkler heads, etc., as shown on the Drawings are approximate only and are understood to be subject to such revisions as may prove necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. All work shall be installed with relation to building conditions and shall be installed correct with reference to finished elevations, etc. Exterior utilities shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only; refer to Civil Documents for requirements. B. The Drawings show the general arrangement of the fire protection piping. C. The Contractor is responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. D. The Contractor shall so coordinate the work so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner. Piping interferences shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines, which require a stated slope for proper operation. In all cases, lines requiring a stated grade for their proper operation shall have precedence over electrical conduit, sprinkler piping and ductwork. E. All piping in finished areas, except where noted to the contrary, shall be installed in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings, etc. In all cases, pipes shall be installed as high as possible. F. All parts of the system requiring adjustments shall be easily accessible. Provide rated access doors, if require, for proper maintenance of all equipment, valves and devices requiring service. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the layout of fire protection work with other trades. Locations of structural systems, sprinkler piping, plumbing, and heating/air conditioning work should take preference over the location of conduit runs. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORTS A. Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved. B. MSS Standard Compliance: 1. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design and manufacture comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58. 2. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. Size hangers and supports to support pipe weight and fluid conveyed. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Fabricate and install pipe hangers.and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. 4. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. C. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by installer to suit horizontal piping system, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping. Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 2. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12. U-Bolt: MSs Type 24. Clips: MSS Type 26. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS A. Pipe hangers for all piping shall be Anvil Star or Grinnell of a type suitable for each use. Perforated straps shall not be used in any work. For ferrous pipes up to and including four inches (4") in size, use Anvil Star Figure 69 carbon steel, adjustable, swivel ring hanger. For piping larger than four inches (4") diameter, use Anvil Star Figure 260 steel clevis hanger. Where several pipes are parallel at the same elevation, trapeze hangers may be used. B. Hanger rods sizes shall conform to the following schedule: Pipe up to and including 4": 3/8" rod Pipe 5" up to and including 8": 1/2" rod C. Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, all horizontal runs of ferrous piping shall be suspended from the floor or roof construction, as the case may be, by means of hangers with the following maximum spacing: Steel Pipe: Pipe 1" up to and including 1-1/4": 12-0 feet Pipe 1-1/2" thru 8": 15-0 feet Threaded Light wall: Pipe 1" up to and including 3": 12-0 feet D. There shall be a hanger within two feet (2) of each elbow or tee. Additional supports shall be provided for valves, equipment, etc. Vertical risers shall be supported by approved riser clamps at each floor. Vertical pipes within a space shall not have less than two (2) supports. E. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in the piping systems. Hangers shall permit vertical adjustment to maintain proper pitch. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the piping shall be guided and firmly anchored. No piping shall be self-supporting; nor shall it be supported from equipment connections. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Inserts shall be used where piping or equipment is to be hung from concrete construction. Inserts shall be Red Head, Drop -in anchors. All inserts shall be galvanized to prevent rusting. After the forms are removed, clip off all nails flush with the exposed surface of the inserts. G. Expansion bolts shall be Ackerman -Johnson. H. Beam clamps suitable for use with the type of steel construction involved shall be Anvil Star. 2.3 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated vertical piping clamps com- plying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. B. Two -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. C. Four -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. 2.4 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated hanger -rod attachments com- plying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger rod attachments to suit hanger rods B. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. C. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. D. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. E. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 2.5 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated building attachments comply- ing with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. B. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. C. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. D. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. E. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. F. Welded Attachments: MSS Type 22. G. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. H. Top I -Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Side I -Beam Camps: MSS Type 27. J. Steel I -Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. K. Steel WF-Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. L. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. M. Steel Brackets: Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33. N. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. O. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. P. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1 B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ANSI/ASTM A 36. C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ANSI/ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. D. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping, ductwork, other supported mechanical systems, or electrical items. E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. Provide section drawing for hanger locations to avoid duct interference. F. Support fire suppression piping independently of all other piping. 2.7 MANUFACTURERS AND INSTALLATION OF PIPE, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's offering hangers and supports which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Anvil Star and Tyco -Grinnell Corp. 2.8 PIPE PAINTING TYPE OF SERVICE Fire Protection Water Sprinkler -Fire BACKGROUND COLOR 2.9 BASIC PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS Red Red 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Interior Piping: 1. Black Steel Pipe: a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40 up to 2'; Schedule 10 for 2-1/2" and larger. b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded. C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut -groove type. d. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll -groove or mechanical locking type. 2.10 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS A. Provide supports, anchors, and seals in accordance with the following listing: 1. Adjustable steel clevises, adjustable steel band hangers, adjustable band hangers, for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. 3. Steel turnbuckles, and malleable iron sockets for hanger -rod attachments. 4. Concrete inserts, top -beam C-clamps, side beam or channel clamps, and center beam clamps for building attachments. 2.11 BASIC VALVES A. Interior Valves: 1. Sectional: Butterfly valves, Gate valves, O, S & Y UL listed, supervised. 2. Check: Swing check valves, UL listed. 2.12 SPECIAL VALVES A. Provide valves, UL listed, of sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. B. Hose Outlet Valves: Provide chrome plated brass angle hose valves, 2-1/2" size where not otherwise indicated, complete with caps and chains. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering fire hydrants which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Tyco -Grinnell, Kennedy Valve, NIBCO, and Viking. 2.13 BASIC METERS AND GAUGES A. General: Provide meters and gauges in accordance with the following listing: Pressure gauges: 0-250 PSI range. 2.14 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES A. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. B. Water Flow Indicators: Provide vane -type water flow detectors with retard switch adjustable up to 2 minutes. C. Electric Bell: Provide 8" waterproof, red enameled finish. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Supervisory Switches: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. E. Automatic Sprinklers: Provide quick response automatic sprinklers of type indicated on drawings, and in accordance with the following listing. Provide glass bulb 1550F unless otherwise indicated. Provide glass bulbs for 200OF in areas indicated and in electrical closets when required. Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench: Furnish steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box with spare head capacity per NFPA 13. G. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering fire protection specialties which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Co., Croker Division, Potter -Roemer, Inc., Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America, Tyco -Grinnell, Reliable Sprinklers, Star Sprinkler Corporation, Viking Corporation. 2.15 FIRE PROTECTION VALVES A. VALVES Provide factory -fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. B. GATE VALVES 1. Packing: Select valves designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened, equipped with packing suitable for intended service. Select valves designed so back seating protects packing and stem threads from fluid when valve is fully opened, and equipped with gland follower. 2. Comply with the following standards: a. Cast -Iron Valves: MSS SP-70. b. Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80. C. Steel Valves: ANSI B16.34. 3. For Fire Protection Service: a. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 175, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge, UL listed. b. Flanged Ends 2-1/2" and Larger: Class 175, iron body, bolted bonnet, rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge, UL listed. C. Mechanical Joint Ends 4" and Larger: Class 175, iron body, bolted bonnet, non - rising stem, indicator post flange, solid wedge, UL listed. d. Vertical Indicator Post: Cast-iron body, cast-iron sleeve, steel extension rod, target plates and window, malleable iron operating wrench, length of sleeve to suit depth of bury. 4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering gate valves which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Kennedy, Tyco -Grinnell, NIBCO, Inc., United Brass Works, Inc. C. DRAIN VALVES 1. For Low Pressure Drainage Service: a. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 150, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising stem, composition disc, 3/4" hose outlet connection. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 150, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising stem, composition disc, 3/4" hose outlet connection. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering drain valves which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: NIBCO, Inc., AGF. D. BUTTERFLY VALVES Comply with MSS SP-67. Provide gear operators on butterfly valves 6" and larger. Butterfly valves shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 150 psig at 150OF and be capable of bubble tight shut-off without a downstream flange at full rated pressure. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering butterfly valves which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: Tyco -Grinnell, NIBCO, Inc., Kennedy, and Viking. E. SWING CHECK VALVES 1. Construct pressure containing parts of valves as follows: a. Bronze Valves, 150 PSI: ANSI/ASTM B 62. 2. Comply with MSS SP-71 for design, workmanship, material and testing. 3. Construct valves of pressure castings free of any impregnating materials. 4. Construct valves of bronze, regrinding with seating angle 40 degrees to 45 degrees, unless composition disc is specified. 5. Provide stop plug as renewable stop for disc hanger, unless otherwise specified. 6. Construct disc and hanger as separate parts, with disc free to rotate. 7. Support hanger pins on both ends by removable side plugs. 8. For Fire Protection Service: a. Threaded Ends 2-1/2" and Larger: Class 175, iron body bronze mounted, bolted cap, horizontal swing, malleable iron disc, UL listed. b. Flanged Ends 2-1/2" and Larger: Class 175, iron body bronze mounted, bolted cap, horizontal swing, malleable iron disc, UL listed. 9. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering swing check valves which may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Tyco -Grinnell, NIBCO, Inc., Kennedy, United Brass Works, Inc., and Viking. 2.16 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES A. All control, drain, and test connection valves shall be provided with a permanently marked weatherproof metal or rigid plastic identification signs. B. The identification sign shall be secured with corrosion -resistant wire, chain, or other approved means. C. The control valve sign shall identify the portion of the building served. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK: A. All work shall be installed as required to meet all construction schedules. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054,00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Prior to starting the work, carefully verify all measurements at the site and determine that the work will properly clear openings, structural members and work of other trades. Correlate the time of each work item with all other trades to the best advantage of the completed job. Furnish, in ample time to avoid delays in the work, all information required to revise footing elevations, structural elements, chases and openings in floors and walls, and to provide clearances which may be required to accommodate the work. C. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during work operations, notify the Architect/Engineer immediately for clarification. D. Immediately act to put any damaged utilities back in functioning conditions. E. At all times while work is taking place, a competent Superintendent in charge shall be on site. F. Maintain a complete file of all Contract Documents and approved shop drawings at the site. G. Installation and shop drawings shall be initialed and dated upon installation. This procedure will enable the Architect/Engineer to verify the work in progress. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the work until its completion and Substantial Completion. Replace any work which may be damaged, lost or stolen without additional cost to the Owner, while the site is under the control of the contractor. I. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection of the work and for delivery to and removal from the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required. J. Keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish. K. Protect equipment and materials during construction from damage from water, dirt, welding and cutting splatter, paint drippings, etc., by use of shields and drop cloths. Damaged materials shall be repaired or replaced to the Architect's satisfaction. L. Products stored outside shall be covered with waterproof drop cloth or tarpaulins. Condensation shall be prevented by heating and ventilating as may be required. M. Provide the following accessory materials for sprinkler systems: All pipe penetrations of rated floors and walls shall be properly sealed in accordance with UL and UL approved details. Coordinate penetrations with the appropriate detail as referenced on the Architectural Drawings. N. Provide written copy of the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A. The Architect/Engineer shall have the authority to determine the method of submitting shop drawings. B. Submittals are required for all sprinkler items. C. For items reviewed and marked "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit", only one additional submittal will be reviewed to verify product compliance with the Contract Documents. Should further submittals be required for the Design Professional to verify the submittal with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the hourly rate of $150.00 will be billed to the Contractor for the Professional(s) time spent on the review. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Manufacturer's catalog cuts may be submitted for all standard cataloged equipment, provided that the item required to meet the project specification is not modified in any way from the standard catalog version. Where multiple products are included on the same cut sheet, clearly identify the product proposed for installation by striking through all sections not applicable to the proposed product. E. Cuts shall be clearly marked to indicate the exact size, type, rating, capacity, etc., of the item to be provided. F. Bind shop drawings and catalog -cuts in three ring binders with a title sheet and identification on front and side of the binder. Submit shop drawings and cut sheets all at one time. Allow space for Contractor, Project Architect and Engineer review stamps. G. All submittals must bear the handwritten signature of the Contractor and his stamp of approval before being considered for review by the Arch itect/Engineer. H. Shop drawings that deviate from the requirements of the contract documents shall list all differences in a cover letter attached to top of the submittal. Any unlisted deviations found during review will result in the rejection of the entire submittal. Pipe routes may not be altered strictly for the Contractor's convenience. 3.3 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for proper and adequate access to all valves and other equipment which is concealed in walls, furring and hung ceilings, or where may additionally be necessary. B. Material and Finish: Access doors shall conform to the finish and rating of adjacent construction as indicated in the finish schedule. 3.4 PAINTING A. Field painting shall be as specified in the Painting Section of the Specifications. All work shall be left clean and free from oil, dirt and grease prior to field painting. B. Upon completion, thoroughly clean all piping and other work to remove all dirt, grease, rust and oil. Thoroughly prepare all such work for painting. C. All fire risers and exposed fire sprinkler piping shall be painted red. 3.5 PENETRATION OF SOUND PROOFING A. The penetration of any sound proofing materials shall include all necessary materials and labor to provide thorough and complete caulking of all penetrations through walls, partitions and decks, whether such penetration occurs above or below dropped ceiling lines. 3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, as required, including shoring and bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property shall be provided as required. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.7 UNDERGROUND PIPING PROTECTION A. Protect the exterior surface of all underground steel piping against rust and corrosion. For piping not specified elsewhere to be furnished with factory applied pipe corrosion resistant wrapping, the piping surfaces shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, etc. with a wire brush and shall be free of oil and grease and completely dry. Brush on or otherwise apply as recommended by the manufacturer, a heavy full coating of TC Mastic (Tape Coat Company, Evanston, Illinois) or Reilly Protective Coast Tar Enamel No. 3302 (Reilly Tar and Chemical Company, Indianapolis, Indiana). Dry coating shall be not less than twelve mils thickness. 3.8 CHASING, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide and place required sleeves, forms and inserts before walls, ceilings, partitions, floors or roofs are built. B. When it becomes necessary to cut finished materials, submit to the Architect for approval, drawings showing the work required and obtain approval before doing such cutting. C. Provide exact dimensions and locations of these openings (to suit the apparatus to be used) before such walls are built. D. No cutting or altering the work of others will be permitted without the approval of the Architect. No structural members shall be cut without the previous written approval of the Architect. E. Any holes in existing slabs or other concrete or finished work required for the installation of new piping shall be core bored and sealed. 3.9 CLEANING A. Upon completion, piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, rust and oil, primed where necessary, and made ready for painting. B. Clean gauges and fittings. 3.10 TEST AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Make tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status and satisfactory operation of all systems and components. Tests shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Provide a letter addressed to the Owner advising that the completed systems have been installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that such are in proper operating condition. The Owner shall receive a written guarantee covering all defects in workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. 3.11 INSTRUCTIONS A. After the systems are in operation, and tests are complete, instruct the designated personnel of the Owner on the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems in accordance with NFPA Standards. 3.12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Prior to request for substantial completion, all fire protection systems shall be verified for proper operation. Substantiation of complete and operational systems shall be verified by submission of the following documents and forms: 1. Completed Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Fire sprinkler certification reports signed by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). 3.13 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of two hours, at not less than 200 PSI or at 50 PSI in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 PSI. Check system for leaks. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested. B. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. 3.15 STOCK OF SPARE SPRINKLERS A. There shall be maintained on the premises a supply of spare sprinklers (never less than 6) so that any sprinklers that have operated or been damaged in anyway may be promptly replaced. These sprinklers shall correspond to the types and temperature ratings of the sprinklers in the property. The sprinklers shall be kept in a cabinet located where the temperature to which they are subjected will at no time exceed 100°F. B. A special sprinkler wrench shall also be provided and kept in the cabinet to be used in the removal and installation of sprinklers. One sprinkler wrench shall be provided for each type of sprinkler installed. C. The stock of spare sprinklers shall include all types and ratings installed and shall be as follows: For protected facilities having under 300 sprinklers, not less than six (6) sprinklers. For protected facilities having 300 to 1,000 sprinklers, not less than twelve (12) sprinklers. For protected facilities having over 1,000 sprinklers, not less than twenty-four (24) sprinklers. END OF SECTION 21 00 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 00 00 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 00 00 — SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. Bidders of work in other Sections are expected to have read these requirements and, upon subcontracting work called for in such Sections, shall be responsible for compliance with such Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Technical Definitions: 1. "Piping" shall mean pipe, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, hangers, traps, drains, insulation, vents and items customarily required in connection with the transfer of fluids. 2. "Concealed" shall mean embedded in masonry or other construction, installed within or behind wall furring, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in attics, in crawl spaces, in chases, in shafts, buried in trenches, etc. 3. "Exposed" shall mean not concealed. 4. "Furnish" means to purchase and deliver products and equipment to the project site and prepare for installation. 5. 'Install' means to assemble, erect, place, anchor and connect furnished products into satisfactory operation. 6. "Provide" means to furnish and install. 7. "Contract Documents" shall include the written Project Manual and the Drawings. 8. Divisions 21, 22 and 23 are the new CSI divisions replacing the old Division 15 nomenclature. They shall be hereby defined as interchangeable. 9. Division 26 is the new CSI division replacing the old Division 16 nomenclature. They shall be hereby defined as interchangeable. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Certain standard materials and installation requirements are described by reference to standard specifications. These standards include the following: ASA - American Standards Association ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association UL - Underwriters Laboratories ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers AMA - Acoustical Materials Association NEC - National Electric Code 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Whenever a reference is made to a standard, installation or a material the intention is that such shall comply with the latest published edition at the time project is bid, unless the edition is otherwise specified herein. C. Materials and equipment herein shall be new and standard catalogued items manufactured by reputable concerns regularly supplying such materials. Material shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. label or other appropriate label where such is required or allowed by code, by the Contract Documents or by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Product deliveries shall be arranged in accordance with construction schedules and to avoid conflict with work and site conditions. 1. Deliver and store products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging and with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved submittals; and that products are properly protected and undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods that prevent soiling or damage to the products or their packaging. 1.4 AMPLIFICATION A. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the indication and/or description of an item in the Contract Documents carries with it the intent to provide that item, regardless of whether or not it is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description. B. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferred as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words and abbreviations which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. C. In case of discrepancy concerning quality and/or quantity within the Contract Documents, the better quality and/or the greater quantity shall be provided, at no increase to the Contract sum. D. No exclusions from or limitations in the language used in the Contract Documents shall be interpreted as meaning that the appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required system or item of equipment are to be omitted. E. The Drawings, of necessity, utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work. The work shall be installed, in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final architectural and structural drawings. F. Where Contract Documents conflict, such conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for clarification. In general, the Architectural Drawings shall take precedence over the Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings with regard to building construction. Any change from the Drawings necessary to make the work conform to the building as it is constructed, to fit the work of other trades or to comply with the rules of authorities having jurisdiction, shall be made at no expense to the Owner. G. No interpretation shall be made from the limitations of symbols and diagrams that any elements necessary for complete Work are excluded. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Certain details appear on the Drawings, which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and positioning of the Work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not prevent responsibility for field coordination of the indicated Work. Capacities, sizes and conditions specified or shown are allowable minimums. Based on design and rated operating conditions of systems, motors shall not be overloaded. Equipment shall not operate at speeds or temperatures greater than manufacturer's published recommendations, and no strain or demand shall be imposed upon any component to any system, structure or building. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of plumbing and mechanical work or equipment prior to "roughing -in" without additional cost to the contract. Architect/Engineer approval for deviations from drawing locations and layout shall be obtained prior to installation. K. The use of a word in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other indications denote that more than one item is required. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. All entities and personnel performing work for this project shall be regularly engaged and experienced in the type of work to be provided and shall be licensed for such specialty trades, employ only properly qualified foremen, journeymen and apprentices as appropriate and in keeping with best trade practices. B. Each firm shall provide, upon request, a list of similar jobs it has completed. The contractor shall have a minimum 5 years' experience constructing plumbing systems. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Locations of all pipes, fixtures, equipment, etc., as shown on the Drawings are approximate only and are understood to be subject to such revisions as may prove necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. All work shall be installed with relation to building conditions and shall be installed correct with reference to finished elevations, etc. Exterior utilities shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only. Their exact locations, depths and invert elevations shall be as required for proper flow and coordination with other trades, including the site utilities contractor. B. The Drawings show the general arrangement of piping. Should local conditions necessitate any rearrangement, or if the piping can be installed to better advantage in a different manner, and before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five (5) copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect's/Engineer's review. C. If equipment, piping and fixtures are installed requiring space conditions other than those shown, or arranged, and rearrangement of the space is necessitated, the Architect/Engineer shall review the change before the Contractor proceeds with the work. The request for such changes shall be accomplished by submission of Shop Drawings for the space in question. D. The Contractor is responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes and/or openings in the building structure pertaining to pipe installation and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. E. The Contractor shall so coordinate the work so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner. Piping interferences shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines which require a stated slope for proper operation. Storm and sewer lines and condensate piping shall take precedence over water lines in determination of elevations. Where there is interference between storm and/or sewer lines and condensate lines, the sewer lines shall have 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL precedence and provisions shall be made in the condensate lines for offsetting them around the sewer lines. In all cases, lines requiring a stated grade for their proper operation shall have precedence over electrical conduit and ductwork. F. All piping in finished areas, except where noted to the contrary, shall be installed in walls, chases, furred spaces, above ceilings, etc. In all cases, pipes shall be installed as high as possible. Runs of piping shall be grouped whenever it is feasible. G. All oiling devices and all parts of equipment requiring adjustments shall be easily accessible. Provide access doors, if required, for proper maintenance of all equipment and devices requiring service. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. All existing utilities shall be located prior to the beginning of work. Any conflicts shall be resolved and noted on the Record Documents. B. Adequate means of protection for all utilities shall be provided and, if utilities are damaged during working operations, such shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the utility Owner, at no cost to the contract. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the layout of the plumbing work with all other trades. Locations of plumbing work should take preference over the location of conduit runs. PART 2-PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK: A. All work shall be installed as required to meet all construction schedules. B. Prior to starting the work, carefully verify all measurements at the site and determine that the work will properly clear openings, structural members and work of other trades. Correlate the time of each work item with all other items to the best advantage of the completed project. Furnish, in ample time to avoid delays in the work, all information required to revise footing elevations, structural elements, chases and openings in floors and walls, and to provide clearances which may be required to accommodate the work. Set all sleeves, anchor bolts and inserts required to accommodate equipment before concrete is poured or masonry is started. C. Locate existing utilities prior to beginning work. Reroute or replace existing utilities where necessary to permit installation of work. Provide adequate means of protection for all work, new and existing. Repair existing utilities damaged during work operations to the satisfaction of the utility and at no cost to the contract. D. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during work operations, notify the Architect for clarification. Cooperate with utility companies to maintain active utilities. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Immediately act to put any damaged utilities back in functioning conditions. F. At all times while work is taking place, a competent Superintendent in charge shall be on site. G. Maintain a complete file of all Contract Documents and approved shop drawings at the site. H. Installation and equipment shop drawings shall be initialed and dated upon installation. This procedure will enable the Architect/Engineer to verify the work in progress. The Contractor shall be responsible for the work until its completion and Substantial Completion. Replace any work which may be damaged, lost or stolen without additional cost to the Owner, while the site is under the control of the contractor. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection of the work and for delivery to and removal from the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required. K. Keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish. L. Protect equipment and materials during construction from damage from water, dirt, welding and cutting splatter, paint drippings, etc., by use of shields and drop cloths. Damaged equipment or materials shall be repaired or replaced to the Architect's/Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction. M. Products stored outside shall be covered with waterproof drop cloths or tarpaulins. Condensation shall be prevented by heating and ventilating as may be required. N. During construction, maintain materials and equipment in an orderly and protected manner. O. Provide the following accessory materials for mechanical systems. 1. Dielectric fittings shall be provided where copper piping joins steel or iron piping, insulating bushings or unions. 2. Escutcheons shall be provided where pipes pierce exposed partitions, floors, walls or ceilings. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated. 3. All pipe penetrations of rated floors and walls shall be properly sealed in accordance with UL and UL approved details. Coordinate penetrations with the appropriate detail or reference on the Architectural Drawings. P. Provide a secondary drain pan under all water heaters. Drain pan shall include a full size drain piped to the building exterior or as noted on drawing. 3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A. The Architect/Engineer shall have the authority to determine the method of submitting shop drawings whether in multiple sets or by the reproducible transparency technique. B. Submittals are required for all items of equipment and all plumbing products. C. For items reviewed and marked "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit", only one additional submittal will be reviewed to verify product compliance with the Contract Documents. Should further submittals be required for the Design Professional to verify the submittal with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the hourly rate of $150.00 will be billed to the Contractor for the Professional(s) time spent on the review. D. Submittals shall be referenced to the Contract Documents. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets may be submitted for all standard cataloged equipment, provided that the item required to meet the project specification is not modified in any way from the standard catalog version. Where multiple products are included on the same cut sheet, clearly identify the product proposed for installation by striking through all sections not applicable to the proposed product. F. Cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate the exact size, type, rating, capacity, etc., of the item to be provided. G. Bind shop drawings/catalog-cuts in three ring binders with a title sheet and identification on front and side of the binder. Submit drawings and cut sheets all at one time. Allow space for Contractor, Project Architect and Engineer review stamps. Index all items to the Project Manual or Drawings as applicable. H. All submittals must bear the handwritten signature of the Contractor and his stamp of approval before being considered for review by the Architect/Engineer. Submittals shall include sufficient area on the cover for the Architect's/Engineer's stamp. Shop drawings and submittals which have not been reviewed and so marked by the Contractor, will be returned to the Contractor for such action before the Architect or his Engineers will review and comment on such submittals. J. Full submittal shall be made for all equipment (whether or not it is exactly as specified) on the basis of design. Any items marked REJECTED shall be resubmitted and provided exactly as specified. Partial submittals will. not be accepted for review and approval. K. Full electrical characteristics for each motor, piece of equipment or device shall be prominently displayed on the shop drawings or submittal. Additionally, a statement signed by maker of the submittal shall be included indicating that he or she has carefully examined the electrical characteristics specified in the Contract Documents (and if remodeling or an addition, as to existing electrical characteristics), and that the motors, equipment or devices proposed to be furnished are compatible. The responsibility to provide motors and equipment compatible with the electric service provided shall rest with the supplier furnishing the equipment, at no additional cost to the Contract. A similar statement shall be included stating the supplier has reviewed the space requirements of the project and that the submitted equipment will fit in the space provided and adequate service requirements have been met. L. Shop drawings that deviate from the requirements of the contract documents shall list all differences in a cover letter attached to top of the submittal. Any unlisted deviations found during review will result in the rejection of the entire submittal. 3.3 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Before submitting proposals, visit and carefully examine those portions of the site and/or existing buildings affected by this work so as to become familiar with the existing conditions and difficulties that will affect the execution of the work. B. Submission of a proposal will be construed as evidence that such examination has been made. Later claims for labor, equipment, materials, etc. required because of difficulties encountered, which could have been foreseen had such examination been made, will not be recognized. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for proper and adequate access to all equipment and valves which are concealed in walls, furring and non -accessible ceilings. B. Material and Finish: Access doors shall conform to the finish of adjacent construction as indicated in the finish schedule and matches the wall and/or ceiling construction rating. 3.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Provide all electrical work and connections except those specifically set forth below as being provided under Division 26 work. 1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide under Division 26 all wiring except the following which will be provided under Division 22: Interlock Wiring. 2. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install under Division 26 all power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box. 3. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install under Division 26 all motor starters and contactors except when specified to be furnished by the equipment manufacturer under Division 22. 4. When Conduit is required for wiring, the Electrical Subcontractor shall provide and install same under Division 26. Conduit shall be provided for all work installed within mechanical spaces (exposed) and in walls. 5. Motors: a. Motors shall be furnished by the manufacturer or supplier of the specified equipment. All motors shall be of the premium efficiency type. b. General purpose motors shall be open drip -proof conforming to NEMA Design B, Class B insulation, continuous 400C ambient, 60 Hz, 1.15 service factor, and 1800 RPM maximum speed unless specified otherwise. C. Motors shall be protected with thermal overload devices in the motor, or by the motor starter. Disconnect switch at motors are for service purposes and shall be unfused type. d. Single phase motors 1/2 HP and smaller shall have built-in overload protection. e. Single Phase motors shall be capacitor start, capacitor run. f. Equipment requiring 1,000 Watts or more shall have a power factor of 85% or greater at rated load conditions. Equipment with power factor less than 85% shall be corrected to at least 90% under full load operating conditions. Power factor corrective devices shall be switched with related equipment. g. Motor characteristics which change from that specified, due to the Contractor electing to use one of the optional manufacturers, or an updated model, etc., shall be coordinated with the Electrical Contractor prior to bid. This Contractor is responsible for the cost and design of any revisions necessary to provide proper power and control connections in full accordance with the National Electric Code and state and local codes. h. Motors 1/2 HP and smaller shall be self -lubricated. B. Electrical work provided and installed by Subcontractors under Division 22 shall be performed by licensed Electrical Contractors. C. Equipment containing various electrical components within its housing shall be furnished with internal wiring arranged to terminate at one set of electrical power lugs. Components shall be approved for group operation as defined by National Electrical Code, or auxiliary equipment must be provided as required to satisfy the National Electrical Code and UL Labels (or other labels) of the unit. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.6 PAINTING A. Field painting shall be as specified in the Painting Section of the Specifications. All work shall be left clean and free from oil, dirt and grease prior to field painting. B. Upon completion, thoroughly clean all equipment, piping and other work to remove all dirt, grease, rust and oil. Clean piping in exposed areas. Thoroughly prepare all such work for painting. C. Equipment: 1. All equipment shall have factory standard finish. 2. Factory finished equipment which has rusted or been damaged shall be repaired, cleaned, spot primed and entirely repainted the original color. 3. Insulation coverings shall be cleaned, sized (if necessary), and painted for service identification. D. Ferrous metals which are exposed to view or to the weather, such as pipes, pipe supports, supporting or stiffening angles, vent pipes, etc., shall be painted in accordance with the Painting Section of the Project Manual. 3.7 PENETRATION OF WATERPROOFING (INCLUDING WATERPROOF CONCRETE) A. Where any work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete, the method of installation shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer before the work is completed. B. Provide all necessary sleeves, sealant and flashing materials_ required to make openings absolutely water tight. 3.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, as required, including shoring and bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property shall be provided as required. B. Backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding six inches (6") in depth. Completed backfill shall conform to surrounding ground and finish grade and with compaction requirements of Division Two of the Project Manual. 1. Concrete encasement: Piping passing under footings, foundations and other locations as shown on drawings shall be encased by eight inches (8") minimum concrete on all sides. Concrete shall conform to Division 03 requirements. 2. Extend concrete encasement eight (8") inches around piping and twelve (12) each side of footings or foundations. C. Remove non -usable excavated material from the site. Do not remove reusable material from site. D. Provide and maintain bracing, shoring or sheathing as required to safely support sides of excavations. E. Provide and operate pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water. F. Repair and restore paving, streets, curbs, walks, and other work in the area where excavations are made. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Provide additional excavation and backfill where required to resolve conflicts in buried lines. H. Coordinate timing of excavations in advance with other trades. Excavation shall be open cut from the surface. Hold trench width to a minimum. K. Do not excavate utility trenches parallel to building footings closer than four feet (4') from the footings except by approval of the Architect/Engineer. When parallel trenches require cuts deeper than the building footings, the horizontal distance from the footing shall be equal to, or greater than one and one half (1-1/2) times the vertical distance below the footing, but in no case shall the horizontal distance be less than four (4') feet except by the approval of the Arch itect/Engineer. L. Mechanical excavation shall be held to four inches (4") above final grade of the bottom of trench. The remainder shall be shaped by manual excavation, so that piping is fully supported on undisturbed soil. Shoring of piping in trench will not be allowed. Piping must be suspended from above. M. Bell joint holes shall be carefully excavated so that none of the load is supported by the bells or joints. N. Whenever, in the opinion of the Architect /Engineer, the soil is unsuitable for supporting piping and appurtenances, provisions for proper foundations shall be made at no additional cost to the contract. O. Wherever trenching or excavating, assume utilities may exist in area without such being shown on the drawings. Exercise extreme caution. Should existing facilities be damaged, repair such to Architect's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Contract. 3.9 CHASING, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide and place required sleeves, forms and inserts before walls, ceilings, partitions, floors or roofs are built. B. When it becomes necessary to cut finished materials, submit to the Architect/Engineer for approval, drawings showing the work required and obtain approval before doing such cutting. C. Provide exact dimensions and locations of these openings (to suit the apparatus to be used) before such walls are built. D. No cutting or altering the work of others will be permitted without the approval of the Architect/Engineer. No structural members shall be cut without the previous written approval of the Arch itect/Engineer. E. Any holes in existing slabs or other concrete slabs or finished work required for the installation of new piping shall be core bored and sealed. F. Finish patch cut areas with floor tile, drywall, plaster, ceiling panels or tiles as required to match the existing. Paint entire disturbed area to match the existing. Provide new ceiling panels and grid, which may have damaged during construction. Such work shall match existing. 3.10 SLEEVES 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Sleeves up through 8" diameter shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe (Schedule 40 PVC) and machine cut, as specified below. B. Sleeves, 10" diameter and larger, shall be fabricated from 12 gauge steel sheet. C. Watertight seals: "Linkseal" by Thunderline Corporation. Provide correct sleeve size as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Size sleeves shall provide 1/2" minimum clearance all around pipe or pipe insulation passing through the sleeve. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves where indicated. E. Fill space around pipes in sleeves in exposed areas and through fire walls and partitions with non-flammable sealing compound equal to the wall or partition ratings with a UL Rated sealing system. F. Sleeves through walls shall be cut flush with each surface. G. Install sleeves plumb and true to line, grade and position. H. Unused sleeves shall be plugged and finished to match adjacent surface. Pipe sleeves penetrating outside walls shall be packed with insulating material, sealed and made waterproof. 3.11 CLEANING A. Upon completion, piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, rust and oil, primed where necessary, and made ready for painting. B. Clean copper piping in exposed areas. C. Clean gauges, thermometers, traps, strainers and fittings. 3.12 TEST AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Make tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status and satisfactory operation of all systems and components. Tests shall be made to the satisfaction of the Arch itect/Engineer. Provide instruments and labor necessary to conduct these tests and have them verified by the Arch itect/Engineer. B. Provide a letter addressed to the Owner advising that the completed systems have been installed in accordance with all codes, the Contract Documents and that such are in proper operating condition. The Owner shall receive a written guarantee covering all defects in workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. This time period shall be automatically extended until the corrective action is fully complete and satisfactory. 3.13 INSTRUCTIONS A. After the systems are in operation, and tests are complete, instruct the designated personnel of the Owner on the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. Entire session shall be videotaped, with copy provided to the Owner. 3.14 ENGINEER'S PROJECT SITE VISITS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. When the engineer or his designated representative visits the site to review the installation, all tools, ladders, etc. necessary for the review of the work shall be provided. B. The Engineer will provide a typed list of deficiencies noted during the site visit for corrective action. Prior to request for supplementary visits, provide an initialed and dated copy of the last report indicating the current status of the noted deficiency corrections. 3.15 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Prior to request for substantial completion, all plumbing systems shall be verified for proper operation and control. Substantiation of complete and operational systems shall be verified by submission of the following documents and forms: 1. Completed Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Health department certification of the potable water systems. END OF SECTION 22 00 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL REQUEST FOR PRIOR APPROVAL NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: This letter must be sent to the Architect, with copy to the Engineer as per Prior Approval Requirements of the Project Manual (Seven or Ten days as applicable). Requests received after the date of Prior Approval will be discarded. [DATE:] [ARCHITECT NAME] Re: [PROJECT NAME] [ARCHITECT/OTHER] Project No.: Dear We hereby request approval to bid the following products for this project: REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL: Section , Paragraph be added as an acceptable manufacturer. We request that Section , Paragraph We request that be added as an acceptable manufacturer. Section , Paragraph We request that be added as an acceptable manufacturer. We understand that listing of the above manufacturers is for bidding purposes only. The Manufacturer is responsible to meet all capacity, controllability of equipment, space requirements, and service clearances as per basis of design. [CLOSING SIGNATURE] cc: Consulting Engineering Associates, Inc. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 05 23 — GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 22 specifications. B. Types of valves specified in this section include the following: Gate valves Ball valves Check valves C. Valves furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of valves, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Marking of Valves: Comply with MSS SP-25. C. Valve Dimensions: For face-to-face and end -to -end dimensions of flanged or welding -end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10. D. Valve types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions, and dimensional drawings for each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit valve schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and valve features for each required valve. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of valve. Include this data in Maintenance Manual. PART 2 — PRODUCT 2.1 VALVES ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PIPING 22 05 23 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Provide factory -fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. 2.2 GATE VALVES A. Packing: Select valves designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened, equipped with packing suitable for intended service. Select valves designed so back seating protects packing and stem threads from fluid when valve is fully opened, and equipped with gland follower. B. Comply with the following standards: 1. Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80. C. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gate valves of one of the following: Kitz, NIBCO, or Milwaukee. 2.3 BALL VALVES A. General: Select with full port opening, blow-out proof stem, hard chrome plated forged brass vented ball, adjustable packing nut, rated not less than 600 LB W.O.G., 150 W.S.P. 1. Comply with the following standards: Ball Valves: MSS SP-110 B. For Domestic Water Service: 1. Threaded Ends 3" and Smaller: 600 LB W.O.G., 150 W.S.P., bronze two piece body, hard chrome plated forged brass vented ball, true adjustable packing nut, blow-out proof stem: Kitz #68, NIBCO T-585-70, Milwaukee BA-125, Apollo 77-100 Series, or equal. 2. Soldered Ends 3" and Smaller: 600 LB W.O.G., 150 W.S.P., bronze two piece body, hard chrome plated forged brass vented ball, true adjustable packing nut, blow-out proof stem: Kitz #69, NIBCO S-585-70, Milwaukee BA-155, Apollo 77-200 Series, or equal. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ball valves with one of the following: Kitz, Milwaukee, NIBCO, or Apollo. 2.4 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Comply with the following standards for design, workmanship, material and testing: Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80 B. For Domestic Water Service: 1. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed cap, "Y" pattern swing, bronze disc: Kitz #22, NIBCO S-413B, Milwaukee 508 or equal. 2. Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed cap, "Y" pattern swing, bronze disc: Kitz #23, NIBCO S-4136, Milwaukee 1509 or equal. 2.5 VALVE FEATURES ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PIPING 22 05 23 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. General: Provide valves with features indicated and where not otherwise indicated, provide proper valve features as outlined in this specification. Comply with ANSI B31.1. B. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1. C. Solder Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18. D. Wafer: Flangeless valves. E. Trim: Fabricate pressure -containing components of valves, including stems and seats from brass or bronze materials; of standard allow recognized in valve manufacturing that resist de- zincification. F. Bonnet: Part of gate or globe valve through which stem passes to valve body, and attached to valve body threads, bolts, union, or welding. G. Solid Wedge: One-piece tapered disc in gate valve, designed for contact with both sides. H. Extended Stem: Increase stem length by 2" minimum, to accommodate insulation applied over valve. I. Double Disc: Two-piece tapered disc in gate valve, designed for contact on one side of each disc. J. Parallel Double Disc: Two parallel discs in gate valve, designed for contact by action of separate wedging block. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward for horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose -end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane. B. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended -stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation. C. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections. 1. Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Solderjoint valves. 2. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Threaded valves 3. Pipe Size 2-1/2" and Larger: Flanged valves Wafer valves Single flange valves D. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated. E. Installation of Check Valves: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PIPING 22 05 23 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to centerline of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow in pump discharge lines. F. Valves shall have shaft extension to facilitate insulation installation. END OF SECTION 22 05 23 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PIPING 22 05 23 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide supports and hangers for all piping and piping system components. B. Provide supports and hangers for all equipment. C. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. D. Provide steel angles and channels between structural members as necessary to support piping. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Meet the requirements of the following: 1. MSS SP 58-2002 Pipe Hangers and Supports. 2. ANSI Code for Pressure Piping. 3. Hangers and supports shall have a stress safety factor of 5. 4. ASTM, UL, NFPA. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: Hangers Supports Inserts 1.5 COORDINATION A. Obtain Structural Engineer's approval before welding, drilling or cutting any structural members. B. Coordinate runs of piping as may be required to utilize available structural members. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable: Grinnell, Elcen, F & S, Fee & Mason or Michigan. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 29 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 STRUCTURE ATTACHMENT DEVICES A. Riser clamp, steel: Grinnell Fig. 261. Provide masonry or concrete bearing. B. Riser clamp, copper: Grinnell Fig. CT-121, copper plated. Provide masonry or concrete bearing. C. Top beam clamp: Grinnell Fig. 227 with Fig. 157 extension. D. Horizontal traveler: Grinnell Fig. 170 E. Concrete inserts: Grinnell Fig. 282, galvanized. F. Concrete fasteners: Phillips "Red Head." G. Copper tube strap: Grinnell Fig. 9124. H. Pipe strap: Grinnell Fig. 153. I. Pipe hanger flange: Grinnell Fig. 153. 2.3 HANGERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Adjustable copper tubing ring: Grinnell Fig. CT-99, copper plated. B. Adjustable swivel split ring: Grinnell Fig. 104, black finish. C. Adjustable pipe ring, plastic coated: Grinnell Fig. CT-99c, plastic coated. D. Heavy adjustable clevis: Grinnell Fig. 260, black finish. E. Lightweight adjustable clevis: Grinnell Fig. 65, black finish. F. Pipe roll stand (base supported): Grinnell Fig. 271, cast iron roll. G. Adjustable pipe roll: Grinnell Fig. 181. H. Insulated pipe saddle: Hot lines - high density pre -compressed fiberglass support segment with 18 gage galvanized steel shield. Cold lines - provide Foamglas" pipe insulation with jacket and 18 GA. galvanized steel shield. Insulation thickness shall be same as specified in the insulation section of this specification. 2.4 HANGER RODS AND ACCESSORIES A. Provide plated steel threaded rods. B. Provide all necessary couplings, turnbuckles, nuts, washers, and accessories for a complete installation. 2.5 TRAPEZE COMPONENTS A. Horizontal trapeze member: UNISTRUT P-2700 series channel, standard or heavy duty according to load. B. Trapeze clamp: UNISTRUT two piece bolted pipe clamp; steel for steel pipes, copper for copper pipes. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 29 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE SUPPORT METHODS A. CONDITION Uninsulated copper pipe horizontal, hung. Uninsulated copper pipe horizontal, bottom support. Uninsulated copper pipe vertical Insulated pipe horizontal, bottom support. SUPPORT METHOD Adjustable plastic coated tubing ring and hanger rod. Plastic coated tube strap. Provide necessary angle braces. Plastic coated tube strap to walls with anchors. Riser clamp at floors. Insulated pipe saddle, pipe roll stand. Notes: 1. Install pipe saddles as pipe is installed. 2. Trapeze hangers may be used for multiple horizontal hung pipe runs. Trapeze consists of hanger rods, horizontal trapeze member, and trapeze clamps. Each pipe shall be individually attached to trapeze. 3. Hangers shall be isolated from dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings. 3.2 SUPPORT SPACING AND HANGER ROD DIAMETERS A. PVC and copper pipes shall be in compliance with the Florida Building Code. 1. Maximum support spacing for horizontal cast iron drain and vent lines is one support at each joint (i.e., 5' spacing for 5' lengths, 10' spacing for 10' lengths, etc.). 2. Provide additional supports at turns, valves, concentrated loads connections to equipment and where necessary for proper alignment. 3.3 STRUCTURE ATTACHMENT METHODS A. CONDITION Hanger rod to steel bar or truss. Hanger rod to steel beam (Corrugated metal deck above). Hanger rod to steel beam (concrete deck above, temporary form). Hanger rod to precast or existing concrete deck. SUPPORT METHOD Top beam clamp. Top beam clamp. Bottom beam clamp. Concrete fasteners, pipe hanger flange. Hanger rod to new cast -in- Concrete insert. place concrete deck. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING 220529-3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Hanger rod to wood beam. Side beam bracket, lag bolt to beam (use bolt through entire beam when load exceeds mfg's recommended load for lag bolt application). Notes: 1. Do not install hangers from metal roof deck. 2. Avoid drilling concrete by using inserts. 3. Explosive powder driven fasteners are not acceptable and shall not be used. 4. Weld to steel structural members. In wood construction where pipe is parallel to, and hanging from joists, rafters, or beams bolt angles to side of members vertically, bolt horizontal angles to side of members vertically, bolt horizontal angles to vertical angles, attach hanger rods to horizontal angles. Consult with Structural Engineer and affected trades regarding procedure. 5. Vertical piping shall be anchored to building with two -point bearing. 3.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Properly support pipe to maintain required alignment, slopes, and expansion capabilities. B. Piping shall be supported independently from the building structure. Where interferences occur, provide trapeze type hangers or other suitable supports for each system. Locate hangers and supports where they will not interfere with access to valves and other appurtenances requiring service. C. Whenever mechanical equipment rooms are located within or immediately adjacent to the occupied building, vibration dampening hangers and supports shall be used. END OF SECTION 22 05 29 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 29 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 05 30 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INVOLVED A. Extent of supports, anchors, and seals required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 22 sections. B. Types of supports, anchors, and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal piping hangers and supports 2. Vertical piping clamps 3. Hanger rod attachments 4. Building attachments 5. Saddles and shields 6. Flashing materials 7. Miscellaneous materials 8. Anchors C. Supports, anchors and seals furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of supports, anchors and seals of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. MSS Standard Compliance: 1. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design and manufacture comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58. 2. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. Size hangers and supports to support pipe weight and fluid conveyed. 3. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. 4. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for each type of support, anchor and seal. Include a schedule of supports, anchors and seals to be used. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 22 05 30 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.1 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide factory -fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP- 58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by installer to suit horizontal piping system, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper -plated hangers and supports for copper piping systems. B. Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1. C. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 2. D. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. E. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. F. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. G. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6. H. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10. I. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. J. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12. K. U-Bolt: MSs Type 24. L. Clips: MSS Type 26. M. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. N. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. O. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38 including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. P. Single Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 41. Q. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43. R. Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44. S. Pipe Rolls and Plates: MSS Type 45. T. Adjustable Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 46. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS A. Pipe hangers for all piping shall be Anvil International, Fee and Mason or Grinnell. Perforated straps shall not be used in any work. For PVC pipes use Anvil International Fig. 260 carbon steel, adjustable clevis hanger. Where several pipes are parallel at the same elevation, trapeze 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 22 05 30 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL hangers may be used. Where trapeze hangers are used, the pipes shall be supported on rollers where rollers are called for by the above specifications. For non -insulated copper pipes up to and including four inches in size, use Anvil International Fig. CT-69 copper plated carbon steel, adjustable swivel ring. For insulated pipes use Anvil International Fig. 300 carbon steel, adjustable clevis hanger. B. Hanger rods sizes shall conform to the following schedule: Pipe up to and including 2" 3/8" rods Pipe 2-1/2", 3" and 3-1/2" 1/2" rods Pipe 4" and 5" 5/8" rods Pipe 6" 3/4" rods C. Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, all horizontal runs of piping shall be suspended from the floor or roof construction, as the case may be, by means of hangers with the following maximum spacing: PVC pipe 4 feet D. Unless shown otherwise on the Plants, all horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be suspended from the floor or roof construction as the case may be, by means of hangers with the following maximum spacing: Pipe up to 1-114" in size 6 feet Pipe 1-1/2" and larger 10 feet E. There shall be a hanger within two feet (2') of each elbow or tee. Additional supports shall be provided at valves, strainers, etc. Cast iron pipe shall have not less than one hanger per length of pipe. Vertical risers shall be supported by approved riser clamps at each floor. Vertical pipes within a space shall not have less than two (2) supports. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in the piping systems. Hangers shall permit vertical adjustment to maintain proper pitch. No piping shall be self-supporting; nor shall it be supported from equipment connections. G. Inserts shall be used where piping is to be hung from concrete construction. Inserts shall be Anvil International Fig. 281, wedge type, concrete inserts. All inserts shall be galvanized to prevent rusting. After the forms are removed, clip off all nails flush with the exposed surface of the inserts. H. Expansion bolts shall be Ackerman -Johnson. Beam clamps suitable for use with the type of steel construction involved shall be Anvil International. J. Domestic hot water, domestic cold water piping, and horizontal rainwater piping hangers shall be sized to go around the insulation with saddles being provided to protect the insulation. 2.3 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated vertical piping clamps com- plying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide plastic coated clamps for copper piping systems. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 22 05 30 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Two -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. C. Four -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. 2.4 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS A. Provide factory -fabricated hanger -rod attachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger rod attach- ments to suit hanger rods. Provide plastic coated hanger rod attachments for copper piping systems. B. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. C. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. D. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. E. Steel Weld -less Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 2.5 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Provide factory -fabricated building attachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide plastic coated building attachments for copper piping systems. B. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 C. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19 D. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. E. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. F. Welded Attachments: MSS Type 22. G. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. H. Top I -Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. I. Side I -Beam Camps: MSS Type 27. J. Steel I -Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. K. Steel WF-Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. L. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. M. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading: Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 22 05 30 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL N. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. O. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. P. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. 2.6 SADDLES AND SHIELDS A. Provide saddles or shields for piping hangers and supports, factory -fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. C. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: C & S Mfg. Corp., Elcen Metal Products Co., Fee & Mason Manufacturing Co., Grinnell, Pipe Shields, Inc. 2.7 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Anvil International, C & S Mfg. Corp., Elcen Metal Products Co., Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., Grinnell. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ANSI/ASTM A 36. C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ANSI/ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments as may be required. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Install building attachments at required locations, within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 22 05 30 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 PSI is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping, ductwork or other supported mechanical or electrical items. B. No piping shall be self-supporting; nor shall it be supported from equipment connections. C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. Provide section drawing for hanger locations to avoid duct interference. D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and support which are copper - plated, or by other recognized industry methods. E. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate_ action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Pipe -Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. 4. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. b. Shields: Where low compressive strength insulation or vapor barriers are indi- cated on cold or chilled water piping, install coated protective shields. C. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. C. Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe -runs, at intermediate points in pipe -runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required accommodating both expansion and contraction of piping. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 22 05 30 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Adjust hangers and supports and place grout as required under supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. END OF SECTION 22 05 30 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 22 05 30 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide pipe identification for all exposed piping in Equipment Rooms, on pipe mains above accessible ceilings, access panels, and piping exposed to view. B. Provide valve tags for all valves. Provide valve tag chart, enclosed in a minimum 8-1/2" x 11" frame, in each mechanical room. Master chart(s) to be included in the maintenance manual. C. Provide equipment nameplates for all major equipment, such as water heaters, pumps, etc. Nameplates shall include all information on standard nameplates, but shall be of an engraved metal or plastic type, mechanically secured to the equipment. D. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Meet the requirements of: ANSI A13.1-1981: Scheme for the Identification of Piping System. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe markers shall be "SET MARK" semi -rigid plastic identification markers as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corporation. Markers shall conform to ANSI A13.1 for correct color background, color of letters and correct marker length. Use Type STIR markers on outside diameters 3/4" through 5", and Type STIR markers on outside diameters of 6" and larger. Direction of flow arrows shall be included on each marker. Letter height and length of color background shall be as follows: LENGTH OF OUTSIDE DIAMETER LETTER HEIGHT COLOR FIELD 3/4" - 1-1 /4" 1 /2" 8" 1-1/2" - 2" 3/4" 8" 2-1/2" - 6" 1-1/4" 12" B. For pipes less than 3/4" O.D. a permanently legible tag shall be used. C. Valve tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter, 19 gauge brass attached with copper meter seal wire, brass chain, or "S" hook. Service designation letter shall be 1/4" high minimum and black filled. Valve 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 53 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL numbers shall be 1/2" high and black filled. Stamp tags with service designation and number consecutively for each system - Style 250-BL. D. Equipment name plates shall be 11/" x 4" aluminum or plastic with black enamel background and with the equipment designation engraved in natural aluminum or white lettering not less than 1/2" high. Equipment name plates shall also include the area that the equipment serves, either by room name or number as approved by the Arch itect/Engineer. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Model numbers of Seton Name Plate Corporation, CT are used as standard. Optional manufacturers: W. H. Brady. 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for tags and identification with colors and wording indicated. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE IDENTIFICATION (use colors for services that apply to this project). BACKGROUND LETTER SERVICE TYPE OF SERVICE COLOR COLOR DESIGNATION Domestic Cold Water Green White Cold Water Domestic Hot Water Green White Hot Water 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pipe markers: 1. Service designation shall be readable from a standing position from the floor. 2. Provide pipe markers at 25 feet maximum intervals on mains above ceilings. 3. Provide markers at each major branch from mains and at each branch line. 4. Provide a marker at each equipment connection. B. Valve tagging: 1. Attach tags to valve handles in such a manner that valve shall be operable without damaging or removing tag. 2. Prepare valve charts showing tag number, locations, sizes, and services. Frame under glass and mount in equipment room. A copy of chart shall be included in the service manual. C. Equipment nameplates: 1. Nameplate designation shall consist of unit number and area served. 2. Locate nameplates where readable from a standing position on the floor. 3. Secure nameplates securely with rivets or screws. 4. Nameplates identifying manufacturer model number, serial number, voltage, etc. for equipment shall be of the engraved type. Painted labels are not acceptable. END OF SECTION 22 05 53 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 53 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 22 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings, and by requirements of this section. B. Insulation shall be provided by an independent insulating contractor. C. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: Piping System Insulation: Domestic Water Piping Systems Storm Water Piping Systems Condensate Piping Systems 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Armstrong, Certainteed Corp., Johns -Manville Corp., Knauf Fiber Glass, Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp., Pittsburgh Corning Corp. C. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulation similar to that required for this project. D. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and Smoke -developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASIM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. E. Appropriate ASTM, ANSI, UL, ASME and NFPA standards shall be met. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Certified Tests: With product data submit certified test reports on performances including burning characteristics and thermal insulating valves. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data in the Maintenance Manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. C. Protect cements, adhesives and coatings from freezing. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS A. Foam Glass Pipe Insulation: FS HH-1-1751/3A, Type I, Class 4 with white fire retardant jacket finish for interior above grade insulation. B. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Fiberglass Insulation: Factory applied white vapor barrier jacket. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on exposed plumbing fixture run -outs from faces of wall or floor to fixture; on unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. B. Cold Piping: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems: Interior above -ground storm water piping Condensate piping 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation. a. Insulation: Fiberglass, 1" thickness up to an including 6". b. Insulation: At rated wall penetrations, provide cellular glass, 1-1/2" thickness. C. Hot Piping: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems: Domestic hot water piping 2. Insulate each hot water piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Insulation: Fiberglass, 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 6". b. Insulation: At rated wall penetrations, provide cellular glass, 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 6". 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surface. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. G. Extend piping insulating without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. H. Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation. I. Pipe Hanger Insulation Inserts: Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. J. Fiberglass cloth jacket may be used in concealed areas. 3.3 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION 22 07 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 10 00 — INSTALLATION OF PIPING PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Install above ground piping as specified below. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIONS A. Unions in copper pipe shall be Bronze 150 LB ground joint, solder end. Mueller, Chase or NIBCO are acceptable alternative manufacturers. B. Dielectric unions: Capitol, Dart, or Vogt. 2.2 VALVES A. Drain valves: 3/4" bronze or brass hose and gate, Powell 503 HS where exposed, Powell 502 HS with cap and chain where concealed. B. Flanged joints of valves: Spirotallic-Condren #913, 304 stainless steel with carbon steel guide, 150 LB flanges. 2.3 NIPPLES A. Nipples shall be same weight and material as pipe in which they are installed. B. Close and shoulder nipples shall be extra heavy. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Cut pipe accurately, remove burrs by reaming, and work into place without forcing or springing. B. Use pipe lubricant on male threads only. Teflon pipe joint tape may be used. C. Make all changes of direction with fittings, rather than bending. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTALLATION OF PIPING PLUMBING 22 10 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Install piping level, except where specifically required to pitch. Arrange piping to allow draining the entire system. E. Use eccentric reducers, keeping top of pipe level in water systems. F. Bull head connections in any piping service are prohibited. G. All piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and parallel to building walls, floors, etc. H. Properly support all relief valve discharge piping. I. No pipes shall cross over or within 3-0" of electrical panels. 3.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Install with hand wheel/lever at or above center line of pipe. B. Install with union downstream of valve. C. Install with sweat adapters upstream of valve. D. Install where accessible. E. Provide drain valve at low points in piping. F. Install the thermometers and gauges to be readable from the floor. 3.3 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons for exposed piping passing through walls, floors and ceilings or finished areas. B. Protect from tool marks. 3.4 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Flanged joints shall be accessible, faced true and square. B. Provide unions or flanges at all connections to equipment and fixtures to facilitate removal and servicing. C. Provide dielectric unions or flanges between dissimilar metals, such as copper to steel. 3.5 COORDINATION A. Drawings are diagrammatic. Where interferences develop, piping shall be offset or rerouted as required. B. Where piping is installed in accessible chases, keep all piping to sides of chase, except for portions which must be in the center of the chase. Offset vents to side immediately above connection to waste line. C. Piping shall be concealed except in unfinished rooms and as otherwise shown. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTALLATION OF PIPING PLUMBING 22 10 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL END OF SECTION 22 10 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTALLATION OF PIPING PLUMBING 22 10 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 11 00 — PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS — PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The bidding requirements and contractual conditions of Division 01 are applicable to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of pipe, tube, and fittings required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 22 sections. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate every bend, fitting, etc. required for installation in the space allotted. Coordinate the work of this section with other work to avoid conflicts. B. Types of pipe, tube, and fittings specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping Materials: Copper tube PVC Pipe 2. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Fittings for copper tube Fittings for PVC Pipe 3. Miscellaneous piping materials/products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of pipe, tube, and fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Appropriate ASTM, ANSI, UL, ASME, and NFPA Standards must be met. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instruction, and dimensional drawings for each type of pipe, tube, and fitting. Submit piping schedule showing manufacturer, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each piping system. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Except for concrete, hub -and -spigot, and similar types of pipe, factory -applied plastic end -caps on each length of pipe and tube shall be provided. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe end damage and to eliminate dirt and moisture from inside the pipe and tube. B. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from the weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above ground and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. C. Protect flange and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE TUBE AND FITTINGS PLUMBING 22 11 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for the installation and comply with governing regulations and industry standards. B. Copper Tube: ANSI/ASTM B 88; Type (L not buried), Type K (buried), hard -drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated. DWV Copper Tube: ANSI/ASTM B 306. C. PVC Pipe: 1. PVC Pipe Type DWV (Above ground): ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 2949, CSA 13181.2, ASTM F 1488. 2. PVC Pipe Type DWV (Underground): ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 2949, ASTM F 891, CSA-B 181.2. 2.2 PIPE/TUBE FITTINGS A. Provide factory -fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe, tube, valve or equipment connections in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. B. Fittings for Copper Tube: 1. Cast -Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18. 2. Non -Ferrous Pipe Flanges: ANSI B16.31, Class 150. 3. Copper -Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. C. Fittings for PVC Pipe: 1. PVC Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 3311, ASTM D 2665, ASTM F 1866. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS A. Soldering Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with the following installation requirements: Tin -Antimony Solder: Water ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA. B. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non -Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval of the Florida Building Code. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Fernco, Inc. PART 3 — EXECUTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE TUBE AND FITTINGS PLUMBING 22 11 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install pipe, tube and fitting in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak -proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for pressure piping. B. Locate piping runs vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of buildings; limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for maximum 1.0" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. C. Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pans under piping that must be run through electrical spaces, verify with Engineer prior to running of pipe. D. Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system. Solder copper tube -and -fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. 3.2 CLEANING, FLUSHING AND FILLING A. Ensure all control and shut-off valves are fully open. Flush each system for a minimum of two hours. 3.3 PIPING TESTS A. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI 1331. B. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test piping system before insulation is installed. Remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. C. Required test period is 24 hours with no pressure drop. D. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 125 PSI test pressure. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE TUBE AND FITTINGS PLUMBING 22 11 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. F. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re -installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop -leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. G. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. END OF SECTION 22 11 00 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PIPE TUBE AND FITTINGS PLUMBING 22 11 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 1116 — DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of domestic water piping systems is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Applications for domestic water piping systems include the following: 1. Domestic cold water piping. 2. Domestic hot water piping. 3. Exterior water piping. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of domestic water piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable American National Standards pertaining to products and installation of domestic water piping systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data for domestic water piping systems, materials and products. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in domestic water piping systems. 2.2 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Provide pipe, tube, and fittings complying with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings", in accordance with the following listing: B. Domestic Water Piping - above grade 1. Tube Size 2" and smaller: Copper tube. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Wall Thickness: Type L, hard -drawn temper. 3. Fittings: Malleable copper, solder joints. C. Tube Size 2-1/2" and larger: Copper tube. 1. Wall thickness: Type K, hard -drawn temper. 2. Fittings: Malleable copper, solder joints. D. Domestic Water Piping - below grade 1. Tube Size 3/4" and smaller: Copper tube. 2. Wall Thickness: Type K, soft -annealed temper. 3. Fittings: Cast -copper, flared tube or solder joints. 2.3 SPECIAL PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Water Hammer Arresters: Provide bellows type water hammer arresters, stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 PSI, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watts, Amtrol Inc., Smith (Jay H.) Mfg. Co., Wade Div., Tyler Pipe, Zurn Industries, Inc. 2.4 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS A. Provide supports, anchors, and seals complying with Division 22 Basic materials and Methods section "Supports, Anchors and Seals", in accordance with the following listing: 1. Adjustable steel clevises, adjustable roller hangers, and adjustable pipe roll stands for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. 3. Concrete inserts, C-clamps, and steel brackets for building attachments. 4. Protection shields for insulated piping support in hangers. 2.5 BASIC VALVES A. Provide valves complying with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Valves", in accordance with the following listing: B. Sectional Valves: 1. 2" or Smaller: Ball or Gate valves. 2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Gate valves. C. Shutoff Valves: 1. 2" and Smaller: Ball or Gate valves. 2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Gate valves. D. Drain Valves: 1. 2" and Smaller: Ball or Gate valves. E. Check Valves: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. All Sizes: Swing check valves. 2.6 SPECIAL VALVES A. Special valves required for domestic water piping systems include the following types: B. Hose Bibbs: Threaded Ends: Bronze body, renewable composition disc, tee handle, 3/4" NPT inlet, 3/4" hose outlet with vacuum breaker. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancon, Inc., Smith, (Jay R.) Mfg. Co., Wade Division, Tyler Pipe, Zurn Industries, Inc. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC,WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING A. Install water distribution piping in accordance with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings". B. Sterilization solution shall be 400 PPM to 1000 PPM chlorine made from a sanitation grade chlorine or sodium hypochlorite. Solution shall remain in system for twenty-four (24) hours during which time valves and faucets are to be opened and closed several times. Outlets shall be tested to ensure an adequate amount of chlorine is present. At conclusion of sterilization, entire system shall be flushed with clean water until chlorine content is at a level approved by the Health Department. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR WATER PIPING A. Install exterior water service piping system in compliance with local governing regulations. B. Copper Tube: Install in accordance with recommended procedures of the Copper Development Association. C. Sterilization solution shall be 400 PPM to 1000 PPM chlorine made from a sanitation grade chlorine or sodium hypochlorite. Solution shall remain in system for twenty-four (24) hours during which time valves and faucets are to be opened and closed several times. Outlets shall be tested to ensure an adequate amount of chlorine is present. At conclusion of sterilization, entire system shall be flushed with clean water until chlorine content is at a level approved by the Health Department. D. Installation of all underground water lines shall include 14 GA irrigation wire, blue coated, secured to the pipe at T-0" on -centers in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Install piping specialties in accordance with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Piping Specialties". B. Water Hammer Arresters: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201, and elsewhere as indicated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 2211 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORT, ANCHORS, AND SEALS A. Install supports, anchors, and seals in accordance with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Supports, Anchors, and Seals". 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Install valves in accordance with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Valves". B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment, connections, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Drain Valves: Install on each plumbing equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain domestic water piping system. E. Check Valves: Install spring loaded check valves on discharge side of each pump, and swing check valves elsewhere as indicated. F. Hose Bibbs: Install where indicated with vacuum breaker. 3.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Piping Run -outs to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping run -outs to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by the Florida Building Code. B. Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection, provide drain valve on drain connection. 3.7 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish to Owner, one valve key to each key operated hydrant, hose bibb, or faucet installed. END OF SECTION 22 11 16 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 13 16 — SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of soil and waste piping system work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Applications for soil and waste piping systems include the following: 1. Above ground soil, waste and vent piping within buildings including soil stacks vent stacks, horizontal branches, traps, and connections to fixtures and drains. 2. Underground building drain piping including mains, branches, traps, connections to fixtures and drains, and connections to stacks, terminating at connection to sanitary sewers outside foundation wall. Verify inverts of mains and make final connection. 3. Refer to appropriate Division 22 sections for insulation required in conjunction with soil and waste piping; not work of this section. 4. Provide trenching and backfill required in conjunction with underground building drain piping. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of piping, products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable American National Standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste piping systems. C. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste piping systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for soil and waste piping systems materials and products. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL AND WASTE PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in soil and waste piping systems. 2.2 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Provide pipe, tube, and fittings complying with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings", in accordance with the following listing: B. Building Sanitary Piping (PVC): 1. PVC piping shall be Schedule 40 Solid Wall Pipe and PVC DWV Fitting System. 2. PVC shall be Schedule 40 solid wall pipe and PVC DWV fittings used in sanitary drain, waste, and vent (DWV), sewer, and storm drainage applications. This system is intended for use in non -pressure applications where the operating temperature will not exceed 140°F. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin rigid PVC (polyvinyl chloride) vinyl compounds with a Cell Class of 12454-B as identified in ASTM D 1784. PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be Iron Pipe Size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured as a system and be the product of one manufacturer. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Pipe and fittings shall conform to National Sanitation Foundation Standard 14. 4. Installation shall comply with the latest installation instructions published by the manufacturer. Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two-step process with primer manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564. The system shall be protected from chemical agents, fire stopping materials, thread sealant, plasticized vinyl products, or other aggressive chemical agents not compatible with PVC compounds. Systems shall be hydrostatically tested after installation. 2.3 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS A. Provide supports, anchors, and seals complying with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Supports, Anchors, and Seals", in accordance with the following listing: 1. Adjustable steel clevises, steel pipe clamps, and pipe saddle supports for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. 3. Concrete inserts, C-clamps, and steel brackets for building attachments. 2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS A. Provide factory fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated on the drawings. Where not indicated by schedule on the drawings, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations. 1. Cleanout Plugs: Cast -bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1 countersunk head. 2. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as follows: a. Nickel -Bronze Top; Manufacturer's standard cast unit of pattern indicated. b. Pattern: Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8" thick resilient floor finish. 3. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe; cast -bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 4. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. 5. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking -type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast -bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancon, Inc. Mfg. Co., Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co., Wade Div., Tyler Pipe, Zurn Industries. 2.5 FLOOR DRAINS A. Provide floor drains of size as indicated on drawings. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancon, Inc., Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co., Wade Div., Tyler Pipe, Zurn Industries. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SOIL AND WASTE ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Install soil and waste piping in accordance with Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section, "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings", and with Code. B. Soil, waste, and vent drain piping - Plug and fill system to highest point to provide at least ten (10) feet minimum head on all parts of system. Piping shall be watertight for at least one (1) hour under observed testing. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING DRAIN PIPING A. Install building drains as indicated and in accordance with the Florida Building Code. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. When installing building drains below grade, care shall be taken to ensure that the installed system is capable of withstanding anticipated earth loads and live loads to be exerted. B. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Clear the interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag -in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. C. Install soil and vent piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2%) for piping 2-1/2" and smaller, 1/8" per foot (1 %) for piping 3" to 6", and 1/16" per foot (2%) for piping 8" or larger. D. Below grade pipe installations shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, the Florida Building Code. E. Trench excavation, bedding, and backfill procedures shall be in accordance with Chapter IV of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Cleanouts: Install in sanitary above ground piping and sanitary building drain piping as indicated, as required by Code; at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 75' for larger piping; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, select type to match adjacent building finish. B. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through waterproof membrane. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DRAINS A. Install drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated. B. Coordinate with soil and waste piping as necessary to interface drains with drainage piping systems. C. Install drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor. D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Piping Run -outs to Fixtures: Provide soil and waste piping run -outs to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the Florida Building Code. B. Locate piping run -outs as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 3.6 PIPING TESTS A. Test soil and waste piping system in accordance with requirements of the Florida Building Code. END OF SECTION 22 13 16 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 14 13 — FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of storm water piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Applications for storm water piping include the following: 1. Conductor piping from drains and deck drains to building storm drain. 2. Building storm drain piping from conductor piping and area drains to storm sewers outside foundation wall. C. Refer to appropriate Division 02 sections for exterior storm sewer system required in conjunction with storm water piping. Verify inverts and make final connections. D. Refer to appropriate Division 22 sections for insulation required in conjunction with storm water piping. E. Trenching and backfill required in conjunction with storm water piping is specified in applicable Division 02 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of piping products of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for storm water piping systems materials and products. B. Roof drain piping: Plug and fill system to highest point to provide at least ten (10) feet minimum on all parts of system. Piping shall be watertight for at least one (1) hour under observed testing. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 STORM WATER PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in storm water piping systems. 2.2 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Provide pipe, tube, and fittings complying with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings", in accordance with the following listing: B. PVC Piping: 1. This specification covers PVC Schedule 40 solid wall pipe and PVC DWV fittings used in sanitary drain, waste, and vent (DWV), sewer, and storm drainage applications. This system is intended for use in non -pressure applications where the operating temperature will not exceed 140' F. 2. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin rigid PVC (polyvinyl chloride) vinyl compounds with a Cell Class of 12454-B as identified in ASTM D 1784. PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be Iron Pipe Size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured as a system and be the product of one manufacturer. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Pipe and fittings shall conform to National Sanitation foundation Standard 14. 3. Installation shall comply with the latest installation instructions published by the manufacturer and shall conform to all local plumbing, building, and fire code requirements. Solvent cement joints shall be made with primer manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564. The system shall be protected from chemical agents, fire stopping materials, thread sealant, plasticized vinyl products, or other aggressive chemical agents not compatible with PVC compounds. Systems shall be hydrostatically tested after installation. 4. Referenced Standards: ASTM D 1784 Rigid Vinyl Compounds ASTM D 1785 PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 ASTM D 2665 PVC Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe & Fittings ASTM D 2564 Solvent Cements for PVC Pipe and Fittings NSF Standard 14 Plastic Piping Components and Related Materials 5. Place color coded 6" wide 0.004" thick polyethylene printed plastic identification tape approximately 12" below finished grade directly above all underground piping systems. Tapes shall be continuously printed with "CAUTION" in large bold letters. The printed second line shall indicate the type of service below (print type of service on tape, i.e. acid waste.). Provide a Tracer Wire along all plastic pipe which runs in the ground. Installation of all plastic lines shall include 14 GA irrigation wire, blue coated, secured to the pipe at 3'-0" on -centers. 2.3 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS A. Provide supports, anchors, and seals complying with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section, "Supports, Anchors, and Seals", in accordance with the following listing: 1. Adjustable steel clevises, steel pipe clamps, and pipe saddle supports for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. 3. Concrete inserts, C-clamps, and steel brackets for building attachments. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS A. Provide factory fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated by schedule on the drawings, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations. 1. Cleanout Plugs: Cast -bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1 countersunk head. 2. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as follows: a. Nickel -Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit of pattern indicated. b. Pattern: Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8" thick resilient floor finish. 3. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast -bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover and screws. 4. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancon, Inc., Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co., Wade Div., Tyler Pipe, Zurn Industries. 2.5 ROOF DRAINS A. Provide roof drains of size and type as indicated on drawings. B. Downspout Nozzles: Cast -bronze body and flange, polished bronze finish, inside thread connection, 3 mounting holes in wall flange. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancon, Inc., Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co., Wade Div., Tyler Pipe, Zurn Industries. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF STORM WATER PIPING ABOVE GROUND A. Install storm water piping in accordance with Division 22 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube, and Fittings", and with the Florida Building Code. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING DRAIN PIPING A. Install storm water building drains as indicated and in accordance with the Florida Building Code. Lay storm building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Piping shall be water tight under 50 foot head. B. Install storm water piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2%) for piping 3" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1%) for piping 4" and larger. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS A. Cleanouts: Install in conductor piping and storm building drain piping as indicated, as required by the Florida Building Code; at each change in direction of piping greater than 50'; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 75' for larger piping; and at base of each conductor. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping. Select type to match adjacent building finish. B. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each cleanout passing through waterproof membrane. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DRAINS A. Install drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated. B. Coordinate flashing work with work of roofing, waterproofing and adjoining substrate work. C. Coordinate with roofing as necessary to interface roof drains with roofing work. D. Coordinate with storm water piping as necessary to interface drains with drainage piping systems. E. Install drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. F. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of water -proof membranes, where penetrated. G. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 3.5 PIPING TESTS A. Test storm water piping system in accordance with requirements of the Florida Building Code. END OF SECTION 22 14 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 30 00 — PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of plumbing equipment work is indicated on drawings and provisions of this section, including schedules and equipment lists associated with either drawings or this section. B. Types of plumbing equipment required for project include the following: 1. Domestic water heaters: Commercial electric water heaters 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of plumbing equipment of type and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of plumbing equipment. D. USDA Approval: Comply with requirements of United States Department of Agriculture for approved materials and installation practices for protective liners for potable water storage tanks. E. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: For the following equipment, comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction, and stamp with ASTM Code Symbol: Commercial water heaters F. ASME Relief Valve Stamps: Provide water heaters with safety relief valves hearing ASME valve markings. G. Mineral Standards: Provide mineral products for water softeners, acceptable under state and local public health control regulations. H. AWWA Compliance: Comply with applicable American Water Works Association standards pertaining to steel water tanks. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's plumbing equipment specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 1PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for all components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of plumbing equipment. Include "trouble -shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual. E. Submit certificate indicating USDA approval of potable water storage tank. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS A. Commercial Electric Water Heaters: 1. Provide commercial electric water heaters of size, capacity, and electrical characteristics as indicated on schedule. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1 for energy efficiency. Provide UL listing, and NSF approval. 2. Heater: Working pressure of 150 PSI, magnesium anode rod; glass lining on internal surfaces exposed to water. 3. Heating Elements: Heavy-duty, medium watt density, with incoloy sheath, thermostat stepped through magnetic contactors. 4. Safety Controls: Double pole, manual reset, high limit; probe -type electric low water cutoff; both factory wired. 5. Jacket: Equip with full size control compartments with front panel opening. Insulate tank with vermin -proof glass fiber insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with bonderized undercoat and baked enamel finish. 6. Warranty: Furnish 3 year limited warranty for tank leakage. 7. Accessories: Provide brass drain valve; 3/4" temperature and pressure relief valve; ASME tank construction for 125 psi working pressure; and 4" x 6" hand hole cleanout. 8. Controls: Adjustable immersion thermostat; power circuit fusing; pilot light and switch controlling control circuit; 3-stage time delay sequencer; and 7-day time clock. 9. Acceptable Manufacturers: A. O. Smith, Rheem, Ruud, State Industries. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS A. Electric Water Heaters: 1. Install electric water heaters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes. 2. Support: Set units on concrete pads, orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access. Level and plumb the units. 3. Electrical Supply: Furnish wiring diagram to Electrical Installer. 4. Piping: Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect recirculating water line to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. 5. Start -Up: Start-up, test, and adjust electric water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Check and calibrate controls. END OF SECTION 22 30 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 22 40 00 — PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work of this section shall be governed by all provisions of the general, supplementary and special conditions of these specifications and the drawings. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. All plumbing fixtures shall be of "First Quality" as defined and set forth in Commercial Standard CS77-28 as promulgated by the US Department of Commerce. All fixtures are to be white vitreous china unless otherwise specifically noted. Where enameled iron fixtures are specified, they shall be furnished with acid resisting enamel. B. Fixtures and fittings proposed shall be from one manufacturer and of similar character in any room or location. Escutcheons, handles, etc., on the different fixtures shall be of the same design. C. The fixture numbers and types are scheduled on the drawings and are used to indicate type and quality of fixtures desired. D. All fixtures and fittings proposed shall be submitted for approval with cuts and full description. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Provide factory -fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. For each type fixture, provide fixture manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats and valves as indicated by their published product information, either as designed and constructed or as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for a complete installation. Where more than one type is indi- cated, selection is Installer's option; but, all fixtures of same type must be furnished by a single manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise specified, comply with applicable Federal Specification WW-P-541/-Series sections pertaining to plumbing fixtures, fittings, trim, metals and finishes. Comply with requirements of WW-P-541/-specification relative to quality of ware, glazing enamel, composition and finish of metals, air gaps and vacuum breakers, even though some plumbing fixtures specified in this section are not described in WW-P-451/-Series. 1. Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes, stains, discoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Where fittings, trim and accessories are exposed or semi -exposed, provide bright chrome -plated or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. B. Stainless Steel Sheets: ANSI/ASTM A 167, Type 302/304, hardest workable temper. Finish: No. 4, bright, directional polish on exposed surfaces. C. Vitreous China: High quality, free from fire cracks, spots, blisters, pinholes and specks; glaze exposed surfaces and test for crazing resistance in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C 554. 2.3 PLUMBING FITTINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Water Outlets: At locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control), provide commercial quality faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type and size indicated and as required to operate as indicated. Include manual shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit outlet servicing without shutdown of water supply piping systems. B. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with flush valves and locations where water outlets are equipped for hose attachment. C. P-Traps: Include adjustable and removable P-traps with cleanouts where drains are indicated for direct connection to drainage system. D. Carriers: Provide carriers indicated, or, if not indicated, provide rectangular floor mounted cast iron supports for fixtures of either graphitic gray iron, ductile iron, or malleable iron as required. E. Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fixture bolt caps finished to match fixture finish. F. Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed locations, provide chrome -plated, cast -brass escutcheons with set screw. G. All faucets, stops and fittings must each be of one manufacturer with interchangeable parts, unless otherwise specified. All units are to be manufactured from brass and monel metal and be of institutional quality. H. Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in fixture schedule included at the end of section. 2.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering plumbing fixtures and trim which may be incorporated in the work include the following: Plumbing Fixtures: American Standard, Briggs, Crane, Eljer, Kohler. Plumbing Trim: American Standard, Delta, Elkay, Moen, Chicago Faucets, Kohler Co., T & S Brass. Flush Valves: Zurn Aqua Flush, Delaney, Sloan. Fixture Seats: Bemis, Beneke, Church, Olsonite, Sperzel. Water Coolers: Ebco (Oasis), Elkay, Halsey Taylor, Haws, Sunroc. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Mop Basins: Creative Industries, Fiat Products, Mustee, Stern -Williams. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay Manufacturing Co., Just Manufacturing Co. Fixture Carriers: Jonespec, Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn Industries, Wade. Traps and Supplies: Brasscraft, Engineered Brass Company, Eljer Plumbingware, McGuire. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Layout fixtures and indicated on the drawings. B. Carefully install fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's data with sufficient clearances to coordinate with accessories, specialties and equipment specified in other divisions of these specifications and/or as shown on the drawings. C. Hangers and carriers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with good practice and workmanship. D. Clean all exposed metal surfaces from grease, dirt, paint or other foreign material. E. Fixtures shall be properly protected from damage during construction and shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's instruction under this section of the specification. F. Fixtures, chrome -plated piping, fittings and trim shall be polished before requesting acceptance of the system. END OF SECTION 22 40 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 00 00 — HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. Bidders of work in Sections under Division 23 are expected to have read these requirements and, upon subcontracting work called for in such Sections, shall be responsible for compliance with such Sections. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. All work under Division 23 shall comply with the codes and standards as listed on the project drawings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Technical Definitions: 1. "Piping" shall mean pipe, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, hangers, traps, drains, insulation, vents and items customarily required in connection with the transfer of fluids. 2. "Concealed" shall mean embedded in masonry or other construction, installed within or behind wall furring, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in attics, in crawl spaces, in chases, in shafts, buried in trenches, etc. 3. "Exposed" shall mean not concealed. 4. "Demolition" shall be the removal of any existing equipment, and the capping or plugging or any existing services to that equipment. Adjacent surfaces shall be restored to existing conditions and adjacent surfaces. 5. "Furnish" means to purchase and deliver products and equipment to the project site and prepare for installation. 6. 'Install' means to assemble, erect, place, anchor and connect furnished products into satisfactory operation. 7. "Provide" means to furnish and install. 8. "Contract Documents" shall include the written Project Manual and the Drawings. 9. Divisions 21, 22 and 23 are the new CSI divisions replacing the old Division 15 nomenclature. They shall be hereby defined as interchangeable. 10. Division 26 is the new CSI division replacing the old Division 16 nomenclature. They shall be hereby defined as interchangeable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Certain standard materials and installation requirements are described by reference to standard specifications. These standards include the following: ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers NFPA - National Fire Protection Association @2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association UL - Underwriters Laboratories EPA— Environmental Protection Agency ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASHRAE SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute AMA - Acoustical Materials Association NEC - National Electric Code ISO — International Organization for Standardization B. Whenever a reference is made to a standard, installation or materials the intention is such shall comply with the latest published edition at the time project is bid, unless the edition is otherwise specified herein. C. Materials and equipment herein shall be new and standard catalogued items manufactured by reputable concerns regularly supplying such materials. Material shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label or other appropriate label where such is required or allowed by code, by Contract Documents or by authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). D. Product deliveries shall be arranged in accordance with construction schedules and to avoid conflict with work and site conditions. 1. Deliver and store products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately, on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.5 AMPLIFICATION A. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the indication and/or description of an item, in the Contract Documents, carries with it the intent to provide the item, regardless of whether or not this is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description. B. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words and abbreviations which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. C. In case of discrepancy concerning quality and/or quantity within the Contract Documents, the better quality and/or the greater quantity shall be provided, at no increase to the contract sum. D. No exclusions from, or limitations in, the language used in the Contract Documents shall be interpreted as meaning that the appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required system or item of equipment are to be omitted. E. The Drawings, of necessity, utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work. The work shall be installed, in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on the architectural and structural drawings. F. Where Contract Documents conflict, such conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification. In general, the Architectural Drawings shall take precedence over the HVAC Drawings with regard to building construction. Any change from the Drawings necessary to make the work conform to the building as it is constructed, to fit the work of other trades, or to the rules of authorities having jurisdiction, shall be made at no expense to the Owner. G. No interpretation shall be made from the limitations of symbols and diagrams that any elements necessary for complete Work are excluded. H. Certain details appear on the Drawings, which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and positioning of the Work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate responsibility for field coordination for the indicated Work. Capacities, sizes and conditions specified or shown are allowable minimums. Based on design and rated operating conditions of systems, motors shall not be overloaded. Equipment shall not operate at speeds or temperatures greater than manufacturer's published recommendations, and no strain or demand shall be imposed upon any component to any system, structure or building. The Architect reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of HVAC work or equipment prior to "roughing -in" without additional cost to the contract. Architect approval for deviations from drawing locations and layout shall be obtained prior to installation. K. The use of a word in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other indications denote that more than one item is required. L. In the event that extra work is authorized, work shown on Drawings depicting such work, and/or described by Addendum, Architectural Supplemental Instruction, or by Change Order, shall be subject to the basic requirements set forth in Division One and Contract Documents in all respects. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. All entities and personnel performing work for this project shall be regularly engaged and experienced in the type of work to be furnished and shall be licensed for such specialty trades, employ only properly qualified foremen, journeymen and apprentices as appropriate and in keeping with best trade practices. B. Each firm shall provide, upon request, a list of similar jobs it has completed. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Locations of all pipes, ducts, panels, appliances, etc., as shown on the Drawings are approximate only and are understood to be subject to such revisions as may prove necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. All work shall be installed with relation to building conditions and shall be installed correct with reference to finished elevations, etc. Exterior utilities shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only. Their exact locations, depths and invert elevations shall be as required for proper flow and coordination with other trades. B. The Drawings show the general arrangement of piping and ductwork. Should local conditions necessitate any rearrangement, and before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five (5) copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect's review. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. If equipment, piping, and ductwork, are installed requiring space conditions other than those shown, or arranged, and rearrangement of the space is necessitated, the Architect shall review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accomplished by submission of Shop Drawings of the space in question. D. The Contractor is responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes, or openings in the building structure pertaining, and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. E. The Contractor shall so coordinate the work so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner. Piping interferences shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines, which require a stated slope for proper operation. Sewer lines, storm lines, and condensate piping shall take precedence over water lines in determination of elevations. Where there is interference between sewer lines, storm lines, and condensate lines, the sewer lines shall have precedence and provisions shall be made in the condensate lines for looping them around the sewer lines. In all cases, lines requiring a stated grade for their proper operation shall have precedence over electrical work and ductwork. F. All piping and ductwork in finished areas, except where noted to the contrary, shall be installed in chases, furred spaces, above ceilings, etc. In all cases, pipes and ducts shall be installed as high as possible. Runs of piping shall be grouped whenever feasible. G. All oiling devices and all parts of equipment requiring adjustments shall be easily accessible. Provide access doors and panels if required for proper maintenance of all equipment and devices requiring service. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. All existing utilities shall be located prior to the beginning of work. Any conflicts shall be resolved and noted on the Record Documents. B. Adequate means of protection for all utilities shall be provided and, if utilities are damaged during working operations, such shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner, at no cost to the contract. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the layout of mechanical work with other trades. Locations of structural systems, plumbing, and HVAC work should take preference over the location of conduit runs. 1.10 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION A. The operation of air conditioning equipment during construction is prohibited unless the following procedures are strictly followed: 1. Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of his intent to use the equipment to dehumidify the building and/or to control air borne contaminants. 2. For each piece of equipment used, a record log shall be maintained which indicates starting date and every day operation. Log shall indicate all service and maintenance work completed on the equipment. 3. A minimum MERV 8 filters shall be in place in all return air intakes and the filter section of all air handling units. Record of filter change shall be maintained at each filter location. 4. Upon completion of the work, and prior to the Substantial Completion, the interior of air handling units shall be vacuum cleaned. Coils and drain pans shall be washed. 5. Test and Balance Agency shall measure and record temperature and humidity throughout the facility. Report to be available at Substantial Completion Inspection. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 6. Failure to keep and present required records will mandate that all air moving equipment and ducts be opened and cleaned in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor will be responsible for the cost of the personnel assigned by the Owner, Architect and Engineer to witness the cleaning process. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK: A. All work shall be installed as required to meet all construction schedules. B. Prior to starting the work, carefully verify all measurements at the site and determine that the work will properly clear openings, structural members and other work. Correlate the time of each work item with all other items to the best advantage of the completed job. Furnish, in ample time to avoid delays in the work, all information required to revise footing elevations, structural elements, chases and openings in floors and walls, and to provide clearances which may be required to accommodate the work. Set all sleeves, anchor bolts and inserts required to accommodate equipment before concrete is poured or masonry work is started. C. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping, ductwork, or other utilities be encountered during work operations, notify the Architect immediately for clarification. Cooperate with utility companies to maintain active utilities in operation. D. Immediately act to put any damaged utilities back in functioning conditions. E. Installation and equipment shop drawings shall be initialed and dated upon installation. This procedure will enable the Architect to verify the work in progress. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the work until its completion and formal final Substantial Completion. Replace any work which may be damaged, lost or stolen without additional cost to the Owner. G. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection of the work and for delivery to and removal from the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required. H. Minimize construction noise levels in all locations adjacent to or in occupied areas. The Owner reserves that right to prevent use of any tools which cause detrimental vibration or noise when the facility is occupied. Protect equipment and materials during construction from damage from water, dirt, welding and cutting splatter, paint drippings, etc., by use of shields and drop cloths. Damaged equipment or materials shall be repaired (or replaced) to the Architect's satisfaction. Provide the following accessory materials for mechanical systems. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Anchor bolts or other anchoring devices shall be of the size and type recommended by equipment manufacturer for specific application. 2. Structural support (steel) for elevated or suspended mechanical items shall be made with connections using "simple" framing. 3. Resilient isolation pads for motors and equipment shall be rubber -in -shear pads and of type recommended by manufacturers of the motor and equipment. All air handlers and cooling equipment shall be provided with isolation pads between the equipment and the concrete housekeeping pad. 4. Dielectric fittings shall be provided between dissimilar metals such as copper piping joins steel or iron piping, insulating bushings or unions. 5. Escutcheons shall be provided where pipes pierce partitions, floors, walls or ceilings. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated. 6. All pipe and duct penetrations of rated floors and walls shall be properly sealed in accordance with UL approved details. Coordinate penetrations with the appropriate detail or reference on the Contract Drawings. 7. Provide a secondary drain pan under all condensate producing equipment. Drain pan shall include a float switch wired to shut down the air handler and cooling system once tripped. K. Delay caused by equipment not being on the job site when required shall be avoided in the following manner: Provide temporary substitute equipment (subject to approval of the project Architect), allowing the building to become operative. The temporary substitute equipment shall later be removed and replaced with that originally specified or approved when it arrives, all at the convenience of and at no additional cost to the Owner. L. All products with compressor sections shall be started by a factory trained service technician. Provide written report indicating start-up results. Provide extended compressor parts warranty for all compressors for a total five year warranty on all compressors. Provide manufacturer's phase loss protection. 3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A. The Architect shall have the authority to determine the method of submitting shop drawings whether in multiple sets or by the reproducible transparency technique. B. Submittals are required for all items of mechanical equipment and products. C. For items reviewed and marked "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit", only one additional submittal will be reviewed to verify product compliance with the Contract Documents. Should further submittals be required for the Design Professional to verify the submittal with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the hourly rate of $ 150.00 will be billed to the Contractor for the Professional(s) time spent on the review. D. Submittals shall be referenced to the Contract Documents. For all equipment, which has been scheduled directly on the Drawings, provide within the submittal, a performance schedule for the proposed equipment in the same format as included on the Contract Documents. E. Manufacturer's catalog cuts may be submitted for all standard cataloged equipment, provided that the item required to meet the project specification is not modified in any way from the standard catalog version. Where multiple products are included on the same cut sheet, clearly identify the product proposed for installation by striking through all sections not applicable to the proposed product. Do not provide useless or unnecessary pages in the submittal package. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. Cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate the exact size, type, rating, capacity, etc., of the item to be provided. G. Bind shop drawings/catalog-cuts in three ring binders with a title sheet and identification on front and side of the binder. Allow space for Contractor, Project Architect and Engineer review stamps. Index all items to the Project Manual or Drawings as applicable. H. All submittals must bear the handwritten signature of the Contractor and his stamp of approval before being considered for review by the Architect. Full electrical characteristics for each device requiring power shall be prominently displayed on the shop drawings or submittal. Additionally, a statement signed by maker of the submittal shall be included indicating that he or she has carefully examined the electrical characteristics specified in the Contract Documents (and if remodeling or an addition, as to existing electrical characteristics), and that the motors, equipment or devices proposed to be furnished are fully compatible. A similar statement shall be included stating the supplier has reviewed the space requirements of the project and that the submitted equipment will fit in the space provided and the manufacturer's required service requirements have been met. J. Shop drawings that deviate from the requirements of the contract documents shall list all differences in a cover letter attached to top of the submittal. 3.3 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prior to the installation and fabrication of HVAC systems, submit detailed, overlaid coordination drawings at a minimum 1/4" = V-0" scale. Drawings are to include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following items: Detailed sheet metal drawings indicating all ductwork, volume dampers, access doors, smoke/fire dampers, grilles, registers and diffusers, air handling equipment, penetrations through roofs, floors, etc. Include elevation, and appropriate section, of all air handling systems. B. Coordinate with other trades for installation without conflict. 3.4 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Visit and carefully examine those portions of the site and/or present buildings affected by this work so as to become familiar with existing conditions and difficulties that will affect the execution of the work, before submitting proposals. B. Submission of a proposal will be construed as evidence that such examination has been made. Later claims for labor, equipment, materials, etc. required because of difficulties encountered, which could have been foreseen had such examination been made, will not be recognized. 3.5 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Furnish access doors and panels for proper and adequate access to all dampers, smoke detectors, and other mechanical equipment which is concealed in walls, furring and hung ceilings, or where may additionally be necessary. B. Material and Finish: Access doors shall conform to the finish of adjacent construction as indicated in the finish schedule. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Provide all electrical work and connections except those specifically set forth below as being provided under Division 26 work. 1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide under Division 26 all wiring except the following which will be provided under Division 23: a. Temperature Control Wiring. b. Equipment Control Wiring. C. Interlock Wiring. d. 120V power for energy management controllers. Power for controllers shall be provided by the sub -contractor providing the controls and shall be installed by licensed electricians. 2. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide all power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters and shall connect to power lugs on the equipment. 3. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide all motor starters and contactors except when specified to be furnished by the equipment manufacturer under Division 23. 4. Conduits: a. When Conduit is required for control wiring, the Electrical Subcontractor shall provide under Division 26. Conduit shall be provided for all control work installed within mechanical spaces (exposed) and in walls. 5. Motors: a. Motors shall be furnished by the manufacturer or supplier of the specified equipment. All motors shall be of the premium efficiency type. b. General purpose motors shall be open drip -proof conforming to NEMA Design B, Class B insulation, continuous 400 C ambient, 60 Hz, 1.15 service factor, and 1800 RPM maximum speed unless specified otherwise. All motors smaller than 3/4 HP shall be self-lubricating. C. Motors shall be protected with thermal overload devices in the motor, or by the motor starter. d. Motors which are required to operate in conjunction with variable frequency drives shall be specifically rated for such application. e. Single phase motors 1/2 HP and smaller shall have built-in overload protection; over 1/2 HP shall have motor starters as overload protection. f. Single Phase motors shall be capacitor start, capacitor run. g. Equipment requiring 1,000 Watts or more shall have a power factor of 85% or greater at rated load conditions. Equipment with power factor less than 85% shall be corrected to at least 90% under full load operating conditions. Power factor corrective devices shall be switched with related equipment. h. Motor characteristics which change from that specified, due to the Contractor electing to use one of the optional manufacturers, or an updated model, etc., shall be coordinated with the Electrical Contractor prior to bid. This Contractor is responsible for the cost of any revisions necessary to provide proper power and control connections in full accordance with the National Electric Code. B. Air conditioning equipment containing various electrical components within its housing shall be furnished with internal wiring arranged to terminate at one set of electrical power lugs. Components shall be approved for group operation as defined by National Electrical Code, or auxiliary equipment must be provided as required to satisfy the National Electrical Code and UL Labels (or other labels) of the unit. C. All three-phase compressorized units (i.e. chillers, condensing units, rooftop units, custom units, etc.) shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard phase loss protection. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.7 PAINTING A. All work shall be left clean and free from oil, dirt and grease prior to field painting. B. Upon completion, thoroughly clean all equipment, ductwork, piping and other work to remove all dirt, grease, rust and oil. Thoroughly prepare all such work for painting. C. Equipment: 1. All equipment shall have factory standard finish. 2. Factory finished equipment which has rusted or been damaged shall be repaired, cleaned, spot primed and entirely repainted the original color. 3. Insulation coverings shall be cleaned, sized (if necessary), and painted for service identification. D. Ferrous metals which are not exposed to view within the building, such as piping, pipe hangers, angle supports, supports for apparatus, black iron partitions or casings, tanks, etc., shall be painted with one coat of priming zinc chromate. E. Ferrous metals which are exposed to view or to the weather, such as pipes, pipe supports, supporting or stiffening angles for exhaust elbows, exhaust heads, air conditioning units, etc., shall be painted in accordance with the Painting Section of the Project Manual. F. Paint inside of all ductwork where visible through register or through diffuser or grille faces with one coat of flat black paint. 3.8 PENETRATION OF WATERPROOFING (INCLUDING WATERPROOF CONCRETE) A. Where any work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete, the method of installation shall be approved by the Architect before the work is completed. B. Provide all necessary sleeves, sealant and flashing materials required to make openings absolutely water tight. 3.9 PENETRATIONS A. The penetration of any sound proofing materials shall include all necessary materials and labor to provide thorough and complete caulking of all penetrations through walls, partitions and decks, whether such penetration occurs above or below dropped ceiling lines. B. Penetrations of special materials (such as face brick, plaster, dry wall, precast concrete, etc.) shall be done by the trades doing such original work. C. Penetrations shall be cut or patched by such skilled mechanics in a manner that the hole is uniformly 1/8 inch clear all around the item penetrating it (including insulation) so that a full penetration (but not excessive) sealant bead can be installed. D. Sealing work shall be completed in compliance with the requirements of the Caulking and Sealants Section of the Project Manual. E. Any pipe, duct, conduit or other item penetrating a wall, partition or deck which tends to vibrate, shall have sufficient corrective methods affected to one or both sides of the penetration that no vibration occurs at point of penetration. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, as required, including shoring and bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property shall be provided as required. B. Backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding six inches (6") in depth. Completed backfill shall conform to surrounding ground and finish grade and with compaction requirements of the Project Manual. 1. Concrete encasement: Piping passing under footings, foundations and other locations as shown on drawings shall be encased by eight inches (8") minimum concrete on all sides. Concrete shall conform to Division Three requirements. 2. Extend concrete encasement eight (8") inches around piping and twelve (12) each side of footings or foundations. C. Remove non -usable excavated material from the site. Do not remove usable material from site. D. Provide and operate pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water. E. Repair and restore paving, streets, curbs, walks, and other work in the area where excavations are made. F. Provide additional excavation and backfill where required to resolve conflicts in buried lines. G. Hold trench width to a minimum. H. Do not excavate utility trenches parallel to building footings closer than four feet (4') from the footings except by approval of the Architect. When parallel trenches require cuts deeper than the building footings, the horizontal distance from the footing shall be equal to, or greater than one and one half (1-1/2) times the vertical distance below the footing, but in no case shall the horizontal distance be less than four (4') feet except by the approval of the Architect. Mechanical excavation shall be held to four inches (4") above final grade of the bottom of trench. The remainder shall be shaped by manual excavation, so that piping is fully supported on undisturbed soil. Shoring of piping in trench will not be allowed. Whenever, in the opinion of the Architect, the soil is unsuitable for supporting piping and appurtenances, provisions for proper foundations shall be made at no additional cost to the contract. Soil test reports are bound in the Project Manual. K. Wherever trenching or excavating, assume utilities may exist in area without such being shown on the drawings. Exercise extreme caution. Should existing facilities be damaged, repair such to Architect's satisfaction at no additional cost to the contract. 3.11 UNDERGROUND PIPING PROTECTION A. Protect the exterior surface of all underground steel piping against rust and corrosion. For piping not specified elsewhere to be furnished with factory applied pipe corrosion resistant wrapping, the piping surfaces shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, etc. with a wire brush and shall be free of oil and grease and completely dry. Brush on or otherwise apply as recommended by the manufacturer, a heavy full coating of TC Mastic (Tape Coat Company, Evanston, Illinois) or Reilly Protective Coast Tar Enamel No. 3302 (Reilly Tar and Chemical Company, Indianapolis, Indiana). Dry coating shall be not less than twelve mils thickness. Protect freshly covered surfaces and delay applying insulation (if required) and delay covering with earth for at least 12 hours as ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL recommended by the manufacturers, and depending on the weather. Cathodic protection shall be provided for all buried ferrous piping. 3.12 CHASING, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide and place required sleeves, forms and inserts before walls, ceilings, partitions, floors or roofs are built. B. When it becomes necessary to cut finished materials, submit to the Architect for approval, drawings showing the work required and obtain approval before doing such cutting. C. Provide exact dimensions and locations of these openings (to suit the apparatus to be used) before such walls are built. D. No cutting or altering the work of others will be permitted without the approval of the Architect. No structural members shall be cut without the previous written approval of the Architect. E. Any holes in existing slabs or other concrete or finished work required for the installation of new piping shall be core bored and sealed. F. Finish patch cut areas with floor tile, drywall, plaster, ceiling panels or tiles as required to match the existing surface. Paint entire disturbed painted area to match the existing. Provide new ceiling panels and grid, which may have damaged during construction. 3.13 SLEEVES A. Sleeves up through 8" diameter shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe and machine cut. B. Sleeves, 10" diameter and larger, shall be fabricated from 12 gauge steel sheet. C. Watertight seals: "Linkseal" by Thunderline Corporation. D. Sleeves shall provide 1/2" minimum clearance all around passing pipe or pipe insulation. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves. E. Fill space around ducts and pipes in sleeves in exposed areas and through fire walls and partitions with non-flammable sealing compound equal to Dow Corning Silicone RTV Foam. F. Close off all spaces around rectangular ducts through walls with sheet metal collars. G. Sleeves through walls shall be cut flush with each surface. H. Install sleeves plumb and true to line, grade and position. I. Pipe sleeves penetrating outside walls shall be packed with insulating material, sealed and made waterproof. 3.14 LUBRICATION AND PACKING A. Equipment shall be lubricated, using manufacturer's recommended lubricants, with correct type and quantity of lubricant before placing into service. B. Packing glands shall be examined for proper packing. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. When filling systems initially for hydrostatic pressure tests, adjust valve packing glands to finger tight, and allow packing to absorb water for 5 minutes prior to tightening packing nuts. 3.15 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION A. All equipment shall operate (under all conditions of load) free of noise and vibration. Sound and vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Architect shall be corrected by whatever additional work is required in an approved manner at no cost to the Contract. B. Vibration control shall be by means of approved vibration eliminators (or suppressors) in a manner as recommended by the manufacturer of the eliminators and as required by the manufacturer of the equipment. Submit shop drawings for review by the Architect. 3.16 CLEANING A. Upon completion, ductwork, piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, rust and oil, primed where necessary, and made ready for painting. Vacuum clean the inside and outside of fan plenums, air handling units and equipment cabinets. Vacuum clean coils and comb out damaged fins. B. Clean galvanized piping and ductwork in exposed areas. C. Clean copper piping in exposed areas with emery cloth and solvent. D. Clean gauges, thermometers, traps, strainers and fittings. 3.17 TEST AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Make tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status and satisfactory operation of all systems and components. Tests shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect and as required by code. Provide instruments and labor necessary to conduct these tests and have them verified by the Architect. B. Provide a letter addressed to the Owner advising that the completed systems have been installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that such are in proper operating condition. The Owner shall receive a written guarantee covering all defects in workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise stated, provide extended compressor parts warranty, for a total five year warranty, for all compressors. 3.18 INSTRUCTIONS A. After the systems are in operation, and tests are complete, instruct the designated personnel of the Owner on the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. Entire session shall be video and audio recorded, with copy provided to the Owner and Architect. B. Provide a minimum of twenty four (24) hours total instruction. Instructions shall include the following: 1. Location of equipment and explanation of function. 2. Review of operating instruction manual for record and clarity. 3. Explanation of specific maintenance requirements to be performed by the Owner. 4. Complete review of the equipment's Sequence of Operation and critical schedules and setpoints. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Certify in writing that the designated personnel of the Owner (indicated above) were fully instructed in the care, operation and maintenance of all mechanical equipment. This certification shall be signed by all persons attending acknowledging they attended the full instructional program. 3.19 ENGINEER'S PROJECT SITE VISITS A. When the engineer or his designated representative visits the site to review the installation, all tools, ladders, current Contract Documents, etc. necessary for the review of the work shall be provided. B. The Engineer will provide a typed list of deficiencies noted during the site visit for corrective action. Prior to request for supplementary visits, provide an initialed and dated copy of the last report indicating the current status of the noted deficiency corrections. 3.20 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Prior to request for substantial completion, all HVAC systems shall be verified for proper operation and control. Substantiation of complete and operational systems shall be verified by submission of the following documents and forms: 1. Completed Test and Balance Report. Reports submitted with comments or punch lists will be rejected and substantial completion inspection rescheduled at the Contractor's expense. The final Test and Balance Report shall be provided to the Architect and Engineer seven days before the scheduled substantial completion walk-through. 2. A letter signed by a corporate officer of the Temperature Controls Installer certifying that the control system operation has been verified through a point-to-point inspection and that the system is calibrated and operates as intended. 3. Completed Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Manuals shall be prepared in accordance with the latest edition of ASHRAE Guideline 4, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems. END OF SECTION 23 00 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL REQUEST FOR PRIOR APPROVAL NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: This letter must be sent to the Architect, with copy to the engineer as per Prior Approval Requirements of the Project Manual (Seven or Ten days as applicable). [DATE:] [ARCHITECT NAME] Re: [PROJECT NAME] [ARCHITECT/OTHER] Project No.: Dear We hereby request approval to bid the following products for this project: REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL: Section , Paragraph We request that be added as an acceptable manufacturer. Section , Paragraph We request that be added as an acceptable manufacturer. Section , Paragraph We request that be added as an acceptable manufacturer. We understand that listing of the above manufacturers is for bidding purposes only. The Manufacturer is responsible to meet all capacity, controllability of equipment, space requirements, and service clearances as per basis of design. [CLOSING SIGNATURE] cc: Consulting Engineering Associates, Inc. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC 23 00 00 - 14 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 05 13 ELECTRICAL WORK ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Electrical work required: 1. All power wiring and conduit. (Provided under Division 26). 2. Control wiring. (Provided under Division 23). 3. Motor disconnects. (Provided under Division 26). 4. Starters provided under Division 26, except when furnished with packaged equipment; wiring under Division 26. 5. Conduit and control wiring for Division 23 work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). B. Electrical equipment shall conform to NEMA standards and shall be UL listed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish to Electrical Contractor equipment shop drawings that indicate all required power connections. B. Prepare complete terminal -to -terminal wiring diagrams that show terminal designation on control items and equipment. Diagrams may be part of temperature control submittals. C. Provide letter on mechanical subcontractor's letterhead certifying that coordination has taken place with the electrical subcontractor and all electrical requirements for mechanical equipment have been met. Additionally, mechanical submittals shall be provided to the electrical subcontractor. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. All motors shall be premium efficiency. B. General purpose motors shall be open drip -proof conforming to NEMA Design, Class B insulation, continuous 40' C ambient, 60 Hz, 1.15 service factor, and 1800 RPM maximum speed unless specified otherwise. Voltage and phase shall be as specified. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ELECTRICAL WORK 23 05 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Motors shall be single phase below 3/4 HP and three phase 3/4 HP and larger, unless specified otherwise. 1. Single phase motors shall have built in overload protection. 2. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start, capacitor run. 2.2 EQUIPMENT POWER FACTOR A. Equipment requiring 1000 watts or more shall have a factor of 85% or greater at rated load conditions. Equipment with power factor less than 85% shall be corrected to at least 90% under full load operating conditions. Power factor corrective devices shall be switched with related equipment. 2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE A. This section provides specification requirements for solid-state, pulse -width modulated (PWM) Adjustable Frequency Drives, herein referred to as AC Drives, for use with NEMA® design AC motors. B. The AC Drive supplier shall furnish, field test, adjust and certify all installed AC Drives for satisfactory operation. C. Drives shall conform to: ANSI®/NFPA® 70 - National Electrical Code® (NEC@), UL 508 — UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment, UL 508C - UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment, NEMA ICS 7.1, IEC 60664-1 Annex A, ICC ES AC156. D. Provide manufacturer's 2 year parts and labor warranty from date of shipment. E. The manufacturer of the AC Drive shall be a certified ISO 9001 facility. The AC Drive and all associated optional equipment shall be UL Listed according to UL 508 C - Power Conversion Equipment. As verification, a UL label shall be attached on the inside of the combination enclosure. A UL508A panel builders label does not meet specification. The AC Drive shall be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with UL, CSA, NEMA, and NEC standards. Every power converter shall be tested with an AC induction motor while loaded and temperature cycled within an environment chamber at 40 °C (104 °F). GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1. The AC Drive shall convert the input AC mains power to an adjustable frequency and voltage. 2. The input power section shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers. The diode rectifiers shall convert fixed voltage and frequency, AC line power to fixed DC voltage. 3. The output power section shall change fixed DC voltage to adjustable frequency AC voltage. 4. The adjustable frequency NEMA 1 drive package shall consist of a circuit breaker disconnect, 2 contactor bypass, 120V control transformer, control circuit terminal board for digital and analog field wiring. AC line fuses do not meet specification. 5. The entire drive package, including the bypass starter circuit shall be UL508C listed and coordinated with NEMA ICS 7.1. A UL508A panel builder's label does not meet specification. G. The AC Drive power converter shall be enclosed in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure. The enclosure shall provide dedicated user terminals for power and control device connection. Provisions shall be included for locking the disconnect in the OFF position with a padlock to limit enclosure 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ELECTRICAL WORK 23 0513 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL access by unauthorized personnel. The UL Type 1 enclosure shall have bottom conduit knockouts for power and control wiring. All enclosures shall be of steel construction and the drive shall be fully enclosed. Exposed plastic covers or back panel mounted power converters does not meet specification. H. The AC Drive shall be sized to operate a variable torque load. The speed range shall be from a minimum speed of 1.0 Hz to a maximum speed of 72 Hz. The AC Drive shall meet IEC 60664-1 Annex A and NEMA ICS 1, UL, and CSA standards. The AC Drive shall be designed to operate in an ambient temperature from 14 to 104° F. The storage temperature range shall be -13 to 149 *F. The maximum relative humidity shall be 95%, non -condensing. The AC Drive shall be rated to operate at altitudes less than or equal to 3300 FT. For altitudes above 3300 FT, the AC Drive should be de -rated per drive specifications. The AC Drive shall meet the IEC 60721-3-3-3M3 operational vibration specification. The AC Drive shall be Seismic Qualified to 2003 IBC NFPA 5000 and ASCE 7 Building Codes in compliance with ICC ES AC156 testing criteria with an Importance Factor 1p= 1.5. The AC Drive shall be designed to operate at 208 VAC (t) 10% or 230VAC (t) 10% or 460VAC Hz (t) 10%. The AC Drive shall operate from an input frequency range of 50 to 60 Hz (t) 5%. The displacement power factor shall not be less than .96 lagging under any speed or load condition. The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed and load shall 95% or greater. The variable torque rated AC Drive over current capacity shall be not less than 110% for 1 minute. K.. Upon power -up, the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid operation of memory, loss of analog reference input, loss of communication, DC -to -DC power supply, control power and pre - charge circuit. The enclosure shall provide a fully coordinated 100,000 AIC current rating marked on the enclosure nameplate. Short circuit coordination to UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment and NEMA ICS 7.1. The AC Drive shall be protected against short circuits, between output phases and to ground. The AC Drive shall have a solid-state UL 508C listed overload protective device and meet IEC 60947. The AC drive shall have a programmable under voltage management function which will allow for adjustable setting for level, bandwidth and detection time. The logic to maintain control for a minimum of one -second (60 cycles) without faulting. For a fault condition other than a ground fault, short circuit or internal fault, an auto restart function will provide up to 10 programmable restart attempts after a detected fault has occurred. Drive shall have programmable level of analog process follower reference signal; the AC Drive shall be programmable to display a fault below the selected level. The output frequency shall be software enabled to fold back when the motor is overloaded. L. The AC Drive shall have the capability to be programmed using pre -defined macros from a mobile device utilizing IOS5 or higher operating system. The iPadTM programming App shall allow access to all AC Drive parameters and provide storage for each individual fan or pump configuration. The App shall also store or provide internet links to all relevant published technical information including Instruction Manuals, Instructional demonstration videos, White Papers, Spare Parts lists, Service Contacts and general Technical Support. The AC Drive shall have the capability to be programmed using PC software and RS485 to USB adapter cable. All Parameter settings for each AC Drive shall be retained in a digital configuration file on PC for record. The AC Drive will be factory programmed to operate all specified optional 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ELECTRICAL WORK 23 05 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL devices. The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable from 0.1 to 3200 seconds. The memory shall retain and record run status and fault type of the past four faults. The AC Drive configuration shall have an provisions for an energy economy function that, when selected, will reduce the voltage to the motor when selected for variable torque loads. The output carrier frequency of the AC Drive shall be programmable from 6 to 16 kHz. In addition, the output carrier frequency shall be randomly modulated about the selected frequency. M. The AC Drive shall include LED or LCD status indicators for: power on, run, programming and monitoring mode. A keypad display interface shall offer the modification of AC Drive adjustments through a touch keypad. Electrical values, configuration parameters, 1/0 assignments, application and activity function access, faults, local control, and adjustment storage, and diagnostics shall be accessible via the keypad. The keypad display shall have parameter lock capability that allows the keypad to be locked out from unauthorized personnel. The keypad shall be capable of displaying 1/0 assignment and status. N. The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be 24 VDC. The internal power supply shall incorporate automatic current fold -back that protects the internal power supply if incorrectly connected or shorted. The transistor logic outputs will be current limited and will not be damaged if shorted. Pull -apart terminal strips shall be used on all logic and analog signal connections in the power converter. Two voltage -free relay output contacts will be provided. One of the contacts will indicate AC Drive fault status. The other contact shall indicate a drive run status. The combination enclosure shall have the following dedicated operator controls: 1. Adjustable Frequency Controller -Off -Bypass selector switch. 2. The combination enclosure shall include terminal point connection for fire /freeze state interlock, to prevent drive [or bypass] operation. The interlock must shut down the motor in the drive and bypass modes. 3. Drive unit must supply a smoke purge function (Fireman's Override) as a standard. O. The AC Drive shall have embedded serial communications capability for BACnet, Metasys N2, Apogee P1 and/or Modbus communications. The AC Drive shall have LonWorks capability as an option P. The AC Drive shall include electrically interlocked bypass contactors complete with a Class 10 thermal overload relay, circuit breaker disconnect, control circuit transformer and Adjustable Frequency Controller -Off -Bypass switch. The operator shall have full control of the bypass starter by operation of the Adjustable Frequency Controller -Off -Bypass selector switch. In the AUTOMATIC mode of operation the bypass contactors shall be sequenced by the 120-volt rated auto start contact provided by the user. The AC Drive shall offer a Line Side Contactor or a mains power disconnect switch to the power converter as an option. The AC Drive shall be available as a Combination (non -bypass) device if required. Q. Each drive shall include reduced harmonics technology to reduce power system harmonics and must comply with THDI levels of IEC EN61000 part 3-12. R. Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the dimensions are as indicated. Before and during the installation, the AC Drive equipment shall be protected from water and site contaminants. Installation shall be in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, drawings and recommendations. The AC Drive supplier shall provide a representative to inspect the contractor's installation, test and start-up the AC Drive(s) furnished under this specification. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ELECTRICAL WORK 23 05 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL S. Manufacturer must offer a formal training program available to end user customers as part of AC Drive product support. A Description and associated Cost of drive training program shall be communicated to owner after drive commissioning has been completed. T. The AC Drive supplier shall supply a comprehensive 8-1/2 x 11-inch bound instruction and installation manual that includes wiring diagrams, layout diagrams, and outline dimensions. This manual must be 3-hole punched for insertion in a shop manual supplied by the installing contractor. U. At project close out, the Building Owner shall be provided with 30-Pin Mobile to RS485 Converter Cable and Apple IPad device containing digital copies of all relevant AC Drive information including: IN 1. AC Drive Approved Submittal package. 2. Digital copy of each individual AC Drive parameter configuration. 3. Links to Factory Service and Support. 4. Digital Copies of Warranty Registration/Start Up Data. 5. Spare Parts Lists. 6. Links to Instructional Training material. 7. Digital Copies of All Instruction Manuals. W. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D/Schneider Electric, Graham VLT 6000, Toshiba, and ABB. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Control wiring in walls and exposed in Mechanical Rooms and spaces shall be run in thin wall conduit. 3.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motor characteristics which change from that specified, due to the Contractor electing to use one of the optional manufacturers, or an updated model, etc., shall be coordinated with the Electrical Contractor. All modifications required to the electrical or mechanical designs as a result of the change shall be included at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 23 05 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ELECTRICAL WORK 23 05 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 05 30 — SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INVOLVED A. Extent of supports, anchors, and seals required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. B. Types of supports, anchors, and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal piping hangers and supports 2. Vertical piping clamps 3. Hanger rod attachments 4. Building attachments 5. Saddles and shields 6. Flashing materials 7. Miscellaneous materials 8. Anchors 9. Equipment bases C. Supports, anchors and seals furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of supports, anchors and seals of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. MSS Standard Compliance: 1. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design and manufacture comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58. 2. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. Size hangers and supports to support pipe weight and fluid conveyed. 3. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. 4. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for each type of support, anchor and seal. Include a schedule of supports, anchors and seals to be used. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 23 05 30 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.1 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by installer to suit horizontal piping system, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper -plated hangers and supports for copper piping systems. Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 2. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12. U-Bolt: MSS Type 24. Clips: MSS Type 26. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including flange. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including flange. steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38 including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. Single Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 41. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43. Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44. Pipe Rolls and Plates: MSS Type 45. Adjustable Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 46. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS A. Pipe hangers for all piping shall be Fee and Mason or Grinnell of a type suitable for each use. Perforated straps shall not be used in any work. For ferrous pipes up to and including four inches (4") in size, use Fee and Mason Fig. 199 malleable iron, adjustable, split ring, swivel hanger. HVAC piping larger than four inches (4"), but not larger than twelve inches (12") shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 170. Where several pipes are parallel at the same elevation, trapeze hangers may be used. Where trapeze hangers are used, the pipes shall be supported on rollers where rollers are called for by the above specifications. For copper pipes up to and including three inches (3") in size, use Fee and Mason Fig. 360 malleable iron, copper plated hangers. For copper pipes larger than three inches (3") use Fee and Mason Fig. 364 copper plated clevis hanger. B. Hanger rods sizes shall conform to the following schedule: Pipe up to and including 2": 3/8" rods Pipe 2-1/2", 3" and 3-1/2": 1/2" rods Pipe 4" and 5": 5/8" rods C. Unless shown otherwise, all horizontal runs of ferrous piping shall be suspended from the floor or roof construction, as the case may be, by means of hangers with the following maximum spacing: Pipe up to and including 1-1/4": 6 feet 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 23 05 30 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Pipe 1-1/2" and 2": 9 feet Pipe 2-1/2" and 3": 11 feet Pipe 3-1/2" and 4": 12 feet D. Unless shown otherwise, all horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be suspended from the floor or roof construction as the case may be, by means of hangers with the following maximum spacing: Pipe up to 3/4" in size: 5 feet Pipe V and 1-1/4": 8 feet Pipe 1-1/2" and larger: 10 feet E. There shall be a hanger within two feet (2') of each elbow or tee. Additional supports shall be provided for valves, strainers, etc. Vertical risers shall be supported by approved riser clamps at each floor. Vertical pipes within a space shall not have less than two (2) supports. F. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in the piping systems. Hangers shall permit vertical adjustment to maintain proper pitch. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the piping shall be guided and firmly anchored. No piping shall be self-supporting; nor shall it be supported from equipment connections. G. Inserts shall be used where piping or equipment is to be hung from concrete construction. Inserts shall be Grinnell Fig. 281, wedge type, concrete inserts. All inserts shall be galvanized to prevent rusting. After the forms are removed, clip off all nails flush with the exposed surface of the inserts. H. Expansion bolts shall be Ackerman -Johnson. Beam clamps suitable for use with the type of steel construction involved shall be Grinnell. Chilled and hot water piping hangers shall be sized to go around the insulation with saddles being provided to protect the insulation and so the insulation can be continuous through the hanger. 2.3 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated vertical piping clamps complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper -plated clamps for copper piping systems. Two -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. Four -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. 2.4 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS A Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated hanger -rod attachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper -plated hanger rod attachments for copper piping systems. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. C2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 23 05 30 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 2.5 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated building attachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19 Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. Welded Attachments: MSS Type 22. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. Top I -Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. Side I -Beam Camps: MSS Type 27. Steel I -Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. Steel WF-Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. Steel Brackets — Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33 Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. 2.6 SADDLES AND SHIELDS A. Except as otherwise indicated provide saddles or shields for piping hangers and supports, factory -fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. C. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. D. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 degrees of high density, 100 psi, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. 2.7 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's offering hangers and supports which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: C & S Mfg. Corp., Elcen Metal Products Co., Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., Grinnel Corp. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ANSI/ASTM A 36. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 23 05 30 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ANSI/ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. D. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory -fabricated guides, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of a bolted two -section outer cylinder and base with a two -section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spider to clear pipe and insulation (if any) and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments as may be required. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Install building attachments at required locations, within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping, ductwork or other supported mechanical or electrical items. B. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in the piping systems. Hangers shall permit vertical adjustment to maintain proper pitch. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the piping shall be guided and firmly anchored. No piping shall be self-supporting; nor shall it be supported from equipment connections. C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. Provide section drawing for hanger locations to avoid duct interference. D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and support which are copper - plated, or by other recognized industry methods. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 23 05 30 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. 4. Insulated Piping — comply with the following installation requirements: a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. b. Shields: Where low compressive strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install coated protective shields. C. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximum recommended by manufacturer for each unit. D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe -runs, at intermediate points in pipe -runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Adjust hangers and supports and place grout as required under supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. 3.6 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Provide scaled layouts of all required bases with dimensions of bases and location to column center lines. Furnish templates, anchor bolts, and accessories, necessary for base construction. B. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from the structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory -fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands. END OF SECTION 23 05 30 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS 23 05 30 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 05 53 — IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide pipe identification for all exposed piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, on pipe mains above accessible ceilings, access panels, and piping exposed to view. B. Provide valve tags for all valves. Provide valve tag chart, enclosed in a minimum 8-1/2" x 11" frame, in each mechanical room. Master chart(s) to be included in the operation and maintenance manual. C. Provide equipment nameplates for all major mechanical equipment, such as chillers, boilers, pumps, air handling units, fan coils, fans, condensing units, disconnects, starters, etc. Nameplates shall include all information on manufacturers' standard nameplates, but shall be of an engraved metal type, secured to the equipment. D. Provide a framed, under glass, typed sequence of operation and system diagram for each system, located on the wall of the Mechanical Room. E. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Meet the requirements of: 1. ANSI/ASME (American Society of Testing and Materials) A13.1 2015, Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems. 2. ANSI 253.1: Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe markers shall be "SET MARK" semi -rigid plastic identification markers as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corporation. Markers shall conform to ANSI A13.1 for correct color background, color of letters and correct marker length. Direction of flow arrows shall be included on each marker. Pipe markers located outdoors shall be UV -resistant and labeled for such use. Letter height and length of color background shall be as follows: OUTSIDE DIAMETER LETTER HEIGHT LENGTH OF COLOR FIELD 3/4" - 1-1 /4" 1 /2" 8" 1-1/2" - 2" 3/4" 8" 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 53 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2-1/2" - 6" 1-1/4" 12" B. Valve tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter, 19 gauge brass attached with copper meter seal wire, brass chain, or "S" hook. Service designation letter shall be 1/4" high minimum and black filled. Valve numbers shall be 1/2" high and black filled. Stamp tags with service designation and number consecutively for each system. C. Equipment name plates shall be 1'/2" x 4" aluminum with black enamel background and with the equipment designation engraved in natural aluminum lettering not less than 1/2" high. Equipment name plates shall also include the area that the equipment serves, either by room name or number as approved by the Architect. Name plates located outdoors shall be UV -resistant and labeled for outdoor use. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton, W. H. Brady. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE IDENTIFICATION (use colors for services that apply to this project). BACKGROUND LETTER SERVICE TYPE OF SERVICE COLOR COLOR DESIGNATION Condensate Green White Condensate 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pipe markers: 1. Service designation shall be readable from a standing position from the floor. 2. Provide pipe markers at 25 ft. maximum intervals on mains above ceilings. 3. Provide markers at each major branch from mains and at each branch line. 4. Provide a marker at each equipment connection. B. Valve tagging: 1. Attach tags to valve handles in such a manner that valve shall be operable without damaging or removing tag. 2. Prepare valve charts showing tag number, location, manufacturer, model, size, and service. Frame under glass and mount in equipment room. A copy of chart shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual. C. Equipment nameplates: 1. Nameplate designation shall consist of unit number and area served. 2. Locate nameplates where readable from a standing position on the floor. 3. Secure nameplates securely with rivets or screws. 4. Nameplates identifying manufacturer model number, serial number, voltage, etc. for equipment shall be of the engraved type. Painted labels are not acceptable. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 53 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements and the Contractual Conditions of Division 01 shall apply to this Section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY STATEMENT A. Test and balance of HVAC systems (both heating and cooling) and air exhaust systems shall be performed by an independent AABC or NEBB certified test and balance agency. Acceptable Agencies in the Tampa Bay Region include: Southern Independent Testing, Inc., The Phoenix Agency, Test and Balance Corporation, Pro -Tech Diversified Services, Inc., and SpecTech Consultants, Inc. B. The Contractor and the Test and Balance Agency, shall coordinate all work required so that the test and balance work is complete and the final report delivered one week prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date. The Test and Balance Agency shall be at the site with his test .equipment during the Substantial Completion Inspection so that random report values may be verified. C. Test and balance work shall not begin until all systems have been completed and are in full working order. Place all systems and equipment into full operation during each working day of testing and balancing. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work is indicated by requirements of this section, and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus of mechanical work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow), adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, measuring temperature and humidity throughout the facility, preparing and submitting reports and recommending modifications to work as required by contract documents. B. Component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this section includes the following, but not limited to, as applied to mechanical equipment: Fans Air Conditioning units Air Handling Units Ductwork systems Piping systems Terminal units C. Testing and balancing shall be begun and completed during each season, heating and cooling; i.e. cooling system during the cooling season and heating system during the heating season. All systems shall be tested and balanced under full load conditions and a report submitted. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. The HVAC system shall be started, operated and stopped to determine that it operates according to the design specifications and sequence of operations. Each element in the system shall be systematically and individually started, operated and stopped. 2. Temperature and humidity shall be measured and recorded in each room during each season's testing. Test and calibrate all temperature and humidity sensors. Provide all readings in the final report. 3. Notification to perform the opposite season test and balance will be made by the Owner. The work shall then be scheduled by mutual agreement. The report shall be submitted within fifteen (15) days after completion of the work and shall include: a. Characterization of the system quality of operation. b. Data and results of test and balance work. C. Description of system deficiencies found and recommendations. D. Cooperate with the test and balance agency in establishing a schedule to perform this work. If changes in the construction schedule affecting test and balance work are necessary, all such changes shall be coordinated with the test and balance firm. E. Replacement pulleys (adjustable and non-adjustable), additional balancing dampers, pressure taps, balancing valves, cocks and fittings, etc., required to effect proper air and water balance shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the contract. The test and balance firm shall furnish the Contractor and Project Architect/Engineer at the end of each day a list of items that must be added, repaired, replaced or adjusted. F. Air filters shall be replaced and strainers shall be cleaned before proceeding with test and balance and thereafter as required by the test and balance firm. G. Systems shall be placed into service using approved startup procedures. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper initial setting and adjustment of HVAC equipment, air handlers, VAV boxes, exhaust fans, etc. furnished and installed by him and shall verify same for the test and balance firm. H. Contractor shall provide test openings as required, shall operate HVAC equipment and provide trade persons to assist and make adjustments for test and balance and commissioning during the process. I. The test and balance firm shall periodically visit the site during construction of the HVAC system. No less than two visits shall be made. After each visit, the test and balance firm shall report in writing to the Architect, with copy to the Engineer, its observations from the visit and potential problem areas. Should methods, materials or workmanship being used adversely affect balancing and adjusting work, the test and balance agency shall report its findings in the report to the Architect with recommendations for correction. J. The test and balance firm executing this test and balance work shall hold valid Certificate of Authorization from the State of Florida Board of Professional Engineers to provide services under the firm name. K. The test and balance firm shall carry out the test and balance work in accordance with the AABC National Standards for Total Systems Balance or the NEBB Procedural Standard for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental systems, and in conformance with ASHRAE Handbook, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. L. The Contractor shall furnish to the testing and balancing agency a complete set of current plans and specifications, addenda, shop drawings, schedules and change orders as may be required. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A firm with not less than 5 years of similar experience and certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or NEBB in testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this project shall be employed. B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as otherwise indicated. C. The final result of balancing shall be to provide uniform air temperatures within a 2° F spread in the conditioned space at peak load conditions. All air flows shall be within—5/+10% of design air flows. D. Gages and Thermometers installed as part of the project are not to be used for Test and Balance. The test and balance firm shall calibrate all such gages and thermometers and shall affix a permanent tag to each stating the corrections to be applied. E. In the event of dispute with regard to test results, the Owner or Project Architect/Engineer may choose to provide verification of test and balance reports, and such verification shall be by a second independent agency selected by the Project Architect/Engineer or the Owner. Reports found to be inaccurate will be disallowed, and the test and balance firm will be required to repeat operations under the supervision of the second independent agency until accurate reports are completed and agreed upon. The cost of initial test and balance work will be borne by the Owner. The cost of verification test and balance work shall be borne by the Owner or Contractor or Project Architect/Engineer (whichever demanded the second opinion). If the original test and balance reports are found inaccurate and subsequent costs of supervision are necessary in order to secure acceptable reports, such will be borne by the original test and balance firm. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit five (5) certified test reports signed by Test and Balance Supervisor who performed testing and balancing work to Engineer and to the Architect seven days prior to substantial completion inspection. Include identification and types of instruments used and their most recent end tolerance calibration sheets with submission of final test report. Calibration shall be within six months of the date of equipment used on this project. Report shall include a schematic diagram indication the system tested and the device number of the report correlated to the actual device of the system. Include in the "NOTES" Section of the report, the actual serial number of the hood used for air flow measurements. B. Maintenance Data: Include a copy of certified test and balance report in the operation and maintenance manual. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed. B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. 1.7 GUARANTEE 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. The test and balance firm shall include extended services for six months after completion of test and balance work, during which time the Project Architect/ Engineer and/or Owner, at their discretion, may request a recheck or resetting of any piece of equipment listed in the test report believed to not be performing properly. The Contractor shall assist in this extended service. B. The test and balance firm shall provide technicians to assist in making any tests required. Should the system be found to not work properly any time during the first year of operation, it shall then be required to be rebalanced. C. The test and balance agency shall provide to the Architect five (5) copies of a certified statement that the HVAC systems have been balanced to optimum performance capabilities in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. Test and Balance Agency shall coordinate with the system insulator to rework any void in the thermal insulation or moisture barrier. 2.2 TEST INSTRUMENTS A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for testing and balancing work required, of type, precision and capacity as recommended in the following testing and balancing standards: AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards" PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with testing and balancing work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester. B. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards. C. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable standards. The report shall include a system schematic for each air handling system; clearly identifying which air device in the field corresponds to the air device in the Report. D. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes. E. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL levers and similar controls and devices, clean and dirty filter positions on Dwyer gages, to show final settings at completion of testing and balancing work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. F. Prepare a report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performance when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of contract documents for mechanical work. G. Retest, adjust and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results. H. The Test and Balance Contractor shall assist the Architect/Engineer in verifying that proper measuring instruments and methods were used. 3.2 TESTS A. Air Balance: 1. The Contractor shall prepare the air systems for balancing and verify same in writing for test and balance firm as follows: a. Mechanically check fans, blowers and air handling equipment and make such available to operate under design conditions. b. Set volume dampers, air dampers and vanes in their normal position. C. Set grilles, diffusers, etc. installed with vanes, blades in their normal position. d. Mechanically check controls and make available to operate under design conditions. e. Mark damper shafts and locking devices to accurately represent the position of their respective dampers when in optimum position. Verify proper operation of all automatically operated dampers. 2. The test and balance firm shall perform the following tests and balance as follows: a. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements. b. Test and record motor full load amperes. C. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply and return ducts and obtain design CFM at fans. d. Test and record system total pressures, suction and discharge. e. Test and adjust system for design CFM recirculated air. f. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air. g. Test and record entering air temperatures (D.B. heating and cooling, W.B. cooling.) h. Test and record leaving air temperatures. (D.B. heating and cooling, W.B. cooling.) i. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design CFM. j. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM (-5/+10%), supply and return. k. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within—5/+10% of design requirements. I. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location, area and system. M. Test and record all room temperatures and humidity upon completion of system balances, DB and WB. Test shall be made near room thermostat where installed at four feet above floor. 3. Variable Air Volume Systems shall be balanced according to the specific type of VAV system supplied and method of controlling air flow. The following requirements shall be met: a. Verify that inlet ducts have sufficient straight runs (4-6 diameters) before VAV boxes and the VAV box manufacturer's control system complements the building control system. 002017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. Determine the minimum and maximum operating pressures for the boxes used and verify that the operating conditions fall within the design operating range. C. Check static pressures and volume flows and adjust to proper values as necessary. Test and report air flow under minimum settings. d. Set outlets to design flow with VAV box on maximum setting. 4. Size, type, manufacturer and location of diffusers, grilles, registers, and all test equipment shall be identified and listed. Manufacturer's ratings on all equipment shall be used to make required calculations. 5. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers shall include test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustments. 6. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, the test and balance firm shall set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. 7. Check all controls for proper calibrations and list all controls requiring adjustment by control installers. 8. Diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas. 9. Verify ductwork leakage tests. Data from ductwork leakage tests shall be tabulated and included with the test and balance report. Duct leakage tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE/SMACNA Standard 126-2008, Method of Testing HVAC Air Ducts. 10. Tested sections of ductwork shall be marked by this Contractor and verified by the test and balance firm. All tests and repairs shall be made before duct sections are concealed or insulated. 11. The test and balance firm shall visually inspect low pressure duct systems and verify such are constructed and sealed in accordance with SMACNA construction standards, and as specified. 12. Systematically survey and inspect the HVAC insulation. As part of its initial report, the test and balance firm shall note non-compliance with the Contract Documents and/or good installation practices. B. Direct Expansion Systems: 1. Air Distribution: a. Measure fan speeds, motor voltages, operating currents, CFM and static pressure at fan outlet. b. Adjust dampers, air supply and return and exhaust outlets to—5/+10% of design quantities. Supply grilles shall be adjusted to provide proper throw and uniform pattern. C. Measure air flow at duct connected return or exhaust grilles. d. Record the specified horsepower and all electrical characteristics of all motors. e. Record the actual installed motors as to horsepower and electrical charac- teristics. 2. Verify function and calibration of temperature controls to +/- 2.0 degree F. of set point. 3. Perform the following Cooling Cycle Temperature Measurements: a. "Entering air" temperature. (D.B. and W.B.) b. "Leaving air" temperature. (D.B. and W.B.) C. Outside air temperature. (D.B. and W.B.) d. Room temperature (D.B. and W.B.) measured near thermostats, four feet above floor. e. Air CFM at unit discharge. (D.B. and W.B.) 4. Perform the following heating cycle measurements: a. "Entering" and "Leaving" air temperatures. (D.B.) b. Outside air temperature. (D.B. and W.B.) C. Room temperature measured near thermostats four feet above floor. d. Air CFM at unit discharge. (D.B. and W.B.) 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Temperature Control Systems: The temperature controls installer shall cooperate fully with the test and balance firm to ensure maximum effective systems operation. The controls installer shall initially set, adjust, relocate (if necessary), calibrate and test all controls. The test and balance firm shall verify proper operation of controls and set controls to proper settings. The Temperature Control Contractor shall: a. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water reset, and freeze stats. Controls installer shall provide systems printouts to all points to ensure operation and communications with all terminal points. b. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating conditions. C. Calibrate room thermostats and/or sensors after installation and before the thermostat control verification tests are performed. The balancing agency shall prove the accuracy of final settings by taking temperature readings in the controlled space compared to the computer readings. d. The temperature control contractor shall allow sufficient time in the project to provide sufficient assistance and instruction to the balancing agency in the proper use and setting of control components such as computers, static pressure controllers, variable air volume boxes, or any other device that may need set points changed so that the testing and balancing work may be performed. All required hardware and software related to the installed control system shall be provided by the temperature control installer to the test and balance agency and the owner in order to allow testing of the systems and continued operation. The test and balance firm shall perform the following: a. Check for proper location of humidistats, sensors and thermostats as well as verify proper design settings. b. Verify proper operation of switches, damper motors, motorized valves, solenoids and interlocks. C. Verify that proper sequence of operation occurs in all control modes and is in accordance with shop drawings and control diagrams (or point list). d. Verify proper calibration of all controls and list those controls requiring adjustment or recalibration. D. Exhaust Fans: 1. Measure exhaust fan static pressures, total CFM, makeup air and fan RPM. 2. Measure motor operating voltage and amperage. 3. Measure hood average face velocities and adjust as necessary. Where possible, balance the flow using a pitot transverse within hood where ducts are connected. 4. Record the specified against the actual supplied horsepower and electrical characteristics of all motors. Record if specified to be self or permanently lubricated. 5. Record the actual installed motors as to horsepower and electrical characteristics. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 07 00 — HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 23 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of HVAC insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping System Insulation: Condensate Piping Systems 2. Ductwork System Insulation: Supply, Return and Outside Air Ductwork Air Plenums and Equipment Housings 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of HVAC insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Armstrong, Certainteed Corp., Johns -Manville Corp., Knauf Fiber Glass, Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp., and Pittsburgh Corning Corp. C. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with HVAC insulation similar to that required for this project. D. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite HVAC insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and Smoke -developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASIM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. E. Appropriate ASTM, ANSI, UL, ASME and NFPA standards shall be met. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of HVAC insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each HVAC system requiring insulation. Include reference to minimum Florida Building Code and Florida Energy Conservation values on the submittal. Submit certified test reports on performances including burning characteristics and thermal insulating valves. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of HVAC insulation. Include this data in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. C. Protect cements, adhesives and coatings from freezing. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS A. Foam Glass Pipe Insulation: FS HH-1-1751/3A, Type I, Class 4 with white fire retardant jacket finish for interior above grade insulation. B. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: 1. Vapor Barrier Coatings-Permeance shall be no greater than 0.08 perms at 37 mils dry as tested at 100' F and 90% RH by ASTM F1249. Foster 30-80 AF, or approved equal. 2. Lagging Adhesives —used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 AF, Childers CP-137 AF, or approved equal. Coatings shall meet ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rate. 3. Weather Barrier Mastic —used outdoors to protect above ambient insulation from weather. Foster 46-50 Weatherite, Childers CP-10 Vi Cryl, or approved equal. 4. Insulation Joint Sealant —used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76; or approved equal. 5. Metal Jacketing Sealant —used as a sealant on metal jacketing seams to prevent water entry. Foster 95-44; Childers CP-76; approved equal. 6. Reinforcing Mesh —used in conjunction with coatings/mastics to reinforce. Foster Mast A Fab; Childers Chil-Glas #10; or approved equal. C. Fiberglass Insulation: Factory applied white vapor barrier jacket. 2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: FS-HH-1-558, Form A, Type Rigid, Class as indicated. K = .27 at 750 F. Installed minimum R-value shall be 6.0. 1. Provide Class 1 (non -load bearing) where insulation is not subjected to compressive loading. 2. Provide Class 2 (load bearing) where insulation is subjected to compressive loading; except provide higher Class where indicated. Provide on exposed ductwork in Mechanical Room from floor to six (6) feet above floor. B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: FS HH-1-558, Form B. Type I, Class as indicated: 1. Provide Class 6 for temperatures up to and including 350° F (1770 C). K = .25 at 750 F. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Vapor Barrier Material for Ductwork: FS HH-B-100; paper -backed aluminum foil, except as otherwise indicated; strength and permeability rating equivalent to factory -applied vapor barriers on adjoining ductwork insulation, where available; with following additional construction characteristics. 1. High Puncture Resistance: Type I, low vapor transmission (for ducts in exposed areas). 2 Vapor Barrier Coating--Permeance shall be no greater than 0.08 perms at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM E96/ASTM F1249. Foster 30-65, Childers CP-34, or approved equal (for vapor seal of all taped seams, breaks, punctures in duct insulation) D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner and angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: FS HH-1-558, Form A, Class as indicated. K = .27 at 750 F. 1. Provide Class 1 (non -load bearing) for temperatures up to and including 4000 F (2040 C) and where insulation is not subjected to compressive loading. 2. Provide Class 2 (load bearing) for temperatures up and including 4000 F (2040 C) and where insulation is not subjected to compressive loading. 3. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: FS HH-1-558, Form B, Type I, Class as indicated. 4. Provide Class 6 for temperatures up to and including 350° F (177° C). B. Wire -Faced Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: FS HH-1-558, Form C, Class as indicated. C. Cellular Glass Equipment Insulation: FS HH-1-551, Type I. D. Flexible Unicellular Equipment Insulation: FS HH-1-573, Class S. E. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre -sized glass cloth jacketing material, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, except as otherwise indicated, adhered with lagging adhesive. F. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles, anchors, stud pins and metal covers as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM A. Insulate each piping system with the following types and thicknesses of insulation: Class 4 foam glass: 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 3", 2" thick for pipe sizes over 3". B. Sub -Freezing Piping (0 to 390 F): Insulate sub -freezing refrigerant suction HVAC piping systems with one -inch thick Armaflex insulation. When exposed outdoors, paint with two coats of white Armaflex paint or Foster 30-64 coating. C. Cold Piping (400 F to ambient): 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems: HVAC condensate piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following: a. Condensate: 1" thick Armaflex. D. Hot Low Pressure Piping to 2500 F (121 ° C). 1. Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping systems (steam piping up to 15 psi, water piping up to 250' F. Condensate piping. Hot gas refrigerant piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Class 4 foam glass: 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 3", 2" thick for pipe sizes over 3". E. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing .015 aluminum jacket as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.2 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION A. Ductwork: 1. Insulate the following cold ductwork: a. Outdoor air intake ductwork air entrance to fan inlet or HVAC unit inlet. b. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlet. C. HVAC return air ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet, or HVAC unit inlet. d. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre -insulated at factory. e. HVAC fresh air ducts. f. HVAC exhaust ducts as noted. 2. Insulate with one of the following type and thickness of insulation: a. Insulation: Rigid fiberglass; 1-1/2" thick, increase thickness to 2" in machine, fan and equipment rooms, K = .25 at 75' F. b. Insulation: Flexible fiberglass; 1-1/2" thick, application limited to concealed locations, K = .25 at 750 F. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of pressure tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surface. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. On all cold piping, coat insulated valves, fittings, and elbows with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh. G. On all cold piping, seal all longitudinal and butt insulation joints (foam glass) with insulation joint sealant as specified. Coat all, all service jacket (ASJ) seams, both longitudinal and butt, with vapor barrier coating. H. Extend piping insulating without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations. I. Install protective metal shields (saddles) and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation. J. Pipe Hanger Insulation Inserts: Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. D. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. Coat all taped seams and punctures with vapor barrier coating. E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations. F. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing weather barrier mastic/reinforcing mesh or jacketing as recommended by manufacturer, or as indicated on drawings. G. Corner Angles: Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork up to seven (7) feet above finished floor in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing. 3.5 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. If insulation has been allowed to become wet during the construction process, said materials shall be removed from the jobsite, and clean, dry materials installed. B. Insulation installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL END OF SECTION 23 07 00 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 09 00 — INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a native BACnet-based system, including a Microsoft Windows operator's terminal, based on a distributed logic control system. The operator's terminal, all global controllers, logic controllers, and all input/output devices shall communicate using the protocols and local area network (LAN) standards as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet. No gateways shall be used. Items of work included (but not limited to) are as follows: 1. Provide all necessary BACnet compliant hardware and software to meet the system's functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for every controller in system, including unitary controllers. All direct digital topic hardware is to comply with BACnet. 2. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software configuration from project design data. 3. Implement the detailed design for all system -standard analog and binary objects, distributed control and system databases, graphic displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data, and bid documents. 4. Provide all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network cables needed, and all associated hardware. 5. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, logic controllers, and input/output devices. 6. Provide all interconnecting cables between all operator's terminals and peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section. 7. Provide complete manufacturer's specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor name of every item supplied. 8. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of system installation, startup and commissioning. 9. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein. 10. Provide as -built documentation, operator's terminal software, diagrams, and all other associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements: A distributed logic control system complete with Direct Digital Control (DDC) and Direct Analog Control (DAC) software shall be provided. This system shall control all mechanical equipment, including but not limited to unitary equipment, air handling units, , 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL electric heaters, split systems and any other listed equipment using native BACnet compliant components. 2. The entire processing system shall be in complete compliance with the BACnet standard: ANSI/ASHRAE 135. 3. All logic controllers for air handlers, central mechanical equipment, and Microsoft Windows -based operator's terminal(s) shall communicate and share data, utilizing only BACnet communication protocols. 4. All logic controllers shall be fully programmable. That is, programmable controllers for every air handler, all central plant equipment, and any other piece of controlled equipment shall be provided. Programming tools shall be provided as part of operator workstation for every controller supplied for this project. 5. The controls contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the entire controls system as a single source. The controls contractor shall be qualified to engineer, program, debug, and service all portions of the BACnet based logic control system. This shall include operator's terminal, global controllers, routers, terminal unit controllers, sensors and all other sections of the system. 6. Approved control manufacturers are Alerton Technologies, KMC, Johnson Controls, Automated Logic, or DELTA. B. Basic System Features 1. Zone -by -zone direct digital logic control of space temperature, scheduling, optimum start, equipment alarm reporting, and override timers for after-hours usage. 2. Operator's terminal software shall be Microsoft Windows based. The EMCS application program shall be written to communicate specifically utilizing BACnet protocols. Software shall be multi -tasking, capable of executing and displaying multiple instances in individual windows while running concurrently with other Windows programs such as word processors or database programs. Operation of the terminal software shall be simple and intuitive. 3. Complete energy management firmware, including self-adjusting optimum start, demand limiting, global control strategies and logging routines for use with total control systems shall be supplied. All energy management firmware shall be resident in field hardware and shall not be dependent on the operator's terminal for operation. Operator's terminal software is to be used for access to field -based energy management control firmware. 4. Priority password security systems shall prevent unauthorized use. Each user shall have an individual password. The user shall only be given access to the system functions required for individual job performance. 5. Equipment monitoring and alarm functions, including information for diagnosing equipment problems shall be included with the system. 6. The complete system shall auto -restart, without operator intervention, on resumption of power after a power failure. Database stored in global controller memory shall be battery -backed up for a minimum of 1 year. Logic controllers for all air handlers and all unitary equipment shall utilize EEPROM for all variable data storage. 7. System design shall be modular and of proven reliability. 8. All software and/or firmware interface equipment for connection to remote monitoring station from field hardware or the operator's terminal shall be provided. 9. System shall be capable of equipment runtime totalization of fans, heaters, etc. and capable of alarm generation and alarm dial out to remote sites. 10. Room sensors shall be provided with digital readout that allow the user to view room temperature, view outside air temperature, adjust the room setpoint within preset limits and set desired override time. In conjunction with a unitary logic controller, user shall also be able to start and stop unit from the digital sensor. 11. Communication wiring for field controllers shall not be run in star patterns. 12. All controllers shall communicate using protocols and LAN types contained in the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 13. All DDC hardware and software shall be designed and manufactured by U.S. corporations. All hardware shall be Listed Underwriters Laboratory for Open Energy Management Equipment (PAZX) under the UL Standard for Safety 916 with integral labels showing rating. 14. All hardware shall be in compliance with FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The supplier of the HVAC digital logic control system shall be responsible for inspection and Quality Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship. B. Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of high -quality, pre -tested components. Each and every controller, sensor and all other DDC components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. C. The control system supplier shall provide all tools, testing and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the control system. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of supplier's proposal date, and any applicable subsections thereof, shall govern design and selection of equipment and material supplied: 1. ASHRAE. 2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet. 3. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment Canada and the U.S. 4. National Electrical Code (NEC) 5. FCC Part 15, Subpart J 6. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Drawings: 1. Submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill of materials. 2. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11',x 17,,. 3. Drawings shall be submitted with general product data, in three ring binder format. B. System documentation by the vendor shall include the following as a minimum: 1. System configuration diagrams in simplified block format. 2. All input/output object listings and an alarm point summary listing. 3. Electrical drawings that show all system internal and external connection points, terminal block layouts, and terminal identification. 4. Manufacturer's instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance, and operation of all purchased items. 5. System operation and maintenance instructions -including preventive maintenance and troubleshooting instructions. 6. Provide BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) for all system elements. 1.7 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 230900-3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time markings and details for hardware items and software development phases. B. The schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and documents and shall indicate timing and dates for system installation, debugging and commissioning. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel and expenses for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on -site or off - site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLOBAL CONTROLLER (GC) A. General: 1. Global controller shall provide battery -packed real-time (hardware) clock functions. It shall also provide communications via BACnet standard protocols to all field controllers. Global controller shall interface with operator terminal(s) via BACnet protocols for information display. 2. Global controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 3-way BACnet router. Controller shall route BACnet messages between the high-speed LAN (Ethernet and/or ARCNET), master slave token passing (MS/TP), and point-to-point (PTP) or modem ports. GC shall have capability to easily function as a 4-way router with the addition of simple plug-in modules. 3. Global controller shall be capable of deciding global strategies for the system based on information from any objects in the system regardless if the object is directly monitored by the controller or by another controller. The program that implements these strategies shall be completely flexible and user definable. Program execution at global controller shall be a minimum of once per second. 4. Programming shall be object -oriented using control program blocks. Documentation in flowchart form for all programming shall be provided as part of the final system as -built documentation. Samples of flowchart documentation shall be included in submittals. All flowcharts shall be generated and automatically downloaded to controller. No reentry of database information shall be necessary. 5. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real-time as program is executing. This function may be performed via the operator's terminal, field computer, or modem. 6. Controller shall have a minimum of 2 MB battery -backed static RAM, expandable to 4 MB, along with 64K of EPROM. The battery shall retain static RAM memory and clock functions for a minimum of 1 year. Battery shall be a field replaceable (non - rechargeable) lithium type. 7. Global controller shall include display for network setup and monitoring. Display shall be backlit (LCD with 2-line by 20-character display. Include 8-key keypad for operator entry of data. B. BACnet Conformance: 1. Global Controller shall as a minimum support Point -to -Point (PTP), MS/TP and either Ethernet or ARCNET BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL LANs as a native BACnet device and shall support simultaneous routing functions between all supported LAN types. Global controller shall be a BACnet conformance class 6 device and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups: a. Clock Functional Group b. Hand Held Workstation Functional Group C. Personal Computer Workstation Functional Group d. Event Initiation Functional Group e. Event Response Functional Group f. COV Event Initiation Functional Group g. Files Functional Group h. Reinitialize Functional Group i. Device Communications Functional Group j. Time Master Functional Group 2. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Value, Binary Value, Calendar, Command, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Schedule object types. C. Remote Communications: 1. Provide all functions that will allow remote communications to off -site locations. 2. Provide Windows software for off -site computer that allows operator to view and change all information associated with system on color graphic displays. Operator shall be able to change all parameters in this section from off -site location including all programming of global controllers and all programmable logic controllers including all terminal unit controllers. Web based programs are also acceptable. 3. Global controller shall have capability to call out alarm conditions automatically. Alarm message and site description shall be set to off -site computer or printer. All global controllers connected to the local LAN shall be capable of calling out alarm messages through one shared modem connected to one or more of the global controllers on the local LAN. 4. Global controller shall have capability to call a minimum of 20 different phone numbers. Numbers called may be controlled by type of alarm, time schedule, holiday schedule, or other selectable program parameters. Email notification is also acceptable. 5. Owner shall provide standard voice -grade phone line or LAN for remote communication function. D. Schedules: 1. Each global controller shall support a minimum of 100 BACnet Schedule Objects and 100 BACnet Calendar Objects. 2. Each schedule object (Weekly or Exception) shall be capable of performing an optimum start. Optimum start calculation shall be based on outside air temperature, zone air temperature, deviation from zones, daytime heating and cooling setpoints, and individual zone adaptive heating and cooling coefficients that are adjusted each day based on performance parameters of the individual zone. E. Logging Capabilities: 1. Each global controller shall log as a minimum 150 user selectable object types with a minimum of 100 samples per object with standard memory configuration. Logging shall be expandable (user defined), with additional memory in global controller. Any object in the system (real or calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL at the operator's terminal. Start of sampling may be by one of the following: Selectable log beginning and ending by using BACnet Calendar and Schedule Objects. Object change of value (all types of analog objects) Object change of state (all types of binary objects) 2. Logs may be viewed both on -site or off -site via remote communication. 3. Global controller shall periodically upload trended data to operator's terminal for long term archiving if desired. 4. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third party spreadsheet or database programs. Alarm Generation: 1. Object change of values and change of states may be identified as alarm conditions. When such conditions exist, the global controller identifies each alarm through BACnet Get Alarm Summary Service. This summary of active alarms (Event State property value not equal to NORMAL) is presented to and displayed at the operator's terminal for system user action. Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or state either real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object value changes, binary object state changes, and various controller communication failure. 2. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on site at the operator's terminal or off -site via remote communications. G. Demand Limiting: System shall monitor energy demand. Energy demand may be from any type of energy source such as electrical or gas. Provide a demand -limiting routine which shall shed appropriate system objects to prevent the demand from exceeding preset limits. Demand -limiting routine shall be a priority shed type allowing automatic override of specified object type sheds when assigned analog object (temperature sensor) exceeds limits as set by system user at operator's terminal. Routine shall be able to change between sets of demand limit and restore setpoints based on BACnet Schedule Objects or system user manual commands at operator's terminal. Zone shed method shall be by either preventing zone heating and cooling operations, or by shifting zone heating and cooling setpoints. All parameters of the demand limiting routine shall be modifiable from the operator's terminal or via remote communications. 2.2 ROUTER, CONVERTER, REPEATER A. Routing functions shall be performed using only BACnet standard protocols as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135. The converter interconnects a standard computer serial port with an MS/TP LAN. Repeater functions shall be handled by a device designed to selectively interconnect four (4) portions of MS/TP LAN as a minimum. ROUTERS: The router shall perform the BACnet definition functions of interconnecting two or more BACnet LANs together, forming a BACnet internetwork. The router shall have optional plug -on boards permitting the following BACnet communication methods: a. The router shall have the routing functionality of interconnecting BACnet Ethernet and/or ARCNET high-speed LAN to BACnet MS/TP LAN and one or more PTP LANs. b. The router shall have capability of interconnecting BACnet Ethernet high-speed LAN to BACnet ARCNET high-speed LAN. C. BACnet PTP (RS-232 point-to-point) communication shall be available on the global controller by including an (optional) modem. The PTP/modem option shall operate under the BACnet half router communication protocol. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL d. BACnet messages may be routed to all LANs installed on the router at the same time with no operator intervention. 2. CONVERTER: A converter shall be provided to interface an portable filed service computer from its serial port (RS-232) to the BACnet MS/TP LAN (RS-485). 3. REPEATERS: BACnet repeaters shall provide selective interconnection to 4 segments of MS/TP LAN as a minimum. The repeater shall be an active device, containing logic capable of detecting and repeating signals from one MS/TP LAN segment to all other segments. Repeaters shall permit additional nodes to be added to the MS/TP LAN, up to a maximum of 254 modes. 2.3 AIR HANDLER LOGIC CONTROLLER A. Provide one or more native BACnet logic controllers for each air handler. All controllers shall interface to global controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic program as needed for complete control of units. Controllers shall be fully programmable. B. Logic controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as native BACnet devices. Logic controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3 and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups: 1. Files Functional Group 2. Reinitialize Functional Group 3. Device Communications Functional Group C. Logic controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 0-10VDC, 4-20 mA and dry contact signals. Any input on controller may be either analog or digital. Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display. Controller shall include binary and analog outputs on board. Analog outputs shall be switch selectable as either 0-10VDC or 0-20mA. Software shall include scaling features for analog outputs. Logic controller shall include 24 VDC voltage supply for use as power supply to external sensors. D. All program sequences shall be stored on board logic controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller 10 times per second and capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. All calculations shall be completed using floating-point math and system shall support display of all information in floating-point nomenclature at operator's terminal. Programming of logic controller shall be completely modifiable in the filed over installed BACnet LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Logic controller shall be programmed using programming tools as described in operator's terminal section. All programming tools shall be provided as part of system. Provide documentation in flowchart form of all programming as part of the final system as -built documentation. Include samples of flowchart documentation in submittals. E. Logic controller shall include software scheduling functions on board without depending on any external device. Scheduling shall be via a BACnet schedule object for seven-day of the week scheduling. Controller shall include interface capability for optional plug-in hardware clock with battery back-up. Provide optional hardware clock as shown on object list given in drawing set. F. Logic controller shall include support for intelligent field sensor. Display on field sensor shall be programmable at logic controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode. All 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL button functions and display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor. 2.4 DAMPERS AND ELECTRONIC DAMPER ACTUATORS A. Provide 5100 model parallel or opposed blade control dampers as manufactured by Vent Products. Blades to be 16 ga. V-reinforced galvanized steel. Welded frame to be Fasten E/Z press formed 14 ga. Galvanized steel complete with fully adjustable linkage and control rods. Blades to be custom sized for maximum free area without blank -offs. Ruskin and Greenheck are acceptable manufacturers. B. Electronic Damper Actuators: 1. Actuator shall be direct coupled (over the shaft), enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The actuator -to -shaft clamp shall use a ' V' bolt and V' shaped, toothed cradle to attach to the damper shaft for maximum holding strength. 2. Actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. 3. For power failure/safety applications, a mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be used. 4. Actuators with spring return mechanisms shall be capable of either clockwise or counterclockwise spring return operation by simply changing the mounting orientation. 5. Proportional actuators shall accept a 2-10VDC, 4-20mA signal, or be of the 2-point floating type and provide a 2-10VDC actuator position feedback signal. 6. All actuators shall have external manual gear release (clutch) or manual crank to aid in installation and for allowing manual positioning when the actuator is not powered. 7. All actuators shall have external direction of rotation switch to aid in installation and to allow proper control response. 8. Actuators shall be provided with factory -mounted 3-foot electrical cable and conduit fitting to provide easy hook-up to an electrical junction box. 9. Actuators shall be listed under Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873. 10. All Actuators shall be manufactured by BELIMO. 2.5 SENSORS A. Temperature Sensors: All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory -calibrated to within 0.50 F, totally interchangeable. Wall sensors are to be housed in tamperproof enclosures. Duct sensors are to be electronically identical, housing suitable for the application. B. Wall Sensor (other than VAV box sensors): Standard wall sensor shall use solid state sensor and shall be packaged in aesthetically pleasing enclosure. Sensor shall provide override function, warmer/cooler lever for setpoint adjustment and jack for plug-in of service tool for field adjustments. Override time shall be stored in controller and be adjustable on a zone -by -zone basis. Adjustment range for warmer/cooler lever shall also be stored EEPROM on controller. C. All sensors installed on outside walls shall be provided with an insulated sub -base. 2.6 WEB INTERFACE A. General 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL BAS supplier shall provide web -based access to the system as part of standard installation. User must be able to access all displays of real-time data that are part of the BAS using a standard web browser. Web browser shall tie into the network through owner -supplied Ethernet network connection. Webpage host shall be a separate device that resides on the BAS BACnet network, but is not the BAS server for the control system. BAS server must be a separate computer from the webpage host device to ensure data and system integrity. The webpage software shall not require a per -user licensing fee or annual fees. The webpage host must be able to support on average 50 simultaneous users with the ability to expand the system to accommodate an unlimited number of users. B. Browser Technology Browser shall be Internet Explorer v9.0 or later, Firefox v3.6 or later, Safari v2.0 or later (on Mac OS X). WEBtalk browsers: Internet Explorer 8.0, Firefox, Safari on Mac. WEBtalk mobile client support: Microsoft Mobile WAP browser, Blackberry. No special vendor -supplied software shall be needed on computers running browser. All displays shall be viewable and the webpage host shall directly access real-time data from the BAS BACnet network. Data shall be displayed in real-time and update automatically without user interaction. User shall be able to change data on displays if logged in with the appropriate user name and password. C. Communications 1. Webpage host shall include two (2) Ethernet network connections. One (1) network connection shall be dedicated to BAS BACnet network and shall be used to gather real- time data from all the BACnet devices that form the BAS. This network shall communicate using BACnet, allowing the webpage host to gather data directly from units on the local LAN or from other projects connected over a WAN. This network shall also provide the connection to the BAS server for webpage generation. 2. The second Ethernet connection shall provide the physical connection to the Internet or an IP-based WAN. It shall be the port that is used for the browser to receive web pages and data from the webpage host. The webpage host shall act as a physical barrier between the BAS network and the WAN or Internet connection that allows the browser to receive webpages and data. The two separate network connections provide for a physical barrier to prevent raw BACnet traffic being exposed on the IP network. 3. The webpage host shall provide for complete isolation of the IP and BACnet networks by not routing networking packets between the two networks. 4. BAS BACnet Ethernet network shall be provided and installed by the BAS supplier. Owner shall provide and incur any monthly charges of WAN/Internet connection. D. Display of Data 1. Webpage graphics shown on browser shall be replicas of the BAS displays. User shall need no additional training to understand information presented on webpages when compared to what is shown on BAS displays. Webpage displays shall include animation just as BAS displays. Fans shall turn, pilot lights shall blink, coils shall change colors, and so on. 2. Real-time data shall be shown on all browser webpages. This data must be directly gathered using the BACnet network and automatically updated on browser webpage displays without any user action. Data on the browser shall automatically refresh as changes are detected without re -drawing the complete display. 3. It shall be possible for user from browser webpage to change data if the user is logged on with the appropriate password. Clicking on a button or typing in a new value shall change digital data. Using pull -down menus or typing in a new value shall change analog data. 4. Data displays shall be navigated using pushbuttons on the displays that are simply clicked on with the mouse to select a new display. Alternatively, the standard back and forward buttons of the browser can be used for display navigation. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Time Schedule Adjustment 1. Web access shall allow user to view and edit all schedules in the system. This includes standard, holiday and event schedules as described in BAS specification. Display of schedules shall show interaction of all schedules on a single display so user sees an overview of how all work together. User shall be able to edit schedules from this display. 2. Display of all three schedules must show all ON times for standard, holiday and event schedules in different colors on a given day. In addition, OFF times for each must also be shown in additional colors. User shall be able to select from standard calendar what days are to be scheduled and same display shall show all points and zones affected. User shall be able to set time for one day and select all days of the week that shall be affected as a recurrence of that same schedule for that given day. 3. Schedule list shall show all schedules currently defined. This list shall include all standard, holiday and event schedules. In addition, user shall be able to select a list that shows all scheduled points and zones. F. Logging of Information User shall use standard browser technology to view all trend logs in system. User shall be able to view logged data in tabular form or graphical format. User shall be able to adjust time interval of logged data viewed and shall be able to adjust Y axis of data viewed in graphical format. User shall also be able to download data through the web interface to local computer. Data shall be in CSV format. G. Alarm Handling Web interface shall display alarms as they occur. User shall be able to acknowledge alarms using browser technology. In addition, user shall be able to view history of alarm occurrence over a user -selected time frame. In addition, those alarms may be filtered for viewing per user -selected options. A single selection shall display all alarms that have not been acknowledged. H. Webpage Generation Webpages shall be automatically generated from the BAS displays that reside on the BAS server. User shall access webpage host through the network and shall initiate a webpage generation utility that automatically takes the BAS displays and turns them into webpages. The webpages generated are automatically installed on the webpage host for access using any computer's standard browser. Any system that requires use of an HTML editor for generation of webpages shall not be considered. Password Security and Activity Log Access through web browser shall utilize the same hierarchical security scheme as BAS system. User shall be asked to log on once the browser makes connection to webpage host. Once the user logs in, any and all changes that are made shall be tracked by the BAS system. The user shall be able to change only those items he or she has authority to change. A user activity report shall show any and all activity of the users who have logged in to the system, regardless of whether those changes were made using a browser or through the BAS workstation. J. BACnet Communication Web server shall directly communicate to all devices on the BAS network using BACnet protocol. No intermediate devices shall be necessary for BACnet communication. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the Owners representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences of operation and point schedules. 3.3 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount with a minimum 3' — 0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on locations from Owner's representative prior to installation. B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc. shall be suitable wired and mounted to protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures. C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels. D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for installation under other sections sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow. 3.4 INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally, in accordance with Specification Division 26 and all the NEC. B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function. E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated on the electrical drawings. Coordinate with electrical contractor prior to bid, so that all power required for the Energy Management System is included in the bid. F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, and telephone rooms to be installed in raceways. All other wiring is to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code requirements. All underground conduit and wall sensor conduit shall be provided and installed with pull string. The 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL contractor shall coordinate with the Division 26 installer prior to bids such that all required conduit is in the contract sum. G. All exhaust air fans shall be interlocked with the motorized outside air damper such that the fans operation is prohibited if the outside air damper is closed. Refer to control sections for further requirements and scheduling. 3.5 DDC OBJECT TYPE SUMMARY A. Provide all database generation. B. System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system. They shall be logically laid out for easy use by the Owner. Provide outside air temperature indication on all system displays associated with economizer cycles C. At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, and chilled/hot/condensing water pumps. Warning limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes. D. All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability to be automatically trended. E. All analog inputs (high/low limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall be prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per owner's requirements. F. Provide back-up database for all stand-alone logic controllers on disk. 3.6 FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start logic control system. B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. Control system installer shall be on site during the Test and Balance Procedure and provide all training/assistance as necessary for proper commissioning of the system. C. Provide the capability for off -site monitoring at control contractor's local or main office. At a minimum, off -site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download. D. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to maintaining the integrity of the operating system. 3.7 TRAINING A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment. B. Provide system operator's training to include (but not limited to) such items as the following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3 persons. C. Provide up to 40 hours of training for the Owner's designated representative(s). 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate complete operating system to Owner's representative. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper operation, on a point to point basis (Control System's Certification). END OF SECTION 23 09 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 23 09 00 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 21 15 — CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. C. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of condensate piping work is indicated on the drawings and schedules, as indicated in Mechanical General Provisions and by requirements of this section. B. Applications for condensate piping include the following: 1. Conductor piping from air handling equipment to building storm drain or as indicated on drawings. 2. Refer to appropriate Division 2 sections for exterior condensate system required in conjunction with storm water piping. 3. Refer to appropriate Division 23 sections for insulation required in conjunction with condensate piping. 4. Trenching and backfill required in conjunction with storm water piping is specified in applicable Division 2 sections, and is included as work of this section. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDENSATE PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in storm water piping systems. 2.2 BASIC PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Provide pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with the following listing: B. Above Ground Drain Piping: 1. Pipe Size 1-1/4" and Larger: DWV copper hard drawn. 2. Fittings: DWV copper with 50/50 silver soldered joints. 3. Pipe Size 1" and Smaller: Type "L" copper, hard drawn. 4. Fittings: Wrought copper with 95/5 soldered joints. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEMS 2321 15 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Underground Drain Piping: 1. Pipe Size 6" and Smaller: Polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC) DWV-ASTM D2665-82. 2. Pipe Class: Schedule 40. 3. Fittings: PVC-DWV fittings with solvent weld cement ASTM D2564-80. 2.3 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS A. Provide supports, anchors and seals complying with Division 23 Basic Materials and Methods section, "Supports, Anchors and Seals", in accordance with the following listing: B. Adjustable steel clevises, steel pipe clamps and pipe saddle supports for horizontal piping hangers and supports. C. Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. D. Concrete inserts, C-clamps, and steel brackets for building attachments. E. Copper flashings for piping penetrations. 2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS A. Provide factory fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations. B. Cleanout Plugs: Cast -bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1 countersunk head. C. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame: cleanout plug; adjustable round top as follows: Nickel -Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit of pattern indicated. D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering piping products which may be incorporated in the work include the following: Ancon, Inc., Josam Manufacturing Co., J.R. Smith Manufacturing Co., Wade Div., Tyler Pipe, Zurn. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING DRAIN PIPING A. Lay building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Clear the interior of piping from dirt and other superfluous material. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. B. Install condensate piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2%) for piping 3" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1 %) for piping 4" and larger. 3.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide union and P-trap with cleanout and union connection to equipment. Refer to details on drawings. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEMS 2321 15 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Provide condensate piping as required and make connection to all Owner furnished/Contractor installed equipment. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS A. Cleanouts: Install in condensate piping as indicated, as required by the Florida Building Code: at each change in direction of piping greater than 450; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping; and at base of each conductor. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping. Select type to match adjacent building finish. B. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each cleanout passing through water proof membrane. END OF SECTION 23 21 15 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEMS 2321 15 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 23 00 — REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. Section 23 00 00 — HVAC applies to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of refrigeration piping systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Applications for refrigeration piping systems include the following: 1. Refrigerant suction line piping between compressors and cooling coils. 2. Refrigerant liquid line piping between liquid receivers and cooling coils. 3. Refrigerant discharge line piping between compressors and condensers. 4. Refrigerant condenser drain line piping between condensers and liquid receivers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of refrigeration piping products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with refrigeration piping system work similar to that required for project. C. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B31.5 and ANSI B31.5a, "Refrigeration Piping", and extend applicable lower pressure limits to pressures below 15 PSIG. D. Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". E. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI B31.5, and ANSI B31.5a, "Refrigeration Piping", pertaining to brazing of refrigeration piping for shop and project site locations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data for refrigeration piping systems materials and products. B. Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME standards (ANSI B31.5). C. Submit scaled layout drawings of installed refrigeration pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS 23 23 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and equipment. Coordinate pipe size requirements with the equipment supplier. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERATION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide materials and products complying with ANSI B31.5 Code for refrigeration piping where applicable; base pressure rating on refrigeration piping system maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in refrigeration piping systems. 2.2 BASIC PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Provide pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with the following listing: B. Tube %" and Larger: Copper tube. 1. Wall Thickness: Type ACR, hard drawn temper. 2. Fittings: Wrought -copper, solder -joints (lead free). 3. Joints: Soldered, silver solder, ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 96 TS. C. Tube Size 3/4" and Smaller: Copper tube. 1. Wall Thickness: Type ACR, soft annealed temper. 2. Fittings: Cast copper -alloy for flared copper tubes. 3. Joints: Flared. 2.3 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS A. Provide supports, anchors and seals complying with Division 23 Basic Materials and Methods section, "Supports, Anchors and Seals", in accordance with the following listing: 1. Adjustable steel clevises, adjustable roller hangers, and adjustable pipe roll stands for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. 3. Concrete inserts, C-clamps and steel brackets for building attachments. 4. Protection shields for insulated piping support in hangers. 5. Copper flashing for piping penetrations. 2.4 SPECIAL REFRIGERATION VALVES A. Special valves required for refrigeration piping systems include the following types: 1. Globe and Check Valves: a. Globe and Shutoff Valves: Forged brass, packed, back seating, winged seal cap, 3000 F temperature rating, 500 PSI working pressure. b. Check Valves: Forged brass, accessible internal parts, soft synthetic seat, fully guided brass piston and stainless steel spring, 2500 F temperature rating, 500 PSI working pressure. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS 23 23 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering globe and check valves which may be incorporated in the work include the following: Henry Valve Co., Parker Hannifin Corp. Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Div., Sporlan Valve Co. 2. Solenoid Valves: a. Two-way Solenoid Valves: Forged brass, designed to conform to ARI 760, normally closed, Teflon valve seat, NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure, 24 volt, 60 hertz, UL listed, 1/2" conduit adapter, 2500 F temperature rating, 400 PSI working pressure. Manual Operator: Provide manual operator to open valve. b. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering solenoid valves which may be incorporated in the work include the following: Alco Controls Div., Emerson Electric Co., Automatic Switch Co., Sporlan Valve Co. 2.5 REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES A. Refrigerant Strainers: Brass shell end and connections, brazed joints, Monel screen, 100 mesh, UL-listed, 350 PSI working pressure. B. Moisture -Liquid Indicators: Forged brass, single port, removable cap, polished optical glass, solder connections, UL-listed 2000 F (930 C) temperature rating, 500 PSI working pressure. C. Refrigerant Filter -Driers: Corrosion -resistant steel shell, steel flange ring and spring, wrought copper fittings, ductile iron cover plate with steel cap screws, replaceable filter -drier core, 500 PSI working pressure. All filter -driers shall meet the requirements of ARI Standard 710. Filter - Driers for heat pump systems shall be bi-flow type. D. Evaporator Pressure Regulators: Provide corrosion -resistant, spring -loaded, stainless steel springs, pressure operated, evaporator pressure regulator, in size and working pressure indicated, with copper connections. E. Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Provide discharge line mufflers as recommended by equipment manufacturer for use in service indicated, UL-listed. F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering refrigeration accessories which may be incorporated in the work include the following: Alco Controls Div., Henry Valve Co., Parker -Hannifin Corp., Sporlan Valve Co. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refrigerant piping shall be sized as per recommendations of the air conditioning equipment manufacturer. Provide, upon request, copies of manufacturer's calculations, specifically when distance between system components exceeds standard published data. B. Piping shall be filled with dry nitrogen while soldering. C. Provide all necessary valves, traps, filter/dryers, sight glass, etc. as required for a complete and ready to operate installation. Include accessible service fittings. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS 23 23 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. When underground, refrigerant pipes and associated control wires shall be encased in a schedule 40 PVC conduit. Diameter of conduit shall be large enough to allow the installation and removal of all refrigerant lines and control wires. Seal ends with approved foam. E. Provide long sweep elbows or junction boxes at the ends of conduit to facilitate pulling of refrigerant pipes. F. The open ends of the PVC conduit or boxes shall be sealed to keep water and vermin from entering the pipe. Ends of PVC conduit shall extend a minimum of 6" above ground or concrete slab. G. A separate PVC conduit shall be provided for each air conditioning system and for each refrigerant circuit on units with multiple circuits. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Pitch refrigerant piping in direction of oil return to compressor. Provide oil traps and double section risers where indicated, and where required to provide oil return. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SPECIAL REFRIGERATION VALVES A. Install refrigeration valves where indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove accessible internal parts before soldering or brazing, replace after joints are completed. Solenoid Valves: Install in refrigerant piping as indicated with stem pointing upwards. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES A. Refrigerant Strainers: Install in refrigerant lines as indicated, and in accessible location for service. B. Moisture -Liquid Indicators: Install as indicated on refrigerant liquid lines, in accessible location. C. Refrigerant Filter -Dryers: Install in refrigerant lines as indicated, and in accessible location for service. D. Evaporator Pressure Regulators: Install in refrigerant suction lines or evaporator outlets as indicated. Adjust, if required, for proper evaporator pressure. E. Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Install as indicated, in horizontal or down flow portion of hot -gas lines, immediately after leaving compressor; not in riser. 3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Connect refrigerant piping to mechanical equipment in manner shown, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5 and ANSI B31.5a, "Refrigeration Piping". Perform initial test with dry nitrogen, using soap solution to test all joints. Perform final test with 27" vacuum, and then 200 PSI using halide torch. System must be entirely leak -free. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS 23 23 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 23 23 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS 23 23 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 30 00 — AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and of Section 23 00 00 - HVAC shall apply to all work under this Section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. Coordinate work with that of other trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the contract. 1.2 SCOPE A. Work under this Section shall include providing the following: 1. Sheet metal supply and return air ductwork, round or rectangular from each air handling unit to each terminal air device. 2. Terminal air distribution devices including diffusers, grilles, registers, and all special air flow control and directing devices. Provide frame required for ceiling construction type, refer to the architectural reflected ceiling plan. 3. Hangers and supports for all duct systems and duct mounted equipment. 4. Air volume control devices, balancing dampers and flexible connections to all air moving equipment subject to vibration. 5. Install duct mounted devices being provided under another Section of the contract documents, such as temperature control dampers, temperature control devices, etc. Assist in the coordination of such work. Meet and fully comply with manufacturers installation instructions. 6. Labor to operate air systems and make adjustments to achieve complete Test and Balance in cooperation with work performed under Test and Balance. 7. Assist in the development of coordination drawings for all ceiling spaces indicating location of air distribution systems and all systems sharing ceiling space. 8. All ductwork indicated on drawings is schematic and shall not be scaled. Changes in duct sizes and/or location may be made where necessary to conform to space conditions without additional cost to the Owner. All duct dimensions are clear inside dimensions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following codes and standards, latest edition, are to be considered a part of this specification to establish quality of materials and labor. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems (2015) NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems (2015) SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible (2005) SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide, Fifth Edition SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual ASHRAE Method of Testing HVAC Air Ducts and Fittings Standard 126-2008 B. Reference made to the "Manual' shall mean applicable SMACNA Standards as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Tables, descriptions and drawings in the Manual show methods of fabrication of items such a ductwork, dampers, louvers, and air intakes. These methods shall be followed unless manufactured products are specified for these items. D . Manufacturer's model names and numbers used in this section of the specifications are subject to change per manufacturer's action. Contractor shall, therefore, verify them with manufacturer's representative before ordering any product or equipment. Immediately notify architect/engineer of any changes. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit catalog cuts and specification sheets for the following items: Flexible duct Flexible Connections Duct Construction Standards Dampers Turning Vanes Test Reports Operating and Maintenance Data Guarantees Pressure Sensitive Tape Duct Sealing Materials Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers Duct Access Doors Air Flow Measurement Devices B. Prior to commencing work, submit detailed 1/4" scale ductwork installation drawings. Drawings shall indicate coordination with other ceiling devices, ceiling plenum materials and the bottom elevation of all ducts. C. At project closeout, submit 1/4" scale record drawings of installed ductwork, duct accessories, and outlet/inlets, etc. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect shop fabricated and factory fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shopping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS GENERAL A. Ductwork 1. Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Clean and treat to accept paint. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 167; AISI type 302/304/316 with No. 4 directional polish where exposed to view in occupied spaces. Protect finished surfaces with mill -applied adheisive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation. B. Duct Sealer: 1. Hardcast 601, Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146, or United McGill Unimastic 181. Sealer shall be UL Listed. 2. Flame spread 25 or lower in dry state 3. Smoke development 50 or lower in dry state 4. Refer to TABLE 1-2, Standard Duct Sealing Requirements, of the Manual. 5. Ductwork shall be sealed to the following Class per the SMACNA Manual: APPLICABLE DUCT PRESSURE CLASS SEAL CLASS 2" W.G. AND BELOW A 3" W.G. A 4' W.G. AND UP A 2.2 SHEET METAL DUCT SYSTEM A. Sheet metal ductwork includes, but is not limited to: 1. Supply, exhaust, return, and outside air ducts. 2. Construct pressure duct system in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, (2005), hereinafter referred to as the "Manual". 3. Use the Manual Duct Construction Tables for metal gauge, reinforcing type, spacing, and method of fabrication. Indicate on shop drawings. 4. Seal all joints as per Table 1-2. All screw penetrations shall be sealed. 5. Runouts to diffusers may be flexible ducts where shown on the plans. 6. Ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with Table 1-15 duct pressure class ratings based upon duct operating pressure obtained on the Equipment Schedule. 7. Rectangular ducts shall be reinforced in accordance with Tables 1-3 through 1-13 of the Manual. B. Sheet metal ductwork shall be constructed to the following duct pressure class per the SMACNA Manual: DUCT PRESSURE CLASS /2" W.G. 1" W.G. 2" W.G. 3" W.G. 4" W.G. OPERATING PRESSURE UP TO'/" W.G. OVER'/" UP TO 1" W.G. OVER 1" UP TO 2" W.G. OVER 2" UP TO 3" W.G. OVER 3" UP TO 4" W.G. C. Round and oval ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 3 of the Manual. D. Hangers and Supports: 1. Hangers and supports shall be provided in accordance with Chapter IV of the Manual. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Hanger attachment to structure shall be as shown by Fig. 4-1 through Fig. 4-4. 3. Hanger size and spacing shall be as shown by Tables 4-1 through 4-3. 4. No power driven anchors shall be used. E. Fittings and Other Construction: 1. Fittings and other construction shall be fabricated in accordance with Chapter 2 of the Manual. 2. Supply, return, and exhaust air ducts shall be installed with fittings, dampers, etc., as indicated on Figure 2-1. 3. Radius elbows shall be constructed with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the duct width. Where a smaller radius or square elbows are used, provide turning vanes to produce a pressure drop less than that of an elbow with 1.5 radius. 4. Transitions shall be constructed with no side at a greater angle than 30 degrees from duct center line on contracting flow, and 22.5 degrees maximum diverging flow. See Fig. 2-7 of the Manual. 5. Connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with collars secured to duct and air devices. Branch ducts shall be fabricated in accordance with Table 2-15 of the Manual. 6. Volume dampers shall be installed on all branch lines. Dampers shall be fabricated as shown by Figures 2-12 and 2-13 of the Manual. 7. Branch connections shall be constructed as shown by Fig. 2-6. "Spin -In" connections shall be sealed. F. Turning and Splitter Vanes: 1. Turning vanes shall be provided in all square elbows. Splitter vanes shall be provided in all duct offsets larger than 15 degrees and radius elbows. 2. Turning vanes shall be constructed as shown by Figures 2-3 and 2-4 of the Manual. 3. Vanes shall be double thickness "airfoil" design, except in ducts 10 " or less in depth where single thickness vanes with trailing edges may be used. G. Flexible Connections: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene -coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. 2.3 FACTORY -FABRICATED DUCTWORK A. At installer's option, provide factory -fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop -fabricated duct and fittings. B. Galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A527, lockforming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. C. Gage: 28 GA. Minimum for round and oval ducts and fittings, 4" through 24" diameter. D. Elbows: One piece construction for 90 degree and 45 degree elbows 14" and smaller. Provide multiple core construction for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential joint. E. Divided Flow Fittings: 90 degree tees, constructed with saddle tap spot welded and bonded to duct fitting body. F. Sealing: Factory fabricated ductwork shall be sealed. The fittings shall be factory fitted with a sealing gasket which when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions will seal the joints without the use of duct sealer, similar to Lindab Safe. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering factory -fabricated ductwork which may be incorporated in the work include, but not limited to, the following: Lindab, United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp., Semco Manufacturing, Inc., Sheet Metal Products Co. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. In ductwork use the largest door size that can be installed, up to size 24" x 24" maximum, to permit easy inspection and servicing of duct mounted devices. Doors shall be as per Figures 2- 10 and 2-11 of the Manual. Minimum size shall be 12" x 12". Access doors 6" and 8" in width shall be not less than 12" long. B. Insulated doors shall be hollow metal type with insulation of same thickness as for adjacent ductwork. C. Since the purpose of the access doors/panels is to facilitate access to concealed equipment and other devices, the size of each door/panel shall be determined in the field prior to ordering them. D. All doors/panels shall be of the hinged type with easily opened locking devices, unless safety or fire rated considerations require otherwise. E. Doors/panels that are found by the Architect or Owner to be of inadequate size to allow proper access to equipment and other concealed devices shall be promptly replaced at no cost to the contract. F. Doors/panels that are found by the Architect or Owner to be improperly located, with relation to the equipment or concealed devices they serve, shall be relocated at no cost to the contract. 2.5 DAMPERS AND DAMPER OPERATORS A. Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single or multi -blade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA manual. B. Single blade manual volume damper operators shall be equal to Ruskin, Ventfabrics, Durodyne or as approved, quadrant regulator with damper position indicator level and locking device. C. Multi -leafs volume dampers operators shall be equal to Ruskin, Ventfabrics, Durodyne, or as approved, selflocking regulator with damper position indicator. Motorized dampers shall be of the low leakage design. 2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Flexible ducts shall be provided where indicated on drawings. Ducts must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class I Air Duct, Standard 18 1. B. Liner shall be a trilaminate of aluminum foil, fiberglass, and aluminized polyester, all mechanically locked without adhesives. C. Ducts shall be factory insulated with glass fiber insulation having a "C" value of 0.23; vinyl vapor barrier jacket; a flame spread rating of 25, and smoke density factor of 50. D. Ducts shall be rated for 2 inch water gauge static pressure applications. E. The maximum length of flexible ducts to air devices shall be limited to six feet (6). 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL F. The duct shall have an inside bending radius of its inside diameter. G. All flexible duct terminations to be secured with galvanized metal bolted draw band. Secure with a minimum of three sheet metal screws after band is tight. Seal cut ends of insulation with approved tape. H. Flexible duct shall be Thermaflex, Genflex, or Flexmaster. 2.7 SPIN IN FITTINGS A. Spin -in fittings shall be provided at the point of connection of flexible ducts to metal ducts, where indicated on drawings, and as herein specified. Fittings shall be specifically manufactured for sheet as applicable. B. Fittings shall be conical bellmouth type of galvanized steel, welded or riveted construction to meet system pressures. Fittings shall have integral dampers with handle indicating position at damper quadrant. C. The adjustable damper components shall be factory assembled using spring loaded, retraceable bearing, and positive locking regulator damper hardware. D. When fitting diameter equals or exceeds available duct dimensions, proceed as follows: For rectangular ducts, use Flexmaster Type STO, Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. Series H.E.T., or Crown Series 3300, with a volume damper. E. Acceptable manufacturer for galvanized sheet metal is Flexmaster 3000S-CB-D, Crown Series 3200. 2.8 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND CEILING DIFFUSERS A. By "register" is meant a face together with the box and dampers. By "grille" is meant the face only. All dampers is in supply air registers shall be opposed blade type. B. All air distribution devices shall be the product of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise noted. C. Maximum permissible sound level of all air supply devices shall not be more than NC-25. Lower where indicated. D. Ceiling supply diffusers shall have dampers, distribution grids and, where necessary, approved type baffles. E. The size and capacities of all diffusers, registers, and grilles are indicated on the drawings. F. Select each air handling device to meet the indicated sound level criteria, air velocities and distribution pattern for every area. G. Provide frames as required for the installation of the air devices on the ceiling or wall construction indicated on the architectural plans. Air devices connected to flexible ducts shall not be supported by ceiling tiles. Provide additional supports attached directly to the ceiling grid. H. At the contractor's option, all air devices may be provided with factory insulation in lieu of field applied insulation. If factory option is utilized, the back of all ceiling diffusers shall have factory applied foil faced, R-6 insulation formed to fit the contour of the diffuser back. Insulation shall be 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL continuously glued and sealed around the outer perimeter of the outer cone to form a continuous vapor seal. The contractor shall seal the insulation on the supply duct at the connection to the diffuser to form a continouos vapor seal at the duct connection. Approved duct sealant or foil faced duct dape may be used. Acceptable manufacturers are Titus, Carnes, Metalaire, Price, and Nailor. 2.9 AIR FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICES - HYBRID A. Provide product data sheets for airflow measuring devices indicating minimum placement requirements, sensor density, sensor distribution, and installed accuracy to the host control system. B. Manufacturers shall have a minimum of ten years experience producing microprocessor -based, multi -point thermal dispersion velocity meters. C. Provide airflow/temperature measurement devices (ATMDs) where indicated on the plans. D. Each ATMD shall consist of one or more sensor probes and a single, remotely mounted, microprocessor -based transmitter capable of independently processing up to 4 independently wired sensor nodes contained in one or more probe assemblies per measurement location. 1. Each sensor node shall contain two individually wired, hermetically sealed bead -in -glass thermistors. 2. Thermistors shall be mounted in the sensor node using a marine -grade, waterproof epoxy. Thermistor leads shall be protected and not exposed to the environment. Thermistor leads shall not be fastened to the thermistor semiconductor substrate by weld or solder connections. 3. The airflow rate at each sensor node shall be equally weighted and arithmetically averaged by the transmitter prior to output. All integrated circuitry shall be temperature rated as `industrial -grade'. 4. The temperature at each sensor node shall be equally weighted arithmetically averaged or velocity weighted and averaged by the transmitter prior to output, field -selectable by the contractor or user. 5. Each transmitter shall have a 16-character alpha -numeric display capable of displaying airflow, temperature, system status, configuration settings and diagnostics. 6. Other than the thermistor sensors, no other electronic components shall be located at the sensing node. 7. Devices using chip -in -glass, epoxy -coated or diode -case chip thermistors are not acceptable. E. All Sensor Probes 1. Each sensor node, consisting of two thermistor-sensors and their structural housing, shall independently determine the airflow rate and temperature at each measurement point. 2. Each sensor node shall be factory calibrated at a minimum of 16 airflow rates and 3 temperatures to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 3. Airflow accuracy shall be +/-2% of reading over the entire operating airflow range of not less than 0 to 5,000 fpm (25.4 m/s) and not more than 0 to 10,000 fpm (50.8 m/s). a. Devices whose overall performance at the host controller input terminals is the combined accuracy of the transmitter and sensor probes shall demonstrate that the total accuracy meets the performance requirements of this specification throughout the measurement range. 4. Temperature accuracy shall be +/-0.14° F (0.08° C) over the entire operating temperature range of -200 F to 160' F (-28.9° C to 71 ° C). 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL The operating humidity range for each sensor probe shall be 0-99% RH (non -condensing). Product design shall consider direct exposure to or emersion in liquid water and temporary exposure shall not damage the sensing elements. Each sensor or probe assembly shall not require matching to the transmitter in the field. A single manufacturer shall provide both the airflow/temperature measuring probe(s) and transmitter for each measurement location. F. Duct and Plenum Probes 1. Probes shall be constructed of extruded, gold anodized, 6063 aluminum tubes or optionally of Type 316 stainless steel tubes. All internal wires within the tube shall be Kynar coated. 2. Sensor probe design shall be capable of providing up to 4 sensor nodes per measurement location. 3. The minimum operating airflow range shall be 0 to 5,000 FPM (25.4 m/s) unless otherwise indicated on the plans. 4. Each ducted sensor probe shall have an integral, U.L. Listed, plenum rated cable. Cable jackets and conductor insulation shall be FEP, Teflon-FEP or Neoflon-FEP. Cables shall include a terminal plug for connection to the remotely mounted transmitter. G. Fan Inlet Probes 1. Sensor node assemblies shall be mounted on Type 304 stainless steel housings. 2. Mounting rods shall be field adjustable to fit the fan inlet and constructed of zinc plated steel. 3. Mounting styles required shall be indicated on the plans as either "face mount' or "throat mount." a. Face mounting style shall provide no mechanical fastening in the throat or on the surface of the inlet cone and shall be used on all inlet condition -sensitive plenum - type or plug fans. 4. Mounting feet shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel. 5. The minimum operating airflow range shall be 0 to 10,000 FPM (50.8 m/s) unless otherwise indicated on the plans. 6. Fan inlet probe cables shall be UL plenum -rated and may be FEP or PVC jacketed. H. Transmitters 1. The transmitter shall have an integral, minimum 16-character LCD display capable of simultaneously displaying airflow and temperature. The LCD display shall also be capable of displaying individual airflow and temperature readings of each independent sensor node. 2. The transmitter shall be capable of field configuration, diagnostics and include Field Calibration software, all using an on -board pushbutton interface and the LCD display. Field Calibration Wizard shall allow for a one or two point field adjustment to factory calibration for installations that require adjustment. 3. The transmitter shall have an on -off power switch and operate on 24 VAC. Isolation transformers are not be required. a) The transmitter shall use a 24 VAC power supply, fused and protected from over voltage, over current and power surges. b) The transmitter shall use "watch -dog" circuitry to assure automatic reset after power disruption, transients and brown -outs. 4. The operating temperature range for the transmitter shall be -200 F to 1200 F (-28.9° C to 48.90 C). The transmitter shall be installed at a location that is protected from weather and water. 5. The transmitter shall be capable of communicating with other devices using one of the following interface options: ©2017. HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Linear analog output signals for airflow and temperature: Field selectable, fuse protected, galvanically and optically isolated from all other circuitry, as either 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC or 4-20mA (all 4-wire connections). 1) Analog outputs shall have a minimum resolution 0.025% F.S. 2) An alarm output shall be available with the analog outputs option, adjustable to provide either a minimum or maximum signal when airflow is outside of a preset acceptable operating range. The alarm output shall provide adjustable hysteresis. b. RS-485: Field selectable BACnet-MS/TP, Modbus-RTU or Johnson Controls N2-13us. 6. The transmitter shall be capable of identifying a 'damaged' sensor node, ignore it and continue to operate by correctly averaging the remaining sensor nodes. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall review and approve placement and operating airflow rates for each measurement location indicated on the plans. A written report shall be submitted to the mechanical engineer if any measurement locations do not meet the manufacturer's placement requirements. Acceptable Manufacturer: EBTRON. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install all system components such as air devices, dampers, etc. is in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install duct mounted devices furnished by Owner and other trades, such as , control dampers, instrumentation, etc. Meet and comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Ductwork, diffusers, registers, grilles and other items of the air handling system shall not be supported by the ceiling or ceiling suspension system. D. The weight of ductwork and accessories shall not be supported by the equipment. Provide additional supports to the floor and/or building structure as required to relieve such weight. E. Set all equipment properly leveled and aligned with associated ductwork. Do not use the flexible connectors as a method of correcting misalignments or support of any equipment of duct weight. Coordinate location of grilles, wallcaps, roofcaps, louvers, and diffusers with electrical, architectural, and plumbing work. The bottom elevation of exposed ducts shall be coordinated with the Architect. G. All damper motors or actuators shall be mounted to be fully accessible. Provide extension shafts, if required. H. The back side of all louvers which are not used for outside air intake or exhaust shall be blanked off with galvanized sheet metal and insulated with two inch thick rigid board insulation, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Install all ductwork is in accordance with applicable SMACNA Manual. Ductwork shall be installed and tested to less than 2% leakage. Duct leakage tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 126-2008, Method of Testing HVAC Air Ducts. B. Provide hangers, reinforcing and supports is in accordance with applicable SMACNA Manual. C. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are clear inside dimensions. D. Duct dimensions may be changed to meet field conditions, as hereinbefore specified. E. Maintain full free interior duct areas and suitable shapes at all points. F. Conceal all ductwork is in finished spaces, unless otherwise indicated. G. Drawings do not show all transitions and offsets which may be required. Install all necessary transitions and offsets to complete system. H. Duct turns located near a fan discharge shall always be is in the direction of fan rotation. Installer shall coordinate arrangement of fan section to assure this condition is met. I. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and their electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. 3.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Flexible duct installation shall follow requirements shown on pages 3-13 through 3-20 and Figures 38, 3-9, and 3-10 of the Manual. B. Is in order not to exceed the maximum length of flexible duct allowed by these specifications, installer shall provide the necessary length of equivalent diameter sheet metal duct required for the installation. 3.4 SPIN -IN FITTING A. Install components is in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Provide a bead of duct sealer compound around duct opening before installation of fittings. C. Fittings shall not be installed back to back or adjacent to each other. Provide a minimum of four feet (4) between branch take -offs. 3.5 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All ducts shall be properly hung and supported is in accordance with Chapter 5 of the Manual. Spacing between hangers shall not exceed the maximum values shown on indicated tables of applicable Manual. B. Provide additional hangers as necessary for the proper support of control dampers and any related equipment. C. Installer shall be familiar with building structure and provide additional steel members when necessary for the proper support of equipment. D. No welding or cuffing of building structural members shall be permitted without the written approval of the Structural Engineer. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. All supports shall be from the building structure. F. Provide additional hangers on both sides of ducts penetrating fire rated walls. Hangers shall be located within 18" of wall. No ductwork shall be supported from any fire rated wall. G. On insulated ducts, hangers shall be attached directly to the ducts and be covered by insulation. 3.6 CLEANING A. As installation of ductwork progresses, remove temporary interior braces put is in place during construction. B. All scraps of metal and insulation and other debris shall also be removed from interior of ducts. C. Clean ductwork internally, unit -by -unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. D. Remove all grease and dust from exterior of ducts prior to installation of insulation. E. Paint inside of ducts visible through grilles and registers with one coat of flat black paint. F. At completion of work prior to final acceptance, clean interior of all work installed under this section. G. Strip protective paper from stainless steel ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has been damaged. H. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. 3.7 START UP A. Refer to Division 23 section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" for air distribution balancing. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. B. Replace all temporary filters used during construction with new, clean filters of the type specified for the project. END OF SECTION 23 30 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 23 30 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 34 00 — HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. The requirements of Section 230000 - HVAC apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of power and gravity ventilator and exhaust fan work is shown on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of power and gravity ventilators and exhaust fans required for project include the following: 1. Exhaust Fans: Exhaust fans. C. Refer to Division 26 sections for electrical work required in conjunction with power ventilators and exhaust fans. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of power and gravity ventilators and exhaust fans, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Provide power roof ventilators and exhaust fans bearing the Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Certified Ratings Seal. C. Provide power roof ventilator and exhaust fans electrical components which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data for power and gravity ventilators and exhaust fans, including specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions. B. Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data in maintenance manuals. PART 2 — PRODUCTS ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.1 DIRECT DRIVE PREMIUM INLINE CABINET CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS - GREENHECK MODEL CSP-A A. General Description: 1. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb/ft3). 2. Ceiling mounted applications. 3. Performance capabilities up to 3,700 cubic feet per minute (cfm) and static pressure to 1 inches of water gauge. 4. Fans are available in nineteen sizes (110 - 3600 unit sizes). 5. Maximum operating temperatures is 1300 F (54.40 C). 6. Sound levels as low as 0.8 AMCA sones. 7. Fans are UL/cUL listed 507 - Electric Fans. 8. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacture's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number. B. Wheel: C. Motors: Forward curved centrifugal wheel. Constructed of galvanized steel or calcium carbonate filled polypropylene. Statically and dynamically balanced in accordance to AMCA Standard 204-05. AC Induction Motor: a. Motor enclosures: [Open drip proof]. b. Motors are permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and furnished at the specific voltage and phase. C. Mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. d. For motor cooling there shall be fresh air drawn into the motor compartment through an area free of discharge contaminants. e. Accessible for maintenance. 2. Electronically Commutated Motor: a. Motor enclosures: Open type. b. Motor to be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically designed for fan applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable. Examples of unacceptable motors are: Shaded Pole, Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC), Split Phase, Capacitor Start and 3 phase induction type motors. C. Motors are permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and pre -wired to the specific voltage and phase. d. Internal motor circuitry to convert AC power supplied to the fan to DC power to operate the motor. e. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial factory mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal. f. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds. D. Housing: 1. Constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. 2. Interior shall be lined with 0.5 inches of acoustical insulation. 3. Profile as low as 101/ inches. E. Spring Loaded Aluminum Backdraft Damper: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Prevents air from entering back into the building when fan is off. 2. Eliminates rattling or unwanted backdrafts. F. Outlet: 1. Type of outlet: Round. 2. Field rotatable from horizontal to vertical discharge. 3. Duct collar shall include an aluminum backdraft damper. G. Grille: 1. Types: Aluminum. 2. Constructed of high impact polystyrene for sizes 50 thru 390, plastic shall be factory standard on unit under 390. 3. Constructed of aluminum non -yellowing for sizes 410 thru 3600, aluminum shall be factory standard on units over 410. H. External Electrical Access: Eliminates removing the motor pack which saves time on installation. Mounting Brackets: Fully adjustable for multiple installation conditions. J. Access Panel: 1. Once installed shall have easy access to internal components. K. Options/Accessories: 1. Disconnect Switches: a. Positive electrical shut-off. b. Wired from fan motor to junction box installed within motor compartment. C. Access for wiring shall be external. 2. Motion Detectors: a. Mounted Location: Wall. b. Infrared motion detector shall automatically turn on the fan when there is a change in temperature. C. Viewing area of 180 degrees. d. Adjustable time delay shutoff setting of 1 to 20 minutes. 3. Speed Controls: a. Controls the fan's output. b. Fan can be adjusted to 60 percent of full speed. C. Can be used to operate more than on fan at a time. 4. Time Delay Switch: a. Save energy by automatically turning off the fan. b. On a delay of 1 to 60 minutes after the light on fan has been turned off. 5. Transformers: a. Available for applications requiring voltage reduction. b. All transformers are shipped loose. 6. Wall Discharge: a. Type: Wall Louvered Discharge 7. Vibration Kit: a. Available for suspended installations. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL b. Includes pre -punched hole for ease of installation and shall have all hardware to mount one unit. L. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck Fan Corp, Cook, ACME or Penn. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Examine areas and conditions under which power and gravity ventilators and exhaust fans are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install ventilators and exhaust fans in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to insure that ventilators serve their intended function. B. Coordinate ventilator and exhaust fan work with work of roofing, walls, and ceilings, as necessary for proper interfacing. C. Ensure that power ventilators and exhaust fans are wired properly, with correct motor rotation, and positive electrical motor grounding. D. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators and exhaust fans. Adjust dampers for free operation. 3.3 TESTING A. After installation of ventilators and exhaust fans has been completed, test each to demonstrate proper operation of units at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. 3.4 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one (1) spare set of belts for each belt drive power ventilator and exhaust fans. END OF SECTION 23 34 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 36 00 —VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. The requirements of Section 23 00 00 - HVAC apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of terminal unit work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following: Variable Air Volume Boxes C. Refer to Division 26 sections for electrical work required in conjunction with terminal units. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of terminal units, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar, service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Manufacturer's data for terminal unit materials and products. B. Submit assembly -type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, and field connection details. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES A. Provide single duct variable air volume (VAV) terminal units of the sizes and capacities as scheduled. Terminals shall be certified by ARI, bear the ARI 880 seal, and be UL listed as a room air terminal unit. B. Terminals shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge galvanized steel with a minimum G 60 zinc coating, able to withstand a 125 hour salt spray test per ASTM B-117. Stainless steel casings, or galvanealed steel casings with a baked enamel paint finish, may be used as an 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES 23 36 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL alternative. The terminal casing shall be mechanically assembled (spot-welded casings are not acceptable). C. All appurtenances including control assemblies, control enclosures, and electric heating coils shall not extend beyond the top and bottom of the unit casing. At an inlet velocity of 2000 FPM, the static pressure drop across the basic terminal or basic terminal with a sound attenuator shall not exceed .08" W.G. for all unit sizes. D. The primary air valve shall consist of a minimum 22 gauge cylindrical body that includes embossment rings for rigidity. The damper blade shall be connected to a solid shaft by means of an integral molded sleeve which does not require screw or bolt fasteners. The shaft shall be manufactured of a low thermal conducting composite material, and include a molded damper position indicator visible from the exterior of the unit. The damper shall pivot in self lubricating long life, low friction thermo-plastic bearings. The damper actuator shall be mounted on the exterior of the terminal for ease of service. Damper shaft end shall include a permanent cast damper position indicator. Damper tube shall be free of obstructions including damper stops to allow the free rotation of the damper. The damper blade seal shall be secured without use of adhesives. The air valve leakage shall not exceed 1 % of maximum inlet rated airflow at 3" W.G. inlet pressure. E. Differential pressure airflow sensor shall be multi -quadrant averaging sensor with flow sampling of both velocity pressure and flow differential pressure from four quadrants, and shall contain two control ports and two accessory ports.. Single axis sensor shall not be acceptable for diameters 6" or larger. A minimum of 12 total pressure sensing points shall be utilized. The total pressure inputs shall be averaged using a pressure chamber located at the center of the sensor. A sensor that delivers the differential pressure signal that is at least 2.5 times the equivalent velocity pressure signal obtained from a conventional pitot tube. The sensor shall develop a differential pressure of 0.03" W.G. at an air velocity of < 450 FPM. Documentation shall be submitted which substantiates this requirement. Brass balancing taps and air flow calibration charts shall be provided for field airflow measurements. F. Electric Heaters: Terminal shall include an integral electric heater where indicated on the plans. Heater shall be manufactured by the terminal unit manufacturer, and shall be ETL listed. The heater cabinet shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge galvanized steel with a minimum G 60 zinc coating. Stainless steel cabinets, or galvannealed steel casings with a baked enamel paint finish, may be used as an alternative. Heater shall have a hinged access panel for entry to the controls. Panel shall be insulated to the cold supply air duct. 2. Electric heaters shall be factory mounted. 3. A power disconnect shall be furnished to render the heater non -operational. Heater shall be furnished with all controls necessary for safe operation and full compliance with UL and National Electric Code requirements. 4. Heater shall have a single point electrical connection. It shall include a primary disc -type automatic reset high temperature limit, secondary high limit(s), airflow switch, 80/20 nickel -chromium elements, and fusing per UL and NEC. Heater shall have complete wiring diagram with label indicating power requirement and KW output. G. Insulation: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES 23 36 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Insulation shall be covered with scrim backed foil facing. All insulation edges shall be covered with foil or metal nosing. Insulation shall meet ASTM C1136 and ASTM C665 for biological growth in insulation. H. Controls: Control devices such as DDC unit controller shall be furnished by the energy management system supplier to the VAV box manufacturer for mounting and wiring. Acceptable manufacturers: Metalaire, Price, Enviro-Tec, Trane, JCI, or Titus. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which VAV boxes will be installed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install VAV boxes in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of VAV boxes with other work. D. Field Quality Control: Operate VAV boxes to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty components as required to obtain proper operation and leak proof performance. END OF SECTION 23 36 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES 23 36 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 37 00 — LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide complete louver assemblies as indicated on drawings and in specifications. Coordinate with appropriate Architectural sections and drawings for a complete interpretation of the work. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 CERTIFICATION A. All performance shall be certified by AMCA and bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance and Water Penetration in accord with AMCA Standard 550. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 STATIONARY LOUVERS - GENERAL A. Provide louvers capable of withstanding the loads based on pressures as indicated on the Structural Drawings and the requirements of the Florida Building Code. B. Meet impact tests per AMCA 540 and as outlined by SSTD 12 and ASTM E1996, or as tested by Miami -Dade PA 201, PA 202 and PA 203. 1. Large missile impact test up to 30 feet in height. 2. Small missile impact test 30 feet to 60 feet in height. C. Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Engineering calculation shall be based upon surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120° F, ambient; 180° F, material surfaces. D. Air -Performance, Water -Penetration, Air -Leakage, and Wind -Driven Rain Ratings: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. Compliance with Wind Driven Rain Resistance per the Florida Building Code and AMCA550. E. Impact Testing and Labeling: Comply with the following: 1. Provide labels on louvers/vents required to be tested for impact resistance rating. 2. Labels shall be permanent metal labels. 3. Label Information shall include: a. Manufacturer's identification. b. Model number. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOUVERS 23 37 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Serial number or definitive information describing the product or material's performance characteristics. d. Approved agency's identification. 4. Labels must be readily visible, yet inconspicuously located from general view. F. MATERIALS 1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221(ASTM B 221 M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. 2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. 3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/13 26M, alloy 319. 4. Fasteners: 400 Series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. a. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. b. Use Phillips or flat -head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Post -installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque -controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless -steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 6. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. FABRICATION, GENERAL 1. Assemble louvers at the factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 2. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field -bolted assembly with close -fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. a. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade spacing pattern. 3. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. 4. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. a. Frame Type: Channel, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. 6. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacing indicated, but not more than recommended by the manufacturer, or 72 inches on center, whichever is less. a. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction. b. Exterior Corners: Manufacturers standard prefabricated corner units. 7 Where indicated, provide sub -sills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers. 8. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. H. Approved Manufacturers: Greenheck, Airolite, Ruskin, Price, or C/S Group Construction Specialties. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOUVERS 23 37 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 FIXED, EXTRUDED -ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. HORIZONTAL, HURRICANE -RESISTANT LOUVER: 1. Louver Depth: 9 inches. 2. Frame and (WDR) Blade Nominal Thickness: 6036T6 extruded aluminum with 0.081 inch and 0.062 inch wall thickness. 3. Mullion Type: Exposed. As required to comply with structural performance requirements, but not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Performance Requirements: a. Free Area: Not less than 41.5% or 6.66 sq. ft. for 48-inch-wide by 48-inch- high louver, or as shown on the drawings. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1250 FPM. C. Air Performance: Not more than 0.25 -inch W.G. static pressure drop at 750 FPM free area velocity. d. Compliant with TAS100A or AMCA550 without damper or sloped duct, visible vertical mullions on 48" on center maximum. 5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 6. Basis of Design: Greenheck EHV-901. B. LOUVER SCREENS 1. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. a. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. b. Screening Type: Bird screen. 2. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless -steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches on center. 3. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. a. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. b. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. C. Type: Re-wirable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing insect screens. Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames for permanently securing bird screens. 4. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: a. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 3/4-inch square mesh, 0.05-inch wire. C. FINISHES, GENERAL 1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish louvers after assembly. D. ALUMINUM FINISHES 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2. High -Performance Organic -Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid -chromate -fluoride -phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer Three -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard three -coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOUVERS 23 37 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. 1) Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including metallic colors. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's published instructions and as follows. 1. Install in accordance with Miami -Dade Control Notice of Acceptance for approved submittal and/or Florida Product Approval. - 2. For areas requiring impact resistance, comply with local governing codes. B. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. C. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather tight connection. D. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. E. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. F. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. G. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. H. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weather tight louver joints are required. Comply with Specification Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOUVERS 23 37 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory -applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 23 37 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOUVERS 23 37 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 54 13 - ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Types of duct heaters specified in this section include the following: Slip -in type duct heaters 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each heater. B. Maintenance Data: Include a copy of the shop drawings in the maintenance manual. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER A. Electric duct heater shall be of size, type, and capacity as shown on the drawings. B. Heaters shall be UL or ETL listed for zero clearance and shall meet the requirements of the National Electric Code and UL. C. Each duct heater shall be furnished with one or more automatic resets as an over -temperature safety device(s), serviceable and replaceable, that will de -energize the duct heater on over temperature. D. Each duct heater shall be furnished with one or more manual resets as a secondary over temperature safety device serviceable and replaceable, that will de -energize part of the duct heater on over -temperature or failure of the automatic reset(s). E. Terminal box and element frame shall be of heavy gauge (minimum of 20 gauge) galvanized steel, sufficiently formed and braced to assure structural rigidity of the entire heater assembly, terminal box and terminal box cover must be totally enclosed and free of any perforation. Thermal box shall have a false bottom design for greater cooling effect for the control components. F. Element(s) shall be of high-grade nickel -chrome alloy. Heating element(s) shall be held in place with floating steatite ceramic bushings. Element(s) shall be able to be field replaced. For maximum strength, the bracket must completely surround the ceramic bushing and have 1/32- 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS 23 54 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL inch total clearance between the bushing and metal. G. Each heater shall be furnished with a wiring diagram on the cover of the terminal box. H. Internal wiring shall be stranded copper wrapped with 105 C insulation. Standard contactors per stage shall be standard 24V. Terminal block or lugs shall be sizes for installation of 75 C copper wire for field wiring. Heaters over 48 amps total shall be sub -divided and circuit fuse for protection. I. Heaters shall be suitable for vertical or horizontal duct systems, heat pumps, cooling units or forced air systems as required. J. All components of the electric duct heater shall be listed components by UL. K. All heaters shall include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Disconnect and Fusing per the NEC. 2. Control transformer (fused). 3. Disconnecting type magnetic contactors. 4. Airflow switch. 5. Vapor barrier between heater and control panel to prevent sweating of control panel. 6. Electric heating coils shall be de -rated to 35 watts per square inch (maximum). L. Approved manufacturers are: Bel Thermal Units, Inc., Dell Heatrix, Brasch, or Warren. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DUCT HEATERS A. Comply with SMACNA specifications for installation and location of all duct heaters. Install heaters with manufacturer's specifications. B. Provide minimum of 36" clearance at front of heater for electrical service. END OF SECTION 23 54 13 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS 23 54 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 73 00 — CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. The requirements of Section 23 00 00 apply to this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Modular central station air handling units. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. E. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. F. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. G. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units. H. ARI 410 - Forced -Circulation Air -Cooling and Air -Heating Coils. I. ARI 430 - Standard for Central -Station Air -Handling Units. J. ARI 435 - Standard for Application of Central -Station Air -Handling Units. K. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. L. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430. D. Filter Media: ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class I. E. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410. F. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues complete catalog data on total product. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data. B. Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details. C. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weight, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and gauges and finishes of materials. D. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. E. Submit sound power levels for both fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity. F. Submit product data of filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames. G. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory -installed and field -installed wiring. H. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, wiring diagrams and other items requiring service. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in factory -fabricated protective containers, with factory -installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 1.9 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide two sets of extra stock disposable panel filters and all belts as applicable. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide the indoor central station air handling unit(s) as shown and scheduled on the plans. The units shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. All units shall be complete with fan section, coil section and all accessories specified. B. Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with removable double wall panels. Removal of side panels must not affect the structural integrity of each module. All exterior wall panels shall be made of minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel. Closed cell foam gasketing shall be applied where modules are joined. C. Units shall have an insulated stainless steel drain pan under coil section for drainage of condensate. Drain pans shall be positively sloped in two directions. D. Full sized double wall access doors with safety handles shall be provided for quick access to the interior of the unit casing. Doors attached by screws or doors not continuously gasketed are not acceptable. As a minimum, separate doors shall be provided for the fan, coil and filter sections. E. Units shall ship fully assembled on a minimum 10-gauge galvanized steel base rail. F. All panels shall be sealed with closed cell foam gasketing. G. Unit shall be double wall constructed to prevent fiberglass erosion into the airstream, sound absorption and to allow cleaning of the unit interior. Two-inch, 1-1/2 pound density insulation shall be sandwiched between interior wall and the exterior wall. Interior wall shall be minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel. Foil faced insulation is not acceptable. H. Filters shall be as specified on the equipment schedule. Filters shall have a rigid supporting maze across both the entering and leaving faces of the media. Filter boxes shall be as scheduled on drawings. Filter access doors shall permit easy replacement of the filters without tools. I. Fans shall be double width, double inlet, multiblade type as manufactured by the unit manufacturer. Fans shall be airfoil type as required for stable operation, plenum type, or as scheduled on the drawings. J. Supply fan performance shall be certified as complying with ARI Standard 430. Centrifugal fans shall be dynamically balanced at the factory as a complete fan assembly (fan wheel, motor, drive and belts). Fan shafts shall not pass through their first critical speed at any cataloged RPM. K. Fans shall be equipped with self -aligning, anti -friction pillow block bearings with a minimum life of L-50 200,000 hours. Bearings shall be equipped with grease lines allowing for easy lubrication from one side of the fan. L. Fan and motor assembly to be internally isolated from unit casing with spring isolators. M. Motors shall be mounted integral to an isolated fan assembly furnished by the unit manufacturer. Motors shall be mounted inside the unit casing and be of the premium efficiency type. Motor mounts shall be adjustable to permit drive belt tensioning. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL N. Drives shall be variable pitch, suitable for adjustment within five percent of specified RPM. Drives shall be selected at 1.5 service factor. O. Motors required to operate in conjunction with variable frequency drives shall be specifically designed for such use. Manufacturer of air handling unit shall provide written documentation of inverter balancing at the factory prior to shipment of air handler. P. Coils shall be manufactured by the same company as the supplier of the air handling unit. Coils shall be designed with aluminum plate fins and copper tubes. Q. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall be mounted in the unit casing to be accessible for service and can be removed from the unit either through the side or top. Capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. R. Coil casings shall be stainless steel. S. Coils with multiple circuits shall have intertwined circuitry. T. Acceptable Manufacturers: JCI, Trane, Carrier 39M, or Daikin. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which air handling units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Install air handling units where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roof decking, and piping, as necessary to interface installation of air handling units with other work. C. Install units on vibration mounts as indicated, comply with manufacturer's indicated installation method, if any. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components. 3.4 TESTING A. Upon completion of installation of air handling units, start-up and operate equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrated compliance. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.5 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for at least four hours to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of the air handlers. B. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice of training date. END OF SECTION 23 73 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 73 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 74 00—AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. The requirements of Section 23 00 00 - HVAC apply to this section. C. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of unit work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. Each unit is defined to include (but not by way of limitation) fan and motor, filter section, cooling coil, drip pan, compressor section, thermal insulation; refer to plans for additional requirements. B. Types of packaged air handling units required for project include the following: Packaged Rooftop Units Through the Wall Units - PTAC Ductless Wall Mounted Heat Pumps/Air Conditioners RAWAL Device C. Refer to appropriate Division 26 sections for disconnects and power wiring. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air handling units of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/NFPA 90A, "Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of electric heating coils. C. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/NFPA 70 "National Electric Code", pertaining to construction and installation of electrically operated components of packaged units. D. Except as otherwise indicated, provide unit thermal insulation with flame -spread index of 25 or less, fuel -contributed index of 50 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. E. Comply with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) standards as applicable to testing and rating fans, and testing louvers, dampers and shutters. F. Comply with Sheet Metal and Air -Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) ductwork construction standards as applicable to air handling units. G. Provide refrigerant coils complying with construction and testing standards of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". H. Except as otherwise indicated comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to packaged air conditioning units. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 74 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL I. Provide electric components for air handling units which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications for units showing dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation instructions. B. Submit assembly -type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, and field connection details. C. Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data in maintenance manuals. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver units with factory -installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components in factory -fabricated protective containers. B. Handle units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to unit manufacturer. C. Store units in clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTLESS HEAT PUMPS / AIR CONDITIONERS A. Provide wall hung ductless or ceiling mounted air conditioning/heat pump unit(s) as shown on the plans. B. Wireless Remote Control With Large LCD Screen shall permit user to select all functions and the desired room temperature setting from anywhere in the room. C. Microcomputer -Controlled System shall constantly monitor time and temperature against pre-set conditions for maximum energy cost savings as well as to ensure correct indoor temperature at all times. D. Twenty -Four Hour (24) ON/OFF Program Timer shall allow user to set various time based functions. E. Electric Resistant Back Up Heater shall be provided where schedules are to allow supplementary heat automatically. F. Automatic Defrost Cycle shall prevent coil freeze up during heat pump operation. G. A full Width Centrifugal Blower shall distribute a quiet, even flow of conditioned air to the room from the indoor evaporator. H. Auto Louver Mechanism activated by the remote control shall, oscillate the unique air discharge vane up and down to ensure even distribution. I. Heating/Cooling Automatic Changeover shall automatically switch the unit's operation from cooling to ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 74 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL heating and vice versa. J. The Hot Start System shall ensure a comfortable warm airflow even at the beginning of the heating process or during defrost. K. The Self -Diagnostic Feature shall facilitate maintenance and quick repair by indicating on the PCB's LED where a malfunction or problem occurs. L. Provide Non Polar Wiring which simplifies installation as only two wires for the signal line are required to connect the indoor and outdoor units together. M. Provide Washable Filters, removable without tools. N. Unit(s) shall be ETL, ARI approved. O. Acceptable Manufacturers: LG, Daikin, Sanyo and Mitsubishi. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Install units where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roof decking, and piping, as necessary to interface installation of air handling units with other work. Install units on vibration mounts as indicated, comply with manufacturer's indicated installation method, if any. Provide start- up of equipment by the manufacturer's service technicians 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP UNITS A. Install units where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, roof decking, as necessary to interface installation of rooftop units with other work. C. Install units on 24 inch high roof curb as indicated, comply with manufacturer's indicated installation method, if any. Curb shall be filled with six-inch batt insulation for sound attenuation purposes. D. Provide start-up of equipment by the manufacturer's factory certified service technicians. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 74 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.5 TESTING A. Upon completion of installation of units, start-up and operate equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. 3.6 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for 4-hours to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment. B. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Engineer of training date. Obtain receipt that training has been accomplished. END OF SECTION 23 74 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 74 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 23 81 27—AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Conditions set forth in Division 01 apply to this section. B. Examine other sections of the Project Manual for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. The requirements of Section 23 00 00 - HVAC apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide factory -fabricated and factory -assembled, one piece air cooled condensing units of size and capacity as indicated on the drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Each unit shall be furnished complete with air cooled condenser section, condenser fan sections, compressor motors, reciprocating or scroll type compressors, refrigerant cooler, refrigerant charge, complete refrigerant circuit controls and control panel, all factory assembled on a common steel framework. Provide single point electrical connection. C. Refer to Division 26 sections for field installed electrical wiring required for each air cooled unit. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of air cooled condensing units, of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Comply with applicable ANSI/ASHRAE Standards pertaining to products and installation of air cooled condensing units. C. Comply with applicable ARI Standards pertaining to products and capacities of air cooled condensing units. D. Provide electrical components required as part of factory -fabricated air cooled condensing units, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA Standards. E. Comply with National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of factory -fabricated air cooled condensing units. F. Guarantee: Provide five year guarantee on all compressors from the date of Substantial Completion. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications, including parts list, rated capacities, pressure drop, dimensions, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), installation and start-up instructions, 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 2381 27 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL and rating curves with selected points clearly indicated, complete wiring diagrams and any other information necessary to the proper installation and operation of each unit. B. Submit assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. C. Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for motors and control components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections. D. Submit maintenance data and parts list for each air cooled condensing unit. Include "trouble- shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data in maintenance manual. E. Submit required certifications and written tests results for required testing. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Rig each air cooled condensing unit to its final location under supervision of a manufacturer's representative, who shall approve entire rigging operation. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Factory fabricate air cooled condensing unit using manufacturer's standard design, materials, and construction in accordance with published product, information, except as otherwise indicated. B. Design structural system for the live loading in addition to dead -loads and operating -loads. 2.2 CONDENSING UNITS A. DX type coils with the following features: 1. Aluminum (WRITER: SELECT Copper) fins. 2. Multiple, independent direct expansion refrigerant circuits, where noted on the plans. 3. Factory pressure tested, dehydrated and supplied with the proper refrigerant charge or nitrogen holding charge. B. Each refrigerant circuit shall be factory supplied and piped and shall have the following components: Hot gas muffler for reciprocating compressors over five tons High and low pressure cutouts Suction and Liquid line shut-off valve Refrigerant filter drier Moisture indicating sight glass Liquid line solenoid valve Thermal expansion valve Hot gas bypass Integral sub cooling provisions Low ambient control (200 F) C. Each compressor shall be reciprocating or scroll type and shall have the following features: 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 81 27 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Hermetic. 2. Automatic reversible oil pump, if required by manufacturer 3. Equipped with suction and discharge shutoff valves. 4. Isolated from condensing unit assembly with vibration isolators. 5. Motor cooled by refrigerant suction gas passing around the motor windings and shall have over -temperature protection. 6. Manual restart of each motor after motor stoppage due to thermal overload. 7. Each compressor equipped with insertion type crankcase heater. 8. Factory installed contactor and a calibrated manual reset, ambient insensitive overload protector. It shall open all 3 phases in the event of overload in any one place. 9. Forced fed lubrication. 10. Each compressor motor unit shall have a five year warranty. D. Provide the following features: Condenser coil constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing and shall be protected with removal coil guards. Sub -cooling circuit with liquid accumulator, factory tested underwater to 420 PSIG air pressure. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge, statically and dynamically balanced, permanently lubricated ball bearings with built-in thermal overload protection. E. Controls are to be factory or field wired, assembled in a weatherproof enclosure and shall incorporate the following features: 1. Control for cycling compressors. 2. Hot gas bypass controls, if specified. 3. Positive acting timer to prevent short cycling of compressors and to delay restart of compressors after shutdown. 4. Fan cycling controls to maintain condensing pressure at partial loads and at low outdoor air temperatures. 5 Auxiliary switch in timer to prevent nuisance trip -out during winter start-up. 6. An electronic ground current sensing device to monitor fault current caused by refrigerant contaminants. Device shall stop respective compressor. 7. Phase loss protection. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: JCI, Lennox, Trane, Carrier, Daikin, Addison. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY A. The condensing unit shall be factory assembled to the maximum practical extent. Items subject to damage in transit or affecting transit clearances are to be shipped separately. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Condensing units shall be installed and started in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on the drawings. B. Prior to the equipment start-up, the manufacturer of the condensing units shall provide the services of a factory trained technician to visit the site and inspect the installation to determine if the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 81 27 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL installation procedures. He shall advise the Owner in writing of any recommended corrective action that is required to meet the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. C. Manufacturer shall provide a factory trained service technician to supervise leak testing, evacuation and dehydration using a high vacuum pump furnished by the manufacturer, charging the unit, start-up and instruction of Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance. END OF SECTION 23 81 27 ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 81 27 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 00 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements described in Division 1 of these specifications, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supervisory qualifications: 1. The electrical work on the project shall be under the direct supervision of a licensed journeyman. B. Qualifications of installers: 1. For the actual fabrication, installation, and testing of the work of this section, use only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and with the installation recommendations of the manufacturers of the specified items. 2. In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.3 DRAWINGS A. The intent of the drawings and specifications is to obtain a complete and satisfactory installation. An attempt to separate and completely define the work of Division 26 has been made. Separate divisional drawings and specifications shall not relieve the electrical contractor from full compliance of the work of his trade indicated on any drawings or in any section of the specifications. B. Architectural drawings take precedence over mechanical or electrical drawings with reference to building construction. Mechanical and electrical drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades permit. C. Changes from drawings necessary to make the work of the electrical contractor conform to the building as constructed, or to fit work of other trades, or to comply with the rules of bodies having jurisdiction, shall be made by the electrical contractor at his own expense. D. Field coordinate with other trades in ample time to build all chases and openings, set all sleeves, inserts and concealed materials and provide clearances that may be required. E. The term "provide" used in this section of the specifications shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install any item or system indicated on either plans or specifications, including items called for, implied or normally part of the equipment or system. The finished installation shall be complete and fully operational before final acceptance. F. The architect or engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes (approximately six 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL (6) feet) in the location of outlets, fixtures, switches, receptacles or equipment prior to the rough - in of such without any additional cost to the owner. G. The electrical contractor is responsible for and shall pay for all access panels required in the architectural finishes or surfaces to provide access to junction boxes, strip heaters, ballasts or other devices provided and located by the electrical contractor. The access panel shall be installed by the trade constructing the base to which the access panel will be installed. H. The electrical contractor is responsible for design, fabrication and erection of all supplementary structural framing required for attachment of hangers or other devices to support electrical equipment. Framing members shall be designed for their actual loads, with allowable stresses set forth in AISC specifications and the AISC code, without excessive deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vibration. Supplementary framing including design loads, member size and location shall be clearly shown on the shop drawings. 2. No cutting or drilling of holes in structural members or precast concrete slabs will be permitted except where written permission has been obtained from the architect or structural engineer. 1.4 EXPLANATION TO BIDDERS A. No oral explanations in regard to the meaning of drawings and specifications will be made and no oral instructions will be given before the award of the contract. Discrepancies, omissions or doubts as to the meaning of drawings and specifications should be communicated in writing to the engineer for interpretation. Bidders should act promptly and allow sufficient time for a reply to reach them before the submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications which will be forwarded to all bidders. Receipt of the addendum shall be acknowledged by the bidder on his bid form. 1.5 BID REQUIREMENTS A. Before submitting his proposal, the bidder is required to visit the site of the proposed work and familiarize himself with the nature and extent of the work and any local conditions that may in any manner affect the work to be done or the equipment, materials and labor required. He is also required to carefully examine the plans and specifications and to inform himself thoroughly regarding any and all conditions and requirements that may in any manner affect the work to be performed under the contract. Ignorance on the part of the contractor will in no way relieve him of the obligations and responsibilities assumed under the contract. B. In assembling his bid, the contractor, shall assemble a price based on these specifications and drawings, as shown, and with all materials and equipment exactly as specified. This figure shall be known as the "base bid". All prices must have this base bid clearly stated to be considered. C. If asked, the contractors bidding on this project shall show evidence of having recently completed a similarjob of like size and complexity. If the low bid contractor does not have sufficient financial resources, skilled labor, technical competence or experience, he shall not be awarded the contract. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Materials and equipment are specified by single or multiple manufacturers to indicate quality, 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL material and type of construction desired. One or more manufacturer's products are shown on the drawings and have been used as a basis for design. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products meet detailed specifications, and that size and arrangement of equipment is suitable for installation. The contractor may then bid the substituted products as a voluntary alternate with the price clearly indicated as an "add" or "deduct" from the base bid. All alternates are subject to approval by the engineer and by HUD. Any costs associated with substitutions shall be paid by the contractor requesting the substitution. B. All requests for substitution shall clearly and specifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as the basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include, but shall not be limited to the data as follows: 1. Principle of operation 2. Materials of construction or finishes 3. Thickness or gauge of materials 4. Weight of item 5. Deleted features or items 6. Added features or items 7. Changes in other contractor's work caused by the substitution C. The contractor making the substitution shall assume responsibility and expense for any changes or damages to his or any other contractor's work caused by the substitution. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit items for this division as follow: Submit all Division 26 submittals at one time and in one integral group. Piece -by -piece submission of individual items will not be acceptable. The architect/engineer may check the contents of each submittal set upon initial delivery and if not complete as set forth herein, submittal sets may be returned to the contractor without review and may not be accepted until made complete. Division 26 submittals must be delivered to the architect/engineer within thirty (30) days from official notice to proceed. Any delays arising directly or indirectly from deliverance of submittals after this time shall be the contractor's responsibility. Allow ten (10) working days from date of receipt for arch itect/engineer's review. B. Submittal items shall be submitted on materials, apparatus and equipment as indicated under each section of this division and in compliance with the general conditions. C. Shop drawings shall comply with Division 01 and shall include sufficient information to indicate compliance with specifications. Data shall include illustrations, catalog sheets, drawings, and certifications. Each sheet shall show the manufacturer's name or trademark. D. At the time of each submission, the contractor shall call the arch itect/engineer's attention to any deviations from the contract documents and shall plainly mark the deviations on the submittals. E. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers: in some instances, specific references have been made to one or more manufacturers' names and catalog numbers. It should be noted that such use does not indicate that the material and equipment specified is necessarily an "off the shelf' item. Variances may be due to the requirement of a desired finish, material or other modification. The electrical contractor shall ascertain that such modifications are fully considered. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.8 FAMILIARITY WITH LAWS AND CODES A. The bidder is assumed to be familiar with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that in any manner affect the work. Ignorance on the part of the bidder will in no way relieve the bidder from responsibility to meet these requirements. 1.9 ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS A. All work shall conform to federal, state and local laws, ordinances or regulations governing the installation of the specified equipment. If the work as laid out, indicated or specified is contrary to or conflicts with local laws, ordinances or regulations, the contractor shall report these conflicts to the architect/engineer before submitting a bid. The architect/engineer will then issue instructions to clarify the conflict. B. If the contractor fails to notify the architect/engineer of conflicts or omissions as noted above, all changes required to comply with local ordinances and regulations shall be made without additional expense to the owner. 1.10 PERMITS AND FEES A. The electrical contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and inspections required for the electrical portion of the work and shall pay all charges incidental thereto. B. The electrical contractor shall deliver to the architect/engineer all certificates of inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.11 CODES AND INSPECTIONS A. The installation shall comply with all laws applicable to the electrical installations which are enforced by the authority having jurisdiction. The latest adopted editions of the following codes shall apply to this project: NFPA 30 NFPA 37 NFPA 70 NFPA 72 NFPA 80 NFPA 90A NFPA 96 NFPA 101 NFPA 110 NFPA 111 NFPA 780 ANSI A17.1 ANSI A117.1 2010 FBC ADA FBC Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code Standard for the Installation and use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines National Electrical Code National Fire Alarm Code Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Prevention of Commercial Cooking Operations Life Safety Code Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems Standard on Stored Electrical Energy and Standby Power Systems Standard for the Installation of Lighting Protection Systems Elevator Code Handicap Accessibility Code Florida Building Code Americans With Disability Act Florida Building Code 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. In any specific case, where, different sections of any of the aforementioned codes or these plans and specifications specify different materials, methods of construction or other requirements, the most restrictive shall govern. In the case of any conflict between a general provision and a special provision, the special provision shall govern. C. All materials shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated, as conforming to its standards, where such a standard has been established for the particular type of material in question. D. Where contract document requirements are in excess of code requirements and are permitted under the code, the contract documents shall govern. 1.12 SINGULAR AND PLURAL REFERENCES A. Singular references in specifications shall not be construed as requiring one (1) device if multiple devices are indicated on the drawings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials required for work shall be new, of good quality, furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, selected and arranged to fit properly into building spaces. B. Equipment shall be of type and capacity shown on equipment schedules on drawings and in specifications and shall be as manufactured by one of manufacturer's designated approved equal accepted in advance by Project Architect/Engineer. C. For ease of maintenance and parts replacement, use equipment from a single manufacturer to maximum extent possible. D. Equipment, materials and components shall be new, standard current products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment and shall be manufacturer's latest design conforming to specifications. Materials shall be accepted by code enforcing authorities. Materials used in fire rated construction and in electrical work shall be UL listed, with UL labels as specified. E. Hardware and accessory fitting shall be U.S. Standard sizes designed, intended or appropriate for the use, and complimenting items with which they are used. Furnish with corrosion protection suitable for the atmosphere in which they are installed. F. Ascertain before ordering equipment that equipment will fit assigned space without interference from other construction, ie., check door clearances, ceiling heights, crane access and the like. Be responsible for expenses generated by substitution of equipment used as a basis for design. Maintain clearances as required by the NEC. G. Since manufacturing methods vary, reasonable minor equipment variations are expected; however, performance and material requirements for the specified equipment are the minimum acceptable standards. 2.2 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ITEMS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Identify electrical equipment and conductors in accordance with following: 1. Distribution Equipment: Major components of distribution system such as circuit breakers, switches, switchboards and panelboards shall have nameplates with equipment identification, voltage and phase ratings and source of feed or circuit utilization. Equipment identification shall correspond to the designation on single line diagram. Panelboards shall have typed directories. 2. Starters, Disconnect Switches and Controls: Provide laminated phenolic nameplates with white letters on a black field secured with flush fastenings identifying equipment served. Conductors: Color code wire and cable for feeders and branch circuits as follows unless otherwise required by local codes or electric utility company. PHASE 208Y/120V 480Y/277V A Black Brown B Red Orange C Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green B. Ground Fault Protected Devices: 1. Identify devices protected by ground fault interrupters. Receptacles, not otherwise identified by manufacturer, shall have cover plates with words "Protected by GFI" and "Test Before Using" engraved thereon. 2.3 UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES LISTING AND LABELS A. Where materials and equipment are available under continuing inspection and labeling of UL, provide such material and equipment. B. Listing by Underwriters' Laboratories shall be evidenced by label or: 1. UL - Electrical Construction Materials List (Green Book) 2. UL - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment List 3. UL - Building Materials List. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify/examine that the surfaces, substrates, and conditions are satisfactory to receive electrical general provisions, and are free from deviations/defects affecting quality of the work. B. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper/timely completion of the work. C. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. D. Beginning of installation will be construed as acceptance of existing substrates, surfaces, and 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL conditions. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Obtain services of manufacturer's representatives of major electrical equipment at job site during erection or construction of their equipment to insure proper installation. Failure to have such checks made by manufacturers shall place full responsibility for proper installation on Contractor who shall make any corrections or remedy defects at no additional cost to Owner. B. Where necessary to meet space conditions bring equipment to its ultimate location in pieces or otherwise disassembled, then assemble it in place. Provide flanges, studs and the like for matching, alignment and field assembly. C. Conduct field tests of equipment after assembly and during under direct supervision of manufacturer's representative. Upon satisfactory conclusion of field tests, manufacturer shall furnish, for each such apparatus or equipment, a written statement certifying that there has been no invalidation of any warranties, or guaranties, nor impairment of capacity or functioning of apparatus or equipment. Field tests shall be in addition to all factory tests, shop tests and final tests and adjustments. D. Avoid field assembly wherever possible by suitable scheduling of the general construction work. Extra compensation will not be allowed for those cases where it is necessary to field assemble equipment or apparatus. 3.3 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Workers: Use thoroughly trained and experienced workers, completely familiar with items to be installed and manufacturer's current recommended methods of installations. B. Set equipment level, properly aligned and bolted together where in sections. Secure equipment and materials firmly in place. Screws, bolts, nuts, clamps, fittings or other fastening devices shall be made up tight. C. Repair to a new condition, or replace materials damaged during delivery, storage or installation. Touch-up scratched or marred finishes on equipment to match original finish or completely refinish. D. Factory paint or finish enclosures, panels, cabinets, relays, safety switches, fixtures and other exposed equipment or accessories except as indicated otherwise. Group mounted items shall be similar in finish and color. E. Make connections for air conditioning and ventilating equipment and controls. Follow manufacturers recommendations and system requirements when no other information available. F. Support electrical raceways, conduits and light fixtures from overhead structure, not from ducts, pipes, conduits or the like. Support piping and HVAC ducts from overhead structure, not from ducts, pipes, conduits or equipment. G. In order to use same means of support for electrical and mechanical items, design combined support system and coordinate to safely support suspended items. 3.4 HOUSEKEEPING 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Clean exposed surfaces raceways and equipment which have become covered with dirt, plaster or other material during handling and construction before such surfaces are prepared for painting or enclosed within building structure. B. Keep raceway openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter. Cover fixtures, equipment and apparatus to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. 2. Damaged fixtures, equipment or apparatus shall be restored to its original condition or replaced at no cost to Owner. 3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Excavation, backfilling and compaction of trenches required for the installation of electrical services and to points of connection with exterior underground utilities outside of the building shall be performed as specified in Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities - Refer to Division 31 sections. 3.6 SLEEVES BLOCKOUTS, CUTTING AND PATCHING, CORING AND DRILLING A. Sleeves: 1. All conduits passing through concrete slabs shall be provided with sleeves. All conduits passing through interior concrete or masonry walls and partitions shall be provided with sleeves. 3. Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe. B. Cutting and Patching: 1. Cut and patch as needed for installation of electrical equipment. Perform finish patching according to specifications for each finish, by mechanics skilled in each type finish. 2. Install work so that no undue cutting and patching will be required in building construction. Do no cutting that may impair strength of building construction. Install work in various portions of building as construction progresses. Do not delay construction of building. 3. Cut and patch as needed for conduits where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. 4. Provide for cutting out holes in structural steel webs (number, size and location) by means of shop drawing submittal and review only as approved by Project Arch itect/Engineer. Reinforce holes as directed by Project Architect/Engineer. C. Coring and Drilling: 1. If a sleeve is omitted, core drill to permit insertion of a pipe sleeve with sufficient clearance to permit grouting in place with specified backer rod and sealant space between the line and sleeve. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL When core drilling or cutting duct holes in foundations, walls, beams, columns or structural slabs, determine the location of reinforcement and tendons before coring. Holes, except for small screws, may not be drilled in beams or other structural members, without obtaining prior acceptance of Project Architect/Engineer. 3.7 WATERPROOFING AND ROOFING A. Where electrical work penetrates building envelope, or any waterproofed construction, method of installation shall be performed in a manner to prevent transmission of water, heat, cold and drafts. B. Follow details, including architectural, which establish types of waterproofing construction for each penetration condition. C. Where a detail suitable to encountered condition is lacking, request instructions from Project Architect/Engineer. D. Provide necessary sleeves, sealing and flashing required to make opening watertight 3.8 FINAL TESTING, ADJUSTMENTS AND ACCEPTANCE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. The date for the final acceptance test shall be sufficiently in advance of the contract completion date. To permit the execution of any adjustments and/or alterations which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment. Any such modifications shall be completed within the number of days allotted for completion of the contract. Retests shall not relieve the contractor for this division of completion date responsibility. B. Schedule testing and cleared through the General Contractor. No testing of any kind shall be done or scheduled without clearance by General Contractor. 2. Furnish Project Architect/Engineer with name of person who will be in charge of testing, energizing and start-up. C. Complete test and inspection records shall be made and incorporated into a report for each piece of equipment tested. Record readings taken. Submit four copies to Project Architect for review. D. Notify the General Contractor in writing at least one week prior to test, establishing time that test is to be performed. 1. Perform tests in presence of Project Architect/Engineer. E. Furnish necessary meters, instruments, temporary wiring and labor to perform required tests and adjustments of equipment and wiring including electrical equipment furnished by others, to determine proper polarity, phasing, freedom from grounds and shorts and operation of equipment. Measuring instruments shall be properly calibrated. F. Demonstrate materials and manner of installation to be in accordance with the requirements of state and local public authorities, the utility company and NFPA. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL G. Energize equipment following established procedures after certification by the Contractor that the installation is satisfactory. H. Wiring: Check system and equipment grounds for resistance using the Megger ground tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Investigate circuits showing insulation resistance less than minimum values given in N.E.C. Correct weak points. 2. Overall resistance of the ground system shall be no greater than 25 ohms. Inspect grounding system to insure that above -ground cables and connections are suitably protected. Provide additional ground rod, if needed, to obtain the specified resistance. 3. Make ground resistance tests at test points designated by the Project Architect/Engineer. Ground resistance tests shall be in accordance with NEC at 25 ohms. 4. Correct or replace nominal current -carrying circuits which are defective or grounded. Correct other troubles encountered in these tests. Breakers: Set breakers so equipment will be in proper operating condition before being placed in service. Perform final operational tests to determine that wiring connections are correct. Lighting: Check lighting fixtures and receptacles for proper operation. At completion of work, clean fixtures and lenses and replace missing and burned out lamps. In residential projects, provide keyless lamp holders and bulbs to all lighting outlets for future tenant luminaires, in order to comply with inspecting authority requirements. K. Motors: Make these tests on motors before start-up: Check motor nameplates for HP, speed, phase and voltage. Check bearings to see if they are filled with oil or grease. Lubricate. Check coupling alignment and shaft end -play. Make these tests on motors during start-up: a. Check shaft rotation before final connections are made. Check for bearing temperature and smooth operation. b. Take a current reading at full load using a clamp -on ammeter. If ammeter is over the rated full load current, determine reason for the discrepancy and take corrective action. 3. After all connections are made, test motors and equipment for proper operation. Investigate cause of any motor operating above full load rating and remove cause, or report to manufacturer instead of increasing overload heater rating. Check rotation of motors. 4. Check overload elements in motor starters for suitability to the motor characteristics. Replace any overload element that does not conform to starter manufacturer's recommendations based on actual nameplate current rating of the motor. Investigate the cause of any motor operating above full load rating and correct. Under no circumstances shall oversize overload relay trip rating be substituted. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL L. Transformers: Megger winding insulation resistance, primary and secondary -to -ground and primary -to -secondary. Windings shall exhibit resistance in megohms equal to eight times the voltage rating of the winding in kV. M. Control and Alarms: Check control and alarm circuits for proper operation. Test switchgear, switchboards, fire alarm system, as specified in each Section. N. Service Voltage: Check service voltage at no-load and at full load on the distribution system. The objective shall be to maintain the equipment terminal voltage at less than 10% above nameplate rating at full system load. Then set transformer no-load taps so that at normal loading the average operating voltages at the terminals of all utilization equipment matches the nameplate voltage of that equipment as closely as possible. O. Test all circuits, which under any circumstances can be paralleled, for proper phasing using hot phasing. P. Acceptance: Observation of the operation of the electrical installation and equipment by the Project Architect/Engineer does not constitute acceptance of the Work. Acceptance will be made after the Contractor has adjusted his equipment, demonstrated that it meets the requirements of the Contract Document, and has furnished all the required certificates. 3.9 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. Use only tools designed for each operation. Keep tools in good condition. Do not use worn or broken tools. Wrench and vise teeth shall be sharp and clean to prevent damage to the materials. Screw drivers and wrenches shall be of the proper size to prevent damage to head or nuts. B. Deliver special tools and spare parts provided with equipment to an authorized representative of the Owner. Obtain signed and dated receipts. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate the essential features of the following mechanical and electrical systems upon completion of satisfactory testing: 1. Power System 2. Lighting System 3. Fire Alarm System 4. Emergency Generator B. Hold the demonstrations in the presence of the Owner or his designated representatives and the Project Architect/Engineer to show functions, locations and relationships to the Drawings. Demonstrate how to "start -stop", reset, replace, and emergency procedures. Demonstrate one system at a time. 3.11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The electrical contractor shall provide the services of a competent operating engineer to supervise the operation of all equipment specified herein and to instruct the owner's operators during an eight (8) hour period. The operating instruction period shall be defined as straight 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL time working hours and shall not include nights, weekends, or travel time to and/or from the project. B. The architect/engineer shall be notified in writing at least five days before each operating instruction period begins. The contractor shall not commence any instruction period until the owner has issued his written acceptance of the starting time. 3.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE BOOKS A. The electrical contractor shall provide the owner, through the architect/engineer, with operating instructions and maintenance data books for all equipment and materials furnished under this division. B. The electrical contractor shall submit four copies of operating and maintenance data books to the architect/engineer for review a minimum of four weeks before final inspection of the project. All data shall be assembled in a single completely indexed volume and shall identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. C. The following information shall be included where applicable: 1. Identifying name and mark number 2. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list) 3. Complete nameplate data 4. Certified record drawings and shop drawings 5. Parts lists 6. Wiring diagrams 7. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance instructions with all non -applicable information deleted 3.13 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE A. In addition to the guarantee of equipment by the manufacturer of each piece of equipment specified herein, the electrical contractor shall also guarantee such equipment and shall be held for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance test for necessary adjustments and/or replacements of all defective equipment, materials and workmanship without expense to the owner. B. The contractor shall furnish maintenance and service for one (1) year from final acceptance of the contract for all portions of the system. Such service for the one year period includes the following: 1. Necessary adjustment and/or replacement of all defective equipment and materials furnished. C. Service and replacement of light bulbs shall be limited to thirty (30) days after final acceptance of the job. Upon expiration of each of these limits noted herein, the maintenance, including labor and material costs, shall be at the owner's expense. 3.14 ACCEPTANCE A. As a precedent to requesting a final inspection and release of retained monies, the electrical 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL contractor shall: Complete all work required under the electrical section of the specifications and drawings. 2. Submit four (4) certified copies of final test data to the architect/engineer. 3. Furnish a complete set of "as built" reproducible tracings of the contractor's work to the architect/ engineer. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - 13 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 05 19 — LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all materials and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the system of conductors for power and lighting service, including all related system and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. All conductors shall have 600 volt insulation and shall be copper of 98% conductivity. Compacted aluminum conductors are permitted where specifically listed on the drawings. Any cable not specifically labeled as an aluminum conductor shall be copper. B. Conductors sizes specified are AWG up to No. 4/0 and circular mils above No. 4/0. C. Conductor sizes 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid: conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. D. Conductors No. 6 and smaller shall be NEC standard dual rated type "THWN," or "THHN" thermoplastic, approved for operation at 750c in dry and wet locations and 900c within electric discharge lighting equipment as permitted in NEC 410.68. Conductors No.4 and larger shall be NEC standard rated type "THWN," or "THHN" approved for operation at 750c in dry and wet locations. E. Conductors used for underground construction in conduits may be type "THWN" or type "XHHW". F. All wire and cable shall be of the same name brand, and shall be in the original wrapping. 2.2 NON-METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE A. Non -Metallic Sheathed Cable, type NM may be used for wiring within individual residential units containing a dedicated electrical panel where the construction of the building is type III, type IV or type V as allowed in National Electrical Code Article 334.10. Type NM cable is not to be used anywhere else in the facility unless specifically authorized by the engineer and the owner. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 TYPE MC CABLE See section 26 05 20 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SIZE 3.2 A. Minimum size conductors installed shall be No. 12 AWG for all applications except where specifically noted otherwise for special system circuits. COLOR CODING A. All lighting and receptacle branch circuit conductors shall be color coded. Feeder cables and service entrance conductors shall be color coded by use of colored plastic tape applied within 6" of each conductor end or shall have insulation of the color required for proper phasing. All color coding shall be with the same color being used with its respective phase or bus through the entire job as follows: PHASE A B C Neutral Ground 3.3 WIRE INSTALLATION A. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. 3.6 A. 208Y/120V 480Y/277V Black Brown Red Orange Blue Yellow White Gray Green Green No wires or cables shall be pulled into the conduit until the conduit system is complete and plastering is applied and dried. This does not refer to a white finish coat of plaster which may be applied after the wires are pulled in. NM CABLE INSTALLATION Type NM cable shall be concealed within walls, floors or ceilings that provide a thermal barrier of material that has a 15-minute finish rating as identified in U.L. listings of fire -rated assemblies. NEUTRALS All wiring for lighting and receptacle branch circuits shall be run as single-phase, two -wire with a dedicated neutral conductor. Sharing of neutrals for multi -wire branch circuits is not acceptable. SPLICES AND JOINTS Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlet to junction box or pull box. All splices and joints shall be carefully and securely made to be mechanically and electrically 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL solid with solderless pressure connectors and insulated with Scotch 33 tape and friction tape, if insulation is not provided in pressure type connector used. Where connection is made to any terminals of more than 30 amperes capacity and where conductors larger than No. 10 are connected to any terminal, CU/AL terminal lugs shall be bolted to the conductors. Where multiple connections are made to the same terminal, individual lugs for each conductor shall be used. All conductors shall be properly terminated in accordance with torque requirements specified in the National Electrical Code. 2. Aluminum conductors shall be treated with an oxide inhibiting agent immediately prior to termination and torqueing of the connection. 3.7 SLACK A. All wire and cables for power, lighting, control and signal shall be continuous from origin to destination with proper splices as specified. At the end of these wires and cables only sufficient slack shall be left as may be required for making proper connections. There shall be no unnecessary slack. 3.8 CONNECTION TO WIRING DEVICES A. Where conductors are to be connected directly to the devices without the use of lugs, such as occurs at side connections of lighting switches and plug receptacles, the conductors shall be formed into suitable loops to fit around the terminal screws. 3.9 CONNECTION TO METALLIC SURFACES A. Where wires and cables are connected to metallic surfaces, the coated surfaces of the metal shall be polished before installing the mechanical connectors. The lacquer coating of conduits shall be removed where ground clamps are to be installed. 3.10 CONNECTION AT OUTLETS A. The conductors terminating at each wired outlet shall be left not less than six (6) inches long at their outlet fitting to facilitate the installation of devices or fixtures. Where more than one pair of conductors enters an outlet, the several pairs of conductors shall be neatly spliced and made mechanically and electrically secure to conductors which shall be not less than six (6) inches long within the outlet. 3.11 WIRING FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTS A. Branch circuit wiring which supplies more than one fluorescent fixture through the wireway of other fixtures shall be approved for use at 900c. 3.12 WIRING TO LIGHT SWITCHES A. Wall switch outlets shall be wired to provide control of outlets indicated. All connections to single pole switches shall be made so that the off operation of the switch opens the ungrounded leg. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.13 LABELING A. Each wire in a pull box, junction box or equipment wire chamber shall be labeled with the proper panel letter and circuit number identification, and where two or more wires are spliced, each shall be labeled. Labels shall be printed numbers and letters on suitable plastic tape. Wires and cables shall be identified by suitable Brady adhesive label tapes. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 05 20 — TYPE MC CA81Lt PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Branch Circuits: Type MC Cable for use as branch circuits. B. General Applications: Type MC Cable may be used in the following general applications based on the National Electrical Code (NEC): 1. For general purpose branch circuits 2. For applications requiring grounding paths 3. For applications requiring isolated grounding 4. Exposed or concealed 5. In cable tray where identified for such use 6. In dry locations and embedded in plaster or against other masonry 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application. B. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be included in submittal. Industry guides may supplement the manufacturer's instructions. C. Manufacturer: Type MC Cables and wire shall be supplied from a single manufacturer. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. MC Cable: Type MC Cable shall meet the following: 1. UL 1569 Standard for Metal -Clad Cables 2. UL Standard 83 for Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables or UL Standard 44 for Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables 3. UL Standard 1479 Standard for Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 4. UL Classified 1, 2, and 3 Hour Through -Penetration Firestop Systems. B. MC Cable Fittings: Type MC Cable connectors shall comply with UL 514B Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. C. National Electrical Code: Type MC Cable shall meet the following NEC requirements. 1. NEC Articles 230, 250, 300, 330 2. NEC Class I Div. 2, Class II Div. 2, & Class III Div. 1 Hazardous Locations. D. Federal Specification: Type MC Cable shall meet Federal Specification A-A59544. E. Flame Test: Type MC Cable shall pass IEEE 1202 (70,000 BTU/hr) Vertical Cable Tray Flame 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MC CABLE 26 05 20 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Test. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT A. Interlocked Armor Ground Type MC Cable 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Southwire Company B. Senator Wire and Cable C. AFC Cable Systems 2.3 TYPE MC CABLE CONSTRUCTION A. Circuit Conductors 1. Conductors: Soft -drawn solid copper conductors shall be permitted for 12 and 10 AWG conductor sizes. Stranded copper conductors shall be class B stranded or equivalent. 2. Insulation: The conductors shall be constructed with THHN insulation rated for 900C dry and rated for 600 volts. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors 1. Insulated Copper Conductor: A green insulated grounding conductor shall be cabled with copper circuit conductors and located under the nonmetallic tape covering. C. Cable Assembly 1. All insulated circuit conductors and any insulated grounding conductors shall be cabled together and contained under an overall nonmetallic tape covering. D. Metal -Clad Sheath / Armor Assembly 1. Interlocked Armor: The interlocking metal tape armor shall be aluminum. 2. Aluminum interlocking metal tape shall be formed and helically wrapped around the cable assembly such that the interlocked armor is in intimate contact throughout the entire cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Neat and Workmanlike Installation: MC Cable shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls. No diagonal runs shall be permitted. Additional supports shall be used when the cable is exposed. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Type MC Cable shall be installed per the manufacturers written 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MC CABLE 26 05 20 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL installation instructions. Industry guides may supplement the manufacturer's instructions. C. Manufacturer: Type MC Cables for circuits shall be supplied from a single manufacturer. D. Securing and Supporting: Type MC Cable shall be secured and supported at intervals not exceeding six feet unless otherwise permitted in the National Electrical Code. E. Minimum Bending Radius: Bends in Type MC Cable shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend should not be less than seven times the cable diameter. Firestop Systems: Type MC Cable shall be installed per the cable manufacturer's Through - Penetration Firestop Systems listing by Underwriter Laboratory. 3.2 CONTINUITY OF METAL RACEWAYS, CABLE ARMOR AND ENCLOSURES A. General: Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclosures for conductors shall be metallically joined together into a continuous electric conductor and shall be connected to all boxes, fittings, and cabinets or enclosures so as to provide an effective ground fault current path per Section 250.4 of the NEC. B. Circuits Under 250 Volts: Type MC Cable shall be terminated per manufacturer's written installation instructions 3.3 SPECIFIC USES A. Type MC Cable may be used in the following applications: 1. For general purpose branch circuits. 2. Environmental air -handling spaces per 2005 NEC 300.22(C) 3. Places of assembly per NEC 518.4 and theaters per NEC 520. 4. Under raised floors for information technology equipment conductors and cables per NEC 645.5(D) & 645.5(D)(2) 3.4 USES NOT PERMITTED A. Type MC Cable should not be used in wet locations, either direct burial, in underground conduit, or overhead. 3.5 AMPACITY A. The ampacity of Type MC Cable shall be determined in accordance with Article 310.15 of the National Electrical Code. The installation should not exceed the ratings of the terminations and equipment. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MC CABLE 26 05 20 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 05 26 — GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all materials and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary to insure that the electrical service and electrical systems conform with the requirements of article 250 of the NEC and as specified hereinafter. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT A. The products specified in Section 26 05 19 apply to the work specified in this section. 2.2 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be a minimum of 5/8" x 10'-0" copper -clad ground rods. 2.3 GROUND CLAMPS A. Ground clamps shall be UL approved for the application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT TO BE GROUNDED A. The following systems and/or equipment shall be grounded in accordance with the rules of the National Electrical Code, the local code, and as hereinafter specified. 1. Building power system including all available grounding electrodes as listed in National Electrical Code Article 250.52. 2. Raceway and conduit systems 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Lighting fixtures 4. Noncurrent carrying metal parts of all motors, panels and other electrically operated equipment. 5. Telephone system 6. Data System 7. Fire alarm system 8. Above ground gas piping system upstream from the equipment shutoff valve. 9. Above ground metal piping systems. 3.2 SERVICE EQUIPMENT A. The service equipment shall be bonded ahead of the main water service meter and grounded to installed ground rods using bare copper wire in steel conduit. The wire shall be sized in accordance with Article 250.66 of the National Electrical Code. Copper -clad ground rods shall be driven to a depth sufficient to provide a grounding electrode of 15 ohms maximum resistance to ground. If the resistance is greater than 15 ohms, additional ground rods shall be installed and bonded to the first electrode. 3.3 MADE ELECTRODES A. Made electrodes shall consist of copper -clad ground rods. The rods shall be installed such that at least 8'-0" of length is in contact with the soil. The upper end of the electrode shall be flush with or below ground level unless the above ground end and the grounding wire attachment are protected against physical damage. 3.4 BONDING A. All metal conduits entering the building service panel and all metal feeder conduits to panels shall be bonded together and to the system ground using metal grounding bushings and copper conductors terminated on the ground bus of the distribution equipment. Metallic conduit systems shall be electrically continuous throughout. 3.5 NEUTRAL A. The system neutral conductor shall be identified throughout and shall be grounded at the building service only. 3.6 EQUIPMENT GROUND WIRE A. An equipment grounding wire sized as per NEC Article 250.122 shall be installed inside all conduit, and shall be bare or have green insulation. 3.7 ACCESSIBILITY 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. All grounding electrode connections shall be accessible for periodic inspection and testing. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Connections to ground rods and underground or concealed reinforcing rods shall be made with exothermic welds similar to Cad -Weld systems. Connections to above ground electrodes shall be made with UL listed grounding clamps. 3.9 ISOLATED GROUNDS A. Isolated ground systems shall have a separate ground wire installed in the conduit which is run to the building service ground with no other interconnections between normal ground and isolated ground. Isolated ground wires shall be sized in accordance with the equipment served and shall be identified by a colored stripe on the green insulation. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 05 33 — RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all materials and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the system of conduits for power and lighting service, including all related system and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUSHINGS, LOCKNUTS AND CONNECTORS A. Where rigid conduit enters a box of any description, the conduit shall be secured to the box with a locknut on the outside and a similar nut and bushings on the inside. B. Where electric metallic tubing enters such boxes the connection between the connector and the box shall be made tight by an approved manner both on the inside and the outside of the box. C. Conduit terminations at the boxes shall be provided with bushings. Bushings for conductors through #8 AWG shall be galvanized, non -insulating type; for #6 AWG and larger conductors, bushings shall be insulated and selected for the size conduit involved. D. Conductors in vertical runs must be supported if the vertical rise exceeds values in table 300.19(A) of the NEC. Provide properly sized support bushing at the top of the vertical raceway. Intermediate supports shall be provided as necessary to limit supported conductor length to not exceed values specified in table 300.19(A) of the NEC. 2.2 CONDUIT A. All conduit installed in concrete floor slabs shall be underwriter's approved hot dipped rigid galvanized steel conduit or schedule 40 PVC conduit. B. All conduit installed underground shall be schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or hot dipped rigid galvanized steel conduit coated with an asphaltum paint approved by the architect. C. All conduit installed exposed in exterior areas above finished grade shall be underwriter's approved rigid hot dipped galvanized steel unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Conduit 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL installed exposed in interior areas above finished floor shall be Underwriter's approved hot dipped rigid galvanized steel or electrical metallic tubing unless otherwise noted on the drawings. D. All conduit installed in or above ceilings or stud partitions shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit or electrical metallic tubing. E. PVC schedule 40 conduit shall not be used above grade anywhere on the project unless otherwise noted on the drawings. PVC conduit may not be used within the building. F. Electrical metallic tubing: all electrical metallic tubing shall be galvanized and conform to all pertinent requirements of the national electrical code. G. All flexible metallic conduit installed in wet or damp locations shall be liquid -tight (PVC extruded cover) and all installations in dry locations shall be flexible steel conduit (no cover), unless specifically noted otherwise. H. PVC conduit: all polyvinyl chloride conduit shall be heavy -wall schedule 40 or schedule 80 where noted on drawings, with factory made bends, couplings, and fittings. Connectors and couplings: for electrical metallic tubing, compression, tap -on or set screw type fittings shall be used. For rigid steel conduit, threaded couplings and locknuts and bushings shall be used. For PVC, PVC couplings and fittings shall be used. Where PVC underground conduit connects to steel conduit, suitable threaded conduit adapter fittings shall be used. For flexible conduit, liquid -tight fittings shall be used with liquid -tight flexible conduit and compression fittings shall be used with flexible steel conduit. 2.3 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor boxes shall be cast metal with threaded conduit entrance, and shall have means for adjusting floor plate to finish floor level. All floor boxes shall be waterproof and flush with the finished floor. B. Service fittings shall be flush brass finish fittings with appropriate carpet flange or trim plate for hard floor as required as manufactured by Walker or Hubbell. 2.4 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Junction and pull boxes one hundred (100) cubic inches in volume or smaller shall be standard outlet boxes. Those one hundred fifty (150) cubic inches or larger shall be constructed as specified for cabinet construction and shall be furnished with covers. Boxes shall be coated inside and out to prevent corrosion. B. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with the requirements of the national electrical code, and junction boxes not used for service entrance duty shall not be smaller than four (4) inches square and one and one-half (1-1/2) inches in depth with covers accessible at all times. Boxes on concealed conduit shall be set with covers flush with the finished plaster line unless otherwise shown. 2.5 OUTLET BOXES A. At each outlet shown, furnish and install a box of suitable size and construction to serve the purpose properly. Furnish and install plaster rings where required in connection with adjacent 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL plaster finish where these occur. In unfinished masonry walls, furnish and install handy boxes of such size as to permit their being completely covered by the device plate. Boxes for metal conduit systems and for MC cable shall be galvanized steel. All unused knockouts in boxes shall be filled or capped before plates or devices are installed. Boxes for type NM cable installation may be non-metallic boxes per Article 314.3 of the National Electrical Code. Installation of boxes shall not diminish the fire ratings of any walls. The contractor shall provide UL listed fire rated protection for any boxes compromising the fire integrity of a rated wall. B. Ceiling outlets shall be four (4) inch octagonal boxes of the appropriate depth and furnished with three -eighths (3/8) inch fixture studs fastened through from back of boxes. For plaster surfaces, furnish and install plaster rings and ears. C. At each switch or receptacle outlet shown, provide an approved switch box or handy box of the number of gangs indicated. D. Outlet boxes for all exposed work shall be of the cast type. E. Stamped steel outlet boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Company, Raco Manufacturing Company or Steel City Electric Company. F. Cast metal outlet boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Company, Crouse -Hinds Company, or Killark Electric Manufacturing Company. G. Above Class I locations, underground wiring shall be installed in threaded rigid metal conduit. All these conduits shall be sealed within ten feet of the conduit emergence from below grade. Provide seal at the panelboard and at the load itself. - H. All coverplates for outlet boxes shall be stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verify the electrical installation may be made in complete accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations and the original design. 3.2 DISCREPANCIES A. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the architect/engineer. B. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Coordinate the installation of electrical items with the work schedules of other trades to prevent unnecessary delays in the total work. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Conduit shall be of the sizes required to accommodate the number of conductors in accordance with the National Electrical Code, or as noted on the drawings. The sizes shown on the plans may be increased if desired to facilitate the pulling of conductors. The minimum conduit size shall be one half inch (1/2"). B. All conduits shall be concealed unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Concealed conduit run above the ceiling shall be supported independent of ceiling construction. Where a ceiling of the lay -in type is used, the conduit must be installed high enough to permit removal of ceiling panels. C. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the building walls and supported from the walls or ceilings with straps or clamps secured with wood screws for wood construction, machine screws for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete slab construction. All exposed conduit runs shall be subject to approval. D. Underground conduit shall be laid at a minimum depth below grade of 36 inches, unless specifically noted otherwise. E. Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlet to cabinet, junction or pull box. Conduits shall enter and be secured to all boxes in such a manner that each system shall be electrically continuous from point of service to all outlets. Approved Appleton, Crouse -Hinds, or O.Z. Manufacturing Company expansion fittings shall be installed in all rigid conduit and E.M.T. runs, where such conduit runs extend across expansion joints in the building. G. No conduit shall be trapped except where shown on the drawings. H. Conduit connection to a box which has no threaded hub for its reception shall be double lock - nutted with locknuts designed to bite into the metal. Provide an insulated bushing at each end of each conduit run. Use insulated bushings with separate locknuts on all conduit entering a panel cabinet. All conduits entering outlet boxes shall be provided with either insulated throat connectors or separate locknuts and insulated bushings. Bushings must be installed before any wire is pulled in. 1. At rigid steel couplings, conduits shall be threaded so that they meet in the coupling. Right and left couplings shall not be used; conduit couplings of the Erickson type shall be used at locations requiring such joints. J. All threaded joints shall be made up with joint compound applied to the male threads only. K. Conduit shall be secured in place and protected to prevent damage to work during construction. The ends of all conduit runs shall be plugged to avoid filling with plaster, etc. All conduit shall be blown out and/or swabbed clear of water and trash prior to pulling wire. L. Flexible conduit shall be used only where indicated on the drawings, or where specified otherwise. M. Conduit connections from outlet boxes, junction boxes, conduit, switch boxes, or motor controller to rotating or vibrating machinery or equipment shall be made with flexible conduit which shall be as short as possible with a maximum length of thirty-six (36) inches. N. Conduit connections from outlet boxes to recessed lighting fixtures shall be made with 3/8" 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL flexible conduit which shall have a maximum length of 72 inches, unless otherwise noted. O. PVC conduit installed underground shall be encased in concrete with a minimum thickness of six inches on all sides of the conduit in high traffic areas such as driveways, roads and other areas as indicated on the drawings. P. Where underground PVC conduit turns up to run above grade, the elbow and all conduit from the elbow up shall be rigid galvanized steel unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Where the PVC conduit is encased in concrete, the transition to steel conduit shall be made within the concrete casing. Q. All telephone conduit routed to the telephone terminal wood backboard shall be terminated with an end bushing within six (6) inches of the edge of the backboard. R. All conduits penetrating a fire or smoke wall shall be sealed with Dow Corning silicone RTV foam #3-6548 to preserve the rating of the fire wall. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Junction boxes and pull boxes made of code gauge steel shall be furnished and installed where such boxes may be necessary to facilitate the pulling or splicing of cables. Boxes must be made accessible. Conduits shall enter these boxes through tight fitting clearance holes. Where required, suitable supports shall be provided in all pull boxes to support feeders passing through the boxes so that feeder conductors will not remain unsupported for a distance greater than three (3) feet. B. Junction boxes shall have only the holes necessary to accommodate the conduits at point of installation. All boxes shall have suitable provisions to secure covers. C. Junction boxes shall be securely attached to the building construction, using wood screws for wood construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete construction. Boxes flush mounted in tile or masonry construction shall be secured in place with cement mortar. Boxes flush mounted in ceiling shall be supported from building structure in dependent of the ceiling construction. D. Junction boxes installed in rated walls shall be covered on five sides with appropriate putty pads to maintain the rating of the wall. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Boxes shall have only the holes necessary to accommodate the conduits at point of installation. All boxes shall have suitable provisions to secure covers. B. Boxes shall be securely attached to the building construction, using wood screws for wood construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete construction. Boxes flush mounted in tile or masonry construction shall be secured in place with cement mortar. Boxes flush mounted in ceiling shall be supported from building structure independent of the ceiling construction. C. All outlet boxes shall be flush mounted within the wall regardless of wall construction, unless they are specifically shown as being used with exposed conduit. D. The edge of all outlet boxes shall be flush with the surface in which they are recessed. The contractor shall be attentive to boxes set in masonry walls. The devices that fit into the outlet 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL boxes shall be screwed tight before the cover plates are installed. The cover plates shall not be used as a means of tightening the devices in place. E. Flush mounted outlet boxes in all exposed masonry walls shall be masonry boxes or shall be four (4) inch square boxes with square cornered tile covers. The boxes or box covers shall have square edges and shall have the device holes inside the box. Extra deep type concrete boxes shall be used in concrete walls and slabs to permit entering and leaving of conduits and to avoid steel reinforcing rods. G. Wall switch outlets shown at door locations shall be installed on the lock side of the door, four (4) inches from the jamb, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Door swings shall be verified from architectural drawings. H. Outlet boxes for telephones shall be 4-11/16 inches square and shall have raised covers with rectangular opening in center. I. Outlets shall be located approximately as shown on the plans. Exact mounting heights for all outlets shall be determined at the building site and shall be verified by the contractor from architectural drawings which indicate casework and other architectural conditions. Outlets shall be located so as not to split the top of wainscot, backsplashes, or to be obstructed by equipment of any type indicated or specified. Where outlets are shown on the drawings as being adjacent and different mounting heights are specified for each, they shall be mounted one directly over the other, on the centerline of the group or on the centerline of the room. J. Where outlets are installed in waterproofed walls or columns, a 6" x 6" x 3" deep wood box shall be placed in the forms before the concrete is poured. This box is to be removed before the waterproofing is applied. The contractor shall then waterproof the wall and the opening after which the outlet shall be installed. Grout around the box. Boxes to be set carefully so the cover plates will be flush. K. Outlet boxes in conduit work which is exposed to the weather, and for vapor -tight lighting fixtures and devices shall be cast corrosion resistant type with threaded conduit hubs to accommodate the conduit size entering. L. Outlets for the attachment of lighting fixtures shall be provided with fixture studs securely anchored to the boxes. Where outlet boxes are used to support lighting fixtures, the outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored to the structural members of the building. END OF SECTION 02013, HJ/12010.00 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 09 23 — LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. The contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all trades covered in the other sections of the specifications to provide a complete and operable system. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The extent of the lighting control system work is indicated by the drawings and by the requirements of this section. It is defined to include, but is not limited to, occupancy sensors, power packs and auxiliary relays. System installation includes the installation of occupancy sensors, power packs and auxiliary relays in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Testing: All electronic component board assemblies are to be factory tested and burned in prior to installation. B. System Support: Factory fax/telephone/email support shall be available free of charge during normal business hours. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical equipment and enclosures. D. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the NEC. E. UL Compliance: UL Listed in compliance with applicable UL Safety Standard. F. FCC Emissions: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC Part 15, Class B. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for at least 5 years from the date of manufacture. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. If equipment from another manufacturer is submitted for approval, identification of any and all exceptions to the specifications must be provided with a detailed explanation of each exception. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT A. The products specified in Section 26 09 23 apply to the work specified in this section. 2.2 PASSIVE INFRARED/ULTRASONIC (DUAL TECHNOLOGY) WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSOR A. Sensor shall recess into standard single gang wall switch box. B. Sensor shall meet NEC grounding requirements, providing a green grounding wire with ring terminal and thread -forming screw. C. Sensor shall have one line lead (black) and one load lead (red) for connection to lighting circuit. D. Sensor shall be rated 120VAC and 277VAC input at line frequency of 60 hertz. E. Sensor shall be rated for electronic and magnetic ballasts, incandescent and motor loads. Load Rating cad 120V Load Rating (&- 277V Ballast 1000VA 1800VA Incandescent 1000W Motor 1/4hp F. Sensor shall employ a mechanical relay to stop current flow to load when sensor is inactive (off). G. Sensor shall employ a dual element PIR sensor having highest sensitivity to infrared with wavelength of 9.8 microns to detect human occupancy. H. Sensor shall have major motion coverage up to 1000 square feet and minor motion coverage up to 300 square feet. I. Sensor shall employ a multi -segmented lens having a 180 degree coverage pattern. J. Coverage pattern and sensitivity shall be verified in accordance with NEMA WD-7 Guide for Occupancy Sensors. K. Sensor shall have a bypass and time delay adjustment located behind a removable cover. A tool is required to remove cover, activate sensor bypass or adjust time delay. L. Sensor shall have time delay adjustment ranging from 15 seconds to 30 minutes. M. Sensor shall include mounting hardware, decorator wall plate cover and screws to mount cover. Wall plate cover color shall match the sensor. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 CEILING MOUNTED DUAL TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Sensor shall employ a Power Pack to supply power to sensor. B. Sensor shall employ power pack or auxiliary relay to switch class 1 lighting loads and control switching of lighting loads. C. Sensor shall have sensitivity, mode and time delay adjustments located behind a snap -on cover which is accessible when sensor is fully installed and mounted, and does not require the sensor to be moved or removed to make adjustments. D. Sensor shall have a sensitivity adjustment ranging from 60 to 100%. E. Sensor shall have a set of normally opened and normally closed contacts, called an isolated form c relay, rated no less than 1A@24VDC, allowing the sensor to interface with building automation systems (BAS), HVAC, security, lighting control and other control systems. F. Sensor shall detect occupancy using passive infrared (PIR) and ultrasonic technology and employ a lens with 360 degree coverage pattern covering up to 1000 sq. ft G. Sensor shall have a mode selector switch and have 2 operating modes; automatic and manual. In the manual mode, sensor remains activated and will not turn off (for service and maintenance use only). 2.4 POWER PACK & AUXILIARY RELAY A. Power pack and auxiliary relay shall be rated for 120VAC and 277VAC loads at line frequency of 60Hz. B. Power pack shall have an input voltage selector switch to select 120VAC or 277VAC input and switch shall require a tool. C. Power pack and auxiliary relay shall have separate threaded'/ in. chase nipples for class 1 and class 2 wiring, allowing both power pack and auxiliary relay to be mounted in or out of a standard 4 in. x 4 in. junction box, and providing separation of class 1 and class 2 wiring. Power pack and auxiliary relay may be mounted between two junction boxes, allowing both class 1 and class 2 wiring to be enclosed in conduit as may be required by code. D. Power pack and auxiliary relay shall incorporate one relay rated no less than 16A for tungsten filament incandescent lighting loads and 20A for fluorescent ballast loads at either 120 or 277VAC 60Hz. E. Power pack and Auxiliary relay shall have a 24VDC control input to allow class 2 sensors to turn on lighting connected to power pack or auxiliary relay. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Provide the quantity of occupancy sensors required for complete and proper volumetric coverage to completely cover the controlled areas. Contractor shall verify room coverage and ceiling heights with manufacturer and provide the quantity of occupancy sensors as required. Rooms shall have one hundred (100) percent volumetric coverage of small motion detection to completely cover the controlled areas to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only rooms that are to be provided with sensors. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the work so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural or architectural components. Provide sensors to provide complete and proper volumetric coverage. B. Power Packs shall be located in accessible ceiling spaces. C. Exact locations of Power Pack boxes shall be based on observing good installation practice and shall be consistent throughout the project. Power Packs shall be located in accessible ceiling spaces. Attention shall be paid to all aspects of installation to ensure that there is the minimum aesthetic impact of the hardware on the appearance of the affected rooms. All control unit hardware shall be completely contained within a suitable NEMA-type enclosure, with no exposed wire other than low voltage Class 2 wiring. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The Electrical Contractor, as part of the work of this section, shall coordinate, receive, mount, connect, and place into operation all equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wire, connectors, hardware, and other incidental items necessary for properly functioning lighting control and occupancy sensors as described herein and shown on the plans. The Electrical Contractor shall maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure Compliance: Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's product data, including shop drawings, technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation. 2. All occupancy sensors and Power Packs shall be of the same manufacturer throughout unless otherwise noted. 3. Install occupancy sensors in areas shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of NEC, and in accordance with industry practices. Do not install devices until wall construction and wiring is completed. 4. Install occupancy sensors and switches only in electrical boxes that are clean, free from excess building materials, debris, and similar matter. 5. Install occupancy sensors plumb and aligned in the plane of the ceiling where they are installed. 6. Refer to Architectural drawing, elevations, etc. for exact location of wall switches where indicated on the Architectural plans. Coordinate location of all wall switches with other specialty items and millwork and avoid conflicts. Coordinate with all trades to avoid conflicts during construction. 7. Circuit Power Packs ahead of local control switches - source — Power Pack — local toggle switch(s) — load. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 8. Low voltage cabling installed from Power Pack to sensor(s) and from sensor to sensor shall be supported every 5 feet at a minimum height of 3 feet above grid/ceiling but no closer than six inches below deck. Support system shall be ceiling wire attached to structure and clipped to ceiling support grid using Caddy drop wire securing clip #EC311. Cabling is hung plumb to devices. 3.3 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT A. At the time of installation the contractor shall test and adjust each sensor for proper detection of motion appropriate to room usage. The contractor shall follow the testing and adjustment procedures as written in the manufacturer's installation instructions for each sensor model. B. Prior to testing and adjusting, verify with Owner/Architect the initial settings for each type of area based on its intended function and use. C. Verify with Owner all adjustable functions of each type of occupancy sensor prior to installation. Set all adjustable functions of each type of occupancy sensor as directed by Owner. Initial settings unless directed by Owner / Architect: Ceiling Sensors: 1. Auto -On = On 2. Lighting Sweep = Off 3. Ultrasonic Self -Adjust = On 4. Infrared Self -Adjust = On 5. BAS Interface = On 6. Zero Time Delay = Off 7. Manual Override = Off 8. Range = Adjust relative to room size or as directed by Owner 9. Delay = 30 minutes 10. Frequency = 32 kHz D. Before energizing, check for continuity of circuits, short circuits, and grounding connections. After energizing, check devices to demonstrate proper operation. E. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. F. Adjust sensor to de -energize lighting after 30 minutes of inactivity (dip switch #3 on position). G. At the time of checkout and testing, the owner's representative shall be thoroughly instructed in the proper operation of the system. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Contractor shall protect installed product and finished surfaces from damage during all phases of installation including preparation, testing, and cleanup END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 2416 — PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the panelboards including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall be of the dead -front type incorporating switching and protective devices of the number, rating and type specified herein or shown on the drawings. Panelboards shall have general purpose enclosures and shall be suitable for flush or surface mounting as indicated. All panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage and shall be in accordance with the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. "Standard for Panelboards" and "Standard for Cabinets and Boxes" and shall be so labeled where procedures exist. Where panelboards are to be used as service entrance equipment, they shall be so labeled. Panelboards shall also comply with NEMA standard for panelboards, National Electrical Code and Federal Specification 115A (Power Distribution Panels) where applicable. 2.2 INTERIORS A. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with switching and protective devices, wire connectors, etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be of the anti -turn solderless type and all shall be suitable for copper or aluminum wire of the sizes indicated on the drawings. B. Interiors shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be so designed that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping. C. Bus bars for the mains shall be of tin plated copper or tin plated aluminum, sized in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories standards. Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral and ground bus bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Bussing shall be braced throughout to conform to industry standard practice governing short circuit stresses in 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL panelboards. Bracing shall be equivalent to, or compatible with, the rated interrupting capacity of the smallest overcurrent device in that panelboard. All panel boards shall be fully rated. Series rating of panels is not acceptable. D. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be tin plated copper or tin plated aluminum. E. Insulated neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection or shall utilize set screws to bond the neutral wire to the neutral bus through holes drilled in the neutral bar. A neutral bus utilizing flat head screws to hold the neutral wires will be acceptable provided that ring type crimp on connectors are used on the conductors that are to be connected to the neutral bus. A ground bus, identical to the neutral bus, shall be provided and bolted to the interior. All molded case main circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted. All vertically mounted molded case circuit breakers shall be mounted so the handle is up for "on" and down for "off', when viewed from the normal standing position. G. Spaces for future installation of molded case circuit breakers on the job site may be permitted if so required, to utilize the manufacturer's standard panelboard design. The spaces shall be complete with all bus and bus connectors such that future breakers can be installed without adding or changing bus on the main bus. Bus connectors connected to the energized main bus shall be rigidly anchored at the other end with insulating bus supports or dummy breakers or spare breakers. 2.3 BOXES A. Boxes shall be made from unpainted galvanized code gauge steel having multiple knockouts except where noted. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of four (4) inches on all sides, and to have a minimum width of twenty (20) inches unless noted otherwise. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be so sized as to include this wiring space. This wiring space shall be in addition to the minimum gutter space specified above and the limiting width may be increased accordingly. B. At least four (4) interior mounting studs shall be provided. C. Box identification number shall be on box. 2.4 TRIMS A. Hinged doors covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims, and shall not uncover any live parts in making switching device handles accessible. Doors shall have semi flush type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over forty eight (48) inches in height shall have a vault handle and 3 point catch complete with lock, arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be concealed. All locks shall be keyed alike. A directory frame and typewritten directory card with all spares marked in pencil and having a transparent plastic cover shall be furnished on the inside face of each door. B. The trims shall be fabricated from code gauge sheet steel. C. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the panelboard trim shall be properly cleaned and finished with grey ANSI 61 paint over a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Trims shall have the same width and height as the box. Trims shall be mountable by a screwdriver without the need for special tools. E. Shop drawings for the panels shall show that all of the aforementioned requirements have been incorporated into each panel. Panels shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Square D Company, Cutler -Hammer or Siemens. The branch circuit breaker arrangement in each respective panel shall be as indicated in the panel schedules on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Panelboards shall be securely attached to building construction, using wood screws for wood construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts or Tapcon anchors for masonry or concrete construction. B. Install panels so that breaker number 1 is the top left breaker. Panel interiors shall not be installed where breaker number 1 is the bottom right breaker. C. In panels that contain multi -layered neutral bus install neutrals beginning with the back neutral bus row and work forward. Do not make up neutrals on front neutral bus row unless all other rows are full. D. Label breaker mounting space with manufacturer -provided number labels. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 2419 — MOTOR POWER CONTROL WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the motor starters, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FURNISHED BY MECHANICAL A. In general, motor starters for all mechanical and plumbing equipment will be furnished by the mechanical and plumbing contractors respectively. The electrical contractor shall be required to install the motor starters and to furnish and install all electrical power wiring to the starter and equipment. The control wiring to operate the equipment shall be furnished and installed by the contractor furnishing the starter. 2.2 FURNISHED BY ELECTRICAL A. Where motor starters are shown on the electrical plans they are to be furnished by the electrical contractor. Motor starters shall be full voltage, across -the -line magnetic motor starters, rated as required for equipment served, with 120 volt coil, hand -off -automatic selector switch in cover, and general purpose NEMA-1 (indoor) or rain -tight NEMA-3R (outdoor) enclosure. The starters shall be equipped with thermal overloads in each ungrounded conductor. Thermal overloads shall be sized in accordance with nameplate rating of motor supplied. Motor starters shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Square "D" Company, Cutler -Hammer or Siemens. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Where required, motor starters shall be securely attached to building construction, using wood screws for wood construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts or Tapcon anchors for masonry or concrete construction. 02017, HJIPROJ. #16054.00 MOTOR POWER CONTROL WIRING 26 24 19 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL END OF SECTION 02017, HXPROJ. #16054.00 MOTOR POWER CONTROL WIRING 26 24 19 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 27 26 — WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the wiring devices including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Switches shall be totally enclosed, rated at 120/277 volts, white plastic handles, of the quiet type, back and side wired full rated at 20 amperes as follows, unless otherwise noted: Switch P & S Leviton Hubbell Single pole CS20AC1 CS120 CS120 Double pole CSB20AC2 CS122 CS1222 Three way CS20AC3 CS320 CS320 Four-way CS20AC4 CS420 CS1224 Keyed -switches 1221-L 1221-L 1991-L 3-way keyed switches 1223-L 1223-L 1994-L Contact (center off) 1557-1 1557-1 1995-1 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Single and duplex receptacles shall be 15 ampere, 125 volts, back and side wired, with grounded pole, of white plastic color as follows: Receptacle Hubbell Leviton Arrow -Hart Duplex CR20-1 CR20-1 CR20-1 Single 5361-1 5801-1 5251-1 GFI 2094-1 8899-1 5352-1 2.3 SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLES 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Special-purpose receptacles shall be of similar grade specification as single or duplex receptacles and shall be as described in the legend of symbols and notes for electrical systems on the drawings. 2.4 DEVICE PLATES A. Provide device plates for each and every outlet box requiring same, and of the type required for the service and device involved; furnish in gangs as necessary. Plates and screws shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Finish of the plates shall be white unbreakable nylon unless otherwise noted. 2.5 CAPS A. Where necessary, receptacles shall be furnished with a matching cap. 2.6 STORAGE A. Prior to installation the wiring devices shall be stored on the job site in the original labeled cartons. The devices shall be installed in the outlets as soon as possible after the wire is installed. The devices shall then be temporarily covered using the device packaging material, until finishing and painting operations are completed. Devices and device plates that are stained or paint splashed shall be replaced. A cleaned device or device plate will not be accepted. 2.7 TIME SWITCHES A. Furnish and install where shown time switches of the twenty-four hour or seven day type, powered by a self-starting synchronous motor, capable of being set for different on -off times each day of the week, to an operating accuracy of plus or minus 15 minutes of the desired time and with day omitting device. Time switches controlling life safety lighting shall be of the astronomical type. B. Time switch contacts shall be capable of switching 40 amperes per pole continuously at rated voltage as indicated and shall have poles and switching arrangement as indicated on the drawings. C. Removable on -off trippers shall make possible multiple on -off periods. Separate manual on and off levers shall enable operation by hand without disturbing automatic settings. D. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R for outdoor use. NEMA 1 enclosure shall have combination 1/2"-3/4" knock -outs on bottom and both sides. Provision shall be made for positive padlocking and/or sealing. E. Terminals shall be capable of receiving up to #8 AWG wire. F. Time switches shall be as manufactured by Tork, Intermatic or Paragon. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. Wall switches shall be installed in the vertical position unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. 3.2 3-WAY AND 4-WAY SWITCHES A. Vertically operated switches shall be "on" in the upper position, except for 3-way and 4-way switches. If operated horizontally, they shall be "on" in the left position. 3.3 MULTIPLE SWITCHES A. Where more than one switch is shown at one outlet, they shall be installed under one plate in an order appropriate to the location of the outlets controlled, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 28 13 — FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the fuses including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSES A. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussman, Gould-Shawmut or Littelfuse and shall be dual -element and current limiting as specified on the drawings. 2.2 SPARES A. For each such fuse installed, this contractor shall furnish to the owner at the completion of the work a fuse cabinet with three (3) spare fuses of each type used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOTOR CIRCUIT FUSES A. Motor circuit fuses shall be dual element, time delay type rated between 125 and 150 percent of nameplate rating. UL Class K5 type FRN as required. 3.2 PANELBOARD FEEDER FUSES A. Where required panelboard feeders at 120 volts ac to ground shall be fused as follows: 30 to 100 amperes 110 to 600 amperes type FRN-UL Class K5 type LPN-UL Class K5 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FUSES 26 28 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.3 MAIN SWITCH FUSES A. Main switches and circuits exceeding 600 amperes capacity shall be fused with type KRP-C Hi -cap current limiting fuses, UL class I. The exact type shall be as recommended by the manufacturer considering interrupting and coordination requirements. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 FUSES 26 28 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 2816 — ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the circuit breakers including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BREAKERS A. All branch circuit breakers shall be UL labeled and shall be thermal and magnetic, molded case type, quick -make and quick -break both on manual and on automatic operation and shall be bolted to the panel bus. Breakers shall be the over -the -center toggle operating type, with the handle going to a position between "on" and "off' to indicate automatic tripping. All multi -pole breakers shall be internal common trip. 2.2 RATINGS A. The breakers to be furnished shall, in each instance, be determined by the specifications, the ampacity and poles as scheduled or as indicated, and by the minimum UL labeled RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity at circuit voltage as indicated by the schedules, but in no case less than 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. NEMA ratings are not acceptable in lieu of UL ratings. Breakers shall be labeled as required by the NEC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. All molded case main circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted. All vertically mounted molded case circuit breakers shall be mounted so the handle is up for "on" and down for "off," when viewed from the normal standing position. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 -1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 28 19 — MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the motor and circuit disconnects including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR DISCONNECTS A. All motor disconnect switches shall be rated at 240 volts in NEMA-1 (indoor) or rain -tight NEMA- 3R (outdoor) enclosures unless noted otherwise. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as indicated on the drawings in ratings as required for the equipment served. Disconnect switches shall be of the general duty type as manufactured by General Electric Company, Square D Company, Cutler -Hammer or Siemens.. 2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Any and all fused or unfused safety switches which may be required shall be furnished and installed under this section of the work; no switches of any kind or type will be provided under other sections of the specifications. Switches shall be provided with quick -make, quick -break mechanisms and shall be general duty type and of the appropriate ampere rating. Those employed for motors and their feeders shall be horsepower rated switches. Switches for outdoor installation shall be provided with weather -tight cabinets. Those utilized for service entrance duty shall bear the UL label of approval for such service. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Where required, motor and circuit disconnects shall be securely attached to the building construction, using wood screws for wood construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete construction. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 26 28 19 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.2 MOUNTING TO EQUIPMENT A. Motor circuit disconnects furnished and installed by the electrical contractor shall not be mounted to mechanical equipment unless otherwise noted. The motor and circuit disconnects shall be supported by the building structure or by independent supports END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 26 28 19 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 43 13 — SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for surge protection devices (SPD)for the protection of all AC electrical circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, substation -switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive load switching. C. The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with the latest edition of the following standards and publications: American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(ANSI/IEEE C62.1, C62.41, and C62.45 including the 8x20 and the 1 0x1 000 testing Underwriter's Laboratories (UL 1449 and UL 1283) Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94) 4. - National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, 70, 75, and 78) 6. NEC 285.6 D. The system shall be UL listed as a complete system under UL 1449 (latest edition) standard for surge protection devices (SPD) and the rating shall be permanently affixed to the SPD. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. General electrical requirements B. Raceway, boxes and fittings C. Wire and cable D. Low voltage motor control E. Variable frequency drives F. Grounding G. Lightning protection system H. Interrupting rating coordination 1.3 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.4 SCOPE ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 43 13 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the surge protection devices including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. The surge suppression submittals shall also include: 1. Dimensional drawing of each suppressor type indicating mounting arrangements. 2. Category C3 (20kv, 1 Oka) test results. 3. Documentation of specified system's UL 1449 clamping voltage ratings. 4. 10 x 1000 testing documentation 5. If requested a sample of each type of surge suppressor type shall be submitted to be used for testing and evaluation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE A. Suppressor shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449, standard for safety, surge protection device and UL 1283, electromagnetic interference filters. B. Suppressor shall be tested with the Category C3 high exposure waveform (20kv, 1 Oka 8/20u sec. Waveform) per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 - 1991. C. For 3 phase, 4-wire plus ground configurations, suppressor shall provide suppression elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral and each phase conductor and the system ground as well as neutral to ground for a total of seven suppression modes. D. Suppressor manufacturer shall provide certified test data confirming a "fail -short" failure mode. E. Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator lights shall indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. There shall be an indicator that confirms a ground connection is intact to the SPD device. F. The mounting position of the suppressor shall permit a short lead length between the suppressor and the point of connection. The lead length shall be kept as short as possible. G. Suppressor shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Maximum single impulse current rating: 200,000 amperes per phase (8/20usec. waveform). Note: if the suppressor utilizes internal fuses, the maximum single impulse current cannot exceed the rating of the fuse, unless pre -approved by the specifying engineer. 2. Pulse life rating: category c (8/20usec. waveform): 1,000 occurrences with no clamping 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 43 13 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL drift. 3. Maximum clamping voltage will be listed for a 3ka, 8/20usec. waveform. The clamping voltage must not exceed the following: Voltage LL=N NN=G LL=G 120/208 400 400 400 480 800 800 800 240 400 400 400 4. The Category C3 clamping voltage ANSI/IEEE C.62.41-1991 (20kv-1.2/25ous.10ka- 8/20us.) shall not exceed the following: Voltage LL=N NN=G LL=G 120/208 675 675 675 480 1250 1250 1250 240 675 675 675 H. Suppressor shall have turn -on and turn-off times of less than one nanosecond. I. Suppressor shall be of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directional. J. The SPD shall be constructed using surge current modules (MOV based). The status of each module shall be monitored on the front of the SPD enclosure as well redundantly inside the enclosure (for the purpose of identifying a possible defective indicator light) K. Terminals shall be provided for all of the necessary power and ground connections. Each - terminal shall accommodate wire sizes of #14 to #1 AWG. L. The SPD shall be equipped with an audible alarm that will actuate when any one of the surge current modules has failed. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm and an alarm push -to -test switch shall be provided to test the alarm. Both switches and audible alarm shall be located on the front cover of the TVSS enclosure. M. Suppressor shall incorporate copper bus bars for the surge current path. Small round wiring or plug-in connections are not acceptable. Surge current diversion modules shall use two bolt -on connections to the copper bus bars for reliable low impedance connections. N. Internal mounting of the SPD in switchgear is not acceptable. O. The suppressor will have a warranty guarantee for a period of ten years. P. Suppressor shall be by PQ Protection, Advanced Protection Technologies, Surge Suppression Incorporated. 2.2 TERMINAL STRIP HARD -WIRED (120 VAC) SUPPRESSOR A. Suppressor shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449, Standard for Safety, Surge Protection Devices. B. Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided. C. The suppressor shall be internally fused, in such a manner that the power is not interrupted. D. Suppressor shall consist of a three stage hybrid design: first stage mov, second stage air -core 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 43 13 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL indicator, third stage silicon avalanche diode or mov. E. Suppressor shall provide three suppression modes: line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. F. Suppressor shall provide a maximum single impulse current rating of 25,000 amperes (8/20usec. waveform) per mode. G. Suppressor shall provide a pulse life rating of 3,000 amperes (8/20usec. waveform) every thirty (30) seconds for 200 occurrences. H. Suppressor's maximum clamping voltage when subjected to ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1980, Cat. B (6kv-1.1/50usec., 3ka-8/20usec.) shall not exceed 350 volts peak. I. Suppressor shall be by PQ Protection, Advanced Protection Technologies, Surge Suppression Incorporated. J. The suppressor will have a warranty guarantee for a period of five years. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE- HIGH PEAK CURRENT AND REDUNDANT PROTECTION A. Install one primary suppressor at each utility service entrance to the facility, according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Suppressor shall be installed on the load side of the service entrance as close as practical. Connect to a dedicated 60Amp, 3 pole breaker for servicing means. C. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be kept as short and straight as possible. Suppressor's ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground. 3.2 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AC POWER SUPPLY: A. Install each hard -wired branch circuit suppressor between each equipment item and its power supply conductors as follows: 1. Fire alarm master panel 2. Intercom master 3. Building management system master 4. Security system master 5. TV head B. Install suppressor according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Suppressor shall be by PQ Protection, Advanced Protection Technologies, Surge Suppression Incorporated. 3.3 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT A. Install one on each circuit conductor where entering and/or leaving a building for the following 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 43 13 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL systems: 1. Fire alarm system - #PC642 2. Intercom system - #OPX48 and PB-SPK 3. Building management system — #PC642 4. Security system — #PC642 5. CATV — #CX Series B. Suppressor shall be by PQ Protection, Advanced Protection Technologies, Surge Suppression Incorporated. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 43 13 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 26 5100 — LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the lighting fixtures and lamping, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. . Lighting fixtures shall be as specified in the lighting fixture schedule on the drawings and as specified herein. 2.2 SUBSTITUTION A. The lighting fixture manufacturers and catalog numbers specified in the fixture schedule on the drawings may not be substituted without authorization from the engineer. 2.3 CEILING TYPES A. The contractor shall be responsible for confirming all ceiling types before ordering lighting fixtures shipped to the job. 2.4 TESTING A. Each lighting fixture shall have been tested and certified for proper operation by the fixture manufacturer for the type ceiling and mounting on or in which it is installed. 2.5 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. All fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic type usable with T8 or T5 energy saving lamps as listed in the fixture schedule and shall be approved by the lamp manufacturer, High Power 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS 2651 00-1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Factor (H.P.F.) Class "P", C.B.M. certified by E.T.L., internally protected with an automatic reset thermal protector, with Class "A" sound rating unless otherwise noted. Fluorescent ballasts shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Advance, or Universal. 2.6 U.L. LABEL A. All fixtures shall bear the UL label 2.7 HID BALLASTS A. All high intensity discharge lamp luminaire ballasts shall be constant wattage high power factory type unless noted otherwise. 2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving preheat, rapid start, with a minimum rated life of 20,000 hours at three (3) hours per start unless indicated otherwise. 2.9 INCANDESCENT LAMPS A. Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, unless otherwise noted, with a minimum rated life of 1,000 hours, and rated for 120 volt operation. 2.10 METAL HALIDE LAMPS A. Metal halide lamps shall have a minimum rated life of 20,000 hours, and shall be operated through a ballast designed to the lamp wattage and supply voltage indicated on the plans. 2.11 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Twin tube fluorescent lamps shall have a minimum rated life of 10,000 hours and shall be operated through a ballast designed to the lamp wattage and supply voltage indicated on the plans. Lamps shall have single ended bi-pin base. 2.12 LAMP MANUFACTURERS A. Lamps shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Phillips or Sylvania. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures shall be installed as specified in the lighting fixture schedule on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Lighting fixtures shall be supported from the building structure. The contractor shall coordinate this requirement with the ceiling trades. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS 26 51 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Fixtures shall be supported in a manner that will insure the fixture weight being equally distributed from each support and the fixture remaining in a level position. D. Each ceiling anchor or support for fluorescent fixtures shall be tested with a weight of not less than 50 pounds or three times the weight of the installed fixtures, whichever is greater. Testing shall be done in the presence of the architect's representative on the job. 3.2 SPLICES A. No wiring splice or tap shall be located within an arm, stem, etc., used for support of lighting fixture. Wire shall be continuous from splice in outlet box of the building wiring system to lamp socket, or to ballast terminals in fluorescent luminaires. 3.3 LAMP INSTALLATION A. Lamps installed in lighting fixtures shall be as specified in the fixture schedule on the drawings and as specified herein. All lamps shall be operating at the time of final inspection. 3.4 RATED CEILINGS A. All recessed fixtures scheduled to be installed in a rated ceiling assembly shall be protected by a LIL listed "tenting" assembly that will maintain the integrity of the rated ceiling assembly and allow for proper operation of the light fixture without unnecessary interruptions caused by thermal disconnecting means. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS 2651 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 27 05 33 — TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the installation of the wiring for the telephone and data wiring system, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings, and hereinafter specified. 1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.1 New Commercial Building Telecommunication Standard. B. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.2-1 Transmission performance specification for 4 pair, Category 6 performance. C. TIA/EIA-569.Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. D. TIA/EIA-606 Administration standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings. E. IEEE 802.3ab Specification for Gigabit Ethernet over twisted pair cable 100013ase-T. F. NEC- NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. The contractor shall furnish and install all wiring, outlets, conduit, connections, etc., as required to provide a complete, ready for operation telephone/data wiring system. 2.2 TERMINATIONS A. The termination equipment shall be mounted to a communications rack/backboard as called for on the plans with punch down blocks or patch panels as required. 2.3 PATCH PANELS A. Communications patch panels shall be rack mounted, as called for on plans, with pre -fabricated rack mount cabinetry and fully tapped 19" EIA mounting rails. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 27 05 33 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.4 RATINGS A. All jacks, copper wiring, patch panels, etc. shall be rated category 6. Fiber optic wiring where required shall be a minimum of six -strand multi -mode 62.5/125mm cable. 2.5 MANUFACTURERS A. Copper cable and fiber optic cable shall be as manufactured by Mohawk, Superior Essex or Berk-Tek. B. Cat 6 equipment manufacturers shall be Hubbell, Ortronics or Leviton. C. Rack and cabinet manufacturers shall be Hubbell, Great Lakes, Ortronics or Mid -Atlantic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. The electrical contractor shall furnish and install a conduit system for the concealed wiring as described herein and shown on the plans. Contractor shall provide a nylon pull cord in all conduits in addition to the specified cables for future use. 3.2 BUSHINGS A. At each communication outlet, the conduit shall terminate into an insulated bushing. The conduit shall be stubbed up above an accessible ceiling within the unit or hallway for installation of wiring above ceiling without conduit. 3.3 RACKS AND CABINETS A. Floor mounted racks and cabinets shall be secured to the floor using UL listed anchors and bolts. Wall mounted equipment shall be mounted to plywood backboards with screws rated for the full load and weight of the equipment after installation of all wiring and equipment. 3.4 LINE VOLTAGE POWER A. Conduits shall not pass near any equipment with heavy electrical power requirements and shall not be located next to parallel power raceways. END OF SECTION ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 27 05 33 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 28 31 00 — DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for supplementary general conditions. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the fire alarm system as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified. B. The usage of trade names and model numbers herein is for the purpose of establishing required levels of performance and quality. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to fully substantiate, to the satisfaction of the architect/engineer, that any proposed substitute products are the same as or better than those specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The contractor shall furnish, install and place in operating condition an electronically operated, closed circuit fire alarm system as described herein and shown on the plans. All units of the alarm system shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for fire alarm use and the control panel shall bear the UL label. The system shall be installed in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code and in compliance with applicable provisions of Standards #72 published by the National Fire Protection Association. B. The system shall be a non -coded fire alarm system, class B, with remote annunciation. Silent Knight fire alarm equipment has been used as the standard for design. C. Flow alarm switches and control valve supervision (tamper) switches, if required, will be provided by the sprinkler contractor and wired to the fire alarm system by the electrical contractor. All switches to be UL listed. D. Smoke dampers, if required, will be furnished and installed by the heating, ventilating and air conditioning contractor. The electrical contractor shall provide power circuits, wiring and remote mounted relays to activate the dampers upon detection of fire or fire potential as described on the plans. Any required connection to exhaust fans or air handling units shall be performed by the electrical contractor through relays controlled by the fire alarm control panel. Smoke dampers shall be powered by the same panel and circuit as their respective HVAC equipment. When equipment is running, dampers shall be normally open; when equipment is off, dampers shall be normally closed. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEMS 2831 00-1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.2 OPERATION A. Actuation of any automatic initiation device such as smoke detectors, heat detectors, flow switch etc. Shall automatically initiate the following: 1. Sound all alarm horns. 2. Flash all visual fire indicators. 3. Release magnetic door holders. 4. Shut down all air handling units and exhaust fans throughout the facility. 5. Cause a red LED, identifying the active zone, to flash on the actuated zone module at the control panel. 6. Indicate the active zone on the building annunciator. 7. Shut all smoke dampers in ducts associated with the air handling units and exhaust fans which are shut down. 8. Activate the remote station connection module and transmit the alarm signal to a remote location (required leased phone line and any charges for connection to the remote receiving equipment shall be the responsibility of the building owner). B. Activation of any manual initiating device (such as a pull station) shall automatically initiate the following: 1. Sound all alarm horns. 2. Flash all visual fire indicators. 3. Release magnetic door holders. 4. Cause the LCD display to identifying the active zone at the control panel. 5. Indicate the active zone on the building annunciator. 6. Activate the remote station connection module and transmit the alarm signal to a remote location (required leased phone line any charges for connection to the remote receiving equipment shall be the responsibility of the building owner). C. Operation of the "alarm silence" switch shall be indicated by illumination of the "alarm silenced" display and an audible trouble signal. D. Power failures, opens grounds, or any disarrangement of the system wiring or components shall be indicated by a visual and audible trouble signal. The audible trouble signal may be silenced but the trouble LED shall remain lit until the system has been returned to normal operating condition. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEMS 2831 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Provide a Silent Knight fire alarm control panel/annunciator composed of but not limited to the following modules and components. B. The alarm control module shall be provided which allows an alarm from one zone to be silenced but allows subsequent alarms from other zones to resound the alarm. The control module shall provide monitoring of all status changes within the system, system reset, signal silence, system trouble LED, alarm silenced LED, common system alarm LED, AC power on LED, alarm silenced LED, trouble silence and lamp test. C. The central processing modules shall utilize analog communication techniques to integrate and control addressable devices. "T" taps along the analog cable are permitted in Class B configuration, since supervision is accomplished by polling each addressable device. The module shall be able to support a variety of addressable devices including: addressable photoelectric smoke detectors, addressable ionization smoke detectors, addressable duct detectors, addressable manual fire stations and addressable zone terminal. The central processing module shall poll devices three times before it will report an abnormal condition. Once the condition is reported the LCD display shall annunciate the devices alphanumeric identification and the type of condition (alarm, trouble or supervisory). If multiple alarms are present the device display shall scroll and the appropriate condition type will illuminate on each scroll. If the operator requires additional information, the cabinet door can be opened and the off -normal display can be activated. To activate the off -normal display, the operator pushes the test/display button. The off -normal display will then scroll in ascending order and provide the operator with detailed information for each point (alarm, trouble, test, communication, and disable and system ground fault. The sounder on the common control module will sound with any abnormal condition. The central processing module communicates with the common control module through the inter -module data cable. Communication is two way, alarm and trouble information is passed from the CPU to the common control module and system reset and alarm silence is passed from the common control module to the central processor module. The central processor module also has the ability to communicate with other system modules. D. Communication: Field programming is possible by accessing the programming mode and selecting the proper sequence of push -buttons (passcode). E. The control module is used for output control for signaling devices & for AHU shut -down. F. The monitor module is used for monitoring dry contact devices such as sprinkler flow and tamper switches. Each module has an individual analog address for FACP communication. G. Power supply units furnished shall each be capable of supplying regulated 24/12 volts do (for circuitry), regulated 28.2 volts do (to float the sealed backup battery pack). And unregulated 24 volts dc, rated at 10 amps, full load (for the signal circuits). H. Control panel mounted batteries shall be furnished which are sufficient to provide power for the entire system, upon loss of normal 120 VAC power, for a period of twenty-four (24) hours with ten (10) minutes of alarm indication at the end of that period. Furnish non -coded, single action stations as shown on the plans. Stations shall be red in color, and fabricated of high impact Lexan. The stations shall provide mechanical indications of operation until reset with the proper key. J. Provide multi -tone devices with eight tone selectable output integral mounting plates as shown on the plans. Each unit shall be equipped with xenon strobe with an output of 15/75 candella-seconds and the word "fire" hot stamped in red on the vandal resistant polycarbonate lens. Each multi -tone device shall be constructed of high impact thermoplastic, finished in red, 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEMS 2831 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL and have a minimum output rating of 96 dba at 10'. K. Addressable Zone Module. This module is a Class B alarm receiving circuit that accommodates normally open contact devices. It also provides the interface for 2-wire 24vdc smoke detectors, manual fire alarm boxes, heat detectors, waterflow detectors and other fire alarm initiating devices. One or several such alarm initiating devices may be connected on the zone loop wires. It is recommended that no more than 20 smoke detectors be tied on any single module, and it is recommended that waterflow devices be separated from other alarm initiating devices. The module shall have a field selectable address which will allow the CPU to distinguish it from other addressable devices. A yellow LED shall be provided to indicate status changes. The module shall mount to a surface or semi -flush box. The box shall be a standard 4 11/16" square electrical box and a 4 11/16" square box extension ring. The zone loop wiring from the module to the initiating device shall be supervised by an end of line resistor installed at the last device on the loop. Provide electromagnetic, wall mounted or floor mounted door holders/releases as indicated on the plans. The door holders/releases shall hold fire and smoke barrier doors open until released by manual or automatic fire alarm initiation. The device shall operate on 24vdc. The doors shall be able to be opened or closed manually at any time and must shut automatically in the event of a power failure. The holding power of the electromagnet shall be approximately thirty-five (35) pounds (15kg). M. Digital alarm communicator transmitter: The digital alarm communicator transmitter/FACP shall be the Silent Knight #5204/5205. The DACT shall have the capability to supervise two telephone lines, seize the phone line and send the alarm signal on one or both lines without the addition of additional equipment. It shall sound a local trouble signal if the telephone service is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds and it shall transmit a signal indicating the loss of phone line service to the central station over the remaining phone line. - PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide all equipment, wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for the erection of a complete and operating system in accordance with applicable local, state and national codes, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications. Wiring shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA-70 Article 760 and NFPA Pamphlet #72 and be in a completely separate conduit system. Color code shall be used throughout. B. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide supervision of final system panel connections, perform a complete functional test of the system and submit a written report to the contractor attending to the proper operation of the system. C. All components, parts and assemblies supplied by the manufacturer shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 12 months commencing upon start up and beneficial use, at which time the system is protecting property or occupants provided such defects are not caused by misuse, abuse, neglect, unauthorized tampering or modification or acts of god. Warranty services shall be provided by a qualified factory trained representative of the equipment manufacturer during normal working hours, Monday thru Friday, excluding holidays. The representative shall be based in a fully staffed branch office located within a reasonable distance (50 miles) from the job site with an adequate supply of repair parts. The manufacturer shall not be liable for consequential damages. The manufacturer's statement of warranty shall be included in the submittals. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEMS 2831 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Upon satisfactory completion of system tests, the manufacturer's representative shall present for the owner's consideration a proposal to provide semi-annual inspection and tests of the system. E. Upon completion of the installation, the electrical contractor shall provide to the architect, with a copy to the manufacturer's representative, a signed written statement attesting that all system equipment was installed in accordance with these specifications and in accordance with wiring diagrams, instructions an directions provided to the contractor by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEMS 28 31 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 31 3100 — SOIL TREATMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: Pre -construction soil treatment for underslab and foundation wall perimeters 1.3 REFERENCES A. EPA — Environmental Protection Agency B. FBC — Florida Building Code 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Chemicals and products used 2. Application instructions 3. Certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations for term iticides. 4. Information that soil treatment conforms to specified requirements B. Provide information regarding the type of equipment to be used to apply the soil treatment, size of volume mixing tank, the pump capacity in gallons per minute, and the application tools with in -line flow meter devices attached. C. Certificate of Compliance: Submit as part of the close Out Documents the following statement from the pest control company: "The building has received a complete treatment for the prevention of subterranean termites. Treatment is in accordance with rules and laws established by the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services." D. Submit job site log book. E. Submit samplewarranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparing substrate and application. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SOIL TREATMENT 31 31 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Engage a professional pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of the State of Florida. C. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the EPA and are approved by local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. B. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. C. Comply with other handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. D. Unless treated areas are to be immediately covered, take precautions to prevent disturbance of treatment by human or animal contact. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum requirements for application as authorized by the State of Florida to fulfill the work according to manufacturer's specifications. B. Conform to applicable code for requirements and for application in accordance with the EPA. 1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Log Book to be kept at job site ad to include: 1. Project name 2. Company providing treatment 3. Applicator's name 4. Time of arrival and departure 5. Product name 6. Record date of all applications 7. Rate of application to all required areas of the designated site 8. All areas to be treated 9. The soil treatment trade name 10. Quantity of concentrate delivered to the site 11. Quantity used for the designated treated areas 12. The percentage of active ingredient in diluted form 13. Finished gallons of soil treatment for each application 14. Linear and square footage amount to determine total finished soil treatment used 1.9 DELIVERY A. The State Registered products must be delivered to the jobsite in the original sealed and labeled containers of the manufacturer. Use a synthetic dye for proper identification on the surface areas treated. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SOIL TREATMENT 31 31 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Furnish written warranty, executed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. B. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from Date of Substantial Completion, or the minimum more than five (5) years if prevailing local laws require. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. BASF 2. Syngenta Crop Protection, Inc. 3.- Bayer Environmental Science 2.2 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION A. Use an emulsible, concentrated termiticide that dilutes with water, specially formulated to prevent termite infestation. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Termidor 5C as manufactured by Base. b. Demina CS as manufactured by Syngenta. C. Premise 75 as manufactured by Bayer. B. Dilute with water to concentration level recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by toxicant manufacturer. B. Application Rates: Apply the soil treatment listed above as a water emulsion at not less than the percentage (in finished solution) designated according to manufacturer's label specification. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SOIL TREATMENT 31 31 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction. D. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, rain, landscape grading, or other construction activities following application. E. Provide all items and accessories as required for a complete and total application in every respect. F. Spaces in floor slab that are boxed out or cut away shall use a metal form of sufficient depth to eliminate any planned soil disturbances after initial chemical treatment. END OF SECTION 31 31 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 SOIL TREATMENT 31 31 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 32 14 00 - UNIT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Concrete interlocking pavers set in mortar setting beds with sand joints. b. Concrete step pavers set in mortar setting beds with grout joints. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C33 — Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates B. ASTM C136 — Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates C. ASTM C140 — Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units D. ASTM C150 — Specification for Portland Cement E. ASTM C241 — Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic F. ASTM C293 — Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Center -Point Loading) G. ASTM C936 — Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units H. ASTM C979 — Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete I. ASTM D698 — Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) J. ASTM D1557 — Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)) 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pavers and setting materials. B. Samples: For each type of unit paver indicated, provide two complete samples of paver to reflect the full range of colors, shapes and surface texture. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For unit pavers. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements, including compliance with standards. Provide for each type and size of unit. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for unit pavers, indicating compliance with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. B. Belgard Commercial 2.2 CONCRETE PAVERS A. Basis of Design: "Holland Stone Collection" B. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal -weight aggregates with chamfered edges. 1. Field Size: 4" x 8" x 2 3/8" 2. Intersection size: 8" x 8' x 3/8" 3. Step Size: 4" x 8" x 1 3/16" with no spacing lugs at the stair nosing face. 4. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Compressive Strength: Average 8000 PSI with no individual unit less than 7500 PSI. 6. Absorption: Average not greater than 5% with no individual unit less than 7%. 7. Colors a. Primary: Prairie b. Intersection: Granite C. Verify with Architect 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 CURBS AND EDGE RESTRAINTS A. Job -Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Specification Section "Cast - in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1. 2.5 AGGREGATE JOINT MATERIALS A. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. B. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. 2.5 MORTAR SETTING -BED MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand: ASTM C 144. D. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex -additive manufacturer for use with field -mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a retarder. E. Water: Potable. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. High -Performance Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7, sanded. 1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. B. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from grout manufacturer's full range. C. Water: Potable. 2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other procedures needed to produce setting -bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with optimal performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Proof -roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Specification Section "Earthwork" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive base course for unit pavers. B. Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Cut unit pavers with motor -driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used. D. Joint Pattern: See Drawings for unit paver joint patterns. E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit -to -unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. Isolation and Control Joints: Provide for sealant -filled joints at locations and of widths indicated. Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant -filled joints. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in specification section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide isolation joints where pavers abut walls and steps. 2. Provide control joints at the same locations as the concrete control joints. G. Provide edge restraints before placing unit pavers and install to comply with requirements in specifications section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.4 MORTAR SETTING -BED APPLICATIONS A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed. C. Apply mortar -bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing mortar bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set. Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting -bed material that has reached initial set. E. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on mortar bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each paver with a flat trowel. G. Tamp pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints. H. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide joint width recommended by paver manufacturer with variations not exceeding plus or minus. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. 1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces. 2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to remove smears before tooling joints. 3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise recommended by grout or liquid -latex manufacturer. K. Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI Al08.10. L. Grout joints at steps and risers as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. 1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces. 2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to remove smears before tooling joints. 3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL M. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise recommended by grout or liquid -latex manufacturer. N. Spread dry sand and fill joints at non -step areas after mortar has set. Sweep sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. O. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. P. Repeat joint -filling process 30 days later. 3.5 REPAIRING A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement. 3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Collect cutoffs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling. B. Coordinate with manufacturer and local recycler for take -back program or recycling. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. END OF SECTION 32 14 00 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 32 31 19 — DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Drawings, Specifications and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements and References are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, material, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install work as indicated and as specified herein, which includes, but is not limited to: a. Decorative aluminum fences. b. Swing gates. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified. 1. Provide Samples 12 inches in length for linear materials. D. Welding certificates. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit design calculations, analysis data and shop drawings indicating compliance with dedicated design requirements signed and sealed by the qualified Florida registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. B. Product Test Reports: For decorative metallic -coated -steel tubular picket fences, including finish, indicating compliance with referenced standard. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Include 10-foot length of fence complying with requirements. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warranty paint finish for a period of ten (10) years. 1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated -Design: Provide delegated design services including calculations and shop drawings for load bearing items to comply with performance requirements for load bearing items to comply with code requirements, performance requirements and design criteria signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Florida. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer shall be one of the following however products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product and acceptance is provided by the Architect in writing prior to bidding. 1. Ideal Aluminum 2. Custom Metal Specialities, Inc. 3. Alumi-Guard, Inc. 4. Carfaro, Inc. 5. Delair Group, L.L.C. 6. Elegant Aluminum Products, Inc. 7. Elite Fence Products, Inc. 8. Iron Eagle Industries, Inc. 9. Japra Group International. 10. Jerith Manufacturing Company, Inc. 11. Master Halco. 12. Merchants Metals; a division of MMI Products, Inc. 13. Royal Aluminum and Steel, Inc. 14. Specrail; a division of Porcelen LLC. 2.2 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form required. B. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063-T5. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 3231 19 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Tubing: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6. D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6. E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6. F. Castings: ASTM B 26/13 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Concrete: Normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mix concrete complying with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), 3-inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size. C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107 and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications. 2.4 DECORATIVE ALUMINUM FENCES A. Fence Height: 5-10" and as indicated. B. Posts: Square extruded tubes. 1. Line Posts: 2-1/2" by 2-1/2" for fence up to 4' - 0" high and 4" x 4" for fence over 4' - 0" high with 0.125" wall thickness minimum. 2. End and Corner Posts: 2-1/2 by 2-1/2" for fence up to 4' - 0" high and 4" x 4" for fence over 4'- 0" high with 0.250" wall thickness minimum. 3. Swing Gate Posts: 4" by 4" for gates up to 4' - 0" high and 6" x 6" for gates over 4' - 0" high with 0.250-inch wall thickness minimum. C. Post Caps: Aluminum castings that cover entire top of posts beyond posts. D. Rails: Extruded -aluminum channels, 1-3/4" by 1-3/4", with 0.100-inch thick sidewalls and 0.070- inch thick top minimum for fence up to 4'- 0" high and 2-1/4" x 2-1/4" for fence over 4' - 0" high. E. Pickets: Extruded -aluminum tubes, 1" square, for fence up to 4' - 0" high and 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" for fence over 4'- 0" high with 0.062-inch wall thickness minimum. 1. Terminate tops of pickets at top rail for flush top appearance. 2. Picket Spacing: 7 inches o.c.. F. Circles: 6" outside diameter aluminum circle with 3/4" wall thickness. G. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed fastening system. H. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard tamperproof, corrosion -resistant, color -coated fasteners matching fence components with resilient polymer washers. ©2017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 3231 19 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL I. Fabrication: Assemble fences into sections by fastening pickets to rails. 1. Fabricate sections with clips welded to rails for fastening to posts in field. 2. Drill clips for fasteners before finishing. J. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay. K. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating. 2.5 SWING GATES A. Gate Configuration: As indicated. B. Gate Frame Height: As indicated. C. Gate Opening Width: As indicated. D. Aluminum Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square extruded -aluminum tubes 2- 1/2 by 2-1/2 inches with 0.125-inch wall thickness. E. Frame Corner Construction: Welded or assembled with corner fittings and 5/16-inch diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet wide or wider. F. Additional Rails: Provide as indicated, complying with requirements for fence rails. G. Infill: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence. H. Picket Size, Configuration, and Spacing: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence. I. Hardware: Provide hold open keepers for each gate leaf. J. Lock: Deadbolt latch "MS-1891 Series" as manufactured by Adams Rite. Faceplate to be painted to match gate. K. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use. 1. Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing. 2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron. L. Cane Bolts: Provide for inactive leaf of pairs of gates. Fabricated from 3/4-inch diameter, round steel bars, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Finish to match gates. Provide galvanized -steel pipe strikes to receive cane bolts in both open and closed positions. M. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay. N. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot -dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated. For hardware items, hot -dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 3231 19 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Aluminum Surfaces: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned B. Aluminum Surfaces: Sections shall be free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes and chemically cleaned. C. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 1. Construction layout and field engineering are specified in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements." 3.3 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts. Peen threads of bolts after assembly to prevent removal. C. Post Excavation: Drill or hand -excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 24 inches plus 3 inches for each foot or fraction of a foot that fence height exceeds 4 feet. D. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 3231 19 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and sleeves and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade. Finish and slope top surface to drain water away from post. b. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches below grade to allow covering with surface material. Slope top surface of concrete to drain water away from post. 3. Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches of specified excavation depth, but not closer than 3 inches to bottom of concrete. 4. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use galvanized -steel pipe sleeves with inside diameter at least 3/4 inch larger than outside diagonal dimension of post, preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. a. Extend posts at least 5 inches into sleeve. b. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions; shape and smooth to shed water. Finish and slope top surface of grout to drain water away from post. 5. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than 3/4 inch larger than outside diagonal dimension of post. a. Extend posts at least 5 inches into concrete. b. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Finish and slope top surface of grout to drain water away from post. 6. Space posts uniformly at 6 feet. 3.4 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper -resistant or concealed means. Install ground -set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates. END OF SECTION 32 31 19 02017, HJ/PROJ. #16054.00 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 3231 19 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 32 84 00 - PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary , Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping. 2. Automatic control valves. 3. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Controllers. 6. Boxes for automatic control valves. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lateral Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers and specialties. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water -distribution -system pressure. C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote -control, signaling power -limited circuits. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves. B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated. C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. Lateral Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve. D. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic controller zone. E. Field quality -control reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers, controllers and automatic control valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals. G. Project Record (As -Built) Drawings. H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers that includes a member of the Florida Irrigation Society. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver piping with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's written permission. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Spray Sprinklers: 5 units of each model body. 2. Nozzles and Bubblers: 5 units of each type. 3. All unused nozzles and any other spare parts purchased for this project. 1.10 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Contractor warrants irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects for a period of one year from Final Acceptance by Owner. Fill and Repair depressions. Restore landscape, utilities, structures and site features damaged by settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to premises by caused by defective items. Make repairs within seven (7) days of notification by Owner. B. Replace damaged items with new and identical materials, using methods specified in contract documents or applicable codes. Make replacement at no additional cost to contract price. C. Warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment, and replacements made during warranty period. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21, Class 200. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedules 80. 2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends. C. PVC Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 80. 2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. B. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MANUAL VALVES A. Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements and approval by the Landscape Architect, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by the following: 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Nibco. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80. b. Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1035 kPa). C. Body Material: Bronze B62. d. Non -rising stem. e. End Connections: Threaded. 2.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A. Plastic, Automatic Control Valves: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements and approval by the Landscape Architect, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Description: Molded -plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual -flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 2.5 SPRINKLERS A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at available water pressure. B. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements and approval by the Landscape Architect, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Description: a. Body Material: ABS. b. Nozzle: ABS. C. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. 2.6 CONTROLLERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements and approval by the Landscape Architect, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by the following: 1. Rain Bird Corporation. B. Description: 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station run time is variable from 1 minute up to 6 hours. Include option for manual or automatic operation of each station. 4 independent programs with 6 different start times. Exterior Control Enclosures: Plastic cabinet, with locking cover and two matching keys; include provision for surge protection. a. Mounting: Surface type for wall. 3. Input: 120 VAC t 10%, 60Hz. 4. Output: 25.5 VAC 1A. 5. Timing Device: 365-day calendar, programmable, seasonally -adjustable, with cycle -and - soak feature. a. Manual Operation: One -touch manual start and advance. b. Backups: Non-volatile memory with program storage. C. Electrical Protection: Surge protection, short-circuit protection. 6. Wiring: UL 493, Type OF multiconductor, with solid -copper conductors; insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. a. Feeder -Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers. b. Low -Voltage, Branch -Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color -coded different from feeder -circuit -cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple -cable installation in same trench. C. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring - type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. 2.7 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A. Plastic Boxes: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. C. NewBasis. d. Oldcastle, Inc. e. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. f. Rain Bird Corporation 2. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade. a. Size: As required for valves and service and indicated on drawings. b. Shape: Rectangular unless indicated otherwise. C. Sidewall Material: PE, ABS, or FRP. d. Cover Material: PE, ABS, or FRP. e. Cover Color: Purple for non -potable applications. 1) Lettering: "RECLAIMED," unless indicated otherwise. B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum to 3 inches (75 mm) maximum. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grades, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavement and slabs. C. Drain Sumps in valve boxes: Excavate to 6 inches below the bottom of the valve box. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3 inches (19 to 75 mm). D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 24 inches (900 mm) below finished grade. 2. Lateral Piping: 12 inches (300 mm). 3. Sleeves: 24 inches (600 mm). 3.2 PREPARATION A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval before excavation. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping free of sags and bends. C. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. E. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller pipe connection. F. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or larger pipe connection. G. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774. H. Install expansion loops in control -valve boxes for plastic piping. I. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. J. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F (5 deg C). Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F (5 deg C) before testing. K. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks. L. Install sleeves made of Schedule 80 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Flanged Joints: Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. D. PVC Piping Solvent -Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Automatic Control Valves: Install in valve box with top flush with grade or top of mulch. Wherever possible, install valves and other boxed equipment in mulched planting beds. Allow for mulch depth in setting height. 3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights. C. Locate part -circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 12 inches (100 mm) from walls and 8 inches (67 mm) from other boundaries unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION -CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: Install exterior controllers on wall. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. B. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches (51 mm) below or beside piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas. C. Ground the controller in accordance with applicable codes. D. Install associated sensors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and maintenance. B. Connect wiring between controllers and automatic control valves. 3.9 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic -laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller. 1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. C. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of trenches. See Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for warning tapes. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.11 PROJECT RECORD (AS -BUILT) DRAWINGS A. Document field changes from original design and construction documents. Maintain on -site and separate from original construction documents, one set of documents labeled "Project Field Documents." Keep documents current. Do not cover work until accurate "as -built" information is recorded. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Record pipe network alterations on a daily basis. Record work that is installed differently than shown on construction documents. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each valve box, wire splice box, extra wire box, and any other irrigation equipment box. C. Obtain from Owner's Representative one set of CAD files prior to construction completion. Record on these files the information contained on "Project Record Documents" maintained on - site. Label each sheet "Record Drawing," keeping original sheet numbering. D. Provide "Record Drawings" to Owner's Representative. Completion of Record Drawings is required prior to final construction observation at completion of system installation. 3.12 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal. 3.13 ADJUSTING A. Adjust settings of controllers. B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler lateral. C. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) above, finish grade. 3.14 CLEANING A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. 3.15 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control valves and controllers. 3.16 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. B. Piping in control -valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges or unions instead of joints indicated. C. Underground irrigation main and lateral piping shall be the following: 1. SDR 21, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL D. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: PVC fittings and flex pipe. E. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: Flexible black UV -resistant thermoplastic with threaded ends. END OF SECTION 32 84 00 ©2017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sodding. 2. Turf renovation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading. 3. Division 32 Section "Planting Irrigation" for turf irrigation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. C. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. D. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. E. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in -place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. G. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL H. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project. B. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. D. Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil, existing in -place surface soil and imported or manufactured topsoil. E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment. 1. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 3. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. 4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil -Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil -testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant - nutrient content of the soil. 1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil -testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. 3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. C. Bulk Materials: Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil -bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: Sodded Turf: 30 days after date of Substantial Completion. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 TURFGRASS SOD A. Turfgrass Sod: Complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Species: 1. Floratam St Augustine Grass 2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve. C. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. 2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed -sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water -absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. 2.4 FERTILIZERS A. Slow -Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water -insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil -testing laboratory. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.5 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting Soil: Existing, surface topsoil retained during excavation process and stockpiled on - site. Verify suitability of existing surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Supplement with imported topsoil soil when quantities are insufficient. 2. Mix existing, surface topsoil with the following soil amendments.and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Muck Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4. b. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. C. Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. d. Volume of Sand per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. e. Weight of Slow -Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. 2.6 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Post -Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non -Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Install erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm). Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. C. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface -soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod. 3.5 TURF RENOVATION A. Renovate existing turf. B. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required. 2. Install new planting soil as required. C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil. D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil. E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf. F. Remove weeds before sodding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre -emergence herbicides. G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. J. Apply sod as required for new turf. K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3.6 TURF MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf -watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of sod. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: Mow grass to a height of 2 to 3 inches (50 to 75 mm). D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1/2 Ib/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) to turf area. 3.7 SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well -rooted, even - colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. 3.8 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL B. Post -Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non -Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already -germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.9 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. C. Remove nondegradable erosion -control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION 32 92 00 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Planting soils. 3. Tree stabilization. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section 'Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. 3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 4. Division 32 Section 'Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, and erosion -control materials. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices." 1. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, 2015 Edition for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. C. Balled and Potted Stock: Not used, D. Bare -Root Stock: Not used. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 1 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL E. Container -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted plants grown in a container, with a well - established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, 2015 Edition, for type and size of plant required. F. Fabric Bag -Grown Stock: Not used. G. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. H. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. I. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. K. Planting Area: Areas to be planted. L. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in -place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. M. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation. N. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. O. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface. P. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. Q. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. R. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 2 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the Project. 3. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: Organic Mulch: 1-pint (0.5-liter volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. E. Material Test Reports: For existing surface topsoil and imported or manufactured topsoil. F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods. G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of FNGLA and be an FNGLA Certified Landscape Contractor. 2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil -Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 3 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil -testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant -nutrient content of the soil. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. The soil -testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling; with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, 2015 Edition. E. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field -grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above the root flare for larger sizes. 2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials thirty days in advance of delivery to site. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable. B. Bulk Materials: ©2017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 4 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil -bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. D. Handle planting stock by root ball. E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting. Water root systems of plants stored on -site deeply and thoroughly with a fine -mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly -wet condition. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify General Contractor no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of each service or utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without General Contractor's written permission. C. Planting Restrictions: Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. E. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 5 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. C. Faulty performance of tree stabilization. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. C. Annuals: Three months. 3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. C. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. Maintenance Period: 30 days after date of Substantial Completion. B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: 30 days after date of Substantial Completion. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 6 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery -grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, 2015 Edition; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well -shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected. 2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, 2015 Edition, for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Root -Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. D. Labeling: Label all trees, except palms, of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings. E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting. 2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve. C. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 7 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed -sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water -absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. 2.4 FERTILIZERS A. Slow -Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water -insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil -testing laboratory. 2.5 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting Soil Option 1: Existing, surface topsoil retained during excavation process and stockpiled on -site. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. 2. Mix existing, surface topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Muck Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4. b. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. C. Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. d. Volume of Sand per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. e. Weight of Slow -Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. B. Planting Soil Option 2: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well -drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs, or marshes. 1. Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes; grubs; or other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease -causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air -filled pore space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis. 2. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 8 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL a. Ratio of Loose Muck Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4. b. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. C. Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. d. Volume of Sand per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. e. Weight of Slow -Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As called for in the soil test report. 3. 2.6 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of the following: 1. Type1: 100% Eucalyptus for general use. 2. Type 2: Pine straw for Trachelospermum asiaticum beds. 2.7 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre -Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non -Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post -Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non -Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 2.8 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS A. See drawings. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Burlap: Non -synthetic, biodegradable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 9 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. 3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45- degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped and container -grown stock. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 10 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 2. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. 3. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 4. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 5. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 6. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel. B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil with amendments. C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- (150-mm-) diameter holes, 24 inches (600 mm) apart, into free -draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free - draining material. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top -most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements. B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. Set container -grown stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 11 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING A. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. B. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. 3.7 TREE STABILIZATION A. See drawings. 3.8 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing. B. Use planting soil for backfill. C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes. E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.9 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees and Tree -like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 4-inch (100-mm) average thickness, with 36-inch (900-mm) radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 mm) of trunks or stems. 2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 4-inch (100-mm) average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches (300 mm) beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench and 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 12 CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS NEW CITY HALL over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems. 3.10 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree -stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents. 3.11 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Pre -Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non -Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground - cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas. C. Post -Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non -Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already -germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. 3.13 DISPOSAL A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 32 93 00 02017, HJ PROJ. #16054.00 PLANTS 32 93 00 - 13